in italy a company that does not report under ifrss must still present treasury shar 611489

In Italy, a company that does not report under IFRSs must still present treasury shares as assets. In addition, a purchase of own shares requires a transfer from reserves to an distributable “treasury stock” reserve within equity. Once treasury shares are resold or retired, such a reserve becomes free to the extent of the excess of purchase value over par value per share, and is reversed to the equity reserves from which it was originally sourced. On first-time adoption of IFRSs, such companies have to reclassify treasury stock from asset to equity and to reverse the treasury stock reserve to the equity reserves from which it was originally sourced or to the beginning balance of retained earnings in the opening IFRS statement of financial position.

most of the debate on pension accounting is related to alternative recognition metho 611508

Most of the debate on pension accounting is related to alternative recognition methods. Deferred recognition is the accounting model for pensions under pre-2011 IAS 19. The pre-2007 version of IAS 19 adopted an election of immediate recognition in income directly in equity, as opposed to net income. Pre-2011 IAS 19 uses a model that recognizes certain gains and losses in other comprehensive income but with immediate transfer to retained earnings. IAS 19 (2011) goes to immediate recognition in profit or loss but recognition of the measurement component in other comprehensive income with no subsequent recycling. Topic 715 (FASB Statement No. 158) continues the past practice of delaying recognition of actuarial gains and losses as a component of net periodic benefit cost but recognizes the entire funded status of a plan in other comprehensive income.

a french foreign private issuer replied to the sec staff 611511

A French foreign private issuer replied to the SEC Staff, in the context of the review of Form 20-F for the fiscal year ended December 31, 2005 containing financial statements prepared for the first time on the basis of IFRSs. The company applied the treatment under FASB Statement No. 130 (based on which prior period adjustments that would affect other comprehensive income must not be displayed in comprehensive income for the period as they recast the comprehensive income of prior periods) to the IFRS financial report. At the time of these letters, the 2007 Revision of IAS 1 was not yet issued.

for example on initial recognition a temporary difference may exist if the tax basis 611519

For example, on initial recognition a temporary difference may exist if the tax basis of the convertible debt includes the entire amount of the instrument, while split accounting requires the recognition of both a liability and an equity component. An entity must recognize a deferred tax liability at the time of the transaction because the initial recognition of the instrument affects taxable profit or loss and therefore the transaction does not fall within the IAS 12 exception for recognition of deferred taxation on initial recognition of an asset or liability. From the perspective of the income statement, the deferred tax liability at the end of each period corresponds to the aggregate income tax deduction on the difference between the nominal interest expense and the imputed interest expense for the remaining life of the instrument.

the exemption has been applied to refinery assets located in eastern canada and cert 611663

Suncor Energy Inc (2011)

Notes to the consolidated financial statements [extract]

Note 6. First-Time Adoption of IFRS [extract]

Explanation of Significant Adjustments [extract]

(9) Fair Value as Deemed Cost [extract]

The company has applied the IFRS 1 election to record certain assets of property, plant and equipment at fair value on the Transition Date. The exemption has been applied to refinery assets located in Eastern Canada and certain natural gas assets in Western Canada. When estimating fair value, market information for similar assets was used, and where market information was not available, management relied on internally generated cash flow models using discount rates specific to the asset and long-term forecasts of commodity prices and refining margins. The aggregate of these fair values was $1.370 billion, resulting in a reduction of the carrying amount of property, plant and equipment as at January 1, 2010. Under Previous GAAP, impairment losses were recorded in the third quarter of 2010 for certain of these natural gas properties. There were no impairment losses recognized during 2010 under IFRS, as these properties were adjusted to fair value at the Transition Date. The impacts on the financial statements were as follows:

($ millions)

As at and for the year
ended Dec 31, 2010

Property, plant and equipment, net

(527)

Retained earnings

(527)

Depreciation, depletion, amortization and impairment

(379)

finally a first time adopter that applies the deemed cost exemption for oil and gas 611665

Deemed cost of property, plant and equipment

Entity A used to revalue items of property, plant and equipment to fair value under its previous GAAP, but changed its accounting policy on 1 January 2006 when it adopted a different accounting policy. Under that accounting policy, Entity A did not depreciate the asset and only recognized the maintenance costs as an expense. Entity A”s date of transition to IFRSs is 1 January 2012.

In its balance sheet under previous GAAP the carrying amount of the asset is £80 at the date of transition to IFRSs, which is equal to the last revaluation. Entity A can use the last revalued amount as the deemed cost of the asset on 1 January 2006. However, Entity A will need to apply IAS 16 to the period after 1 January 2006 because the accounting policy under its previous GAAP is not permitted under IFRSs. Assuming that the economic life of the asset is 40 years and that the residual value is nil, Entity A would account for the asset at £68 in its opening IFRS statement of financial position, which represents the deemed cost minus 6 years of depreciation.

C Summary

At its date of transition to IFRSs, a first-time adopter is allowed under IFRS 1 to measure each item of property, plant and equipment, investment properties and intangible assets at an amount based on:

  • historical cost determined in accordance with IAS 16, IAS 38 and IAS 40;
  • fair value at the date of transition to IFRSs;
  • a previous GAAP revaluation amount that is equal to:
    • fair value at the date of revaluation;
    • cost adjusted for changes in a general or specific index; or
    • an event-driven fair value, for example, at the date of an initial public offering or privatization.
  • in the case of an item acquired in a business combination:
    • carrying amount under previous GAAP immediately after acquisition; or
    • if the item was not recognised under previous GAAP, the carrying amount on the basis that IFRSs would require in the separate balance sheet of the acquiree.
  • in the case of oil and gas assets at deemed cost ;or
  • in the case of assets used or previously used in operations subject to rate regulation .

The fact that IFRS 1 offers so many different bases for measurement does not disturb the IASB as it reasons that ‘cost is generally equivalent to fair value at the date of acquisition. Therefore, the use of fair value as the deemed cost of an asset means that an entity will report the same cost data as if it had acquired an asset with the same remaining service potential at the date of transition to IFRSs. If there is any lack of comparability, it arises from the aggregation of costs incurred at different dates, rather than from the targeted use of fair value as deemed cost for some assets. The Board regarded this approach as justified to solve the unique problem of introducing IFRSs in a cost-effective way without damaging transparency. [IFRS 1.BC43]. Although this is valid, it still means that an individual first-time adopter can greatly influence its future reported performance by carefully selecting a first-time adoption policy for the valuation of its assets. Users of the financial statements of a first-time adopter should therefore be mindful that historical trends under the previous GAAP might no longer be present in an entity”s IFRS financial statements.

5.5.2 Event-driven fair value measurement as deemed cost

A first-time adopter may use fair value measurements that arose from an event such as a privatisation or initial public offering as deemed cost for IFRSs at the date of that measurement. [IFRS 1 Appendix D8].

IFRS 1 describes these revaluations as ‘deemed cost in accordance with previous GAAP. Therefore, to the extent that they related to an event that occurred prior to its date of transition or during the comparative period presented under IFRS, they can only be used as the basis for deemed cost if they were recognised in the first-time adopter”s previous GAAP financial statements. See below for an extension of the scope of this deemed cost exemption to events that occurred subsequent to the first-time adopter”s date of transition to IFRSs but during the period covered by the first IFRS financial statements.

The ‘fair value or revaluation as deemed cost exemption discussed at above, only applies to items of property, plant and equipment, investment property and certain intangible assets. [IFRS 1 Appendix D5-7]. The event-driven deemed cost exemption is broader in scope because it states when a first-time adopter ‘established a deemed cost in accordance with previous GAAP for some or all of its assets and liabilities [emphasis added] by measuring them at their fair value at one particular date … It may use such event-driven fair value measurements as deemed cost for IFRSs at the date of that measurement. [IFRS 1 Appendix D8, IFRS 1.BC46].

There are two important limitations in the scope of this exemption:

  • While it applies, in principle, to all assets and liabilities of an entity, it does not override the recognition criteria in IFRSs. [IFRS 1.10]. Consequently, a first-time adopter should derecognise goodwill, assets (e.g. certain intangible assets such as brand names and research) and liabilities that do not qualify for recognition under IFRSs in the balance sheet of the entity; and
  • The exemption cannot be used if the event-driven revaluation did not result in a remeasurement to full fair value (i.e. it cannot be used in the case of a partial step-up towards fair value).

Finally, although a first-time adopter may use the event-driven fair value measurements as deemed cost for any asset or liability, it does not have to use them for all assets and liabilities. [IFRS 1 Appendix D8].

A ‘Push down accounting

Under some previous GAAPs an entity may have prepared its financial statements using ‘push down accounting, that is, the carrying amount of its assets and liabilities is based on their fair value at the date it became a subsidiary of its parent. If such a subsidiary subsequently adopts IFRSs, it will often require a very significant effort to determine the carrying amount of those assets and liabilities on a historical costs basis at the date of transition.

The event-driven deemed cost exemption applies to events ‘such as a privatisation or initial public offering. [IFRS 1 Appendix D8]. This list of events is clearly not meant to be exhaustive, but rather describes events that result in re-measurement of some or all assets and liabilities at their fair value. An acquisition that results in an entity becoming a subsidiary is a change of control event similar to a privatisation or an initial public offering. In our view, the application of ‘push down accounting results in event-driven fair value measurements that may be used as deemed cost for IFRSs at the date of that measurement.

The exemption can only be used if ‘push down accounting resulted in recognising assets and liabilities at their fair value. For example, previous GAAP may not have required remeasurement to full fair value in the case of a partial acquisition or a step-acquisition, or if there was a bargain purchase that was allocated, for example, to reduce the fair values of long-lived assets.

B ‘Fresh start accounting

Some previous GAAPs require an entity that emerges from bankruptcy to apply ‘fresh start accounting, which involves recognition of assets and liabilities at their fair value at that date.

In our view, the application of ‘fresh start accounting results in an event-driven fair value measurement that may be used as deemed cost for IFRSs at the date of that measurement. [IFRS 1 Appendix D8]. The use of the exemption is limited to instances that resulted in the recognition of the related assets and liabilities at their full fair value (i.e. it cannot be used in the case of a partial step-up towards fair value).

Exemption for event-driven revaluations after the date of transition

The event-driven exemption includes events whose measurement date is after the date of transition to IFRSs but during the periods covered by the first IFRS financial statements. The ‘event-driven fair value measurements may be used as deemed cost when the event occurs. An entity shall recognise the resulting adjustments directly in retained earnings (or if appropriate, another category of equity) at the measurement date. [IFRS 1 Appendix D8(b)].

The Board explicitly considered whether or not to allow a first-time adopter that uses a revaluation subsequent to the date of transition to ‘work back the deemed cost on the date of transition to IFRSs using the revaluation amounts subsequently obtained on the date of measurement, adjusted to exclude any depreciation, amortisation or impairment between the date of transition to IFRSs and the date of that measurement. [IFRS 1.BC46B]. The Board rejected this approach ‘because making such adjustment would require hindsight and the computed carrying amounts on the date of transition to IFRSs would be neither the historical costs of the revalued assets nor their fair values on that date. [IFRS 1 Appendix D8B, BC46B]. This restriction seems to limit the usefulness of the exemption for first time adopters; however, it should provide relief from the need to keep two sets of books subsequent to the event.

5.5.3 Deemed cost for oil and gas assets

It is common practice in some countries to account for exploration and development costs for properties in development or production in cost centres that include all properties in a large geographical area, e.g. under the ‘full cost accounting method. However, this method of accounting generally uses a unit of account that is much larger than is acceptable under IFRSs. Applying IFRSs fully retrospectively would pose significant problems for first-time adopters because it would also require amortisation ‘to be calculated (on a unit of production basis) for each year, using a reserves base that has changed over time because of changes in factors such as geological understanding and prices for oil and gas. In many cases, particularly for older assets, this information may not be available. [IFRS 1.BC47A]. Even when such information is available the effort and cost to determine the opening balances at the date of transition would usually be very high.

For these entities, use of the fair value or revaluation as deemed cost exemption , however, was not considered to be suitable because: [IFRS 1.BC47B]

‘…Determining the fair value of oil and gas assets is a complex process that begins with the difficult task of estimating the volume of reserves and resources. When the fair value amounts must be audited, determining significant inputs to the estimates generally requires the use of qualified external experts. For entities with many oil and gas assets, the use of this fair value as deemed cost alternative would not meet the Board”s stated intention of avoiding excessive cost …

The IASB, therefore, decided to grant an exemption for first-time adopters that accounted under their previous GAAP for ‘exploration and development costs for oil and gas properties in the development or production phases … in cost centres that include all properties in a large geographical area. [IFRS 1 Appendix D8A]. Under the exemption, a first-time adopter may elect to measure oil and gas assets at the date of transition to IFRSs on the following basis: [IFRS 1 Appendix D8A]

(a) exploration and evaluation assets at the amount determined under the entity”s previous GAAP; and

(b) assets in the development or production phases at the amount determined for the cost centre under the entity”s previous GAAP. This amount should be allocated to the cost centre”s underlying assets pro rata using reserve volumes or reserve values as of that date.

For this purpose, oil and gas assets comprise only those assets used in the exploration, evaluation, development or production of oil and gas.

A first-time adopter that uses the exemption under (b) should disclose that fact and the basis on which carrying amounts determined under previous GAAP were allocated. [IFRS 1.31A].

To avoid the use of deemed costs resulting in an oil and gas asset being measured at more than its recoverable amount, the Board also decided that oil and gas assets that were valued using this exemption should be tested for impairment at the date of transition to IFRSs as follows: [IFRS 1 Appendix D8A]

  • exploration and evaluation assets should be tested for impairment under IFRS 6; and
  • assets in the development and production phases should be tested for impairment under IAS 36.

The deemed cost amounts should be reduced to take account of any impairment charge.

Finally, a first-time adopter that applies the deemed cost exemption for oil and gas assets should also apply the IFRIC 1 – Changes in Existing Decommissioning, Restoration and Similar Liabilities – exemption for oil and gas assets at deemed cost.

the company elected under ifrs 1 to deem the canadian gaap carrying value of its oil 611667

Zargon Oil & Gas Ltd. (2011)

Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements [extract]

27 Reconciliation of Transition from Canadian GAAP to IFRS [extract]

Explanatory notes [extract]

(b) The Company elected under IFRS 1 to deem the Canadian GAAP carrying value of its oil and gas assets accounted for under the full cost method as at January 1, 2010 as their deemed cost under IFRS as at that date. As such, the Canadian GAAP full cost pool was reallocated upon transition to IFRS and the 2010 comparatives were restated to reflect the new IFRS accounting policies as follows:

i. In accordance with IAS 16, IAS 38 and IFRS 6 on January 1, 2010 the Company reallocated costs of $24.37 million relating to unproved properties from property, plant and equipment to exploration and evaluation assets.

ii. Under Canadian GAAP, all costs incurred prior to having obtained licence rights and lease expiries were included within property, plant and equipment. Under IFRS, such expenditures are expensed as incurred. There was no impact on adoption of IFRS due to the full cost as deemed cost exemption. However, the comparative 2010 balances were restated at December 31, 2010 resulting in a reduction in property, plant and equipment and retained earnings of $2.81 million, and an increase in exploration and evaluation expenses for the year of the same amounts.

iii. The remaining full cost pool was allocated to the developed and producing assets pro rata using reserve values.

iv. Under IFRS, impairment tests must be performed at a more lower reporting level than was required under Canadian GAAP. The Canadian GAAP “ceiling test” incorporated a 2-step approach for testing impairment, while IFRS uses a 1-step approach. Under Canadian GAAP, a discounted cash flow analysis was not required if the undiscounted cash flows from proved reserves exceeded the carrying amount (step 1). If the carrying amount exceeded the undiscounted future cash flows, then a prescribed discounted cash flow test was performed (step 2). Under IFRS, impairment testing is based on discounted cash flows and is calculated at the CGU level. Impairment tests are required to be performed at the transition date, and as at January 1, 2010 no impairment was identified. At December 31, 2010 an impairment test was performed and four of the Company”s CGUs were found to have impairment.

entities that hold items of property plant and equipment or intangible assets that a 611668

Deemed cost for assets used in operations subject to rate regulation

Entities that hold items of property, plant and equipment or intangible assets that are used, or were previously used, in operations subject to rate regulation might have capitalised, as part of the carrying amount, amounts that do not qualify for capitalisation in accordance with IFRSs. For example, when setting rates, regulators often permit entities to capitalise, an allowance for the cost of financing the asset”s acquisition, construction or production. This allowance typically includes an imputed cost of equity. IFRSs do not permit an entity to capitalise an imputed cost of equity. [IFRS 1.BC47F]. The IASB decided to permit a first-time adopter with operations subject to rate regulations to elect to use the previous GAAP carrying amount of such an item at the date of transition to IFRSs as deemed cost. [IFRS 1 Appendix D8B]. In the Board”s view, this exemption is consistent with other exemptions in IFRS 1 in that it ‘avoids excessive cost while meeting the objectives of the IFRS. [IFRS 1.BC47I].

Operations are subject to rate regulation if they provide goods or services to customers at prices (i.e. rates) established by an authorised body empowered to establish rates that bind the customers and that are designed to recover the specific costs the entity incurs in providing the regulated goods or services and to earn a specified return. The specified return could be a minimum or range and need not be a fixed or guaranteed return. [IFRS 1 Appendix D8B].

Without this exemption, a first-time adopter with operations subject to rate regulations would have had either to restate those items retrospectively to remove the non-qualifying amounts, or to use fair value as deemed cost both alternatives, the Board reasoned, pose significant practical challenges and the cost of which can outweigh the benefits. [IFRS 1.BC47G]. Typically, once amounts are included in the total cost of an item of property, plant and equipment, they are no longer tracked separately. Therefore, their removal would require historical information that, given the age of some of the assets involved, is probably no longer available and would be difficult to estimate. For many of these assets, it may be impractical to use the fair value exemption as such information may not be readily available.

therefore a first time adopter is required to classify leases as operating or financ 611670

IFRS 1 does not include any specific exemption from the retrospective application of IAS 17 Leases and SIC-15 Operating Leases Incentives. Therefore, a first-time adopter is required to classify leases as operating or finance leases under IAS 17 based on the circumstances existing at the inception of the lease and not those existing at the date of transition to IFRSs. [IFRS 1.IG14]. However, if ‘at any time the lessee and the lessor agree to change the provisions of the lease, other than by renewing the lease, in a manner that would have resulted in a different classification of the lease … if the changed terms had been in effect at the inception of the lease, the revised agreement is regarded as a new agreement over its term. [IAS 17.13]. In other words, an entity classifies a lease based on the lease terms that are in force at its date of transition to IFRSs; the lease classification is not based on lease terms that are no longer in force.

determining whether an arrangement contains a lease contains specific transitional p 611671

Determining whether an Arrangement contains a Lease – contains specific transitional provisions for existing IFRS-reporting entities that address the practical difficulties of going back potentially many years and making a meaningful assessment of whether the arrangement satisfied the criteria at that time. First-time adopters may apply the same transitional provisions, which allow them to apply IFRIC 4 to arrangements existing at their date of transition on the basis of facts and circumstances existing at that date. [IFRS 1 Appendix D9]. The example below based on the implementation guidance in IFRS 1 illustrates this exemption. [IFRS 1 IG Example 202].

entity a presents its consolidated first ifrs financial statements in 2008 its forei 611673

Parent adopts IFRSs before subsidiary

Entity A presents its (consolidated) first IFRS financial statements in 2008. Its foreign subsidiary B, wholly owned by Entity A since formation, prepares information under IFRSs for internal consolidation purposes from that date, but Subsidiary B will not present its first IFRS financial statements until 2013.

If Subsidiary B applies option (a), the carrying amounts of its assets and liabilities are the same in both its opening IFRS statement of financial position at 1 January 2012 and Entity A”s consolidated balance sheet (except for adjustments for consolidation procedures) and are based on Entity A”s date of transition.

Alternatively, Subsidiary B may apply option (b) and measure all its assets or liabilities based on its own date of transition to IFRSs (1 January 2012). However, the fact that Subsidiary B becomes a first-time adopter in 2013 does not change the carrying amounts of its assets and liabilities in Entity A”s consolidated financial statements.

Under option (b) a subsidiary would prepare its own IFRS financial statements, completely ignoring the IFRS reports that its parent uses in preparing its consolidated financial statements.

Under option (a) the numbers in a subsidiary”s IFRS financial statements will be as close to those used by its parent as possible. However, differences other than those arising from business combinations will still exist in many cases, for example:

  • a subsidiary may have hedged an exposure by entering into a transaction with a fellow subsidiary. Such transaction could qualify for hedge accounting in the subsidiary”s own financial statements but not in the parent”s consolidated financial statements; or
  • a pension plan may have to be classified as a defined contribution plan from the subsidiary”s point of view, but is accounted for as a defined benefit plan in the parent”s consolidated financial statements.

The IASB seems content with the fact that the exemption will ease some practical problems, [IFRS 1.BC62], though it will rarely succeed in achieving more than a moderate reduction of the number of reconciling differences between a subsidiary”s own reporting and the numbers used by its parent.

More importantly, the choice of option (a) prevents the subsidiary from electing to apply all the other voluntary exemptions offered by IFRS 1, since the parent had already made the choices for the group at its date of adoption. Therefore, option (a) may not be appropriate for a subsidiary that prefers to use a different exemption (i.e. fair value as deemed cost) for property, plant and equipment due, for example, to a tax reporting advantage. Also, application of option (a) would be more difficult when a parent and its subsidiary have different financial years. In that case, IFRS 1 would seem to require the IFRS information for the subsidiary to be based on the parent”s date of transition to IFRSs, which may not even coincide with an interim reporting date of the subsidiary; the same applies to any joint venture or associate.

A subsidiary may become a first-time adopter later than its parent, because it previously prepared a reporting package under IFRSs for consolidation purposes but did not present a full set of financial statements under IFRSs. The above election may be ‘relevant not only when a subsidiary”s reporting package complies fully with the recognition and measurement requirements of IFRSs, but also when it is adjusted centrally for matters such as review of events after the reporting period and central allocation of pension costs. [IFRS 1.IG31]. Adjustments made centrally to an unpublished reporting package are not considered to be corrections of errors for the purposes of the disclosure requirements in IFRS 1. However, a subsidiary is not permitted to ignore misstatements that are immaterial to the consolidated financial statements of its parent but material to its own financial statements.

If a subsidiary was acquired after the parent”s date of transition to IFRSs then it cannot apply option (a) because there are no carrying amounts included in the parent”s consolidated financial statements, based on the parent”s date of transition. Therefore, the subsidiary is unable to use the values recognised in the group accounts when it was acquired.

The exemption is also available to associates and joint ventures. This means that in many cases an associate or joint venture that wants to apply option (a) will need to choose which shareholder it considers its ‘parent for IFRS 1 purposes and determine the IFRS carrying amount of its assets and liabilities by reference to that parent”s date of transition to IFRSs.

Parent becomes a first-time adopter later than its subsidiary

If an entity becomes a first-time adopter later than its subsidiary the entity should in its consolidated financial statements, measure the subsidiary”s assets and liabilities at the carrying amounts that are in the subsidiary”s financial statements, after adjusting for consolidation and for the effects of the business combination in which the entity acquired the subsidiary. The same applies for associates or joint venture, substituting equity accounting adjustments. [IFRS 1 Appendix D17].

Unlike other first-time adoption exemptions, this exemption does not offer a choice between different accounting alternatives. In fact, while a subsidiary that adopts IFRS later than its parent can choose to prepare its first IFRS financial statements by reference to its own date of transition to IFRSs or that of its parent, the parent itself must use the IFRS measurements already used in the subsidiary”s financial statements, adjusted as appropriate for consolidation procedures and the effects of the business combination in which it acquired the subsidiary. [IFRS 1.BC63]. This exemption does not preclude the parent from adjusting the subsidiary”s assets and liabilities for a different accounting policy, e.g. cost or revaluation for accounting for property, plant and equipment. The exemption, however, limits the choice of exemptions (e.g. the deemed cost exemption) with respect to the accounts of the subsidiary in the transition date consolidated accounts.

The following example, which is based on the guidance on implementation of IFRS 1, illustrates how an entity should apply these requirements.

the promoters of proposed prosperity ltd purchased a running business on 1 april 200 618328

The promoters of proposed Prosperity Ltd. purchased a running business on 1 April 2009 from Mr. Alphonse and was incorporated on 1 August 2009. The combined P&L A/c of the company prior to and after the date of incorporation is as under:

Particulars

Particulars

To Rent, Rates,

36,000

By Gross Profit

4,50,000

Insurance

By Discount

18,000

Electricity &

Received from

Salaries

Creditors

To Director”s

10,800

Sitting Fees

To Preliminary

14,700

Expenses

To Carriage

16,500

Outwards and

Selling Expenses

To Interest Paid to

30,000

Vendors

To Net Profit

3,60,000

4,68,000

4,68,000

Further information:

  1. Sales up to 31 July 2009 were Rs.9,00,000 out of total sales of Rs.45,00,000 of the year.
  2. Purchases up to 31 July 2009 were Rs.9,00,000 out of the total purchases of Rs.27,00,000.
  3. Interest paid to vendors on 1 February 2010 (@12% p.a. on Rs.3,00,000 being purchase consideration).

From the above information, prepare P&L A/c for the year ended 31 March 2010, showing the profit earned prior to and after incorporation and also show the transfer of the same to the appropriate accounts.

calculate the labour turnover by applying three methods 618345

Raghavendra Metal Company gives the following information:

No. of employees at the beginning of the year

200

No. of employees at the end of the year

240

No. of employees resigned

20

No. of employees discharged

5

No. of employees replaced

18

Calculate the labour turnover by applying three methods

the time not booked was because of power failure allocate his weekly wages to the di 618346

A machinist employed in a factory which works for six days in a week is paid Rs. 50 per day. Plus DA at 60% of the basic wages. He is allowed to take 30 minutes off for lunch during his 8-hour shift. During a week, his card showed that his time was chargeable to:

Job No. 1

10 hours

Job No. 2

15 hours

Job No. 3

12 hours

The time not booked was because of power failure. Allocate his weekly wages to the different jobs and other appropriate accounts.

from the following particulars find the amount of cash required for the payment of w 618350

From the following particulars, find the amount of cash required for the payment of wages in a factory for a particular month:

(a) Normal wages

20,500

(b) Overtime wages

2,200

(c) Leave wages

1,700

(d) Deduction of employee’s share to ESI

500

(e) Deduction of employee’s contribution to PF

1,600

(f) House rent is to be recovered from 30 employees @ Rs. 300 per month

assume that the employee worked for 9 hours a day without any overtime 618368

Calculate the amount of wages and bonus earned by this worker under Halsey–Weir plan:

Name

Surrender

Job commenced

Monday 23 September 8 a.m.

Job finished

Saturday 28 September 1 p.m.

Quantity of pieces of work given out

= 638

Quantity of pieces of work passed

= 600

Worker’s rate

= 50 paise per hour

Time allowed

= 10 pieces per hour

Bonus

= 30% of time saved

Assume that the employee worked for 9 hours a day without any overtime.

hourly rate of wages re 1 per hour a da 50 paise per hour worked 618375

Calculate the earnings of a worker under the following methods:

Time-rate method

Piece-rate method

Halsey plan

Rowan plan

Information given:

Standard time 30 hours

Time taken 20 hours

Hourly rate of wages Re 1. per hour + a DA @ 50 paise per hour worked.

differential piece rate 80 of piece rate when the output is below standard and 120 w 618376

From the following particulars, work out the earnings for the week of a worker under

  1. Straight piece rate
  2. Differential piece rate
  3. Halsey premium system
  4. Rowan system

Number of working hours per week = 48

Wage per hour = Rs. 3.75

Normal time per piece = 20 minutes

Rate per piece = Rs. 1.50

Normal output per week = 120 pieces

Actual output for the week = 150 pieces

Differential piece rate: 80% of piece rate when the output is below standard and 120% when above standard.

prepare journal entries general ledgers income statement and balance sheet 611398

Bond details:

Face value

100

Issue price

100

Maturity

15-Dec-X6

Rate of interest

4.00%

Currency

USD

Coupon dates (until maturity)

Coupon date

Settle date

Previous coupon

15-June-X2

18-June-X2

Coupon date-1

15-Dec-X3

18-Dec-X3

Coupon date-2

15-June-X3

18-June-X3

Coupon date-3

15-Dec-X4

18-Dec-X4

Coupon date-4

15-June-X4

18-June-X4

Coupon date-5

15-Dec-X5

18-Dec-X5

Coupon date-6

15-June-X5

18-June-X5

Coupon date-7

15-Dec-X6

18-Dec-X6

Prepare journal entries, general ledgers, income statement, and balance sheet.

a company wishes to evaluation a division which has the following profit and loss ac 611404

A company wishes to evaluation a division which has the following profit and loss account and balance sheet:

Profit and loss account

£000

Sales

500

Gross profit

200

Other costs

(80)

Net profit

120

Balance sheet

£000

Fixed assets

750

Current assets

350

Current liabilities

(450)

Net assets

650

What is the residual income for the division if the company has a cost of capital of 18%?

A £3000

B £21 600

C £83 000

D £117 000

bollon uses residual income to appraise its division using a cost of capital of 10 611405

Bollon uses residual income to appraise its division using a cost of capital of 10%. It gives the managers of these division considerable autonomy although it retains the cash control function at head office.

The following information was available for one of the divisions:

Net profit after tax £’000

Profit before interest and tax £’000

Divisional net assets £’000

Cash/ (overdraft)

£’000

Division 1

47

69

104

(21)

A £36 600

B £56 500

C £58 600

D £60 700

division q makes a single product information for the division for the year just end 611406

Division Q makes a single product. Information for the division for the year just ended it:

Sales

30 000 units

Fixed costs

£487 000

Depreciation

£247 500

Residual income

£47 200

Net asset

£1 250 000

Head office assesses divisional performance by the residual income achieved. It uses a cost of capital of 12% a year.

Division Q’s average contribution per unit was

A £14.82

B £22.81

C £28.06

D £31.06

E £32.81

a company has obtained the following information regarding costs and revenue for the 611407

Flexible budgets and variance analysis

A company has obtained the following information regarding costs and revenue for the past financial year:

Original budget:

Sales

10 000 units

Production

12 000 units

Standard cost per unit:

£

Direct materials

5

Direct labour

9

Fixed production overheads

8

22

30

Selling price

Actual result:

Sales

9750 units

Revenue

£325 000

Production

11 000 units

Material cost

£65 000

Labour cost

£ 100 000

Fixed production overheads

£95 000

There were no opening stocks.

Required:

(a) Produce a flexed budget statement showing the flexed budget and actual result. Calculate the variances between the actual and flexed figures for the following:

  • Sales;
  • Materials;
  • Labour; and
  • Fixed production overhead.

(b) Explain briefly how the sales and materials variances calculated in (a) may have arisen.

fixed and flexible budgets 611408

Fixed and flexible budgets

(a) Explain what is meant by the terms ‘fixed budget’ and ‘flexible budget’, and state the main objective of preparing flexible budgets.

(b) (i) prepare a flexible budget for 20X5 for the overhead expenses of a production department at the activity levels of 80%, 90% and 100% using the information listed below.

  1. The direct labour hourly rate is expected to be £3.75.
  2. 100% activity represents 60 000 direct labour hours.
  3. Variable costs:

Indirect labour

£0.75 per direct labour hour

Consumable supplie

£0.375 per direct labour hour

Canteen and other welfare services

6% of direct and indirect labour costs

  1. Semi-variable cost are expected to correlate with the direct labour hours in the same manner as for the last five years, which was:

Year

Direct labour

Semi-variable costs (£)

20X0

64 000

20 800

20X1

59 000

19 800

20X2

53 000

18 600

20X3

49 000

17 800

20X4

40 000

16 000

(estimate)

(estimate)

  1. Fixed cost:

(£)

Depreciation

18 000

Maintenance

10 000

Insurance

4 000

Rates

15 000

Management salaries

25 000

  1. Inflation is to be ignored.

(i) Calculate the budgets cost allowance for 20X5 assuming that 57 000 direct labour hours are worked.

comments on a performance report 611409

Comments on a performance report

The victoria Hospital is located in a holiday resort that attracts visitors to such an extent the population of the area is trebled for the summer months of June. July and August. From past experience, this influx of visitors doubles the activity of the hospital these months. The annual budget for the hospital’s laundry department is broken down into four quarters, namely April-June, July-September, October-December and January-March, by dividing the annual budgeted figures by four. The budgeting work has been done for the current year by the secretary of the hospital by the Hospital Authority that management information for control purposes needs to be improved, and have been recruited to help to introduce a system of responsibility accounting.

You are required, from the information gives, to:

(a) Comment on the way in which the quarterly budgets have been prepared and to suggest improvements that could be introduced when preparing the budgets for 2001/2002;

(b) State what information you would like to flow from the actual against budget comparison (not that calculated figures are not required);

(c) State the amendments that would be needed to the current practice of budgeting and reporting to enable the report shown below to be used as a measure of the efficiency of the laundry manager.

Victoria Hospital-Laundry department Report for quarter ended 30 September 2000

Patients days

9 000

12 000

Weight processed (kg)

180 000

240 000

(£)

(£)

Costs:

Wages

8 800

12 320

Overtime premium

1 400

2 100

Detergents and other supplies

1 800

2 700

Water, water softening and heating

2 000

2 500

Maintenance

1 000

1 500

Depreciation of plant

2 000

2 000

Manager’s salary

1 250

1 500

Overhead, apportioned:

For occupancy

4 000

4 250

For administration

5 000

5 750

flexible budgets and the motivational role of budgets 611410

Flexible budgets and the motivational role of budgets

Club Atlantic is an all-weather holiday complex providing holidays throughout the year. The fee charged to guests is fully inclusive of accommodation and meals. However, because the holiday industry is so competitive. Club Atlantic is only able to generate profits by maintaining strict financial control of all activities. The club’s restaurant is one area where is a constant need to monitor cost. Susan Green is the manager of the restaurant. At the beginning of each year she is given an annual budget which is then broken down into month. Each month she receive a statement monitoring actual costs against the annual budget and highlighting any variances. The statement for the month ended 31 October is reproduced below along with a list of assumption:

Club Atlantic Restaurant Performance Statement Month to 31 October

Number of guest days

11 160

9 600

(1 560)

(£)

(£)

(£)

Food

20 500

20 160

(340)

Cleaning materials

2 232

1 920

(312)

Heat, light and power

2 050

2 400

350

Rent rates, insurance and depreciation

1 860

1 800

(60)

35 042

33 480

(1 562)

Assumptions:

(a) The budget has been calculated on the basis of a 30-day calendar month with the cost of rents, insurance and depreciation begin an apportionment of the fixed annual charge.

(b) The budgeted catering wages assume that:

(i) There is one member of the catering staff for every 40 guests staying at the complex;

(c) All other budgeted costs are variable costs based on the number of guest days,

Task 1

Using the data above, prepare a revised performance statement using flexible budgeting. Your statement should show both the revised and the revised variances. Club Atlantic uses the existing budgets and performance statements to motivate its managers as well as for financial control. If manages keep expenses below budget they receive a bonus in addition to their salaries. A colleague of Susan is Brian Hilton. Brian is in charge of the swimming pool and golf course, both of which have high level of fixed costs. Each month he manages to keep expenses below budget and in return enjoys regular bonuses. Under the current reporting system, Susan Green only rarely receives a bonus. At a recent meeting with Club Atlantic’s directors Susan Green expressed concern that the restaurant. You are currently employed by Hall and Co., the club’s auditors, and the directors of Club Atlantic have asked you to advice them whether there is any justification for Susan Green’s concern.

At the meeting with the Club’s directors, you were asked the following questions:

(a) Do budgets motivate managers to achieve objectives?

(b) Does motivating managers lead to improved performance?

(c) Does the current method of reporting performance motivate Susan Green and Brian Hilton to be more efficient?

Task 2

Write a brief letter to the directors of Club Atlantic addressing their question and justifying your answers.

Note: You should make use of the data given in this task plus your findings in Task 1.

the following information relates to labour costs for the past month 611418

The following information relates to labour costs for the past month:

Budget

Labour rate

£10 per hour

Production time

15 000 hours

Time per unit

3 hours

Production units

5000 units

Actual

Wages paid

£176 000

Production

5500 units

Total hours worked

14 000 hours

There was no idle time.

What were the labour rate and efficiency variances?

Rate variance

Efficiency variance

A

£26 000 adverse

£25 000 favourable

B

£26 000 adverse

£10 000 favourable

C

£36 000 adverse

£2500 favourable

D

£36 000 adverse

£25 000 favourable

standard direct labour cost of one unit of product q 0 25 hours x 12 00 per hour is 611419

Standard direct labour cost of one unit of product Q (0.25 hours x $12.00 per hour) is $3.00 The eight employees who make product Q work a seven-hour day. In a recent three-day period, result were as follows:

Actual units produced

650 units

Actual wages cost

$2275

During this period, there was a power failure. This meant that all work had to stop for 2 hours.

(a) If the company reports idle time separately, the labour efficiency variance for the period is

(i) $258 (A)

(ii) $126 (A)

(iii) $42 (F)

(iv) $126 (F)

(b) The labour rate variance for the period is

(i) $451 (A)

(ii) $259 (A)

(iii) $266 (F)

(iv) $375 (F)

g ltd repairs electronic calculators 611420

G Ltd repairs electronic calculators. The wages budget for the last period was bases on a standard repair time of 24 minutes per calculator and a standard wage rate of $10.60 per hour.

Following the end of the budget period, it was reported that:

Number of repairs

31 000

Labour rate variance

$3100 (A)

Labour efficiency variance

Nil

Based on the above information, the actual wage rate during the period was

A $10.35 per hour

B $10.60 per hour

C $10.85 per hour

D $11.10 per hour

below are two balance sheets for throup ltd for the most recent and the previous yea 611352

Below are two balance sheets for Throup Ltd for the most recent and the previous year’s trading periods.

Throup Ltd Balance Sheets at financial year end

Year ended
31 December 2015

Year ended

31 December 2016

£

£

£

£

£

£

Non-current assets

Cost

Dep.

NBV

Cost

Dep.

NBV

Property

180,000

10,000

170,000

180,000

14,000

166,000

Equipment and machinery

23,000

4,500

18,500

44,000

11,310

32,690

203.000

14.500

188.500

224,000

25,310

198,690

Current assets

Inventory

5,630

12,131

Trade receivables

6,432

6,265

Cash and cash equivalents

2,300

11,888

14,362

30,284

Current liabilities

Trade payables

11,991

1,321

Tax owing

7,871

19,862

(5,500)

5,453

6,774

23,510

183,000

222,200

Non-current liabilities

10% Debentures

20,000

183,000

202,200

Equity

Ordinary share capital

100,000

100,000

Share premium
account

20,000

20,000

Retained earnings

63,000

82,200

183,000

202.200

The folioing extract from the income statement is available:

Extract from income statement for year ended 31 Dec 2016

£

Operating profit

34,950

Less Interest

2,000

Profit before interest

32,950

Taxation

11,250

Profit for the year

21,700

In addition, the following information is available:

•Dividends of £2,500 were paid during the year.

•There were no sales of non-current assets during the year.

From the above information, construct a statement of cash flows for the year ended 31 December 2016.

prepare journal entries general ledgers trial balance and balance sheet 611377

Bond details:

Face value

100.00

Issue price

100.00

Maturity

15-Feb-X4

Rate of Interest

10.00

Currency

GBP

Coupon dates (until

Coupon date

FX rate

Settle date

FX rate

maturity)

Previous coupon

15-Feb-X2

.64715

18-Feb-X2

.62649

Coupon date-1

15-Aug-X2

.65113

18-Aug-X2

.65501

Coupon date-2

15-Feb-X3

.61900

18-Feb-X3

.62846

Coupon date-3

15-Aug-X3

.62649

18-Aug-X3

.62861

Coupon date-4

15-Feb-X4

.53043

18-Feb-X4

.52938

Day count

ActuaV365

Transaction details

Particulars

Wade date

FX rate

Settle date

FX rate

Quantity

Clean price

Bought

06-Jan-X3

.62162

09-Jan-X3

.62197

12,000

109.00

Sold

04-Nov-X3

.59508

07-Nov-X3

.59661

5,000

104.50

Valuation dates and

Date

Market rate

FX rate

market value

Valuation date 1

31-Mar-X3

107.00

.63183

Valuation date 2

30-Jun-X3

106.00

.60438

Valuation date 3

30-Sep-X3

105.00

.60176

Valuation date 4

31-Dec-X3

103.50

.55997

Functional currency

USD

Other details

Date

GBP

FX rate

Capital introduced

01-Jan-X3

2,000,000

.62735

Prepare Journal entries, general ledgers, trial balance, and balance sheet.

calculate journal entries general ledgers trial balance income statement and balance 611378

Bond details:

Face value

100.00

Issue price

100.00

Maturity

15-Feb-X4

Rate of interest

10.00

Currency

JPY

Coupon dates (until

Coupon date

FX rate

Settle date

FX rate

maturity)

Previous coupon

15-Sep-X2

122.25

18-Sep-X2

121.50

Coupon date-1

15-Mar-X2

129.00

18-Mar-X2

131.33

Coupon date-2

15-Sep-X3

121.70

18-Sep-X3

121.50

Coupon date-3

15-Mar-X3

118.32

18-Mar-X3

118.87

Coupon date-4

15-Sep-X4

110.31

18-Sep-X4

106.82

Day count

Actual/365

365

Transaction details

Particulars

Trade date

FX rate

Settle date

FX rate

Quantity Clean price

Bought

06-Aug-X2

120.77

09-Aug-X2

120.16

5,000 95.00

Written off

15-Apr-X3

120.32

18-Apr-X3

119.77

5,000 85.00

Valuation dates and

Date

Market rate

FX rate

market value

Valuation date 1

30-Sep-X2

96.50

121.81

Valuation date 2

31-Mar-X3

90.00

118.09

Valuation date 3

30-Jun-X3

86.50

119.80

Valuation date 4

30-Sep-X3

80.00

111.49

Functional currency

USD

Other details

Date

JPY

FX rate

Capital introduced

01-July-X3

5,000,000

119.43

Calculate Journal entries, general ledgers, trial balance, income statement, and balance sheet.

calculate the journal entries general ledgers trial balance income statement and als 611387

Bond details:

Face value

100

Issue price

100

Maturity

10-Sep-X4

Rate of interest

6.50%

Currency

USD

Coupon dates (until maturity)

Coupon date

Settle date

Previous coupon

10-Sep-X2

13-Sep-X2

Coupon date-1

10-Mar-X3

13-Mar-X3

Coupon date-2

10-Sep-X3

13-Sep-X3

Coupon date-3

10-Mar-X4

13-Mar-X4

Coupon date-4

10-Sep-X4

13-Sep-X4

Day Count

Actual/365

Transaction details

Particulars

Trade date

Settle date

Quantity

Clean price

Bought

12-Feb-X3

15-Feb-X3

25,000

143

Sold

06-Aug-X3

09-Aug-X3

21,000

161.5

Valuation dates and

Date

Market rate

market value

Valuation date 1

31-Mar-X3

144.5

Valuation date 2

30-Jun-X3

155.5

Valuation date 3

30-Sep-X3

162

Functional currency

USD

Other details Date

USD

Capital introduced 01-Feb-X3

4,000,000

Calculate the Journal entries, general ledgers, trial balance, income statement, and also balance sheet.

prepare journal entries general ledgers trial balance income statement and balance s 611388

Bond details:

100.00 100.00 10-Dec-X6

Face value Issue price Maturity

Rate of interest

4.50

Currency

USD

Coupon dates (until maturity)

Coupon date

Settle date

Previous coupon

10-June-X2

13-June-X2

Coupon date-1

10-Dec-X3

13-Dec-X3

Coupon date-2

10-June-X3

13-June-X3

Coupon date-3

10-Dec-X4

13-Dec-X4

Coupon date-4

10-June-X4

13-June-X4

Coupon date-5

10-Dec-X5

13-Dec-X5

Coupon date-6

10-June-X5

13-June-X5

Coupon date-7

10-Dec-X6

13-Dec-X6

Day count

ActuaV365

Transaction details

Particulars

Wade date

Settle date

Quantity

Clean price

Bought

25-Jan-X3

28-Jan-X3

7,700

77.00

Written off

21-Dec-X4

24-Dec-X4

7,700

65.50

Valuation dates and market value

Date

Market rate

Valuation date 1

30-Jun-X2

73.50

Valuation date 2

30-Sep-X2

77.50

Valuation date 3

31-Dec-X2

78.00

Valuation date 4

31-Mar-X3

71.00

Valuation date 5

30-Jun-X3

74.00

Valuation date 6

30-Sep-X3

77.50

Valuation date 7

31-Dec-X3

82.75

Valuation date 8

31-Mar-X4

71.00

Valuation date 9

30-Jun-X4

73.50

Valuation date 10

30-Sep-X4

70.00

Valuation date 11

31-Dec-X4

62.50

Functional currency

USD

Other details

Date

USD

Prepare Journal entries, general ledgers, trial balance, income statement, and balance sheet.

average monthly sales during the first 4 months of the year were twice the average m 618294

Model: Time ratio, adjusted time ratio, weighted sales ratio and preparation of statement Kapur Ltd. was incorporated on 1 May 2009 to take over the running business of Sunil & Bros. with effect from 1 January 2009. From the following details for the year ended 31 December 2009, you are required to prepare a statement showing profit or loss made during the pre- and post-incorporation periods:

(i)

Gross Profit

5,00,000

(ii)

Salaries

90,000

(iii)

Advertising

9,000

(iv)

Commission to Partners

12,000

(v)

Carriage Outward

15,000

(vi)

Depreciation

21,000

(vii)

Provision for Doubtful Debts

6,000

(viii)

Undertaking Commission

30,000

(ix)

Insurance Premium paid for the year ending 31 March 2010

18,000

(x)

Interest on Loan taken (Including Rs.6,000 on Loan taken after Incorporation)

24,000

Additional data:

  1. Average monthly sales during the first 4 months of the year were twice the average monthly sales during each of the remaining 8 months.
  2. 30% of the underwriting commission is to be written off
  3. Commission to partners was paid for their work before incorporation
  4. Salaries include salary paid to a director of a company Rs.12,000.

you are required to prepare trading and profit and loss account for the year ended 3 618295

Model: Comprehensive Bright Ltd. was incorporated on 1 July 2009 with on authorized capital consisting of 1,00,000 equity shares of Rs.10 each to take over the running business from White Bros. from 1 April 2009. The following is the summarized profit and loss account for the year 3 ended 31 March 2010:

Particulars

Particulars

Cost of Sales for the Year

2,50,000

Sales: ?

Administrative Expenses

15,000

1 April 2009 to 30 June 2009 : 80,000

Selling Commission

10,000

1 July 2009 to 31 March 2010 : 3,20,000

4,00,000

Goodwill Written off

5,000

Interest Paid to Vendors (Loan Repaid on 1 February)

8,000

Distribution Expenses (60% Variable)

10,000

Preliminary Expenses Written off

4,000

Debentures Interest

5,000

Depreciation

6,000

Director”s Fees

2,000

Net Profit

85,000

4,00,000

4,00,000

Further information:

  1. Stock on 31 March 2010 Rs.30,000
  2. Purchase consideration Rs.3,00,000 to be paid by the issue of 3,000 equity shares of 100 each
  3. Gross profit percentage is fixed, turnover is double in April, November and December
  4. Preliminary expenses are to be written off
  5. Carriage outward and travelling commission vary in direct proportion to sales

You are required to prepare trading and profit and loss account for the year ended 31 March 2010 appropriating between pre- and post-incorporation periods and a balance sheet as on 31 March 2010.

you are required to prepare p amp l a c for the year ended 31 march 2010 apportionin 618296

Model: Computation of pre- and post-incorporation profit through columnar P&L A/c Mr. Raj formed a private limited company under the name and style of Raj Pvt. Ltd. to take over his existing business as from 1 April 2009, but the company was not incorporated until 1 July 2009. No entries relating to transfer of the business are entered in the books. This was carried on without a break until 31 March 2010. The following balances were extracted from the books on 31 March 2010:

Particulars

Opening Stock

25,000

Purchases

1,75,000

Carriage Outwards

4,000

Travelling Commission

7,000

Office Salaries

30,000

Administrative Expenses

25,000

Rent and Rates

15,000

Director’s Fees

25,000

Fixed Assets

1,50,000

Current Assets Excluding Stock

40,000

Preliminary Expenses

6,000

Sales

3,00,000

Mr. Raj’s Capital A/c on 1 April 2009

2,70,000

Current Liabilities

40,000

You are also given that:

  1. Stock on 31 March 2010 was Rs.20,000.
  2. The gross profit ratio is constant and monthly sales in April 2009, February 2010 and March 2010 are double the average monthly sales for the remaining months of the year.
  3. The purchase consideration was agreed to be satisfied by the issue of 50,000 equity shares of Rs.10 each.
  4. The preliminary expenses are to be written off.
  5. You are to assume that carriage outwards and traveller’s commission vary in direct proportion to sales.

You are required to prepare P&L A/c for the year ended 31 March 2010 apportioning the profit or loss of the periods before and after incorporation. Depreciation is to be provided @ 20% p.a. on fixed assets.

state whether the following statements are true or false1 profit prior to incorporat 618297

State whether the following statements are True or False
1.Profit prior to incorporation forms part of P & L A/c.
2.Capital profit is not utilized for payment of dividend to shareholders.
3.Unutilized part of capital reserve appears on the assets side of the balance sheet.
4.Capital loss should be shown on the assets side of the balance sheet.
5.Capital loss may also be treated as Goodwill.
6.The date of Certificate of Commencement of business is not taken into account for ascertaining prior incorporation profit.7. Basis of apportionment of stationery expenses is sales ratio.
8.Gross profit is apportioned on the basis of sales ratio.
9.Basis of apportionment of “bad debts” is time ratio.
10.Director’s remuneration is not at all connected with pre-incorporation period.
11.Basis of apportionment of “insurance premium” is sales ratio.
12.Vendor’s salary is to be apportioned on the basis of adjusted time ratio.
13.Debenture interest is wholly allocated to post-incorporation period.
14.Formation expenses written off shall be allocated only to pre-incorporation period. Profit prior to incorporation is always to be adjusted against Goodwill.

kamala ltd was incorporated on 1 april 2010 to take over the business of vikas broth 618315

Kamala Ltd. was incorporated on 1 April 2010 to take over the business of Vikas Brothers from 1 January 2010. From the following information, calculate sales ratio and gross profit:

  1. Sales during the period January to December 2010 amounted to Rs.3,60,000.

The trend of the sales was as follows:

January and February: half the average sales in each month

May, June and July: average sales in each month

October: average sale

November and December: half the average sales in each month

  1. Cost of goods sold: Rs.90,000.

a company was incorporated on 1 august 2010 in order to purchase a running business 618316

A company was incorporated on 1 August 2010 in order to purchase a running business from 1 April 2010. The following particulars are available from its records:

(i) Total sales for 2010–11:

2,40,000

(ii) Sales from 1 April 2010 to 31 July 2010

60,000

(iii) Gross profit for the whole year

90,000

(iv) Total expenses of 2010–11 (including director’s fees 3,000)

75,000

(v) Company’s share capital

2,25,000

You are required to calculate profit prior to incorporation and after incorporation by preparing profit and loss account.

lalli ltd was incorporated on 1 july 2010 which took over a running concern with eff 618317

Lalli Ltd. was incorporated on 1 July 2010 which took over a running concern with effect from 1 January 2010. The sales for the period up to 1 July 2010 was Rs.10,80,000 and the sales from 1 July 2010 to 31 December 2010 amounted to Rs.13,20,000. The expenses debited to profit and loss account included:

(i) Director’s fees

60,000

(ii) Bad debts

7,200

(iii) Advertisement (Rs.2,000 per month)

24,000

(iv) Salaries and general expenses

1,28,000

(v) Preliminary expenses written off

12,000

The gross profit for the period from 1 January 2010 to 31 December 2010

9,60,000

You are required to compute profit prior to incorporation.

a company was incorporated on 30 june 2010 to acquire the business of veer singh as 618318

A company was incorporated on 30 June 2010 to acquire the business of Veer Singh as from 1 January 2010. The accounts for the year ended 31 December 2010 disclosed the following:

  1. There was a gross profit of Rs.14,40,000
  2. The sales for the year amounted to Rs.72,00,000, of which Rs.32,40,000 were for the first 6 months.
  3. The expenses debited to profit and loss account included:

Director’s fees

90,000

Bad Debts

21,600

Advertising (Under a monthly Contract of 6,000)

72,000

Salaries

3,84,000

Preliminary Expenses Written off

30,000

Donation to Political Parties by Company

30,000

You are required to prepare a statement showing profit made before and after incorporation

x ltd was registered on 1 january 2010 to buy the business of m s y brothers as on 1 618319

X Ltd. was registered on 1 January 2010 to buy the business of M/s Y Brothers as on 1 October 2009 and the Certificate of Commencement of Business on 1 February 2010. The accounts of the company for the period of 12 months ended 30 September 2010 disclosed the net profit of Rs.1,25,000 after having charged the following amounts:

Salary: Rs.30,000 (There were four employees in the pre-incorporation period and seven in the post-incorporation period)

Wages: Rs.10,920 (There were four workers in the pre-incorporation period and five in the post-incorporation period and the rate of wages were Rs.160 and Rs.200 per month per worker in the pre- and post-incorporation periods, respectively)

Sales: Rs.4,80,000 of which Rs.80,000 relates to pre-incorporation period.

Director’s fees: Rs.16,000

You are required to calculate profit for pre- and post-incorporation periods separately.

you are required to prepare a statement apportioning the balance of profit between t 618320

Riddhima Co. Ltd. was incorporated on 30 September 2009 to take over the business of M/s Parul & Co. as from 1 April 2009. The financial accounts of the business for the year ended 31 March 2010 disclosed the following information:

Particulars

Sales:

April to September

3,60,000

October to March

5,40,000

9,00,000

Less: Purchases:

April to September

2,25,000

October to March

3,60,000

5,85,000

Gross Profit

3,15,000

Less:

Salaries

45,000

Selling Expenses

9,000

Depreciation

4,500

Director’s Remuneration

2,250

Debenture Interest

270

Administration expenses (Rent, Rates, etc.)}

13,500

74,520

Profit for the year 2009–10

2,40,480

You are required to prepare a statement apportioning the balance of profit between the periods prior to and after incorporation and show the profit and loss appropriation account for the year ended 31 March 2010.

byhagya ltd was incorporated on 1 march 2010 and received the certificate of commenc 618322

Byhagya Ltd. was incorporated on 1 March 2010 and received the Certificate of Commencement of Business on 1 April 2010. The company acquired the business of Viswas with effect from 1 November 2009. From the following figures relating to the year ending October 2010, find out the profits available for dividend.

  1. Sales for the year were Rs.30,00,000; Out of which sales up to 1 March 2010 were Rs.12,50,000.
  2. Gross profit for the year was Rs.9,00,000.
  3. The expenses debited to profit and loss account were:

Rent

45,000

Salaries

75,000

Directors’s fees

22,000

Interest on debentures

25,000

Audit fees

7,500

Discount on sales

18,000

Depreciation

1,20,000

General expenses

22,000

Advertising

90,000

Printing & Stationery

18,000

Commission on sales

30,000

Bad debts (Rs. 2,500 relates to

prior incorporation period)

7,500

Interest to vendors on purchase

consideration up to 1 May 2010

15,000

the unit cost of sales was reduced by 10 in the post incorporation period as compare 618323

X Ltd. was incorporated on 1 April 2010 with an authorized capital of 20,000 equity shares of Rs.100 each to take over the running business of Y Ltd. from 1 January 2010. The following is the summarized profit and loss account for the year ended 31 December 2010.

Particulars

Sales: 1 January 2010 to 31 March 2010

24,000

1 April 2010 to 31 December 2010

76,000

1,00,000

Cost of Sales

64,000

Administrative Expenses

7,072

Selling Commission

3,500

Goodwill Written off

800

Interest Paid to Vendors (Loan Repaid on 1 May 2010)

1,492

Distribution Expenses (60% Variable)

5,000

Preliminary Expenses Written off

1,320

Debenture Interest

1,280

Depreciation

1,776

Director’s Fees

400

86,640

Profit

13,360

The company deals with one type of product. The unit cost of sales was reduced by 10% in the post-incorporation period as compared to the pre-incorporation period. Apportion the net profit between pre-incorporation and post-incorporation periods showing the basis of apportionment.

jasemine company ltd was formed to take over a running business with effect from 1 a 618325

Jasemine Company Ltd. was formed to take over a running business with effect from 1 April 2009. The company was incorporated on 1 August 2009, and the Certificate of Commencement of Business was received on 1 October 2009. The following profit and loss account has been prepared for the year ended 31 March 2010.

Profit and Loss Account for the Year Ended 31 March 2010

Particulars

Particulars

To Salaries

1,20,000

By Gross Profit

8,00,000

To Printing and

12,000

b/f

Stationery

42,000

To Travelling

40,000

Expenses

94,500

To Advertisement

66,000

To Miscellaneous Trade Expense To

10,500

Rent (Office Building)

28,000

To Electricity

8,000

Charges

40,000

To Director”s Fees To Bad Debts

15,000 7,500

To Commission: Selling Agents To

Audit Fees To Debenture Interest

10,500

To Interest Paid

63,000

to Vendors

24,000

To Selling Expenses

2,19,000

To Depreciation on Fixed Assets To

8,00,000

8,00,000

Net Profit c/f

Additional information:

  1. Total sales for the year, which amounted to Rs.48,00,000 arose evenly up to the date of the Certificate of Commencement of Business, where after they spurted to record an increase of two-thirds during the rest of the year.
  2. Rent of office building was paid @ Rs.5,000 per month up to September 2009 and thereafter it was increased by Rs.1,000 per month.
  3. Travelling expenses include Rs.12,000 towards sales promotion.
  4. Depreciation includes Rs.1,500 for assets acquired in the post-incorporation period.
  5. Consideration was discharged by the company on 30 September 2009, by issuing equity shares of Rs.10 each.

You are required to prepare the profit and loss account in columnar form showing distinctly the allocation of profits between pre-incorporation and post- incorporation periods, indicating the basis of allocation regarding each item.

a public limited was incorporated on 1 october 2009 to take over a business as a goi 618326

A public limited was incorporated on 1 October 2009 to take over a business as a going concern as from 1 April 2009. The purchase price of the business for such acquisition was fixed on the basis of the balance sheet of the firm as at 31 March 2009 but the agreement provided that the vendors would get 80% of the profits earned prior to 1 October 2009 as compensation. The company’s accounts were made up to 31 March each year and the summarized trading and profit and loss accounts for the year ended 31 March 2010, disclosed the following results:

Particulars

 

Particulars

 

To Materials

3,72,000

By Net Sales

5,20,000

Consumed

 

By Stock:

 

To Manufacturing

97,000

Finished Goods

98,000

Wages

 

Incomplete

12,000

To Misc. Expenses
of Manufacture

37,200

Goods

 

To Carriage

12,600

 

 

Inwards

 

 

 

To Gross Profit c/d

1,11,200

 

 

 

6,30,000

 

6,30,000

To Salaries &

36,600

By Gross Profit b/d

1,11,200

Establishment

 

 

 

Charges

 

 

 

To Office

5,500

 

 

Expenses

 

 

 

To Director”s Fees

3,600

 

 

To Bad Debts

4,600

 

 

To Debentures

2,500

 

 

Interest

 

 

 

To Commission &

15,600

 

 

Discounts

 

 

 

To Carriage

3,200

 

 

Outwards

 

 

 

To Depreciation

20,600

 

 

To Net Profit for the Year

19,000

 

 

 

1,11,200

 

1,11,200

Further information available was that sales made by the company amounted to Rs.2,32,000. Bad debts amounting to Rs.2,200 were written off prior to 1 October 2009.

Prepare a statement showing the profits earned prior to and after incorporation. State also the amount of profits prior to 1 October 2009 payable to the vendors. How should the company deal with its share of profits in the year ending 31 March 2010.

prepare p amp l a c showing separately pre incorporation and post incorporation prof 618327

Ramkumar Industries Pvt. Ltd. was incorporated on 1 May 2009. It took over Ramkumar’s sole proprietary business with effect from 1 April 2009. Ramkumar’s balance sheet as at 31 March 2010 is as follows:

Liabilities

Assets

Capital Account

21,57,500

Building

5,50,000

Loan

42,500

Machinery

15,00,000

Trade Creditors

85,000

Debtors

1,28,500

Creditors for

12,500

P & L A/c

1,19,000

Expenses

22,97,500

22,97,500

It was agreed to pay Rs.22,50,000 in the form of equity shares of the company. The company decided to close its books of account for the first time as at 31 March 2010. The following further details are furnished to you:

Sales for full year

15,00,000

Purchases

7,00,000

Salaries & Wages

2,00,000

General Expenses

1,60,000

Carriage Inwards

23,500

Interest Paid

40,000

Stocks as at 31 March 2010

1,10,000

Additions to Building

1,90,000

Depreciation is to be provided @ 10% on assets including additions.

Make a provision for income tax @ 35%

The company requests you to:

  1. pass journal entries for the take over
  2. prepare P&L A/c showing separately pre-incorporation and post-incorporation profits

moorcroft ltd manufactures one product the production budget for june 2016 shows the 611304

Moorcroft Ltd manufactures one product. The production budget for June 2016 shows the following costs per unit:

£

Materials (£8 per kg)

4

Labour (£10 per hour)

15/19

Budgeted sales for the month were 5,000 units at £100 each. In July 2016, the management accountants compared the actual performance for the previous month and produced the following information based on actual sales of 5,000 at £80.

£

Materials (3,600 kg)

27,000

Labour (10,000 hours)

95,000

Budgeted £

Profit £

Actual £

profit £

Revenue for June

500,000

400,000

Materials expenditure

20,000

27,000

Labour expenditure

75,000

95,000

95,000

122,000

Profit for June

405,000

278,000

calculate the materials variances from the following data again there is no need to 611306

Calculate the materials variances from the following data. Again, there is no need to flex any data.

(1) Material ZX3

Standard price per kg

£7

Standard usage per unit

14 kg

Actual price per kg

£8

Actual usage per unit

12 kg

(2) Material WE32

Standard price per litre

£3.25

Standard usage per unit

113 litres

Actual price per kg

£3.40

Actual usage per unit

108 litres

thompson plc manufactures a single product the budgeted costs per unit for the month 611307

Thompson plc manufactures a single product. The budgeted costs per unit for the month of April 2014 were:

£

Direct materials (£3 per kg)

6

Direct labour (£8 per hour)

20

Anticipated production for April 2014 was 10,000 units. The actual results for April 2014 were:

£

Direct materials (20,000 kg)

55

Direct labour 25,000 hours)

240

The actual costs were based on production of 9,000 units. Calculate the labour and materials variances.

ian sharp is a sole trader who buys and sells electrical goods the following data ar 611308

Ian Sharp is a sole trader who buys and sells electrical goods. The following data are forecast for the six-month period between 1 January and 30 June 2017:

Purchases (£)

Sales ID

Jan

1,200

4,500

Feb

1,400

4,800

Mar

1,300

6,000

Apr

1,400

6,200

May

1,500

7,000

June

1,800

8,000

Other information relating to cash flow is as follows:

•Sharp employs a part-time assistant whom he pays £500 each month.

•Overhead expenses are £800 per month and are paid when they are incurred.

•Sales are all on credit and customers take one month’s credit.

•Half of the purchases are cash purchases and the other half are paid for one month later.

•A replacement van is to be purchased for £8,000 in March. A customer has been found for the old van, who will pay £1,500 for it in April.

•The balance at the bank on 1 January 2017 was £1,000 overdrawn.

Based on these data, the cash budget for the six-month period would be.

this example is based on the financial statements and budgets for a sole trader ndas 611310

This example is based on the financial statements and budgets for a sole trader – I Yates – for the six months to 30 June 2018. Here is the balance sheet at the end of December 2017:

I Yates Balance sheet as at 31 December 2017

£

£

£

Non-current assets

Premises

50,000

Equipment

20,000

Less Depreciation

14,000

6,000

56,000

Current assets

Inventory

5,500

Trade receivables

11,000

Cash at bank

4,750

21,250

Current liabilities

Trade payables

9,000

12,250

Net assets

68,250

Capital

50,000

Add Net profit

25,000

75,000

Less Drawings

6,750

68,250

Additional information:

1Sales and purchases are all on credit – with one month’s credit being allowed by us and by our suppliers.

2Expected sales and purchases are as follows:

Jan

Feb

Mar

Apr

May

Jun

Sales (£)

15,000

24,000

29,000

34,000

34,000

36,000

Purchases (C)

12,000

18,000

20,000

26,000

28,000

35,000

3The owner takes personal cash drawings each month of £500.

4Wages and salaries amount to £2,400 each month.

5Insurance of £100 is paid each month.

6Overheads are £300 per month and are paid when they are due.

7New equipment is purchased on 1 March 2007 for £6,000. Equipment is to be depreciated at 10% on cost – one month’s ownership equals one month’s depreciation.

8Rent of £400 is received each quarter on 1 January and 1 April.

9Inventory in trade on 30 June 2018 was valued at £5,700.

i yates cash budget for six months ended 30 june 2018 611311

I Yates Cash budget for six months ended 30 June 2018

Jan

Feb

Mar

Apr

May

Jun

£

£

£

£

£

£

Cash inflows

Receipts from

11,000

15,000

24,000

29,000

34,000

34,000

trade receivables

Rent received

400

400

Total inflows

11,400

15,000

24,000

29,400

34,000

34,000

Cash outflows

Payments to trade payables

9,000

12,000

18,000

20,000

26,000

28,000

Wages and salaries

2,400

2,400

2,400

2,400

2,400

2,400

Insurance

100

100

100

100

100

100

Overheads

300

300

300

300

300

300

Drawings

500

500

500

500

500

500

Equipment

6,000

Total outflows

12,300

15,300

27,300

23,300

29,300

31,300

Net cash flow

(900)

(300)

(3,300)

6,100

4,700

2,700

Opening balance

4,750

3,850

3,550

250

6,350

11,050

Closing balance

3,850

3,550

250

6,350

11,050

13,750

Points to note:

•The opening balance of cash at the start of January is taken from the balance sheet’s cash at bank figure. The closing balance will then appear on the budgeted balance sheet as at 30 June.

•The receipts from trade receivables for January will be December’s sales as seen on the balance sheet as at 31 December 2017.

•Likewise, the payment for trade payables in January will be found on December’s balance sheet.

•The sales and purchases figures for June will not appear in the cash budget but will appear as trade receivables and trade payables on the balance sheet as at 30 June.

•Drawings appear in the cash budget but not in a budgeted profit and loss account.

The forecast set of final accounts willbe.

odejayi ltd produces computer desks the production manager has collected the followi 611313

Odejayi Ltd produces computer desks. The production manager has collected the following information in order to produce a production budget for the next four months:

(i)Demand is expected to be 320 desks in April 2018. This should increase by 25% in May and by 20% in the following two months, based on the demand for desks in the previous month.

(ii)Stock at the end of each month is to be maintained at a level of 25% of the following month’s forecast sales.

(iii)The stock at the start of April is 200 desks.

(iv)Sales in August are expected to be 600 desks.

Produce a production budget for the period ending 31 July 2018. Round up, if necessary, to the nearest desk.

bruno produces go karts which he sells to local retailers he has decided to produce 611314

Bruno produces go-karts which he sells to local retailers. He has decided to produce a sales and debtors budget to help him plan ahead. The following data are available for January to June 2014.

Month

Sales

(number of go-karts)

Jan

100

Feb

80

Mar

120

Apr

120

May

150

Jun

180

•Each go-kart will be sold for £50 for the first four months, then the selling price will rise to £60.

•He gives two months’ credit to the retailers.

Produce a sales budget and a trade receivables budget for the six months ending 30 June 2014.

from the following data construct a cash budget for the six months ending 31 decembe 611315

From the following data, construct a cash budget for the six months ending 31 December 2016:

(a)Purchases and sales are expected to be as follows:

Units:

Jul

Aug

Sep

Oct

Nov

Dec

2003

2003

2003

2003

2003

2003

Purchases

170

170

250

210

240

250

Sales

160

180

190

280

300

320

(b)The selling price of each unit is £50.

(c)The purchase price of each unit is £20, but this will rise by 20% on 1 October 2016.

(d)Purchases are paid for one month in arrears.

(e)Twenty-five per cent of sales are for cash, with each sale receiving a 4% cash discount. The remainder will delay payment by one month.

(f)Trade debtors as at 30 June 2006 amounted to £4,500.

(g)Trade creditors as at 30 June 2006 amounted to £2,800.

(h)A new van is expected to be purchased in September, which would cost £18,000. The old van would be traded in at a value of £5,000. However, only half of the net purchase price would be paid then. The remainder would be paid in 2017.

(i)Wages and salaries amount to £3,000 per month, paid in the month incurred.

(j)Overhead expenses will be £900 per month, paid when incurred.

(k)On 1 July 2016 the bank balance was £9,000.

the following is a worked example of a set of financial statements for a limited com 611335

The following is a worked example of a set of financial statements for a limited company produced for internal use

Shortland plc

Trial balance as at 31 Dec 2018

E

£

Issued ordinary share capital (Et shares)

250,000

5% Debenture 2024

40,000

Retained earnings

15,600

Property

300,000

Plant and equipment

62,000

Sales revenue

178,000

Purchases

87,500

Inventory as at 1 January 2018

14,750

Distribution costs

12,110

Administration costs

7,676

Debenture interest

2,000

Directors remuneration

18,900

Trade receivables and payables

6,456

5,341

Cash and cash equivalents

1,549

Provision for depreciation on property

13,000

Provision for depreciation on plant and equipment

22,000

Dividends paid

11,000

521,941

521,941

Additional information:

1Inventory at 31 Dec 2018: £8,950.

2Tax charge for the year: £7,740.

3Depreciation is to be provided for as follows:

aProperty: 1% on cost

bPlant and equipment: 20% on cost.

the directors decide to make a bonus issue of shares on the basis of one share for e 611337

The directors decide to make a bonus issue of shares on the basis of one share for every four shares held. The directors have decided to utilize all the company’s reserves equally.

Equity

£

Ordinary shares of £1 each

12,000,000

Revaluation reserve

2,000,000

Profit and loss account

5,000,000

19,000,000

This means that the company will be creating ¼ × 12,000,000 = 3,000,000 bonus shares of £1 each. It will also mean that the company has to reduce its reserves by an equivalent amount. After the bonus issue, the equity section of the balance sheet will be.

stoddard plc started in business on 1 january 2012 its issued share capital was 120 611338

Stoddard plc started in business on 1 January 2012. Its issued share capital was 120,000 ordinary shares of £1 each and 30,000 6% preference shares of £1 each. The following information is available:

•Net profits for the first two years of business were as follows: 2012 £58,911; 2013 £72,344.

•Corporation tax was as follows: 2012 £15,890; 2013 £26,750.

•Transfers were made to the general reserve: 2012 £5,000; 2013 £10,000.

•Preference dividends were always paid, whereas the ordinary dividends paid were 5% in 2012 and 7% in 2015.

Produce a balance sheet extract for each of the three years of trading, showing the equity section.

as at 1 january 2014 the equity of masters plc comprised the following 611340

As at 1 January 2014 the equity of Masters plc comprised the following:

£000

Issued share capital

500

Share premium account

100

Retained earnings

89

Total equity

689

During the year a further 100,000 £1 shares were issued at a premium of 75p. Profit for the year was £37,200 and the level of dividends paid totalled £12,000. The statement of changes in equity would be.

gibbon plc had the following fixed assets as at 31 december 2015 611341

Gibbon Plc had the following fixed assets as at 31 December 2015:

Cost

Provision for depreciation to date

£

£

Freehold land

300,000

n/a

Buildings

250,000

50,000

Plant and machinery

120,000

40,000

The depreciation policy of the firm is to provide for depreciation as follows:

•buildings: 10% per year straight line;

•plant and machinery: 20% per year straight line.

No depreciation is to be provided for freehold land. All depreciation is based on the values of assets held at the end of the financial year. During the year to 31 December 2016, the following events occurred:

1Land was revalued to £500,000.

2New buildings were purchased at a cost of £200,000.

3Plant and machinery which had cost £40,000 were sold for £30,000, which generated a profit on disposal of £10,000.

4Plant and machinery was purchased for £60,000.

The schedule of non-current assets at 31 December 2016 for inclusion in the notes to the accounts for the year end would be.

here is a worked example of the financial statements being produced from the trial b 611342

Here is a worked example of the financial statements being produced from the trial balance of a company. The principles applied in the construction of the statement are identical to those used to construct the statements of a sole trader. However, the requirements of IAS 1 mean that the format of the statement must comply with a prescribed layout.

Hallsworth plc Trial balance as at 31 December 2019

Dr

£000

Cr

£000

Ordinary share capital (£1 shares)

800

Plant and equipment at cost

420

Depreciation on plant and equipment

95

Investments (noncurrent)

330

Property at cost

1,000

Depreciation on property

150

Inventories as at 1 Jan 2019

48

Revenue

1,100

Purchases

715

Dividends paid

87

Dividends received

28

Retained earnings

195

Distribution costs

105

Trade receivables

85

Trade payables

62

Accruals

Administration costs

99

Share premium

300

Cash and cash equivalents

81

10% Debentures

250

Interest paid

10

2,980

2,980

Additional information:

1The taxation due on the company’s profits for the year is £76,000.

2Distribution costs accrued at 31 Dec 2019 total £8,000.

3Administration costs prepaid at 31 Dec 2019 totalled £4,000.

4Only £10,000 of the interest due on the debentures had been paid by the end of the year.

5Inventory in trade at the year end totalled £76,000.

6The company engaged in a bonus issue of shares during the year which is not recorded in the trial balance. The bonus issue was made on the basis of one new share for every four already held. Reserves were to be mentioned in the most distributable form.

from the following data present an extract from the statement of cash flows showing 611346

From the following data, present an extract from the statement of cash flows showing the net cash flow from operating activities:

31 December
2012

31 December
2013

£

£

Trade receivables

4,500

3,200

Inventory

2,750

3,950

Trade payables

1,890

2,740

Net profits for the year ended 31.12.13 were £15,690 and depreciation charged that year amounted to £1,120.

an extract from the income statement for the year ended 31 december 2016 is presente 611347

An extract from the income statement for the year ended 31 December 2016 is presented below:

Extract from income statement for year ended 31 Dec 2016

Operating profit

74,454

Less Interest

3,500

Profrt before interest

70,954

Taxation

25,400

Profit for the year

45,554

The following information has also been made available:

•Dividends paid for the year amounted to £12,500.

•A vehicle which cost £14,000 and has accumulated depreciation of £9,200 was sold during the year for £5,000 cash – which was received on the date of the sale.

The statement of cash flows would be.

from the following data present an extract from the statement of cash flows showing 611348

From the following data, present an extract from the statement of cash flows showing the net cash flow from operating activities:

31 December 2014
£

31 December 2015
£

Trade receivables

11,329

14,380

Trade payables

18,754

22,345

Inventory

9,986

10,101

Net profits for the year ended 31.12.14 were £56,890 and depreciation charged that year amounted to £7,500.

the following are extracts from the balance sheets of a company 611349

The following are extracts from the balance sheets of a company:

M at 31 Dec 2013
£000 £000

Mat 31 Dec 2014
£000 £000

Non-current assets

Land and property

800

1,000

Plant and equipment at cost

250

300

Less depreciation

130

120

150

150

Motor vans at cost

50

64

Less depreciation

18

32

22

42

•There were no purchases of land and property during the year.

•During the year, plant and equipment costing £60,000 and with a book value of £27,000 were sold for a loss of £5,000.

•Vans, which had cost £8,000, with a book value of £4,000, were sold for neither a profit nor a loss.

From the above data, calculate the amount to include in the statement of cash flows under the heading ‘cash flow from investing activities’.

the following extracts are taken from the balance sheet of surridge ltd 611350

The following extracts are taken from the balance sheet of Surridge Ltd:

As at 31 December 2017

As at 31 December 2018

£000

£000

Taxation owing

65

43

The income statement for the year ended 31 December 2018 shows an entry for taxation as £187,000. Calculate the amount of taxation actually paid out by Surridge Ltd in the year to 31 December 2018.

the norton boys rsquo tennis club is a small local club the club is run for young pe 611276

The Norton Boys’ Tennis Club is a small, local club. The club is run for young people aged between 11 and 18. Although the club has been successful in the regional junior leagues, it is facing financial problems. The rent charged on the clubhouse and on the ground is set to rise by 20 per cent next year and it is felt that increasing subscription charges would only lead to a decline in the number of people playing.

The financial details for the 2015/16 season are as follows:

1 August 2015

£

31 July 2016

£

Subscriptions owing

400

650

Subscriptions paid in advance

125

240

Cash at bank

700

(1,200)

Rent of clubhouse/courts accrued

360

540

Equipment

5,000

5,200

Snack bar inventory

130

80

Creditors for snack bar purchases

60

45

from the following data construct a manufacturing account for the year ended 31 dece 611277

From the following data construct a manufacturing account for the year ended 31 December 2015.

£

Purchases of raw materials

89,500

Opening inventory:

Raw materials

12,450

Work-in-progress

43,100

Carriage inwards

875

Returns outwards

2,190

Labour costs:

Factory supervisors

29,000

Manufacturing wages

87500

Depreciation of factory equipment

5,600

Rent

18,000

Additional information:

1Rent is to be apportioned between factory overheads and office expenses in a 3:1 ratio.

2Inventory as at 31 December 2015 was as follows:

aRaw materials £15,650

bWork-in-progress £38,700.

a kitchen fitter works a 45 week year and for 36 hours per week he estimates that hi 611278

A kitchen fitter works a 45-week year and for 36 hours per week. He estimates that his overheads for the year will be £9,000.

When billing customers, the fitter may wish to include a fraction of his overall overheads into the cost of each ‘job’ he performs for customers and he does this on the basis of the time of each job completed. This means that jobs that take longer will incur a higher proportion of overheads. For example, for a job that takes 25 hours he would want to include the following amount of overheads into the cost of the job:

Hours worked in one year = 45 × 36 = 1,620

Given that the job takes 18 hours, he would apportion (18/1,620) × £9,000 = £100 of overheads for this job on top of the direct materials and his direct labour. The selling price charged for this job would be based on both the direct costs of the job and this £100 share of the overheads.

using the oar data calculated for rand ltd we can calculate the following job an ord 611279

Using the OAR data calculated for Rand Ltd we can calculate the following job. An order was received for 500 steel pipes. The costing data for this order is as follows:

Direct costs per steel pipe

£

Direct materials

4.50

Direct labour

6.00

The job passes through each of the production departments as follows:

Machine hours

Direct labour hours

Cutting

200

70

Moulding

350

90

Assembly

110

The cost of this particular job would then be calculated as follows:

Direct costs: Materials

500 x £4.50

£ 2,250.00

Labour

500 x £6.00

3,000.00

Indirect costs:

Cutting overheads

200 hours x £0.27

54

Moulding overheads

350 hours x £1.33

465.5

Assembly overheads

110 hours x £3.12

343.2

Total cost

500 steel pipes

6112.7

nutt ltd produces clothing for the retail trade a small retail store lsquo fashion c 611280

Nutt Ltd produces clothing for the retail trade. A small retail store, ‘Fashion Craze’, has approached Nutt Ltd for a quotation to supply them with a bulk order for 50 pairs of leather trousers. The following information is estimated:

Materials

£10 per pair

Direct labour:

Cutting

£6 per hour

Sewing

£8 per hour

Processing

£5 per hour

Each pair of trousers will require 1 hour of cutting, 2 hours of sewing and 30 minutes of processing. Overheads are apportioned on the basis of £10 per pair of trousers completed. A mark-up of 40% is added for profits. A batch of 50 pairs of trousers would be priced as follows:

Batch cost: 50 pairs of leather trousers

£

Materials

50 x £10

500

Direct labour:

Cutting

50 x £6 x 1 hour

300

Sewing

50 x £8 x 2 hours

800

Processing

50 x £5 x 0.5 hour

125

Overheads

50 x £10

500

2,225

Mark-up (40%)

890

Price to be quoted

3,115

lamb ltd is constructing a new college building for a local authority the contact be 611281

Lamb Ltd is constructing a new college building for a local authority. The contact begins in 2014 and the price agreed for the college is £6 million. However, the college in unlikely to be completed until 2016 owing to extensive remedial work being necessary, and Lamb Ltd will incur the following costs:

2014

£1.8 million

2015

£2.2 million

2016

£0.8 million

The profit on the contract is estimated to be £1.2 million. This notional profit can be included as income if we make adjustments for the ongoing progress on the contract. Imagine that, in our example, by 2015 the value of the work certified had been £4 million and the cost of the work certified so far was £3.8 million. If the amount Lamb Ltd has received so far for work certified total £3.6 million, attributable profit would be calculated as follows:

Notional profit x (2/3) x (Cash received on account x value of work certified)

£200,000 x (2/3) x (£3 600 000/£4,000,000) = £120,000

flower ltd produces computer desks the cost of making one desk has been calculated a 611282

Flower Ltd produces computer desks. The cost of making one desk has been calculated as follows:

£

Wood

10

Labour

15

Overheads

5

30

As at 31 December 2017, the business has 30 finished desks in stock, but also 20 desks which are estimated to be 75 per cent complete and 10 desks estimated to be 50 per cent complete. The cost value of these desks would be as follows:

£

Completed desks (30)

900

Desks 75% complete (20)

450

Desks 50% complete (10)

150

1,500

jukes ltd bases its job estimates on the following formulae 611285

Jukes Ltd bases its job estimates on the following formulae:

Total cost = Prime cost plus 50% for overheads

Selling price = Total cost plus 30% for profit.

Estimates for job PW1 and for job JC2 are as follows:

Job SN18

JobTY12

Direct materials (£2 per metre)

£100

£150

Direct labour (£6 per hour)

£200

£250

Calculate the selling price for each job.

at low levels of output the firm incurs a loss as the revenue is not high enough to 611286

Simper Ltd produces a single product which sells for £20. The product itself costs £12 to produce and fixed costs for the business are £50,000 per year. The following is a schedule of the costs and revenue of the business for varying levels of output.

Output (units)

Fixed costs
(E)

Variable costs
(f)

Total costs
(£)

Total revenue
(£)

Profit
(£)

0

50,000

0

50.000

0

(50,000)

1,000

50,000

12,000

62,000

20,000

(42,000)

2,000

50,000

24,000

74,000

40,000

(34,000)

3,000

50,000

36,000

86,000

60,000

(26,000)

4,000

50,000

48,000

98,000

80,000

(18,000)

5,000

50,000

60,000

110,000

100,000

(10,000)

6,000

50,000

72,000

122,000

120,000

(2,000)

7,000

50,000

84,000

134,000

140,000

6,000

8,000

50,000

96,000

146,000

160,000

14,000

9,000

50,000

108,000

158.000

180,000

22.000

10.000

50,000

120,000

170,000

200,000

30,000

At low levels of output, the firm incurs a loss as the revenue is not high enough to generate sufficient contribution to cover the fixed costs of the business. However, we see that as output rises from 6,000 units to 7,000, the firm moves from making losses to generating profits, which rise as output increases. We can infer, therefore, that the break-even level of output is somewhere between 6,000 and 7,000 units.

emery ltd manufactures three models of garden greenhouse 611289

Emery Ltd manufactures three models of garden greenhouse:

•standard model

•economy model

•deluxe model

All three types include the same type of aluminium. The aluminium costs £5 per square metre. The following is a unit cost statement for each type:

Standard
£

Economy
£

Deluxe
£

Selling price

80

55

120

Direct materials:

Glass

11

7

15

Aluminium

12

10

25

Direct labour

15

8

20

Sales for May 2015 are expected to be:

•standard model: 1,000 greenhouses

•economy model: 1,200 greenhouses

•deluxe model: 1,000 greenhouses.

Owing to a shortage of aluminium, the suppliers have stated that they can only deliver 6,000 m2to cover production during May 2015. This means that the management will have to alter their production plans, which will influence the level of sales of the various types of greenhouse. All greenhouses produced in each month are sold.

lucas runs a small firm that makes dining room tables the tables are largely handmad 611290

Lucas runs a small firm that makes dining room tables. The tables are largely handmade and in a year the following costs are expected to be incurred in the production of 500 tables:

£

Direct materials

50,000

Direct labour

30,000

Factory overheads: Fixed

6,000

Factory overheads: Variable

4,000

Selling and distribution costs

8,000

Administration costs

8,000

Total

106,000

Each table is sold for £300. All of the administration costs are fixed, whereas it is estimated that 50 per cent of the selling and distribution costs are fixed. A supplier has offered Lucas the chance to buy in tables which would be made to Lucas’s specification but could be supplied to him for £200 each. This would give Lucas the chance to close down his production facilities and allow him to concentrate on the selling and marketing of the tables. Would you advise Lucas to accept the offer to buy in the tables or to continue production? Initially, the purchase of tables from the outside supplier might be look like a good idea. The average cost of a table is £212 (£106,000/500 tables). However, this decision requires us not to use the average total (or full) cost, but the marginal cost of each table. If the decision is to be made on financial grounds alone, we should be comparing the marginal cost of each table with the price offered by the outside supplier.

alec powell runs a small firm that produces ornate wine racks for customers these ar 611291

Alec Powell runs a small firm that produces ornate wine racks for customers. These are high-quality products and Powell has gradually built up a reputation for high-quality output. Each wine rack sells for £50. A Spanish buyer, Ramadal, wants to import the wine racks for sale in her domestic market. She believes that market conditions would dictate a lower selling price and has offered to buy 500 wine racks from Powell at a price of £35 each. Powell is unsure whether or not to accept this order as it is for a price significantly lower than his normal selling price. His data below are based on the planned production level of 10,000 wine racks per year:

£

Direct materials

12.00

Direct labour

8.50

Variable overheads

2.50

Fixed overheads

6.00

Selling and distribution costs: Variable

4.00

Selling and distribution costs: Fixed

5.00

Total cost

38.00

Initially, the order looks, on financial grounds, an unwise one to accept. Each wine rack has a unit cost of £38, which implies that Powell would lose £3 on each wine rack sold to Ramadal. However, the £38 cost includes those costs that are not part of the marginal cost of producing a wine rack. Hence, we should look at the marginal cost of producing each wine rack.

fowler ltd manufactures a range of products one type of product is interactive white 611295

Fowler Ltd manufactures a range of products. One type of product is interactive whiteboards for schools and colleges. Data relating to the costs for October 2014 are as follows:

£

Direct materials

30,000

Direct labour

15,000

Manufacturing overheads:

Fixed

5,000

Variable

7,000

Selling and distribution costs

Fixed

15,000

Variable

2,000

The fixed costs are factory specific and are not specially related to the output of whiteboards. Planned output for October is 500 whiteboards. Each whiteboard is sold for £300. A foreign supplier has offered to supply Fowler Ltd with the whiteboards for £150.

(a)Produce financial data which assess the case for discontinuing production and buying in the whiteboards from the foreign supplier.

(b)Outline three factors which would suggest thatFowlerLtd should continue to produce whiteboards regardless of any cost savings that could be made in the short term.

hinds ltd as part of its product range produces the lsquo silvto rsquo this product 611296

Hinds Ltd, as part of its product range, produces the ‘SILVTO’. This product normally sells for £160. The following costs are associated with its production:

Cost per unit

£

Direct materials

34

Direct labour

75

Variable overheads

12

Fixed costs

25

The directors have recently received a request from a Latvian company offering to purchase 2,000 SILVTOs at a price of £140 each. Advise them as to whether they should accept or reject the Latvian offer.

hawkins ltd manufactures three types of wheelbarrow these wheelbarrows are designate 611297

Hawkins Ltd manufactures three types of wheelbarrow. These wheelbarrows are designated as A1, A2 and A3. All three types of wheelbarrow use the same grade of skilled labour and the wage rate of this labour is currently £6.50 per hour. The following is a unit cost statement for each type:

Al A2 A3

£ £ £

Direct materials

5

6

8

Direct labour

9

12

11

Other direct costs

3

2

5

Selling price per unit

25

32

28

The company plans to produce 5,000 of each wheelbarrow in March 2014. However, owing to a shortage of skilled labour, there are only 15,000 hours of skilled labour available.

(a)Calculate the most profitable production pattern to follow, given to the shortage of skilled labour.

(b)Show the number of each type of wheelbarrow that should be manufactured.

in producing one unit of product a21 the following standard cost for materials has b 611298

In producing one unit of product A21, the following standard cost for materials has been set:

20 metres × £7.00 per metre = £140.00

However, recent production data show that the firm is using 24 metres @ £5.50 per metre in the production of one unit:

Total materials variance = Actual materials cost – Standard materials cost

Actual materials cost

Standard materials cost

Materials cost variance

20 x £7 = £140

24 x £5.50 = £132

= £8 (Adverse)

data relating to standard labour cost of one unit of product bz5 is as follows 611299

Data relating to standard labour cost of one unit of product BZ5 is as follows:

800 hours @ £5.00 per hour = £4,000

The management have observed that the actual labour costs incurred in the production of one BZ5 are 750 hours at a wage rate of £6.00 per hour.

Total labour variance = Actual labour cost – Standard labour cost

Actual labour cost

Standard labour cost

Labour cost variance

750 x £6 = £4,500

800 x £5 = £4,000

= £50 (Adverse)

the manager of a business has budgeted to produce 600 000 units of output in 2017 th 611300

The manager of a business has budgeted to produce 600,000 units of output in 2017. The standard quantities for this budgeted output level are as follows:

Materials (metal)

450,000 m2

Materials (fabric)

200,000 m2

Labour

50,000 hours

If actual output fell short of budgeted levels and was 40 per cent less than expected, at 360,000 units of output, we should ‘flex’ these standard quantities to match the actual output level. This will mean reducing the standard quantities by 40 per cent, which gives us the following:

Materials (metal)

270,000 m2

Materials (fabric)

120,000 m2

Labour

30,000 hours

for the following business the data relating to the production of one unit is as fol 611301

For the following business, the data relating to the production of one unit is as follows:

Standard materials cost = 4 kg at £3.00 per kg = £12 per unit

Standard labour cost = 2 hours at £5.00 per hour = £10 per unit

If the budgeted output level is 500 units, the standard cost would be as follows:

£

Materials (2,000 kg)

6,000

Labour (1,000 hours)

5,000

Total

11,000

Details of actual production for the forecast period were as follows:

£

Materials

2,050 kg at £2.80 per kg =

5,740

Labour

960 hours at £5.10 per hour =

4,896

Total

10,636

Actual output was 450 units. Although the total cost of £10,636 is lower than the standard cost of £11,000, the actual output was lower than the budgeted output, which means we will need to redraft the budgeted quantities in the light of the actual output. These are as follows:

Materials 450 units × 4 kg = 1,800 kg × £3 = £5,400

Labour 450 units × 2 hours = 900 hours × £5 = £4,500.

the following data are available for a firm which manufactures one type of product 611303

The following data are available for a firm which manufactures one type of product:

Per unit

Variable overhead

10 hours @ £2.50 per hour

Fixed overhead

10 hours @ £4.00 per hour

The OARs for the variable and fixed overheads were calculated on the basis of labour hours. Budgeted output for the period was 2,000 units. Actual data for the period were recorded as follows:

Output

1,950 units

Variable overheads incurred:

£53,000

Fixed overheads incurred:

£77,500

Actual hours incurred:

22,000.

chase runs a sandwich shop she is compiling her end of year financial statements and 611271

Chase runs a sandwich shop. She is compiling her end-of-year financial statements and wants your advice on a number of items:

(a)She has a high degree of customer loyalty and wants to include this within the value of the business overall. She proposes including a value for goodwill on her balance sheet – in order to represent the estimated selling price of the business, which would be higher than the original cost of the business.

(b)She thinks she can boost her profits if she delays some of her payments.

(c)She uses her own car to make some deliveries to business customers. At present she includes none of these costs as business expenditure as it is her private car.

Advise Chase on whether her accounting treatment is correct. Refer to any relevant accounting concepts as part of your recommendations.

the company purchased buildings worth rs 4 80 000 pass journal entries in the books 618269

Ajay & Co. Ltd. was incorporated to acquire the business of Vivek whose balance sheet was as follows:

Liabilities

Assets

Creditors

24,000

Land

1,44,000

Capital

4,80,000

Furniture

30,000

Stock

2,34,000

Debtors

54,000

Bank

42,000

5,04,000

5,04,000

The purchase consideration was agreed at Rs.6,00,000 which was to be paid as:

  1. 16,800 equity shares of Rs.20 each
  2. Rs.2,04,000 in preference shares of Rs.100 each and
  3. the balance in cash

The company raised further capital by issue of 45,000 equity shares of Rs.20 each payable 10 on application and Rs.10 on allotment. After receipt of all the money for shares issued, the company purchased buildings worth Rs.4,80,000. Pass journal entries in the books of the company and prepare the balance sheet.

which were forfeited and reissued at a discount of 20 give journal entries to record 618270

A company was formed with an authorized capital of Rs.30,00,000 divided into 1,50,000 equity shares of Rs.100 each, 15,000 9% preference shares of Rs.100 each to purchase the going concern of M/s Raju & Co. the balance sheet of which stood as follows:

Liabilities

Assets

Bills Payable

21,000

Cash

27,000

Creditors

38,400

Debtors

45,000

Capital

7,92,600

Stock

2,10,000

Machinery

3,00,000

Buildings

2,70,000

8,52,000

8,52,000

The purchase price was agreed up on at Rs.10,50,000, payable as to Rs.3,00,000 in fully paid up equity shares, Rs.3,00,000 in fully paid preference shares,Rs.1,80,000 in redeemable debenture and the balance in cash.

The remaining shares were issued to and paid for by the public with the exception of Rs.30 per share on 360 equity shares which were forfeited and reissued at a discount of 20%. Give journal entries to record these transactions in the books of the company and prepare the initial balance sheet.

the company paid rs 10 000 for preliminary expenses pass the necessary journal entri 618271

The balance sheet of A, B and C stood as under when they sold off their concern to newly started joint stock company:

Liabilities

Assets

Capital A/c Z

Land& Buildings

2,80,000

A 4,50,000

Machinery

1,40,000

B 3,00,000

Stock

2,60,000

C 1,50.000

900,000

Bills Receivable

1,20,000

Creditors

80,000

Debtors

1,80,000

9,80,000

9,80,000

The joint stock company was started with a capital of Rs.20,00,000 divided into 10,000 shares of Rs.200 each. It also issues debentures for Rs.10,00,000 at a discount of 5%. The entire concern of A, B and C was taken up by the company on agreeing to pay them Rs.9,60,000 by the issue of 2,400 shares fully paid and Rs.4,80,000 in cash.

All the debentures and the remaining shares are issued to the public which are all taken up and paid for with the exception of 1,000 shares held by X on which he has not paid the final call of Rs.80 per share which were forfeited and reissued as fully paid at a discount of Rs.40 per share. The company paid Rs.10,000 for preliminary expenses. Pass the necessary journal entries in the books of the company and prepare its balance sheet.

however the company was forced to meet a contingent liability on bills discounted by 618273

On 1 January 2011, Vincent Ltd. acquired the business of Sagar taking all the assets with the exception of book debts which it undertook to collect on behalf of Sagar and out of the proceeds pay the liabilities owning at the date of transfer. At that date, the book debts amounted to Rs.2,70,000 and creditors Rs.1,85,000. The company agreed to do the job for vendors on 3% commission on amounts collected and 1% on amount paid. The company could not collect Rs.14,000 from the existing debtors and allowed Rs.1,500 as cash discount to the remaining debtors. The company could collect the time-barred debt (which was written off as bad by the vendors) of Rs.10,000. The company paid Rs.1,75,000 to creditors in satisfaction of total amount due. However, the company was forced to meet a contingent liability on bills discounted by the vendors of Rs.15,000. Give journal entries (including that of cash) in the books of Vincent Ltd.

accordingly on 31 march the vendors were paid the balance which the company holds to 618274

A and B are in partnership in computer components manufacturers. The balance sheet of A and B as on 31 December 2010 was as follows:

Liabilities

Assets

Creditors

2,62,100

Cash at Bank

82,500

Capital Accounts:

Debtors

5,28,600

A:7,95,100

Stock

4,40,900

B:7 95 100

15,90,200

Plant

5,00,300

Land & Buildings

3,00,000

18,52,300

18,52,300

They decided to sell their business as from the above date to Chips Ltd. The Company acquires the stock, plant, Land & Buildings and goodwill for which the vendors receive Rs.15,00,000 in fully paid up equity shares of Rs.100 each. The Company agrees to pay creditors and collect the book debts on behalf o the vendors for a commission of 3% on cash collected and 2% on amounts paid. By March 2011, the creditors have all been paid and the amount so paid is Rs.2,76,300. Also, the book debts have all been collected or accounted for and have realized Rs.5,21,300. Accordingly on 31 March, the vendors were paid the balance which the company holds to credit. Pass the journal entries in the books of the company and show the vendor’s suspense account.

the company paid the balance due to the vendors on 1 march 2011 ignore the question 618275

M/s Anju & Manju carrying on business in partnership decided to dissolve the firm and sell off the business to a limited company, a newly floated one, on 31 December 2010, when the firm’s position was as follows:

Liabilities

Assets

Creditors

2,55,000

Furniture

39,840

Capital Accounts

Stock

1,84,560

Arlin 4,08,000

Debtors

5,81,400

Ma* 2.04.000

612000

Cash

61,200

8,67,000

8,67,000

The arrangement with the limited company was as follows:

  1. Furniture and stock were purchased at balance sheet values less 10%.
  2. Goodwill of the firm was valued at Rs.1,21,440.
  3. The firm’s debtors, cash and creditors were not to be taken over by the company, but the company agreed to collect the book debts and discharge the liabilities of the vendor as agent, for which service the company was to be paid 3% on all collections from the vendor’s debtors and 2% cash paid to vendor’s creditors.
  4. The purchase price was to be paid to the company in fully paid ordinary shares of Rs.50 each at a premium of Rs.10 per share

The company received Rs.5,76,000 from vendor’s debtors in full satisfaction during the first 2 months after purchase of business. The creditors were paid off, Rs.3,000 being allowed by them as discount. The company paid the balance due to the vendors on 1 March 2011. (Ignore the question of in term distribution of cash.)

Write up journal entries and balance sheet in the company’s books.

goodwill is valued at rs 12 50 000 car is taken up by a at an agreed value of rs 1 5 618276

AB & Co. is converted into a limited company but the same books of accounts are desired to be continued. The balance sheet with reference to which the conversion has taken place is given as follows:

Liabilities

Assets

Capital Accounts

Machinery

15,00,000

A 30,00,000

Car

5,00,000

B 20,00,000

50,00,000

Stock

25,00,000

Reserve

5,00,000

Debtors

19,00,000

Creditors

10,00,000

Cash

1,00,000

65,00,000

65,00,000

Goodwill is valued at Rs.12,50,000. Car is taken up by A at an agreed value of Rs.1,50,000. Stock and machinery are valued at Rs.27,50,000 and 17,50,000, respectively.

The partners are issued required number of shares of Rs.100 each at par. Pass journal entries and draft the Balance Sheet of the Limited Company.

total purchase consideration was to be satisfied by the issue of fully paid equity s 618277

Sharma and Varma were carrying on business in partnership sharing profits and losses in the ratio 3:2. They sell their business to a limited company on 31 March 2011 and on that date their balance sheet stood as follows:

Liabilities

Assets

Capital Accounts

Plant & Machinery

3,60,000

Sharma 4,80,000

Land & Building

2,40,000

Varma 3.60.000

840,000

Investment

1,20,000

Reserve Fund

1,20,000

Stock

2,40,000

Creditors

2,40,000

Debtors

1,80,000

Cash and Bank

60,000

12,00,000

12,00,000

A limited company having an authorized capital of Rs.30,00,000 in equity shares of Rs.100 each purchased the above business under the following terms:

  1. Goodwill was valued at Rs.2,40,000.
  2. Depreciation on plant & machinery was @ 10% and appreciation of land & buildings was by 20%.
  3. A provision of doubtful debts @ 5% on debtors was allowed.
  4. Investment was taken over by Varma at an agreed value of Rs.96,000.
  5. Total purchase consideration was to be satisfied by the issue of fully paid equity shares of Rs.100 each. Show the journal entries and the revised balance sheet assuming that the same set of books is continued.

stock on hand on 31 december 2010 rs 2 00 000 show the needed journal entries in the 618278

On 1 January 2010, Patel sells his business to Rao Ltd. The company took over the assets and liabilities for a purchase consideration of Rs.4,25,000 being paid equally in cash and shares of Rs.50 each fully paid up. Patel received Rs.75,000 on account in 2010 from the company but no other entries have been made. The balance sheet of Patel’s business on the date of sale was as follows:

Liabilities

Assets

Capital

4,20,000

Fixed assets

1,40,000

Trade Creditors

1,80,000

Sundry Debtors

3,00,000

Stock

1,60,000

6,00,000

6,00,000

Fixed assets and stock were to be revalued at Rs.1,25,000 and Rs.1,40,000, respectively. In addition to matters arising out of the above, there were the following balances in the books of Rao Ltd. as on 31 December 2010:

Sundry Assets

Sundry Expenses

Patel Vendor

3,45,000

Salary

90,000

Debtors

2,75,000

Shop Rent

22,000

Fixed Assets

1,40,000

Printing Charges

16,000

StockTaken Over

1,60,000

Telephone Charges

27,000

Purchases

2,25,000

Bonus to Staff

18,000

Bank

64,000

Audit Fees

5,000

Share Capital

1,80,000

Sales

3,29,000

Sundry Creditors

1,90,000

Stock on hand on 31 December 2010 Rs.2,00,000. Show the needed journal entries in the books of the company to give effect to the above arrangement and prepare the adjusted trial balance P&L A/c of the year ended 31 December 2010 and the balance sheet as at that date of Rao Ltd.

you are required to show the vendor rsquo s accounts in the company rsquo s ledger a 618279

M and N are proprietors of a competing business. In order to protect their business, they float a company called M&N Ltd. with an authorized capital of Rs.30,00,000 divided into 1,80,000 equity shares of Rs.10 each and 12,000 12% preference shares of Rs.100 each.

On the date of the transfer, M’s assets amount to Rs.7,96,050 excluding goodwill. His liabilities at the same time amount to Rs.97,800. On the same date, N’s assets amount to Rs.5,85,000 excluding goodwill and his liabilities to Rs.45,000. It is agreed that the company will take over the assets and liabilities of both M and N and will issue to each 45,000 equity shares fully paid up and pay the balance in cash. It is also agreed that fully paid up preference shares will be issued to them on account of goodwill which is to be valued on the basis of two years’ purchases of the last three year’s profits which are as follows:

M

N

First year

48,000

24,000

Second year

36,000

33,000

Third year

33,000

42,000

In addition to the above, the public subscribe and pay in full for 60,000 equity shares and the remaining preference shares. The company also pays 45,000 as preliminary expenses. You are required to show the vendor’s accounts in the company’s ledger and prepare the balance sheet of the company after these transactions are completed.

the company decided to admit the claim out of the investments rs 24 000 worth are wo 618280

The following is the balance sheet of M/s P & Q as on 31 March 2011:

Liabilities

Assets

Sundry Creditors

80,000

Land & Building

4,00,000

Mrs. P”s Loan

3,60,000

Plant & Machinery

3,20,000

Capital Accounts

Stock in Trade

1,20,000

P:4,80,000

Sundry Debtors

2,00,000

Q:3.20.000

8,00,000

Investments

1,60,000

Cash at Bank

40,000

12,40,000

[2,40,000

Profits were shared as two-thirds to P and one- thirds to Q. On 1 April 2011, PQ Ltd. purchased the business of M/s P & Q for a payment of Rs.12,00,000 to be made in the form of equity shares of Rs.100 each credited as Rs.80 paid. The company did not take over the investments and Mrs. P’s loan. The company also decided to revalue land and buildings as Rs.5,40,000, plant and machinery at Rs.2,80,000; and to create a provision of doubtful debts at 5% on debtors. There was a claim by a worker for Rs.12,000 for injuries in an accident. The company decided to admit the claim. Out of the investments, Rs.24,000 worth are worthless. Mrs. P. agrees to receive the remaining investments and 2,800 shares of PQ Ltd. in settlement of her loan. The company decides to retain the books of account of the firm. Journalise.

which were forfeited and reissued as fully paid as rs 20 per share the company paid 618281

The balance sheet of X, Y & Z stood as follows when they sold off the concern to a newly started joint stock company.

Liabilities

Assets

Capital Accounts

Land & Buildings

1,68,000

X 2,70,000

Machinery

84,000

Y 1,80,000

Stock

1,56,000

Z 90.000

5,40,000

Debtors

1,08,000

Sundry Creditors

48,000

Bills Receivable

72,000

5,88,000

5,88,000

The joint stock company was started with a capital of Rs.12,00,000 divided into 12,000 shares of Rs.100 each. It also issued debentures for Rs.6,00,000 at a discount of 5%.

The entire concern of X, Y & Z was taken by the company on agreeing to pay them Rs.2,88,000 by the allotment of 2,880 shares fully paid and Rs.2,88,000 in cash.

All the debentures and the remaining shares are issued to the public which were all taken up and paid for with the exception of 1,200 shares held by Mr. C on which he did not pay the final call of Rs.40 per share which were forfeited and reissued as fully paid as Rs.20 per share. The company paid Rs.6,000 as preliminary expenses. Pass the necessary entries in the books of the company and prepare the balance sheet.

the total amount due to the vendor was settled by payment of rs 10 880 in cash and t 618282

X Ltd. was incorporated for taking over the business of Y from 1 April 2011. The following was the balance sheet of Y as on 31 March 2011:

Liabilities

Assets

Capital

2,01,600

Land & Buildings

3,20,000

Loan Creditors

2,40,000

Plant & Machinery

56,000

Trade Creditors

1,42,400

Furniture

40,000

Sundry Debtors

1,68,000

5,84,000

5,84,000

The company took over the business with fixed assets and loans on the following terms:

  1. The fixed assets should be depreciated at 10%.
  2. The value of goodwill is estimated at Rs. 1,60,000.

The company realized Rs.1,60,000 from sundry debtors as the agent of the vendor in full settlement and discharged all the creditors by paying Rs.1,36,000 for a commission of 3% on the amount collected and 2% on the amount paid. The loan creditors accepted 10% preference shares of Rs.100 each in discharge of the loans. After realization of the debts and discharge of the liabilities, the total amount due to the vendor was settled by payment of Rs.10,880 in cash and the balance in the shape of fully paid equity shares of Rs.10 each. Show purchase consideration and pass journal entries in the books of the company. Also give the balance sheet of the company after taking over the business of Y.

you are required to prepare a statement showing profit earned by the company in the 618290

Model: Pre- and post-incorporation profits (statement method) time and sales ratios and allocation Thambu Ltd. was registered on 1 October 2009 to acquire the running business of Shetty & Co. with effect from 1 April 2009. The following was the profit and loss account of the company as on 31 March 2010:

Particulars

Particulars

To Office Expenses

70,000

By Gross Profit b/d

3,00,000

To Formation Expenses (Written off)

20,000

To Stationery and Postage … To Selling

10,000

Expenses

90,000

To Director”s Fees

30,000

To Net Profit

80,000

3,00,000

3,00,000

You are required to prepare a statement showing profit earned by the company in the pre- and post-incorporation periods. The total sales for the year took place in the ratio of 1:2 before and after incorporation, respectively.

you are required to prepare a statement apportioning properly the net profit of the 618291

Model: Statement method. (Time and sales ratios; allocation and actual) Shiva Co. Ltd. was incorporated on 31 July 2009 to acquire the business of Bhagya & Co. as on 1 April 2009. The books of accounts disclosed the following on 31 March 2010:

  1. Sales for the year were Rs.24,20,000 (From 1 April 2009 to 31 July 2009 6,05,000; from 1 August 2009 to 31 March 2010 Rs.18,15,000)
  2. Gross profit for the year 2009–10: Rs.4,00,000
  3. Preliminary expenses written off: Rs.12,000; Managing director’s salary: Rs.20,000; Company secretary’s salary: 60,000
  4. Bad debts written off: Rs.12,520 (Prior to 31 July 3,020; after 31 July Rs.9,500)
  5. Depreciation: Rs.18,000; General expenses: Rs.42,000; Advertising: Rs.6,000; Interest on debentures: Rs.20,000

You are required to prepare a statement apportioning properly the net profit of the company as between

    1. Profits available for distribution
    2. Profits prior to incorporation

model statement method and weighted sales ratio a company was incorporated on 18 may 618292

Model: Statement method and weighted sales ratio) A company was incorporated on 18 May 2010 to take over a business from the proceeding 1 January. The accounts were made up to 31 December 2010 as usual and the trading and profit and loss account gave the following results:

Particulars

Particulars

To Opening Stock

1,00,000

By Sales

12,00,000

To Purchases

8,00,000

By Closing Stock

1,00,000

To Gross Profit c/d

4,00,000

13,00,000

13,0Q000

To Rent Rates and Insurance

15,000

By Gross Profit b/d

4,00000

To Director”s Fees

25,000

To Salaries

60,000

To Office Expenses

51,000

To Traveller”s Commission

16,000

To Discounts

20,000

To Bad Debts

4,000

To Audit Fees

12,000

To Depreciation

15,000

To Debenture Interest

9,000

To Net Profit

1,73,000

4,00,000

4,00000

It is ascertained that the sales for November and December are one and half times the average of those for the year, whilst those for February and April are only half the average, all the remaining months having average sales. Apportion the year’s profit between pre- and post-incorporation periods.

the following data relate to the financial records of bellwood ltd a manufacturer fo 611273

The following data relate to the financial records of Bellwood Ltd, a manufacturer, for the year ended 30 June 2019.

£

Inventory of raw materials as at 1 July 2018

15,665

Inventory of work-in-progress as at 1 July 2018

24,411

Purchases of raw materials

298,080

Direct power

11,180

Direct labour

301,500

Royalties

5,560

Supervisory wages

56,110

Factory rent

17,891

Machinery depreciation

6,600

Factory maintenance

4,513

Inventory as at 30 June 2019 was valued as follows:

Work-in-progress:

31,241

Raw materials:

14,186

The manufacturing account based on this data for the appropriate time period would appear as follows:

Bellwood Ltd Manufacturing account for year ended 30 June 2019

£

£

Opening inventory of raw materials

15,665

Add Purchases of raw materials

298,080

313,745

Less Closing inventory of raw materials

14,186

Cost of raw materials consumed

299,559

Direct labour

301,500

Direct power

11,180

Royalties

5,560

Prime cost

617,799

Add Indirect factory overheads:

Supervisory wages

56,110

Factory rent

17,891

Machinery depreciation

6,600

Factory maintenance

4,513

85,114

702,913

Add Opening work-in-progress

24,411

727,324

Less Closing work-in-progress

31,241

Production cost of goods completed

696,083

the lexden football club charges its members subscription fees the following data re 611274

The Lexden Football Club charges its members subscription fees. The following data relate to the year ended 31 December 2014:

£

Subscriptions owing to the club as at 1 January 2014

64

Subscriptions received in advance as at 1 January 2014

31

Subscriptions owing to the club as at 31 December 2014

95

Subscriptions received in advance as at 31 December 2014

42

Money received during 2014 in respect of subscriptions

397

The amount that would be credited to the income and expenditure account as income for the year ended 31 December 2014 can be calculated by constructing a ledger account for subscriptions. This would appear as follows:

Subscriptions

2014

£

2014

£

1 Jan

Balance b/d

64

1 Jan

Balance b/d

31

31 Dec

Income &

417

31 Dec

Money received

397

Expenditure

31 Dec

Balance c/d

42

31 Dec

Balance c/d

95

523

523

2015

2015

1 Jan

Balance b/d

95

1 Jan

Balance b/d

42

the activities relating to the bar of the meadowhead football club are as follows 611275

The activities relating to the bar of the Meadowhead Football Club are as follows:

Balances as at 12/31/2018

Balances as at 12/31/2019

£

£

Bar inventory

434

721

Bar creditors

667

398

Further details for the year ending 31 December 2019 are as follows:

Bar sales

6,455

Payments to bar suppliers

3,876

Bar staff wages

1,045

he following data relates to the year ended 31 december 2019 611245

The following data relates to the year ended 31 December 2019.

£

Sales

99,200

Purchases

65,100

Returns inwards

1,190

Returns outwards

550

Carriage inwards

1,975

Opening inventory

11,230

Closing inventory

13,460

The trading account would appear as follows:

Trading account for year ended 31 December 2019

£

£

Sales

99,200

Less Returns inwards

1,190

Net turnover

98,010

Less Cost of goods sold:

Opening inventory

11,230

Add Purchases

65,100

76,330

Add Carriage inwards

1,975

78,305

Less Returns outwards

550

77,755

Less Closing inventory

13,460

64,295

Gross profit

33,715

the other balances listed in the trial balance are not needed for the income stateme 611246

The other balances listed in the trial balance are not needed for the income statement but will be used in the construction of another financial statement – the balance sheet. A full income statement is illustrated in the following example.

Dr

£

Cr

£

Sales

124,500

Purchases

76,800

Inventory as at 1 January 2014

8,940

Machinery

15,000

Fixtures and fittings

8,450

Trade receivables

9,876

Trade payables

5,676

Bank overdraft

5,344

Electricity

1,630

Wages and salaries

21,340

General expenses

3,450

Advertising

274

Capital

35,000

Drawings

11,500

Maintenance

2,890

Commission received

2,130

Equipment

12,500

172,650

172,650

Inventory on hand as at 31 December 2014 was valued at £7,652.

Income statement for the year ending 31 December 2014

£

£

Sales

124,500

Less Cost of goods sold

Opening inventory

8,940

Add Purchases

76,800

85,740

Less Closing inventory

7,652

78,088

Gross profit

46,412

Add: Commission received

2,130

48,542

Less Expenses

Electricity

1,630

Wages and salaries

21,340

General expenses

3,450

Maintenance

2,890

Advertising

274

29,584

Net profit

18,958

the following data relate to the year end balances for the business of j holloway fr 611250

The following data relate to the year-end balances for the business of J Holloway. From this data construct the income statement for the year ended 31 December 2015.

£

Sales

100,000

Purchases

68,000

Opening inventory

5,400

Closing inventory

7,250

Carriage inwards

460

Rent

7,000

Insurance

2,100

Wages and salaries

18,500

Heating and lighting

870

the following data relate to the year end balances for the business of j fowler from 611251

The following data relate to the year-end balances for the business of J Fowler. From this data construct the income statement for the year ended 31 March 2018.

£

Sales

56,490

Purchases

24,654

Opening inventory

8,903

Closing inventory

6,563

Returns inwards

321

Returns outwards

450

General expenses

3,190

Commission received

2,100

Maintenance expenses

1,340

Wages

23,000

Office expenses

995

from the following trial balance produce an income statement for the year ended 31 m 611255

From the following trial balance produce an income statement for the year ended 31 March 2020 and a balance sheet as at that date.

L Blackmore Trial balance as at 31 March 2020

£

£

Sales

75,543

Purchases

45,342

Opening inventory

5,341

Business premises

195,000

Fixtures and fittings

27,800

Trade receivables

8,768

Trade payables

10,641

Returns inwards

434

Returns outwards

991

Rent and insurance

6,451

Office expenses

4,990

Salaries

18,090

Heating and lighting

1,721

Loan repayable in 2025

165,000

Capital

95,000

Drawings

23,430

Bank

9,808

347175

347,175

As at 31 March 2020, inventory was valued at £6,101.

the annual rent charge for a business is pound 6 000 this is paid in equal installme 611256

The annual rent charge for a business is £6,000. This is paid in equal installments every three months (ie £1,500 a quarter). Payments are made on 30 June, 30 September, 31 December and 31 March. However, the payment due on 31 December 2014 was not paid until 12 January 2015. If the business has drawn up its income statement for the year ended 31 December 2014, the ledger account for Rent will appear as follows:

Rent

2014

£

2014

£

31-Mar

Bank

1,500

31-Dec

Income statement

6,000

30-Jun

Bank

1,500

30-Sep

Bank

1,500

31-Dec

Balance c/d

1,500

6,000

6,000

2015

1-Jan

Balance b/d

1,500

a business arranges insurance for a vehicle purchased on 1 october 2016 the charge f 611257

A business arranges insurance for a vehicle purchased on 1 October 2016. The charge for insurance of £1,000 is to cover a six-month period starting on 1 October. Given, with a financial year-end following the calendar year, that half of this charge belongs to the next financial year, the account for insurance would appear as follows:

Insurance

2016

£

2016

£

1 Oct

Bank

1,000

31 Dec

Income statement

500

31 Dec

Balance c/d

500

1,000

1,000

2017

1 Jan

Balance b/d

500

the annual charge for business rates is pound 2 000 however in the year ending 31 de 611258

The annual charge for business rates is £2,000. However, in the year ending 31 December 2015 a business had paid £314 in advance for 2016. By 31 December 2016 the business had paid £275 in advance for 2017. The account for business rates would appear as follows:

Business rates

2016

£

2016

£

1 Jan

Balance b/d

314

31 Dec

Income statement

2,000

31 Dec

Bank

1,961

31 Dec

Balance c/d

275

2,275

2,275

2017

2017

1 Jan

Balance b/d

275

a vehicle costs pound 15 000 and is to be depreciated using the reducing balance met 611260

A vehicle costs £15,000 and is to be depreciated using the reducing balance method with a percentage rate of 20 per cent. Depreciation to be charged on this vehicle will be as follows:

e

Cost of vehicle

16,000

Depreciation in year 1 (20% of £15,000)

3,000

Net book value at end of year 1

12,000

Depreciation in year 2 (20% of £12,000)

2,400

Net book value at end of year 2

9,600

Depreciation in year 3 (20% of £9,600)

1,920

Net book value at end of year 3

7,680

Depreciation in year 4 (20% of £7,680)

1,636

Net book value at end of year 5

6,144

Depreciation in year 5 (20% of £5,144)

1,229

4,915

a business purchases machinery at a cost of pound 30 000 it is expected to have a li 611261

A business purchases machinery at a cost of £30,000. It is expected to have a life of six years, after which it will have no residual value. It is to be depreciated using the straight-line method. The annual depreciation for the machinery will be £5,000. This would appear as a charge in the income statement for each of the six years. The relevant section of the balance sheet showing machinery would appear at the end of each year as follows:

Balance sheet

Year

Year

Year

Year

Year

Year

extract at year-end date

1

2

3

4

5

6

Non-current assets

£

£

£

£

£

£

Machinery at cost

30,000

30,000

30,000

30,000

30,000

30,000

Less depreciation

5,000

10,000

15,000

20,000

25,000

30,000

Net book value/carrying amount

25,000

20,000

15,000

10,000

5,000

0

delivery van originally cost pound 18 000 and was to be depreciated at 25 per cent u 611262

delivery van originally cost £18,000 and was to be depreciated at 25 per cent using the reducing balance method. The van was held by the business for two years before it was sold for £8,500. The profit or loss on the disposal would be calculated as follows: we need to ascertain the net book value of the asset. Therefore we need to calculate the depreciation for each of the two years:

•In year 1, the depreciation on the van would have been 25% × £18,000 = £4,500.

•In year 2, the depreciation would have been 25% × £13,500 (net book value at end of year 1) = £3,375.

•This means the net book value of the van at the moment of sale would have been £10,125.

•Therefore, the business made a loss on the disposal of this van of £1,625 (£8,500– £10,125).

the following trial balance and additional information covers all the new adjustment 611263

The following trial balance and additional information covers all the new adjustments featured in this chapter. The income statement and balance sheet constructed from this trial balance are accompanied by explanatory notes which should be viewed carefully.

Ian Yates Trial balance as at 31 December 2018

£

£

Opening inventory

12,560

Sales

328,000

Purchases

185,000

General expenses

15,755

Salaries and wages

51,010

Electrical and power expenses

7,590

Insurance

2,310

Rent

6,745

Bad debts

690

Plant

110,000

Equipment

32,000

Provision for depreciation: Plant

22,000

Provision for depreciation: Equipment

8,000

Provision for bad debts

220

Trade receivables

8,760

Trade payables

11,120

Bank

5,420

Capital

88,000

Drawings

19,500

457,340

457,340

Additional information:

1Inventory in trade at year end was valued at £15,105.

2The following expenses were accrued as at the year end:

aWages and salaries: £2,780 outstanding

bElectrical and power expenses: £310 outstanding.

3Insurance prepaid at the year end amounted to £160.

4The allowance for doubtful debts is to be maintained at 5% of outstanding receivables at the year end.

5Depreciation is to be provided for as follows:

aPlant: 20% straight-line method

bEquipment: 20% reducing balance method.

from the following trial balance and additional information construct an income stat 611264

From the following trial balance and additional information construct an income statement for the year ended 31 March 2016 and a balance sheet as at that date.

K Emery Trial balance as at 31 March 2016

Dr £

Cr £

Sales

92,300

Purchases

65,620

Opening inventory

4,232

Premises

85,000

Vehicles

11,200

Debtors

3,453

Creditors

5,981

Returns inwards

328

Returns outwards

209

General expenses

1,897

Office expenses

2,310

Wages

14,600

Insurance

880

Provision for depreciation on premises

12,000

Provision for depreciation on vehicles

4,500

Capital

85,000

Drawings

13,200

Bank

2,730

202,720

202,720

Additional information:

(a)Inventory as at 31 March was valued at £6,790.

(b)As at 31 March 2016 the following balances were prepaid:

iOffice expenses £450

iiInsurance £260.

(c)Depreciation is to be provided for as follows:

iPremises:2% on cost

iiVehicles:20% on reducing balance.

from the following trial balance and additional information construct an income stat 611265

From the following trial balance and additional information construct an income statement for the year ended 31 July 2017 and a balance sheet as at that date.

K Atkinson Trial balance as at 31 July 2017

Dr £

Cr £

Sales

168,000

Purchases

75,000

Opening inventory

11,000

Property

200,000

Machinery

28,000

Debtors

7850

Creditors

5,670

General expenses

5,400

Maintenance expenses

8,900

Wages

35,000

Office expenses

5,470

Provision for depreciation on property

5,500

Provision for depreciation on machinery

11,000

Provision for doubtful debts

250

Capital

148,000

Drawings

17,500

Bank

4,300

Loan

60,000

398,420

398,420

Additional information:

1Inventory as at 31 July 2017 is valued at £19,800.

2Depreciation is to be provided on cost at the following rates:

aProperty2%

bMachinery20%.

3Wages still owing as at 31 July 2017 were £2,400.

4Maintenance prepaid as at 31 July 2017 was £450.

5The provision for doubtful debts is to be maintained at 4% of debtors.

the balance of trade receivables as at 31 december is pound 48 000 however this tota 611268

The following data are available about the firm’s trade receivables:

•The balance of trade receivables as at 31 December is £48,000. However, this total includes an amount of £1,200 which is to be written off as a bad debt.

•In addition, the firm has an existing balance on its provision for doubtful debtors of £1,100 and it wishes to maintain the value of this provision at 2% of outstanding debtors at the year-end.

What would be the balance of trade receivables on the balance sheet?

How much would appear in respect of these entries in the income statement?

entity a acquired entity b but did not capitalise b s finance leases and internally 611086

Items not recognised under previous GAAP

Entity A acquired Entity B but did not capitalise B”s finance leases and internally generated customer lists under its previous GAAP.

Upon first-time adoption of IFRSs, Entity A recognises the finance leases in its opening IFRS statement of financial position using the amounts that Entity B would recognise in its opening IFRS statement of financial position. The resulting adjustment to the net assets at the date of transition is reflected in retained earnings; goodwill is not restated to reflect the net assets that would have been recognised at the date of acquisition. However, Entity A does not recognise the customer lists in its opening IFRS statement of financial position, because Entity B is not permitted to capitalise internally generated customer lists. Any value that might have been attributable to the customer lists would remain subsumed in goodwill in A”s opening IFRS statement of financial position.

Entity C acquired Entity D but did not recognise D”s brand name as a separate intangible asset under its previous GAAP.

Upon first-time adoption of IFRSs, Entity C will not recognise D”s brand name in its opening IFRS statement of financial position because Entity D would not have been permitted under IAS 38 to recognise it as an asset in its own individual statement of financial position. Again, any value that might have been attributable to the brand name would remain subsumed in goodwill in C”s opening IFRS statement of financial position.

entity a s first ifrs financial statements are for a reporting period that ends on 3 611087

Business combination example

Background

Entity A”s first IFRS financial statements are for a reporting period that ends on 31 December 2013 and include comparative information for 2012 only. On 1 July 2009, Entity A acquired 100 per cent of Entity B. Under its previous GAAP, Entity A:

(a) classified the business combination as an acquisition by Entity A;

(b) measured the assets acquired and liabilities assumed at the following amounts under previous GAAP at 31 December 2011 (date of transition to IFRSs):

(i) identifiable assets less liabilities for which IFRSs require cost-based measurement at a date after the business combination: €200 (with a tax base of €150 and an applicable tax rate of 30 per cent);

(ii) pension liability (for which the present value of the defined benefit obligation measured under IAS 19 is €130 and the fair value of plan assets is €100): €nil (because Entity A used a pay-as-you-go cash method of accounting for pensions under its previous GAAP). The tax base of the pension liability is also €nil;

(iii) goodwill: €180;

(c) did not, at the date of acquisition, recognise deferred tax arising from temporary differences associated with the identifiable assets acquired and liabilities assumed.

In its opening (consolidated) IFRS statement of financial position, Entity A:

(a) classifies the business combination as an acquisition by Entity A even if the business combination would have qualified under IFRS 3 as a reverse acquisition by Entity B; [IFRS 1.C4(a)];

(b) does not adjust the accumulated amortisation of goodwill. Entity A tests the goodwill for impairment under IAS 36 and recognises any resulting impairment loss, based on conditions that existed at the date of transition to IFRSs. If no impairment exists, the carrying amount of the goodwill remains at €180; [IFRS 1.C4(g)];

(c) for those net identifiable assets acquired for which IFRSs require cost-based measurement at a date after the business combination, treats their carrying amount under previous GAAP immediately after the business combination as their deemed cost at that date; [IFRS 1 C4(e)];

(d) does not restate the accumulated depreciation and amortisation of the net identifiable assets in (c) above, unless the depreciation methods and rates under previous GAAP result in amounts that differ materially from those required under IFRSs (for example, if they were adopted solely for tax purposes and do not reflect a reasonable estimate of the asset”s useful life under IFRSs). If no such restatement is made, the carrying amount of those assets in the opening IFRS statement of financial position equals their carrying amount under previous GAAP at the date of transition to IFRSs (€200); [IFRS 1 IG7];

(e) if there is any indication that identifiable assets are impaired, tests those assets for impairment, under IAS 36,based on conditions that existed at the date of transition to IFRSs (see 7.14);

(f) recognises the pension liability, and measures it, at the present value of the defined benefit obligation (€130) less the fair value of the plan assets (€100), giving a carrying amount of €30, with a corresponding debit of €30 to retained earnings. [IFRS 1.C4(d)]. However, if Entity B had already adopted IFRSs in an earlier period, Entity A would measure the pension liability at the same amount as in Entity B”s individual financial statements; [IFRS 1.D17, IG Example 9];

(g) recognises a net deferred tax liability of €6 (€20 at 30 per cent) arising from:

(i) the taxable temporary difference of €50 (€200 less €150) associated with the identifiable assets acquired and non-pension liabilities assumed; less

(ii) the deductible temporary difference of €30 (€30 less €nil) associated with the pension liability.

Entity A recognises the resulting increase in the deferred tax liability as a deduction from retained earnings. [IFRS 1 Appendix C4(k)]. If a taxable temporary difference arises from the initial recognition of the goodwill, Entity A does not recognise the resulting deferred tax liability. [IAS 12.15(a)].

entity a acquired an online retailer entity b before its date of transition to ifrss 611088

Recognition and derecognition of acquired intangible assets

Entity A acquired an online retailer, Entity B, before its date of transition to IFRSs. Under its previous GAAP, Entity A recognised an intangible asset of ¥1,200 related to ‘deferred marketing costs, which does not meet the recognition criteria under IFRSs. Entity A also acquired customer relationships with a fair value of ¥900 that do meet the recognition criteria under IFRS 3, but which it did not recognise as an intangible asset under its previous GAAP.

Upon adoption of IFRSs, Entity A is required to derecognise the ‘deferred marketing costs intangible asset and increase the carrying amount of goodwill for a corresponding amount. Nevertheless, the customer relationship intangible asset that is subsumed in goodwill cannot be recognised as its carrying amount in the balance sheet of the acquiree, Entity B, would have been nil.

entity c acquired a business before its date of transition to ifrss the cost of acqu 611089

Impairment testing of goodwill on first-time adoption

Entity C acquired a business before its date of transition to IFRSs. The cost of acquisition was €530 and Entity C allocated the purchase price as follows:

Properties, at carry-over cost

450

Liabilities, at amortised cost

(180)

Goodwill

260

Purchase price

530

The goodwill under Entity C”s previous GAAP relates entirely to the properties that had a fair value at date of acquisition that was significantly in excess of their value on a carry-over cost basis. In Entity C”s opening IFRS statement of financial position the same assets, liabilities and goodwill are valued as follows:

Properties, at fair value

750

Liabilities, at amortised cost

(180)

Provisional IFRS goodwill (before impairment test)

260

Total carrying amount

830

Entity C used the option to measure the properties at fair value at its date of transition in its opening IFRS statement of financial position. However, IFRS 1 does not permit goodwill to be adjusted to reflect the extent to which the increase in fair value relates to other assets recognised at the time of the acquisition. The total carrying amount of the acquired net assets including goodwill of €830 may now exceed the recoverable amount. When Entity C tests the ‘provisional IFRS goodwill for impairment on first-time adoption of IFRSs, the recoverable amount of the business is determined to be €620. Accordingly, it will have to recognise an impairment of goodwill of €210 and disclose this impairment under IFRS 1.

In some cases the write-off will completely eliminate the goodwill and thereby any ‘double counting. However, in this particular case the remaining goodwill of €50 in truth represents goodwill that was internally generated between the date of acquisition and the date of transition to IFRSs.

on 1 january 2007 entity a acquired an investment in entity b which it accounts for 611090

Previous GAAP impairment of goodwill embedded in equity method investment

Scenario 1 – Impairment was recognised on the notional goodwill element embedded in the investment under previous GAAP

On 1 January 2007, Entity A acquired an investment in Entity B, which it accounts for using the equity method (the investment would qualify as an associate under IFRSs). The cost of investment was CU 1,500 compared to B”s identifiable net assets of CU 500; therefore, notional goodwill of CU 1,000 was included in the carrying value of the associate at that time. The previous GAAP required the entity to:

  • Amortise the notional goodwill of the associate on a straight-line basis.
  • Test the equity accounted investment for impairment at the investment level.
  • Allocate and recognise the impairment loss (if any) against notional goodwill.

Goodwill impairments (including those on notional goodwill) are unable to be reversed and therefore affect future amortisation.

Therefore, under its previous GAAP, Entity A tested its investment in Entity B for impairment, and recognised an impairment loss of CU 500 in the year ended 31 December 2008. This reduced the notional goodwill to CU 500, which Entity A amortises over 10 years (CU 50 annually). By its date of transition to IFRS, 1 January 2012, notional goodwill had been amortised by 5 years × CU 50 (CU 250), reducing notional goodwill to CU 250. Net assets are unchanged since acquisition, leaving the investment with a carrying value of CU 750.

Entity A applies the exemption from retrospective restatement for past acquisitions of investments in associates. Therefore, at 1 January 2012, its transition date, Entity A also tests the investment for impairment in accordance with IAS 36. At 1 January 2012, the value of the investment in Entity B recovered, and is CU 1,500 based on its current listed share price. Under this scenario, the previous impairment to notional goodwill is not reversed, since the use of the business combination exemption as it applies to associates means that the goodwill determined under the earlier acquisition accounting together with the subsequent accounting up to the transition date is effectively grandfathered in a similar way in which a subsidiary”s goodwill would be, in accordance with paragraph C4(g) of IFRS 1. Therefore, the carrying value of the notional goodwill as determined under previous GAAP becomes the embedded notional goodwill at transition unless specifically required to be adjusted. [IFRS 1 Appendix C4(h)].

Scenario 2 – Impairment was recognised at the investment level under previous GAAP

Same as in Scenario 1, except that Entity A”s previous GAAP impairment test was performed at the investment level, using a test similar to that required under IAS 36. Because of applying this approach, when Entity A recognised an impairment loss of CU 500 in the year ended 31 December 2008, the carrying amount of the investment was CU 1,000, which remained the carrying amount at the date of transition, 1 January 2012. Similar to Scenario 1, at 1 January 2012, the value of the investment in Entity B has recovered, and is CU 1,500 based on its current listed share price.

Under this scenario, the previous impairment of notional goodwill, which is embedded in the full amount of the investment, is reversed. However, the impairment can only be reversed up to the pre-impairment equity accounted value that results from the application of the business combination exemption.

entity c acquired a business before its date of transition to ifrss and agreed to ma 611093

Earn-out clause in acquisition

Entity C acquired a business before its date of transition to IFRSs and agreed to make an initial payment to the seller together with further payments based on a multiple of future profits of the acquiree. The fair value of the earn-out, which is contingent on future profits, changes after the acquisition date but was never recognised under previous GAAP. Under Entity C”s previous GAAP any goodwill was written off against equity as incurred.

At its date of transition to IFRSs, Entity C will account for changes in the fair value of the earn-out since acquisition and recognise the effect in retained earnings. [IFRS 1 Appendix C4(i)(ii)].

entity a s date of transition to ifrss is 1 january 2012 under its previous gaap ent 611094

Subsidiary not consolidated under previous GAAP

Background

Entity A”s date of transition to IFRSs is 1 January 2012. Under its previous GAAP, Entity A did not consolidate its 75 percent interest in Entity B, which it acquired in a business combination on 15 July 2009. On 1 January 2012:

(a) the cost of Entity A”s investment in Entity B is $180.

(b) under IFRSs, Entity B would measure its assets at $500 and its liabilities (including deferred tax under IAS 12) at $300. On this basis, Entity B”s net assets are $200 under IFRSs.

Application of requirements

Entity A consolidates Entity B. The consolidated statement of financial position at 1 January 2012 includes:

(a) Entity B”s assets at $500 and liabilities at $300;

(b) non-controlling interests of $50 (25 per cent of [$500 – $300]); and

(c) goodwill of $30 (cost of $180 less 75 per cent of [$500 – $300]). Entity A tests the goodwill for impairment under IAS 36 and recognises any resulting impairment loss, based on conditions that existed at the date of transition to IFRSs.

entity a s first ifrs financial statements are for a period that ends on 31 december 611096

Restatement of intangible assets, deferred tax and non-controlling interests

Entity A”s first IFRS financial statements are for a period that ends on 31 December 2013 and include comparative information for 2012 only. On 1 July 2009, Entity A acquired 75% of subsidiary B. Under its previous GAAP, Entity A assigned an initial carrying amount of £200 to intangible assets that would not have qualified for recognition under IAS 38. The tax base of the intangible assets was £nil, giving rise to a deferred tax liability (at 30%) of £60. Entity A measured non-controlling interests as their share of the fair value of the identifiable net assets acquired. Goodwill arising on the acquisition was capitalised as an asset in A”s consolidated financial statements.

On 1 January 2012 (the date of transition to IFRSs), the carrying amount of the intangible assets under previous GAAP was £160, and the carrying amount of the related deferred tax liability was £48 (30% of £160).

Under IFRS 1, Entity A reclassifies intangible assets that do not qualify for recognition as separate assets under IAS 38, together with the related deferred tax liability of £48 and non-controlling interests, as part of goodwill. The related non-controlling interests amount to £28 (25% of £112 (£160 minus £48)). Entity A makes the following adjustment in its opening IFRS statement of financial position:

£

£

Goodwill

84

Deferred tax liability

48

Non-controlling interests

28

Intangible assets

160

Entity A tests the goodwill for impairment under IAS 36 and recognises any resulting impairment loss, based on conditions that existed at the date of transition to IFRSs.

This means that there is a difference in treatment depending on whether the first-time adopter is accounting for acquired intangible assets that it previously recognised in accordance with its previous GAAP or whether it had subsumed the intangible asset into goodwill. In the first case it must recognise a deferred tax liability and adjust opening reserves. By contrast in the second case it would have to decrease the carrying amount of goodwill and adjust deferred tax and minority interests as necessary, as discussed at above. The IASB discussed this issue in October 2005, but decided not to propose an amendment to address this inconsistency.

an audit team has worked for a number of months to create the city pre department au 611223

Fire

An audit team has worked for a number of months to create the city pre department audit program and audit document. They are now ready to begin scheduling the audit for each of the city save stations. Upon contacting Station 3, they speak to Chief Dawson, who is very excited about the audit process. She wants to make improvements in her station and hopes that the audit will help to give her direction. They also end that she is scheduled to attend a national fire conference on two of the three days for which the audit is scheduled. She will be there on the first day of the audit, but will be out of town the last two days of the audit. She would like to maintain the current schedule for the audit because rescheduling the audit would mean pushing it back two months.

acme manufacturing has determined that all annual safety audits will be managed as a 611232

safety

Acme Manufacturing has determined that all annual safety audits will be managed as attorney-client privileged. The auditor will be responsible for conducting the audit and completing the report to be submitted directly to the in-house legal counsel. The in-house legal counsel will then distribute the report to a select group of people within the organization. Shelly, the manager for the east region, would like to for-ward the audit report to all of her plants so that they can learn from what occurred in the audit and become better prepared for their audits, which are scheduled for later in the year.

dave is the new security manager for acme logistics 611233

Security

Dave is the new security manager for Acme Logistics. He is a recent graduate with a bachelor’s degree in security management and has only been with Acme for three months. Dave had not yet been hired when the annual security audit was conducted six months ago. He is appreciative of the effort the auditor has made to follow up through e-mail. However, Dave’s lack of experience has caused him difficulty in understanding how to approach correcting certain decencies. He contacts the audit-tor by phone and requests a site visit by the auditor so he can work with the auditor in person to gain a clear understanding of the issues and potential solutions.

open and maintain the ledger accounts of p shortland based on the following transact 611240

Open and maintain the ledger accounts of P Shortland based on the following transactions:

1 November

Paid £2,000 of own money into bank.

4 November

Bought second-hand car for business use on credit from J Bellwood for £1,1300.

7 November

Withdrew £200 out of bank for use as petty cash.

12 November

Paid Bellwood cheque £500 towards car purchase.

the following transactions relate to h taylor a customer of the firm for february 20 611241

The following transactions relate to H Taylor, a customer of the firm, for February 2015. Construct the ledger account of Taylor for the following transactions and calculate the balance on his account by the end of the month.

1-Feb

Sell goods on credit to Taylor for £560. 6 Feb He returns £25 of goods.

9-Feb

A further £280 of goods is sold to Taylor.

15-Feb

We receive a cheque from Taylor for £500 in full settlement of the goods sold on 1 Feb (the difference in the amounts represents a discount we allow Taylor as a prompt payer).

20-Feb

Taylor returns £20 of the goods sold on 9 Feb.

construct the double entry accounts for the following transactions of a sole trader 611242

Construct the double-entry accounts for the following transactions of a sole trader and balance off each account at the end of the month:

1-Jul

Started own business by placing £3,000 into the bank account and immediately transferred £400 into the cash box.

3-Jul

Bought inventory on credit from K Atkinson for £231.

7-Jul

Paid insurance by cheque £500.

10-Jul

Bought inventory for £87, paying by cash.

16-Jul

Sold inventory on credit to H Taylor for £450.

19-Jul

Taylor returns £80 of the inventory.

27-Jul

Paid sundry expenses £120 by cash.

31-Jul

Taylor pays his account in full by cheque.

during the year to 31 march 2013 a firm earns pound 50 000 sales revenue during the 611244

During the year to 31 March 2013, a firm earns £50,000 sales revenue. During the year it spent £24,000 purchasing goods for resale. Inventory as at 1 April 2012 was valued at £8,500 and by the end of the year this had risen to £9,900.

£

£

Sales

50,000

Less Cost of goods sold:

Opening inventory

8,500

Purchases

24,000

32,500

Less Closing inventory

9,900

22,600

Gross profit

27,400

the entity intends to transfer the building to a buyer after it vacates the building 611061

Meaning of ‘available for immediate sale

1 Disposal of a headquarters building

An entity is committed to a plan to sell its headquarters building and has initiated actions to locate a buyer.

(a) The entity intends to transfer the building to a buyer after it vacates the building. The time necessary to vacate the building is usual and customary for sales of such assets. The criterion of being available for immediate sale would therefore be met at the plan commitment date.

(b) The entity will continue to use the building until construction of a new headquarters building is completed. The entity does not intend to transfer the existing building to a buyer until after construction of the new building is completed (and it vacates the existing building). The delay in the timing of the transfer of the existing building imposed by the entity (seller) demonstrates that the building is not available for immediate sale. The criterion would not be met until construction of the new building is completed, even if a firm purchase commitment for the future transfer of the existing building is obtained earlier.

2 Sale of a manufacturing facility

An entity is committed to a plan to sell a manufacturing facility and has initiated actions to locate a buyer. At the plan commitment date, there is a backlog of uncompleted customer orders.

(a) The entity intends to sell the manufacturing facility with its operations. Any uncompleted customer orders at the sale date will be transferred to the buyer. The transfer of uncompleted customer orders at the sale date will not affect the timing of the transfer of the facility. The criterion of being available for immediate sale would therefore be met at the plan commitment date.

(b) The entity intends to sell the manufacturing facility, but without its operations. The entity does not intend to transfer the facility to a buyer until after it ceases all operations of the facility and eliminates the backlog of uncompleted customer orders. The delay in the timing of the transfer of the facility imposed by the entity (seller) demonstrates that the facility is not available for immediate sale. The criterion would not be met until the operations of the facility cease, even if a firm purchase commitment for the future transfer of the facility were obtained earlier.

3 Land and buildings acquired through foreclosure

An entity acquires through foreclosure a property comprising land and buildings that it intends to sell.

(a) The entity does not intend to transfer the property to a buyer until after it completes renovations to increase the property”s sales value. The delay in the timing of the transfer of the property imposed by the entity (seller) demonstrates that the property is not available for immediate sale. The criterion of being available for immediate sale would therefore not be met until the renovations are completed.

(b) After the renovations are completed and the property is classified as held for sale but before a firm purchase commitment is obtained, the entity becomes aware of environmental damage requiring remediation. The entity still intends to sell the property. However, the entity does not have the ability to transfer the property to a buyer until after the remediation is completed. The delay in the timing of the transfer of the property imposed by others before a firm purchase commitment is obtained demonstrates that the property is not available for immediate sale The criterion would not continue to be met. The property would be reclassified as held and used in accordance with the requirements discussed.

an entity in the power generating industry is committed to a plan to sell a disposal 611062

Exceptions to the ‘one year rule Scenario illustrating (a) above

An entity in the power generating industry is committed to a plan to sell a disposal group that represents a significant portion of its regulated operations. The sale requires regulatory approval, which could extend the period required to complete the sale beyond one year. Actions necessary to obtain that approval cannot be initiated until after a buyer is known and a firm purchase commitment is obtained. However, a firm purchase commitment is highly probable within one year. In that situation, the conditions for an exception to the one year requirement would be met.

Scenario illustrating (b) above An entity is committed to a plan to sell a manufacturing facility in its present condition and classifies the facility as held for sale at that date. After a firm purchase commitment is obtained, the buyer”s inspection of the property identifies environmental damage not previously known to exist. The entity is required by the buyer to make good the damage, which will extend the period required to complete the sale beyond one year. However, the entity has initiated actions to make good the damage, and satisfactory rectification of the damage is highly probable. In that situation, the conditions for an exception to the one year requirement would be met.

Scenario illustrating (c) above An entity is committed to a plan to sell a non-current asset and classifies the asset as held for sale at that date.

(a) During the initial one year period, the market conditions that existed at the date the asset was classified initially as held for sale deteriorate and, as a result, the asset is not sold by the end of that period. During that period, the entity actively solicited but did not receive any reasonable offers to purchase the asset and, in response, reduced the price. The asset continues to be actively marketed at a price that is reasonable given the change in market conditions, and the criteria regarding availability for immediate sale which is highly probable are therefore met. In that situation, the conditions for an exception to the one year requirement would be met. At the end of the initial one year period, the asset would continue to be classified as held for sale.

(b) During the following one year period, market conditions deteriorate further, and the asset is not sold by the end of that period. The entity believes that the market conditions will improve and has not further reduced the price of the asset. The asset continues to be held for sale, but at a price in excess of its current fair value. In that situation, the absence of a price reduction demonstrates that the asset is not available for immediate sale. In addition, to meet the condition that a sale be highly probable also requires an asset to be marketed at a price that is reasonable in relation to its current fair value. Therefore, the conditions for an exception to the one year requirement would not be met. The asset would be reclassified as held and used in accordance with the requirements discussed.

measuring and presenting subsidiaries acquired with a view to sale and classified as 611063

Measuring and presenting subsidiaries acquired with a view to sale and classified as held for sale Entity A acquires an entity H, which is a holding company with two subsidiaries, S1 and S2. S2 is acquired exclusively with a view to sale and meets the criteria to be classified as held for sale. Accordingly, S2 is also a discontinued operation .The fair value less costs to sell of S2 is €135. A accounts for S2 as follows:

  • initially, A measures the identifiable liabilities of S2 at fair value, say at €40;
  • initially, A measures the acquired assets as the fair value less costs to sell of S2 (€135) plus the fair value of the identifiable liabilities (€40), i.e. at €175;
  • at the balance sheet date, A remeasures the disposal group at the lower of its cost and fair value less costs to sell, say at €130. The liabilities are remeasured in accordance with applicable IFRSs, say at €35. The total assets are measured at €130 + €35, i.e. at €165;
  • at the balance sheet date, A presents the assets and liabilities separately from other assets and liabilities in its consolidated financial statements as illustrated in the statement of comprehensive income, A presents the total of the post-tax profit or loss of S2 and the post-tax gain or loss recognised on the subsequent remeasurement of S2, which equals the remeasurement of the disposal group from €135 to €130.

Further analysis of the assets and liabilities or of the change in value of the disposal group is not required.

The final sentence in the above example says no further analysis of the assets and liabilities is required. This must refer to there being no such disclosure requirement for financial statements. A detailed purchase price analysis and tracking of the acquired entity may still be needed, notwithstanding a partial relaxation of what is required to be disclosed by IFRS 5. This may be needed to be able to determine the split between gross assets and liabilities and how movements in the carrying amounts are reflected in profit or loss, or other comprehensive income.

IFRS 5 explains that disclosures in other IFRSs do not apply to non-current assets (or disposal groups) classified as held for sale or discontinued operations unless those IFRSs require:

  • specific disclosures in respect of non-current assets (or disposal groups) classified as held for sale or discontinued operations; or
  • disclosures about the measurement of assets and liabilities within a disposal group that are not within the scope of the measurement requirement of IFRS 5 and such disclosures are not already provided in the other notes to the financial statements.

The standard goes on to say that additional disclosures about non-current assets (or disposal groups) classified as held for sale or discontinued operations may be necessary to comply with the general requirements of IAS 1, in particular paragraphs 15 and 125 of that Standard.Those provisions deal with fair presentation and estimation uncertainty and are discussed respectively.

an entity plans to dispose of a group of its assets as an asset sale the assets form 611064

Allocation of impairment loss to the components of a disposal group [IFRS 5.IG10]

An entity plans to dispose of a group of its assets (as an asset sale). The assets form a disposal group, and are measured as follows:

Carrying amount at Carrying amount as

the reporting date remeasured immediately

 before classification before classification as

 as held for sale held for sale

Goodwill

1,500

1,500

Property, plant and equipment (carried at revalued amounts)

4,600

4,000

Property, plant and equipment (carried at cost)

5,700

5,700

Inventory

2,400

2,200

Available for sale financial assets2

1,800

1,500

Total

16,000

14,900

 The entity recognises the loss of €1,100 (€16,000 – €14,900) immediately before classifying the disposal group as held for sale. The entity measures the fair value less costs to sell of the disposal group as €13,000. Because an entity measures a disposal group classified as held for sale at the lower of its carrying amount and fair value less costs to sell, the entity recognises an impairment loss of €1,900 (€14,900 – €13,000) when the group is initially classified as held for sale. The impairment loss is allocated to non-current assets to which the measurement requirements of the IFRS are applicable. Therefore, no impairment loss is allocated to inventory and investments in equity instruments. The loss is allocated to the other assets in the order of allocation described above.

The allocation can be illustrated as follows:

First, the impairment loss reduces any amount of goodwill. Then, the residual loss is allocated to other assets pro rata based on the carrying amounts of those assets.

 

Carrying

 remeasured immediately amount before classification

as held for sale

Allocated impairment loss

Carrying amount after allocation of impairment loss

Goodwill

1,500

(1,500)

_

Property, plant and equipment (carried at revalued amounts)

4,000

(165)

3,835

Property, plant and equipment (carried at cost)

5,700

(235)

5,465

Inventory

2,200

 

2,200

Available for sale financial assets”

1,500

 

1,500

Total

14,900

(1,900)

13,000

first ifrs financial statements outside the annual report or statutory financial sta 611068

First IFRS financial statements outside the annual report or statutory financial statements

Entity E prepared financial statements under its previous GAAP for the period ending 31 December 2011. In connection with its initial public offering, Entity E published an offering document that includes IFRS financial statements that contain an unreserved statement of compliance with IFRSs. The date of transition to IFRSs for the purposes of those financial statements, which cover the most recent three financial years, was 1 January 2009.

Entity E”s annual report (or statutory financial statements) are prepared under IFRSs for the first time for the period ending 31 December 2012.

The IFRS financial statements included in Entity E”s offering document were its first IFRS financial statements. Entity E should not apply IFRS 1 in its first annual financial statements (or statutory financial statements) prepared under IFRSs as it is not a first-time adopter. Although not required by IFRSs, Entity E may want to repeat information about its transition to IFRSs in its annual financial statements.

If, however, Entity E had included financial statements in its offering document that did not contain an unreserved statement of compliance with IFRSs then the annual financial statements for 2012 (or statutory financial statements) would need to be prepared in accordance with IFRS 1. If those financial statements only included comparative information for the year ended 31 December 2011 then Entity E”s date of transition would be 1 January 2011.

repeated application of ifrs 1 when an entity does not apply ifrss for one year 611070

Repeated application of IFRS 1 when an entity does not apply IFRSs for one year

Entity D prepared IFRS financial statements for 2010 and 2011 that contained an explicit and unreserved statement of compliance with IFRSs. However, in 2012 Entity D did not make an unreserved statement of compliance with IFRSs.

Entity D may choose to apply IFRS as a first-time adopter or it may elect to restate its financial statements retrospectively as if it had never stopped producing IFRS financial statements.

If it elects to apply IFRS as a first-time adopter for the purposes of its 2013 financial statements, there is no requirement under IFRS 1 for Entity D to base its first IFRS financial statements in 2013 on the IFRS information that it produced before 2012. Therefore, Entity D will apply the IFRS 1 exemptions without regard to the elections it made in its first IFRS financial statements in 2010. In fact, Entity D is unable to apply certain IFRS 1 exemptions by reference to the date of transition that it used in its 2010 financial statements (see 1.3.2.A below).

the financial statements of infosys technologies limited and its subsidiaries have b 611071

Infosys Technologies Limited (2009)

2 Notes to the consolidated financial statements [extract]

2.1 Transition to IFRS reporting [extract]

The financial statements of Infosys Technologies Limited and its subsidiaries have been prepared in accordance with IFRS. Infosys Technologies Limited and its subsidiaries adopted all IFRS standards and the adoption was carried out in accordance to IFRS 1, using April 1, 2007 as the transition date. The transition was carried out from Indian GAAP, which was considered as the Previous GAAP. The effect of adopting IFRS has been summarized in the reconciliations provided. The transition to IFRS reporting has resulted in changes in the reported financial statements, notes thereto and accounting principles compared to what had been presented previously. Until the adoption of IFRS, the financial statements included in the Annual Reports on Form 20-F and Quarterly Reports on Form 6-K were prepared in accordance with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America (U.S. GAAP) under the historical cost convention on the accrual basis. However, for the purposes of the transition, such transition was carried out from Indian GAAP, which has been considered as the Previous GAAP. The reconciliation statements provided in Note 2.2 describe the differences between IFRS and Indian GAAP. In addition, reconciliations from U.S. GAAP to Indian GAAP have been provided in Note 2.3 for the periods presented.

The Group”s financial statements for the year ending March 31, 2009 are the first annual financial statements to comply with IFRS.

2.3 The following voluntary reconciliations provide a quantification of reconciliation items between U.S. GAAP and Previous GAAP: [extract]

  1. equity as at April 1, 2007 (Note 2.3.1)
  2. equity as at March 31, 2008 (Note 2.3.2)
  3. equity as at March 31, 2009 (Note 2.3.3)
  4. net income for the year ended March 31, 2008 (Note 2.3.4)
  5. net income for the year ended March 31, 2009 (Note 2.3.5)

a will need to make estimates under ifrss at the relevant date that reflect conditio 611073

Application of IFRS 1 to estimates

Entity A”s first IFRS financial statements have a reporting date of 31 December 2013 and include comparative information for one year. In its previous GAAP financial statements for 31 December 2012, Entity A accounted for its pension plan on a cash basis. However, under IAS 19 the plan is classified as a defined benefit plan and actuarial estimates are required.

A will need to make estimates under IFRSs at the relevant date that reflect conditions that existed at the relevant date. This means, for example, Entity A”s:

(i) discount rates at 1 January 2012 (date of transition) and 31 December 2012 for the pension plan and for provisions should reflect market conditions at those dates; and

(ii) actuarial assumptions at 1 January 2012 and 31 December 2012 about future employee turnover rates should not reflect conditions that arose after those dates – such as a significant increase in estimated employee turnover rates as a result of a curtailment of the pension plan in 2013.

Entity B accounted for inventories at the lower of cost and net realisable value under its previous GAAP. Entity B”s accounting policy is consistent with the requirements of IAS 2 – Inventories. Under previous GAAP, the goods were accounted for at a price of £1.25/kg. Due to changes in market circumstances, Entity B ultimately could only sell the goods in the following period for £0.90/kg.

Assuming that Entity B”s estimate of the net realisable value was not in error, it will account for the goods at £1.25/kg upon transition to IFRSs and will make no adjustments because the estimate was not in error and its accounting policy was consistent with IFRSs. The effect of selling the goods for £0.90/kg will be reflected in the period in which they were sold.

Entity C”s first IFRS financial statements have a reporting date of 31 December 2013 and include comparative information for one year. In its previous GAAP financial statements for 31 December 2011, Entity C accounted for a provision of $150,000 in connection with a court case. Entity C”s accounting policy was consistent with the requirements of IAS 37 – Provisions, Contingent Liabilities and Contingent Assets, except for the fact that Entity C did not discount the provision for the time value of money. The discounted value of the provision at 31 December 2011 would have been $135,000. The case was settled for $190,000 during 2012.

In its opening IFRS statement of financial position Entity C will measure the provision at $135,000. IFRS 1 does not permit an entity to adjust the estimate itself, unless it was in error, but does require an adjustment to reflect the difference in accounting policies. The unwinding of the discount and the adjustment due to the under-provision will be included in the comparative statement of comprehensive income for 2012.

Entity D”s first IFRS financial statements have a reporting date of 31 December 2013 and include comparative information for one year. In its previous GAAP financial statements for 31 December 2012, Entity D did not recognise a provision for a court case arising from events that occurred in September 2012. When the court case was concluded on 30 June 2013, Entity D was required to pay €1,000,000 and paid this on 10 July 2013.

In preparing its comparative statement of financial position at 31 December 2012, the treatment of the court case at that date depends on the reason why Entity D did not recognise a provision under its previous GAAP at that date.

Scenario 1 – Previous GAAP was consistent with IAS 37. At the date of preparing its 2012 financial statements, Entity D concluded that the recognition criteria were not met. In this case, Entity D”s assumptions under IFRSs are to be consistent with its assumptions under previous GAAP. Therefore, Entity D does not recognise a provision at 31 December 2012 and the effect of settling the court case is reflected in the 2013 statement of comprehensive income.

Scenario 2 – Previous GAAP was not consistent with IAS 37. Therefore, Entity D develops estimates under IAS 37, which requires that an entity determines whether an obligation exists at the end of the reporting period by taking account of all available evidence, including any additional evidence provided by events after the end of the reporting period. Similarly, under IAS 10, the resolution of a court case after the end of the reporting period is an adjusting event if it confirms that the entity had a present obligation at that date. In this instance, the resolution of the court case confirms that Entity D had a liability in September 2012 (when the events occurred that gave rise to the court case). Therefore, Entity D recognises a provision at 31 December 2012. Entity D measures that provision by discounting the €1,000,000 paid on 10 July 2013 to its present value, using a discount rate that complies with IAS 37 and reflects market conditions at 31 December 2012.

in entity a s final financial statements prepared under its previous gaap the swap w 611074

Pre-transition cash flow hedges

Case 1: All hedge accounting conditions met from date of transition and thereafter

In 2004 Entity A borrowed €10m from a bank. The terms of the loan provide that a coupon of 3 month LIBOR plus 2% is payable quarterly in arrears and the principal is repayable in 2019. In 2007, Entity A decided to ‘fix its coupon payments for the remainder of the term of the loan by entering into a twelve-year pay-fixed, receive-floating interest rate swap. The swap has a notional amount of €10m and the floating leg resets quarterly based on 3 month LIBOR.

In Entity A”s final financial statements prepared under its previous GAAP, the swap was clearly identified as a hedging instrument in a hedge of the loan and was accounted for as such. The fair value of the swap was not recognised in Entity A”s balance sheet and the periodic interest settlements were accrued and recognised as an adjustment to the loan interest expense. On 1 January 2012, Entity A”s date of transition to IFRSs, the loan and the swap were still in place and the swap had a positive fair value of €1m and a €nil carrying amount. In addition, Entity A met all the conditions in IAS 39 to permit the use of hedge accounting for this arrangement throughout 2012 and 2013.

In its opening IFRS statement of financial position Entity A should:

  1. recognise the interest rate swap as an asset at its fair value of €1m; and
  2. credit €1m to a separate component of equity, to be reclassified to profit or loss as the hedged transactions (future interest payments on the loan) affect profit or loss.

In addition, hedge accounting would be applied throughout 2012 and 2013.

Case 2: Hedge terminated prior to date of transition

The facts are as in Case 1 except that in April 2011 Entity A decided to terminate the hedge and the interest rate swap was settled for its then fair value of €1.5m. Under its previous GAAP, Entity A”s stated accounting policy in respect of terminated hedges was to defer any realised gain or loss on terminated hedging instruments where the hedged exposure remained. These gains or losses would be recognised in profit or loss at the same time as gains or losses on the hedged exposure. At the end of December 2011, A”s balance sheet included a liability (unamortised gain) of €1.4m.

IFRS 1 does not explicitly address hedges terminated prior to the date of transition but we see no reason why these relationships should not be reflected in an entity”s opening IFRS statement of financial position in the same way as other cash flow hedges that are reflected in an entity”s closing balance sheet under its previous GAAP. Accordingly, in its opening IFRS statement of financial position Entity A should:

  1. remove the deferred gain of €1.4m from the balance sheet; and
  2. credit €1.4m to a separate component of equity, to be reclassified to profit or loss as the hedged transactions (future interest payments on the loan) affect profit or loss.

in entity b s final financial statements prepared under its previous gaap the forwar 611075

Existing fair value hedges

Case 1: All hedge accounting conditions met from date of transition and thereafter (1)

On 15 November 2011, Entity B entered into a forward contract to sell 50,000 barrels of crude oil to hedge all changes in the fair value of certain inventory. Entity B will apply IAS 39 from 1 January 2012, its date of transition to IFRSs. The historical cost of the forward contract is $nil and at the date of transition the forward had a negative fair value of $50.

In Entity B”s final financial statements prepared under its previous GAAP, the forward was clearly identified as a hedging instrument in a hedge of the inventory and was accounted for as such. The contract was recognised in the balance sheet as a liability at its fair value and the resulting loss was deferred in the balance sheet as an asset. In the period between 15 November 2011 and 1 January 2012 the fair value of the inventory increased by $47. In addition, Entity B met all the conditions in IAS 39 to permit the use of hedge accounting for this arrangement throughout 2012 until the forward expired.

In its opening IFRS statement of financial position Entity B should:

  1. continue to recognise the forward contract as a liability at its fair value of $50;
  2. derecognise the $50 deferred loss on the forward contract;
  3. recognise the crude oil inventory at its historical cost plus $47 (the lower of the change in fair value of the crude oil inventory, $47, and that of the forward contract, $50); and
  4. record the net adjustment of $3 in retained earnings.

In addition, hedge accounting would be applied throughout 2012 until the forward expired.

Case 2: All hedge accounting conditions met from date of transition and thereafter (2)

In 2004 Entity C borrowed €10m from a bank. The terms of the loan provide that a coupon of 8% is payable quarterly in arrears and the principal is repayable in 2019. In 2007, Entity C decided to alter its coupon payments for the remainder of the term of the loan by entering into a twelve-year pay-floating, receive-fixed interest rate swap. The swap has a notional amount of €10m and the floating leg resets quarterly based on 3 month LIBOR.

In Entity C”s final financial statements prepared under its previous GAAP, the swap was clearly identified as a hedging instrument in a hedge of the loan and accounted for as such. The fair value of the swap was not recognised in Entity C”s balance sheet and the periodic interest settlements on the swap were accrued and recognised as an adjustment to the loan interest expense.

On 1 January 2012, Entity C”s date of transition to IFRSs, the loan and the swap were still in place and the swap had a negative fair value of €1m and a €nil carrying amount. The cumulative change in the fair value of the loan attributable to changes in 3 month LIBOR was €1.1m, although this change was not recognised in Entity C”s balance sheet because the loan was accounted for at cost. In addition, Entity C met all the conditions in IAS 39 to permit the use of hedge accounting for this arrangement throughout 2012 and 2013.

In its opening IFRS statement of financial position Entity C should:

  1. recognise the interest rate swap as a liability at its fair value of €1m; and
  2. reduce the carrying amount of the loan by €1m (the lower of the change in its fair value attributable to the hedged risk, €1.1m, and that of the interest rate swap, $1m) to €9m.

In addition, hedge accounting would be applied throughout 2012 and 2013.

Case 3: Hedge terminated prior to date of transition

The facts are as in Case 2 above except that in April 2011 Entity C decided to terminate the fair value hedge and the interest rate swap was settled for its then negative fair value of €1.5m. Under its previous GAAP, Entity C”s stated accounting policy in respect of terminated hedges was to defer any gain or loss on the hedging instrument as a liability or an asset where the hedged exposure remained and this gain or loss was recognised in profit or loss at the same time as the hedged exposure. At the end of December 2011 the unamortised loss recognised as an asset in Entity C”s balance sheet was €1.4m. The cumulative change through April 2011 in the fair value of the loan attributable to changes in 3 month LIBOR that had not been recognised was €1.6m.

In its opening IFRS statement of financial position Entity C should:

  1. remove the deferred loss of €1.4m from the balance sheet; and
  2. reduce the carrying amount of the loan by €1.4m (the lower of the change in its fair value attributable to the hedged risk, €1.6m, and the change in value of the interest rate swap that was deferred in the balance sheet, €1.4m).

The €1.4m adjustment to the loan would be amortised to profit or loss over its remaining term.

Case 4: Documentation completed after the date of transition

The facts are as in Case 2 above except that, at the date of transition, Entity C had not prepared documentation that would allow it to apply hedge accounting under IAS 39. Hedge documentation was subsequently prepared as a result of which the hedge qualified for hedge accounting with effect from the beginning of July 2012 and through 2013.

As in Case 2, in its opening IFRS statement of financial position Entity C should:

  1. recognise the interest rate swap as a liability at its fair value of €1m; and
  2. reduce the carrying amount of the loan by €1m (the lower of the change in its fair value attributable to the hedged risk, €1.1m, and that of the interest rate swap, €1m), because the loan was clearly identified as a hedged item.

For the period from January 2012 to June 2012, hedge accounting would not be available. Accordingly, the interest rate swap would be remeasured to its fair value and any gain or loss would be recognised in profit or loss with no offset from remeasuring the loan. With effect from July 2012 hedge accounting would be applied prospectively.

a government provides loans at a below market rate of interest to fund the purchase 611076

Government loan with below-market interest rate

A government provides loans at a below-market rate of interest to fund the purchase of manufacturing equipment.

Entity S”s date of transition to IFRSs is 1 January 2012.

In 2010 Entity S received a loan of CU100,000 at a below-market rate of interest from the government. Under previous GAAP, Entity S accounted for the loan as equity and the carrying amount was CU100,000 at the date of transition. The amount repayable at 1 January 2015 will be CU103,030. No other payment is required under the terms of the loan and there are no future performance conditions attached to it. The information needed to measure the fair value of the loan was not obtained at the time it was initially accounted for.

The loan meets the definition of a financial liability in accordance with IAS 32. Entity S therefore reclassifies it as a liability. It also uses the previous GAAP carrying amount of the loan at the date of transition as the carrying amount of the loan in the opening IFRS statement of financial position, reclassifying it from equity to liability. It calculates the effective interest rate starting 1 January 2012 at 10%. The opening balance of CU100,000 will accrete to CU103,030 at 31 December 2014 and interest of CU1,000, CU1,010 and CU1,020 will be charged as an interest expense in each of the three years ended 31 December 2012, 2013 and 2014.

given that the company elected to apply the ifrs 1 exemption which permits no adjust 611077

Husky Energy Inc. (2011)

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements [extract]

Note 26 First-Time Adoption of International Financial Reporting Standards

Key First-Time Adoption Exemptions Applied [extract]

IFRS 1, “First-Time Adoption of International Financial Reporting Standards,” allows first-time adopters certain exemptions from retrospective application of certain IFRSs.

The Company applied the following exemptions: [extract]

IFRS 3, “Business Combinations,” was not applied to acquisitions of subsidiaries or interests in joint ventures that occurred before January 1, 2010.

i) IFRS 3 Adjustments – Business Combinations [extract]

Given that the Company elected to apply the IFRS 1 exemption which permits no adjustments to amounts recorded for acquisitions that occurred prior to January 1, 2010, no retrospective adjustments were required. The Company acquired the remaining interest in the Lloydminster Upgrader from the Government of Alberta in 1995 and is required to make payments to Natural Resources Canada and Alberta Department of Energy from 1995 to 2014 based on average differentials between heavy crude oil feedstock and the price of synthetic crude oil sales. Under IFRS, the Company is required to recognize this contingent consideration at its fair value as part of the acquisition and record a corresponding liability. Under Canadian GAAP, any contingent consideration was not required to be recognized unless amounts were resolved and payable on the date of acquisition. On transition to IFRS, Husky recognized a liability of $85 million, based on the fair value of remaining upside interest payments, with an adjustment to opening retained earnings. For the year ended December 31, 2010, the Company recognized pre-tax accretion of $9 million in finance expenses under IFRS. Changes in forecast differentials used to determine the fair value of the remaining upside interest payments resulted in the recognition of a pre-tax gain of $41 million for the year ended December 31, 2010.transition when this would require undue use of hindsight.

description of significant measurement and presentation differences between canadian 611078

The Toronto-Dominion Bank (2011)

CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS AND NOTES [extract]

Key First-Time Adoption Exemptions Applied [extract]

Note 34 Transition to IFRS [extract]

Description Of Significant Measurement And Presentation Differences Between Canadian GAAP And IFRS [extract]

(d) Business Combinations: Elective Exemption [extract]

As permitted under IFRS transition rules, the Bank has applied IFRS 3, Business Combinations (IFRS 3) to all business combinations occurring on or after January 1, 2007. Certain differences exist between IFRS and Canadian GAAP in the determination of the purchase price allocation. The most significant differences are described below.

Under Canadian GAAP, an investment in a subsidiary which is acquired through two or more purchases is commonly referred to as a “step acquisition”. Each transaction is accounted for as a step-by-step purchase, and is recognized at the fair value of the net assets acquired at each step. Under IFRS, the accounting for step acquisitions differs depending on whether a change in control occurs. If a change in control occurs, the acquirer remeasures any previously held equity investment at its acquisition-date fair value and recognizes any resulting gain or loss in the Consolidated Statement of Income. Any transactions subsequent to obtaining control are recognized as equity transactions.

Under Canadian GAAP, shares issued as consideration are measured at the market price over a reasonable time period before and after the date the terms of the business combination are agreed upon and announced. Under IFRS, shares issued as consideration are measured at their market price on the closing date of the acquisition.

Under Canadian GAAP, an acquirer”s restructuring costs to exit an activity or to involuntarily terminate or relocate employees are recognized as a liability in the purchase price allocation. Under IFRS, these costs are generally expensed as incurred and not included in the purchase price allocation.

Under Canadian GAAP, costs directly related to the acquisition (i.e. finders fees, advisory, legal, etc.) are included in the purchase price allocation, while under IFRS these costs are expensed as incurred and not included in the purchase price allocation.

Under Canadian GAAP, contingent consideration is recorded when the amount can be reasonably estimated at the date of acquisition and the outcome is determinable beyond reasonable doubt, while under IFRS contingent consideration is recognized immediately in the purchase price equation at fair value and marked to market as events and circumstances change in the Consolidated Statement of Income.

The impact of the differences between Canadian GAAP and IFRS to the Bank”s IFRS opening Consolidated Balance Sheet is disclosed in the table below.

Business Combinations: Elective Exemption
(millions of Canadian dollars)

As at
Nov. 1,2010

   

Increase/(decrease) in assets:

 

Available-for-sale securities

(1)

Goodwill

(2,147)

Loans – residential mortgages

22

Intangibles

(289)

Land, buildings, and equipment, and other depreciable assets

2

Deferred tax assets

(12)

Other assets

104

(Increase)/decrease in liabilities:

 

Deferred tax liabilities

102

Other liabilities

37

Subordinated notes and debentures

2

Increase/(decrease) in equity

(2,180)

The total impact of business combination elections to the Bank”s IFRS opening equity was a decrease of $2,180 million, comprised of a decrease to common shares of $926 million, a decrease to contributed surplus of $85 million and a decrease to retained earnings of $1,169 million.

as permitted under ifrs transition rules the bank has applied ifrs 3 business combin 611079

The Toronto-Dominion Bank (2011)

CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS AND NOTES [extract]

Key First-Time Adoption Exemptions Applied [extract]

Note 34 Transition to IFRS [extract]

Description Of Significant Measurement And Presentation Differences Between Canadian GAAP And IFRS [extract]

(d) Business Combinations: Elective Exemption [extract]

As permitted under IFRS transition rules, the Bank has applied IFRS 3, Business Combinations (IFRS 3) to all business combinations occurring on or after January 1, 2007. Certain differences exist between IFRS and Canadian GAAP in the determination of the purchase price allocation. The most significant differences are described below.

Under Canadian GAAP, an investment in a subsidiary which is acquired through two or more purchases is commonly referred to as a “step acquisition”. Each transaction is accounted for as a step-by-step purchase, and is recognized at the fair value of the net assets acquired at each step. Under IFRS, the accounting for step acquisitions differs depending on whether a change in control occurs. If a change in control occurs, the acquirer remeasures any previously held equity investment at its acquisition-date fair value and recognizes any resulting gain or loss in the Consolidated Statement of Income. Any transactions subsequent to obtaining control are recognized as equity transactions.

Under Canadian GAAP, shares issued as consideration are measured at the market price over a reasonable time period before and after the date the terms of the business combination are agreed upon and announced. Under IFRS, shares issued as consideration are measured at their market price on the closing date of the acquisition.

Under Canadian GAAP, an acquirer”s restructuring costs to exit an activity or to involuntarily terminate or relocate employees are recognized as a liability in the purchase price allocation. Under IFRS, these costs are generally expensed as incurred and not included in the purchase price allocation.

Under Canadian GAAP, costs directly related to the acquisition (i.e. finders fees, advisory, legal, etc.) are included in the purchase price allocation, while under IFRS these costs are expensed as incurred and not included in the purchase price allocation.

Under Canadian GAAP, contingent consideration is recorded when the amount can be reasonably estimated at the date of acquisition and the outcome is determinable beyond reasonable doubt, while under IFRS contingent consideration is recognized immediately in the purchase price equation at fair value and marked to market as events and circumstances change in the Consolidated Statement of Income.

The impact of the differences between Canadian GAAP and IFRS to the Bank”s IFRS opening Consolidated Balance Sheet is disclosed in the table below.

Business Combinations: Elective Exemption
(millions of Canadian dollars)

As at
Nov. 1,2010

   

Increase/(decrease) in assets:

 

Available-for-sale securities

(1)

Goodwill

(2,147)

Loans – residential mortgages

22

Intangibles

(289)

Land, buildings, and equipment, and other depreciable assets

2

Deferred tax assets

(12)

Other assets

104

(Increase)/decrease in liabilities:

 

Deferred tax liabilities

102

Other liabilities

37

Subordinated notes and debentures

2

Increase/(decrease) in equity

(2,180)

The total impact of business combination elections to the Bank”s IFRS opening equity was a decrease of $2,180 million, comprised of a decrease to common shares of $926 million, a decrease to contributed surplus of $85 million and a decrease to retained earnings of $1,169 million.

if entity a concludes that the asset is not a business as defined in ifrs 3 it will 611080

Acquisition of assets

Entity A acquired a holding company that held a single asset at the time of acquisition. That holding company had no employees and the asset itself was not in use at the date of acquisition. Entity A accounted for the transaction under its previous GAAP using the purchase method, which resulted in goodwill. Can Entity A apply the business combinations exemption to the acquisition of this asset?

If Entity A concludes that the asset is not a business as defined in IFRS 3, it will not be able to apply the business combinations exemption. Instead, Entity A should account for such transaction as an asset acquisition.

entity a s date of transition to ifrss is 1 january 2012 entity a acquired entity b 611081

Finance lease not capitalised under previous GAAP

Background

Entity A”s date of transition to IFRSs is 1 January 2012. Entity A acquired Entity B on 15 January 2008 and did not capitalise Entity B”s finance leases. If Entity B prepared separate financial statements under IFRSs, it would recognise finance lease obligations of £300 and leased assets of £250 at 1 January 2012.

Application of requirements

In its consolidated opening IFRS statement of financial position, Entity A recognises finance lease obligations of £300, leased assets of £250 and charges £50 to retained earnings.

entity c s first ifrs financial statements are for a period that ends on 31 december 611082

Restructuring provision

Background

Entity C”s first IFRS financial statements are for a period that ends on 31 December 2013 and include comparative information for 2012 only. It chooses not to restate previous business combinations under IFRSs. On 1 July 2011, Entity C acquired 100 per cent of Entity D. Under its previous GAAP, Entity C recognised an (undiscounted) restructuring provision of ¥100 that would not have qualified as an identifiable liability under IFRSs. The recognition of this restructuring provision increased goodwill by ¥100. At 31 December 2011 (date of transition to IFRSs), Entity C:

(a) had paid restructuring costs of ¥60; and

(b) estimated that it would pay further costs of ¥40 in 2012 and that the effects of discounting were immaterial. At 31 December 2011, those further costs did not qualify for recognition as a provision under IAS 37.

Application of requirements

In its opening IFRS statement of financial position, Entity C:

(a) does not recognise a restructuring provision.

(b) does not adjust the amount assigned to goodwill. However, Entity C tests the goodwill for impairment under IAS 36 – Impairment of Assets – and recognises any resulting impairment loss.

(c) as a result of (a) and (b), reports retained earnings in its opening IFRS statement of financial position that are higher by ¥40 (before income taxes and before recognising any impairment loss) than in the balance sheet at the same date under previous GAAP.

in its 31 december 2012 consolidated financial statements ndash its last financial s 611083

Provisionally determined fair values

Entity B acquired Entity C in August 2011 and made a provisional assessment of Entity C”s identifiable net assets in its 31 December 2011 consolidated financial statements under its previous GAAP. In its 31 December 2012 consolidated financial statements – its last financial statements under previous GAAP – Entity B completed the initial accounting for the business combination and adjusted the provisional values of the identifiable net assets and the corresponding goodwill. Upon first-time adoption of IFRSs, Entity B elects not to restate past business combinations.

In preparing its opening IFRS statement of financial position, Entity B should use the adjusted carrying amounts of the identifiable net assets as determined in its 2012 financial statements rather than the provisional carrying amounts of the identifiable net assets and goodwill at 31 December 2011.

therefore property plant and equipment inventory and accounts receivable are not adj 611084

Items measured on a cost basis

Entity A applies the business combination exemption under IFRS 1. In a business combination Entity A acquired property, plant and equipment, inventory and accounts receivable. Under its previous GAAP, Entity A initially measured these assets at cost (i.e. their fair value at the date of acquisition).

Upon adoption of IFRSs, Entity A determines that its accounting policy for these assets under its previous GAAP complied with the requirements of IFRSs. Therefore, property, plant and equipment, inventory and accounts receivable are not adjusted but recognised in the opening IFRS statement of financial position at the carrying amount under the previous GAAP.

at fair value in its opening ifrs statement of financial position the resulting adju 611085

Items not measured at original cost

Entity A acquired in a business combination a trading portfolio of equity securities and a number of investment properties. Under its previous GAAP, Entity A initially measured these assets at cost (i.e. their fair value at the date of acquisition).

Upon adoption of IFRSs, Entity A measures the trading portfolio of equity securities and the investment properties (under the IAS 40 – Investment Property – fair value model) at fair value in its opening IFRS statement of financial position. The resulting adjustment to these assets at the date of transition is reflected in retained earnings.

these debentures were retained as investments till 30 september 2010 when the debent 618226

Chand Ltd. issued on 1 April 2007 60,000, 12% debentures of Rs.100 each, redeemable at the option of the company after the second year at Rs.104 upon two months’ notice. The following debentures were purchased in the open market:

  • On 12 June 2009, Rs.12,000 nominal at cum- interest cost of Rs.12,075
  • On 24 August 2009, Rs.21,000 nominal at ex- interest cost of Rs.20,745

These debentures were retained as investments till 30 September 2010 when the debentures were cancelled. Due dates for interest on debentures are 30 September and 31 March. The books of accounts are closed every year on 31 March. Show the following ledger accounts for the year 2009–10; and 2010–11.

journalize the forgoing transactions as well as those for interest on government loa 618228

Acompany had issued, sometime ago, 50,000 12% debentures of Rs.100 each at Rs.97.50 redeemable at the end of 10 years at par, or previously by 6 months’ notice at Rs.102 at the company’s option. On 31 March 2010, the accounts showed balances in debenture redemption fund of Rs.2,67,500 represented by 10% Rs.2,14,000 nominal value government loan bonds, purchased at an average price of Rs.101 and Rs.51,360 uninvested in cash. On 1 April 2010, the company decided to purchase Rs.55,000 of its own debentures at an inclusive cost of Rs.51,360 instead of further government loan bonds and this was carried out forthwith. On 30 September 2010, the company gave 6 months’ notice to holders of Rs.2,00,000 worth of debentures and on 31 March 2011 carried out the redemption by sale of Rs.2,04,000 of government loan bonds at par and cancelled the same together with their own holding.

Journalize the forgoing transactions as well as those for interest on government loan bonds and on the company’s own debentures throughout the year ended 31 March 2011. The interest on the bonds being payable on 31 March and on the debentures on 30 September and 31 March.

show the entries in the following ledger accounts of mm ltd during 2010 11 618229

MM Ltd. had the following among their ledger opening balances as on 1 April 2010:

11% Debentures A/c (2,000 Issue)

25,00,000

Debenture Redemption Fund A/c

22,50,000

13.5% Debentures in XX Ltd. A/c

9,75,000

(Face Value 10,00,000)

Own Debentures A/c

9,25,000

(Face Value of 10,00,000)

As 31 March 2011 was the date of redemption of the 2,000 debentures, the company started buying own debentures and made the following purchases in the open market:

1 May 2010 1,000 debentures at Rs.98 cum- interest

1 September 2010 1,000 debentures at Rs.99 ex- interest

Half-yearly interest is due on the debentures on the 30 September and 31 March in the case of both the companies.

On 31 March 2011, the debentures in XX Ltd were sold for Rs.95 each ex-interest. On that date, the outstanding debentures of MM Ltd. were redeemed by payment and by cancellation.

Show the entries in the following ledger accounts of MM Ltd. during 2010-11:

  • Debenture redemption fund A/c
  • Own debenture A/c

The face value of a debenture was Rs.100. (Round off calculations to the nearest rupee)

you are required to show debenture redemption fund debenture redemption fund investm 618230

X Ltd. issued 10,000 12% debentures of Rs.100 each at par on 1 April 2008. These debentures are redeemed at the end of the fifth year at 5% premium. It was resolved that sinking fund should be formed and invested in 10% development bonds of Rs.100 each. Interest of bonds is payable on 31 March every year.

Reference to Sinking Fund Table shows that Rs.0.1638 invests at the end of every year at 10% compound interest will produce Rs.1 at the end of the fifth year. 10% Development bonds of the required amount were purchased on different dates at the following prices:

On 31 March 2009

Rs.94

On 31 March 2010

Rs.96

On 31 March 2011

Rs.98

You are required to show debenture redemption fund, debenture redemption fund investment A/c and interest on debenture redemption fund investments A/c for the first three years in the books of X Ltd. Accounting year of the company ends on 31 March.

you are required to record the above and prepare the balance sheet of swetha ltd ass 618233

Swetha Ltd. was formed with an authorized capital of Rs.20,00,000 divided into equality shares of Rs.10 each, to acquire the business of L&M whose balance sheet on the date of acquisition was as follows:

Liabilities

Assets

Capital

10,00,000

Freehold Premises

14,00,000

General Reserve

7,00,000

Stock

2,00,000

Sundry Creditors

3,00,000

Sundry Debits 2,70,000

Less: Provision for Bad Debts: 20,000

2,50,000

Cast at Bank

1,50,000

20,00,000

20,00,000

The purchase price was agreed upon at Rs.23,00,000 to be paid in Rs.20,00,000 fully paid equity shares at Rs.11 and the balance in cash. You are required to record the above and prepare the balance sheet of Swetha Ltd. assuming the vendor’s account is finally settled.

you are required to record the above transactions in the books of mythali ltd throug 618234

Mythali Ltd. was formed to take over the assets and liabilities of Mr. Ajay and to acquire the adjacent premises. The balance sheet of Mr. Ajay on 31 March 2011 was as follows:

Liabilities

Assets

Trade Creditors

20,000

Cash in Hand

5,000

Capital

4,80,000

Cash at Bank

30,000

Book Debts

25,000

Stock-in-Trade

1,00,000

Furniture

20,000

Land & Buildings

3,20,000

5,00,000

5,00,000

The purchase consideration was agreed at Rs.6,00,000 and was to be paid as follows:

  1. 4,800 equity shares of Rs.50 each
  2. 3,200, 10% preference shares of Rs.100 each issued at par
  3. Rs.40,000 in cash.

All the assets and liabilities were valued as per the above balance sheet except the book debts which were subject to a bad debts provision of 10% The company raised further capital by issue of 15,000 equity shares of Rs.50 each.The adjoining premises were purchased for Rs.1,00,000 and additional stock for Rs.50,000 was got from open market.

You are required to record the above transactions in the books of Mythali Ltd. through journal entries and draft its opening balance sheet.

doss ltd paid the preliminary expendes of rs 20 000 you are required to record journ 618235

Model: Accounting entries in both the books of purchasing company and vendor.

Doss Ltd. was formed with a nominal capital of Rs.20,00,000 consisting of 1,00,000 equity shares of Rs.20 each and 6,000 preference shares of Rs.100 each to acquire on 1 April 2011, the business of Yoga & Co. Yoga’s balance sheet as on 31 March 2011 was as follows:

Liabilities

Assets

Capital A/c:

Land & Buildings

5,00,000

Yoga & Co.

9,00,000

Plant & Machinery

3,00,000

Trade Creditors

2,50,000

Stock

2,00,000

Overdraft (Bank)

1,00,000

Debtors

2,50,000

12,50,000

12,50,000

The Company took over all the assets and assumed all the liabilities and the consideration was fixed at Rs.13,00,000.

In computing this figure, Land & Buildings were valued at Rs.7,00,000; Plant & Machinery at Rs.2,00,000; Stock at Rs.1,90,000; and debtors at book value subject to an allowance of 5% to cover bad debts. The transfer of the bank overdraft to the company was agreed by the bank on condition that debentures for Rs.1,50,000 were issued to the bank as collateral security.

The purchase price was settled by issue of 50,000 equity shares of Rs.20 each at par, 2,000 preference shares of Rs.100 each and the balance being paid in cash. Doss Ltd. paid the preliminary expendes of Rs.20,000. You are required to record journal entries in the books of Doss Ltd. and Yoga & Co.

the vendor received rs 20 000 6 debentures of rs 100 each at rs 90 and the balance i 618236

Model: Collection and payment of vendor’s debtors and creditors On 1 October 2010, Brilliant Ltd. purchased the business of Mr. Bose, a sole trader, taking over all the assets with the exception of book debts amounting to Rs.2,00,000 and creditors amounting to Rs.1,00,000. The company undertook to collect all the book debts and pay off the creditors and for this service, it has to be paid a commission of 2 1/2on the amount collected and 1/2% on amounts paid.

The debtors realized Rs.1,80,000, out of which Rs.80,000 was paid to creditors in full settlement. The company was able to collect Rs.8,000 debt which was previously written off as bad by Mr. Bose. The company was also forced to meet a contingent liability of Rs.5,000 on account of a claim against the vendor for damages. The vendor received Rs.20,000, 6% debentures of Rs.100 each at Rs.90 and the balance in cash in settlement of his account with the company. Journalise the above transactions in the books of the company.

model debtors and creditors taken over by the company sun ltd acquired the business 618238

Model: Debtors and creditors taken over by the Company Sun Ltd. acquired the business of Moon Agencies, whose debtors and creditors were taken over by the Company for collection and payment for a commission of 10% on all amount collected and 2% on amount paid. The debtors amounted to Rs.4,50,000 and creditors to Rs.2,20,000. There was a contingent liability of Rs.60,000

The Company collected one-third of debtors in full, 50% of debtors at 4% discount, two-thirds of the balance at 6% discount and the remaining proved bad. A debt of Rs.30,000 written off by the vendor in the past was collected at 80% but court expenses for that amounted to Rs.6,000 of which Rs.2,000 only could be recovered from the debtor.

Rs.20,000 of creditors were paid in full and the balance was paid at 97%. The contingent liability came up for payment at Rs.40,000. The Company settled its account with the vendor in cash. You are required to pass journal entries in the books of Sun Ltd.

you are required to pass journal entries and prepare balance sheet of xyz ltd assumi 618240

Model: Continuation of same set of books A and B carrying on business in partnership, sharing profits and losses in the ratio of 2:1 decide to dissolve the firm and sell the business to a limited company on 31 March 2011, the balance sheet of the firm stood on that date as follows:

Liabilities

Rs.

Assets

Rs.

Sundry Creditors

2,25,000

Cash at Bank

40,000

Reserve Fund

2,25,000

Sundry Debtors

6,00,000

Capital Accounts:

Stock

8,10,000

A:7,00,000

Motor Vehicle

1,20,000

B:5,00.000

12,00,000

Furniture

80,000

16,50,000

16,50,000

XYZ Ltd. was registered with an authorized capital of Rs.50,00,000 in equity shares of Rs.100 each to acquire the above business on the following terms:

  1. Goodwill is valued at Rs.3,75,000
  2. Furniture and stock valued at Rs.72,500 and Rs.8,75,500, respectively
  3. Debtors are subject to Rs.provision.

Motor vehicle is no more required by the company and A took over at Rs.1,10,000. The purchase price was satisfied by the issue of shares of Rs.100 each at par. You are required to pass journal entries and prepare balance sheet of XYZ Ltd. assuming that the same set of books is continued.

the remaining equity shares were issued at a premium of 10 and the cash was duly rec 618242

Sowmya Ltd. was formed on 1 April 2010, with an authorized capital of Rs.35,00,000 divided into 25,000 equity shares of Rs.100 each and 10,000 preference shares of Rs.100 each, to acquire the business of Bhama as a going concern. The balance sheet of Bhama as at 31 March 2011 was as follows:

Liabilities

Assets

Sundry Creditors

37,500

Cash at Bank

19,000

X”s Loan A/c

77,500

Sundry Debtors

48,500

Bhama”s Capital A/c

7,85,000

Stock

1,80,000

Furniture

17,500

Plant & Machinery

3,50,000

Land & Buildings

2,85,000

9,00,000

9,00,000

The purchase consideration was to be discharged by Sowmya Ltd. by issue of 7,500 equity shares of Rs.100 each, 2500 preference shares of Rs.100 each and Rs.1,00,000 in cash. Sowmya Ltd. also agreed to discharge the sundry creditors but declined to accept X’s loan. All the assets of the old company were taken over at their balance sheet values except stock which was valued at Rs.2,00,000. A provision of 5% was also created against sundry debtors.

To provide necessary working capital and to pay to purchase consideration, the remaining equity shares were issued at a premium of 10% and the cash was duly received. The preliminary expenses amounting to Rs.75,000 were paid by the Company immediately after the issue. Show the opening entries in the books of Sowmya Ltd. and also the opening balance sheet.

the balance of both kinds of shares was issued to and paid up by the public with the 618243

A company was formed with an authorized capital of Rs.10,00,000 divided into 50,000 equity shares of Rs.10 each and 50,000 preference shares of Rs.100 each to acquire the going concern of Mohan whose balance sheet stood as follows:

Liabilities

Assets

Bills Payable

7,000

Cash at Bank

9,000

Sundry Creditors

12,800

Book Debts

15,000

Capital

2,64,200

Insurance Policy

8,000

Stock in Trade

62,000

Plant & Machinery

1,00,000

Freehold Premises

90,000

2,84,000

2,84,000

The purchase price was agreed upon at Rs.3,50,000 to be paid; Rs.1,00,000 in fully paid equity shares, Rs.1,00,000 in fully paid preference shares, Rs.60,000 in redeemable debentures and the balance in cash. The company did not take over the insurance policy, valued the stock and plant and machinery at 10% less than the book value and the freehold premises at 20% move than the book value. The liabilities will be discharged by the company.

The balance of both kinds of shares was issued to and paid up by the public with the exception of 1,200 equity shares held by Sommath on which he did not pay the last call of Rs.3 per share and which were subsequently forfeited and reissued at a discount of 20%. Give journal entries to record the above and prepare the balance sheet of the company.

show the opening entries of singh ltd and closing entries of guber in respect of the 618245

The balance sheet of Guber was as follows:

Balance Sheet on 31 March 2011

Liabilities

Assets

Sundry Assets

21,00,000

Creditors

6,20,000

Debtors

13,44,000

Less: Reserve

20,000

6,00,000

Less: Provision

44,000

13,00,000

Loans

4,00,000

Guber

24,00,000

34,00,000

34,00,000

On 15 July 2011, Singh Ltd. was incorporated, taking over all the assets (except debtors) and the liability for loans; interest @ 12% p.a. on the purchase price to be allowed to the vendors from 1 April 2011 to the date of completion. The credit balance of Guber’s capital to be satisfied by the issue of equity shares in Singh Ltd.

The loan holders accept 14% preference shares in discharge of their debts. The company, as agent for vendor, agrees to collect the debts, which realize ultimately Rs.1,260,000 out of which they pay, as agent for the vendor, the creditors at the net figure shown in the balance sheet. Of the balance, they paid an account to Guber the sum of Rs.2,00,000; the amount remaining undrawn by Guber, including interest, to be discharged in the form of Rs.5,00,000 debentures at 96 and cash. The new company is entitled to all intervening profit (i.e., between 1 April 2011 and 15 July 2011). Show the opening entries of Singh Ltd. and closing entries of Guber in respect of the above, assuming that the date of completing is 31 August 2011. Ignore Income Tax.

show the entries in the books of gopal ltd assuming that same set of books is contin 618246

The following was the balance sheet of L&M as on 31 December 2010:

Liabilities

Assets

Bills Payable

1,00,000

Cash and Bank

60,000

Sundry Creditors

2,75,000

Bills Receivable

60,000

Capital Accounts:

Sundry Debtors

3,00,000

L 7,00,000

Stock-in-Trade

3,30,000

M 3,00.000

10,00,000

Furniture

40,000

Plant & Machinery

2,35,000

Land & Building

3,50,000

13,75,000

13,75,000

On 1 January 2011, the above business was purchased by Gopal Ltd. for Rs.13,00,000 to be paid by the issue of equity shares of Rs.100 each credited at Rs.50 paid upon the following terms:

  1. Land & Building and Plant & Machinery to be taken at Rs.5,00,000 and Rs.2,00,000, respectively.
  2. The company did not take over the furniture which were disposable at Rs.25,000 and did not take bills payable which were taken over by L at an agreed value of Rs.90,000.
  3. A provision for doubtful debts was to be made at 2% on debtors.
  4. There was a claim for bills discounted amounted to Rs.10,000 which was taken by the company.
  5. The company did not take over a workers claim amounted to Rs.10,000 due to accident.

Show the entries in the books of Gopal Ltd. assuming that same set of books is continued.

state whether the following statements are true or false 1 in the absence of a contr 618247

State whether the following statements are true or false
1.In the absence of a contract to the contrary, miscellaneous expenses are also taken over by the purchasing company.
2.In the absence of a contract to the contrary, the purchasing company will not take over the liabilities that belong to the shareholders.
3.As purchase consideration must always be given in the question, no need to compute it arises.
4.Purchase consideration must be paid in cash only.
5.When the value of net assets is less than the purchase price, the difference has to be credited to goodwill A/c.
6.Profit at the time of acquisition, if any, has to be credited to capital reserve A/c.
7.When interest is paid on purchase price, interest account is to be debited.
8.Purchasing company is paid commission for realizing book debts and discharging liabilities by the vendor.
9.Any profit or loss that will arise in collecting debts and paying creditors must be borne by the purchaser.
10.When debtors and creditors are taken over on behalf of vendors, the debtors and creditors will be included with the main entries for acquisition of business, in the books of purchasing company.
11.When the same set of books is continued, realization A/c has to be opened.
12.When discount is allowed to vendor’s debtors, it will be debited to vendor’s suspense A/c

fill in the blanks with apt word s 1 in the process of acquisition of business newly 618248

Fill in the blanks with apt word(s)
1.In the process of acquisition of business, newly formed limited companies purchase the business of_____or_____form of business concerns.
2.The seller concern is termed as_____in the acquisition of business.
3.Purchase price paid by the purchasing company to the selling business concern is known as_____.
4._____assets are not taken over by the purchasing company.
5.All_____lliabilities are taken over by the purchasing company.
6.When the value of net assets is less than the purchase price, the difference is debited to_____A/c.
7.When the value of net assets is more than the purchase price, the difference is credited to_____A/c.
8.When debtors and creditors are taken over on behalf of vendors by the purchasing company, it has to open_____A/c in the books.
9.When the same set of books is continued_____, and_____A/c should not be closed.
10.When the same set of books is continued, a separate account for debtors should be opened under the head_____A/c.
11.The purchasing company_____the vendor’s A/c with the purchase price at the time of acquisition.
12.When shares or debentures are issued at a premium, _____ A/c has to be credited with premium amount.

as the accountant for the blow dry manufacturing company you are to analyze the foll 611040

This exercise will test your ability to properly account for situations involving contingent liabilities.

As the accountant for the Blow-Dry Manufacturing Company you are to analyze the following situations in preparing the balance sheet at December 31, 2014:

  1. The Blow-Dry Manufacturing Company grants a six-month warranty on each of the hair dryers it sells. Based on past experience, it is estimated that 3% of all hair dryers sold are returned; it costs the company an average of $4.40 to satisfy the warranty obligation for each unit returned. The company sold 77,000 hair dryers in the last half of 2014 and has spent $3,000 for warranty work on those units.
  2. The Speedy-Dry Manufacturing Company has filed a lawsuit for $100,000 in damages against the Blow-Dry Manufacturing Company for infringement of patent rights. Legal counsel for Blow-Dry states that it is reasonably possible, but not likely, that there will be an unfavorable outcome of the case because the Blow-Dry Company has good evidence to support its position.
  3. The Internal Revenue Service is currently auditing a tax return of the Blow-Dry Company for a prior year. It is remotely possible that the IRS may disallow a deduction of $4,200 on the tax return.
  4. The Blow-Dry Company is a defendant in a lawsuit. A former executive filed suit on November 7, 2014 based on his claim that the Blow-Dry Company did not comply with a written promise to pay him a $50,000 bonus for 2013. The company did not make the bonus payment because the executive resigned the last week of December 2013. Legal counsel for the company states that the written agreement will probably be held to apply even though the executive resigned. The suit is expected to be settled early in 2015.

Instructions

Explain how to account for each of the situations. Should a liability be included in the body of the balance sheet at December 31, 2014 or should there only be disclosure in the notes accompanying the financial statements or should the item not be recorded or disclosed? Justify your answer.

colleen mahla company sells portable tables to be used for massage therapy each tabl 611041

This exercise will provide an example of how to account for the sale of a product that includes a warranty.

Colleen Mahla Company sells portable tables to be used for massage therapy. Each table has a built-in stereo system and carries a one-year warranty contract that requires the company to replace defective parts and to provide the necessary repair labor. During 2014, the company sold 300 tables at a unit price of $2,500. Sales occurred evenly throughout the year. The one-year warranty costs to repair defective tables are estimated to average $110 for parts and $130 for labor per unit. Approximately 10% of the tables sold are estimated to require warranty service. During 2014, the company”s first year of operations, 11 units were submitted for warranty work at a total cost of $2,750.

Instructions

(a) Record the adjusting journal entry at the end of 2014 to accrue the estimated warranty costs on the 2014 sales.

(b) Prepare the entry to record repair costs incurred in 2014 to honor warranty contracts on 2014 sales.

(c) Explain how all of the relevant amounts would be reflected on the financial statements prepared at the end of 2014.

(d) Why are warranty costs accrued in the period of sale? Explain.

a lease is a contractual arrangement between the lessor owner of the property and a 611042

This exercise reviews the characteristics and accounting aspects of the two types of leases.

A lease is a contractual arrangement between the lessor (owner of the property) and a lessee (renter of the property) that grants the lessee the right to use specific property for a period of time in return for cash payments. Some lease agreements are in substance installment purchases of assets by the lessees (and, thus, installment sales of the assets by the lessors), although their legal form is that of a lease.

The specific provisions of a lease contract may vary from other similar lease agreements. Generally accepted accounting principles require that each lease be properly classified as either a capital lease or an operating lease.

Instructions

Indicate whether each item below is most likely related to an operating lease or to a capital lease by using the appropriate code letters.

O = Operating Lease

C = Capital Lease

1. The lease is merely a short-term rental agreement for use of property.

2. The owner retains ownership of the leased property after the term of the lease and the property has substantial economic value after the lease has expired.

3.The lease is essentially an installment purchase of property by the lessee.

4. Rent expense appears on the lessee”s financial statements in the periods in which it is incurred.

5. Interest expense is reported on the books of the lessee.

6. Rental payments are considered to be an installment of the asset”s purchase price on the lessee”s books.

7. Depreciation expense for the leased asset is recognized on the lessee”s books.

8. Depreciation expense for the leased asset is not recognized on the lessee”s books.

9. The lease contract is recorded by a debit to an asset account and a credit to a liability account on the lessee”s books.

10. The leased asset appears on the books of the lessee.

11. The lessee uses up the total serviceability of the leased asset during the term of the lease.

12. The lessee has the right to buy the asset at the end of the lease term for a nominal purchase price.

13. The leased asset does not appear on the books of the lessee.

14. Present value of the minimum lease payments at the beginning of the lease term exceeds 90% of the fair value of the leased property at the inception of the lease.

15. End-of-the-period adjustments are made on the lessee”s books for any accrued rent not yet paid or any rent paid in advance.

16. The lease is considered to be a purchase of the leased asset by the lessee and a sale of the leased asset by the lessor.

17. The lease transfers ownership of the property to the lessee by the end of the lease term.

the balance of the warranty liability at december 31 2014 should be 611047

D. Scott Corporation provides a two-year warranty with the sale of its product. Scott estimates that warranty costs will equal 4% of the selling price the first year after sale and 6% of the selling price the second year after the sale. The following data are available:

2013

2014

Sales

$400,000

$500,000

Actual warranty expenditures

10,000

38,000

The balance of the warranty liability at December 31, 2014 should be:

  1. $12,000.
  2. $42.000.
  3. $44,000.
  4. $50,000.

on june 1 2014 holly golightly purchases lakefront property from her neighbor george 610787

Using a financial calculator, solve for the unknowns in each of the following situations.

(a)On June 1, 2014, Holly Golightly purchases lakefront property from her neighbor, George Peppard, and agrees to pay the purchase price in seven payments of $16,000 each, the first payment to be payable June 1, 2015. (Assume that interest compounded at an annual rate of 7.35% is implicit in the payments.) What is the purchase price of the property?

(b)On January 1, 2014, Sammis Corporation purchased 200 of the $1,000 face value, 8% coupon, 10-year bonds of Malone Inc. The bonds mature on January 1, 2024, and pay interest annually beginning January 1, 2015. Sammis purchased the bonds to yield 10.65%. How much did Sammis pay for the bonds?

lynn anglin owes a debt of 35 000 from the purchase of her new sport utility vehicle 610788

Using a financial calculator, provide a solution to each of the following situations.

(a)Lynn Anglin owes a debt of $35,000 from the purchase of her new sport utility vehicle. The debt bears annual interest of 9.1% compounded monthly. Lynn wishes to pay the debt and interest in equal monthly payments over 8 years, beginning one month hence. What equal monthly payments will pay off the debt and interest?

(b)On January 1, 2014, Roger Molony offers to buy Dave Feeney”s used snowmobile for $8,000, payable in five equal annual installments, which are to include 8.25% interest on the unpaid balance and a portion of the principal. If the first payment is to be made on December 31, 2014, how much will each payment be?

place the appropriate code in the blanks to identify each of the following transacti 610967

This exercise enables you to practice identifying investing and financing activities.

Instructions

Place the appropriate code in the blanks to identify each of the following transactions as giving rise to an:

Code

II

inflow of cash due to an investing activity, or

IO

outflow of cash due to an investing activity, or

FI

inflow of cash due to a financing activity, or

FO

outflow of cash due to a financing activity

1.

Sell common stock to new stockholders.

6.

Sell investment in real estate.

2.

Purchase treasury stock.

7.

Loan money to an affiliate.

8.

Collect on loan to affiliate.

3.

Borrow money trom bank by issuance of short-term note.

9.

Buy equipment.

4.

Repay money borrowed from bank.

10.

Sell a plant asset.

5.

Purchase bonds as an investment.

11.

Pay cash dividends to stockholders.

the following data relate to the l heckenmueller co for 2014 610969

This exercise will enable you to practice reconciling net income with net cash provided by operating activities.

The following data relate to the L. Heckenmueller Co. for 2014.

Net income

$75.000

Increase in accounts receivable

7,000

Decrease in prepaid expenses

3,200

Increase in accounts payable

5.000

Decrease in taxes payable

900

Gain on sale of investment

1,700

Depreciation

3,500

Loss on disposal of plant assets

600

Instructions

Compute the net cash provided by operating activities for 2014.

this exercise will provide you with an opportunity to prepare a statement of cash fl 610970

This exercise will provide you with an opportunity to prepare a statement of cash flows. A comparative balance sheet for Hernan Perez Pictures appears below:

December-31

Assets

2014

2013

Change

Cash

$81,000

$35,000

$46,000

Accounts receivable

65000

50000

15000

Inventory

155,000

96,000

59,000

Investments

100.000

70.000

30.000

Equipment

170.000

100.000

70.000

Accumulated depreciation

(31,000)

(20,000)

(11,000)

$540.000

$331.000

$209.000

Liabilities and Stockholders” Equity

Accounts payable

$31,000

$40,000

$(9,000)

Long-term note payable

12,00U

bU,000

12,000

Bonds payable

100,000

0

100,000

Common stock, no par

250,000

200,000

50,000

Retained earnings

87.000

31.000

56.000

$540.000

$331.000

$209.000

Additional information:

  1. New equipment costing $80,000 was purchased for cash.
  2. Old equipment was sold at a loss of $4,500.
  3. Bonds were issued for cash.
  4. An investment costing $30,000 was acquired by issuing a long-term note payable.
  5. Cash dividends of $14,000 were declared and paid during the year.
  6. Depreciation expense for 2014 was $15,000.
  7. Accounts Payable relate to operating expenses.
  8. Stock investments are classified as available-for-sale securities.
  9. Net sales for 2014 were $80,000.

Instructions

(a) Prepare a statement of cash flows for 2014 using the indirect method.

(b) Compute the amount of free cash flow for 2014.

using the data given in the following table determine if the free cash flow for exxo 610971

This exercise will help you to understand how to calculate a company”s free cash flow.

Instructions

Using the data given in the following table, determine if the free cash flow for Exxon Mobil CP has increased/decreased during 2014 versus 2013. Figures given in the table are in billions.

Year ending

December 31, 2014

December 31, 2013

Cash Provided by Operating Activities

$52.0

$49.30

Capital Expenditures

$15.40

$15.50

Payment of Dividends

$7.90

$7.90

prepare a worksheet for a statement of cash flows enter the reconciling items direct 610973

This exercise will prepare you to use a worksheet in helping you prepare the data for the statement of cash flows.

Jennifer & Dana Designs Inc.
Comparative Balance Sheets
December 31
(All numbers in millions)

Assets

2014

2013

Cash

$98,700

$47,250

Accounts Receivable

87.800

56.000

Inventories

121,900

103,650

Investments

81,500

87,000

Plant Assets

250,000

205,000

Accumulated Depreciation

(49500.)

(49500.)

Total

$590400

$458900

Liabilities and Stockholders” Equity

Accounts Payable

$57,700

$48,280

Accrued Expenses Payable

121,000

18,830

bonds Payable

100,000

80,000

Common Stock

250.000

200.000

Retained Earnings

170.600

111.790

Total

$590400

$458900

Jennifer & Dana Designs Inc.
Income Statement
For the Year Ended December 31, 2014

Sales

5312.500

Gain on sale of plant assets

8,750

321,250

Less:

Cost of goods sold

599,460

Operating expenses (excluding depreciation expense)

14,670

Depreciation expense

49, 700

Income taxes

7,270

Interest expense

2,940

174.040

Net income

$147210

Additional information:

  1. New plant assets costing $92,000 were purchased for cash during the year.
  2. Investments were sold at cost.
  3. Plant assets costing $47,000 were sold for $15,550 and resulted in a gain of $8,750.
  4. A cash dividend of $88,400 was declared and paid during the year.

Instructions

Prepare a worksheet for a statement of cash flows. Enter the reconciling items directly in the work sheet columns, identifying the debit and credit amounts alphabetically.

Analysis:

  1. a. Increase in receivables reduces cash inflow-credit.
  2. b. Increase in inventories increases cash outflow-credit.
  3. c. Increase in accounts payable reduces cash outflow-debit.
  4. d. Decrease in accrued expenses payable increases cash outflow-credit.
  5. e. Sale of investments increases cash inflow-debit.
  6. f. Purchase of plant assets increases cash outflow-credit
  7. g. Depreciation expense is a noncash charge to income-debit.
  8. h. Sale of plant assets increases cash inflow-debit.
  9. i. Issue of bonds increases cash inflow-debit.
  10. j. Issue of common stock increases cash inflow-debit.
  11. k. Net income increases cash inflow-debit.
  12. l. Payment of dividends increases cash outflow-credit.
  13. r. Increase in cash balance.

net cash flow from operating activities for 2014 for graham corporation was 75 000 t 610979

Net cash flow from operating activities for 2014 for Graham Corporation was $75,000. The following items are reported on the financial statements for 2014:

Depreciation and amortization

5,000

Cash dividends paid on common stock

3,000

Increase in accrued receivables

6,000

Based only on the information above, Graham”s net income for 2014 was:

  1. $64,000.
  2. $66,000.
  3. $74,000.
  4. $76,000.
  5. None of the above.

if the balance of a long term liability account increases from one balance sheet dat 610980

If the balance of a long-term liability account increases from one balance sheet date to the next, this normally indicates that long-term:

  1. assets were purchased and an investing outflow should be reported on the statement of cash flows.
  2. debt was paid and a financing outflow should be reported on the statement of cash flows.
  3. debt was issued and a financing inflow should be reported on the statement of cash flows.
  4. debt was issued and a financing outflow should be reported on the statement of cash flows.

selected information for 2014 for the truly green company follows 610983

Selected information for 2014 for the Truly Green Company follows:

Total operating expenses (accrual basis) (includes depreciation and amortization)

$200,000

Beginning prepaid expenses

10,000

Ending prepaid expenses

12,000

Beginning accrued liabilities

16,000

Ending accrued liabilities

19,000

Depreciation of plant assets

28,000

Amortization of intangible assets

7.500

Payment of cash dividends

5,000

The amount of cash payments made during 2014 for operating expenses is:

  1. $234,500.
  2. $165,500.
  3. $163,500.
  4. $160,500.
  5. None of these.

the amount of cash payments to suppliers for merchandise during the period is 610985

The following data relate to the Greg Norman Corporation:

Beginning inventory

$14,000

Ending inventory

12,000

Beginning accounts payable (for merchandise)

2,200

Ending accounts payable (for merchandise)

1,600

Cost of goods sold (accrual basis)

92,000

The amount of cash payments to suppliers for merchandise during the period is:

  1. $94,600.
  2. $93,400.
  3. $90,600.
  4. $89,400.

presented below is the account for the vendor kitchen plastics company as it appears 611028

This exercise will test your understanding of the postings that appear in a subsidiary ledger.

Presented below is the account for the vendor, Kitchen Plastics Company, as it appears in the accounts payable subsidiary ledger of Great Value Hardware.

KITCHEN PLASTICS COMPANY

Date

Ref.

Debit

Credit

Balance

2014

Jan. 1

17,000

3

P17

22,000

39,000

8

P18

13,000

52,000

9

CP25

17,000

35,000

11

G5

5,000

30,000

17

CP28

30,000

-0-

Instructions

Explain each amount reflected in this subsidiary ledger account.

a list of abbreviations and a list of transactions in random order follow 611029

This exercise will help you identify the journal in which to record specific transactions.

A list of abbreviations and a list of transactions (in random order) follow:

Abbreviations

S = Two-Column Sales Journal

CR = Multiple-Column Cash Receipts Journal

P = Single-Column Purchases Journal

CP = Multiple-Column Cash Payments Journal

GJ = Two-Column General Journal

Instructions

For each transaction, indicate the journal in which it would be recorded.

Transactions

1. Sold merchandise for cash.

2. Purchased merchandise for cash.

3. Made an adjusting entry for accrued salaries.

4. Made collection on an accounts receivable.

5. Paid rent for the month.

6. Accepted a note receivable from a customer in settlement of an account receivable.

7. Paid salaries for the current period.

8. Wrote a check to buy treasury stock.

9. Returned merchandise to a supplier for credit.

10. Sold merchandise on account.

11. Purchased merchandise on account.

12. Purchased equipment for cash.

13. Purchased equipment on account.

14. Purchased office supplies for cash.

15. Purchased office supplies on account.

16. Recorded depreciation on equipment for the period.

17. Received return of merchandise from a customer who had purchased it on credit. Issued a credit memorandum.

18. Recorded an adjustment for supplies used.

19. Recorded an adjustment for insurance which had expired.

20. Paid freight bill on purchases of merchandise inventory.

21. Loaned money to an employee.

22. Paid for merchandise which had been purchased on account. Paid within the discount period.

23. Recorded accrued revenue.

24. Paid the utilities bill.

25. Closed the temporary accounts.

26. Removed merchandise inventory from shelf for owner”s personal use.

27. Paid a creditor after the 2% discount period lapsed.

28. Gave a cash refund to a customer who returned merchandise.

29. Paid freight on goods shipped to a customer FOB destination.

30. Collected revenue in advance.

31. Paid for an insurance premium one year in advance.

32. Received an additional investment of cash from an owner.

33. Sold inventory on credit.

34. Purchased inventory on credit.

35. Received a cash refund from a supplier upon return of merchandise.

36. Collected interest from employee who borrowed money.

for each of the postings to general ledger accounts listed below indicate the most c 611030

This exercise reviews general ledger accounts and postings to them from special journals.

A list of abbreviations and a list of postings to general ledger accounts (in random order) follow:

Abbreviations

S = Two-Column Sales Journal

CR = Multiple-Column Cash Receipts Journal

P = Single-Column Purchases Journal

CP = Multiple-Column Cash Payments Journal

GJ = Two-Column General Journal

Instructions

For each of the postings to general ledger accounts listed below, indicate the most common source of the posting. Use the appropriate abbreviations to indicate your answer for each. (Assume all purchases of merchandise inventory and sales are made on account. Assume a perpetual inventory system is in use.)

Postings to General Ledger Accounts

1. Debits to Merchandise Inventory

2. Credits to Sales

3. Debits to Accounts Payable

4. Credits to Accounts Payable

5. Debits to Cash

6. Credits to Cash

7. Debits to Accounts Receivable

8. Credits to Accounts Receivable

9. Credits to Interest Payable

10. Debits to Postage Expense

11. Debits to Wages and Salaries Expense

12. Debits to Depreciation Expense

13. Debits to Prepaid Insurance

14. Credits to Prepaid Insurance

15. Debits to Office Supplies on Hand

16. Credits to Office Supplies on Hand

17. Credits to Bank Loans Payable

18. Credits to Unearned Revenue

19. Debits to Unearned Revenue

20. Credits to Wages and Salaries Expense

21. Debits to Repairs Expense

22. Credits to Interest Revenue

show by means of journal entries how will you record the following issues also show 618216

Show by means of journal entries how will you record the following issues: Also show how they will appear in their respective balance sheets:

  • A Ltd. issued 10,000, 10% debentures of Rs.100 each at a discount of 5% redeemable at the end of 5 years at par
  • B Ltd. issued 10,000, 11% debentures of Rs.100 each at par redeemable at the end of 5 years at a premium of 5%
  • C Ltd issued 10,000, 12% debentures of Rs.100 each at a discount of 5% redeemable at the end of 5 years at a premium of 5%
  • D Ltd issued 10,000, 13% debentures of Rs.100 each at a premium of 5% redeemable at the end of 5 years at a premium of 5%

you are required to show for the year ended 31 december 2010 i debentures a c ii sin 618219

X Ltd. issued Rs.24,00,000 debentures during 2009 on the following terms and conditions:

  • A sinking fund to be created by yearly appropriations of profit and similar amount to be invested outside.
  • The company will have the right to purchase for cancellation of debentures from the market if available below par value.
  • The debentures are to be redeemed on 31 December 2010 at a premium of 2%. The following balances appeared in the books of the company as on 1 January 2010:

Sinking Fund Investments

17,73,000

Sinking Fund

17,73,000

Debentures A/c

18,00,000

The following transactions took place during the subsequent 12 months:

  • On 1 July 2010 Rs.1,20,000 debentures were purchased for Rs.1,06,656 and cancelled immediately, the amount being provided out of sale proceeds of investments of the book value of Rs.1,39,200 at Rs.1,35,600.
  • The income from sinking fund investments Rs.88,800 received on 1 July 2010 was not invested.
  • On 29 December 2010, Rs.16,92,000 were received on sale of the remaining sinking fund investments.
  • On 31 December 2010, the remaining debentures were redeemed.

You are required to show for the year ended 31 December 2010: (i) debentures A/c; (ii) sinking fund account; (iii) sinking fund investments account and (iv) debenture redemption A/c [Model: Cum-interest and ex-interest].

on 31 march 2011 rs 1 04 000 was appropriated for the sinking fund and on the same d 618220

The following balances appeared in the books of Cheerful Ltd. as on 1 April 2010:

12% Debentures

10,00,000

(Face Value 100)

Debentures Redemption Fund

6,25,000

Debentures Redemption Fund

6,25,000

Investments

(In 8% Government Bonds of the Face Value of Rs.7,50,000)

Interest on the debentures was payable on 30 September and 31 March and interest on government bonds was receivable on the same dates. On 31 May 2010, the company purchased for immediate cancellation 1,250 debentures in the market at Rs.96 each cum-interest. The amount required for this was raised by selling 8% government bonds of the face value of Rs.1,35,000 cum-interest. On 31 March 2011, Rs.1,04,000 was appropriated for the sinking fund and on the same date 8% government bonds were acquired for the amount PLUS the interest on investments. The face value of government bonds acquired was 1,86,000. You are required to show the ledger accounts in the books of the company. Ignore tax.

the interest dates for both debentures and investments are 30 september and 31 march 618222

X Ltd. has 12% Rs.2,00,000 debentures outstanding in its books on 1 January 2010. It also had Rs.1,20,000 balance in sinking fund A/c represented by 8% investments (Face value Rs.1,50,000). On 30 December 2010, it sold investments of face value of Rs.20,000 @ Rs.90 and purchased own debentures of the face value of Rs.20,000 out of proceeds for immediate cancellation. The interest dates for both debentures and investments are 30 September and 31 March. All transactions are made on cum-interest basis. Show debentures A/c, sinking fund A/c and sinking fund investment A/c.

show debentures a c sinking fund a c sinking fund investments a c premium on redempt 618224

Parker Ltd. issued 15% 20,000 debentures of Rs.100 each on 1 January 2006 redeemable at a premium of 10% after 5 years. A sinking fund is created for the purpose of redemption of debentures and the money is invested in 5% government securities at par. The investments are to be made in multiples of Rs.100 only. Rs.1 invested p.a. at 5% over 5 years amounts to Rs.5.5256. Investments were realized for Rs.17,50,000 on 31 December 2010 and bank balance on that date was Rs.7,50,000 before receipt of interest and sale of government securities.

Show debentures A/c, sinking fund A/c, sinking fund investments A/c, premium on redemption of debentures A/c and bank A/c. Bank A/c is to be prepared only on 31 December 2010. All calculations are to be made in nearest rupee.

a limited company has an authorized capital of rs 20 crore in shares of rs 10 each o 618225

A limited company has an authorized capital of Rs.20 crore in shares of Rs.10 each of which 120 lakh shares have been issued and are fully paid. A summary of its balance sheet on 31 March 2010 is as follows:

Liabilities

Rs. in

Assets

Rs.in

Lakhs

Lakhs

Share Capital

1,200

Fixed Assets

2,200

(Net)

Debenture

960

Debenture

960

Redemption

Redemption

Fund

Fund

Investments

(Cost) Market

Value 2816 lakh

P&L Plc

380

12% Debentures

10,000

Redeemable at

102%

Current

220

Current Assets

600

Liabilities

3,760

3,760

Interest on debentures had been paid up to 31 March 2010. On 1 April 2010, the directors gave notice to redeem the 12% debenture holders on 1 July 2010, giving the holders the option to be Zepaid either wholly in cash or by issue of four shares of Rs.10 each (fully paid) for every Rs.L100 debentures. 60% of the holders exercised the option to take shares, and the cash of the remainder was obtained by realizing a sufficient amount of the investment at their market value on 31 March 2010. Draft journal entries to record these transactions and any consequent transfers which you consider necessary.

what nonfinancial factors should management consider in making its decision 610733

The management of Shatner Manufacturing Company is trying to decide whether to continue manufacturing a part or to buy it from an outside supplier. The part, called CISCO, is a component of the company”s finished product.

The following information was collected from the accounting records and production data for the year ending December 31, 2014.

1.8,000 units of CISCO were produced in the Machining Department.

2.Variable manufacturing costs applicable to the production of each CISCO unit were: direct materials $4.80, direct labor $4.30, indirect labor $0.43, utilities $0.40.

3.Fixed manufacturing costs applicable to the production of CISCO were:

Cost Item

Direct

Allocated

Depreciation

$2,100

$ 900

Property taxes

500

200

Insurance

900

600

$3,500

$1,700

All variable manufacturing and direct fixed costs will be eliminated if CISCO is purchased. Allocated costs will have to be absorbed by other production departments.

4.The lowest quotation for 8,000 CISCO units from a supplier is $80,000.

5.If CISCO units are purchased, freight and inspection costs would be $0.35 per unit, and receiving costs totaling $1,300 per year would be incurred by the Machining Department.

Instructions

(a)Prepare an incremental analysis for CISCO. Your analysis should have columns for (1) Make CISCO, (2) Buy CISCO, and (3) Net Income Increase/(Decrease).

(b)Based on your analysis, what decision should management make?

(c)Would the decision be different if Shatner Company has the opportunity to produce $3,000 of net income with the facilities currently being used to manufacture CISCO? Show computations.

(d)What nonfinancial factors should management consider in making its decision?

prepare an incremental analysis concerning the possible discontinuance of 1 division 610735

Gutierrez Company has four operating divisions. During the first quarter of 2014, the company reported aggregate income from operations of $213,000 and the following divisional results.

Division

I

II

III

IV

Sales revenue

$250,000

$200,000

$500,000

$450,000

Cost of goods sold

200,000

192,000

300,000

250,000

Selling and administrative expenses

75,000

60,000

60,000

50,000

Income (loss) from operations

$ (25,000)

$ (52,000)

$140,000

$150,000

Analysis reveals the following percentages of variable costs in each division.

I

II

III

IV

Cost of goods sold

75%

90%

80%

75%

Selling and administrative expenses

40

70

50

60

Discontinuance of any division would save 50% of the fixed costs and expenses for that division.

Top management is very concerned about the unprofitable divisions (I and II). Consensus is that one or both of the divisions should be discontinued.

Instructions

(a)Compute the contribution margin for Divisions I and II.

(b)Prepare an incremental analysis concerning the possible discontinuance of (1) Division I and (2) Division II. What course of action do you recommend for each division?

(c)Prepare a columnar condensed income statement for Gutierrez Company, assuming Division II is eliminated. (Use the CVP format.) Division II”s unavoidable fixed costs are allocated equally to the continuing divisions.

(d)Reconcile the total income from operations ($213,000) with the total income from operations without Division II.

rank the projects on each of the foregoing bases which project do you recommend 610736

Henkel Company is considering three long-term capital investment proposals. Each investment has a useful life of 5 years. Relevant data on each project are as follows.

Project Kilo

Project Lima

Project Oscar

Capital investment

$150,000

$165,000

$200,000

Annual net income:

Year 1

14,000

18,000

27,000

2

14,000

17,000

23,000

3

14,000

16,000

21,000

4

14,000

12,000

13,000

5

14,000

9,000

12,000

Total

$ 70,000

$ 72,000

$ 96,000

Depreciation is computed by the straight-line method with no salvage value. The company”s cost of capital is 15%. (Assume that cash flows occur evenly throughout the year.)

Instructions

(a)Compute the cash payback period for each project. (Round to two decimals.)

(b)Compute the net present value for each project. (Round to nearest dollar.)

(c)Compute the annual rate of return for each project.

(d)Rank the projects on each of the foregoing bases. Which project do you recommend?

lon timur is an accounting major at a midwestern state university located approximat 610737

Lon Timur is an accounting major at a midwestern state university located approximately 60 miles from a major city. Many of the students attending the university are from the metropolitan area and visit their homes regularly on the weekends. Lon, an entrepreneur at heart, realizes that few good commuting alternatives are available for students doing weekend travel. He believes that a weekend commuting service could be organized and run profitably from several suburban and downtown shopping mall locations. Lon has gathered the following investment information.

1.Five used vans would cost a total of $75,000 to purchase and would have a 3-year useful life with negligible salvage value. Lon plans to use straight-line depreciation.

2.Ten drivers would have to be employed at a total annual payroll expense of $48,000.

3.Other annual out-of-pocket expenses associated with running the commuter service would include Gasoline $16,000, Maintenance $3,300, Repairs $4,000, Insurance $4,200, and Advertising $2,500.

4.Lon has visited several financial institutions to discuss funding. The best interest rate he has been able to negotiate is 15%. Use this rate for cost of capital.

5.Lon expects each van to make ten round trips weekly and carry an average of six students each trip. The service is expected to operate 30 weeks each year, and each student will be charged $12.00 for a round-trip ticket.

Instructions

(a)Determine the annual (1) net income and (2) net annual cash flows for the commuter service.

(b)Compute (1) the cash payback period and (2) the annual rate of return. (Round to two decimals.)

(c)Compute the net present value of the commuter service. (Round to the nearest dollar.)

(d)What should Lon conclude from these computations?

goltra clinic is considering investing in new heart monitoring equipment it has two 610738

Goltra Clinic is considering investing in new heart-monitoring equipment. It has two options: Option A would have an initial lower cost but would require a significant expenditure for rebuilding after 4 years. Option B would require no rebuilding expenditure, but its maintenance costs would be higher. Since the Option B machine is of initial higher quality, it is expected to have a salvage value at the end of its useful life. The following estimates were made of the cash flows. The company”s cost of capital is 8%.

Option A

Option B

Initial cost

$160,000

$227,000

Annual cash inflows

$70,000

$80,000

Annual cash outflows

$30,000

$26,000

Cost to rebuild (end of year 4)

$50,000

$0

Salvage value

$0

$8,000

Estimated useful life

7 years

7 years

Instructions

(a)Compute the (1) net present value and (2) internal rate of return for each option. (Hint:To solve for internal rate of return, experiment with alternative discount rates to arrive at a net present value of zero.)

(b)Which option should be accepted?

morello inc manufactures basketballs for the national basketball association nba for 610739

Morello Inc. manufactures basketballs for the National Basketball Association (NBA). For the first 6 months of 2014, the company reported the following operating results while operating at 90% of plant capacity and producing 90,000 units.

Amount

Per Unit

Sales revenue

$4,500,000

$50

Cost of goods sold

3,060,000

34

Selling and administrative expenses

360,000

4

Net income

$1,080,000

$12

Fixed costs for the period were cost of goods sold $900,000, and selling and administrative expenses $180,000.

In July, normally a slack manufacturing month, Morello receives a special order for 10,000 basketballs at $30 each from the Chinese Basketball Association (CBA). Acceptance of the order would increase variable selling and administrative expenses $0.50 per unit because of shipping costs but would not increase fixed costs and expenses.

Instructions

(a)Prepare an incremental analysis for the special order.

(b)Should Morello Inc. accept the special order?

(c)What is the minimum selling price on the special order to produce net income of $5.50 per ball?

(d)What nonfinancial factors should management consider in making its decision?

the management of gill corporation is trying to decide whether to continue manufactu 610740

The management of Gill Corporation is trying to decide whether to continue manufacturing a part or to buy it from an outside supplier. The part, called FIZBE, is a component of the company”s finished product.

The following information was collected from the accounting records and production data for the year ending December 31, 2014.

1.5,000 units of FIZBE were produced in the Machining Department.

2.Variable manufacturing costs applicable to the production of each FIZBE unit were: direct materials $4.75, direct labor $4.60, indirect labor $0.45, utilities $0.35.

3.Fixed manufacturing costs applicable to the production of FIZBE were:

Cost Item

Direct

Allocated

Depreciation

$1,100

$ 900

Property taxes

500

200

Insurance

900

600

$2,500

$1,700

All variable manufacturing and direct fixed costs will be eliminated if FIZBE is purchased. Allocated costs will have to be absorbed by other production departments.

4.The lowest quotation for 5,000 FIZBE units from a supplier is $56,000.

5.If FIZBE units are purchased, freight and inspection costs would be $0.30 per unit, and receiving costs totaling $500 per year would be incurred by the Machining Department.

Instructions

(a)Prepare an incremental analysis for FIZBE. Your analysis should have columns for (1) Make FIZBE, (2) Buy FIZBE, and (3) Net Income Increase/(Decrease).

(b)Based on your analysis, what decision should management make?

(c)Would the decision be different if Gill Corporation has the opportunity to produce $6,000 of net income with the facilities currently being used to manufacture FIZBE? Show computations.

(d)What nonfinancial factors should management consider in making its decision?

write a memo to gene simmons explaining why any gain or loss should be ignored in th 610741

Last year (2013), Simmons Company installed new factory equipment. The owner of the company, Gene Simmons, recently returned from an industry equipment exhibition where he watched computerized equipment demonstrated. He was impressed with the equipment”s speed and cost efficiency. Upon returning from the exhibition, he asked his purchasing agent to collect price and operating cost data on the new equipment. In addition, he asked the company”s accountant to provide him with cost data on the company”s equipment. This information is presented below.

Old Equipment

New Equipment

Purchase price

$210,000

$250,000

Estimated salvage value

0

0

Estimated useful life

5 years

4 years

Depreciation method

Straight-line

Straight-line

Annual operating costs other than depreciation:

Variable

$50,000

$12,000

Fixed

30,000

5,000

Annual revenues are $360,000, and selling and administrative expenses are $45,000, regardless of which equipment is used. If the old equipment is replaced now, at the beginning of 2014, Simmons Company will be able to sell it for $58,000.

Instructions

(a)Determine any gain or loss if the old equipment is replaced.

(b)Prepare a 4-year summarized income statement for each of the following assumptions:

(1).The old equipment is retained.

(2).The old equipment is replaced.

(c)Using incremental analysis, determine if the old equipment should be replaced.

(d)Write a memo to Gene Simmons explaining why any gain or loss should be ignored in the decision to replace the old equipment.

panda corporation has four operating divisions during the first quarter of 2014 the 610742

Panda Corporation has four operating divisions. During the first quarter of 2014, the company reported aggregate income from operations of $129,000 and the divisional results shown below.

Division

IV

Sales revenue

$250,000

$200,000

$500,000

$450,000

Cost of goods sold

200,000

192,000

300,000

250,000

Selling and administrative expenses

75.000

60.000

60.000

50.000

Income (loss) from operations

$ (25,000)

$ (52,000)

$140,000

$150,000

Analysis reveals the following percentages of variable costs in each division.

I

II

III

IV

Cost of goods sold

75%

90%

80%

75%

Selling and administrative expenses

40

70

50

60

Discontinuance of any division would save 50% of the fixed costs and expenses for that division.

Top management is very concerned about the unprofitable divisions (III and IV). Consensus is that one or both of the divisions should be discontinued.

Instructions

(a)Compute the contribution margin for Divisions III and IV.

(b)Prepare an incremental analysis concerning the possible discontinuance of (1) Division III and (2) Division IV. What course of action do you recommend for each division?

(c)Prepare a columnar condensed income statement for Panda Corporation, assuming Division IV is eliminated. (Use the CVP format.) Division IV”s unavoidable fixed costs are allocated equally to the continuing divisions.

(d)Reconcile the total income from operations ($129,000) with the total income from operations without Division IV.

the borders and noble partnership is considering three long term capital investment 610743

The Borders and Noble partnership is considering three long-term capital investment proposals. Each investment has a useful life of 5 years. Relevant data on each project are as follows.

Project Mary

Project Whutie

Project Sarah

Capital investment

$140,000

$175,000

$190,000

Annual net income:

Year 1

10,000

12,500

19,000

2

10,000

12,000

16,000

3

10,000

11,000

14,000

4

10,000

8,000

9,000

5

10,000

6,000

8,000

Total

$ 50,000

$ 49,500

$ 66,000

Depreciation is computed by the straight-line method with no salvage value. The company”s cost of capital is 12%. (Assume cash flows occur evenly throughout the year.)

Instructions

(a)Compute the cash payback period for each project. (Round to two decimals.)

(b)Compute the net present value for each project. (Round to nearest dollar.)

(c)Compute the annual rate of return for each project. (Round to two decimals.) (Hint:Use average annual net income in your computation.)

(d)Rank the projects on each of the foregoing bases. Which project do you recommend?

what should ben conclude from these computations 610744

Ben Paul is an accounting major at a western university located approximately 60 miles from a major city. Many of the students attending the university are from the metropolitan area and visit their homes regularly on the weekends. Ben, an entrepreneur at heart, realizes that few good commuting alternatives are available for students doing weekend travel. He believes that a weekend commuting service could be organized and run profitably from several suburban and downtown shopping mall locations. Ben has gathered the following investment information.

1.Five used vans would cost a total of $90,000 to purchase and would have a 3-year useful life with negligible salvage value. Ben plans to use straight-line depreciation.

2.Ten drivers would have to be employed at a total annual payroll expense of $43,000.

3.Other annual out-of-pocket expenses associated with running the commuter service would include Gasoline $26,000, Maintenance $4,000, Repairs $5,300, Insurance $4,500, and Advertising $2,200.

4.Ben desires to earn a return of 15% on his investment.

5.Ben expects each van to make ten round trips weekly and carry an average of six students each trip. The service is expected to operate 32 weeks each year, and each student will be charged $15 for a round-trip ticket.

Instructions

(a)Determine the annual (1) net income and (2) net annual cash flows for the commuter service.

(b)Compute (1) the cash payback period and (2) the annual rate of return. (Round to two decimals.)

(c)Compute the net present value of the commuter service. (Round to the nearest dollar.)

(d)What should Ben conclude from these computations?

prepare a cash budget for the month assume the percentage of sales that will be coll 610746

You would like to start a business manufacturing a unique model of bicycle helmet. In preparation for an interview with the bank to discuss your financing needs, you need to provide the following information. A number of assumptions are required; clearly note all assumptions that you make.

Instructions

(a)Identify the types of costs that would likely be involved in making this product.

(b)Set up five columns as indicated.

Product Costs

Item

Direct Labor

Direct Materials

Manufacturing Overhead

Period Costs

Classify the costs you identified in (a) into the manufacturing cost classifications of product costs (direct materials, direct labor, and manufacturing overhead) and period costs.

(c)Assign hypothetical monthly dollar figures to the costs you identified in (a) and (b).

(d)Assume you have no raw materials or work in process beginning or ending inventories. Prepare a projected cost of goods manufactured schedule for the first month of operations.

(e)Project the number of helmets you expect to produce the first month of operations. Compute the cost to produce one bicycle helmet. Review the result to ensure it is reasonable; if not, return to part (c) and adjust the monthly dollar figures you assigned accordingly.

(f)What type of cost accounting system will you likely use—job order or process costing?

(g)Explain how you would assign costs in either the job order or process costing system you plan to use.

(h)Classify your costs as either variable or fixed costs. For simplicity, assign all costs to either variable or fixed, assuming there are no mixed costs, using the format shown.

Item

Variable Cost

Fixed Cost

Total Cost

(i)Compute the unit variable cost, using the production number you determined in (e).

(j)Project the number of helmets you anticipate selling the first month of operations. Set a unit selling price, and compute both the contribution margin per unit and the contribution margin ratio.

(k)Determine your break-even point in dollars and in units.

(l)Prepare projected operating budgets (sales, production, direct materials, direct labor, manufacturing overhead, selling and administrative expense, and income statement). You will need to make assumptions for each of the following:

Direct materials budget:

Quantity of direct materials required to produce one helmet; cost per unit of quantity; desired ending direct materials (assume none).

Direct labor budget:

Direct labor time required per helmet; direct labor cost per hour.

Budgeted income statement:

Income tax expense is 45% of income from operations.

(m)Prepare a cash budget for the month. Assume the percentage of sales that will be collected from customers is 75%, and the percentage of direct materials that will be paid in the current month is 75%.

(n)Determine a relevant range of activity, using the number of helmets produced as your activity index. Recast your manufacturing overhead budget into a flexible monthly budget for two additional activity levels.

(o)Identify one potential cause of materials, direct labor, and manufacturing overhead variances for your product.

(p)Assume that you wish to purchase production equipment that costs $720,000. Determine the cash payback period, utilizing the monthly cash flow that you computed in part (m) multiplied by 12 months (for simplicity).

(q)Identify any nonfinancial factors that should be considered before commencing your business venture.

discuss additional factors that mike and diane should consider if current designs is 610748

Recently, Mike Cichanowski, owner and CEO ofCurrent Designs, received a phone call from the president of a brewing company. He was calling to inquire about the possibility of Current Designs producing “floating coolers” for a promotion his company was planning. These coolers resemble a kayak but are about one-third the size. They are used to float food and beverages while paddling down the river on a weekend leisure trip. The company would be interested in purchasing 100 coolers for the upcoming summer. It is willing to pay $250 per cooler. The brewing company would pick up the coolers upon completion of the order.

Mike met with Diane Buswell, controller, to identify how much it would cost Current Designs to produce the coolers. After careful analysis, the following costs were identified.

Direct materials

$80/unit

Direct labor

$60/unit

Variable overhead

$20/unit

Fixed overhead

$1,000

Current Designs would be able to modify an existing mold to produce the coolers. The cost of these modifications would be approximately $2,000.

Instructions

(a)Prepare an incremental analysis to determine whether Current Designs should accept this special order to produce the coolers.

(b)Discuss additional factors that Mike and Diane should consider if Current Designs is currently operating at full capacity.

what do you think minitek should do in regard to the kmart order what should it do i 610751

MiniTek manufactures private-label small electronic products, such as alarm clocks, calculators, kitchen timers, stopwatches, and automatic pencil sharpeners. Some of the products are sold as sets, and others are sold individually. Products are studied as to their sales potential, and then cost estimates are made. The Engineering Department develops production plans, and then production begins. The company has generally had very successful product introductions. Only two products introduced by the company have been discontinued.

One of the products currently sold is a multi-alarm clock. The clock has four alarms that can be programmed to sound at various times and for varying lengths of time. The company has experienced a great deal of difficulty in making the circuit boards for the clocks. The production process has never operated smoothly. The product is unprofitable at the present time, primarily because of warranty repairs and product recalls. Two models of the clocks were recalled, for example, because they sometimes caused an electric shock when the alarms were being shut off. The Engineering Department is attempting to revise the manufacturing process, but the revision will take another 6 months at least.

The clocks were very popular when they were introduced, and since they are private-label, the company has not suffered much from the recalls. Presently, the company has a very large order for several items fromKmart Stores.The order includes 5,000 of the multi-alarm clocks. When the company suggested that Kmart purchase the clocks from another manufacturer, Kmart threatened to rescind the entire order unless the clocks were included.

The company has therefore investigated the possibility of having another company make the clocks for them. The clocks were bid for the Kmart order based on an estimated $6.90 cost to manufacture:

Circuit board, 1 each @ $2.00

$2.00

Plastic case, 1 each @ $0.80

0.80

Alarms, 4 @ $0.15 each

0.60

Labor, 15 minutes @ $12/hour

3.00

Overhead, $2.00 per labor hour

0.50

MiniTek could purchase clocks to fill the Kmart order for $10 from Trans-Tech Asia, a Korean manufacturer with a very good quality record. Trans-Tech has offered to reduce the price to $7.50 after MiniTek has been a customer for 6 months, placing an order of at least 1,000 units per month. If MiniTek becomes a “preferred customer” by purchasing 15,000 units per year, the price would be reduced still further to $4.50.

Omega Products, a local manufacturer, has also offered to make clocks for MiniTek. They have offered to sell 5,000 clocks for $5 each. However, Omega Products has been in business for only 6 months. They have experienced significant turnover in their labor force, and the local press has reported that the owners may face tax evasion charges soon. The owner of Omega Products is an electronic engineer, however, and the quality of the clocks is likely to be good.

If MiniTek decides to purchase the clocks from either Trans-Tech or Omega, all the costs to manufacture could be avoided, except a total of $5,000 in overhead costs for machine depreciation. The machinery is fairly new, and has no alternate use.

Instructions

(a)What is the difference in profit under each of the alternatives if the clocks are to be sold for $14.50 each to Kmart?

(b)What are the most important nonfinancial factors that MiniTek should consider when making this decision?

(c)What do you think MiniTek should do in regard to the Kmart order? What should it do in regard to continuing to manufacture the multi-alarm clocks? Be prepared to defend your answer.

how would incremental analysis be employed to assist in this decision 610752

Founded in 1983,Beverly Hills Fan Companyis located in Woodland Hills, California. With 23 employees and sales of less than $10 million, the company is relatively small. Management feels that there is potential for growth in the upscale market for ceiling fans and lighting. They are particularly optimistic about growth in Mexican and Canadian markets.

Presented below is information from the president”s letter in the company”s annual report.

Instructions

(a)What points did the company management need to consider before deciding to offer the special-order fans to customers?

(b)How would incremental analysis be employed to assist in this decision?

assume that this year s capital expenditures are expected to increase cash flows by 610753

Campbell Soup Companyis an international provider of soup products. Management is very interested in continuing to grow the company in its core business, while “spinning off” those businesses that are not part of its core operation.

Instructions

Review the financial statements and management”s discussion and analysis, and answer the following questions.

(a)What was the total amount of capital expenditures for the fiscal year ending July 29, 2012, and how does this amount compare with the previous year?

(b)What interest rate did the company pay on new borrowings for the fiscal year ending July 29, 2012?

(c)Assume that this year”s capital expenditures are expected to increase cash flows by $42 million. What is the expected internal rate of return (IRR) for these capital expenditures? (Assume a 10-year period for the cash flows.)

prepare a memo to maria fierro your supervisor show your calculations from a and b i 610754

Vilas Company is considering a capital investment of $190,000 in additional productive facilities. The new machinery is expected to have a useful life of 5 years with no salvage value. Depreciation is by the straight-line method. During the life of the investment, annual net income and net annual cash flows are expected to be $12,000 and $50,000, respectively. Vilas has a 12% cost of capital rate, which is the required rate of return on the investment.

Instructions

Prepare a memo to Maria Fierro, your supervisor. Show your calculations from (a) and (b). In one or two paragraphs, discuss important nonfinancial considerations. Make any assumptions you believe to be necessary. Make a recommendation based on your analysis.

nucomp company operates in a state where corporate taxes and workers rsquo compensat 610755

NuComp Company operates in a state where corporate taxes and workers’ compensation insurance rates have recently doubled. NuComp”s president has just assigned you the task of preparing an economic analysis and making a recommendation relative to moving the entire operation to Missouri. The president is slightly in favor of such a move because Missouri is his boyhood home and he also owns a fishing lodge there.

You have just completed building your dream house, moved in, and sodded the lawn. Your children are all doing well in school and sports and, along with your spouse, want no part of a move to Missouri. If the company does move, so will you because the town is a one-industry community and you and your spouse will have to move to have employment. Moving when everyone else does will cause you to take a big loss on the sale of your house. The same hardships will be suffered by your coworkers, and the town will be devastated.

In compiling the costs of moving versus not moving, you have latitude in the assumptions you make, the estimates you compute, and the discount rates and time periods you project. You are in a position to influence the decision singlehandedly.

Instructions

(a)Who are the stakeholders in this situation?

(b)What are the ethical issues in this situation?

(c)What would you do in this situation?

managerial accounting techniques can be used in a wide variety of settings as we hav 610756

Managerial accounting techniques can be used in a wide variety of settings. As we have frequently pointed out, you can use them in many personal situations. They also can be useful in trying to find solutions for societal issues that appear to be hard to solve.

Instructions

Read theFortunearticle, “The Toughest Customers: How Hardheaded Business Metrics Can Help the Hard-core Homeless,” by Cait Murphy, Answer the following questions.

(a)How does the article define “chronic” homelessness?

(b)In what ways does homelessness cost a city money? What are the estimated costs of a chronic homeless person to various cities?

(c)What are the steps suggested to address the problem?

(d)What is the estimated cost of implementing this program in New York? What results have been seen?

(e)In terms of incremental analysis, frame the relevant costs in this situation.

write a response indicating your position regarding this situation provide support f 610757

School costs money. Is this an expenditure that you should have avoided? A year of tuition at a public four-year college costs about $8,655, and a year of tuition at a public two-year college costs about $1,359. If you did not go to college, you might avoid mountains of school-related debt. In fact, each year, about 600,000 students decide to drop out of school. Many of them never return. Suppose that you are working two jobs and going to college, and that you are not making ends meet. Your grades are suffering due to your lack of available study time. You feel depressed. Should you drop out of school?

YES:You can always go back to school. If your grades are bad and you are depressed, what good is school doing you anyway?

NO:Once you drop out, it is very hard to get enough momentum to go back. Dropping out will dramatically reduce your long-term opportunities. It is better to stay in school, even if you take only one class per semester. While you cannot go back and redo your initial decision, you can look at some facts to evaluate the wisdom of your decision.

Instructions

Write a response indicating your position regarding this situation. Provide support for your view.

from an ethical perspective discuss whether the actions of the department of justice 610613

Ethics, Enron,Arthur Andersen, and Accounting Changes – In 2001, Enron Corporation filed financial statements in which it did not consolidate various Special Purpose Entities, thereby keeping large amounts of debt off its balance sheet. The company has since declared bankruptcy and admitted that it violated GAAP. Enron’s auditor, Arthur Andersen LLP, issued an unqualified audit opinion stating that Enron had followed GAAP. Instead Enron should have changed its accounting principles to conform to GAAP, and Andersen should not have issued an unqualified opinion. The U.S. Department of Justice began an investigation of Enron and Arthur Andersen. Some employees of Arthur Andersen shredded certain documents related to the audit. As a result the firm was found guilty of obstruction of justice and therefore was no longer able to perform audits. Only a few of the Arthur Andersen partners and employees were involved in the audit and even fewer in the shredding. However, thousands of Arthur Andersen employees lost their jobs.

Required

From an ethical perspective, discuss whether the actions of the Department of Justice were fair with regard to the employees of Arthur Andersen.

from financial reporting and ethical perspectives discuss the issues raised by this 610614

Ethics and Accounting Changes and Errors – You are auditing the financial records of a company and reviewing the property, plant, and equipment records. Included in the assets are two buildings and numerous machines in each building. One of the buildings is used to manufacture components of toys; the other is used for assembly and packing, using the manufactured components as well as others purchased from suppliers. You see that the company has changed from the straight-line to the double-declining-balance depreciation method at the beginning of the year. You also discover that a $90,000 repair was added to the cost of the building in the previous year. You decide to ask the CFO about these calculations and she replies, “We decided to change the depreciation method because toys have such short lives and get obsolete so fast. You know how kids always want the latest fad. And that is partly why we are also going to recognize an asset impairment of $150,000 this year. And, as for that $90,000, those repairs should make the building last longer. But, anyway, the amount wasn’t material to our depreciation calculations.” As you walk back to your office, you recall from earlier in the audit that the company uses LIFO for its inventory and that income before income taxes has been around $1 million for each of the last several years.

Required

From financial reporting and ethical perspectives, discuss the issues raised by this situation.

which of the following are features of the corporate form of business organization 610645

Multiple-Choice Overview of the Chapter

1. The basic purpose of accounting is to:

a. minimize the amount of taxes a company has to pay.

b. permit an organization to keep track of its economic activities.

c. report the largest amount of earnings to stockholders.

d. reduce the amount of risk experienced by investors.

2. A primary purpose of all organizations in our society is to:

a. make a profit.

b. minimize the payment of taxes.

c. provide employment for the largest number of workers possible.

d. create value by transforming resources from one form to another.

3. Value is created when organizations:

a. raise capital by borrowing funds from banks, individuals, or other businesses.

b. pay cash to suppliers, employees, owners, and government.

c. sell products or services at prices that exceed the value of resources consumed.

d. invest in machinery.

4. Which of the following are features of the corporate form of business organization?

Mutual Agency

Limited Liability

 

Yes

Yes

 

Yes

No

 

No

Yes

 

No

No

5. Tammy Faye invested $2,000 in a partnership. One year later, the partnership was sold, and cash from the sale was distributed to the partners. On that date, Tammy received a check for her share of the company in the amount of $2,250. What was Tammy’s return on investment?

a. $0

b. $250

c. $2,000

d. $2,250

6. Sternberg Enterprises developed a new type of roller skate that is very popular because of its high quality and reasonable price. Sternberg is losing money on the product, however, because several key production personnel recently resigned and replacements are not as skilled. Which of the following terms properly describe the firm?

Effective

Efficient

 

Yes

Yes

 

Yes

No

 

No

Yes

 

No

No

7. The transformation of resources refers to:

a. the assessment of employee performance.

b. converting resources from one form to a more valuable form.

c. procedures designed to reduce a company’s risk.

d. training methods by which unskilled workers become efficient and effective.

8. An investor is evaluating the potential investments described below. Past financial results of these two companies are judged to be indicative of future returns and risk.

Year

Abercrombie Profits

Fitch Profits

A

$16

$6

B

18

48

C

20

3

From the information provided, which investment appears to have the higher return and which the higher risk?

Highest Return

Highest Risk

 

Abercrombie

Abercrombie

 

Abercrombie

Fitch

 

Fitch

Abercrombie

 

Fitch

Fitch

9. SEC stands for:

a. Securities Excellence Commission

b. Securities and Exchange Commission

c. Standard Executive Compensation

d. Salaried Executive’s Council

10. Ethical behavior is particularly important for accounting because:

a. companies cannot detect unethical behavior.

b. if the reports are wrong, accountants may have to go to jail.

c. the SEC cannot carefully audit each company’s financial statements.

d. the reliability of accounting information depends on the honesty of those who prepare, report, and audit this information.

prepare a schedule demonstrating that assets liabilities owner rsquo s equity for th 610654

Balance sheet accounts for Dale’s Delightful Florist Shoppe at the end of a recent fiscal year are listed below. Prepare a schedule demonstrating that assets =liabilities +owner’s equity for the company.

Supplies Inventory

$4,150

Buildings

79,500

Cash

1,200

Equipment

12,750

Flowers and Plants

24,780

Notes Payable

58,000

Proprietor’s Capital

64,380

how much income or loss did the company earn 610665

Reconstructing Events from Information in the Accounting Database – Jill Jones has just established a security alarm maintenance service. She charges $20 per hour per person and is paid by check upon completion of the job. Her expenses are rather low— usually only supplies and transportation. Following are the entries to the accounting system that were made for the first seven transactions of the company.

ASSETS

=

LIABILITIES

+

OWNERS’ EQUITY

Date

Accounts

Cash

Other
Assets

Contributed
Capital

Retained
Earnings

Cash

5,000

Contributed Capital

5,000

Supplies Inventory

300

Cash

-300

Cash

4,200

Service Revenues

4,200

Utilities Expense

-450

Cash

-450

Transportation Expense

-500

Cash

-500

Insurance Expense

-500

Cash

-700

Retained Earnings

-1,300

Cash

-1,300

Ending Amounts

5,950

+300

=

+

5,000

+1,250

Required

A. For each transaction, describe the event that caused the entry to be made.

B. How much income (or loss) did the company earn?

what total amount of owners rsquo equity would be reported on the balance sheet 610666

Understanding Information in the Accounting Information System – Jacqueline owns and operates a specialty cosmetics manufacturing firm. Distribution is primarily through boutique shops in regional shopping centers, although some items are sold directly through a network of beauty consultants. Raw materials consist of various lotions, potions, fragrances, oils, and powders. The transactions that occurred during the month of March were entered into the accounting system as follows.

ASSETS

=

LIABILITIES

+

OWNERS’ EQUITY

Date

Accounts

Cash

Other
Assets

Contributed
Capital

Retained
Earnings

Mar. 1

Cash

10,000

Contributed Capital

1,000

Mar. 3

Cash

7,000

Notes Payable

7000

Mar. 5

Merchandise Inventory

8,100

Cash

-8,100

Mar. 18

Cash

15,250

Sales Revenue

15,250

Cost of Goods Sold

-7,500

Merchandise Inventory

-7,500

Mar. 18

Wages Expense

-650

Cash

-650

Mar. 23

Notes Payable

-2,500

1,300

Cash

-2,500

Mar. 31

Retained Earnings

5,000

-2,000

Cash

-2,000

Ending Amounts

19,000

+600

=

4,500

+

10,000

+5,100

Required

A. Describe each of the firm’s transactions. Specify as much detail about each transaction as you can.

B. Assume an income statement and balance sheet are prepared immediately after the last transaction.

1. What amount of net income would be reported?

2. What total amount of owners’ equity would be reported on the balance sheet?

prepare an incremental analysis showing whether the company should make or buy the e 610674

Juanita Company must decide whether to make or buy some of its components for the appliances it produces. The costs of producing 166,000 electrical cords for its appliances are as follows.

Direct materials

$90,000

Direct labor

$20,000

Variable overhead

$32,000

Fixed overhead

$24,000

Instead of making the electrical cords at an average cost per unit of $1.00 ($166,000 ÷ 166,000), the company has an opportunity to buy the cords at $0.90 per unit. If the company purchases the cords, all variable costs and one-fourth of the fixed costs will be eliminated.

(a) Prepare an incremental analysis showing whether the company should make or buy the electrical cords. (b) Will your answer be different if the released productive capacity will generate additional income of $5,000?

Look for the costs that change.

Ignore the costs that do not change.

Use the format in the chapter for your answer.

Recognize that opportunity cost can make a difference.

watertown paper corporation is considering adding another machine for the manufactur 610677

Watertown Paper Corporation is considering adding another machine for the manufacture of corrugated cardboard. The machine would cost $900,000. It would have an estimated life of 6 years and no salvage value. The company estimates that annual revenue would increase by $400,000 and that annual expenses excluding depreciation would increase by $190,000. It uses the straight-line method to compute depreciation expense. Management has a required rate of return of 9%. Compute the annual rate of return.

Expected annual net income = Annual revenues – Annual expenses (including depreciation expense).

Annual rate of return = Expected annual net income/Average investment.

Average investment = (Original investment + Value at end of useful life)/2.

calculate the net present value on this project and discuss whether it should be acc 610680

Watertown Paper Corporation is considering adding another machine for the manufacture of corrugated cardboard. The machine would cost $900,000. It would have an estimated life of 6 years and no salvage value. The company estimates that annual cash inflows would increase by $400,000 and that annual cash outflows would increase by $190,000. Management has a required rate of return of 9%.

(a)Calculate the net present value on this project, and discuss whether it should be accepted.

(b)Calculate the internal rate of return on this project, and discuss whether it should be accepted.

Compute net annual cash flow: Estimated annual cash inflows – Estimated annual cash outflows.

Use the NPV technique to calculate the difference between net cash flows and the initial investment.

Accept the project if the net present value is positive.

Compute the IRR factor: Capital investment ÷ Net annual cash flows.

Look up the factor in the present value of an annuity table to find the internal rate of return.

Accept the project if the internal rate of return is equal to or greater than the required rate of return.

sierra company is considering a long term capital investment project called zip the 610681

Sierra Company is considering a long-term capital investment project called ZIP. The project will require an investment of $120,000, and it will have a useful life of 4 years. Annual net income for ZIP is expected to be: Year 1 $12,000; Year 2 $10,000; Year 3 $8,000; and Year 4 $6,000. Depreciation is computed by the straight-line method with no salvage value. The company”s cost of capital is 12%.

Instructions

(a)Compute the annual rate of return for the project.

(b)Compute the cash payback period for the project. (Round to two decimals.)

(c)Compute the net present value for the project. (Round to nearest dollar.)

(d)Should the project be accepted? Why?

jobart company is currently operating at full capacity it is considering buying a pa 610685

Jobart Company is currently operating at full capacity. It is considering buying a part from an outside supplier rather than making it in-house. If Jobart purchases the part, it can use the released productive capacity to generate additional income of $30,000 from producing a different product. When conducting incremental analysis in this make-or-buy decision, the company should:

(a)ignore the $30,000.

(b)add $30,000 to other costs in the “Make” column.

(c)add $30,000 to other costs in the “Buy” column.

(d)subtract $30,000 from the other costs in the “Make” column.

if this segment is eliminated 50 of the fixed costs will be eliminated and the rest 610689

A segment of Hazard Inc. has the following data.

Sales revenue

$200,000

Variable costs

$140,000

Fixed costs

$100,000

If this segment is eliminated, 50% of the fixed costs will be eliminated, and the rest will be allocated to the remaining segments. What should Hazard do?

(a)Eliminate the segment; net income will be $50,000 greater.

(b)Eliminate the segment; net income will be $10,000 greater.

(c)Keep the segment; net income will be $200,000 greater.

(d)Keep the segment; net income will be $10,000 greater.

calculate the net present value on this project and discuss whether it should be acc 610718

Bentoli Box Corporation is considering adding another machine for the manufacture of corrugated cardboard. The machine would cost $680,000. It would have an estimated life of 6 years and no salvage value. The company estimates that annual cash inflows would increase by $300,000 and that annual cash outflows would increase by $140,000. Management has a required rate of return of 10%.

(a)Calculate the net present value on this project, and discuss whether it should be accepted. (b) Calculate the internal rate of return on this project, and discuss whether it should be accepted.

leno company manufactures toasters for the first 8 months of 2014 the company report 610720

Leno Company manufactures toasters. For the first 8 months of 2014, the company reported the following operating results while operating at 75% of plant capacity:

Sales revenue (350,000 units)

$4,375,000

Cost of goods sold

2,600,000

Gross profit

1,775,000

Operating expenses

840,000

Net income

$ 935,000

Cost of goods sold was 70% variable and 30% fixed; operating expenses were 75% variable and 25% fixed.

In September, Leno Company receives a special order for 15,000 toasters at $7.60 each from Centro Company of Ciudad Juarez. Acceptance of the order would result in an additional $3,000 of shipping costs but no increase in fixed operating expenses.

Instructions

(a)Prepare an incremental analysis for the special order.

(b)Should Leno Company accept the special order? Why or why not?

would your answer be different in b if the productive capacity released by not makin 610722

Schopp Inc. has been manufacturing its own shades for its table lamps. The company is currently operating at 100% of capacity, and variable manufacturing overhead is charged to production at the rate of 70% of direct labor cost. The direct materials and direct labor cost per unit to make the lamp shades are $4 and $5, respectively. Normal production is 30,000 table lamps per year.

A supplier offers to make the lamp shades at a price of $12.75 per unit. If Schopp Inc. accepts the supplier”s offer, all variable manufacturing costs will be eliminated, but the $45,000 of fixed manufacturing overhead currently being charged to the lamp shades will have to be absorbed by other products.

Instructions

(a)Prepare the incremental analysis for the decision to make or buy the lamp shades.

(b)Should Schopp Inc. buy the lamp shades?

(b)Would your answer be different in (b) if the productive capacity released by not making the lamp shades could be used to produce income of $25,000?

is judy right about eliminating the huron division prepare a schedule to support you 610726

Judy Jean, a recent graduate of Rolling”s accounting program, evaluated the operating performance of Artie Company”s six divisions. Judy made the following presentation to Artie”s board of directors and suggested the Huron Division be eliminated. “If the Huron Division is eliminated,” she said, “our total profits would increase by $26,000.”

The Other
Five Divisions

Huron
Division

Total

Sales revenue

$1,664,200

$100,000

$1,764,200

Cost of goods sold

978,520

76,000

1,054,520

Gross profit

685,680

24,000

709,680

Operating expenses

527,940

50,000

577,940

Net income

$ 157,740

$ (26,000)

$ 131,740

In the Huron Division, cost of goods sold is $61,000 variable and $15,000 fixed, and operating expenses are $26,000 variable and $24,000 fixed. None of the Huron Division”s fixed costs will be eliminated if the division is discontinued.

Instructions

Is Judy right about eliminating the Huron Division? Prepare a schedule to support your answer.

should cawley eliminate the stunner product line why or why not 610727

Cawley Company makes three models of tasers. Information on the three products is given as follows.

“Jingler

Shocker

Stunner

Sales revenue

$300,000

$500,000

$200,000

Variable expenses

150,000

200,000

145,000

Contribution margin

150,000

300,000

55,000

Fixed expenses

120,000

230,000

95,000

Net income

$ 30,000

$ 70,000

$ (40,000)

Fixed expenses consist of $300,000 of common costs allocated to the three products based on relative sales, and additional fixed expenses of $30,000 (Tingler), $80,000 (Shocker), and $35,000 (Stunner). The common costs will be incurred regardless of how many models are produced. The other fixed expenses would be eliminated if a model is phased out.

James Watt, an executive with the company, feels the Stunner line should be discontinued to increase the company”s net income.

Instructions

(a)Compute current net income for Cawley Company.

(b)Compute net income by product line and in total for Cawley Company if the company discontinues the Stunner product line. (Hint:Allocate the $300,000 common costs to the two remaining product lines based on their relative sales.)

(c)Should Cawley eliminate the Stunner product line? Why or why not?

vilas company is considering a capital investment of 190 000 in additional productiv 610729

Vilas Company is considering a capital investment of $190,000 in additional productive facilities. The new machinery is expected to have a useful life of 5 years with no salvage value. Depreciation is by the straight-line method. During the life of the investment, annual net income and net annual cash flows are expected to be $12,000 and $50,000, respectively. Vilas has a 12% cost of capital rate, which is the required rate of return on the investment.

Instructions

(Round to two decimals.)

(a)Compute (1) the cash payback period and (2) the annual rate of return on the proposed capital expenditure.

(b)Using the discounted cash flow technique, compute the net present value.

if ueker company s required rate of return is 11 which projects are acceptable 610730

Ueker Company is considering three capital expenditure projects. Relevant data for the projects are as follows.

Project

Investment

Annual Income

Life of Project

22A

$240,000

$16,700

6 years

23A

270,000

20,600

9 years

24A

280,000

17,500

7 years

Annual income is constant over the life of the project. Each project is expected to have zero salvage value at the end of the project. Ueker Company uses the straight-line method of depreciation.

Instructions

(a)Determine the internal rate of return for each project. Round the internal rate of return factor to three decimals.

(b)If Ueker Company”s required rate of return is 11%, which projects are acceptable?

shurshot sports inc manufactures basketballs for the national basketball association 610732

ShurShot Sports Inc. manufactures basketballs for the National Basketball Association (NBA). For the first 6 months of 2014, the company reported the following operating results while operating at 80% of plant capacity and producing 120,000 units.

Amount

Sales revenue

$4,800,000

Cost of goods sold

3,600,000

Selling and administrative expenses

405,000

Net income

$ 795,000

Fixed costs for the period were cost of goods sold $960,000, and selling and administrative expenses $225,000.

In July, normally a slack manufacturing month, ShurShot Sports receives a special order for 10,000 basketballs at $27 each from the Greek Basketball Association (GBA). Acceptance of the order would increase variable selling and administrative expenses $0.50 per unit because of shipping costs but would not increase fixed costs and expenses.

Instructions

(a)Prepare an incremental analysis for the special order.

(b)Should ShurShot Sports Inc. accept the special order? Explain your answer.

(c)What is the minimum selling price on the special order to produce net income of $4.00 per ball?

(d)What nonfinancial factors should management consider in making its decision?

identify the correct accounting treatment for the changes if any related to the prec 610583

Identification and Accounting for Changes and Errors – The following are several independent events:

1. A partnership is preparing to become a corporation and sell stock to the public. At this time, it is decided to switch from accelerated to straight-line depreciation.

2. A company has been debiting half its advertising costs to an intangible asset account and amortizing these costs over three years.

3. A company has been using accelerated depreciation. It now estimates that the pattern of benefits to be received in the future will be equal each period, so it decides to change to the straight-line depreciation method.

4. A company has been using straight-line depreciation in its property, plant, and equipment. It is now buying a new type of machine and elects to use accelerated depreciation on the new machines.

5. A company has been expensing all its manufacturing cost variances. It decides to allocate them between cost of goods sold and inventory in the future.

Required

Identify the correct accounting treatment for the changes (if any) related to the preceding events.

prepare the journal entry at the beginning of 2008 to reflect the change 610584

Change in Inventory Cost Flow Assumption – At the beginning of 2008 the Brett Company decided to change from the FIFO to the average cost inventory cost flow assumption for financial reporting purposes. The following data are available in regard to its pretax operating income and cost of goods sold:

Year

Reported Income
Before Income Taxes

Excess of Average Cost of Goods Sold Over FIFO Cost of Goods Sold

Adjusted Income
Before Income Taxes

Prior to 2007

$1,600,000

$130,000

$1,470,000

2007

600,000

50,000

550,000

2008

700,000

The income tax rate is 30%, and the company received permission from the IRS to also make the change for income tax purposes. The company has a simple capital structure, with 100,000 shares of common stock outstanding. The company computed its reported income before income taxes in 2008 using the newly adopted inventory cost flow method. Brett’s 2007 and 2008 revenues were $1,500,000 and $1,750,000, respectively. Its retained earnings balances at the beginning of 2007 and 2008 (unadjusted) were $1,120,000 and $1,540,000, respectively. The company paid no dividends in any year.

Required

1. Prepare the journal entry at the beginning of 2008 to reflect the change.

2. At the end of 2008 prepare comparative income statements for 2008 and 2007. Notes to the financial statements are not necessary.

3. At the end of 2008 prepare comparative retained earnings statements for 2008 and 2007.

what is the effect on income before income taxes in 2008 of a change to the lifo met 610585

Change in Inventory Cost Flow Assumption – The Berg Company began operations on January 1, 2007 and uses the FIFO method in costing its raw material inventory. During 2008 management is contemplating a change to the LIFO method and is interested in determining what effect such a change will have on net income. Accordingly, the following information has been developed:

2007

2008

FIFO—Ending inventory

$240,000

$270,000

LIFO—Ending inventory

200,000

210,000

Income before income taxes (computed under the FIFO method)

120,000

170,000

Required

What is the effect on income before income taxes in 2008 of a change to the LIFO method?

prepare the correcting journal entry or entries for each of the preceding errors ass 610589

Journal Entries to Correct Errors – The following are several independent errors made by a company that uses the periodic inventory system:

1. Goods in transit, purchased on credit and shipped FOB destination, $10,000, were included in purchases but not in the ending inventory.

2. A purchase of a machine for $2,000 was expensed. The machine has a four-year life, no residual value, and straight-line depreciation is used.

3. Wages payable of $2,000 were not accrued.

4. Payment of next year’s rent, $4,000, was recorded as rent expense.

5. Allowance for doubtful accounts of $5,000 was not recorded. The company normally uses the aging method.

6. Equipment with a book value of $70,000 and a fair value of $100,000 was sold at the beginning of the year. A two-year non-interest-bearing note for $129,960 was received and recorded at its face value. No interest revenue was recorded and 14% is a fair rate of interest.

Required

Prepare the correcting journal entry or entries for each of the preceding errors, assuming the company discovers the error in the year after it was made. (Ignore income taxes.)

indicate the effect of each of the preceding errors on the company rsquo s 1 assets 610590

Effects of Errors – The following are several independent errors made by a company:

1. Failure to record a purchase of inventory on credit.

2. Expensing the purchase of a machine.

3. Failure to accrue wages.

4. Failure to record an allowance for uncollectibles.

5. Including collections in advance as revenue.

6. Including payments in advance as expenses.

7. Failure to accrue warranty costs.

8. Discount on a note payable issued for purchase of a machine is ignored.

9. Failure to record depreciation expense on assets purchased during the year.

Required

Indicate the effect of each of the preceding errors on the company’s (1) assets, (2) liabilities, (3) owners’ equity, and (4) net income in the year in which the error occurs. State whether the error causes an overstatement (+), an understatement (-) (2), or no effect (NE).

indicate the accounting treatment for each transaction as a a retrospective adjustme 610593

Identification and Effects of Changes and Errors – On January 2, 2007, Quo, Inc. hired Reed as its controller. During the year, Reed, working closely with Quo’s president and outside accountants, made changes in accounting policies, corrected several errors dating from 2006 and before, and instituted new accounting policies. Quo’s 2007 financial statements will be presented in comparative form with its 2006 financial statements. Items 1 through 10 represent Quo’s transactions.

1. Quo manufactures heavy equipment to customer specifications on a contract basis. On the basis that it is preferable, it switched accounting for these long-term contracts from the completed-contact method to the percentage-of-completion method.

2. As a result of a production breakthrough, Quo determined that manufacturing equipment previously depreciated over 15 years should be depreciated over 20 years.

3. The equipment that Quo manufactures is sold with a five-year warranty. Because of a production breakthrough, Quo reduced its computation of warranty costs from 3% of sales to 1% of sales.

4. Quo changed from LIFO to FIFO to account for its finished goods inventory.

5. Quo sells extended service contracts on its products. Because related services are performed over several years, in 2007 Quo changed from the cash method to the accrual method of recognizing income from these service contracts.

6. During 2007 Quo determined that an insurance premium paid and entirely expensed in 2006 was for the period January 1, 2006 through January 1, 2008.

7. Quo changed its method of depreciating office equipment from an accelerated method to the straight-line method to more closely reflect the pattern of benefits.

8. Quo instituted a pension plan for all employees in 2007 and adopted Statement of Financial Accounting Standards No. 87, Employers’ Accounting for Pensions. Quo had not previously had a pension plan.

9. During 2007, Quo increased its investment in Worth, Inc. from a 10% interest, purchased in 2006, to 60%. As a result of its increased investment, Quo changed its method of accounting for investment in subsidiary from the fair value method to the consolidation method.

Required

1. Indicate whether Quo should classify each transaction as: (a) a change in accounting principle, (b) a change in accounting estimate, (c) a correction of an error in previously presented financial statements, or (d) neither an accounting change nor an accounting error.

2. Indicate the accounting treatment for each transaction as: (a) a retrospective adjustment approach, (b) a prior period restatement approach, or (c) a prospective approach.

prepare the 2008 annual report notes to the financial statements are not necessary s 610595

Change from FIFO to Average Cost – Koopman Company began operations on January 1, 2006 and uses the FIFO inventory method for financial reporting and the average-cost inventory method for income taxes. At the beginning of 2008 the company decided to switch to the average-cost inventory method for financial reporting. The company had previously reported the following financial statements for 2007:

Income Statement

2007

Revenues

$100,000

Cost of goods sold

60,000

Gross profit

$40,000

Operating expenses

25,000

Income before income taxes

$15,000

Income tax expense

4,500

Net income

$10,500

Earnings per share

$1.05

Retained Earnings Statement

2007

Beginning retained earnings

$15,000

Add: Net income

10,500

$25,500

Less: Dividends

-6,000

Ending retained earnings

$19,500

Balance Sheet (12/31/07)

Cash

$9,000

Inventory

38,000

Other assets

64,100

Accounts payable

$3,000

Income taxes payable

1,800

Deferred tax liability

4,800

Common stock, no par

82,000

Retained earnings

19,500

$111,100

An analysis of the accounting records discloses the following cost of goods sold under the FIFO and average-cost inventory methods:

FIFO Cost of Goods Sold

Average Cost of Goods Sold

2006

$50,000

$57,000

2007

60,000

69,000

2008

70,000

80,000

There are no indirect effects of the change in inventory method. Revenues for 2008 total $130,000; operating expenses for 2008 total $30,000. The company is subject to a 30% income tax rate in all years; it pays the income taxes payable of a current year in the first quarter of the next year. The company had 10,000 shares of common stock outstanding during all years; it paid dividends of $1 per share in 2008. At the end of 2008 the company had cash of $10,000, inventory of $24,000, other assets of $70,800, and accounts payable of ?. The company desires to show financial statements for the current year and previous year in its 2008 annual report.

Required

1. Prepare the journal entry to reflect the change in methods at the beginning of 2008. Show supporting calculations.

2. Prepare the 2008 annual report. Notes to the financial statements are not necessary. Show supporting calculations.

prepare the 2008 annual report notes to the financial statements are not necessary s 610596

Change from LIFO to Average Cost – Schmidt Company began operations on January 1, 2006 and used the LIFO inventory method for both financial reporting and income taxes. However, at the beginning of 2008 the company decided to switch to the average-cost inventory method for financial and income tax reporting. The company had previously reported the following financial statements for 2007:

Income Statement

2007

Revenues

$128,000

Cost of goods sold

78,000

Gross profit

$50,000

Operating expenses

25,000

Income before income taxes

$25,000

Income tax expense

7,500

Net income

$17,500

Earnings per share

$1.75

Retained Earnings Statement

2007

Beginning retained earnings

$27,000

Add: Net income

17,500

$44,500

Less: Dividends

6,000

Ending retained earnings

$38,500

Balance Sheet (12/31/07)

Cash

$8,000

Inventory

42,000

Other assets

60,000

$110,000

Accounts payable

$4,000

Income taxes payable

7,500

Common stock, no par

60,000

Retained earnings

38,500

$110,000

An analysis of the accounting records discloses the following cost of goods sold under the LIFO and average-cost inventory methods:

LIFO Cost of Goods Sold

Average Cost of Goods Sold

2006

$62,000

$56,000

2007

78,000

69,000

2008

90,000

80,000

There are no indirect effects of the change in inventory method. Revenues for 2008 total $130,000; operating expenses for 2008 total $30,000. The company is subject to a 30% income tax rate in all years; it pays all income taxes payable in the next quarter. The company had 10,000 shares of common stock outstanding during all years; it paid dividends of $1 per share in 2008. At the end of 2008 the company had cash of $12,000, inventory of $34,000, other assets of $76,000, income taxes payable of $6,000, and accounts payable of ?. The company desires to show financial statements for the current year and previous year in its 2008 annual report.

Required

1. Prepare the journal entry to reflect the change in method at the beginning of 2008. Show supporting calculations.

2. Prepare the 2008 annual report. Notes to the financial statements are not necessary. Show supporting calculations.

prepare any necessary correcting journal entries for each situation also prepare the 610598

Changes and Corrections of Depreciation – At the beginning of 2008, the controller of Holden Company asked you to prepare correcting entries for the following three situations:

1. Machine X was purchased for $100,000 on January 1, 2003. Straight-line depreciation has been recorded for five years, and the Accumulated Depreciation account has a balance of $45,000. The estimated residual value remains at $10,000, but the service life is now estimated to be one year longer than originally estimated.

2. Machine Y was purchased for $40,000 on January 1, 2006. It had an estimated residual value of $4,000 and an estimated service life of eight years. It has been depreciated under the sum-of-the-years’-digits method for two years. Now, the company has decided to change to the straight-line method.

3. Machine Z was purchased for $80,000 on January 1, 2007. Double-declining-balance depreciation has been recorded for one year. The estimated residual value is $8,000 and the estimated service life is five years. The computation of the depreciation erroneously included the estimated residual value.

Required

Prepare any necessary correcting journal entries for each situation. Also prepare the journal entry for each situation to record the depreciation for 2008. (Ignore income taxes.)

compute the effect on income before income taxes for the year ended december 31 2008 610599

Change in Accounting for Inventory – The Kraft Manufacturing Company manufactures two products: Mult and Tran. At December 31, 2007 Kraft used the FIFO inventory method. Effective January 1, 2008, Kraft changed to the LIFO inventory method. The cumulative effect of this change is not determinable and, as a result, the ending inventory of 2007, for which the FIFO method was used, is also the beginning inventory for 2008 for the LIFO method. Any layers added during 2008 should be costed by reference to the first acquisitions of 2008, and any layers liquidated during 2008 should be considered a permanent liquidation.

The following information was available from Kraft’s inventory records for the two most recent years:

Mult

Tran

Units

Unit Cost

Units

Unit Cost

2007 purchases:

7-Jan

5,000

$4.00

22,000

$2.00

17-Apr

12,000

4.5

9-Nov

17,000

5

18,500

2.5

14-Dec

10,000

6

2008 purchases:

12-Feb

3,000

7

23,000

3

21-May

8,000

7.5

15-Oct

20,000

8

24-Dec

15,500

3.5

Units on hand:

31-Dec-07

15,000

14,500

31-Dec-08

16,000

13,000

Required

Compute the effect on income before income taxes for the year ended December 31, 2008, resulting from the change from the FIFO to the LIFO inventory method.

describe what method the company would use to account for each item if the financial 610600

First Issuance of Financial Statements – The Jackson Company has decided to issue common stock to the public in 2008. This will be the first public sale and therefore the company will issue its first publicly available financial statements since it was formed in 2005. The financial statements that it has prepared for its own use follow:

Income Statements

For Years Ended December 31,

2005

2006

2007

Sales

$100,000

$130,000

$180,000

Cost of goods sold

35,000

45,000

65,000

Gross profit

$65,000

$85,000

$115,000

Other expenses

62,500

75,000

83,200

Income before income taxes

$2,500

$10,000

$31,800

Income tax expense

750

3,000

9,540

Net income

$1,750

$7,000

$22,260

 

Balance Sheets

31-Dec

2005

2006

2007

Cash

$5,500

$12,500

$9,960

Accounts receivable

30,000

50,000

63,000

Inventory

40,000

60,000

65,000

Equipment

100,000

100,000

140,000

Less: Accumulated depreciation

20,000

52,000

79,200

$155,500

$170,500

$198,760

Current liabilities

$19,250

$27,250

$33,250

Notes payable

50,000

50,000

50,000

Common stock

84,500

84,500

84,500

Retained earnings

1,750

8,750

31,010

$155,500

$170,500

$198,760

These financial statements are audited for the first time at the beginning of 2008, and the following facts are discovered:

1. The company has not made any allowance for noncollection of accounts receivable. An allowance of 1% of total sales is considered appropriate. Uncollectible accounts of $630 should have been written off in 2007.

2. The notes payable are to officers of the company and have an interest rate of 12%. They were issued on January 1, 2005. No interest has been accrued or paid. (Assume simple interest and no compounding.)

3. The company has been using MACRS over a five-year life for both financial reporting and income tax purposes. It has been decided that the straight-line method should have been used for financial reporting, based on an economic life of 10 years and a zero residual value, with a full year’s depreciation being recorded in the year of acquisition. No disposals of property, plant, and equipment have occurred.

4. After adjustments, with the exception of depreciation, expenses deducted for financial accounting purposes are the same as those deducted for income tax purposes.

5. The company is subject to a 30% income tax rate and pays its taxes at the end of each year.

Required

1. Prepare the financial statements for 2005, 2006, and 2007 that the company would issue at the beginning of 2008.

2. Describe what method the company would use to account for each item if the financial statements for all three years had been publicly issued previously.

assume instead that the company discovered the errors after it had closed the books 610601

Error Correction – At the end of 2008 while auditing the books of the Sandlin Company, before the books have been closed, you find the following items:

a. A building with a 30-year life (no residual value, straight-line depreciation) was purchased on January 1, 2008 by issuing a $90,000 non-interest-bearing, four-year note. The entry made to record the purchase was a debit to Building and a credit to Notes Payable for $90,000; 12% is a fair rate of interest on the note.

b. The inventory at the end of 2008 was found to be overstated by $15,000. At the same time it was discovered that the inventory at the end of 2007 had been overstated by $35,000. The company uses the perpetual inventory system.

c. For the last three years, the company has failed to accrue salaries and wages. The correct amounts at the end of each year were: 2006—$12,000; 2007—$18,000; 2008—$10,000.

Required

1. Prepare journal entries to correct the errors (ignore income taxes).

2. Assume, instead, that the company discovered the errors after it had closed the books. Prepare journal entries to correct the errors (ignore income taxes).

prepare a worksheet to determine the correct net income for the years 2005 2006 2007 610603

Error Correction – A review of the books of the Anderson Corporation indicates that the errors and omissions pertaining to the balance sheet accounts shown as follows had not been corrected during the applicable years. The net income per the books is: 2005—$10,000; 2006—$12,000; 2007—$15,000; and 2008—$20,000. No dividends were declared during these years and no adjustments were made to retained earnings. The Retained Earnings balance on December 31, 2008, is $50,000.

Omissions

31-Dec

Ending Inventory
Overvalued

Ending Inventory
Undervalued

Prepaid
Expense

Unearned
Revenues

Accrued
Expense

Accrued
Revenues

2005

$ —

$4,000

$600

$ —

$300

$ —

2006

3,000

500

700

2007

2,000

400

100

2008

1,000

900

200

350

800

Required

Prepare a worksheet to determine the correct net income for the years 2005, 2006, 2007, and 2008, and the adjusted balance sheet accounts as of December 31, 2008. (Ignore possible income tax effects.)

analyze the effects of the errors on income for 2005 2006 and 2007 and the 2007 endi 610604

Error Correction – The bookkeeper of the Cask Company, who has maintained its accounting records since the company’s formation in January 2005, has prepared the unaudited financial statements. In your examination of these statements at the end of 2007, you discover the following items:

1. Sales taxes collected from customers have been included in the sales account. The Sales Tax Expense account is debited when the sales taxes are remitted to the state in the month following the sale. All sales are subject to a 6% sales tax. Total sales (excluding sales tax) for the three years 2005 through 2007 were $200,000, $300,000, and $500,000, respectively. The Sales Tax Expense account balance for the three years was $10,000, $15,000, and $26,000, respectively.

2. An account payable of $15,000 for merchandise purchased in December 2005 was recorded in January 2006. The merchandise was not included in inventory at December 31, 2005.

3. Merchandise with a cost of $4,000 was included twice in the December 31, 2006 inventory.

4. The company has used the direct write-off method of accounting for bad debts. Accounts written off in the three years 2005 through 2007 were $2,000, $4,500, and $6,500, respectively. The appropriate balances of Allowance for Doubtful Accounts at the end of 2005 through 2007 are $5,000, $6,000, and $8,200, respectively.

5. On January 1, 2006, 12%, 10-year bonds with a face value of $600,000 were issued at 102. The premium was credited to Additional Paid-in Capital. The bonds pay interest on June 30 and December 31, and use of the straight-line amortization method is appropriate.

6. Travel advances to the sales personnel of $18,000 were included as selling expenses for 2006. The travel occurred in 2007.

7. Salaries payable at the end of each year have not been accrued. Appropriate amounts at the end of 2005 through 2007 are $10,000, $11,000, and $7,000, respectively.

8. Installation, freight, and testing costs of $25,000 on a machine purchased in January 2005 were expensed at that time. The machine has a life of five years and a residual value of $10,000.

Required

Analyze the effects of the errors on income for 2005, 2006, and 2007, and the 2007 ending balance sheet (ignore income taxes), according to the following format:

Balance Sheet
December 31, 2007

Explanation

Income 2005

Income 2006

Income 2007

Amount

Debit

Credit

Debit

Credit

Debit

Credit

Debit

Credit

Account

as of january 1 2008 compute the retrospective adjustment of retained earnings for t 610605

Comprehensive – The financial statements of the Gray Company showed income before income taxes of $4,030,000 for the year ended December 31, 2008, and $3,330,000 for the year ended December 31, 2007. Additional information is as follows:

1. Capital expenditures were $2,800,000 in 2008 and $4,000,000 in 2007. Included in the 2008 capital expenditures is equipment purchased for $1,000,000 on January 1, 2008, with no salvage value. Gray used straight-line depreciation based on a 10-year estimated life in its financial statements. As a result of additional information now available, it is estimated that this equipment should have only an eight-year life.

2. Gray made an error in its financial statements that should be regarded as material. A payment of $180,000 was made in January 2008 and charged to expense in 2008 for insurance premiums applicable to policies commencing and expiring in 2007. No liability had been recorded for this item at December 31, 2007.

3. The allowance for doubtful accounts reflected in Gray’s financial statements was $7,000 at December 31, 2008, and $97,000 at December 31, 2007. During 2008, $90,000 of uncollectible receivables were written off against the allowance for doubtful accounts. In 2007, the provision for doubtful accounts was based on a percentage of net sales. The 2008 provision has not yet been recorded. Net sales were $58,500,000 for the year ended December 31, 2008, and $49,230,000 for the year ended December 31, 2007. Based on the latest available facts, the 2008 provision for doubtful accounts is estimated to be 0.2% of net sales.

4. A review of the estimated warranty liability at December 31, 2008, which is included in “other liabilities’ in Gray’s financial statements, has disclosed that this estimated liability should be increased $170,000.

5. Gray has two large blast furnaces that it uses in its manufacturing process. These furnaces must be periodically relined. Furnace A was relined in January 2002 at a cost of $230,000 and in January 2007 at a cost of $280,000. Furnace B was relined for the first time in January 2008 at a cost of $300,000. In Gray’s financial statements, these costs were expensed as incurred.

Since a relining will last for five years, a more appropriate matching of revenues and costs would result if the cost of the relining were capitalized and depreciated over the productive life of the relining. Gray has decided to make a change in accounting principle from expensing relining costs as incurred to capitalizing them and depreciating them over their productive life on a straight-line basis with a full year’s depreciation in the year of relining. This change meets the requirements for a change in accounting principle under FASB Statement No. 154, “Accounting Changes and Error Corrections.”

Required

1. For the years ended December 31, 2008 and 2007, prepare a worksheet reconciling income before income taxes as given previously with income before income taxes, as adjusted for the preceding additional information. Show supporting computations in good form. Ignore income taxes and deferred tax considerations in your answer. The worksheet should have the following format:

Year Ended December 31

2008

2007

Income before income taxes, before adjustments

$4,030,000

$3,330,000

Adjustments

Net adjustments

Income before income taxes, after adjustments

$

$

2. As of January 1, 2008, compute the retrospective adjustment of retained earnings for the cumulative effect of the change in accounting principle from expensing to capitalizing relining costs. Ignore income taxes and deferred tax considerations in your answer.

prepare a schedule showing the computation of corrected net income for the years end 610606

Comprehensive – The Ingalls Corporation is in the process of negotiating a loan for expansion purposes. The books and records have never been audited, and the bank has requested that an audit be performed. Ingalls has prepared the following comparative financial statements for the years ended December 31, 2008 and 2007:

Balance Sheet

As of December 31,

2008

2007

Assets

Current assets

Cash

$163,000

$82,000

Accounts receivable

392,000

296,000

Allowance for uncollectible accounts

37,000

18,000

Available-for-sale securities

78,000

78,000

Merchandise inventory

207,000

202,000

Total current assets

803,000

640,000

Fixed assets

Property, plant, and equipment

167,000

169,500

Accumulated depreciation

121,600

106,400

Total fixed assets

45,400

63,100

Total assets

$848,400

$703,100

Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity

Liabilities

Accounts payable

$121,400

$196,100

Stockholders’ equity

Common stock, par value $10, authorized 50,000 shares, issued and outstanding 20,000 shares

260,000

260,000

Retained earnings

467,000

247,000

Total stockholders’ equity

727,000

507,000

Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity

$848,400

$703,100

 

Statement of Income

For the Years Ended
December 31,

2008

2007

Sales

$1,000,000

$900,000

Cost of sales

430,000

395,000

Gross profit

570,000

505,000

Operating expenses

210,000

205,000

Administrative expenses

140,000

105,000

350,000

310,000

Net income

$220,000

$195,000

During the course of the audit, the following additional facts were determined:

1. An analysis of collections and losses on accounts receivable during the past two years indicates a drop in anticipated losses because of bad debts. After consultation with management, it was agreed that the loss experience rate on sales should be reduced from the recorded 2% to 1%, beginning with the year ended December 31, 2008.

2. An analysis of the available-for-sale securities revealed that this portfolio consisted entirely of short-term investments in marketable equity securities that were acquired in 2007. The total market valuation for these investments as of the end of each year was as follows: December 31, 2007—$81,000; December 31, 2008—$62,000.

3. The merchandise inventory at December 31, 2007 was overstated by $4,000 and the merchandise inventory at December 31, 2008 was overstated by $6,100.

4. On January 2, 2007, equipment costing $12,000 (estimated useful life of 10 years and residual value of $1,000) was incorrectly charged to Operating Expenses. Ingalls records depreciation via the straight-line method. In 2008, fully depreciated equipment (with no residual value) that originally cost $17,500 was sold as scrap for $2,500. Noble credited the proceeds of $2,500 to Property and Equipment.

5. An analysis of 2007 operating expenses revealed that Ingalls charged to expense a three-year insurance premium of $2,700 on January 15, 2007.

Required

1. Prepare the journal entries to correct the books at December 31, 2008. The books for 2008 have not been closed. Ignore income taxes.

2. Prepare a schedule showing the computation of corrected net income for the years ended December 31, 2008 and 2007, assuming that any adjustments are to be reported on comparative statements for the two years. The first items on your schedule should be the net income for each year. Ignore income taxes. (Do not prepare financial statements.)

explain a change in reporting entity and how a company reports it give an appropriat 610608

Accounting Changes – The various types of accounting changes may significantly affect the presentation of a company’s financial statements, and also affect the trends shown in its comparative financial statements and historical summaries.

Required

1. Explain a change in accounting principle and how a company reports it in the period of the change.

2. Explain a change in accounting estimate and how a company reports it in the period of the change.

3. Explain a change in reporting entity and how a company reports it. Give an appropriate example of a change in reporting entity.

what kind of accounting change is each of the preceding three situations for each si 610609

Accounting Changes – Berkeley Company, a manufacturer of many different products, changed its inventory method from FIFO to LIFO. The LIFO method was determined to be preferable. In addition, Berkeley changed the residual values used in computing depreciation for its office equipment. It made this change on January 1, 2007 because it obtained additional information. On December 31, 2007, Berkeley changed the specific subsidiaries comprising the group of companies for which consolidated financial statements are presented.

Required

1. What kind of accounting change is each of the preceding three situations? For each situation, indicate whether or not the company should show:

a. The retrospective application of a new accounting principle.

b. The effects on the financial statements of the current and future periods.

c. Restatement of the financial statements of all prior periods.

2. Why does the company have to disclose a change in accounting principle?

manner of reporting the change under current generally accepted accounting principle 610611

Accounting Changes – Sometimes a business entity may change its method of accounting for certain items. It may classify the change as a change in accounting principle, a change in accounting estimate, or a change in reporting entity. The following are three independent, unrelated sets of facts relating to accounting changes. Situation I A company determined that the depreciable lives of its fixed assets are presently too long to fairly match the cost of the fixed assets with the revenue produced. The company decided at the beginning of the current year to reduce the depreciable lives of all of its existing fixed assets by five years. Situation II On December 31, 2009, Hyde Company owned 51% of Patten Company, at which time Hyde reported its investment using the cost method, owing to political uncertainties in the country in which Patten was located. On January 2, 2007, the management of Hyde Company was satisfied that the political uncertainties were resolved and the assets of the company were in no danger of nationalization. Accordingly, Hyde will prepare consolidated financial statements for Hyde and Patten for the year ended December 31, 2007. Situation III A company decides in January 2007 to adopt the straight-line method of depreciation for plant equipment. The straight-line method will be used for new acquisitions, as well as for previously acquired plant equipment for which depreciation had been provided on an accelerated basis.

Required

For each of the preceding situations, provide the following information. Complete your discussion of each situation before going on to the next situation.

1. Type of accounting change.

2. Manner of reporting the change under current generally accepted accounting principles, including a discussion, where applicable, of how amounts are computed.

3. Effect of the change on the statement of financial position and earnings statement.

4. Note disclosures that would be necessary.

changing specific subsidiaries comprising the group of companies for which consolida 610612

Accounting Changes – It is important in accounting theory to be able to distinguish the types of accounting changes.

Required

1. If a public company desires to change from the sum-ofthe- years’-digits depreciation method to the straight-line method for its fixed assets, what type of accounting change would this be? Discuss the permissibility of this change.

2. If a public company obtained additional information about the service lives of some of its fixed assets that showed that the service lives previously used should be shortened, what type of accounting change would this be? Include in your discussion how the change is reported in the year of the change, and what disclosures are made in the financial statements or notes.

3. If a company discovers halfway through a building’s life that it ignored the residual value of the building in computing the straight-line depreciation, what type of accounting change would this be? Include in your discussion how the change is reported in the year of the change, and what disclosures are made in the financial statements or notes.

4. Changing specific subsidiaries comprising the group of companies for which consolidated financial statements are presented is an example of what type of accounting change? What effect does it have on the consolidated income statements?

indicate in which section of the statement of cash flows or the accompanying schedul 610543

Classifications of Cash Flows – A company’s statement of cash flows and the accompanying schedule of investing and financing activities not affecting cash may contain the following major sections:

A. Net Cash Flow From Operating Activities

B. Cash Flows From Investing Activities

C. Cash Flows From Financing Activities

D. Investing and Financing Activities Not Affecting Cash

The following is a list of items that might appear on a company’s statement of cash flows or in the accompanying schedule.

1. Decrease in accounts payable

2. Payment of dividends

3. Increase in income taxes payable

4. Proceeds from issuance of note

5. Payment for purchase of available for- sale temporary investments

6. Amortization of premium on investment in bonds

7. Increase in prepaid expenses

8. Payment of note

9. Gain on sale of equipment

10. Proceeds from sale of land

11. Net income

12. Payment for acquisition of building

13. Depreciation expense

14. Issuance of common stock for land

15. Proceeds (principal) from collection of note

16. Amortization of discount on bonds payable

17. Decrease in deferred taxes payable

18. Proceeds from issuance of bonds

19. Issuance of stock dividend

20. Payment for purchase of treasury stock

21. Depletion expense

22. Increase in inventory

23. Conversion of preferred stock to common stock

24. Proceeds from issuance of stock

25. Lease of equipment under capital lease

26. Proceeds from sale of patent

Required

In the space provided and using the letters A through D, indicate in which section of the statement of cash flows (or the accompanying schedule) the preceding items would most likely be classified. After each letter indicate with a plus (+) or a minus (-) whether the items would be reported as an increase (inflow) or decrease (outflow). If an item would not be reported in the statement (or the accompanying schedule), put an X in the space provided.

prepare the net cash flow from operating activities section of the 2007 statement of 610544

Net Cash Flow From Operating Activities – The following is accounting information taken from the Verna Company’s records for 2007:

1. Decrease in accounts payable, $4,600

2. Loss on sale of land, $1,900

3. Increase in inventory, $7,800

4. Increase in income taxes payable, $2,700

5. Net income, $68,400

6. Patent amortization expense, $1,600

7. Extraordinary loss (net), $6,200

8. Decrease in deferred taxes payable, $2,500

9. Amortization of discount on bonds payable, $1,300

10. Payment of cash dividends, $24,000

11. Depletion expense, $5,000

12. Decrease in salaries payable, $1,400

13. Decrease in accounts receivable, $3,500

14. Gain on sale of equipment, $6,100

15. Proceeds from issuance of stock, $57,000

16. Extraordinary gain (net), $3,700

17. Depreciation expense, $10,000

18. Amortization of discount on investment in bonds, $1,500

Required

Prepare the net cash flow from operating activities section of the 2007 statement of cash flows for the Verna Company.

assume the company rsquo s preferred stock has been selling for 120 per share during 610545

Statement of Cash Flows – The following is a list of the items to be included in the preparation of the 2007 statement of cash flows for the Warrick Company:

1. Net income, $59,200

2. Payment for purchase of building, $98,000

3. Increase in accounts receivable, $7,400

4. Proceeds from issuance of common stock, $37,100

5. Increase in accounts payable, $4,500

6. Proceeds from sale of land, $7,000

7. Depreciation expense, $12,600

8. Payment of dividends, $36,000

9. Gain on sale of land, $5,300

10. Decrease in inventory, $3,700

11. Payment for purchase of long-term investments, $9,600

12. Amortization of discount on bonds payable, $1,900

13. Proceeds from issuance of note, $18,000

14. Increase in deferred taxes payable, $5,000

15. Equipment acquired by capital lease, $19,500

16. Decrease in salaries payable, $2,300

17. Beginning cash balance, $20,300

Required

1. Prepare the statement of cash flows.

2. Assume the company’s preferred stock has been selling for $120 per share during 2007. How many shares would the company have had to issue to avoid having a decrease in cash during the year? Where would this issuance have been reported in the statement of cash flows?

what would have happened if the company had not issued the note during 2007 how did 610546

Statement of Cash Flows – The following is a list of the items to be included in the preparation of the 2007 statement of cash flows for the Trone Company:

1. Extraordinary gain (net), $9,200

2. Proceeds from issuance of note, $25,000

3. Decrease in accounts receivable, $5,000

4. Payment for purchase of patent, $19,800

5. Increase in inventory, $6,700

6. Payment of dividends, $30,000

7. Decrease in accounts payable, $4,000

8. Proceeds from sale of investments, $8,500

9. Amortization of premium on bonds payable, $2,100

10. Net income, $49,200

11. Common stock exchanged for land, $14,000

12. Payment for purchase of equipment, $39,400

13. Loss on sale of investments, $4,800

14. Decrease in deferred taxes payable, $3,600

15. Proceeds from issuance of preferred stock, $52,800

16. Payment to retire bonds, $37,800

17. Depreciation expense, $10,700

18. Ending cash balance, $22,100

Required

1. Prepare the statement of cash flows.

2. What would have happened if the company had not issued the note during 2007? How did the issuance of the note affect the company’s debt ratio (discussed in Chapter 6) at the end of 2007?

for each of the preceding items discuss if and illustrate how the transaction would 610547

Infrequent Transactions – The following transactions were recorded on the books of the Baxter Company during the current year. The company:

1. Issued a “small” common stock dividend of 400 shares. The par value is $10 per share and the relevant market price was $20 per share.

2. Exchanged equipment with a cost of $10,000 and a book value of $3,800 for land valued at $12,000, paying an additional $8,500 in cash.

3. Converted preferred stock ($100 par) with a total par value of $20,000 and a book value of $22,800 to 1,500 shares of its $10 par common stock. The book value method was used to account for the conversion.

4. Recorded a loss of $4,200 as a result of retiring bonds payable with a face value of $30,000 and a related premium of $5,000 by paying $39,200.

5. Recorded an extraordinary gain (net of income taxes) of $6,000 as a result of a tornado that destroyed a building costing $100,000 and having an associated book value of $70,000. The insurance proceeds (net of income taxes) totaled $76,000.

6. Acquired equipment by entering into a capital lease. The lease required payments of $5,000 in advance; the present value of the lease payments (before the initial payment) was $34,000.

Required

For each of the preceding items, discuss if and illustrate how the transaction would be recorded on the worksheet to support the statement of cash flows. Use a journal entry format for your illustrations.

the following information was taken from the accounting records of the lamberson com 610548

Worksheet (Spreadsheet) and Statement of Cash Flows – The following information was taken from the accounting records of the Lamberson Company:

Account Balances

Debits

1-Jan-07

31-Dec-07

Cash

$1,400

$2,400

Accounts receivable (net)

2,800

2,690

Marketable securities (at cost)

1,700

3,000

Allowance for change in value

500

800

Inventories

8,100

7,910

Prepaid items

1,300

1,710

Investments (long-term)

7,000

5,400

Land

15,000

15,000

Buildings and equipment

32,000

46,200

Discount on bonds payable

290

$69,800

$85,400

Credits

Accumulated depreciation

$16,000

$16,400

Accounts payable

3,800

4,150

Income taxes payable

2,400

2,504

Wages payable

1,100

650

Interest payable

400

Note payable (long-term)

3,500

12% bonds payable

10,000

Deferred taxes payable

800

1,196

Convertible preferred stock, $100 par

 

9,000

Common stock, $10 par

14,000

21,500

Additional paid-in capital

8,700

13,700

Unrealized increase in value of marketable securities

 

500

800

Retained earnings

10,000

14,100

$69,800

$85,400

 

Additional information for the year:

(a) Sales

$39,930

Cost of goods sold

-19,890

Depreciation expense

-2,100

Wages expense

-11,000

Other operating expenses

-1,000

Bond interest expense

-410

Dividend revenue

820

Gain on sale of investments

700

Loss on sale of equipment

-200

Income tax expense

-2,050

Net income

$4,800

(b) Dividends declared and paid totaled $700.

(c) On January 1, 2007, convertible preferred stock that had originally been issued at par value were converted into 500 shares of common stock. The book value method was used to account for the conversion.

(d) Long-term nonmarketable investments that cost $1,600 were sold for $2,300.

(e) The long-term note payable was paid by issuing 250 shares of common stock at the beginning of the year.

(f) Equipment with a cost of $2,000 and a book value of $300 was sold for $100. The company uses one Accumulated Depreciation account for all depreciable assets.

(g) Equipment was purchased at a cost of $16,200.

(h) The 12% bonds payable were issued on August 31, 2007 at 97. They mature on August 31, 2017. The company uses the straight-line method to amortize the discount.

(i) Taxable income was less than pretax accounting income, resulting in a $396 increase in deferred taxes payable.

(j) Short-term marketable securities were purchased at a cost of $1,300. The portfolio was increased by $300 to a $3,800 fair value at year-end by adjusting the related allowance account.

Required

1. Prepare a worksheet (spreadsheet) to support the Lamberson Company’s statement of cash flows for 2007.

2. Prepare the statement of cash flows.

3. Compute the cash flow from operations to sales ratio and the profit margin ratio for 2007. What is the primary reason for the difference in the results of the ratios?

prepare the 2007 statement of cash flows for the bott company show the reconciliatio 610549

Worksheet (Spreadsheet) and Statement of Cash Flows – The following information is available for the Bott Company:

Account Balances

December 31, 2006

December 31,2007

Debits

Cash

$1,800

$2,000

Accounts receivable

4,600

4,720

Notes receivable (short-term)

0

1,000

Inventories

12,000

9,700

Prepaid items

1,700

1,380

Land

11,000

17,100

Buildings and equipment

78,000

110,000

Patent

4,400

4,000

Treasury stock (common, at cost, $25 per share)

2,500

1,000

Totals

$116,000

$150,900

Credits

Accumulated depreciation

$24,000

$31,800

Accounts payable

6,000

8,210

Salaries payable

2,600

3,500

Miscellaneous current payables

1,400

1,200

Interest payable

0

140

12% bonds payable

0

7,000

Premium on bonds payable

0

650

Convertible preferred stock, $50 par

9,000

6,500

Premium on preferred stock

3,000

2,500

Common stock, $10 par

18,000

23,500

Premium on common stock

28,800

41,150

Retained earnings

23,200

24,750

Totals

$116,000

$150,900

Additional information for the year:

(a) Beginning retained earnings, unadjusted

$23,200

Less: Prior period adjustment—correction of understatement of depreciation

(net of income taxes)

-1,300

Adjusted beginning retained earnings

$21,900

Add: Net income

11,500

$33,400

Less: Cash dividends

($4,000)

Stock dividends (150 shares at $31 per share)

-4,650

-8,650

Ending retained earnings

$24,750

(b) Last year depreciation expense was inadvertently understated in the amount of $1,800. The correction was made this year to Accumulated Depreciation and to Retained Earnings as a prior period adjustment. The company also received a related income tax refund of $500.

(c) Sixty shares of treasury stock (common) were reissued at $30 per share.

(d) Bonds payable with a face amount of $7,000 were issued for $7,750 on April 30, 2007. The bonds mature on April 30, 2012, and pay interest semiannually. The straight-line method is used to amortize the bond premium. Interest expense totaled $460 for 2007.

(e) Fifty shares of preferred stock (originally issued at $60 per share) were converted into 100 shares of common stock.

(f) Land costing $2,900 was sold for $3,800.

(g) Three hundred shares of common stock were sold for $33 per share.

(h) Equipment costing $32,000 was purchased during the year.

(i) Land was acquired at a cost of $9,000 during the year.

(j) Depreciation expense was $6,000.

(k) Patent amortization was $400.

(l) The company loaned money to one of its executives and received a $1,000 short-term note receivable on December 31, 2007. The note matures 90 days from the date of issuance.

Required

1. Prepare a worksheet (spreadsheet) to support a statement of cash flows for 2007.

2. Prepare the 2007 statement of cash flows for the Bott Company. Show the reconciliation of the net income to the net cash provided by operating activities in a separate schedule accompanying the statement.

prepare a worksheet spreadsheet to support the statement of cash flows for angel com 610553

Comprehensive – Angel Company has prepared its financial statements for the year ended December 31, 2007 and for the three months ended March 31, 2008. You have been asked to prepare a statement of cash flows for the three months ended March 31, 2008. The company’s balance sheet data at December 31, 2007 and March 31, 2008, and its income statement data for the three months ended March 31, 2008, follow. You have previously satisfied yourself as to the correctness of the amounts presented.

Balance Sheet Data

31-Dec-07

31-Mar-08

Cash

$25,300

$79,400

Marketable investments (at cost)

17,500

8,300

Allowance for decrease in value

1,000

900

Accounts receivable

24,320

49,320

Inventory

31,090

48,590

Total current assets

$97,210

$184,710

Land

40,000

18,700

Building

250,000

250,000

Equipment

81,500

Accumulated depreciation

15,000

16,250

Investment in 30% owned company

61,220

67,100

Other assets

15,100

15,100

Total

$448,530

$600,860

Accounts payable

$21,220

$38,417

Income taxes payable

13,529

Total current liabilities

$21,220

$51,946

Other liabilities

187,000

187,000

Bonds payable

50,000

115,000

Discount on bonds payable

2,300

2,150

Deferred taxes payable

510

846

Preferred stock

30,000

Common stock

80,000

110,000

Unrealized decrease in value of marketable investments

1,000

900

Dividends declared

8,000

Retained earnings

83,100

147,118

Total

$448,530

$600,860

 

Income Statement Data For the Three Months Ended March 31, 2008

Sales

$242,807

Gain on sale of marketable investments

2,400

Equity in earnings of 30% owned company

5,880

Extraordinary gain on condemnation of land (net of tax)

8,560

Total revenues

$259,647

Cost of sales

$157,354

General and administrative expenses

22,010

Depreciation

1,250

Interest expense

1,150

Income taxes

13,865

Total expenses

$195,629

Net income

$64,018

Your discussion with the company’s controller and a review of the financial records have revealed the following information:

(a) On January 7, 2008 the company sold marketable securities for cash. These securities had cost $9,200, and had a fair value of $8,600 at December 31, 2007. The remaining marketable securities were adjusted to their $7,400 fair value on March 31, 2008 by adjustment of the related allowance account. The dividend and interest revenue on these marketable securities is not material.

(b) The company’s preferred stock was converted into common stock at a rate of one share of preferred for two shares of common. The preferred stock and common stock have par values of $2 and $1, respectively.

(c) On January 16, 2008, three acres of land were condemned. An award of $32,000 in cash was received on March 24, 2008. Purchase of additional land as a replacement is not contemplated by the company.

(d) On March 25, 2008 the company purchased equipment for cash.

(e) On March 26, 2008 bonds payable were issued by the company at par for cash.

(f) The investment in 30% owned company included an amount of $9,600 attributable to an increase in the recorded value of depreciable assets at December 31, 2007. This increase is being depreciated at a quarterly rate of $480.

Required

1. Prepare a worksheet (spreadsheet) to support the statement of cash flows for Angel Company for the three months ended March 31, 2008.

2. Prepare the statement of cash flows.

prepare the statement of cash flows using the direct method for operating cash flows 610555

Statement of Cash Flows – The following is a list of the items to be included in the preparation of the 2007 statement of cash flows for the Yellow Company:

1. Proceeds from sale of land, $2,100

2. Payments of interest, $5,000

3. Equipment acquired by capital lease, $7,200

4. Proceeds from issuance of preferred stock, $11,000

5. Other operating payments, $1,300

6. Interest and dividends collected, $4,700

7. Payments to employees, $20,300

8. Payment for purchase of investments, $12,100

9. Collections from customers, $54,500

10. Payments of income taxes, $2,900

11. Payment of dividends, $5,200

12. Other operating receipts, $1,600

13. Payments to suppliers, $29,500

14. Beginning cash balance, $29,700

Required

Prepare the statement of cash flows using the direct method for operating cash flows.

prepare the statement of cash flows a separate schedule reconciling net income to ca 610556

Worksheet and Statement – Use the information presented in P22-13 for the Farrell Corporation.

Required

1. Using the direct method for operating cash flows, prepare a worksheet (spreadsheet) to support a 2007 statement of cash flows. (Hint: Combine the income statement and December 31, 2007 balance sheet items for the adjusted trial balance. Use a retained earnings balance of $291,000 in this adjusted trial balance.)

2. Prepare the statement of cash flows. (A separate schedule reconciling net income to cash provided by operating activities is not necessary.)

prepare the statement of cash flows a separate schedule reconciling net income to ca 610557

Comprehensive – The following are the December 31, 2006 post-closing trial balance and the December 31, 2007 adjusted trial balance of the Adair Company:

12/31/06 Post-Closing Trial Balance

12/31/07 Adjusted Trial Balance

Accounts

Debit

Credit

Debit

Credit

Cash

2,700

3,300

Accounts receivable

7,300

6,200

Inventory

8,100

9,900

Investments in bonds

10,000

18,600

Property and equipment

105,300

133,300

Accumulated depreciation

42,400

49,200

Accounts payable

8,100

8,500

Salaries payable

1,300

700

Interest payable

0

300

Notes payable

0

9,000

Common stock, no par

43,600

58,100

Retained earnings

38,000

31,500

Sales

89,000

Cost of goods sold

48,800

Depreciation expense

6,800

Salaries expense

12,000

Other operating expenses

1,700

Interest revenue

1,200

Interest expense

900

Income tax expense

6,000

Totals

133,400

133,400

247,500

247,500

A review of the accounting records reveals the following additional information for 2007:

(a) Investments in bonds to be held to maturity were purchased at year-end for $8,600.

(b) A building was purchased for $28,000.

(c) A note payable was issued for $9,000.

(d) Common stock was issued for $14,500.

(e) Dividends of $6,500 were declared and paid.

Required

1. Using the direct method for operating cash flows, prepare a worksheet (spreadsheet) to support the 2007 statement of cash flows for the Adair Company.

2. Prepare the statement of cash flows. (A separate schedule reconciling net income to cash provided by operating activities is not necessary.)

what are two types of financing and investing activities not involving cash 610563

Financing and Investing Activities Not Involving Cash – The statement of cash flows is normally a required basic financial statement for each period for which an earnings statement is presented. The statement should include a separate schedule listing the financing and investing activities not involving cash.

Required

1. What are financing and investing activities not involving cash?

2. What are two types of financing and investing activities not involving cash?

3. Explain what effect, if any, each of the following seven items would have on the statement of cash flows.

a. Accounts receivable

b. Inventory

c. Depreciation

d. Deferred tax liability

e. Issuance of long-term debt in payment for a building

f. Payoff of current portion of debt

g. Sale of a fixed asset resulting in a loss

compute the profit margin for 2004 how does this result compare to the cash flow fro 610565

Analyzing Coca-Cola’s Cash Flow Disclosures – Refer to the financial statements and related notes of The Coca-Cola Company in Appendix A of this book.

Required

1. What was the net cash provided by operating activities for 2004? What method was used to determine this amount? What was the largest positive adjustment to net income?

2. What was the net cash used in investing activities for 2004? What was the largest investing cash outflow? Investing cash inflow?

3. What was the net cash used in financing activities for 2004? What was the largest financing cash inflow? Financing cash outflow?

4. What was the interest paid in 2004? Income taxes paid?

5. Compute the “cash flow from operations to sales” ratio for 2004. How does this result compare to 2003? Why?

6. Compute the profit margin for 2004. How does this result compare to the cash flow from operations to sales ratio for 2004? Why?

from financial reporting and ethical perspectives how would you respond to bob 610566

Ethics and Cash Flows – You are the accountant for Nello Company, which manufactures specialty equipment. Nello has been in financial difficulty, so its suppliers require purchases to be paid in cash. Furthermore, Nello has long-term debt with a debt covenant that requires it to maintain

a 1:1 acid-test (quick) ratio. Nello’s employees work a five-day week, Monday through Friday.

On Wednesday morning during the last week of the current year, Sam (the production supervisor) comes to you and says, “I don’t understand it. We have this large special order from a customer that must be delivered at the end of the first week in January. Once we get the raw materials, it is going to take five solid days of work without overtime to produce the order. If Bob (the president) would let me order the raw materials this morning, we could have them by late today. This would give us two days this week and the four days after New Year’s Day (Monday) of next week to complete the order without incurring overtime costs. But Bob says we must wait until next Tuesday to order the materials. This means we will have to work double time that Wednesday through Friday to finish the order. That overtime cost is going to really increase next year’s factory salary expense, so our profit and operating cash flows from that order will be very low. Please talk to him.” When you approach Bob about buying the raw materials this morning, he says, “If we purchase those materials today, we will have to write a check. And that means our cash flow from operating activities for this year will be much lower, which our stockholders won’t like. Furthermore, our quick ratio will go down from 1.01:1 to .90:1, so our creditors may be upset. I know our profit and operating cash flows for next year will be lower if we delay the purchase, but that seems to be the best decision. Don’t you agree?”

Required

From financial reporting and ethical perspectives, how would you respond to Bob?

research the applicable generally accepted accounting principles and prepare a writt 610567

Researching GAAP Situation – You are the new accountant for 12th National Bank and are preparing its 2007 statement of cash flows. The bank reports net income of $75,800 on its 2007 income statement. Included in this net income are the following items:

$6,700 gain on sale of trading securities, $1,200 unrealized holding gain on trading securities, and $5,100 loss on sale of securities available for sale. Among its 2007 transactions, the bank sold trading securities with a carrying value of $22,900 for $29,600, and purchased trading securities for $65,200. The bank sold securities available for sale with a cost (and carrying value) of $58,700 for $53,600, and purchased securities available for sale for $39,400. It also made routine 90-day loans of $47,500 to customers and collected $20,000 principal on these customer loans. As a result of the preceding information, the bank’s trading securities account increased by $43,500, the securities available for sale account decreased by $19,300, and the loans receivable account increased by $27,500. The bank uses the indirect approach to report operating cash flows on its statement of cash flows.

Directions

Research the applicable generally accepted accounting principles and prepare a written memo to the 12th National Bank’s auditors that explains how you plan to report the preceding items on the bank’s 2007 statement of cash flows. Cite your reference and applicable paragraph numbers.

what should be reported in white rsquo s retained earnings statement for the year en 610571

During 2007 White Company determined that machinery previously depreciated over a seven-year life had a total estimated useful life of only five years. An accounting change was made in 2007 to reflect the change in estimate. If the change had been made in 2006, accumulated depreciation at December 31, 2006 would have been $1,600,000 instead of $1,200,000. As a result of this change the 2007 depreciation expense was $100,000 greater. The income tax rate was 30% in both years. What should be reported in White’s retained earnings statement for the year ended December 31, 2007 as the cumulative effect on prior years of changing the estimated useful life of the machinery?

a. $0

b. $280,000

c. $300,000

d. $400,000

Items 2 and 3 are based on the following information:

The Shannon Corporation began operations on January 1, 2007. Financial statements for the years ended December 31, 2007 and 2008 contained the following errors:

31-Dec

2007

2008

Ending inventory

$16,000

$15,000

understated

overstated

Depreciation expense

$6,000

understated

Insurance expense

$10,000

$10,000

overstated

understated

Prepaid insurance

$10,000

understated

In addition, on December 31, 2008 fully depreciated machinery was sold for $10,800 cash, but the sale was not recorded until 2009. There were no other errors during 2007 or 2008 and no corrections have been made for any of the errors.

ignoring income taxes the adjustment for the effect of changing to the fifo method f 610576

On January 1, 2007 Belmont Company changed its inventory cost flow method to the FIFO cost method from the LIFO cost method. Belmont can justify the change, which was made for both financial statement and income tax reporting purposes. Belmont’s inventories aggregated $4,000,000 on the LIFO basis at December 31, 2006. Supplementary records maintained by Belmont showed that the inventories would have totaled $4,800,000 at December 31, 2006 on the FIFO basis. Ignoring income taxes, the adjustment for the effect of changing to the FIFO method from the LIFO method should be reported by Belmont in the 2007

a. Income statement as an $800,000 debit

b. Retained earnings statement as an $800,000 debit adjustment to the beginning balance

c. Income statement as an $800,000 credit

d. Retained earnings statement as an $800,000 credit adjustment to the beginning balance

indicate how a company reports the preceding items specify whether increases or decr 610582

Identification and Effects of Changes and Errors – The following are several independent events:

1. Change from the FIFO to the LIFO inventory cost flow assumption.

2. Write-off of patent due to the introduction of a competing product.

3. Payment to the Internal Revenue Service in settlement of a dispute over previous year’s taxes.

4. Increase in allowance for uncollectible accounts from 2% to 4% of credit sales.

5. Change from straight-line to double-declining-balance method.

6. Write-down of an asset to reflect probable future losses.

7. A change from full cost to successful efforts accounting for oil exploration costs.

Required

Indicate how a company reports the preceding items (specify whether increases or decreases can generally be expected) in its financial statements of the current year.

prepare the stockholders equity section of the balance sheet at december 31 2014 in 610394

This exercise will illustrate how the components of stockholders” equity should be reported in the balance sheet.

Al Gore Corporation”s charter authorizes 200,000 shares of $20 par value common stock, and 50,000 shares of 6% cumulative preferred stock, par value $100 per share. The preferred stock has a call price of $105.

The corporation engaged in the following stock transactions between the date of incorporation and December 31, 2014:

  1. Issued 40,000 shares of common stock for $1,920,000 cash.
  2. Issued 10,000 shares of preferred stock in exchange for machinery valued at $1,120,000.
  3. Sold 1,500 shares of common stock at a price of $50 per share.
  4. Purchased 2,000 shares of common stock at $46 per share for the treasury. The cost method was used to record the transaction.
  5. Sold 500 shares of treasury stock for $51 per share.

At December 31, 2014, Gore”s retained earnings balance was $2,200,000.

Instructions

Prepare the stockholders” equity section of the balance sheet at December 31, 2014, in good form.

prepare the journal entries for the treasury stock transactions listed above apply a 610395

This exercise will illustrate the use of the cost method of accounting for treasury stock transactions under a variety of price relationships.

Cheers Corporation reported the following stockholders” equity items at December 31, 2013. Each share of stock was issued in a prior year for $12 each.

Common Stock. $10 Dar

$350.000

Paid-in Capital in Excess of Par Value

70,000

Retained Eaminqs

710.000

Total stockholders” equity

$1.130,000

During 2014, Cheers had the following treasury stock transactions:

  1. Purchased 1,000 shares at $15 per share.
  2. Purchased 1,000 shares at $13 per share.
  3. Sold 1,000 treasury shares at $11 per share.
  4. Sold 1,000 treasury shares at $14 per share.
  5. Purchased and retired 1,000 shares at $16 per share.

Instructions

Prepare the journal entries for the treasury stock transactions listed above. Apply a FIFO (first-in, first-out) approach in determining the cost of treasury shares sold.

for each transaction listed across the top of the following matrix indicate the effe 610396

This exercise will review the effects of various types of distributions to stockholders.

Instructions

For each transaction listed across the top of the following matrix, indicate the effect on each of the items listed down the left side of the matrix. Use an “I” to indicate an increase, a “D” to indicate a decrease, and a “NE” for no effect.

Item

Declaration of a cash dividend

Payment of a
previously re-
corded cash
dividend

Declaration and
distribution of a
small stock divi-
dend

Declaration and distribution of a large stock dividend

Stock
split

Assets

Total capital stock

Total additional Paid-in capital

Retained earnings

Total stockholders” equity

Par value per share

Total number of shares outstanding

assume each of the transactions listed below is independent of the others unless oth 610397

This exercise will allow you to practice recording various types of dividends.

A corporation has the following stockholder equity items at December 31, 2013:

Common stock, $10 par, 200,000 shares authorized, 80,000 shares issued

$800,000

Paid-in capital in excess of par value

2,400,000

Retained earnings

28.500.000

Total paid-in capital and retained earnings

31,700,000

Less: Treasury stock, 2,000 shares at cost

24.000

Total stockholders” equity

$31,676,000

Instructions

Assume each of the transactions listed below is independent of the others unless otherwise indicated. Dividends are distributed only on outstanding shares of stock. Record the following transactions at the beginning of 2014:

  1. Declared a cash dividend of $.50 per share.
  2. Paid the dividend declared in 1 above.
  3. Declared a 5% stock dividend when the market value was $14 per share.
  4. Distributed the shares for the stock dividend described in 3 above.
  5. Declared a 2:1 stock split.

compute the amount of dividends total and per share to be allocated to the preferred 610398

This exercise will illustrate the allocation of dividends when a corporation has both preferred stock and common stock.

Charlie B. Daly Corporation has the following stock outstanding without any changes for years 2013, 2014, and 2015.

50.000 shares of $10 par. 4% preferred

$500.000

200.000 shares of $5 par common

1.000.000

$1.500.000

Dividends are declared as follows:

2013

$15,000

2014

$50.000

2015

$72,000

Instructions

Compute the amount of dividends (total and per share) to be allocated to the preferred stockholders and the common stockholders for each of the three years under the independent assumptions below.

(a) The preferred stock is noncumulative.

(b) The preferred stock is cumulative.

prepare the stockholders equity section of the balance sheet at december 31 2014 ass 610400

This exercise will allow you to practice preparing the stockholders” equity section of a corporation”s balance sheet and the accompanying note disclosures.

The following accounts appear in the ledger of Zippadeedoda, Inc. after the books are closed at December 31, 2014.

Common Stock, $10 par, 700,000 shares authorized; 400,000 shares issued

$4,000,000

Common Stock Dividends Distributable

400,000

Paid-in Capital in Excess of Par Value—Common Stock

5,450,000

Preferred Stock, $50 par, 6% cumulative, 60,000 shares authorized; 40,000 shares issued

2,000,000

Paid-in Capital in Excess of Par Value—Preferred Stock

160,000

Paid-in Capital from Treasury Common Stock

30,000

Treasury Stock (20,000 common shares) (at cost)

380,000

Retained Earnings

990,000

Instructions

Prepare the stockholders” equity section of the balance sheet at December 31, 2014, assuming retained earnings is restricted for two reasons: (1) the cost of the treasury shares held, and (2) $175,000 for future plant expansion.

on january 1 2014 huseman corporation had the following stockholders equity balances 610401

This exercise will illustrate the preparation of a stockholders” equity statement.

On January 1, 2014, Huseman Corporation had the following stockholders” equity balances:

Common Stock ($1 stated value)

$300,000

Paid-in Capital in Excess of Stated Value

710,000

Retained Earnings

390,000

Treasury Stock (3,000 shares)

6,000

During 2014, the following occurred:

  1. Issued 50,000 shares of common stock at $3 per share.
  2. Declared a $70,000 cash dividend.
  3. Purchased 1,000 shares of treasury stock at $2 per share.
  4. Declared and distributed a 5% stock dividend when the market value
  5. was $3 per share and there were 346,000 shares outstanding.
  6. Earned net income for the year of $200,000.

Instructions

Prepare a stockholders” equity statement for the year ending December 31, 2014.

a list of accounting terms with which you should be familiar appears below 610402

This exercise will quiz you about terminology used in this chapter.

A list of accounting terms with which you should be familiar appears below:

Authorized stock

Par value stock

**Book value per share

Payment date

Cash dividend

Preferred stock

Charter

Prior period adjustment

Corporate capital

Privately held corporation

Corporation

Publicly held corporation

Cumulative dividend

Record date

Declaration date

Retained earnings

Deficit

Retained earnings restrictions

Dividend

Retained earnings statement

Legal capital

Return on common stockholders” equity ratio

Liquidating dividend

Stated value

No-par value stock

Stock dividend

Organization costs

Stock split

Outstanding stock

Stockholders” equity statement

Paid-in capital

Treasury stock

This material is covered in Appendix 11B in the text.

Instructions

For each item below, enter in the blank the term that is described.

  1. ____________________________________A corporation that may have thousands of stockholders and whose stock is regularly traded on a national securities market.
  2. ____________________________________A corporation that has only a few stockholders and whose stock is not available for sale to the general public.
  3. ___________________________________The amount of stock that a corporation is authorized to sell as indicated in its charter.
  4. ___________________________________Costs incurred in the formation of a corporation.
  5. ___________________________________Capital stock that has been issued and is being held by stockholders.
  6. ___________________________________The amount per share of stock that must be retained in the business for the protection of corporate creditors.
  7. ___________________________________Total amount of cash and other assets paid in to the corporation by stockholders in exchange for capital stock.
  8. ___________________________________Net income that is retained in the business.
  9. ___________________________________Capital stock that has been assigned a value per share in the corporate charter.
  10. ___________________________________The amount per share assigned by the board of directors to no-par stock that becomes legal capital per share.
  11. ___________________________________Capital stock that has not been assigned a value in the corporate charter.
  12. ___________________________________Capital stock that has contractual preferences over common stock in certain areas.
  13. ___________________________________The equity a common stockholder has in the net assets of the corporation from owning one share of stock.
  14. ___________________________________A feature of preferred stock entitling the stockholder to receive current and unpaid prior-year dividends before common stockholders receive any dividends.
  15. ___________________________________A corporation”s own stock that has been issued, fully paid for, and reacquired by the corporation but not retired.
  16. ___________________________________A corporation”s distribution of cash or stock to its stockholders on a pro rata (equal) basis.
  17. ___________________________________A pro rata distribution of cash to stockholders.
  18. ___________________________________A pro rata distribution of the corporation”s own stock to stockholders.
  19. ___________________________________The issuance of additional shares of stock to stockholders (according to their percentage ownership) accompanied by a reduction in the par or stated value per share.
  20. ___________________________________The date the board of directors formally declares the dividend and announces it to stockholders.
  21. ___________________________________The date when ownership of outstanding shares is determined for dividend purposes.
  22. ___________________________________The date dividend checks are mailed to stockholders.
  23. ___________________________________A dividend declared out of paid-in capital.
  24. ___________________________________A financial statement that shows the changes in retained earnings during the year.
  25. ___________________________________Circumstances that make a portion of retained earnings currently unavailable to serve as the basis for dividend declaration.
  26. ___________________________________The correction of an error in previously issued financial statements.
  27. ___________________________________A debit balance in retained earnings.
  28. ___________________________________A statement that shows the changes in each stockholders” equity account and in total stockholders” equity during the year.
  29. ___________________________________A document that creates a corporation.
  30. ___________________________________A business organized as a legal entity separate and distinct from its owners under state corporation law.
  31. ___________________________________The owners” equity in a corporation. Also called stockholders” equity or shareholders” equity.
  32. ___________________________________ A ratio that measures profitability from the stockholders” point of view. It is computed by dividing net income by average common stockholders” equity.

the jones corporation uses the cost method of accounting for treasury stock which of 610412

The Jones Corporation uses the cost method of accounting for treasury stock. Which of the following transactions will cause a net decrease in total additional paid-in capital?

  1. Sale of treasury stock at a price in excess of cost.
  2. Retirement of treasury stock whose cost is in excess of par value but less than the original issuance price.
  3. Purchase of treasury stock at a price in excess of par value but less than the original issuance price.
  4. Purchase of treasury stock at a price in excess of par and in excess of the original issuance price.

bradley s return on common stockholders equity rounded to the nearest percentage for 610424

Selected information for the Bradley Corporation is as follows:

Dec. 31
2013

Dec. 31
2014

Preferred stock, 8%, par
$100, noncumulative

$250,000

$250,000

Common stock

600,000

800,000

Retained earnings

150,000

370,000

Dividends paid on
preferred stock for the year

20,000

20,000

Net income for the year

120,000

240,000

Bradley”s return on common stockholders” equity, (rounded to the nearest percentage) for 2014 is:

  1. 25%.
  2. 23%.
  3. 19%.
  4. 17%.

the following beginning balance sheet and statement of cash flows for 2007 are avail 610532

Balance Sheet – The following beginning balance sheet and statement of cash flows for 2007 are available for Fazzi Company:

Balance Sheet
January 1, 2007

Cash

$900

Accounts receivable

2,300

Land

4,900

Equipment

$20,000

Less: Accumulated depreciation

9,100

10,900

Total Assets

$19,000

Accounts payable

$1,600

Notes payable

3,900

Common stock, $5 par

4,500

Additional paid-in capital

1,800

Retained earnings

7,200

Total Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity

$19,000

Net Cash Flow From Operating Activities

Net income

$3,900

Adjustments for differences between income flows

and cash flows from operating activities:

Add: Depreciation expense

900

Increase in accounts payable

100

Less: Increase in accounts receivable

700

Gain on sale of land

200

Net cash provided by operating activities

$4,000

Cash Flows From Investing Activities

Payment for purchase of equipment

($5,000)

Proceeds from sale of land

1,200

Net cash used for investing activities

3,800

Cash Flows From Financing Activities

Proceeds from issuance of common stock (200 shares)

$2,600

Payment of long-term note

900

Payment of dividends

1,300

Net cash provided by financing activities

400

Net Increase in Cash

$600

Cash, January 1, 2007

900

Cash, December 31, 2007

$1,500

Required

On the basis of this information, prepare a balance sheet for the Fazzi Company as of December 31, 2007.

prepare a corrected 2007 statement of cash flows for the andell company 610533

Erroneous Statement of Cash Flows – The 2007 statement of cash flows for the Andell Company, as developed by its bookkeeper, is shown here:

Cash Flows Statement
December 31, 2007

Inflows of Cash

Operating Activities

Net income

$10,600

Add: Proceeds from sale of equipment

4,400

Proceeds from issuance of stock

4,300

Less: Payment for investment in bonds

6,000

Payment of long-term note

5,000

Net cash inflows from operations

$8,300

Other Inflows

Decrease in accounts receivable

$2,100

Depreciation expense

4,800

Total other inflows of cash

6,900

Total inflows of cash

$15,200

Outflows of Cash

Payment for purchase of land

$5,200

Decrease in accounts payable

2,800

Payment of dividends

3,000

Gain on sale of equipment

700

Total outflows of cash

11,700

Net Increase in Cash

$3,500

Cash, December 31, 2007

11,700

Cash, January 1, 2007

$8,200

You determine that the amounts of the items listed on the statement are correct, but in certain circumstances, incorrectly classified.

Required

Prepare a corrected 2007 statement of cash flows for the Andell Company.

on the basis of the preceding information complete the worksheet spreadsheet 610534

Partially Completed Worksheet (Spreadsheet) – The Hanks Company has prepared the following changes in account balances for the worksheet to support its 2007 statement of cash flows:

A

B

C

D

Worksheet Entries

Debit

Credit

Account Title

Increase (Decrease)

Debits

Cash

$830

Noncash Accounts

Accounts receivable

290

Inventory

1,280

Investments

1,550

Land

700

Equipment

2,300

Patents (net)

100

Total

$4,870

Credits Accumulated depreciation

$350

Accounts payable

120

Bonds payable

2,000

Premium on bonds payable

300

Common stock, $2 par

480

Premium on common stock

1,120

Retained earnings

500

Total

$4,870

Additional information: The net income was $1,300. Depreciation expense was $350 and patent amortization expense was $100. At the end of 2007, long-term investments were purchased at a cost of $1,550. Land that cost $700 was sold for $900.

On December 31, 2007, bonds payable with a face value of $2,000 were issued for equipment valued at $2,300. Two hundred shares of common stock were issued at $7 per share. Forty shares of common stock were issued as a “small” stock dividend, the relevant market price being $5 per share. Cash dividends declared and paid totaled $600.

Required

On the basis of the preceding information, complete the worksheet (spreadsheet).

making whatever additional assumptions that are necessary prepare a worksheet spread 610535

Worksheet (Spreadsheet) – The following 2007 information is available for the Payne Company:

Comparative Balance Sheets

1-Jan-07

31-Dec-07

Cash

$400

$600

Accounts receivable

220

200

Inventory

370

610

Land

250

410

Equipment

2,070

2,200

Less: Accumulated depreciation

-310

-400

Total Assets

$3,000

$3,620

Accounts payable

$800

$500

Notes payable (long-term)

900

720

Common stock, no par

600

1,000

Retained earnings

700

1,400

Total Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity

$3,000

$3,620

Partial additional information: The net income for 2007 totaled $1,600. During 2007 the company sold for $390, equipment that cost $390 and had a book value of $300. The company sold land for $200, resulting in a loss of $40. The remaining change in the Land account resulted from the purchase of land through the issuance of common stock.

Required

Making whatever additional assumptions that are necessary, prepare a worksheet (spreadsheet) to support the 2007 statement of cash flows for the Payne Company.

prepare a worksheet spreadsheet to support a statement of cash flows for the stewart 610536

Worksheet (Spreadsheet) and Statement – The following 2007 information is available for the Stewart Company:

Condensed Income Statement for 2007

Sales

$9,000

Cost of goods sold

-6,000

Other expenses

-2,000

Loss on sale of equipment

-260

Gain on sale of land

400

Net income

$1,140

Comparative Balance Sheets

December 31,
2006

December 31,
2007

Cash

$700

1,130

Accounts receivable

450

310

Inventory

350

400

Land

300

500

Equipment

1,600

$1,800

Less: Accumulated depreciation

-200

-150

Total Assets

$3,200

$3,990

Accounts payable

$600

$750

Bonds payable (due 1/1/2012)

1,000

1,000

Common stock, $10 par

900

1,400

Retained earnings

700

840

Total Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity

$3,200

$3,990

Partial additional information:

1. The equipment that was sold for cash had cost $400 and had a book value of $300.

2. Land that was sold brought a cash price of $530.

3. Fifty shares of stock were issued at par.

Required

Making whatever additional assumptions that are necessary,

1. Prepare a worksheet (spreadsheet) to support a statement of cash flows for the Stewart Company for 2007.

2. Prepare the statement of cash flows.

record in journal entry form the entries that moore company would make for the prece 610537

Retirement of Debt – Moore Company is preparing its statement of cash flows for the current year. During the year, the company retired two issuances of debt and properly recorded the transactions. These transactions were as follows:

1. Paid cash of $18,000 to retire bonds payable with a face value of $20,000 and a book value of $18,300.

2. Paid cash of $38,000 to retire bonds payable with a face value of $35,000 and a book value of $37,000.

Required

Record, in journal entry form, the entries that Moore Company would make for the preceding transactions on its worksheet to prepare its statement of cash flows.

compute the amounts of interest paid and income taxes paid by the staggs company for 610538

Interest and Income Taxes – The Staggs Company has prepared its 2007 statement of cash flows. In conjunction with this statement, it plans to disclose the interest and income taxes it paid during 2007. The following information is available from its 2007 income statement and beginning and ending balance sheet:

Income Statement

Interest expense

$12,000

Income tax expense

35,000

Balance Sheet

Cr. Bal. 01/01/07

Cr. Bal. 12/31/07

Interest payable

$600

$2,300

Income taxes payable

5,000

3,000

Bonds payable

80,000

80,000

Premium on bonds payable

9,000

8,100

Deferred taxes payable

3,300

4,400

Required

Compute the amounts of interest paid and income taxes paid by the Staggs Company for 2007.

using the direct method prepare the cash flows from operating activities section of 610540

Operating Cash Flows – The following is accounting information taken from the adjusted trial balance of the Woodrail Company for 2007:

Debit

Credit

Sales

$75,000

Interest revenue

4,300

Cost of goods sold

$43,600

Salaries expense

13,600

Interest expense

5,400

Income tax expense

3,000

In addition, the following changes occurred in selected accounts during 2007:

Accounts receivable

$5,700 credit

Inventory

9,800 debit

Accounts payable

7,000 credit

Salaries payable

900 debit

Interest payable

300 credit

Required

Using the direct method, prepare the cash flows from operating activities section of the 2007 statement of cash flows for the Woodrail Company.

using visual inspection and the direct method prepare a 2007 statement of cash flows 610542

Visual Inspection – The following changes in account balances were taken from the adjusted trial balance of the Walson Company at the end of 2007:

Net Changes for 2007

Debit

Credit

Cash

$2,100

Accounts receivable

8,700

Inventory

$2,500

Land

1,900

Buildings and equipment

10,400

Accumulated depreciation

6,800

Accounts payable

4,500

Salaries payable

800

Income taxes payable

1,000

Common stock, no par

9,000

Retained earnings

4,000

Sales

69,000

Cost of goods sold

34,000

Salaries expense

17,200

Depreciation expense

6,800

Income tax expense

3,300

Totals

$91,000

$91,000

In addition, the following information was obtained from the company’s records:

1. Land was sold, at cost, for $1,900

2. Dividends of $4,000 were declared and paid

3. Equipment was purchased for $10,400

4. Common stock was issued for $9,000

5. Beginning cash balance was $17,000

Required

Using visual inspection and the direct method, prepare a 2007 statement of cash flows for the Walson Company. (A separate schedule reconciling net income to cash provided by operating activities is not necessary.)

this exercise tests your ability to distinguish between current and long term liabil 610351

This exercise tests your ability to distinguish between current and long-term liabilities.

1. Obligation to supplier for merchandise purchased on credit. (Terms 2/10, n/30).

2. Note payable to bank maturing 90 days after balance sheet date.

3. Note payable due January 1, 2017.

4. Property taxes payable.

5. Interest payable on note payable.

6. Sales taxes payable.

7. Portion of mortgage obligation due in years 2016 through 2020.

8. Revenue received in advance, to be earned over the next six months.

9. Wages and salaries payable.

10. Rent payable.

11. Short-term notes payable.

12. Pension obligations maturing in ten years.

13. Installment loan payments due three months after the balance sheet date.

14. Installment loan payments due more than one year after the balance sheet date.

15. Portion of mortgage obligation due within a year after the December 31, 2014 balance sheet date.

16. Note payable maturing March 1, 2015.

Instructions:

Indicate whether each of the above items would be reported as a current liability (C) or a long-term liability (LT) on a balance sheet prepared at December 31, 2014.

Approach: Review the definition of a current liability. Analyze each situation above and determine if the liability will fall due within a year (or operating cycle) of the balance sheet date and whether it will require the use of current assets or the incurrence of another current liability to liquidate. If so, it is current; if not, it is long-term.

this exercise will review the journal entries involved for an interest bearing note 610352

This exercise will review the journal entries involved for an interest-bearing note payable.

On November 1, 2014, Bono Company borrowed $80,000 from National Bank and signed a note stipulating that $80,000 was to be repaid in 6 months with interest at 12%. Bono Company adjusts its accounts and prepares financial statements annually on December 31

Instructions

(a) Prepare the journal entry on November 1, 2014, to record the loan.

(b) Prepare the adjusting entry on December 31, 2014.

(c) Prepare the journal entry at maturity (May 1, 2015).

(d) Determine the total financing cost (interest expense) for the six-month period.

explain how relevant amounts will be reported on the annual financial statements pre 610354

This exercise will illustrate the accounting for unearned revenue.

Soap Opera Summarized is published by Viewer Publishers. Subscriptions to the magazine are sold for a one-year, two-year, or three-year period. Cash receipts from subscribers are credited to Unearned Subscription Revenue, and this account had a balance of $3,000,000 at December 31, 2014, before adjustment. Outstanding subscriptions at December 31, 2014, expire as follows:

During 2015

$600000

During 2016

400000

During 2017

300000

Total

$1300,000

Instructions

  1. Prepare the journal entry to adjust the Unearned Subscription Revenue account at December 31, 2014.
  2. Explain how relevant amounts will be reported on the annual financial statements prepared at the end of 2014.

explain the advantages that bonds offer over common stock to a corporation seeking l 610355

This exercise will compare and contrast the effects of debt financing with the effects of stock financing.

The Siuda Specialty Corporation has the following items on its financial statements at December 31, 2014:

Assets

$1,000,000

Stockholders” equity

$1,000,000

Number of common stock shares outstanding

60,000

Management is considering two alternatives to finance the acquisition of $500,000 of new assets:

(1) Issuance of 50,000 shares of $1 par value common stock at the market price of $10 per share.

(2) Issuance of $500,000, 10% bonds at par.

The income tax rate is 30%.

Instructions

  1. If income before interest and income taxes is estimated to be $180,000 in 2015, compute the projected earnings per share figure for 2015 for each alternative. (Round to the nearest cent.)
  2. Explain the advantages that bonds offer over common stock to a corporation seeking long-term financing.

prepare the adjusting entry on december 31 2014 to record interest expense assuming 610356

This exercise will illustrate the journal entries required to record the issuance of bonds at face value and the entries to account for the related interest expense.

The Hale Corporation issued bonds dated April 1, 2014. These bonds are 5-year term bonds with a face value of $1,000 each and a stated interest rate of 7%. Interest is payable semiannually on October 1 and April 1.

Instructions

  1. Prepare the journal entry to record the sale of 5,000 of these bonds on April 1, 2014 at 100.
  2. Prepare the journal entry to record the first interest payment on October 1, 2014, assuming no previous accrual of interest.
  3. Prepare the adjusting entry on December 31, 2014, to record interest expense, assuming a calendar year reporting period.

this exercise will illustrate the journal entry required to record the issuance of b 610357

This exercise will illustrate the journal entry required to record the issuance of bonds at a price other than par.

The Russell Corporation issued 4,000 bonds dated May 1, 2014. These bonds are 10-year term bonds with a face value of $1,000 each and a stated interest rate of 8%. Interest is payable semiannually on November 1 and May 1.

Instructions

  1. Prepare the journal entry to record the sale of these bonds on May 1, 2014. Assuming the bonds are sold for a total of $4,055,000.
  2. Ignore the assumption in part (a) above. Prepare the journal entry to record the sale of these bonds on May 1, 2014, assuming the bonds are sold on May 1, 2014, and the proceeds amount to $3,950,000.

this exercise will illustrate how account balances involved in accounting for bonds 610358

This exercise will illustrate how account balances involved in accounting for bonds payable are to be reported in the financial statements. When a company borrows money by issuing long-term debt instruments such as bonds, the entity is obligated to repay the principal plus interest on the outstanding debt. A balance sheet should properly reflect the amounts owed at the statement date. An income statement must report the interest (cost of borrowing) for the period that precedes the related balance sheet date.

The following amounts pertain to a bond issue of the Arnie Howell Corporation (they use a calendar year reporting period):

Face amount of 3-year term bonds issued on January 1, 2014

$100,000.00

Discount on bonds payable at issuance date

$7,460.05

Stated interest rate

7%

Interest payment date is annually on January 1

Maturity date is January 1, 2017

Unamortized discount as of December 31, 2015

$2,486.69

Interest paid during 2015

$7,000.00

Interest expense for the year ending Dec. 31, 2015

$9,486.68

Interest payable at December 31, 2015

$7,000.00

Instructions

Explain what amount(s) would appear on Arnie”s multiple-step income statement for the year ended December 31, 2015 and identify the appropriate classification. Also explain what amount(s) would appear on Arnie”s balance sheet at December 31, 2015 and identify the appropriate classification.

this exercise will illustrate how to account for 1 the redemption of bonds by cash p 610359

This exercise will illustrate how to account for (1) the redemption of bonds by cash payment prior to maturity, and (2) the conversion of bonds to stock.

The balance sheet for Sea Willy Corporation reports the following information on June 30, 2014:

Long -term liabilities

9% Convertible bonds payable

$1,000.000

Less: Discount on bonds payable

50,000

$950,000

A semiannual interest payment was made and recorded on June 30, 2014.

Instructions

Prepare the appropriate journal entry for each of the independent situations below:

  1. Interest rates have declined in the market place. Sea Willy decides to borrow money from another source at a lower interest rate to lower its annual interest charges. Therefore, on July 1, 2014, Sea Willy redeems all of the outstanding bonds at 102 (bond prices vary inversely with changes in the market rate of interest).
  2. Holders of one-half of the bonds exercise the conversion feature. Thus, each of 500 bonds is converted into 12 shares of Sea Willy $50 par common stock on July 1, 2014. At this date, the market price of a bond was $984 and the market value of a share of stock was $82.

this exercise will illustrate the computations and journal entries for a bond when t 610361

This exercise will illustrate the computations and journal entries for a bond when the effective-interest method of amortization is used.

The Jan Larsen Corporation issued bonds with the following details:

Face value

$100,000.00

Contractual interest rate

7%

Market interest rate

10%

Maturity date

January 1, 2017

Date of issuance

January 1, 2014

Issuance price

$92,539.95

Interest payments due

Annually on January 1

Method of amortization

Effective-interest

End of annual reporting period

December 31

Instructions

(a) Complete the amortization schedule for these bonds which appears below.

(b) Prepare the journal entries to record:

(1) The issuance of the bonds on January 1, 2014.

(2) The adjusting entry(s) at December 31, 2014.

(3) The payment entry on January 1, 2015. (Assume reversing entries are not used.)

prepare the journal entry to record the payment of the face value at the maturity da 610362

This exercise will illustrate the computations and journal entries made throughout a bond”s life when the straight-line method of amortization is used. Arnie Howell Corporation issued bonds with the following details:

Face value

$100,000.00

Contractual interest rate

7%

Market interest rate

10%

Maturity date

January 1, 2017

Date of issuance

January 1, 2014

Issuance price

$92,539.95

Interest payments due

Annually on January 1

Method of amortization

Straight-line

End of annual reporting period

December 31

Instructions

  1. Compute the amount of issuance premium or discount.
  2. Prepare the journal entry for the issuance of the bonds.
  3. Complete the amortization schedule (for these bonds) which appears below. Also supply the missing amount in the heading for columns (A), (C), and (E).
  4. Prepare all of the journal entries (subsequent to the issuance date) for 2014, 2015, and 2016. (Assume reversing entries are not used.)
  5. Prepare the journal entry to record the payment of the face value at the maturity date. Also prepare the journal entry to record the final interest payment due on January 1, 2017.

how much of the above should be included in the current liability section of jurassi 610364

Included in Jurassick Company”s liability accounts at December 31, 2014, was the following:

12% note payable issued in 2004 for cash and due in May 2015

$200,000

Sales taxes payable

16,000

Interest payable

11,000

Federal income tax withholdings

6,000

How much of the above should be included in the current liability section of Jurassick”s balance sheet at December 31, 2014?

  1. $27,000.
  2. $33,000.
  3. $227,000.
  4. $233,000.

which of the following is true regarding a situation where the accounting period end 610366

Which of the following is true regarding a situation where the accounting period ends on a date that does not coincide with an interest payment date for a note payable that is outstanding?

  1. No adjusting entry is required. The interest expense will be recorded in the period it is paid.
  2. An adjusting entry is required and it contains a debit to Interest Expense and a credit to Interest Payable.
  3. An adjusting entry is required and it contains a debit to Note Payable and a credit to Interest Expense.
  4. An adjusting entry is required and it contains a debit to Income Summary and a credit to Interest Expense.

the amount of interest expense will decrease each period the loan is outstanding whi 610381

A corporation borrowed money from a bank to build a building. The long-term note signed by the corporation is secured by a mortgage that pledges title to the building as security for the loan. The corporation is to pay the bank $80,000 each year for 10 years to repay the loan. Which of the following relationships can you expect to apply to the situation?

  1. The balance of mortgage payable at a given balance sheet date will be reported as a long-term liability.
  2. The balance of mortgage payable will remain a constant amount over the 10-year period.
  3. The amount of interest expense will decrease each period the loan is outstanding, while the portion of the annual payment applied to the loan principal will increase each period.
  4. The amount of interest expense will remain constant over the 10-year period.

present value of the bond s face value plus the present value of all interest paymen 610384

The selling price of a bond will be equal to the:

  1. future amount of the bond”s face value, calculated by using the market interest rate
  2. present value of all interest payments to be made over the bond”s remaining life, calculated by using the contractual interest rate.
  3. present value of the face value using the contractual interest rate for discounting plus the present value of all remaining interest payments using the market interest rate for discounting.
  4. present value of the bond”s face value plus the present value of all interest payments to be made over the bond”s remaining life, both calculated by using the market interest rate for all present value computations.

using the effective interest method the amount of bond discount to be amortized for 610389

Using the effective-interest method, the amount of bond discount to be amortized for a given period is calculated by:

  1. deducting the amount of cash interest for the period from the amount of interest expense for the period.
  2. adding the amount of cash interest for the period and the amount of interest expense for the period.
  3. deducting the amount of interest expense for the period from the carrying value of the liability.
  4. multiplying the carrying value of the bond at the beginning of the period by the stated interest rate.

grennan corporation has 200 000 authorized shares of 10 par common stock and 100 000 610391

This exercise will review the meaning of some important terminology related to the area of stockholders” equity.

A corporation”s common stock may have a par value or it may be a no-par stock. A no-par stock may or may not have a stated value.

The five different situations described below are examples of the various ways stockholders” equity may be structured:

  1. Zollo Corporation has 100,000 authorized shares of $10 par value common stock. 60,000 shares were issued at an average price of $33 each. The balance of retained earnings at December 31, 2014 is $630,000.
  2. Oiler Corporation has 50,000 authorized shares of no-par common stock. The stock has a stated value of $1 per share. 10,000 shares were issued at an average price of $25 each. The balance of retained earnings at December 31, 2014 is $140,000.
  3. Kelly Corporation has 100,000 authorized shares of no-par common stock with no stated value. All of the 40,000 issued shares were sold for $24 each. The balance of retained earnings at December 31, 2014 is $300,000.
  4. Scotty Corporation has 100,000 authorized shares of $40 par common stock. 70,000 shares were issued at an average price of $68. 6,000 of these shares were reacquired and are currently held in the treasury; they were purchased for $60 each. The balance of retained earnings at December 31, 2014 is $1,500,000.
  5. Grennan Corporation has 200,000 authorized shares of $10 par common stock and 100,000 authorized shares of $100 par preferred stock. Over the years, 150,000 shares of common were issued at an average price of $40 per share and 50,000 shares of preferred were issued at average price of $102. There are 2,000 shares of treasury—common which were acquired at $30 per share. The balance of retained earnings at December 31, 2014 is $2,515,000.

Instructions

Assume it is December 31, 2014. For each of the independent situations above, determine the following:

(a) Total paid-in capital.

(b) Total stockholders” equity.

(c) Number of common stock shares outstanding.

compute the number of outstanding shares 610392

This exercise will point out the relationship between authorized, issued, outstanding, and subscribed shares.

The following data are available regarding the common stock of the Daffy Corporation at December 31, 2014:

Authorized shares

200,000

Unissued shares

60,000

Treasury shares

12,000

Instructions

Compute the number of outstanding shares.

assuming no other stock transactions occurred during 2014 prepare the stockholders e 610393

This exercise will illustrate how to record selected transactions related to the issuance of capital stock.

On March 1, 2014, Aladdin Corporation received authorization to issue 400,000 shares of $10 par value common stock and 100,000 shares of $50 par value 6% preferred stock. The following transactions occurred during 2014:

March 24

Issued 100,000 shares of common stock for cash at a price of $22 per share.

March 28

Issued 50,000 shares of common stock in exchange for a group of modular warehouses.

June 5

Sold 20,000 shares of preferred stock at $52 each.

Instructions

(a) Prepare the journal entries to record the transactions listed above.

(b) Assuming no other stock transactions occurred during 2014, prepare the stockholders” equity section of the balance sheet at December 31, 2014. Assume the balance of the Retained Earnings account is $820,000 at the balance sheet date.

the following information pertains to the berry bear corporation at december 31 2014 610293

The following information pertains to the Berry Bear Corporation at December 31, 2014

Balance per bank

S20 000

Deposits in transit

e 000

Outstanding checks

16.000

Bank service charges for December

400

Bank erroneously charged Berry Bears account for Sonny-Bear”s

check written for $1,400. As of December 31, the bank had not corrected this error

1.400

Berry Bear”s cash balance per ledger (books) before adjustment at December 31, 2014 is

  1. $28,200.
  2. $11,800.
  3. $11,000.
  4. $8,200.

the following data relate to the bank account of springfield cleaners 610294

The following data relate to the bank account of Springfield Cleaners:

Cash balance, September 30 per bank

$10,000

Cash balance, October 31 per bank

21,500

Checks paid during October by bank

5,900

Checks written during October per books

6,800

Cash balance, October 31 per books

22,200

Bank service charge for October, not recorded on books

100

Deposits per books for October

19,000

The amount of deposits recorded by the bank in October is

  1. $19,000.
  2. $17,500.
  3. $11,500.
  4. $5,700.

using the data above give the journal entries to record each of the following cases 610298

This exercise will review the two bases for determining the dollar amount of the adjusting entry to recognize bad debt expense and to adjust the Allowance for Doubtful Accounts account.

The trial balance before adjustment at December 31, 2014 for the Liz Company shows the following balances:

Debit

Credit

Accounts Receivable

$82000

Allowance for Doubtful Accounts

2120

Sales (all on credit)

$410,000

Sales Returns and Allowances

7600

Instructions

Using the data above, give the journal entries to record each of the following cases (each situation is independent):

  1. The company expects bad debts to be 1 3/4% of net credit sales.
  2. Liz performs an aging analysis at December 31, 2014 which indicates an estimate of $6,000 uncollectible accounts.

this exercise reviews the journal entries for various transactions involving notes r 610301

This exercise reviews the journal entries for various transactions involving notes receivable The following transactions occurred during 2014 and pertain to the Aaron Retail Company.

June 1

Accepted a note from R. Greenblatt in settlement of his $2,000 account. The note is due in six months and bears interest at 12%.

July 1

Sold merchandise to C. Lynn for $5,000. Accepted a note due in nine months at 10%.

Oct. 1

Accepted a note from D. Gioia for $6,000 in settlement of his account receivable. The 10% note is due in 180 days.

Instructions

  1. Prepare the journal entries to record the receipt of each of the three notes.
  2. Indicate the due date of each note.
  3. Assume the first note is collected on its due date. Prepare the appropriate journal entry to record its collection.
  4. Assume the accounting period ends on December 31. Prepare the appropriate adjusting entry(s) at December 31, 2014, to record accrued interest on the second and third notes.
  5. Assume the second note is honored on its maturity date. Prepare the journal entry to record this transaction.
  6. Assume the third note is dishonored on its due date. Aaron expects eventual collection. Prepare the appropriate journal entry.

assuming the company s policy is to require payment within 30 days of invoicing a cu 610302

This exercise will review the measures used to evaluate the liquidity of accounts receivable. The management of M. F. Specie Company is analyzing the entity”s recent financial statements to determine the efficiency of the company”s credit policies for customers. The following information is extracted from the statements:

Sales

$930,000

Sales returns

30,000

Accounts receivable, 12/31/14

85,000

Accounts receivable, 12/31/13

60,000

Instructions

  1. Assuming all sales are credit sales (on account), compute the receivables turnover for 2014.
  2. Assuming the company”s policy is to require payment within 30 days of invoicing a customer and invoices are sent within two days of a sale, explain whether the company”s average collection period suggests that the company has weak or strong controls surrounding its credit-granting activity.

this exercise will quiz you about terminology used in this chapter a list of account 610303

This exercise will quiz you about terminology used in this chapter. A list of accounting terms with which you should be familiar appears below.

Accounts receivable

Factor

Accounts receivable turnover ratio

Maker

Aging the accounts receivable

Notes receivable

Allowance for doubtful accounts

Other receivables

Allowance method

Payee

Average collection period

Percentage-of-receivables basis

Bad Debt Expense

Percentage-of-sales basis

Cash (net) realizable value

Promissory note

Direct write-off method

Receivables

Dishonored note

Trade receivables

Instructions

For each item below, enter in the blank the term that is described.

  1. Amounts due from individuals and other companies.
  2. Amounts owed by customers on account.
  3. Claims for which formal instruments of credit are issued as proof of the debt.
  4. Various forms of nontrade receivables, such as interest receivable and income taxes refundable.
  5. The analysis of customer balances by the length of time they have been unpaid.
  6. Management establishes a percentage relationship between the expected losses from uncollectible accounts and the amount of receivables.
  7. Management establishes a percentage relationship between expected losses from uncollectible accounts and the amount of credit sales.
  8. The net amount expected to be received in cash.
  9. A written promise to pay a specified amount of money on demand or at a definite time.
  10. The party in a promissory note who is making the promise to pay.
  11. The party to whom payment of a promissory note to be made.
  12. A note that is not paid in full at maturity.
  13. A finance company or bank that buys receivables from businesses and then collects the payments directly from the customers.
  14. Notes and accounts receivable that result from sales transactions.
  15. A measure of the liquidity of accounts receivables, computed by dividing net credit sales by average net accounts receivables.
  16. The average amount of time that a receivable is outstanding, calculated by dividing 365 days by the accounts receivable turnover ratio.
  17. An expense account used to record the cost of uncollectible receivables.
  18. A method of accounting for bad debts that involves expensing accounts at the time they are determined to be uncollectible.
  19. A method of accounting for bad debts that involves estimating uncollectible accounts at the end of each period.
  20. An account that shows the estimated amount of claims on customers that the company expects will become uncollectible in the future.

the journal entry to record bad debt expense for the period and to adjust the allowa 610310

The following data are available for 2014:

Sales, cash

$200,000

Sales, credit

500,000

Accounts Receivable, January 1

80,000

Accounts Receivable, December 31

72,000

Allowance for Doubtful Accounts, January 1

4,000

Accounts written off during 2014

4,600

The journal entry to record bad debt expense for the period and to adjust the allowance account is to be based on an estimate of 1% of credit sales. The entry to record the uncollectible accounts expense for 2014 would include a debit to the Bad Debt Expense account for:

  1. $7,200.
  2. $5,600.
  3. $4,400.
  4. $5,000.

a note receivable with a face value of 10 000 was received from a customer in connec 610316

A note receivable with a face value of $10,000 was received from a customer in connection with a sale of merchandise on October 1, 2014. The note has a stated interest rate of 12% and the principal and interest are both due on October 1, 2015. An appropriate adjusting entry was made on December 31, 2014, the end of the annual accounting period. No reversing entry was recorded on January 1, 2015. The journal entry to record the collection of the principal plus interest on October 1, 2015 will involve a credit to:

  1. Notes Receivable for $11,200.
  2. Interest Revenue for $1,200.
  3. Interest Revenue for $900.
  4. Cash for $11,200.

this exercise will help you identify which expenditures should be capitalized debite 610319

This exercise will help you identify which expenditures should be capitalized (debited to a balance sheet account) and which should be expensed (charged to an income statement account).

Instructions

Assume all amounts are material (significant). For each of the following independent items, indicate by use of the appropriate letter if it should be:

C for Capitalized or E for Expensed

1. Invoice price of drill press.

2. Sales tax on computer.

3. Costs of permanent partitions constructed in office building.

4. Installation charges for new conveyer system.

5. Costs of trees and shrubs planted in front of office building.

6. Cost of surveying new land site to determine property boundaries.

7. Costs of major overhaul of delivery truck which extends the life of the truck.

8. Costs of constructing new counters for show room.

9. Costs of powders, soaps, and wax for office floors.

10. Cost of janitorial services for office and show room.

11. Costs of carpets in a new office building.

12. Costs of annual termite inspection of warehouse.

13. Insurance charged for new equipment while in transit.

14. Property taxes on land used for parking lot.

15. Cost of a fan installed to help cool an old factory machine.

16. Cost of exterminator”s services.

17. Costs of major redecorating of executive”s offices.

18. Cost of fertilizers for shrubs and trees.

19. Cost of labor services for self-constructed machine.

20. Costs of materials used and labor services expended during trial runs of new machine.

this exercise will give you practice in identifying capital expenditures and revenue 610320

This exercise will give you practice in identifying capital expenditures and revenue expenditures . Sellen Supply Company, a newly formed corporation, incurred the following expenditures related to Land, Buildings, and Equipment.

Abstract company”s fee for title search

$520

Architect”s fees

“I 0,200

Cash paid for land and dilapidated building thereon

100.000

Removal of old building

$20,000

Less salvage

5.500

14,500

Surveying before construction

370

Excavation before construction for basement

19,000

Machinery purchased

55,000

Freight on machinery purchased

1,340

Jew building constructed

500,000

Assessment by city for drainage project

1,600

Installation of machinery

2.000

Trees, shrubs, and other landscaping after completion of building (permanent in nature)

5.400

Instructions

(a) Identify the amounts that should be debited to Land.

(b) Identify the amounts that should be debited to Buildings.

(c) Identify the amounts that should be debited to Equipment.

this exercise will allow you to practice using various depreciation methods and it w 610321

This exercise will allow you to practice using various depreciation methods and it will also give you the opportunity to compare the results of using one method to the results of using another method. On January 1, 2014, Kinka Company, a manufacturer, acquires for $230,000 a piece of new equipment. The new equipment has a useful life of five years and the salvage value is estimated to be $30,000. Kinka estimates that the new equipment can produce a total of 80,000 units. Kinka expects it to produce 20,000 units in its first year, 18,000 units in its second year, 32,000 units in its third year, and 5,000 units each in its last two years.

The following depreciation methods are being considered:

Straight-line

Declining-balance using double the straight-line rate

Units-of-activity

Instructions

  1. Prepare depreciation schedules for the equipment using the following methods:

(1) straight-line

(2) double-declining-balance

(3) units-of-activity

Each schedule should display the annual depreciation expense for each year of service life and the resulting amounts of accumulated depreciation and book value. Round to the nearest dollar.

  1. Identify the depreciation method which would result in the maximization of profits for financial reporting for the three-year period ending December 31, 2016. Explain why.
  2. Identify the depreciation method which would result in the highest book value at the end of the third year of service life.
  3. Identify the depreciation method which would result in the lowest book value at the end of the third year of service life.

this exercise will provide an illustration of the computations for depreciation of p 610322

This exercise will provide an illustration of the computations for depreciation of partial periods using two common methods. Scanlan Company purchased a new plant asset on April 1, 2014, at a cost of $690,000. It was estimated to have a service life of 20 years and a salvage value of $60,000. Scanlan”s accounting period is the calendar year.

Instructions

  1. Compute the amount of depreciation for this asset for 2014 and 2015 using the straight-line method.
  2. Compute the amount of depreciation for this asset for 2014 and 2015 using the double-declining-balance method.
  3. Briefly define depreciation as the term is used in accounting.

this exercise will provide you with an illustration of how to handle a change in the 610323

This exercise will provide you with an illustration of how to handle a change in the estimated service life and salvage value of a plant asset due to an expenditure subsequent to acquisition. The Royal Company purchased a machine at the very end of 2001 for $210,000. The machine was being depreciated using the straight-line method over an estimated life of 20 years, with a $30,000 salvage value. At the beginning of 2012, the company paid $50,000 to overhaul the machine. As a result of this improvement, the company estimated that the useful life of the machine would be extended an additional 5 years, and the salvage value would be reduced to $20,000.

Instructions

Compute the depreciation charge for 2012.

explain the manner of reporting each item on a multiple step income statement 610324

This exercise will help you to understand how the sale of a plant asset compares with the sale of inventory. Houston Merchandising Company sold two items. The following facts pertain:

Item 1

Item 2

Sales price

$10,000

$10,000

Cost/book value

5,200

5,200

Sales commission

400

400

Item 1 is an inventory item. Item 2 is a plant asset.

Instructions

Explain the manner of reporting each item on a multiple-step income statement.

assume tom benyon enterprises purchases the business for 240 000 cash explain how to 610326

This exercise illustrates the steps in estimating the value of goodwill. Mr. Judski is contemplating the sale of his business, Classic Vettes. The following data are available.

Book value of tangible & identifiable intangible assets less liabilities

$135,000

Fair market value of tangible & identifiable intangible assets less liabilities

200,000

Estimated fair market value of the business as a whole

240,000

Instructions

  1. Compute the estimated value of goodwill.
  2. Assume Tom Benyon Enterprises purchases the business for $240,000 cash. Explain how Tom Benyon Enterprises should account for the goodwill at the purchase date and in the future as well as the reasons why.

prepare the journal entries to record the exchange on the books of soon yoon co assu 610327

This exercise will allow you to practice recording the exchange of plant assets when the exchange has commercial substance. Soon Yoon Company exchanged equipment used in its manufacturing operations plus $5,000 in cash for delivery equipment used in the operations of Peggy Gunshanan Company. The exchange is determined to have commercial substance because the timing and the amount of the cash flows arising from the delivery equipment will likely differ significantly from the cash flows arising from the manufacturing equipment. The following information pertains to the exchange.

Soon Yoon Co.

Peaav Gunshanan Co.

Equipment (cost)

$28,000

$28,000

Accumulated depreciation

22,000

10,000

Fair market value of equipment

10,500

15,500

Cash given up

5,000

Instructions

  1. Prepare the journal entries to record the exchange on the books of Soon Yoon Co.
  2. Prepare the journal entries to record the exchange on the books of Soon Yoon Co. assuming the fair value of Soon Yoon Co.”s old asset is $5,500 (rather than $10,500) and the fair value of Peggy Gunshanan”s old equipment is $10,500 (rather than $15,500). (Assume the rest of the facts are unchanged.)

the jupiter company purchased a parcel of land to be used as the site of a new offic 610329

The Jupiter Company purchased a parcel of land to be used as the site of a new office complex. The following data pertain to the purchase of the land and the beginning of construction for the new building:

Purchase price of land

$200,000

Attorney”s fees for land transaction

1,000

Title insurance cost

2,000

Survey fees to determine the boundaries of the lot

800

Excavation costs for the building”s foundation

8,000

Costs of clearing and grading the land

1,400

The total acquisition cost of the land is:

  1. $213,200.
  2. $205,200.
  3. $203,800.
  4. $202,400.
  5. $200,000.

the venus company hired an architect to design plans and a construction firm to buil 610330

The Venus Company hired an architect to design plans and a construction firm to build a new office building on a parcel of land it owns. The following data relates to the building:

Price paid to the construction firm

$320,000

Architect fees

18,000

Permit fees

1,200

Property taxes during the construction period

800

Insurance premium for first year of operations

3.000

Property taxes during the first year of operations

6.000

The total acquisition cost of the new building is:

  1. $349,000.
  2. $340,000.
  3. $338,000.
  4. $320,000.

the patty company purchased a piece of office equipment to be used in operations the 610331

The Patty Company purchased a piece of office equipment to be used in operations. The following expenditures and other data relate to the equipment:

Invoice price excluding sales tax

$12,000

Sales tax

600

Delivery charges

200

Installation costs

300

Cost of a special platform

400

Cost of supplies used in testing

80

Insurance premium for first year of use

60

The total acquisition cost of this piece of equipment is:

  1. $13,640.
  2. $13,580.
  3. $13,100.
  4. $12,700.

a machine was purchased at the beginning of 2012 for 68 000 at the time of its purch 610338

A machine was purchased at the beginning of 2012 for $68,000. At the time of its purchase, the machine was estimated to have a useful life of six years and a salvage value of $8,000. The machine was depreciated using the straight-line method of depreciation through 2014. At the beginning of 2015, the estimate of useful life was revised to a total life of eight years and the expected salvage value was changed to $5,000. The amount to be recorded for depreciation for year 2015, reflecting these changes in estimates, is:

  1. $7,875.
  2. $7,600.
  3. $6,600.
  4. $4,125.

calculate the breakeven point for the two plants and for the company as whole assume 610233

There are two plants of a given company, A and B. Both the plants produce same articles. The selling price of the articles is INR 650 per unit. Look at the data, given in

Table 5.16 The available data

Plant A

Plant B

Capacity units

10,000

15,000

Variable cost per unit

400

540

Fixed expenses

11,00,000

12,30,000

Calculate the breakeven point for the two plants and for the company as whole. Assume a) a constant sales mix and b) variable sales mix.

a company furnishes the following information calculate its breakeven sales and revi 610235

A company furnishes the following information. Calculate its breakeven sales and revised breakeven sales.

  1. The PV ratio is 40%.
  2. The selling price is intended to be enhanced by 20%.
  3. The firm”s variable cost has increased by 10%.
  4. The fixed costs of the firm are also enhanced from INR 8,00,000 to INR 12,00,000.
  5. Problem 9
  6. A company Veta Zest Ltd intends to reduce the selling price of its product by 20%. This step is expected to increase the firm”s sales. If its fixed costs and variable costs remain same, then advice the management whether it should take up the price reduction step or not.
  7. The total sale of the business is 1,20,000 units at INR 10 each. The variable cost per unit is INR 6 while total fixed costs come out to be INR 1,50,000.

which will reduce the expected loss assume that sale of only one product can be incr 610238

The budgeted results of ABC Ltd are as shown in

Table 5.20 Budget results of ABC Ltd

Sales

Amount (in INR million)

Variable cost as percentage of sales volume

A

1.1

70%

B

0.80

40%

C

1.4

75%

D

0.60

90%

E

0.90

75%

4.8

70%

If the fixed costs are INR 12,00,000 then calculate the amount of loss that is expected. Do you see any change in the sales volume of each product, which will reduce the expected loss? Assume that sale of only one product can be increased at a time.

how many burgers must anoushka sell to 610241

Anoushka, a young MBA student, has just passed out from her college. Her batch mates have decided to join the corporate world, through their campus job placement whereas she has decided to be an entrepreneur. Anoushka has a business plan to open a fast food outlet in the heart of the city she lives in. Initially, the outlet is supposed to sell only burgers. Later on, she thinks of adding pizzas and desserts to the menu. The cost of cooking each burger comes to be INR 5. The service cost per burger comes to be INR 2. The cost of additional serving per burger is INR 1. The burgers are cooked on demand; hence, there will be no inventory storage costs. The selling price per burger is initially fixed at INR 12. Instead of buying the place, Anoushka decides to rent a place for of the fast food outlet. The rent will be INR 5,000 per month. Anoushka applies for the loan for buying the kitchenware, furniture and other decorative items. Her application is under the category of women entrepreneurial development loan and gets easily passed by a public sector bank. She is supposed to pay INR 40,000 per annum as fixed interest payment towards the loan.

The variable cost of one burger comes out to be:

Cost of cooking one burger

INR 5.00

Service cost per burger

INR 2.00

Additional serving per burger

INR 1.00

Variable cost per burger

INR 8.00

The contribution margin per burger is:

Selling price

INR 12.00

Variable cost

INR 8.00

Contribution margin per burger

INR 4.00

The total fixed cost per annum for burger:

Rent

INR 60,000

Interest

INR 40,000

Total fixed costs per year

INR 100,000

  1. How many burgers should Anoushka be able to sell at least so that the outlet breaks even?
  2. Anoushka wants to set her target beforehand. Help her find out the number of burgers she should sell to be able to earn a net income of (a) INR 20,000, (b) INR 5,00,000, (c) INR 10,00,000.
  3. After starting the business for one year, Anoushka realizes that her service cost per burger can be reduced to INR 1 by hiring some low cost employees.

The variable cost of one burger after one year comes out to be:

Cost of cooking one burger

INR 5.00

Service cost per burger

INR 1.00

Additional serving per burger

INR 1.00

Variable cost per burger

INR 7.00

The contribution margin per burger is:

Selling price

INR 12.00

Variable cost

INR 7.00

Contribution margin per burger

INR 5.00

Now, how many burgers must Anoushka sell to:

  1. break even?
  2. earn an annual profit of INR 2,00,000?
  3. earn an annual profit of INR 5,00,000?
  4. earn an annual profit of INR 10,00,000?
  5. After one year, Anoushka is able to find another place in the vicinity of her previous place. Now this time she gets it for a lower rate, i.e., INR 3,500 per month. All other costs and the selling price are expected to remain the same as those in the original data. Now what is her breakeven level and target profit sales?

Rent

INR 42,000

Interest

INR 40,000

Total fixed costs per year

INR 82,000

  1. How many burgers must Anoushka sell to:
    1. break even?
    2. earn an annual profit of INR 2,00,000?
    3. earn an annual profit of INR 5,00,000?
    4. earn an annual profit of INR 10,00,000?
  2. Suppose after a few years, Anoushka decides to increase the selling price of her burgers by one rupee, i.e., now the customer will pay INR 13 for each. She is confident that customers will pay the increased amount. All costs remain the same as given in the original data.

How many burgers must Anoushka sell to:

  1. break even?
  2. earn an annual profit of INR 2,00,000?
  3. earn an annual profit of INR 5,00,000?
  4. earn an annual profit of INR 10,00,000?

this exercise will review how to determine 1 the owner of goods in transit and 2 the 610251

This exercise will review how to determine (1) the owner of goods in transit and (2) the owner of goods on consignment at a balance sheet date. As an auditor for Ryan”s Art Company, you discover the following facts when auditing the client”s inventory balance as of December 31, 2014.

  1. Ryan”s Art received goods on January 2, 2015. The goods had been shipped FOB shipping point on December 27, by Wells Company.
  2. Ryan”s Art received goods on January 4, 2015. The goods had been shipped FOB destination on December 28 by Nanula Company.
  3. Ryan”s Art sold goods to O”Toole Company on December 29, 2014. The goods were picked up by the common carrier on that same date and shipped FOB shipping point. They were expected to arrive at the buyer”s business as early as January 3, 2015.
  4. Ryan”s Art sold goods to Matheson Company on December 31, 2014. The goods were picked up by the common carrier on that same date and shipped FOB destination. They were expected to arrive at the buyer”s store as early as January 2, 2015.
  5. Ryan”s Art is the consignor for a collection of prints. The prints are hanging in the showroom of Decorator”s Den.
  6. Ryan”s Art is the consignee for some goods on consignment from European Collectibles.

Instructions

For each situation above, indicate whether or not the goods being described should be Included In or Excluded From the amount to be reported for inventory on the balance sheet for Ryan”s Art at December 31, 2014. Also, briefly explain your reason for each answer.

this exercise will test your skill in analyzing inventory errors and determining the 610255

This exercise will test your skill in analyzing inventory errors and determining their effects on the financial statements.

Four separate situations are described below:

  1. An error in the physical count on December 31, 20XA caused the inventory to be overstated.
  2. An error in the physical count on December 31, 20XA caused the inventory to be understated.
  3. An error in the physical count on December 31, 20XB caused the inventory to be overstated.
  4. An error in the physical count on December 31, 20XB caused the inventory to be understated.

Instructions

For each of the independent situations, explain the effect of each error by filling in the matrix with the proper code letters.

compute the corrected net income figure for each of the four years for the red bliss 610256

This exercise will enable you to practice identifying the effects of inventory errors on the financial statements.

The net income per books was determined without knowledge of the errors indicated.

Year

Net Income
Per Books

Error in Ending Inventory

2011

$100.000

Overstated

$6.000

2012

104.000

Overstated

14.000

2013

108,000

Understated

22,000

2014

112.000

No error

Total

$424,000

Instructions

Compute the corrected net income figure for each of the four years for the Red Bliss Company after taking into account the inventory errors.

this exercise will allow you to practice performing calculations to determine invent 610257

This exercise will allow you to practice performing calculations to determine inventory cost under each of three cost flow methods, using both the periodic and the perpetual systems. The Griggs Company is a multi-product firm. Presented below is information concerning one of their products, Infusion-39.

Date

Transaction

Quantity

Cost

1/1

Beginning inventory

1,000

$12

214

Purchase

2,000

18

2/20

Sale

2,500

4/2

Purchase

3,000

22

11/4

Sale

2,000

Instructions

Compute the cost of the ending inventory, assuming Griggs uses:

(a) Periodic system, FIFO cost method.

(b) Perpetual system, FIFO cost method.

(c) Periodic system, LIFO cost method.

(d) Perpetual system, LIFO cost method.

(e) Periodic system, average cost method.

(f) Perpetual system, moving-average cost method.

this exercise reviews the relationships and computations involved with methods of es 610258

This exercise reviews the relationships and computations involved with methods of estimating inventory.

Information relating to five different situations is as follows:

1.

Net sales

$132,000

 

 

Gross profit

52,800

Gross profit rate

 

 

 

2.

Net sales

$80,000

Cost of goods sold

52,000

Net income

12,000

Gross profit rate

 

 

 

3.

Cost of goods available for sale

$74,000

Estimated cost of goods sold

60.000

Estimated ending inventory at cost

 

 

 

4.

Beginning inventory at cost

$20,000

Purchases at cost

112,000

Purchases returns at cost

4,000

Net sales

200,000

Gross profit rate

45%

Estimated cost of goods sold

 

Estimated ending inventory at cost

 

5.

Cost of goods available for sale

$52,000

selling prices of goods for sale

18,000

Cost to retail ratio

 

6.

Beginning inventory at cost

$12,000

beginning inventory at retail

2U,UUU

Purchases at cost

62,100

Purchases at retail

94,000

Ending inventory at retail

17,200

Operating expenses

38,000

Cost to retail ratio

 

Estimated ending inventory at cost

 

Instructions

Fill in the missing figure(s) for each of the independent situations above.

compute an estimate of the cost of ending inventory by using the retail inventory me 610260

This exercise illustrates the use of the retail inventory method to estimate ending inventory.

The records of Petite Clothiers report the following figures for the month of September:

Sales

$79,000

Sales returns

1,000

Freight on purchases

2,400

Purchases (at cost)

48,000

Purchases (at sales price)

92,000

Purchase returns (at cost)

2,000

Purchase returns (at sales price)

3,000

Beginning inventory (at cost)

30,000

Beginning inventory (at sales price)

51,000

Instructions

Compute an estimate of the cost of ending inventory by using the retail inventory method.

at december 31 2014 a physical count of merchandise inventory belonging to klintwort 610262

At December 31, 2014, a physical count of merchandise inventory belonging to Klintworth Corp. showed $500,000 to be on hand. The $500,000 was calculated before any potential necessary adjustments related to the following:

Excluded from the $500,000 was $80,000 of goods shipped FOB shipping point by a vendor to Klintworth on December 30, 2014 and received on January 3, 2015.

Excluded from the $500,000 was $72,000 of goods shipped FOB destination to Klintworth on December 30, 2014 and received on January 3, 2015.

Excluded from the $500,000 was $95,000 of goods shipped FOB destination by Klintworth to a customer on December 28, 2014. The customer received the goods on January 4, 2015.

The correct amount to report for inventory on Klintworth”s balance sheet at December 31, 2014 is:

  1. $572,000.
  2. $595,000.
  3. $675,000.
  4. $747,000.

the following facts pertain to the cost of one product carried in the merchandise in 610265

The following facts pertain to the cost of one product carried in the merchandise inventory of the Herara Store:

Inventory on hand, January 1

200 units @

$20

=

$4.000

Purchase March 18

600 units a

$24

=

14.400

Purchase July 20

800 units 0

$26

=

20.800

Purchase, October 31

400 units @

$30

=

12.000

A physical count of the inventory on December 31 reveals that 500 units are on hand. If the FIFO cost method is used, the inventory should be reported on the balance sheet at:

  1. $40,000.
  2. $36,600.
  3. $14,600.
  4. $11,200.

the cost to retail percentage ratio to be used in calculating an estimate of ending 610275

The following data relate to the merchandise inventory of the Hofma Company:

Beginning inventory at cost

$13,800

Beginning inventory at selling price

20,000

Purchases at cost

31,000

Purchases at selling price

50,000

The cost to retail percentage (ratio) to be used in calculating an estimate of ending inventory by use of the retail method is:

  1. 156%.
  2. 145%.
  3. 69%.
  4. 64%.

gross profit is normally 25 of sales what is the estimated amount of inventory on ha 610276

The following information pertains to the Godfrey Company for the six months ended June 30 of the current year:

Merchandise inventory, January 1

$ 700,000

Purchases

5,000,000

Freight-in

400,000

Net sales

6,000,000

Gross profit is normally 25% of sales. What is the estimated amount of inventory on hand at June 30?

  1. $100,000.
  2. $1,600,000.
  3. $2,100,000.
  4. $4,600,000.

the broadway cinema company operates six movie screens in a local mall although the 610279

This exercise will illustrate the need for certain internal control procedures. Four independent situations appear below:

Situation 1: The Broadway Cinema Company operates six movie screens in a local mall. Although the cashier gives a ticket to each customer upon payment of the movie price, no one collects the ticket as the customer enters the theater.

Situation 2: Home Gadgets sells a multitude of housewares. Although there is a register at the check out counter, it has been situated so that the customer cannot see the display and thus has no evidence of what the clerk rings up. (No scanning equipment is used.)

Receipts are allowed to remain on the cash register in a continuous strip unless a customer requests that their receipt be torn from the register.

Situation 3: Better Bath Wear Company hires people based solely on an interview with the store manager.

Situation 4: The individual who is responsible for writing the checks to pay bills for Seafin Seafoods is also the employee who prepares the monthly bank reconciliation.

Instructions

For each situation, identify the internal control principle being violated and briefly describe the risk inherent in the existing circumstances.

the process of comparing the bank s balance of an account with the company s recorde 610282

This exercise will quiz you about terminology used in this chapter.

A list of accounting terms with which you should be familiar appears below:

Bank reconciliation

Fraud triangle

Bank service charge

Internal auditors

Bank statement

Internal control

Bonding

NSF check

Cash

Outstanding checks

Cash equivalents

Petty cash fund

Check

Restricted cash

Compensating balances

Sarbanes-Oxley Act

Deposits in transit

Voucher

Electronic funds transfer (EFT)

Voucher system

Fraud

Instructions

For each item below, enter in the blank the term that is described.

  1. Resources that consist of coins, currency, checks, money orders, and money on hand or on deposit in a bank or similar depository.
  2. Short-term, highly liquid investments that can be converted to a specific amount of cash.
  3. A cash fund used to pay relatively small amounts.
  4. All of the related methods and measures adopted within an organization to safeguard its assets and enhance the accuracy and reliability of its accounting records.
  5. A fee charged by a bank for the use of its services.
  6. A monthly statement from the bank that shows the depositor”s bank transactions and balances.
  7. A written order signed by a bank depositor directing the bank to pay a specified sum of money to a designated recipient.
  8. Minimum cash balances required by a bank in support of bank loans.
  9. Checks issued and recorded by a company not yet paid by the bank.
  10. Deposits recorded by the depositor but not yet recorded by the bank.
  11. A check that is not paid by a bank because of insufficient funds in a customer”s bank account.
  12. A disbursement system that uses wire, telephone, telegraph, or computer to transfer funds from one location to another.
  13. Company employees who continually evaluate the effectiveness of the company”s internal control system.
  14. An extensive network of approvals by authorized individuals acting independently to ensure that all disbursements by check are proper.
  15. An authorization form prepared for each payment in a voucher system.
  16. Obtaining insurance protection against misappropriation of assets by employees.
  17. The process of comparing the bank”s balance of an account with the company”s recorded cash balance and explaining any differences to make them agree.
  18. Cash that must be used for a special purpose.
  19. Regulations passed by Congress to try to reduce unethical corporate behavior.
  20. A dishonest act by an employee that results in personal benefit to the employee at a cost to the employer.
  21. The three factors that contribute to fraudulent activity by employees: opportunity, financial pressure, and rationalization.

the journal entry to record the replenishment of a petty cash fund that was establis 610287

The journal entry to record the replenishment of a petty cash fund that was established at $200 and is replenished at a date when petty cash vouchers in the fund amount to $172 and coins and currency in the fund amount to $30 will contain:

  1. debits to various expense accounts, a debit to Cash Over and Short, and a credit to Cash.
  2. debits to various expense accounts, a credit to Cash Over and Short, and a credit to Cash.
  3. a debit to Petty Cash, a credit to Cash Over and Short, and a credit to Cash.
  4. a debit to Cash and a credit to Petty Cash.

in honeybee s balance sheet at december 31 2014 cash should be reported as 610292

The following information pertains to Honeybee Co. at December 31, 2014

Bank statement balance

$40,000

Checkbook balance

56,400

Deposits in transit

20,000

Outstanding checks

4,000

Bank service charges for December

400

In Honeybee”s balance sheet at December 31, 2014 cash should be reported as:

  1. $36,000.
  2. $40,000.
  3. $56,000.
  4. $60,000.

determine the best production plan assuming that triproduct limited wishes to maximi 610126

Limiting factor analysis

Triproduct Limited makes and sells three types of electronic security systems for which the following information is available.

Standard cost and selling prices per unit

Product

Day

Night

Omni

scan

scan

scan

(£)

(£)

(£)

Materials

70

110

155

Manufacturing labour

40

55

70

Installation labour

24

32

44

Variable overheads

16

20

28

Selling price

250

320

460

Fixed costs for the period are £450 000 and the installation labour, which is highly skilled, is available for 25 000 hours only in a period and is paid £8 per hour.

Both manufacturing and installation labour are variable costs.

The maximum demand for the products is:

Day scan

Night scan

Omni scan

2000 units

3000 units

1800 units

Requirements:

(a) Calculate the shortfall (if any) in hours of installation labour.

(b) Determine the best production plan, assuming that Triproduct Limited wishes to maximise profit.

(c) Calculate the maximum profit that could be achieved from the plan in part (b) above.

(d) Having carried out an investigation of the availability of installation labour, the firm thinks that by offering £12 per hour, additional installation labour would become available and thus overcome the labour shortage.

Requirement:

Based on the results obtained above, advise the firm whether or not to implement this proposal.

you work as a trainee for a small management consultancy which has been asked to adv 610128

Price/output and key factor decisions

You work as a trainee for a small management consultancy which has been asked to advise a company, Rane Limited, which manufactures and sells a ‘single product. Rane is currently operating at full capacity producing and selling 25 000 units of its product each year. The cost and selling price structure for this level of activity is as follows:

At 25 000

units output

(£ per

(£ per

unit)

unit)

Production costs

Direct material

14

Direct labour

13

Variable production overhead

4

Fixed production overhead

8

Total production cost

39

Selling and distribution overhead:

Sales commission — 10% of sales value

6

Fixed

3

9

Administration overhead:

Fixed

2

Total cost

50

Mark up — 20%

10

Selling price

60

A new managing director has recently joined the company and he has engaged your organization to advise on his company’s selling price policy. The sales price of £60 has been derived as above from a cost-plus pricing policy. The price was viewed as satisfactory because the resulting demand enabled full capacity operation.

You have been asked to investigate the. effect on costs and profit of an increase in the selling price. The marketing department has provided you with the following estimates of sales volumes which could be achieved at the three—alternative sales prices under consideration.

Selling price per unit

£70

£80

£90

Annual sales volume (units)

20000

16000

11000

You have spent some time estimating the effect that changes in output volume will have on cost behaviour patterns and you have now collected the following information.

Direct material: The loss of bulk discounts means that the direct material cost per unit will increase by 15% for all units produced in the year if activity reduces below 15 000 units per annum.

Direct labour: Savings in bonus payments will reduce labour costs by 10% for all units produced in the year if activity reduces below 20 000 units per annum.

Sales commission: This would continue to be paid at the rate of 10% of sales price.

Fixed production overhead: If annual output volume was below 20 000 units, then a machine rental cost of £10 000 per annum could be saved. This will be the only change in the total expenditure on fixed production overhead. Fixed selling overhead: A reduction in the part-time sales force would result in a £5000 per annum saving if annual sales volume falls below 24 000 units. This will be the only change in the total expenditure on fixed selling and distribution overhead.

Variable production overhead: There would be no change in the unit cost for variable production overhead.

Administration overhead: The total expenditure on administration overhead would remain unaltered within this range of activity.

Stocks: Rane’s product is highly perishable, therefore no stocks are held.

Task 1

(a) Calculate the annual profit which is earned with the current selling price of £60 per unit.

(b) Prepare a schedule to show the annual profit which would be earned with each of the three alternative selling prices.

Task 2

Prepare a brief memorandum to your boss, Chris Jones. The memorandum should cover the following points:

(a) Your recommendation as to the selling price which should be charged to maximize Rane limited’s annual profits.

(b) Two non-financial factors which the management of Rane Limited should consider before planning to operate below full capacity.

Another of your consultancy’s clients is a manufacturing company, Shortage Limited, which is experiencing problems in obtaining supplies of a major component. The component is used in all of its four products and there is a labour dispute at the supplier’s factory, which is restricting the component’s availability.

Supplies will be restricted to 22 400 components for the next period and the company wishes to ensure that the best use is made of the available components. This is the only component used in the four products, and there are no alternatives and no other suppliers.

The components cost £2 each and are used in varying amounts in each of the four products.

Shortage Limited’s fixed costs amount to £8000 per period. No stocks are held of finished goods or work in progress.

The following information is available concerning the products.

Maximum

Product A

Product B

Product C

Product D

demand

4000 units

2500 units

3600 units

2750 units

per period

(5 per unit)

(5 per unit)

(5 per unit)

(5 per unit)

Selling price

14

12

16

17

Component costs

4

2

6

8

Other variable costs

7

9

6

4

Task 3

(a) Prepare a recommended production schedule for next period which will maximize Shortage Limited’s profit.

(b) Calculate the profit that will be earned in the next period if your recommended production schedule is followed.

advise hilton ltd of its best course of action regarding department k presenting any 610130

Deleting a segment

The original budget for the K department of Hilton Ltd for the forthcoming year was as follows:

Budgeted sales and production — 30 000 units

Per

Total

unit of

for

output

30 000

units

(£)

(£000)

Sales revenue

10.0

300

Manufacturing cost

Material A (1 litre per unit)

2.0

60

Material B (1 kg per unit)

1.5

45

Production labour

2.0

60

Variable overhead

1.0

30

Fixed manufacturing overhead

2.0

60

8.5

255

Non-manufacturing costs

1.0

30

Total costs

9.5

285

Budgeted net profit for year

0.5

15

As part of Hilton’s long-term strategic plan the K department was due to be closed at the end of the forthcoming year. However, rumours of the closure have resulted in the majority of K’s labour force leaving the firm and this has forced the abandonment of the original budget for the department.

The managing director has suggested that the (vii) department could be closed down immediately or, by employing contract labour, could be operated to produce 10 000 or 20 000 units in the year. With the exception of the foreman (see Note (v)), the few remaining members of K’s production labour force would then be redeployed within the firm.

The following further information is available:

(i) Each hour of contract labour will cost £3.00 and will produce one unit of the product. Contract labour would have to be trained at a fixed cost of £20 000.

(ii) There are 30 000 litres of material A in stock. This material has no other use and any of it not used in department K will have to be disposed of. Costs of disposal will be £2000 plus £0.50 per litre disposed of.

(iii) There are 15 000 kg of material B in stock. If the material is not used in department K then up to 10 000 kg could be used in another department to substitute for an equivalent weight of a material which currently costs £1.8 per kg. Material B originally cost £1.5 per kg and its current market price (buying or selling) is £2.0 per kg. Costs to Hilton of selling any surplus material B will amount to £1.00 per kg sold.

(iv) Variable overheads will be 30% higher, per unit produced, than originally budgeted.

(v) Included in ‘Fixed manufacturing overheads’ are

(a) £6000 salary of the departmental foreman,

(b) £7000 depreciation of the machine used in the department.

If the department is closed immediately the foreman, who will otherwise retire at the end of the year, will be asked to retire early and paid £2000 compensation for agreeing to this.

The only machine used in the department originally cost £70 000 and could currently be sold for £43 000. This sales value will reduce to £40 000 at the end of the year and, if used for any production during the year, will decrease by a further £500 per 1000 units produced.

(vi) All other costs included in ‘Fixed manufacturing overhead’ and all Non-manufacturing costs’ are apportionments of general overheads, none of which will be altered by any decision concerning the K department.

(vii)The sales manager suggests that a sales volume of 10 000 units could be achieved if the unit sales price were £9.00. A sales volume of 20 000 units would be achieved if the sales price per unit were reduced to £8 and an advertising campaign costing £15 000 were undertaken.

Required:

(a) Advise Hilton Ltd of its best course of action regarding department K, presenting any data in tabular form.

(b) Show how the advice given in (a) above is altered if the closure of department K would enable its factory space to be -rented out for one year at a rental of £8000.

Ignore taxation and the time value of money.

overhead expenditure that is fixed in the short term remains constant each month but 610131

The fixed overheads for Euro are £24 000 000 per annum,- and monthly production varies from 400 000 to 1 000 000 hours. The monthly overhead rate for fixed overhead will therefore fluctuate as follows:

Monthly overhead

£2 000 000

£2 000 000

Monthly production

400 000 hours

1 000 000 hours

Monthly overhead rate

£5 per hour

£2 per hour

Overhead expenditure that is fixed in the short term remains constant each month, but monthly production fluctuates because of holiday periods and seasonal variations in demand. Consequently the overhead rate varies from £2 to £5 per hour. It would be unreasonable for a product worked on in one month to be allocated overheads at a rate of £5 per hour and an identical product worked on in another month allocated at a rate of only £2 per hour.

the company has produced the following cost estimates and selling prices required to 610133

The Auckland Company is launching a new product. Sales volume will be dependent on the selling price and customer acceptance but because the product differs substantially from other products within the same product category it has not been possible to obtain any meaningful estimates of price/demand relationships. The best estimate is that demand is likely to range between 100 000 and 200 000 units provided that the selling price is less than £100. Based on this information the company has produced the following cost estimates and selling prices required to generate a target profit contribution of £2 million from the product.

Sales volume (000’s)

100

120

140

160

180

200

Total cost (£000’s)

10 000

10 800

11 200

11 600

12 600

13 000

Required profit contribution (£000’s)

2 000

2 000

2 000

2 000

2 000

2 000

Required sales revenues (£000’s)

12 000

12 800

13 200

13 600

14 600

15 000

Required selling price to achieve

target profit contribution (£)

120.00

106.67

94.29

85.00

81.11

75.00

Unit cost (£)

100.00

90.00

80.00

72.50

70.00

65.00

details of the activities and the cost driver rates relating to those expenses that 610134

The Darwin Company has recently adopted customer profitability analysis. It has undertaken a customer profitability review for the past 12 months. Details of the activities and the cost driver rates relating to those expenses that can be attributed to customers are as follows:

Activity

Cost driver rate

Sales order processing

£300 per sales order

Sales visits

£200 per sales visit

Normal delivery costs

£1 per delivery kilometre travelled

Special (urgent) deliveries

£500 per special delivery

Credit collection costs

10% per annum on average payment time

Details relating to four of the firm’s customers are as follows:

Customer

A

B

Y

Z

Number of sales orders

200

100

50

30

Number of sales visits

20

10

5

5

Kilometres per delivery

300

200

100

50

Number of deliveries

100

50

25

25

Total delivery kilometres

30 000

10 000

2 500

1250

Special (urgent deliveries)

20

5

0

0

Average collection period

90

30

10

10

(days)

Annual sales

£1 million

£1 million

£0.5 million

£2 million

Annual operating profit

£90 000

£120 000

£70 000

£200 000

contribution

calculate the plan to maximize profits for the coming year based on the data and sel 610135

AB p.l.c. makes two products, Alpha and Beta. The company made a £500 000 profit last year and proposes an identical plan for the coming year. The relevant data for last year are summarized in Table 1.

Table 1: Actuals for last year

Product

Product

Alpha

Beta

Actual production and sales (units)

20000

40000

Total costs per unit

£20

£40

Selling prices per unit (25% on cost)

£25

£50

Machining time per unit (hours)

2

1

Potential demand at above selling prices (units)

30000

50000

Fixed costs were £480 000 for the year, absorbed on machining hours which were fully utilized for the production achieved.

A new Managing Director has been appointed and he is somewhat sceptical about the plan being proposed. Furthermore, he thinks that additional machining capacity should be installed to remove any production bottlenecks and wonders whether a more flexible pricing policy should be adopted.

Table 2 summarizes the changes in costs involved for the extra capacity and gives price/demand data, supplied by the Marketing Department, applicable to the conditions expected in the next period.

Table 2:

Costs

Extra machining capacity would increase fixed costs by 10% in total. Variable costs and machining times per unit would remain unchanged.

Product

Product

Price/demand data

Alpha

Beta

Price range (per unit)

£20-30

£45-55

Expected demand (000 units)

45-15

70-30

You are required to

(a) calculate the plan to maximize profits for the coming year based on the data and selling prices in Table 1;

(b) comment on the pricing system for the existing plan used in Table 1.

discuss the merits of full cost pricing as a method of arriving at selling prices 610136

Cost-plus and relevant cost information for pricing decisions

Josun plc manufactures cereal based foods, including various breakfast cereals under private brand labels. In March the company had been approached by Cohin plc, a large national supermarket chain, to tender for the manufacture and supply of a crunchy style breakfast cereal made from oats, nuts, raisins, etc. The tender required Josun to quote prices for a 1.5 kg packet at three different weekly volumes: 50 000, 60 000 and 70 000. Josun plc had, at present, excess capacity on some of its machines and could make a maximum of 80 000 packets of cereal a week.

Josun’s management accountant is asked to prepare a costing for the Cohin tender. The company prepares its tender prices on the basis of full cost plus 15% of cost as a profit margin. The full cost is made up of five elements: raw materials per packet of £0.30p; operating wages £0.12p per packet; manufacturing overheads costed at 200% of operating wages; administration and other corporate overheads at 100% of operating wages; and packaging and transport costing £0.10p per packet. The sales manager has suggested that as an incentive to Cohin, the profit margin be cut on the 60 000 and 70 000 tenders by 2% and 1% to 144% and 14% respectively. The manufacturing and administration overheads are forecast as fixed at £12 500 per week, unless output drops to 50 000 units or below per week, when a saving of £1000 per week can be made. If no contract is undertaken then all the manufacturing and administration overheads will be saved except for £600 per week. If the tender is accepted’ the volume produced and sold will be determined by the sales achieved by Cohin.

A week before the Cohin tender is to be presented for negotiation, Josun – receives an enquiry from Stamford plc, a rival supermarket chain, to produce, weekly, 60 000 packets of a similar type of breakfast cereal of slightly superior quality at a price of £1.20 per 1.5 kg packet, the quality and mix of the cereal constituents being laid down by Stamford. This product will fill a gap in Stamford’s private label range of cereals. The estimated variable costs for this contract. would be: raw materials £0.40p per packet, operating labour £0.15p per packet and packaging and transport £0.12p per packet. None of the 80 000 weekly capacity could be used for another product if either of these contracts were taken up.

You are required to:

(a) compute the three selling prices per packet for the Cohin tender using Josun’s normal pricing method;

(b)advise Josun, giving your financial reasons, on the relative merits of the two contracts;

(c)discuss the merits of full-cost pricing as a method of arriving at selling prices;

(d)make recommendations to Josun as to the method it might use to derive its selling prices in future;

(e) calculate the expected value of each tender given the following information and recommend which potential customer should receive the greater sales effort. It is estimated that there is a 70% chance of Stamford signing the contract for the weekly production of 60 000 packets, while there is a 20% chance of Cohin not accepting the tender. It is also estimated that the probabilities of Cohin achieving weekly sales volumes of 50 000, 60 000 or 70 000 are 0.3, 0.5 and 0.2 respectively. The two sets of negotiations are completely inde-pendent of each other;

(f) provide, with reasons, for each of the two contracts under negotiation, a minimum and a recommended price that Josun could ask for the extra quantity that could be produced under each contract and which would ensure the full utilization of Josun’s weekly capacity of 80 000 packets.

explain the meaning of the 39 principal budget factor 39 and assuming that it is sal 610148

Preparation of functional budgets

D Limited is preparing its annual budgets for the year to 31 December 2001. It manufactures and sells one product, which has a selling price of £150. The marketing director believes that the price can be increased to £160 with effect from 1 July 2001 and that at this price the sales volume for each quarter of 2001 will be as follows:

Sales volume

Quarter 1

40000

Quarter 2

50000

Quarter 3

30000

Quarter 4

45000

Sales for each quarter of 2002 are expected to be 40 000 units.

Each unit of the finished product which is manufactured requires four units of component R and three units of component T, together with a body shell S. These items are purchased from an outside supplier. Currently prices are:

Component R

£8.00 each

Component T

£5.00 each

Shell S

£30.00 each

The components are expected to increase in price by 10% with effect from 1 April 2001; no change is expected in the price of the shell.

Assembly of the shell and components into the finished product requires 6 labour hours: labour is currently paid £5.00 per hour. A 4% increase in wage costs is anticipated to take effect from 1 October 2001.

Variable overhead costs are expected to be £10 per unit for the whole of 2001; fixed production overhead costs are expected to be £240 000 for the year, and are absorbed on a per unit basis. Stocks on 31 December 2000 are expected to be as follows:

Finished units

9000 units

Component R

3000 units

Component T

5500 units

Shell S

500 units

Closing stocks at the end of each quarter are to be as follows:

Finished units

10% of next quarter’s sales

Component R

20% of next quarter’s

production requirements

Component T

15% of next quarter’s

production requirements

Shell S

10% of next quarter’s

production requirements

Requirement:

(a) Prepare the following budgets of D Limited for the year ending 31 December 2001, showing values for each quarter and the year in total:

(i) sales budget (in £s and units)

(ii) production budget (in units)

(iii) material usage budget (in units)

(iv) production cost budget (in £s).

(b) Sales are often considered to be the principal budget factor of an organisation.

Requirement:

Explain the meaning of the ‘principal budget factor’ and, assuming that it is sales, explain how sales may be forecast making appropriate reference to the use of statistical techniques and the use of microcomputers.

company xyz has its brief cash account statement available for the investors looking 610186

Company XYZ has its brief cash account statement available for the investors. Looking at the cash account prepare the company”s cash flow statement. The company has zero cash investment

Table 3.18 Cash account of Company XYZ for the year that ended on March 31, 2010 (INR ‘000)

Balance as on

Payment for diesel

1-4-2009

200

generator sets

10,000

Issue of debenture –

8,000

Purchase of a boiler

5,000

Collection from customers

12,000

Rent paid

1,900

Sale of plant & machinery

1,000

salaries paid

2,000

Taxation

300

Dividend

700

Redemption of bonds

1,000

Balance as on

31.3.2006

300

21,200

21,200

prepare the cash flow statement from the comparative balance sheet of pp enterprises 610188

Prepare the cash flow statement from the comparative balance sheet of PP Enterprises Ltd shown in   Additional Information on PP Enterprises: During the year 2010, a plant costing INR 1,00,000 was sold off for INR 20,000. Accumulated depreciation on this plant was INR 60,000. Loss on sale of plant was charged to profit and loss account. Taxation paid for year 2009 was INR 120,000.

Table 3.22 Comparative balance sheet of PP Enterprises Ltd

Assets

 

2010

 

2009

Assets

2010

2009

Property

 

4,00,00

 

5,00,000

Equity capital at INR20

6,00,000

8,00,000

Plant machinery

8,00,000

 

9,00,000

 

Share premium

20,000

Less: Depreciation

2,80,000

5,20,000

3,00,000

6,00,000

Profit and loss appropriations account

2,00,000

2,00,000

Loan give to other company

 

 

30,000

Profit for the year

 

4,00,000

Equity holding in other company

 

40,000

 

40,000

6% debentures

3,00,000

2,00,000

Inventory

 

2,80,000

 

3,00,000

Profit on debenture redemption

4,000

Debtors

 

2,00,000

3,00,000

6,00,000

Sundry creditors

2,80,000

2,20,000

Bank

 

70,000

 

3,14,000

Taxation provision

1,00,000

2,00,000

 

 

 

 

 

Proposed dividend

30,000

40,000

 

 

15,10,000

 

20,84,000`

 

15,10,000

20,84,000`

a trading firm in northern india wants to prepare a funds flow statement prepare a f 610189

A trading firm in northern India wants to prepare a funds flow statement. Prepare a funds flow statement from the information on the trading firm given in

Table 3.24 Information on the trading firm for 2009 and 2010

Capital and liabilities

2009

2010

Assets

2009

2010

capital

3,20,000

3,40,000

Land and building

2,00,000

2,00,000

Profit & loss Appropriation account

58,000

98,000

Plant

96,000

1,36,000

Creditors

38,000

22,000

Stock

36,000

28,000

Mortgage loan

20,000

Debtors

68,000

78,000

Cash and bank balance

16,000

38,000

4,16,000

`4,80,000

4,16,000

`4,80,000

omega enterprise ltd furnishes information regarding its business activities for the 610192

Omega Enterprise Ltd furnishes information regarding its business activities for the financial year 2010 in Prepare the cash flow statement for the company.

Table 3.29 Cash account of Omega Enterprise Ltd for the year that ended on March 31, 2010 (INR ‘000)

Net profit

1,00,000

Interest paid during the year

44.000

Dividend paid

18,000

Increase in WOI king capital

1,92400

Provision for income tax

14,000

Purchase of fixed assets

40000

Income tax paid

13,600

Investment in long term project

14,000

Loss on sale of assets

280

Investments made in restructuring of the

Book value of assets sold

1.080

company

64000

Depreciation

64.030

Proceeds from long-term borrowings

61,800

Profit on sale of investments

1.000

Proceeds from short-term borrowings

59.600

Carrying amount of investment sold

89000

Opening cash and bank balance

20.000

Interest income on investments

7.000

Closing cash and bank balance

25,520

Interest expense

40000

arihant ltd is a small listed company and it wants to prepare a cash flow statement 610193

Arihant Ltd is a small listed company and it wants to prepare a cash flow statement. Prepare a cash flow statement from the information provided in

Table 3.30 Information on Arihant Ltd

Capital and liabilities

Assets

Capital

4,50,000

4,50,000

Land and building

3,50,000

3,50.000

Profit and loss appropriation

Plant

45,000

45000

account

56,000

72.000

Stock

86,000

86.000

(reclaim

44,000

43,000

Debtors

48,000

68,000

Mortgage loan

40,000

Cash and bank balance

21,000

56,000

5,50,000

6,05,000

5,50000

6.05,000

table 3 30 information on arihant ltd 610194

Tata Motors is the India”s largest automobile company. The company in 2008 acquired the Jaguar Land Rover business from Ford Motor Company for USD 2.3 billion cash. The acquisition was completed by June 2008. At the same time, the company launched the Nano—the world”s most economical car priced at INR 100,000. These initiatives resulted in huge cash outflows from the company. The company intended to raise funds for theses initiatives through loan and equity issues. However, the times turned out to be unfavourable for the company. By 2008, the world economy was under depression and witnessed a massive credit crunch. Fund raising became difficult for the company and by 2009 turned out to be an expensive activity. As the United States, the world”s strongest economy, went into recession, the global economy started feeling the demand crunch. Slow demand and rising cost took a toll on the company”s operating cash flows. Capital expenditure resulted in huge cash outflow from the company. As a result, global rating agencies, S&P and Moody”s, cut the ratings on Tata Motors. They further indicated more cuts in the ratings if the scenario did not improve. The company as on 2009 is on the watchlist of many analysts as the cash flow for the company became a critical factor. The company in February 2009 was banking on bailout package from the government to manage its liquidity crisis. The company is on the spree of spending through long-term investments. At the same time, the operating revenues have suffered setback due to global economic depression. This has put Tata Motors into a tight liquidity position. It will be interesting to watch how Tata Motors manages to generate funds in the troubled times.

Look at the Tata Motors’ cash flow statement for three consecutive years Then, answer the following questions:

  1. How do you assess the cash flow position of the company for the next two years?
  2. Do you think the company will go for financial restructuring in order to streamline its cash position?

Table 3.31 Tata Motors’ cash position for the years 2005–08

(In INR billion)

2007-08

2006-07

2005-06

Cash flow from operating activities

61.745

22.10

(2.21)

Cash flow from investing activities

(57.2186)

(28.05)

(0.0106)

Cash flow from financing activities Net cash flow

(5.6455)

3.03

(8.553)

(0.1455)

(2.914)

(10.7736)

prepare the cash budget for the firm for the month of october 610204

Suppose Revathi Ltd expects only cash receipts in October from collections of receivables. Cash receipts in October are based on anticipated collections of sales that were made in August and September, and anticipated sales for October, and are projected as shown in The beginning cash balance is INR 67,000. Cash disbursements are anticipated as follows:

Material purchases (for September)

INR 2,00,000

Manufacturing labour

2,09,000

Manufacturing variable overhead

1,04,500

Fixed manufacturing overhead

80,000

(excluding non-cash items)

Fixed selling, general and administration

45,000

(excluding non-cash items)

Cash payments for capital acquisitions

1,20,000

(from the capital budget)

Payments of short-term borrowings

70,000

Total disbursements for October

8,28,500

Table 4.11 Cash receipts in Octobe

Month

Sales volume

Unit sales
price

Percentage collected In October

Collections In October On INR)

August

44,000

INR 50

20

4,40,000

September

50,000

INR 50

30

7,50,000

October

40,000

INR 50

50

10,00,000

21,90,000

Prepare the cash budget for the firm for the month of October.

prepare a chart of various companies which have faced serious profitability problems 610207

Increasing competition and inflation have compelled Indian corporations to make more profits by cutting down their operational and production costs. Most of the companies initiated cost cutting measures to enhance their profitability. Take, for example, FMCG giant Hindustan Unilever Ltd (HUL). HUL reported a 20 per cent increase in net profit to INR 3467.3 million in the June quarter of 2001. However, the figure of its net sales was quite sluggish, showing only 1.8 per cent growth at INR 29.3125 billion. Similarly, India”s largest corporate, Reliance Industries Ltd (RIL), posted nearly 14 per cent rise in net profit at INR 6.18 billion for the first quarter that ended in June 2001. But if you notice the sales figure, there was an increase of just 4 per cent at INR 63.9 billion crore from INR 61.36 billion in the previous year. Growth during the quarter came due to increase in capacity utilization at 103 percent, increase in volumes and prices and voluntary retirement schemes. As part of restructuring its textiles business which contributed only one per cent of its total turnover, the company retired 4,600 out of 4,900 employees during 2001 at a cost of INR 770 million. In spite of sales being flat the profits were increased by initiating cost cutting exercises. Aditya Birla Group company Grasim also incurred 89 per cent increase in the net profit at INR 1.12 billion for the June 2001 quarter. Interestingly, the sales revenue showed only a marginal decline at INR 11.84 billion as compared to INR 11.96 billion for the same period previous year. This was achieved when the company reduced its fixed interest cost by 22 per cent at INR 480 million as against INR 610 million in the corresponding previous year. Gujarat Ambuja Cements reported a 32.46 per cent increase in net profit to INR 770 million for the year 2001. However, its sales rose at a lower pace by 23.5 per cent to INR 3.78 billion from INR 3.06 billion in the previous year. For the year that ended June 2001, net profit rose by 6 per cent to INR 1.86 billion while turnover rose by 11 per cent to INR 14.48 billion over the previous year. If we notice that the company was able to improve its sales marginally in 2001 as compared with the previous year, the reduction in costs helped the company to improve its profit to 36.8 per cent from 27.1 per cent in the previous year. Britannia Industries also showed similar results. It posted a20 per cent increase in its net profit at INR 162 million but its net sales increased marginally by 5.81 per cent to INR 3.49 billion. Most of the Indian corporations since 2000–01 have reduced their costs to increase their bottom line. This has helped them maintain the growth in their margins even in the case of stagnant market conditions.

Questions

  1. Identify the various cost cutting measures initiated by the infrastructure and FMCG companies in India.
  2. Prepare a chart of various companies which have faced serious profitability problems and have painted themselves black by sheer cost cutting measures.
  3. Discuss the cost cutting measures in terms of
    1. Supply chain and inventoried costs
    2. Fixed costs
    3. Variable costs

a business in entertainment extravaganza starts a facility where a single ticket is 610219

A business in entertainment, Extravaganza, starts a facility where a single ticket is charged at INR 30. The breakup cost per person is given in . The fixed expenses of the Extravaganza total INR 8,000. Calculate the breakeven price for a single ticket that the business must sell

Table 5.1 Break-up cost of one ticket

Price per ticket

INR 30

Less: Variable expenses

Dinner

INR 7

Favours and program

3

10

Contribution margin per person

INR 20

a given company has selling price per unit of inr 18 and fixed cost as inr 8 while v 610223

A given company has selling price per unit of INR 18 and fixed cost as INR 8 while variable cost of manufacturing one unit comes out to be INR 6. The company gets a special order for an NGO at a reduced rice of INR 11 per unit. Should the company go for it?

Selling price

INR 18

Less: Fixed costs

INR 8

Variable costs

INR 6

INR 14

Net profit per unit

INR 4

mr x offers to buy from national hardware limited 5 000 hardware components for inr 610224

Mr X offers to buy from National Hardware Limited 5,000 hardware components for INR 40. The normal sale price of the product is INR 60 per unit. The company manufactures 75,000 units and its full capacity is 1,00,000 units per annum. The standard cost data is provided in . Determine if the company should sell the product to that customer or not. The company is operating above its breakeven point

Table 5.7 (a) Cost sheet of National Hardware Limited

Direct materials

INR 10

Direct labour

INR 14

Manufacturing overheads

Variable overheads

INR 10

Fixed overheads

INR 6

INR 16

Total standard cost per unit

INR 40

you are required to calculate the break even points for each product and the company 610102

Changes in sales mix

XYZ Ltd produces two products and the following budget applies for 2001:

Product X

Product Y

(£)

(£)

Selling price

6

12

Variable costs

2

4

Contribution margin

4

8

Fixed costs apportioned

£100000

£200000

Units sold

70000

30000

You are required to calculate the break-even points for each product and the company as a whole and comment on your findings.

calculation of break even points based on different sales mix assumptions and a prod 610103

Calculation of break-even points based on different sales mix assumptions and a-product – abandonment decision

M Ltd manufactures three products which have the following revenue and costs (£2er unit).

Product 1

2 _

3

Selling price

2.92

1.35

2.83

Variable costs

1.61

0.72

0.96

Fixed costs:

Product specific

0.49

0.35

0.62

General

0.46

0.46

0.46

Unit fixed costs are based upon the following annual sales and production volumes (thousand units):

Product 1

2

3

98.2

42.1

111.8

Required:

(a) Calculate:

(i) the break-even point sales (to the nearest £ hundred) of M Ltd based on the current product mix

(ii) the number of units of Product 2 (to the nearest hundred) at the break-even point determined in (i) above.

(b) Comment upon the viability of Product 2.

calculation of break even points and limiting factor decision making 610104

Calculation of break-even points and limiting factor decision-making

You are employed as an accounting technician by Smith, Williams and Jones, a small firm of accountants and registered auditors. One of your clients is Winter plc, a large department store. Judith Howarth, the purchasing director for Winter plc, has gained considerable knowledge about bedding and soft furnishings and is considering acquiring her own business.

She has recently written to you requesting a meeting to discuss the possible purchase of Brita Beds Ltd. Brita Beds has one outlet in Mytown, a small town 100 miles from where Judith works. Enclosed with her letter was Brita Beds’ latest profit and loss account. This is reproduced below.

Brita Beds Ltd

Profit and loss account — year to 31 May

Sales

(units)

Model A

1620

336960

Model B

2160

758160

Model C

1620

1010880

Turnover

2106000

Expenses

(£)

Cost of beds

1620 000

Commission

210 600

Transport

216 000

Rates and insurance

8 450

Light heat and power

10 000

Assistants’ salaries

40 000

Manager’s salary

40 000

2145050

Loss for year

39050

Also included in the letter was the following information:

1 Brita Beds sells three types of bed, models A to C inclusive.

2 Selling prices are determined by adding 30% to the cost of beds.

3 Sales assistants receive a commission of 10% of the selling price for each bed sold.

4 The beds are delivered in consignments of 10 beds at a cost of £400 per delivery. This expense is shown as ‘Transport’ in the profit and loss account.

5 All other expenses are annual amounts.

6 The mix of models sold is likely to remain constant irrespective of overall sales volume.

calculate the profit that will be reported per month if your recommendation is imple 610105

In preparation for your meeting with Judith Howarth, you are asked to calculate:

(a) the minimum number of beds to be sold if Brita Beds is to avoid making a loss;

(b) the minimum turnover required if Brita Beds it to avoid making a loss.

At the meeting, Judith Howarth provides you with further information:

1 The purchase price of the business is £300 000.

2 Judith has savings of £300 000 currently earning 5% interest per annum, which she can use to aquire Beta Beds.

3 Her current salary is £36 550.

To reduce costs, Judith suggests that she should take over the role of manager as the current one is about to retire. However, she does not want to take a reduction in income. Judith also tells you that she has been carrying out some market research. The results of this are as follows:

1 The number of households in Mytown is currently 44 880

2 Brita Beds Ltd is the only outlet selling beds in Mytown.

3 According to a recent survey, 10% of house-holds change their beds every 9 years, 60% every 10 years and 30% every 11 years.

4 The survey also suggested that there is an average of 2.1 beds per household.

Task 2

Write a letter to Judith Howarth. Your letter should: (a) identify the profit required to compensate for the loss of salary and interest;

(b) show the number of beds to be sold to achieve that profit;

(c) calculate the likely maximum number of beds that Brita Beds would sell in a year;

(d) use your answers in {a) to (c) to justify whether or not Judith Howarth should purchase the company and become its manager;

(e) give two possible reasons why your estimate of the maximum annual sales volume may prove inaccurate.

On receiving your letter, Judith Howarth decides she would prefer to remain as the purchasing director for Winter plc rather than acquire Brita Beds Ltd. Shortly afterwards, you receive a telephone call from her. Judith explains that Winter plc is redeveloping its premises and that she is concerned about the appropriate sales policy for Winter’s bed department while the redevelopment takes place. Although she has a statement of unit profitability, this had been prepared before the start of the redevelopment and had assumed that there would be in excess of 800 square metres of storage space available to the bed department. Storage space is critical as customers demand immediate delivery and are not prepared to wait until the new stock arrives.

The next day, Judith Howarth sends you a letter containing a copy of the original statement of profitability. This is reproduced below:

Model

Monthly demand

A

B

C

(beds)

35

45

20

(£)

(£)

(£)

Unit selling price

240.00.

672.00

Unit cost per bed

130.00

310.00

550.00

Carriage inwards

20.00

20.00

20.00

Staff costs

21.60

40.32

60.48

Department fixed overheads

20.00

20.00

20.00

General fixed overheads

25.20

25.20

25.20

Unit profit

23.20

32.48

(3.68)

Storage required per bed (square metres)

3

4

5

In her letter she asks for your help in preparing a marketing plan which will maximize the profit-ability of Winter’s bed department while the re-development takes place. To help you, she has provided you with the following additional information:

1 Currently storage space available totals 300 square metres.

2 Staff costs represent the salaries of the sales staff in the bed department. Their total cost of £3780 per month is apportioned to units on the basis of planned turnover.

3 Departmental fixed overhead of £2000 per month is directly attributable to the department and is apportioned on the number of beds planned to be sold.

4 General fixed overheads of £2520 are also apportioned on the number of beds planned to be sold. The directors of Winter plc believe this to be a fair apportionment of the store’s central fixed overheads.

5 The cost of carriage inwards and the cost of beds vary directly with the number of beds purchased.

Task 3

(a) Prepare a recommended monthly sales schedule in units which will maximize the profitability of Winter plc’s bed department.

(b) Calculate the profit that will be reported per month if your recommendation is implemented.

briefly identify any conclusions which may be drawn from your calculations 610106

Decision-making and non-graphical CVP analysis

Fosterjohn Press Ltd is considering launching a new monthly magazine at a selling price of £1 per copy. Sales of the magazine are expected to be 500 000 copies per month, but it is possible that the actual sales could differ quite significantly from this estimate.

— Two different methods of producing the magazine are being considered and neither would involve any additional capital expenditure. The estimated production costs for each of the two methods of manufacture, together with the additional marketing and distribution costs of selling the new magazine, are summarized below:

Method A

Method B

Variable costs

£0.55 per copy

£0.50 per copy

Specific fixed costs

£80 000

£120 000

per month

per month

Semi-variable costs:

The following estimates have been obtained:

350 000 copies

£55 000

£47 500

per month

per month

450 000 copies

£65 000

£52 500

per month

per month

650 000 copies

£85 000

£62 500

per month

per month

It may be assumed that the fixed cost content of the semi-variable costs will remain constant throughout the range of activity shown.

The company currently sells a magazine covering related topics to those that will be included in the new publication and consequently it is anticipated that sales of this existing magazine will be adversely affected. It is estimated that for every ten copies sold of the new publication, sales of the existing magazine will be reduced by one copy.

Sales and cost data of the existing magazine are shown below:

Sales

220 000 copies per month

Selling price

£0.85 per copy

Variable costs

£0.35 per copy

Specific fixed costs

£80 000 per month

Required:

(a) Calculate, for each production method, the net increase in company profits which will result from the introduction of the new magazine, at each of the following levels of activity:

500 000 copies per month

400 000 copies per month

600 000 copies per month

(b) Calculate, for each production method, the amount by which sales volume of the new magazine could decline from the anticipated 500 000 copies per month, before the company makes no additional profit from the introduction of the new publication.

(c) Briefly identify any conclusions which may be drawn from your calculations.

any assumptions considered necessary or matters which may require further investigat 610107

Decision-making and non-graphical CVP analysis Mr Belle has recently developed a new improved video cassette and shown below is a summary of a report by a firm of management consultants on the sales potential and production costs of the new cassette.

Sales potential: The sales volume is difficult to predict and will vary with the price, but it is reasonable to assume that at a selling price of £10 per cassette, sales would be between 7500 and 10 000 units per month. Alternatively; if the selling price was reduced to £9 per cassette, sales would be between 12 000 and 18 000 units per month.

Production costs: If production is maintained at or below 10 000 units per month, then variable manufacturing costs would be approximately £8.25 per cassette and fixed costs £12 125 per month. However, if production is planned to exceed 10 000 units per month, then variable costs would be reduced to £7.75 per cassette, but the fixed costs would increase to £16 125 per month.

Mr Belle has been charged £2000 for the report by the management consultants and, in addition, he has incurred £3000 development costs on the new cassette.

If Mr Belle decides to produce and sell the new cassette it will be necessary for him to use factory premises which he owns, but are leased to a colleague for a rental of £400 per month. Also he will resign from his current post in an electronics firm where he is earning a salary of £1000 per month.

Required:

(a) Identify in the question an example of

(i) an opportunity cost,

(ii) a sunk cost.

(b) Making whatever calculations you consider appropriate, analyse the report from the consultants and advise Mr Belle of the potential profitability of the alternatives shown in .the report.

Any assumptions considered necessary or matters which may require further investigation or comment should be clearly stated.

the current disposal or sale value of the old machine is pound 40 000 and it will be 610110

A division within Rhine Autos purchased a machine three years ago for £180 000. Depreciation using the straight line basis, assuming a life of six years and with no salvage value, has been recorded each year in the financial accounts. The present written-down value of the equipment is £90 000 and it has a remaining life of three years. Management is considering replacing this machine with a new machine that will reduce the variable operating costs. The new machine will cost £70 000 and will have an expected life of three years with no scrap value. The variable operating costs are £3 per unit of output for the old machine and £2 per unit for the new machine. It is expected that both machines will be operated at a capacity of 20 000 units per annum. The sales revenues from the output of both machines will therefore be identical. The current disposal or sale value of the old machine is £40 000 and it will be zero in three years time.

the materials required to manufacture component a would norbe required but additiona 610111

CASE A

One of the divisions within Rhine Autos is currently negotiating with another supplier regarding outsourcing component A that it manufactures. The division currently manufactures 10 000 units per annum of the component. The costs currently assigned to the components are as follows:

Total costs of

producing 10 000

Unit

components

cost

(£)

(£)

Direct materials

120 000

12

Direct labour

100 000

10

Variable manufacturing overhead costs (power and utilities)

10 000

1

Fixed manufacturing overhead costs

80 000

8

Share of non-manufacturing overheads

50 000

5

Total costs

360 000

36

The above costs are expected to remain unchanged in the foreseeable future if the Rhine Autos division continues to manufacture the components. The supplier has offered to supply 10 000 components per annum at price of £30 per unit guaranteed for a minimum of three years. If Rhine Autos outsources component A the direct labour force currently employed in producing the components will be made redundant. No redundancy costs will be incurred. Direct materials and variable overheads are avoidable if component A is outsourced. Fixed manufacturing overhead costs would be reduced by £10 000 per annum but non-manufacturing costs would remain unchanged. Assume initially that the capacity that is required for component A has no alternative use. Should the Division of Rhine Autos make or buy the component?

CASE B

Assume now that the extra capacity that will be made available from outsourcing component A can be used to manufacture and sell 10 000 units of part B at a price of £34 per unit. All of the labour force required to manufacture component A would be used to make part B. The variable manufacturing overheads, the fixed manufacturing overheads and non-manufacturing overheads would be the same as the costs incurred for manufacturing component A. The materials required to manufacture component A would norbe required but additional materials required for making part B would cost £13 per unit. Should Rhine Autos outsource component A?

assuming that the above results are likely to be typical of future quarterly perform 610112

The Euro Company is a wholesaler who sells its products to retailers throughout Europe. Euro’s headquarters is in Brussels. The company has adopted a regional structure with each region consisting of 3-5 sales territories. Each region has its own regional office and a warehouse which distributes the goods directly to the customers. Each sales territory also has an office where the marketing staff are located. The Scandinavian region consists of three sales territories with offices located in Stockholm, Oslo and Helsinki. The budgeted results for the next quarter are as follows:

Stockholm

Oslo

Helsinki

Total

(£000’s)

(£000’s)

(£000’s)

(£000’s)

Cost of goods sold

800

850

1000

2650

Salespersons salaries

160

200

240

600

Sales office rent

60

90

120

270

Depreciation of sales office equipment

20

30

40

90

Apportionment of warehouse rent

24

24

24

72

Depreciation of warehouse equipment

20

16

22

58

Regional and headquarters costs

Cause-and-effect allocations

120

152

186

458

Arbitrary apportionments

360

400

340

1100

Total costs assigned to each location

1564

1762

1972

5298

Reported profit/(loss)

236

238

(272)

202

Sales

1800

2000

1700

5500

Assuming that the above results are likely to be typical of future quarterly performance should the Helsinki territory be discontinued?

given this information you are required to present cost information advising whether 610113

Adapting the obsolete materials for use as a substitute for a sub-assembly that is regularly used within the firm. Details of the extra work and materials required are as follows:

Material C

1000 units

Direct labour:

4000 hours unskilled

1000 hours semi-skilled

4000 hours highly skilled

9000 hours

1200 units of the sub-assembly are regularly used per quarter, at a cost of £900 per unit. The adaptation of material XY would reduce the quantity of the sub-assembly purchased from outside the firm to 900 units for the next quarter only. However, since the volume purchased would be reduced, some discount would be lost, and the price of those purchased from outside would increase to £950 per unit for that quarter.

Material C is not available externally, but is manufactured by Brown Ltd. The 1000 units required would be available from stocks, but would be produced as extra production. The standard cost per unit of material C would be as follows:

(£)

Direct labour, 6 hours unskilled labour

36_

Raw materials

13

Variable overhead; 6 hours at £1

6

Fixed overhead, 6 hours at £3

18

73

The wage rates and overhead recovery rates for Brown Ltd are:

Variable overhead

£1 per direct labour hour

Fixed overhead

£3 per direct labour hour

Unskilled labour

£6 per direct labour hour

Semi-skilled labour

£8 per direct labour hour

Highly skilled labour

£10 per direct labour hour

The unskilled labour is employed on a casual basis and sufficient labour can be acquired to exactly meet the production requirements. Semi-skilled labour is part of the permanent labour force, but the company has temporary excess supply of this type,of labour at the present time. Highly skilled labour is in short supply and cannot be increased significantly in the short term; this labour is presently engaged in meeting the demand for product L, which requires 4 hours of highly skilled labour. The contribution (sales less direct labour and material costs and variable overheads) from the sale of one unit of product L is £24.

Given this information, you are required to present cost information advising whether the stocks of material XY should be sold, converted into a specialized product.

calculate the profit if he were to do so 610114

A market gardener is planning his production for next season, and he has asked you as a cost accountant, to recommend the optimal mix of vegetable production for the coming year. He has given .yeu the following data relating to the current year.

Potatoes

Turnips

Parsnips

Carrots

Area occupied (acres)

25

20

30

25

Yield per acre (tonnes)

10

8

9

12

Selling price per tonne (£)

100

125

150

135

Variable cost per acre (£):

Fertilizers

30

25

45

40

Seeds

15

20

30

25

Pesticides

25

15

20

25

Direct wages

400

450

500

570

Fixed overhead per annum £54 000

The land that is being used for the production of carrots and parsnips can be used for either crop, but not for potatoes or turnips. The land being used for potatoes and turnips can be used for either crop, but not for carrots or parsnips. In order to provide an adequate market service, the gardener must produce each year at least 40 tonnes each of potatoes and turnips and 36 tonnes each of parsnips and carrots.

(a) You are required to present a statement to show:

(i) the profit for the current year;

(ii) the profit for the production mix that you would recommend.

(b) Assuming that the land could be cultivated in such a way that any of the above crops could be produced and there was no market commitment, you are required to:

(i) advise the market gardener on which crop he should concentrate his production;

(ii) calculate the profit if he were to do so;

z limited manufactures three products the selling price and cost details of which ar 610116

Z Limited manufactures three products, the selling price and cost details of which are given below:

Product

Product

Product

X

Y

Z

(£)

(£)

(£)

Selling price per unit

75

95

95

Costs per unit:

Direct materials

10

5

15

(£5 /kg)

Direct labour

16

24

20

(£4/hour)

Variable overhead

8

12

10

Fixed overhead

24

36

30

In a period when direct materials are restricted in supply, the most and the least profitable uses of direct materials are

Most profitable

Least profitable

A

X

Z

B

Y

Z

C

X

Y

D

Z

Y

E

Y

X

you have been asked to determine the relevant cost or 600 kg of material x to be use 610117

Your company regularly uses material X and currently has in stock 600 kg, for which it paid £1500 two weeks ago. It this were to be sold as raw material it could be sold today for £2.00 per kg. You are aware that the material can be bought on the open market for £3.25 per kg, but it must be purchased in quantities of 1000 kg.

You have been asked to determine the relevant cost or 600 kg of material X to be used in a job for a customer. The relevant cost of the 600 kg is:

(a) £1200

(b) £1325

(c) £1825

(d) £1950

(e) £3250

which component s if any should bb limited consider buying in 610119

BB Limited makes three componerits: S, T and U. The following costs have been recorded:

Component

Component

Component

S

T

U

UNIT COST

UNIT COST

UNIT COST

(£)

(£)

(£)

Variable cost

2.50

8.00

5.00

Fixed cost

2.00

8.30

3.75

Total cost

4.50

16.30

8.75

Another company has offered to supply the components to BB Limited at the following prices:

Component

Component

Component

S

T

U

Price each

£4

£7

£5.50

Which component(s), if any, should BB Limited consider buying in?

(a) Buy in all three components.

(b) Do not buy any.

(c) Buy in S and U.

(d) Buy in T only.

if only product m1 were to be made the number of units to be sold to achieve a profi 610120

M plc makes two products – M1 and M2 -budgeted details of which are as follows:

Ml

M2

(£)

(£)

Selling price

10.00

8.00

Costs per unit:

Direct materials

2.50

3.00

Direct labour

1.50

1.00

Variable overhead

0.60

0.40

Fixed overhead

1.20

1.00

Profit per unit

4.20

2.60

Budgeted production and sales for the year ended 31 December are:

Product M1

10 000 units

Product M2

12 500 units

The fixed overhead shown above comprises both general and specific fixed overhead costs. The general fixed overhead cost has been attributed to units of M1 and M2 on the basis of direct labour cost.

The specific fixed cost totals £2500 per annum and relates to product M2 only.

(A) Both products are available from an external supplier. If M plc could purchase only one of them, the maximum price which should be paid per unit of M1 or M2 instead of internal manufacture would be:

M1

M2

A

4.60

4.40

B

4.60

4.60

C

5.80

4.40

D

5.80

4.60

E

5.80

5.60

(b) If only product M1 were to be made, the number of units to be sold to achieve a profit of £50 000 per annum (to the nearest unit) would be

A 4074;

B 4537;

C 13 333;

D 13 796;

E none of the above.

the relevant labour cost of the contract is 610121

A company is considering accepting a one-year contract which will require four skilled employees. The four skilled employees could be recruited on a one-year contract at a cost of £40 000, per employee. The employees would be supervised by an existing manager who earns £60 000 per annum. It is expected that super-vision of the contract would take 10% of the manager’s time.

Instead of recruiting new employees, the company could retrain some existing employees who currently earn £30 000 per year. The training would cost £15 000 in total. If these employees were used they would need to be replaced at a total cost of £100 000.

The relevant labour cost of the contract is:

A

£100 000

B

£115000

C

£135 000

D

£141000

E

£166 000

the management of springer plc is considering next year 39 s production and purchase 610122

Make or buy decision

The management of Springer plc is considering next year’s production and purchase budgets.

One of the components produced by the company, which is incorporated into another All product before being sold, has a budgeted manufacturing cost as follows:

(£)

Direct material

14

Direct labour (4 hours at £3 per hour)

12

Variable overhead (4 hours at £2 per hour)

8

Fixed overhead (4 hours at £5 per hour)

20

Total cost

54 per unit

Trigger plc has offered to supply the above component at a guaranteed price of £50 per unit.

Required:

(a) Considering cost criteria only, advise management whether the above component should be purchased from Trigger plc. Any calculations should be shown and assumptions made, or aspects which may require further investigation should be clearly stated.

(b) Explain how your above advice would be affected by each of the two separate situations shown below.

(i) As a result of recent government legislation if Springer plc continues to manufacture this component the company will incur additional inspection and testing expenses of £56 000 per annum, which are not included in the above budgeted manufacturing costs.

(ii) Additional labour cannot be recruited and if the above component is not manufactured by Springer plc the direct labour released will be employed- in increasing the production of an existing product which is sold for £90 and which has a budgeted manufacturing cost as follows:

Direct material

10

Direct labour

24

(8 hours at £3 per hour)

Variable overhead

16

(8 hours at £2 per hour)

Fixed overhead

(8 hours at £5 per hour)

40

90 per unit

All calculations should be shown.

(c)The production director of Springer plc recently said:

‘We must continue to manufacture the component as only one year ago we purchased some special grinding equipment to be used exclusively by this component. The equipment cost £100 000, it cannot be resold or used elsewhere and if we cease production of this component we will have to write off the written down book value which is £80 000.’

Draft a brief reply to the production director commenting on his statement.

comment briefly on three factors which management ought to consider and which may in 610123

Acceptance of a contract

JB Limited is a small specialist manufacturer of electronic components and much of its output is used by the makers of aircraft for both civil and military purposes. One of the few aircraft manufacturers has offered a contract to JB Limited for the supply, over the next twelve months, of 400 identical components.

The data relating to the production of each component is as follows:

(i) Material requirements:

3 kg material M1 — see note 1 below

2 kg material P2 — see note 2 below

1 Part No. 678 — see note 3 below

(ii) Labour requirements: Each component would require five hours of skilled labour and five hours of semi-skilled. An employee possessing the necessary skills is available and is currently paid £5 per hour. A replacement would, however, have to be obtained at a rate of £4 per hour for the work which would otherwise be done by the skilled employee. The current rate for semi-skilled work is £3 per hour and an additional employee could be appointed for this work.

(iii) Overhead: JB Limited absorbs overhead by a machine hour rate, currently £20 per hour of which £7 is for variable overhead and £13 for fixed overhead. If this contract is undertaken it is estimated that fixed costs will increase for the duration of the contract by £3200. Spare machine capacity is available and each component would require four machine hours.

A price of £145 per component has been suggested by the large company which makes aircraft.

You are required to:

(a) State whether or not the contract should be accepted and support your conclusion with appropriate for presentation to management;

(b) comment briefly on three factors which management ought to consider and which may influence their decision.

decision on which of two mutually exclusive contracts to accept 610124

Decision on which of two mutually exclusive contracts to accept

A company in the civil engineering industry with headquarters located 22 miles from London undertakes contracts anywhere in the United Kingdom.

The company has had its tender for a job in north-east England accepted at £288 000 and work is due to begin in March. However, the company has also been asked to undertake a contract on the south coast of England. The price offered for this contract is £352 000. Both of the contracts cannot be taken simultaneously because of constraints on staff site management personnel and on plant available. An escape clause enables the company to withdraw from the contract in the north-east, provided notice is given before the end of November and an agreed penalty of £28 000 is paid.

The following estimates have been submitted by the company’s quantity surveyor:

Cost estimates

North-east

South coast

(£)

(£)

Materials:

In stock at original cost, Material X

21600

In stock at original cost, Material Y

24800

Firm orders placed at original cost, Material X

30400

Not yet ordered — current cost, Material X

60000

Not yet ordered — current cost, Material Z

71200

Labour — hired locally

86000

110000

Site management

34000

34000

Staff accommodation and travel for site management

6800

5600

Plant on site —depreciation

9600

12800

Interest on capital, 8%

5120

6400

Total local contract costs

253520

264800

Headquarters costs allocated at rate of 5% on total contract costs

12676

13240

266196

278040

Contract price

288000

352000

Estimated profit

21804

73960

Notes.

(a) to present comparative statements to show the net benefit to the company of undertaking the more advantageous of the two contracts;

(b) to explain the reasoning behind the inclusion in (or omission from) your comparative financial statements, of each item given in the cost estimates and the notes relating thereto.

using a numerical example of your own reconcile this approach with the opportunity c 610125

Calculation of minimum selling price

You have received a request from EXE plc to provide a quotation for the manufacture of a specialized piece of equipment. This would be a one-off order, in excess of normal budgeted production. The following cost estimate has already been prepared:

(£)

Direct materials:

Steel

10 m2 at £5.00 per sq. metre

50

Brass fittings

20

Direct labour Skilled

25 hours at £8.00 per hour

200

Semi-skilled

10 hours at £5.00 per hour

50

Overhead

35 hours at £10.00 per hour

350

Estimating time

100

770

Administrative overhead at 20% of

production cost

154

924

Profit at 25% of total cost

231

Selling price

1155

Notes:

Required:

(a) Prepare, on a relevant cost basis, the lowest cost estimate that could be used as the basis for a quotation. Explain briefly your reasons for using each of the values in your estimate.

(b) There may be a possibility of repeat orders from EXE plc which would occupy part of normal production capacity. What factors need to be considered before quoting for this order?

(c) When an organisation identifies that it has a single production resource which is in short supply, but is used by more than one product, the optimum production plan is determined by ranking the products according to their contribution per unit of the scarce resource.

Using a numerical example of your own, reconcile this approach with the opportunity cost approach used in (a) above.

a company operates a process which produces three joint products k p and z 610048

A Company operates a process which produces three joint products- K, P and Z. The costs of operating this process during September amounted to £117 000. During the month the output of the three products was:

K

2000 litres

P

4500 litres

Z

3250 litres

P is further processed at a cost of £9.00 per litre. The actual loss of the second process was 10% of the input which was normal. Products K and Z are sold without further processing.

The final selling prices of each of the products are:

K

£20.00 per litre

P

£25.00 per litre

Z

£18.00 per litre

Joint costs are attributed to products on the basis of output volume.

The profit attributed to product P was:

A £6750

B £12 150

C £13 500

D £16 200

E £18 000

charleville operates a continuous process producing three products and one by produc 610050

Charleville operates a continuous process producing three products and one by-product. Output from the process for a month was as follows:

Product

Selling price per unit

United of output from process

1

£18

10 000

2

£25

20 000

3

£20

20 000

4(by-product)

£2

3 500

Total output costs were £277 000.

What was the unit valuation for product 3 using the sales revenue basis for allocating joint cost?

A £4.70

B £4.80

C £5.00

D £5.10

the marketing director of your company has expressed concern about product x which f 610052

Apportionment of joint costs

The marketing director of your company has expressed concern about product X, which for some time has shown a loss, and has stated that some action will have to be taken. Product X is produced from material A which is one of two raw materials jointly produced by passing chemicals through a process.

Representative data for the process is as follows:

Output (kg):

Material A

10 000

Material B

30 000

Process B (£):

Raw material

83 600

Conversion costs

58 000

Joint costs are apportioned to the two raw materials according to the weight of output. Production costs incurred in converting material A into product X are £1.80 per kg of material A used. A yield of 90% is achieved. Product X is sold for £5.60 per kg. Material B is sold without further processing for £6.00 per kg.

Required:

(a) Calculate the profit/loss per kg of product X and material B, respectively.

(b) Comment upon the marketing director’s concern, advising him whether you consider any action should be taken.

(c) Demonstrate an alternative joint cost apportionment for product X an comment briefly upon this alternative method of apportionment.

a process costing pound 200 000 produces 3 products a b and c output details are as 610053

Joint cost apportionment and decisions of further processing

A process costing £200 000 produces 3 products- A, B and C. Output details are as follows:

Product A

6 000 litres

Product B

10 000 litres

Product C

20 000 tonnes

Each product may be sold at the completion of the process as follows;

Sales value at the end of the first process

Product A

£10 per litre

Product B

£4 per litre

Product C

£10 per tonne

Alternatively, further processing of each individual product can be undertaken to produce an enhanced product thus:

Subsequent processing costs

Sales value after final process

Enhanced Product A

£14 per litre

£20 per litre

Enhanced product B

£12 per litre

£8 per litre

Enhanced product C

£6 per tonne

£16 per tonne

Required:

(a) Explain the following terms:

(i) Normal process loss;

(ii) Joint product;

(iii) By-product;

And state the appropriate costing treatments for normal process loss and for by-products.

(b) Calculate the apportionment of joint process costs to products A,B and C above.

(c) Explain whether the initial process should be undertaken and which, if any, of the enhanced products should be produced.

preparation of profit statements and decision on further processing 610054

Preparation of profit statements and decision on further processing

(a) Polimur Ltd operates a process that produces three joint products, all in an unrefined condition. The operating results of the process for October 2000 are shown below:

Output from process:

Product A

100 tonnes

Product B

80 tonnes

Product C

80 tonnes

The month’s operating costs were £1 300 000. The closing stocks were 20 tonnes of A, 15 tonnes of B and 5 tonnes fo C. The value of the closing stock is calculated by apportioning costs according to weight of output.

Refining company at the following prices:

Product A

£5 per kg

Product B

£4 per kg

Product C

£9 per kg

Required:

Prepare an operating statement showing the relevant trading result for October 2000.

(b) The management of polimur Ltd have been considering a proposal to establish their refining operations.

The current market prices of the refined products are:

Product A

£17 per kg

Product B

£14 per kg

Product C

£20.50 per kg

The estimated unit costs of the refining operation are;

Product A (£ per kg)

Product B (£ per kg)

Product C (£ per kg)

Direct materials

0.50

0.75

2.50

Direct labour

2.00

3.00

4.00

Variable overheads

1.50

2.25

5.50

Prime costs would be variable. Fixed overheads, which would be £700 000 monthly, would be direct to the refining operation. Special equipment is required for refining product B an this would be rented at a cost, not included in the above figures, of £360 000 per month. It may be assumed that there would be no weight loss in the refining process and that the quantity refined each month would be similar to October’s output shown in (a) above.

Required:

Prepare a statement that will assist management to evaluate the proposal to commence refining operations. Include any further comments or observations you consider relevant.

a newly formed company has drawn up the following budgets for its first two accounti 610060

A newly formed company has drawn up the following budgets for its first two accounting periods;

Period 1

Period 2

Sales units

9 500

10 300

Production units(equivalent to normal capacity)

10 000

10 000

The following budgeted information applies to both periods:

£

Selling price per unit

6.40

Variable cost per unit

3.60

Fixed production overhead per period

15 000

(a) In period 1, the budgeted profit will be

(i) The same under both absorption costing and marginal costing.

(ii) £750 higher under marginal costing.

(iii) £750 higher under absorption costing.

(iv) £1400 higher under absorption costing.

(b) In period 2, everything was as budgeted, except for the fixed production overhead, which was £15 700.

The reported profit, using absorption costing in period 2, would be

(i) $12 300

(ii) $ 12 690

(iii) $13 140

(iv) $13 840

exe limited makes a single product whose total cost per unit is budgeted to be pound 610061

Exe Limited makes a single product whose total cost per unit is budgeted to be £45. This includes fixed cost of £8 per unit based on a volume of 10 000 units per period. In a period, sales volume was 9000 units, and production volume was 11 500 units. The actual profit for the same period. Calculated using absorption costing, was £42 000.

If the profit statement were prepared using marginal costing, the profit for the period

A would be £10 000

B would be £22 000

C would be £50 000

D would be £62 000

E cannot be calculated without more information

preparation of variable and absorption costing profit statements 610064

Preparation of variable and absorption costing profit statements

Oath all Limited, which manufactures a single product, is considering whether to use marginal or absorption costing to report its budgeted profit in its management accounts.

The following information is available:

Units

Direct materials

4

Direct labour

15

19

Selling price

50

Fixed production overheads are budgeted to be £300 000 per month and are absorbed on an activity of 100 000 units per month. For the month in question, sales are expected to be 100 000 units although production units will be 120 000 units. Fixed selling costs of £150 000 per month will need to be included in the budget as will the variable selling costs of £2 per units. There are no opening stocks.

Required:

(a) Prepare the budgeted profit and loss account for a month for Oath all Limited using absorption costing. Clearly show the valuation of any stock figures.

(b) Prepare the budgeted profit and loss account for a month for Oath all Limited using marginal costing. Clearly show the valuation of any stock figures.

for the relevant cost data in items 1 7 indicate which of the following is the best 610081

Cost classification

For the relevant cost data in items (1-7), indicate which of the following is the best classification.

(a) sunk cost

(b) incremental cost

(c) variable cost

(d) fixed cost

(e) semi-variable cost

(f) semi-fixed cost

(g) controllable cost

(h) non-controllable cost

(i) opportunity cost

(1) A company is considering selling an old machine. The machine has a book value of £20 000. In evaluating the decision to sell the machine, the £20 000 is a …

(2) As an alternative to the old machine, the company can rent a new one. It will cost £3000 a year. In analysing the cost—volume behaviour the rental is a …

(3) To run the firm’s machines, here are two alternative courses of action. One is to pay the operator a base salary plus a small amount per unit produced. This makes the total cost of the operators a …

(4) As an alternative, the firm can pay the operators a flat salary. It would then use one machine when volume is low, two when it expands, and three during peak periods. This means that the total operator cost would now be a …

(5) The machine mentioned in (1) could be sold for £8000. If the firm considers retaining and using it, the £8000 is a ..,

(6) If the firm wishes to use the machine any longer, it must be repaired. For the decision to retain the machine, the repair cost is a …

(7) The machine is charged to the foreman of each department at a rate of £3000 a year. In evaluating the foreman, the charge is a …

a company manufactures and retails clothing you are required to group the costs whic 610082

A company manufactures and retails clothing. You are required to group the costs which are listed below and numbered (1H20) into the following classifications (each cost is intended to belong to only one classification):

(i) direct materials

(ii) direct labour

(iii) direct expenses indirect production overhead

(iv) research and development costs

(v) selling and distribution costs

(vi) administration costs

(vii) finance costs

(1) Lubricant for sewing machines

(2) Floppy disks for general office computer

(3) Maintenance contract for general office photocopying machine

(4) Telephone rental plus metered calls

(5) Interest on bank overdraft

(6) Performing Rights Society charge for music broadcast throughout the factory

(7) Market research undertaken prior to a new product launch

(8) Wages of security guards for factory

(9) Carriage on purchase of basic raw material

(10) Royalty payable on number of units of product XY produced

(11) Road fund licences for delivery vehicles

(12) Parcels sent to customers

(13) Cost of advertising products on television

(14) Audit fees

(15) Chief accountant’s salary

(16) Wages of operatives in the cutting department

(17) Cost of painting advertising slogans on delivery vans

(18) Wages of storekeepers in materials store

(19) Wages of fork lift truck drivers who handle raw materials

(20) Developing a new product in the laboratory

calculate the cost of a satisfactory brain scan on machine type xr1 610083

Analysis of costs by behaviour for decision-making

The Northshire Hospital Trust operates two types of specialist X-ray scanning machines, XR1 and XR50. Details for the next period are estimated as follows:

Machine

XR1

XR50

Running hours

1 100

2 000

(£)

(£)

Variable running costs (excluding plates)

27 500

64 000

Fixed costs

20 000

97 500

A brain scan is normally carried out on machine type XR1: this task uses special X-ray plates costing £40 each and takes four hours of machine time. Because of the nature of the process, around 10% of the scans produce blurred and therefore useless results.

Required:

(a) Calculate the cost of a satisfactory brain scan on machine type XR1.

(b) Brain scans can also be done on machine type )CR50 and would take only 1.8 hours per scan with a reduced reject rate of 6%. However, the cost of the X-ray plates would be £55 per scan.

Required:

Advise which type should be used, assuming sufficient capacity is available on both types of machine.

state what decision mrs johnston should make according to the information given supp 610084

Sunk and opportunity costs for decision-making Mrs Johnston has taken out a lease on a shop for a down payment of £5000. Additionally, the rent under the lease amounts to £5000 per annum. If the lease is cancelled, the initial payment of £5000 is forfeit. Mrs Johnston plans to use the shop for the sale of clothing, and has estimated operations for the next twelve months as follows:

(£)

(£)

Sales

115000

Less Value-added tax (VAT)

15000

Sales Less VAT

100000

Cost of goods sold

50000

Wages and wage related costs

12000

Rent including the down payment

10000

Rates, heating, lighting and insurance

13000

Audit, legal and general expenses

2000

87000

Net profit before tax

13000

In the no provision has been made for the cost of Mrs Johnston but it is estimated that one half of her time will be devoted to the business. She is undecided whether to continue with her plans, because she knows that she can sublet the shop to a friend for a monthly rent of £550 if she does not use the shop herself.

You are required to:

(a) (i) explain and identify the ‘sunk’ and `opportunity’ costs in the situation depicted above;

(ii)state what decision Mrs Johnston should make according to the information given, supporting your conclusion with a financial statement;

(b) explain the meaning and use of ‘notional’ (or `imputed’) costs and quote two supporting examples.

you are required to present a statement for management showing the amended sales and 610085

Relevant costs and cost behaviour

(a) Distinguish between ‘opportunity cost’ and `out of pocket cost’ giving a numerical example of each using your own to support your answer.

(b) Jason travels to work by train to his 5-day week job. Instead of buying daily tickets he finds it cheaper to buy a quarterly season ticket which costs £188 for 13 weeks.

Debbie, an acquaintance, who also makes the same journey, suggests that they both travel in Jason’s car and offers to give him £120 each quarter towards his car expenses. Except for weekend travelling and using it for local college attendance near his home on three evenings each week to study for his CIMA Stage 2, the car remains in Jason’s garage.

Jason estimates that using his car for work would involve him, each quarter, in the following expenses:

(£)

Depreciation (proportion of annual)

200

Petrol and oil

128

Tyres and miscellaneous

52

You are required to state whether Jason should accept Debbie’s offer and to draft a statement to show clearly the monetary effect of your conclusion.

(c) A company with a financial year 1 September to 31 August prepared a sales budget which resulted in the following cost structure:

% of sales

Direct materials

32

Direct wages

18

Production overhead: variable

6

fixed

24

Administrative and

selling costs:

variable

fixed

7

Profit

10

After ten weeks, however, it became obvious that the sales budget, was too optimistic and it has now been estimated that because of a reduction in sales volume, for the full year, sales will total £2 560 000 which is only 80% of the previously budgeted .

You are required to present a statement for management showing the amended sales and cost structure in £s and percentages, in a marginal costing format.

what profit would result if 8000 tickets were sold 610086

Norvik Enterprises operate in the leisure and entertainment industry and one of its activities is to promote concerts at locations throughout Europe. The company is examining the viability of a concert in Stockholm. Estimated fixed costs are £60 000. These include the fees paid to perfomers, the hire of the venue and advertising costs. Variable costs consist of the cost of a pre-packed buffet which will be provided by a firm of caterers at a price, which is currently being negotiated, but it is likely to be in the region of £10 per ticket sold. The proposed price for the sale of a ticket is £20. The management of Norvic have requested the following information:

1. The number of tickets that must be sold to break-even (that is, the point at which there is neither a profit or loss).

2. How many tickets must be sold to earn £30 000 target profit?

3. What profit would result if 8000 tickets were sold?

4. What selling price would have to be charged to give a profit of £30 000 on sales of 8000 tickets, fixed costs of £60 000 and variable costs of £10 per ticket?

5. How many additional tickets must be sold to cover the extra cost of television advertising of £8000?

tweed ltd is a company engaged solely in the manufacture of jumpers which are bought 610088

Tweed Ltd is a company engaged solely in the manufacture of jumpers, which are bought mainly for sporting activities. Present sales are direct to retailers, but in recent years there has been a steady decline in output because of increased foreign competition. In the-last trading year (2001) the accounting report indicated that the company produced the lowest profit for 10 years. The forecast for 2002 indicates that the present deterioration in profits is likely to continue. The company considers that a profit of £80 000 should be achieved to provide an adequate return on capital. The managing director has asked that a review be made of the present pricing and marketing policies. The marketing director has completed this review, and passes the proposals on to you for evaluation and recommendation, together with the profit and loss account for year ending 31 December 2001.

Tweed Ltd profit and loss account for year ending 31 December 2001

£

£

£

Sales revenue

(100 000 jumpers at £10)

1000000

Factory cost of goods sold:

Direct materials

100000

Direct labour

350000

Variable factory overheads

60000

Fixed factory overheads

220000

730000

140000

Administration overhead

Selling and distribution overhead_

Sales commission (2% of sales)

20000

Delivery costs (variable per unit sold)

50000

Fixed costs

40000

110000

980000

Profit

20000

The information to be submitted to the managing director includes the following three proposals:

(i) To proceed on the basis of analyses of market research studies which indicate that the demand for the jumpers is such that 10% reduction in selling price would increase demand by 40%.

(ii) To proceed with an enquiry that the marketing director has had from a mail order company about the possibility of purchasing 50 000 units annually if the selling price is right. The mail order company would transport the jumpers from Tweed Ltd to its own warehouse, and no sales commission would be paid on these sales by Tweed Ltd. However, if an acceptable price can be negotiated, Tweed Ltd would be expected to contribute £60 000 per annum towards the cost of producing the mail order catalogue. It would also be necessary for Tweed Ltd to provide special additional packaging at a cost of £0.50 per jumper. The marketing director considers that in 2002 the sales from existing business would remain unchanged at 100 000 units, based on a selling price of £10 if the mail order contract is undertaken.

(iii) To proceed on the basis of a view by the marketing director that a 10% price reduction, together with a national advertising campaign costing £30 000 may increase sales to the maximum capacity of 160 000 jumpers.

Required:

(a) The calculation of break-even sales value based on the 2001 accounts.

(b) A financial evaluation of proposal (i) and a calculation of the number of units Tweed Ltd would require to sell at £9 each to earn the target profit of £80 000.

(c) A calculation of the minimum prices that would have to be quoted to the mail order company, first, to ensure that Tweed Ltd would, at least, break even on the mail order contract, secondly, to ensure that the same overall profit is earned as proposal (i) and, thirdly, to ensure that the overall target profit is earned.

(d) A financial evaluation of proposal (iii).

(i) to increase the price of bludgeons by 25%, in the expectation that the price elasticity of demand over this range of prices will be unity;

(ii) to make changes to the production process that would reduce the joint fixed costs by 12.5% and increase the variable costs of each product by 10%;

(iii) 6-introduce both of the above changes.

annual fixed costs are estimated at pound 273 000 what is the break even point in sa 610089

A company manufactures and sells two products, X and Y. Forecast data for a year are:

Product X

Product Y

Sales (units)

80 000

20 000

Sales price (per unit)

£12

£8

Variable cost (per unit)

£8

£3

Annual fixed costs are estimated at £273 000, What is the break-even point in sales revenue with the current sales mix?

A £570 000

B £606 667

C £679 467

D £728 000

the following details relate to product r 610091

The following details relate to product R:

Level of activity (units)

1000

2000

(£/unit)

(£/unit)

Direct materials

4.00

4.00

Direct labour

3.00

3.00

Production overhead

3.50

2.50

Selling overhead

1.00

0.50

11.50

10.00

The total fixed cost and variable cost per unit are:

Total fixed

Variable cost

cost

per unit

A

2000

1.50

B

2000

7.00

C

2000

8.50

D

3000

7.00

E

3000

8.50

discuss the extent to which the above statement is valid and both describe and brief 610097

A break-even chart must be interpreted in the light of the limitations of its underlying assumptions … ‘ (From Cost Accounting: A Managerial Emphasis, by C.T. Horngren.)

Required:

(a) Discuss the extent to which the above statement is valid and both describe and briefly appraise the reasons for five of the most important underlying assumptions of break-even analysis.

(b) For any three of the underlying assumptions provided in answer to (a) above, give an example of circumstances in which that assumption is violated. Indicate the nature of the violation and the extent to which the break-even chart can be adapted to allow for this violation.

state the purposes of each of the three charts in a above 610098

Break-even, contribution and profit—volume graph

(a) From the following information you are required to construct:

(i) a break-even chart, showing the break-even point and the margin of safety;

(ii) a chart displaying the contribution level and the profit level;

(iii) a profit—volume chart.

Sales

6000 units at

£12 per unit = £72 000

Variable costs

6000 units at

£7 per unit = £42 000

Fixed costs

= £20 000

(b) State the purposes of each of the three charts in (a) above.

(c) Outline the limitations of break-even analysis.

(d) What are the advantages of graphical presentation of financial data to executives?

tabulate the appropriate in such a way as to show the break even point s and to comm 610099

Break-even chart with in fixed costs

(a) Identify and discuss briefly five assumptions underlying cost—volume—profit analysis.

(b) A local authority, whose area includes a holiday resort situated on the east coast, operates, for 30 weeks each year, a holiday home which is let to visiting parties of children in care from other authorities. The children are accompanied by their own house mothers who supervise them throughout their holiday. From six to fifteen guests are accepted on terms of £100 per person per week. No differential charges exist for adults and children.

Weekly costs incurred by the host authority are:

(£ per guest)

Food

25

Electricity for heating and cooking

3

Domestic (laundry, cleaning etc.) expenses

5

Use of minibus

10

Seasonal staff supervise and carry out the necessary duties at the home at a cost of £11 000 for the 30-week period. This provides staffing sufficient for six to ten guests per week but if eleven or more guests are to be accommodated, additional staff at a total cost of £200 per week are engaged for the whole of the 30-week period.

Rent, including rates for the property, is £4000 per annum and the garden of the home is maintained by the council’s recreation department which charges a nominal fee of £1000 per annum.

You are required to:

(i) tabulate the appropriate in such a way as to show the break-even point(s) and to comment on your ;

(ii) prepare a chart to illustrate your answer to (b)(i) above.

a company operates an integrated cost and financial accounting system 610012

A company operates an integrated cost and financial accounting system. The accounting entries for the return of unused direct materials from production would be:

A

DR Work-in-progress account;

CR Stores control account.

B

DR Stores control account;

CR Work-in-progress account.

C

DR Stores control account;

CR Finisbed good account.

D

DR Cost of sales account;

CR Work-in-progress account.

at the end of a period in an integrated cost and financial accounting system 610013

At the end of a period, in an integrated cost and financial accounting system, the accounting entries for overhead over-absorbed would be:

A

DR Profit and loss account

CR Work-in-progress control account

B

DR Profit and loss account

CR Overhead control account

C

DR Work-in-progress control account

CR Overhead control account

D

DR Overhead control account

CR Profit and loss account

what was the value of x 610014

In an interlocking accounting system, the profit shown in the financial accouts was £79 252 but the cost account showed £74 294 profit. The following stock valuations were the only differences between the two sets of accounts:

Stuck valuations

Cost accounts

Financial accounts

Opening stock

£10 116

£9 217

Closing stock

£24 053

X

What was the value of X?

A £18 196 B £23 154 C £24 952 D £28 112

which uses a non integrated accounting system 610015

The following data have been taken from the books of CB plc, which uses a non-integrated accounting system:

Financial accounts £

Cost accounts £

Opening stock of materials

5000

6400

Closing stock of materials

4000

5200

Opening stock of finished goods

9800

9600

Closing stock of finished goods

7900

7600

The effect of these stock valuation differences on the profit reported by the financial and cost accounting ledgers in that:

A the financial accounting profit is £300 greater than the cost accounting profit.

B the financial accounting profit is £2100 greater than the cost accounting profit.

C the cost accounting profit is £300 greater than the financial accounting profit.

D the cost accounting profit is £900 greater than the financial accounting profit.

E the cost accounting profit is £2100 greater than the financial accounting profit.

what was the profit in the cost account 610016

The profits shown in the financial accounts was £158 500 but the cost accounts showed a different figure. The following stock valuations were used:

Stock valuations

Cost accounts

Financial accounts

(£)

(£)

Opening stock

35 260

41 735

Closing stock

68 490

57 336

What was the profit in the cost account?

A £163 179

B £140 871

C £176 129

D £153 821

cd ltd a company engaged in the manufacture of specialist marine engines operates a 610020

CD Ltd, a company engaged in the manufacture of specialist marine engines, operates a historic job cost accounting system that is not integrated with the financial accounts. At the beginning of May 2000 the opening balances in the cost ledger were as follows:

£

Stores ledger control account

85 400

Work in progress control account

167 350

Finished goods control account

49 250

Cost ledger control account

302 000

During the month, the following transaction took place:

£

Materials:

Purchases

42 700

Issues to production

63 400

to general maintenance

1 450

to construction of manufacturing equipment

7 650

Factory wages:

Total gross wages paid

124 000

£12 500 of the above gross wages were incurred on the construction of manufacturing equipment, £35 750 were indirect wages and the balance was direct. Production overheads: the actual amount incurred, excluding items shown above, was £152 350; £30 000 was absorbed by the manufacturing equipment under construction and under-absorbed overhead written off at the end of the month amounted to £7550. Royalty payments: one of the engines produced is manufactured under license. £2150 is the amount that will be paid to the inventor for the month’s production of that particular engine. Selling overheads: £22 000. Sales: £410 000. The company’s gross profit margin is 25% on factory cost. At the end of May stocks of work in progress had increases by £12 000. The manufacturing equipment under construction was completed within the month, and transferred out the cost ledger at the end of the month.

Required:

Prepare the relevant control accounts, costing profit and loss account, and any other accounts you consider necessary to record the above transactions in the cost ledger for May 2000.

in the absence of the accountant you have been asked to prepare a month rsquo s cost 610021

Integrated accounts

In the absence of the accountant you have been asked to prepare a month’s cost accounts for a company which operates a batch costing system fully integrated with the financial accounts. The cost clerk has provided you with the following information, which he thinks is relevant:

£

Balances at beginning of month:

Stores ledger control account

24 175

Work in progress control account

19 210

Finished goods control account

34 164

Prepayments of production overheads

Brought forward from previous month

2 100

£

Transactions during the month:

Materials purchased

76 150

Materials issued: to production

26 350

For factory maintenance

3 280

Materials transferred between batches

1 450

Direct workers (£)

Indirect workers (£)

Total wages paid:

Net

17 646

3 342

Employees deductions

4 364

890

Direct wages charged to batches from work tickets

15 236

Recorded non-productive time of direct workers

5 230

Direct wages incurred on production of capital

Equipment, for use in the factory

2 670

Selling and distribution overheads incurred

5 240

Other production overheads incurred

12 200

Sales

75 400

Cost of finished goods sold

59 830

Cost of goods completed and transferred into

finished goods store during the month

62 130

Physical stock value of work in progress at end of month

24 360

The production overhead absorption rate is 150% of direct wages, and it is the policy of the company to include a share of production overheads in the cost of capital equipment constructed in the factory.

Required:

(a) Prepare the following accounts for the month:

Stores ledger control account wages control account work in progress control account finished goods control account production overhead control account profit/loss account.

(b) Identify any aspects of the accounts which you consider should be investigated.

(c) Explain why it is necessary to value a company’s stocks at the end of each period and also why, in a manufacturing company, expense items such as factory rent, wages of direct operatives, power costs, etc. are included in the value of work in progress and finished goods stocks.

k limited operates separate cost accounting and financial accounting systems the fol 610022

Reconciliation of cost and financial accounts

K Limited operates separate cost accounting and financial accounting systems. The following manufacturing and trading statement has been prepared from the financial accounts for the quarter ended 31 March:

(£)

(£)

Raw materials:

Opening stock

48 800

Purchases

108 000

156 800

Closing stock

52 000

Raw materials consumed

104 800

Direct wages

40 200

Production overhead

60 900

Production cost incurred

205 900

Work in progress:

Opening stock

64 000

Closing stock

58 000

6 000

Cost of goods produced

2 11 900

Sales

440 000

Finishing goods:

Opening stock

120 000

Cost of goods produced

211 900

331 900

Closing stock

121 900

Cost of goods sold

210 000

Gross profit

230 000

From the cost accounts, the following information has been extracted:

Control account balances at 1 January

(£)

Raw material stores

49 500

Work in progress

60 100

Finished goods

115 400

Transactions for the quarter:

(£)

Raw material stores

104 800

Cost of goods produced

222 500

Cost of goods sold

212 100

Loss of materials damaged by

Flood (insurance claim pending)

2 400

A notional rent of £4000 per month has been charged in the cost accounts. Production overhead was absorbed at the rate of 185% of direct wages.

You are required to:

(a) Prepare the following control accounts in the cost ledger:

Raw materials stores;

Work in process;

Finished goods;

Production overhead;

(b) Prepare a statement reconciling the gross profits as per the cost accounts and the financial accounts;

(c) Comment on the possible accounting treatment(s) of the under-or over-absorption of production overhead, assuming that the financial year of the company is 1 January to 31 December.

hr construction plc makes up its accounts to 31 march each year the following detail 610023

Contract costing

HR Construction plc makes up its accounts to 31 March each year. The following details have been extracted in relation to two of its contracts:

Contract A

Contract B

Commencement date

1 April 1999

1 December 1999

Target completion date

31 May 2000

30 June 2000

Retention %

4

3

£000

£000

Contract price

2000

550

Materials sent to site

700

150

Materials returned to stores

80

30

Plant sent to site

1000

150

Materials transferred

(40)

40

Materials on site

31 March 2000

75

15

Plant hire charges

200

30

Labour cost incurred

300

270

Central overhead cost

75

18

Direct expenses incurred

25

4

Value certified

1500

500

Cost of work not certified

160

20

Cash received from client

1440

460

Estimated cost of completion

135

110

Depreciation is charged on plant using the straight line method at the rate of 12% per annum.

Required:

(a) Prepare contract accounts, in columnar format, for EACH of the contracts A and B, showing clearly the amounts to be transferred to profit and loss in respect of each contract.

(b) Show balance sheet extracts in respect of EACH contract for fixed assets, debtors and work in progress.

(c) Distinguish between job, batch and contract costing. Explain clearly the reasons why these methods are different.

what was the valuation of one unit of output to one decimal place 610030

A company uses process costing to value its output. The following was recorded for the period:

Input materials

2000 units at £4.50 per unit

Conversion costs

£13 340

Normal loss

5% of input valued at £3 per unit

Actual loss

150 units

There were no opening or closing stocks:

What was the valuation of one unit of output to one decimal place?

A £11.8

B£11.6

C £11.2

D £11.0

which of the following best describes the term lsquo equivalent units rsquo when usi 610031

Which of the following best describes the term ‘equivalent units’ when using the FIFO method?

A The number of units worked on during a period including the opening and closing stock units.

B The number of whole units worked on during a period ignoring the levels on completion of opening and closing stock units.

C The number of effective whole units worked on during a period allowing for the levels of completion of opening and closing stock units.

D The total number of whole units started during a period ignoring the opening stock units as these were started in the previous period.

the company uses the weighted average method of valuing stock 610032

A company uses process costing to establish the cost per unit of its output. The following information was available for the last month:

Input units

10 000

Output units

9850

Opening stock

300 units, 100% complete for materials and 70% complete for conversion costs

Closing stock

450 units, 100% complete for materials and 30% complete for conversion costs

The company uses the weighted average method of valuing stock.

What were the equivalent units for conversion costs?

A 9505 units

B 9717 units

C 9775 units

D 9985 units

ak chemicals produces high quality plastic sheeting in a continuous manufacturing op 610033

AK Chemicals produces high-quality plastic sheeting in a continuous manufacturing operation. All materials are input at the beginning of the process. Conversion costs are incurred evenly throughout the process. A quality control inspection occurs 75% through the manufacturing process, when some units are separated out as inferior quality. The following date are available for December.

Materials costs

£90 000

Conversion costs

£70 200

Units started

40 000

Units completed

36 000

There is no opening or closing work in progress. Past experience indicates that approximately 7.5% of the units started are found to be defective on inspection by quality control.

What is the cost of abnormal loss for December?

A £3 600

B £4 050

C £4 680

D £10 800

ki processing limited has identified that an abnormal gain of 160 liters occurred in 610034

KI. Processing Limited has identified that an abnormal gain of 160 liters occurred in its refining process last week. Normal losses are expected and have a scrape value of £2.00 per litre. All losses are 100% complete as to material cost and 75% complete as to conversion costs. The company uses the weighted average method of valuation and last week’s output was valued using the following costs per equivalent unit:

Materials

£9.40

Conversion costs

£11.20

The effect on the profit and loss account of last week’s abnormal gain is

A Debit £2528

B Debit £2828

C Credit £2528

D Credit £3168

the following details relate to the main process of w limited a chemical manufacture 610035

The following details relate to the main process of W Limited, a chemical manufacturer:

Opening work in progress

2000 litres, fully complete as to materials and 40% complete as to conversion

Material input

24 000 litres

Normal loss is 10% of input

Output to process 2

19 500 litres

Closing work in progress

3000 litres, fully complete as to materials and 45% complete as to conversion

The number of equivalent units to be included in W Limited’s calculation of the cost per equivalent unit using a FIFO basis of valuation are:

Materials

Conversion

A

19 400

18 950

B

20 500

20 050

C

21 600

21 150

D

23 600

20 750

E

23 600

21 950

the following process account has been drawn up for the last month 610041

The following process account has been drawn up for the last month:

Process account

Units

£

Units

£

Opening

250

3 000

Normal loss

225

450

Input:

8 125

Output

4100

Materials

4500

22 500

Abnormal Loss

275

Labour

37 500

Closing WIP

150

4750

4750

Work in progress has the following level of completion:

Material

Labour

Opening WIP

100%

40%

Closing WIP

100%

30%

The company uses the FIFO method for valuing the output from the process and all losses occurred at the end of the process.

What were the equivalent units for labour?

A 4380 units

B 4270 units

C 4320 units

D 4420 units

Q26.

Perth operates a process costing system. The process is expected to lose 25% of input and this can be sold for £8 per kg.

Input for the month were:

Direct materials

3500 kg at a total cost of £52 500

Direct labour

£9625 for the period

There is no opening or closing work in progress in the period. Actual output was 2800kg.

What is the valuation of the output?

A £44 100

B £49 700

C £58 800

D £56 525.

a company operates expensive process plant to produce a single product from one proc 610042

Losses in process (Weighted average)

A company operates expensive process plant to produce a single product from one process. At the beginning of October, 3400 completed units were still in the processing plant, awaiting transfer to finished stock. They were valued as follows:

£

Direct material

25500

Direct wages

10 200

Production overhead

20 400 (200% of direct wages)

During October, 37 000 further units were put into process and the following costs charged to the process:

£

Direct material

276 340

Direct wages

112 000

Production overhead

224 000

36 000 units were transferred to finished stock and 3200 units remained in work-in-progress at the end of October which were complete as to material and half-complete as to labour and production overhead. A loss of 1200 units, being normal, occurred during the process. The average method of pricing is used.

You are required to

(a) Prepare for the month of October, a statement (or statements) showing

(i) Production cost per unit in total and by element of cost;

(ii) The total of production transferred to finished stock;

(iii) The valuation of closing work-in-progress in total and by element of cost;

(b) Describe five of the characteristics which distinguish process costing from job costing.

equivalent production with no losses fifo method 610043

Equivalent production with no losses (FIFO Method)

A company operates a manufacturing process where six people work as a team and are paid a weekly group bonus bases upon the actual output of the team compared with output expected. A basis 37 hour week is worked during which the expected output from the process is 4000 equivalent units of product. Basis pay is £0.80 per unit in excess of expected output. In the week just ended, basis hours were worked on the process. The following additional information is provided for the week:

Opening work in process (1000 units);

Materials and overheads £355 (50% complete).

During the week:

Materials used £2255

Overheads incurred £1748

Completed production 3800 units

Closing work in process (1300 units)

Materials (100% complete)

Labour and overheads(75%complete).

There are no process losses.

The FIFO method is used to apportion costs.

Required:

(a) Prepare the process account for the week just ended.

(b) Explain the purpose of the following documents which are used in the control of, and accounting for, the materials used in the process described in park (a)

(i) Purchase requisition

(ii) Materials (stores) requisition.

adam the management accountant of mark limited has on file the costs per equivalent 610044

Equivalent production with losses (FIFO method)

Adam, the management accountant of Mark Limited, has on file the costs per equivalent unit for the company’s process for the last month but the input costs and quantities appear to have been mislaid. Information that is available to Adam for last month is as follows:

Opening work in progress

100 units, 30% complete

Closing work in progress

200 units, 40% complete

Normal loss

10% of input valued at £2 per unit

Output

1250 units

The losses were as expected and Adam has a record of there being 150 units scrapped during the month. All materials are input at the start of the process. The cost per equivalent unit for materials was £2.60 and for conversion costs was £1.50. Mark Limited uses the FIFO method of stock valuation in its process account.

Required:

(a) Calculate the units input into the process.

(b) Calculate the equivalent units for materials and conversion costs.

(c) Using your answer from (b) calculate the input costs.

a concentrated liquid fertilizer is manufactured by passing chemicals through two co 610045

Equivalent production and losses in process

A concentrated liquid fertilizer is manufactured by passing chemicals through two consecutive processes. Stores record cards for the chemical ingredients used exclusively by the first process show the following data for May 2000:

Opening stock

4 000 litres

£10 800

Closing stock

8 000 litres

£24 200

Receipts into store

20 000 litres

£61 000

Other process data for May is tabulated below:

Process 1

Process 2

Direct labour

£4880

£6000

Direct expenses

£4270

Overhead absorption

Rates

250% of direct labour

100% of direct labour

Output

8000 litres

7500 litres

Opening stock of work in

Process

5600 litres

Normal yield

85% of input

90% of input

Scrap value of loss

In process 1 the closing stock of work in process has just passed through inspection, which is at the stage where materials and conversion costs are 100% and 75% completed respectively-

(a) Prepare the relevant accounts to show the result of the processes for May 2000 and present a detailed working paper showing your calculations and any assumptions in arriving at the data shown in those accounts.

(b) If supplies of the required chemicals are severely restricted and all production can be sold immediately, briefly explain how you would calculate the loss to the company if, at the beginning of June, 100 litres of the correct mix of chemicals were spilt on issue to process 1.

from the following details relating to the account of grow more ltd prepare cash flo 609938

From the following details relating to the account of Grow More Ltd. prepare cash flow statement:

31 March 2011 Rs.

31 March 2010 Rs.

Assets:

Plant and Machinery

14,00,000

10,00,000

Land and Building

12,00,000

8,00,000

Investments

2,00,000

Sundry Debtors

10,00,000

14,00,000

Stock

8,00,000

4,00,000

Cash on Hand/Bank

4,00,000

4,00,000

50,00,000

40,00,000

Liabilities:

Share Capital

20,00,000

16,00,000

Reserve

4,00,000

3,00,000

P & L A/c

2,00,000

1,20,000

Debentures

4,00,000

Provision for Taxation

2,00,000

1,40,000

Proposed Dividend

4,00,000

2,00,000

Sundry Creditors

14,00,000

16,40,000

50,00,000

40,00,000

  1. Depreciation at 25% was charged on the opening value of plant and machinery.
  2. During the year one old machine costing Rs.1,00,000 (WDV Rs.40,000) was sold for Rs.70,000.
  3. Rs.1,00,000 was paid towards income tax during the year.
  4. Building under construction was not subject to any depreciation.

Prepare cash flow statement.

at the end of the accounting year the company sends all the cash in hand to the bank 609940

Nee Ltd. had the following figures as on 1 April 2010:

Rs.

Fixed Assets—Cost

18,00,000

Less: Depreciation

6,30,000

11,70,000

Bank Balance

1,05,000

Current Assets,

7,50,000

other than Bank Balance

Current Liabilities

3,00,000

Capital (Shares of 10 Each)

12,00,000

The company made the following estimates:

  1. The profit would be Rs.1,74,000 after depreciation of Rs.1,80,000.
  2. The company will acquire fixed assets costing Rs.3,00,000 after selling one machine for Rs.60,000 costing Rs.1,50,000 and on which depreciation provided will amount to Rs.1,05,000.
  3. Current assets and current liabilities, other than bank balance, at the end of March 2011 are expected to be Rs.8,85,000 and Rs.3,90,000, respectively.
  4. The company will pay dividend of 10% and corporate dividend tax thereon of 11%.

At the end of the accounting year, the company sends all the cash in hand to the bank. Prepare a cash flow statement for the year ended on 31 March 2011 and estimate the bank balance or overdraft as on that date.

joann lives in florida and receives the following payments which of these payments i 609969

Joann lives in Florida and receives the following payments. Which of these payments is not reported as taxable interest on her federal tax return?

a. Incorrect. The $8 that is not reported on Form 1099-INT is still taxable and must be reported, even if no Form 1099-INT was issued.

b. Incorrect. Even though they are called “dividends,” the payments from a savings and loan association are taxable interest.

c. Incorrect. The interest on a U.S. Treasury bond is subject to federal income tax; it is exempt from state income tax only.

d. Correct. Interest on a California state bond is a municipal bond exempt from federal income tax. However, the interest is still reported on the return as tax-exempt interest.

olga had interest of 200 credited to a frozen bank deposit in 2012 she was able to w 609970

Olga had interest of $200 credited to a frozen bank deposit in 2012; she was able to withdraw $180 by the end of the year. For 2012, $180 is reported as interest income. In 2013, Olga is able to withdraw the remaining $20 in interest. How much interest is included in Olga”s income in 2013?

a. Incorrect. Interest income on a frozen account becomes taxable if it is paid out or becomes available for withdrawal by the taxpayer.

b. Correct. The remaining $20 of interest was available for withdrawal in 2013, so it is taxable to Olga in that year.

c. Incorrect. The $180 of interest received in 2012 was included in Olga”s taxable income in 2012 because the funds were made available.

d. Incorrect. $180 of the interest was taxable in 2012 and the remaining $20 is taxable in 2013.

a taxpayer has a bank account in the cayman islands assuming this is the taxpayer s 609971

A taxpayer has a bank account in the Cayman Islands. Assuming this is the taxpayer”s only foreign account, which is the correct threshold for FBAR reporting the account to the Treasury?

a. Incorrect. $1,500 of interest income is the threshold for having to complete Schedule B of Form 1040.

b. Incorrect. An account value of more than $1,500 does not trigger FBAR reporting.

c. Incorrect. The threshold for filing is not based on interest, regardless of amount.

d. Correct. If the account value is more than $10,000, FBAR reporting is required.

a grandmother gives her grandchild a 10 000 gift that is used to open a custodial ac 609973

A grandmother gives her grandchild a $10,000 gift that is used to open a custodial account under the Model Gifts of Securities to Minors Act. The grandchild”s father acts as custodian/trustee of the account. Interest on the account for 2012 is $200. Who reports the interest?

a. Incorrect. The grandmother, who donated the funds, does not report the interest because she has given away the money.

b. Incorrect. The father does not report the interest even though he acts as the account”s custodian or trustee.

c. Correct. The grandchild reports the interest because his or her Social Security Number is used for a custodial account.

d. Incorrect. Interest earned in this type of account is not tax free.

in 1995 lidia age 30 purchased a series ee bond for 1 000 in 2012 she redeemed it an 609974

In 1995, Lidia, age 30, purchased a Series EE bond for $1,000. In 2012, she redeemed it and used all of the proceeds to pay for qualified education expenses of her daughter, who is her dependent. On redemption, she received $1,450, $975 of which is principal and $475 of which is interest. If Lidia”s modified adjusted gross income in 2012 is $90,000, how much, if any, of the proceeds are excludable? (Assume Lidia is a single mother filing as head of household.)

a. Correct. Because Lidia”s MAGI is over $87,850 in 2012, she cannot exclude any interest on redemption of the bond, even though it is used for qualified higher education expenses of her dependent child.

b. Incorrect. The full amount of interest, or $475, would be excludable if her MAGI were below $72,850.

c. Incorrect. The $975 is principal, which is not taxable regardless of MAGI.

d. Incorrect. The $1,000 is what Lidia paid for the bond; the proceeds do not reflect a recovery of her full investment.

an advertising agency uses a jobs costing system to calculate the cost of client con 609978

An advertising agency uses a jobs costing system to calculate the cost of client contracts. Contract A42 is one of several contracts undertaken in the last accounting period. Costs associated with the contract consist of :
Direct materials $5 500
Direct expenses $14 500
Design staff worked 1020 hours on contract A42, of which 120 hours were overtime. One third of these overtime hours were worked at the request of the client who wanted the contract to be completed quickly. Overtime is paid at a premium of 25% of the basic wage of $24.00 per hour. The prime cost of contract A42 is
A $41 600 B $44 480 C $44 720 D $45 200

there was no stock at the beginning of the week 609983

E Ltd’s stock purchases during a recent week were as following:

Day

Price per unit($)

Units purchased

1

1.45

55

2

1.60

80

3

1.75

120

4

1.80

75

5

1.90

130

There was no stock at the beginning of the week. 420 units were issued to production during the week. The company updates its stock records after every transaction.

(a) Using a first in, first out (FIFO) method of costing stock issues, the value of closing stock would be:

(b) If E Ltd changes to the weighted average method of stock valuation, the effect on closing stock value and on profit compared with the FIFO method will be

A Higher closing stock value and higher gross profit

B Lower closing stock value and higher gross profit

C Lower closing stock value and lower gross profit

D Higher closing stock value and lower gross profit

based on the data above at what level of stocks would a replenishment order be issue 609987

A domestic appliance retailer with multiple outlets stocks a popular toaster known as the Autocrisp 2000, for which the following information is available:

Average sales

75 per day

Maximum sales

95 per day

Minimum sales

50 per day

Lead time

12-18 days

Re-order quantity

1750

(i) Based on the data above, at what level of stocks would a replenishment order be issued?

A 1050 B 1330 C 1710 D 1750

(ii) Based on the data above, what is the maximum level of stocks possible?

A 1750 B 2860 C 3460 D 5210

each minute earned is valued at for piecework calculation 609990

Cakulation of enmity

(a) A company is proposing to introduce an incentive scheme into its factory. Required:

Three advantage sand three disadvantages of individual incentive schemes.

(b) The company is undecided on what kind of scheme to introduce. Required:

From the following information calculate for each employee his earnings. using

(i) guaranteed hourly rates on/y(1%1de pay):

piecework but with earnings guaranteed at 75% of bask pay where the employee fails to camthis amount:

(i) premium bonus. in which the employee receives two-thirds of time saved in addition to hourly pay.

Employees

A

B

C

D

Actual hours worked

38

36

40

34

Hourly rate of pay

£3

£2

£2.50

£3.60

Output (units) X

42

120

120

Y

92

50

Standard time allowed (per unit):

X: 6 minutes: 9 minutes: 2:15 minutes

Each minute earned is valued at £0.05 for piecework calculation.

calculate the effect on the company s budgeted weekly profits of the proposed incent 609991

Effect of an incentive scheme on company profits. You have been approached for your advice on the proposed introduction of an incentive scheme for the direct operatives in the final production department of a factory producing one standard product. This department the Finishing Shop. employs 30 direct operatives. all of whom are paid £8 per hour for a basic 410-hour week. with a guaranteed wage 01(3)3 per week. When necessary. overtime is worked up to a maximum of 15 hours per week per operative and is paid at time rate plus one-half. It is the opinion of the personnel manager that no more direct operatives could be recruited for this department.

An analysis of recent production returns from the Finishing Shop indicates that the current average output is approximately to units oldie standard product per productive man-hour. The work study manager has conducted an appraisal of the working methods in the Finishing Shop and suggests that it would be reasonable to expect operatives to process S units of the product per man-hour and that a piecework scheme he introduced in which the direct operatives arc paid 11.40 for each unit processed. It is anticipated that. when necessary. Operatives would continue to work overtime up to the previous specified limit, although as the operatives would be on piece work no premium would be paid. Next year”s budgeted production for the factory varies from a minimum of 7000 units per week to a maximum of 12000 units per week with the most frequent budgeted weekly output being 9600 units-The expected selling price of the product next year is £11 per unit and the budgeted variable production cost of the incomplete product passed into the Finishing Shop amounts to £8 per unit. Variable production overheads in the Finishing Shop. excluding the overtime premium of the direct operatives, are budgeted to be £0.48 per direct labour hour worked. and it is considered that variable overheads130mile directly with productive hours worked. Direct material costs are not incurred by the Finishing Shop. The fixed overheads incurred by the factory amount in total to D9000 per week. Stocks of work in progress and finished goods are not carried.

Required:

(i) Calculate the effect on the company”s budgeted weekly profits of the proposed incentive scheme in the Finishing Shop. (Calculation should be to the nearest 1.)

(ii) Explain the reasons for the changes in the weekly budgeted profits caused by the proposed incentive scheme.

calculate the number of units that can be ordered at the re order level if 609992

One of the components used by K Ltd is ordered from a specialist supplier. The daily usage for this component and the time between placing and receiving an order (the lead time) can vary as follows:

Maximum usage

750 per day

Average usage

580 per day

Minimum usage

450 per day

Maximum lead time

15 days

Average lead time

12 days

Minimum lead time

8 day

Calculate the number of units that can be ordered at the re-order level if. As a result of storage problems, the company cannot allow stock to rise above 15 000 units.

the company stock ordering policy is based on the economic order quantity 609993

Cakulation of number of orders and holding costs

N Ltd’s Chief Executive believes the company is holding excessive stocks and has asked the Management Accountant to carry out an investigation.

Information on the two stock items is given below:

Stock item

Purchase price $ per unit

Administration cost $ per order

Demand units

Holding cost per year % of purchase price

G

200

80

15 000 per year

13.33

H

25

28

2800 per year

8.00

The company’s stock ordering policy is based on the Economic Order Quantity. (EOQ)

Required:

(a) Determine the number of orders per year that the company will place for item G

(b) Determine the annual holding cost of the stock of item H

current annual total stock costs are being the total of the purchasing ordering and 609994

Calculation of EOQ

A business currently order 1000 units of product X at a time. It has decided that it may be better to use the Economic Order Quantity method to establish an optimal reorder quantity.
Information regarding stocks in given below:

Purchase price

£15/unit

Fixed cost per order

£200

Holding cost

8% of the purchase price per annum

Annual demand

12 000 units

Current annual total stock costs are £183 000, being the total of the purchasing, ordering and holding costs of product X.

Required

(a) Calculate the Economic Order Quantity

(b) Using your answer to (a) above calculate the revised annual total stock costs for product X and so establish the difference compared to the current ordering policy.

what is the labour hour overhead absorption rate 609999

The following data are to be used for sub-questions (i) and (ii) below:

Budgeted labour hours

8500

Budgeted overheads

£148 750

Actual labour hours

7928

Actual overheads

£146 200

(i) Based on the data given above, what is the labour hour overhead absorption rate?

A £17.50 per hour

B £17.50 per hour

C £18.44 per hour

D £18.76 per hour

(ii) Based on the data gives above, what is the amount of overhead under-over-absorbed?

A £2550 under-absorbed

B £2529 under-absorbed

C £2550 under-absorbed

D £7460 under-absorbed

manufacturing processes and absorbs overheads on the most appropriate bosis 610003

Canberra has established the following information regarding fixed overheads for the coming month:

Fixed overheads

£180 000

Labour hours

3 000

Machine hours

10 000

Units of production

5 000

Actual fixed costs for the last month were £160 000.

Canberra produces many different products using highly automated

Manufacturing processes and absorbs overheads on the most appropriate bosis.

A £16

B £18

C £36

D £60

the management accountant rsquo s report shows that fixed production overheads were 610004

The management accountant’s report shows that fixed production overheads were over-absorbed in the last accounting period. The combination that is certain to lead to this situation is

Productions activity

and

Fixed overhead expenditure

A

lower than budget

and

higher than budget

B

Higher than budget

and

higher than budget

C

As budgeted

and

as budgeted

D

higher than budget

and

lower than budget

an engineering firm operates a job costing system 610005

An engineering firm operates a job costing system. Production overhead is absorbed at the rate of $8.50 per machine hour. In order to allow for non-production overhead costs and profit, a make up of 60% of prime cost is added to the production cost when preparing price estimates. The estimated requirements of job number 808 are as follows:

Direct materials

$10 650

Direct labour

$3 260

Machine hours

140

The estimated price notified to the customer for job number 808 will be

A $22 256 B $22 851 C $23 446 D $24 160

a furniture making business manufactures quality furniture to customers order 610008

Overhead analysis and calculation of product costs

A furniture-making business manufactures quality furniture to customers’ order. It has three production departments and two service departments.

Budgeted overhead costs for the coming year are as follows:

Total (£)

Rent and Rates

12 800

Machine insurance

6 000

Telephone charges

3 200

Depreciation

18 000

Production Supervisor’s salaries

24 000

Heating, lighting

6 400

70 400

The three production department – A, B and C, and the two service department – X and Y, are housed in the new premises, the details of which, together with other statistics and information, are gives below.

Departments

A

B

C

X

Y

Floor area occupied (sq. metres)

3000

1800

600

600

400

Machine value (£1000)

24

10

8

4

2

Direct labour hrs budgeted

3200

1800

1000

Labour rates per hour

£3.80

£3.50

£3.40

£3.00

£3.00

Allocated Overheard:

Specific to each department (£000)

2.8

1.7

1.2

0.8

0.6

Service Department X’s

costs apportioned

50%

25%

25%

Service Department Y’s

costs apportioned

20%

30%

50%

Required:

(a) Prepare a statement showing the overhead cost budgeted for each department, showing the basis of apportionment used. Also calculate suitable overhead absorption rates.

(b) Two pieces of furniture are to be manufactured for customers. Direct costs are as follows:

Job 123

Job 124

Direct Material

£154

£108

Direct Labour

20 hours Dept A

16 hours Dept A

12 hours Dept B

10 hours Dept B

10 hours Dept C

14 hours Dept C

Calculate the total costs of each job.

(c) If the firm quotes prices to customers that reflect a required profit of 25% on selling price. Calculate the quoted selling price for each job.

(d) If material costs are a significant past of total costs in a manufacturing company, describe a system of material control that might be used in order to effectively control costs, paying particular attention to the stock control aspect.

on 31 march 2011 y ltd made a profit of rs 1 25 000 after considering the following 609914

On 31 March 2011 Y Ltd. made a profit of Rs.1,25,000 after considering the following.

Depreciation on Billings

Rs.25,000

Depreciation on Plant and

Rs.45,000

Machinery

Amortization or Goodwill

Rs.20,000

Gain on Sale of Machinery

Rs.10,000

The Current Assets and Current Liabilities:

1.4.2010
Rs.

31.3.2011
Rs.

Accounts Receivable

35,000

45,000

Stock on Hand

75,000

69,000

Cash on Hand

18,000

30,000

Accounts Payable

30,000

32,000

Expenses Payable

10,000

5,000

Bank Overdraft

60,000

35,000

Ascertain Cash Flow from Operating Activities

calculate net cash flows from operating activities from the following details 609915

Calculate net cash flows from operating activities from the following details.

Profits Earned During the Year 2011

50,000

Transfer to General Reserve

10,000

Depreciation Provided

20,000

Profit on Sale of Furniture

5,000

Loss on Sale of Machineries

10,000

Preliminary Expenses Retain off

10,000

Particulars

2010

2011

Rs.

Rs.

Accounts Receivable

35,000

45,000

Debtors

10,000

15,000

Bills Receivable

7,000

5,000

Stock

15,000

18,000

Prepaid Expenses

2,000

3,000

Bills Expenses

15,000

25,000

Creditors

20,000

18,000

Outstanding Expenses

3,000

4,000

calculate the cash flow from operating activities form the following information 609918

Calculate the cash flow from operating activities form the following information.

Profit for the Year

Rs.50,000

Transfer to General Reserve

Rs.10,000

Depreciation Provided

Rs.20,000

Profit on Sale of Furniture

Rs.5,000

Loss on Sale of Furniture

Rs.10,000

Preliminary Exp. Written off

Rs.10,000

Particulars

31 March 2008

31 March 2009

Rs.

Rs.

Debtors

10,000

15,000

Bills Receivable

7,000

5,000

Stock

15,000

18,000

Prepaid Expenses

2,000

3,000

Creditors

20,000

18,000

Bills Payable

15,000

25,000

Outstanding Expenses

3,000

4,000

from the following summarized balance sheets of a company calculate cash flow from o 609920

From the following summarized balance sheets of a company calculate cash flow from operating activities.

Liabilities

2010
Rs.

201 1
Rs.

Assets

2010
Rs.

2011
Rs.

Creditors

20,000

25,000

Cash

20,000

30,000

Bills Payable

20,000

25,000

Investments

40,000

30,000

Other Current Liabilities

40,000

45,000

Stock

30,000

45,000

6% Debentures

60,000

80,000

Debtors

30,000

40,000

Profit and Loss A/c

90,000

1,10,000

Gross Block

1,00,000

1,40,000

2,30,000

2,85,000

2,30,000

2,85,000

interest received on debentures held as an investment rs 18 000 dividend received on 609925

From the following particulars calculate cash flow from investing activities.

Purchase
Rs.

Sold
Rs.

Investment

2,30,000

1,40,000

Goodwill

1,75,000

Machinery

5,30,000

2,10,000

Patents

75,000

Interest received on debentures held as an investment Rs. 18,000. Dividend received on shares held as investments Rs. 25,000. A part of the building was purchased out of surplus funds for investment purposes, which earned Rs. 75,000 by way of rent.

during the year a machine costing rs 50 000 with accumulated depreciation of rs 30 0 609926

From the following information calculate cash flow from investing activities.

31 March 2010
Rs.

31 March 2011
Rs.

Machinery

5,00,000

1,00,000

Accumulated

1,00,000

1,20,000

Depreciation

Patent Rights

3,00,000

1,80,000

Additional Information:

  1. During the year, a machine costing Rs.50,000 with accumulated depreciation of Rs. 30,000 was sold for Rs.25,000.
  2. Patents were written off to the extent of Rs.30,000 and some patents were sold at a profit of Rs.25,000

a public limited company provides the following figures calculate the net cash flow 609929

A public limited company provides the following figures. Calculate the net cash flow from financing activities.

31 March
2010
Rs.

31 March
2010
Rs.

Equity Share Capital

8,00,000

12,00,000

10% Debentures

1,50,000

6% Debentures

3,00,000

Additional Information:

  1. Interest paid on debentures: Rs.15,000
  2. Dividend paid: Rs.40,000
  3. During the year 2010–11, the company issued bonus shares in the ratio of 2:1 by capitalizing the reserve.

calculate cash flow from i investing activities and ii financing activities from the 609930

Calculate cash flow from (i) investing activities and (ii) financing activities from the following information.

31 March
2010
Rs.

31 March
2010
Rs.

Furniture (at Cost)

30,000

40,000

Accumulated

7,000

10,000

Depreciations

Furniture

Capital

1,50,000

2,25,000

Loan from Bank

40,000

25,000

During the year 2010–11, furniture costing Rs.5,000 was sold at a profit of Rs.3,000. Depreciation charged during the year was Rs.6,000.

from the following summary cash account of xyz ltd you are required to prepare a cas 609931

From the following summary cash account of XYZ Ltd. you are required to prepare a cash flow statement for the year ended on 31 March 2011 in accordance with AS-3. Summary Cash Account for the Year Ended on 31 March 2011

Particulars

Rs.

Particulars

Rs.

Opening Balance

50,000

Payment to

20,00,000

Suppliers

Issue of Equity

3,00,000

Purchase of Fixed

2,00,000

Shares

Assets

Receipts from

28,00,000

Overhead

2,00,000

Customers

Expenses

Sale of Fixed

1,00,000

Wages and

1,00,000

Assets

Salaries

Taxation

2,50,000

Dividend

50,000

Repayment of

3,00,000

Loan

Closing Balance

1,50,000

32,50,000

32,50,000

the balance sheet of j k ltd as on 31 march 2010 and 31 march 2011 are as follows 609932

The balance sheet of J.K. Ltd. as on 31 March 2010 and 31 March 2011 are as follows:

Liabilities

31 March
2010
Rs.

31 March
2011
Rs.

Assets

31 March
2010
Rs.

31 March
2011

Share Capital

1,60,000

1,80,000

Fixed Assets

80,000

1,12,000

Profit and Loss A/c

60,000

96,000

Inventories

40,000

28,000

Creditors

40,000

60,000

Debtors

1,20,000

1,80,000

Liabilities for Expenses

12,000

20,000

Cash and Bank Balance

20,000

28,000

Advance Income

8,000

4,000

Prepaid Expenses

12,000

8,000

Deferred Expenses

8,000

4,000

2,80,000

3,60,000

2,80,000

3,60,000

Additional Information:

An old machine was sold for Rs.20,000, which had a written down value of Rs.10,000; dividend paid during the year was Rs.16,000 and depreciation charged to profit and loss account for the year amounted to Rs.10,000. Prepare the cash flow statement.

cost of goods sold was 60 of the sales closing inventory was higher than the opening 609933

X Ltd. gives you the following information for the year ended on 31 March 2011:

  1. Sales for the year totalled is Rs.48,00,000. The Company sells goods for cash only.
  2. Cost of goods sold was 60% of the sales. Closing inventory was higher than the opening inventory by Rs.21,500. Trade creditors on 31 March 2011 exceeded those on 31 March 2010 by Rs.11,500.
  3. Net profit before tax was Rs.6,90,000. Tax paid amounted to Rs.3,50,000. Depreciation on fixed assets for the year was Rs.1,57,000, whereas other expenses totaled Rs.10,72,500. Outstanding expenses on 31 March 2010 and 31 March 2011 totaled Rs.41,000 and Rs.45,000, respectively.
  4. New machinery and furniture costing Rs.5,13,750 in all were purchased.
  5. A right issue was made of 1,000 equity shares of Rs.250 each at a premium of Rs.75 per share. The entire money was received along the applications.
  6. Dividends and corporate dividend tax totaling Rs.2,03,500 were paid.
  7. Cash in hand and at bank as on 31 March 2010 totaled Rs.1,06,900.

You are required to prepare cash flow statement using indirect method.

the following data were provided by the accounting records of x ltd as the year ende 609934

The following data were provided by the accounting records of X Ltd. as the year ended on 31 March 2011:

Rs.

Sales

40,00,000

Cost of Goods Sold

(24,00,000)

Gross Profit

16,00,000

Operating Expenses

(2,00,000)

(Including Depreciation)

Indirect Expenses Paid

(1,20,000)

Interest Income Received

40,000

Gain on Sale of Investments

60,000

Loss on Sale of Plant

(20,000)

Net Profit Before Tax

7,60,000

Provision for Income Tax

(2,80,000)

Net Profit After Tax

4,80,000

Balance Sheets

Assets

As on 31 March 2011 Rs.

As on 31 March 2010 Rs.

Plant

28,00,000

20,00,000

Less: Accumulated Depreciation

(4,00,000)

(3,20,000)

24,00,000

16,80,000

Investment (Long-term)

4,00,000

6,40,000

Inventory

6,00,000

4,40,000

Accounts Receivable

1,80,000

2,20,000

Cash at Bank

2,00,000

1,80,000

37,80,000

31,60,000

Liabilities

Rs.

Rs.

Equity Share Capital

16,00,000

8,00,000

Securities Premium

80,000

General Reserve

6,00,000

5,20,000

P & L A/c

1,40,000

32,000

Debentures

10,00,000

14,00,000

Accounts Payable

2,40,000

2,08,000

Provision for Tax

1,20,000

2,00,000

37,80,000

31,60,000

Additional Information:

  1. Sol investment for Rs.3,00,000.
  2. Issued equity shares ofRs.10 each at 10% premium.
  3. Sold plant that cost Rs.48,000 with accumulated depreciation of Rs.8,000 for Rs.20,000.
  4. Paid dividend. You are required to prepare cash flow statement as per AS-3 (Revised)

the data given ahead were provided by the accounting records of shuchi diamonds ltd 609935

The data given ahead were provided by the accounting records of Shuchi diamonds Ltd.:

Income Statement

Liabilities

2011

2010

Assets

2011

2010

Share Capital:

2,32,500

1,57,500

Plant Assets

3,57,500

2,52,500

Reserves and Surplus

70,000

66,000

Less: Accumulated

(51,500)

(34,000)

 

 

 

Depreciation

 

 

Current Liabilities:

 

 

 

3,06,000

2,18,500

Account Payable

25,000

21,500

Investment (Long Term)

57,500

63,500

Accrued Liabilities

6,000

4,500

Current Assets:

 

 

Income Tax Payable

1,500

2,500

Inventory

72,000

55,000

Secured Loan:

 

 

Accounts Receivable

23,500

27,500

Bonds

1,97,500

1,22,500

Cash

23,000

7,500

 

 

 

Prepaid Expenses

500

2,500

 

4,82,500

3,74,500

 

4,82,500

3,74,500

(for the Year Ended on 31 March 2010) 

 

 

Rs.

Sales

 

3,49,000

Cost of Goods Sold

 

(2,60,000)

Gross Margin

 

89,000

Operating Expenses

 

(73,500)

(Including Depreciation Expenses of 18,500)

 

15,500

Other Income (Expenses):

 

 

Interest Expenses Paid

(11,500)

 

Interest Income Received

3,000

 

Gain on Sale of Investments

6,000

 

Loss on Sale of Plant

(1,500)

(4,000)

Provision Before Tax

 

11,500

Provision for tax

 

(3,500)

Provision After Tax

 

8,000

Comparative Balance Sheets (as on 31 March)

Analysis of selected transactions and accounts during 2010–11:

  1. Sold investments costing Rs.45,000 for Rs.51,000. Some investments were purchased for cash.
  2. Sold plant assets that cost Rs.5,000 with accumulated depreciation of Rs.1,000 for Rs.2,500.
  3. Issued Rs.50,000 of bonds at face value in exchange for plant assets on 31 March 2011. Some plant assets were purchased for cash also.
  4. Repaid Rs.25,000 of bonds as face value as majority.
  5. Issued 7,500 shares of Rs.10 each for cash at par.
  6. Paid cash dividends Rs.4,000—ignore corporate dividend tax.

Prepare cash flow statement for the year ended on 31 March 2011 as per AS-(3) (Revised) using indirect method.

from the information given below relating to pooja ltd you are required to prepare a 609936

From the information given below relating to Pooja Ltd., you are required to prepare a cash flow statement:

Assets

31 March 2011

31 March 2010

Freehold Land and Building

50,000

at Cost

 

 

Less: Depreciation

(10,000)

Leasehold Land and Building

25,000

Less: Depreciation

(500)

Plant and Equipment at Cost

1,50,000

6,00,000

Less: Depreciation

(1,25,000)

(1,60,000)

Investment at Cost

30,000

Stock in Hand

1,50,000

1,00,000

Debtors

50,000

50,000

Bank

5,000

Discount on Issue of

1,250

Debentures

 

 

 

3,00,000

6,15,750

Liabilities and Capital

   

Preference Shares of 10

25,000

Ordinary Shares of 10

1,00,000

1,60,000

Capital Redemption Reserve

20,000

Account

 

 

Securities Premium Account

10,000

20,000

Surplus on Sale of:

 

 

Freehold Land and Building

60,000

Investment

10,000

Govt. Grants

15,000

25,000

Retained Profits

1,05,000

1,25,000

Debentures

50,000

Loan from UTI for 5 years

25,000

Creditors for Goods

20,000

35,000

Bank Overdraft

47,000

Taxation

30,000

30,000

Acceptance Credit

3,750

 

3,00,000

6,15,750

Additional information:

  1. No plan and equipment was sold or scrapped during the year.
  2. On 1 January 2011, The freehold land and building were sold and leased back from the purchaser.
  3. A bonus issue of ordinary shares on the basis of one new share for every five held has been made. The capital redemption reserve was used for this purpose.
  4. The preference shares were issued for cash at par.
  5. An issue of Rs.10 ordinary shares was made at a price of Rs.12.50 per share.
  6. Debentures were issued at a discount of 10%.
  7. No dividends were paid or proposed for the year.
  8. Explain briefly why the cash at bank has become nil although the retained earnings have registered an increase over the last year.

the following are the balance sheets of subhikishu ltd as on 31 march 2010 and 31 ma 609937

The following are the balance sheets of Subhikishu Ltd. as on 31 March 2010 and 31 March 2011, respectively.

Liabilities

31 March

31 March

Assets

31 March

31 March

 

2011

2010

 

2011

2010

 

Rs.

Rs.

 

Rs.

Rs.

Equity Share Capital

13,50,000

12,50,00

Land

3,75,000

3,75,000

Securities Premium

3,85,000

3,75,000

Buildings

20,62,500

17,87,500

P & L A/c

27,52,500

25,22,500

Plants

1375,000

11,25,00

15% Debentures

2,50,000

5,00,000

Investments

13,75,000

11,25,000

Expenses Due

52,500

65,000

Patents

35,000

25,000

Tax Payable

3,75,000

2,57,500

Debtors

10,00,000

10,62,500

Bills Payable

1,25,000

1,75,000

Bills Receivable

25,000

20,000

Creditors

5,50,000

4,50,000

Stock

11,55,000

11,35,000

Accumulated Depreciation

 

 

Cash

3,37,500

2,50,000

Plants

2,25,000

1,87,500

Preliminary Expense

12,500

15,00

Buildings

6,25,000

5,75,000

 

 

 

Provision for Doubtful Debts

50,000

62,500

 

 

 

 

67,40,000

64,20,000

 

67,40,000

64,20,000

Additional Information:

  1. Debentures were redeemed at a premium of 10% on 1 October 2010.
  2. Investments were sold at a profit of 50% on cost.
  3. During the year a machine costing Rs.2,50,000 (accumulated depreciation of 1,00,000) was sold at a profit of 20% on book value.
  4. During the year building costing Rs.5,25,000 was purchased by issue of 10,000 equity shares of Rs.10 each at a premium of Rs.1 per share and balance by cash.
  5. A building costing Rs.2,50,000 (with accumulated depreciation of Rs.1,75,000) was sold for Rs.85,000. Prepare cash flow statement as per AS-3 (Revised). Show all working clearly.

 

state whether the following statements are true or false 609910

State whether the following statements are true or false

  1. Inflow of cash refers to all transactions, which lead to increase in cash and cash equivalents.
  2. Outflow of cash refers to all transactions, which lead to decrease in cash and cash equivalents.
  3. Non-cash transactions are covered in cash flow statements.
  4. Cash sales is cash outflow.
  5. Cash receipts from debtors is a financing activity.
  6. Cash payment relating to a future contract is an investing activity.
  7. Cash receipts from debtors is treated as cash inflow for operating activities.
  8. Cash receipts on interest and dividend is treated as cash inflow for financing activities.
  9. Cash proceeds from issuing share is treated as cash inflow from financing activities.
  10. Cash receipts from sale of fixed assets is shown as cash inflow from financing activities.
  11. Cash payment to creditors is treated as cash outflow for investing activities.
  12. The cash flow statement is based upon accrual basis of accounting.
  13. Redemption of preference shares is an investing activity.
  14. Cash payment to income tax is an operating activity.
  15. Repayment of any finance liability is a financing activity.
  16. Cash proceeds from long-term borrowings is an investing activity.
  17. Cash receipts from royalties is an operating activity.
  18. Cash flow statement is concerned with change in working capital position between the two different dates of balance sheet.
  19. Cash payment to creditors is a financing activity.
  20. Accounting standard (AS)-3 sets standards to the preparation of cash flow statement.
  21. Bank balance is cash equivalent in the preparation of cash flow statement.
  22. Decrease in current assets will result in increase in cash.
  23. Increase in current liabilities will result in decrease in cash.
  24. If there is net loss (negative cash from operation), then there is net outflow of cash from operating activities.
  25. Acquisition and disposal of long-term asset is termed as ‘investing activities’ of a concern.
  26. A change in owners’ capital and borrowing capital is revealed in cash flow from financing activities of a concern.
  27. If there is negative cash from activities, then there will be net inflow of cash.
  28. Revaluation of building affects cash flows.
  29. Sources and uses of cash are to be equal.
  30. Sources of cash should always be more than uses of cash.

x ltd made a profit of rs 1 00 000 after charging depreciation of rs 20 000 on asset 609912

X Ltd. made a profit of Rs.1,00,000 after charging depreciation of Rs.20,000 on assets and a transfer to general reserve of Rs.30,000. The goodwill written off was Rs.7,000 and the gain on sale of machineries was Rs.3,000. The other information available: charges in the value of current assets and current liabilities. At the end of the year debtors show an increase of Rs.6,000; creditors an increase of Rs.10,000. Prepaid expenses and increase of Rs.200; bills receivable a decrease of Rs.3,000; bills payable at decrease of Rs.4,000; and outstanding expenses a decrease of Rs.2,000. Ascertain cash flow from operating activities.

debtors showed an increase of rs 6 000 creditors an increase of rs 10 000 prepaid ex 609913

X Ltd. made a profit of Rs.1,20,000 after charging depreciation of ? 20,000 on assets and a transfer to general reserve of Rs.30,000. The goodwill written off was Rs.7,000 and the gain on sale of the machineries was Rs.3,000. Changes in the value of current assets and liabilities at the end of the year:

Debtors showed an increase of Rs.6,000; creditors an increase of Rs.10,000; prepaid expenses an increase of Rs.200; bills receivable a decrease of Rs.3,000; bills payable a decrease of Rs.4,000 and outstanding expenses a decrease of Rs.2,000. Ascertain cash flow from operating activities.

this exercise will give you practice in identifying those accounts which are closed 609813

This exercise will give you practice in identifying those accounts which are closed at the end of the accounting period and those accounts which are not closed.

Instructions

Indicate whether the following accounts would or would not be closed at the end of the accounting period by placing an “X” in the appropriate column.

Accounts

Closed

Not Closed

1.

Accounts Receivable

2.

Rental Revenue

3.

Repairs Expense

4.

Building

5.

Depreciation Expense

6.

Accumulated Depreciation

7.

Notes Payable

8.

Interest Payable

9.

Sales Revenue

10.

Salaries and Wages Expense

11.

Revenue Received in Advancea

12.

Furniture

13.

Prepaid Insurance

14.

Insurance Expense

15.

Advertising Expense

16.

Retained Earnings

17.

Dividends

18.

Interest Revenue

19.

Common Stock

20.

Cash

aAnother title for Unearned Revenue.

 

this exercise illustrates the preparation of closing entries and discusses their imp 609814

This exercise illustrates the preparation of closing entries and discusses their importance.

The recording and posting of closing entries is a required step in the accounting cycle.

Instructions

  1. Prepare the closing entries for Carl”s Video Service, Inc. at April 30, 2014.
  2. Discuss the two reasons why closing entries are prepared.
  3. Prepare a post-closing trial balance for Carl”s Video Service, Inc.
  4. Explain why a post-closing trial balance is prepared and indicate what type of accounts will appear on the post-closing trial.

indicate the proper sequence of the steps by numbering them ldquo 1 rdquo ldquo 2 rd 609815

This exercise will review the proper sequence of the required steps in the accounting cycle.

The required steps in the accounting cycle are listed in random order below.

a.

Prepare an adjusted trial balance.

b.

Analyze business transactions.

c.

Prepare a post-closing trial balance.

d.

Prepare a trial balance.

e.

Prepare financial statements.

f.

Post to ledger accounts.

g.

Journalize and post adjusting entries.

h.

Journalize and post-closing entries.

i.

Journalize the transactions.

Instructions

Indicate the proper sequence of the steps by numbering them “1,” “2,” and so forth in the spaces provided.

arrange the ten procedures carried out in the accounting cycle in the order in which 609816

This exercise reviews the procedures involved in the accounting cycle when the two optional steps, a worksheet and reversing entries, are employed.

Ten steps in the accounting cycle for a company which uses a worksheet and reversing entries are listed in random order below.

a.

Journalize and post-closing entries.

b.

Prepare financial statements from the worksheet.

c.

Prepare a post-closing trial balance.

d.

Balance the ledger accounts and prepare a trial balance on the worksheet.

e.

Journalize and post adjustments made on the worksheet.

f.

Record transactions in the journal.

g.

Journalize and post reversing entries.

h.

Post from journal to the ledger.

i.

Complete the worksheet (adjusting entries, adjusted trial balance and extend amounts to financial statement columns).

j.

Analyze business transactions.

Instructions

Arrange the ten procedures carried out in the accounting cycle in the order in which they should be performed by numbering them “1,” “2,” and so forth in the spaces provided.

indicate which balance sheet classification is the most appropriate for reporting ea 609817

This exercise will allow you to practice identifying the classification of accounts on a classified balance sheet.

A list of the balance sheet classifications appears below along with a list of account titles for the Steve Martin Corporation.

Classifications

CA

Current Assets

CL

Current Liabilities

INV

Long-Term Investments

LTL

Long-Term Liabilities

PPE

Property, Plant and Equipment

SE

Shareholders” Equity

ITG

Intangible Assets

NRBS

Not Reported on the Balance Sheet

1. Accounts Receivable

2. Wages and Salaries Payable

3. Notes Payable (due in 4 years)

4. Office Equipment

5. Bank Loan Payable (due in 6 months)

6. Patent

7. Notes Payable (due in 4 mos.)

8. Bonds Payable (due in 20 years)

9. Notes Receivable (due in 3 years)

10. Mortgages Payable (due in 5 years)

11. Salaries and Wages Expense

12. Prepaid Insurance

13. Delivery Trucks

14. Copyright

15. Cash

16. Utilities Expense

17. Depreciation Expense

18. Rent Revenue Received in Advance (to be earned in 6 mos.)

19. Interest Receivable

20. Rent Revenue

21. Common Stock

22. Building

23. Prepaid Advertising

24. Prepaid Property Taxes

25. Investment in Orlando Aviation Authority Bonds

26. Property Taxes Payable

27. Investment in Stock of ABC Corporation

28. Land

29. Parking Lots & Driveways

30. Trademark

31. Unearned Subscription Revenue

32. Retained Earnings

Instructions

Indicate which balance sheet classification is the most appropriate for reporting each account listed above by selecting the abbreviation of the corresponding section. If the account is not a real (permanent) account, use the abbreviation NRBS for Not Reported on the Balance Sheet.

the declaration and distribution of a cash dividend was recorded by a debit to salar 609818

This exercise will illustrate how to correct errors made in the recording process.

The following errors were discovered in the books of the Cool Way AC Repair Shop.

  1. A cash payment of $120 for repairs on a typewriter was recorded by a debit to Office Equipment and a credit to Cash.
  2. A cash payment of $70 for office supplies was recorded by a debit to Office Supplies and a credit to Accounts Payable.
  3. The declaration and distribution of a cash dividend was recorded by a debit to Salaries and Wages Expense and a credit to Cash for $700.
  4. A cash payment of $150 for an ad appearing in Sunday”s edition of the local newspaper was recorded by a debit to Utilities Expense and a credit to Cash for $150.
  5. A $500 cash receipt from a customer on account was recorded by a debit to Cash for $50 and a credit to Service Revenue for $50.
  6. The first interest payment made this accounting period (on a note payable) was for $1,000, which included $300 of interest accrued at the end of the last accounting period. The payment was recorded by a debit to Interest Expense for $1,000 and a credit to Cash for $1,000. (No reversing entries were made at the beginning of this accounting period.)
  7. A $300 cash sale of services was recorded by a debit to Accounts Receivable for $300 and a credit to Service Revenue for $300.
  8. A cash payment of $2,000 for some new tools was recorded by a debit to Tools for $200 and a credit to Cash for $200.

Instructions

Prepare an analysis of each error showing the

(a) incorrect entry,

(b) correct entry, and

(c) correcting entry.

obligations reasonably expected to be paid from existing current assets or through t 609819

This exercise will quiz you about terminology used in this chapter.

A list of accounting terms with which you should be familiar appears below:

Classified balance sheet

Long-term liabilities (long-term debt)

Closing entries

Operating cycle

Correcting entries

Permanent (real) accounts

Current assets

Post-closing trial balance

Current liabilities

Property, plant, and equipment

Income Summary

Reversing entry

Intangible assets

Stockholders” equity

Liquidity

Temporary (nominal) accounts

Long-term investments

Worksheet

Instructions

For each item below, enter in the blank the term that is described.

  1. A multiple-column form that may be used in the adjustment process and in preparing financial statements.
  2. Entries made at the end of an accounting period to transfer the balances of temporary accounts to a permanent stockholders” equity account. For a corporation, the temporary accounts are closed to Retained Earnings.
  3. A list of permanent accounts and their balances after closing entries have been journalized and posted.
  4. Revenue, expense, and dividend accounts whose balances are transferred to retained earnings at the end of an accounting period.
  5. Accounts whose balances are carried forward to the next accounting period. Balance sheet accounts.
  6. A temporary account used in closing revenue and expense accounts.
  7. An entry made at the beginning of a new accounting period that is the exact opposite of the related adjusting entry made in the previous period.
  8. The average time required to go from cash to cash in producing revenues.
  9. Cash and other resources that are reasonably expected to be realized in cash or sold or consumed in the business within the next year or the operating cycle, whichever is longer.
  10. Resources such as stocks and bonds of other entities not expected to be realized in cash within the next year or operating cycle.
  11. Assets of a relatively permanent nature that are being used in the business and not intended for resale.
  12. Noncurrent resources that do not have physical substance.
  13. Obligations reasonably expected to be paid from existing current assets or through the creation of other current liabilities within the next year or operating cycle, whichever is longer.
  14. Obligations expected to be paid after one year or to be settled by the use of assets other than current assets or by the incurrence of long-term debt.
  15. Owners” equity of a corporation; the ownership claim of shareholders on total assets.
  16. The ability of a company to pay obligations that are expected to become due within the next year or operating cycle.
  17. Entries to correct errors made in recording transactions.
  18. A balance sheet that contains a number of standard classifications or sections.

for each adjusting entry above prepared at december 31 2014 indicate if it would be 609820

This exercise will provide practice in determining which adjusting entries may be reversed.

The following represent adjusting entries prepared for the Office Furniture Design Company.

1 Interest Expense

700

Interest Payable

700

2.Depreciation Expense

1.100

Accumulated Depreciation

I. 100

3.Rent Receivable

600

Rent Rayne

110

4.Insurance Expense

400

Prepaid Insurance

400

5.Accounts Receivable (or Fees Receivable)

300

Fees Revenue

300

6.Supplies Expense

200

Prepaid Supplies

200

7.Salaries and Wages Expense

I 000

Salaries and Wages Payable

I .UUU

8.Unearned Subscription Revenue

1.200

Subscription Revenue

1.200

Instructions

For each adjusting entry above (prepared at December 31, 2014), indicate if it would be appropriate to reverse the entry at the beginning of 2015. Indicate your answer by writing yes or no in the space provided.

this exercise reviews the journal entries to record purchases of merchandise invento 609834

This exercise reviews the journal entries to record purchases of merchandise inventory under a perpetual inventory system.

A list of transactions for the Garth Brooks Memorabilia Sales Company appears below. A perpetual inventory system is used.

July

1 Purchased merchandise from Oliver Company for $3,000 cash.

2 Purchased merchandise from Medlin Company, $5,000, FOB shipping point, terms 2/10, n/30.

6 Paid freight on July 2 purchase, $125.

10 Paid Medlin Company the amount owed.

11 Purchased merchandise from McBride Company, $7,000, FOB destination, terms 1/10, n/30.

23 Paid McBride Company the amount owed.

Aug.

7 Purchased merchandise from Dun Company, $4,000, FOB destination, terms 2/10, n/30.

9 Returned one-fourth of the merchandise acquired in the August 7 transaction to Dun Company because of detected defects.

16 Paid Dun Company the balance owed.

Instructions

Prepare the journal entries to record these transactions on the books of the Garth Brooks Memorabilia Sales Company.

a list of transactions for the garth brooks memorabilia sales company appears below 609835

This exercise reviews the journal entries to record sales of merchandise inventory under a perpetual inventory system.

A list of transactions for the Garth Brooks Memorabilia Sales Company appears below. A perpetual inventory system is used.

July

17 Sold merchandise with a cost of $300 to Eric Nelson for $520 cash.

18 Sold merchandise with a cost of $340 to Guy Sellars for $580, terms 2/10, n/30.

23 Issued a credit memo for $80 to Guy Sellars because of a sales allowance granted to him due to the inferior quality of goods sold to him on July 18.

26 Received payment from Guy Sellars for amount due for sale of July 18.

27 Sold merchandise to Jason Zahner, $200, terms n/30. The merchandise cost $120.

Aug.

25 Received payment in full from Jason Zahner.

26 Sold merchandise with a cost of $460 to Michele Blackburn for $800, terms 2/10, n/30.

28 Issued a credit memo for $150 to Michele Blackburn because she returned a portion of the goods sold to her on Aug. 26; the returned merchandise had a cost of $90.

Sept.

4 Collected balance of account from Michele Blackburn.

5 Sold merchandise to Andrea Brotherly, $600, terms 2/10, n/30. The merchandise cost $350.

22 Received payment from Andrea Brotherly for amount due for sale of Sept. 5.

23 Sold merchandise costing $220 to Herman Ichner for $400, terms 2/10, n/30.

Oct.

10 Received payment from Herman Ichner for sale of September 23.

Instructions

Prepare the journal entries to record these transactions on the books of the Garth Brooks Memorabilia Sales Company.

closing entries are recorded at the end of an accounting period to prepare the tempo 609837

This exercise will review closing entries for a merchandising enterprise

Closing entries are recorded at the end of an accounting period to prepare the temporary accounts for the subsequent accounting period. For example, assume the calendar year is the accounting period for a company. At the end of 2014, the Sales account balance is closed so that the Sales account begins the year of 2015 with a zero balance. Therefore, at the end of 2015, the balance in the Sales account will reflect sales that took place in that single year (2015).

Closing entries also update the balance of the Retained Earnings account.

Instructions

Refer to the facts in Exercise 5-5 and its Solution. Prepare the closing entries for Steve Bradley Golf Products, Inc. for the year ending December 31, 2014.

a list of transactions for the randy travis sales company appears below a periodic i 609838

This exercise reviews the journal entries to record purchases of merchandise inventory under a periodic inventory system.

A list of transactions for the Randy Travis Sales Company appears below. A periodic inventory system is used.

July 1

Purchased merchandise from Oliver Company for $3,000 cash.

2

Purchased merchandise from Medlin Company, $5,000, FOB shipping point, terms 2/10, n/30.

6

Paid freight on July 2 purchase, $125.

10

Paid Medlin Company the amount owed.

11

Purchased merchandise from McBride Company, $7,000, FOB destination, terms 1/10, n/30.

23

Paid McBride Company the amount owed.

Aug. 7

Purchased merchandise from Dun Company, $4,000, FOB destination, terms 2/10, n/30.

9

Returned one-fourth of the merchandise acquired in the August 7 transaction to Dun Company because of detected defects.

16

Paid Dun Company the balance owed.

Instructions

Prepare the journal entries to record these transactions on the books of the Randy Travis Sales Company.

prepare the journal entries to record these transactions on the books of the randy t 609839

This exercise reviews the journal entries to record sales of merchandise inventory under a periodic inventory system.

A list of transactions for the Randy Travis Sales Company appears below. A periodic inventory system is used.

July 17

Sold merchandise with a cost of $300 to Eric Nelson for cash, $520.

18

Sold merchandise with a cost of $340 to Guy Sellars for $580, terms 2/10, n/30.

23

Issued a credit memo for $80 to Guy Sellars because of a sales allowance granted to him due to the inferior quality of goods sold to him on July 18.

26

Received payment from Guy Sellars for amount due for sale of July 18.

27

Sold merchandise to Jason Zahner, $200, terms n/30. The merchandise cost $120.

Aug. 25

Received payment in full from Jason Zahner.

Sept. 5

Sold merchandise to Andrea Brotherly, $600, terms 2/10, n/30. The merchandise cost $350.

22

Received payment from Andrea Brotherly for amount due for sale of Sept. 5.

Instructions

Prepare the journal entries to record these transactions on the books of the Randy Travis Sales Company.

the following amounts relate to the current year for the ira company 609843

The following amounts relate to the current year for the Ira Company:

Beginning inventory

$ 20,000

Ending inventory

28,000

Purchases

166,000

Purchase returns

4,800

Freight-out

6,000

The amount of cost of goods sold for the period is:

  1. $169,200.
  2. $162,800.
  3. $153,200.
  4. $147,200.

the following information pertains to the boot sales company 609848

The following information pertains to the Boot Sales Company:

Sales

$100,000

Sales returns and allowances

4,500

Sales discounts

500

Purchase returns

2,000

Transportation-out

3,200

The amount of net sales for the period is:

  1. $100,000.
  2. $95,000.
  3. $93,000.
  4. $89,800.

one half of the rented premises is occupied by the sales department how much of the 609849

The following expenses and loss were among those incurred by Mitzer Corporation during 2014:

Rent for office space

$660,000

Loss on sale of office furniture

55,000

Interest

132,000

Accounting and legal fees

352,000

Freight-out

70,000

One-half of the rented premises is occupied by the sales department. How much of the items listed above should be classified as administrative expenses in Mitzer”s income statement for 2014?

  1. $682,000.
  2. $869,000.
  3. $884,000.
  4. $939,000.

the accountant for the orion sales company is preparing the income statement for 201 609852

The accountant for the Orion Sales Company is preparing the income statement for 2014 and the balance sheet at December 31, 2014. Orion uses the periodic inventory system. The January 1, 2014 merchandise inventory balance will appear:

  1. only as an asset on the balance sheet.
  2. only in the cost of goods sold section of the income statement.
  3. as a deduction in the cost of goods sold section of the income statement and as a current asset on the balance sheet.
  4. as an addition in the cost of goods sold section of the income statement and as a current asset on the balance sheet.

bank a of illustration 5 1 has made a risk assessment of the borrower and is confide 609858

Bank A of Illustration 5.1 has made a risk assessment of the borrower and is confident that there is a 95 per cent probability of the borrower repaying the principal and interest as scheduled. It also makes a conservative estimate that in case of default, the bank can recover about 85 per cent of the principal and interest due. The bank feels that it cannot quote a rate lower than 14 per cent on the loan. What should be the rate it quotes to the borrower to include the default risk? Let us assume that the bank”s cost of funds is 12 per cent and the servicing costs are at 0.25 per cent.

if the bank in the illustrations 5 1 and 5 2 desires to give its shareholders a retu 609859

If the bank in the Illustrations 5.1 and 5.2 desires to give its shareholders a return of 20 per cent, its assets amount to Rs. 10,000 crore, and its capital amounts to Rs. 1,000 crore, what should be the profit margin it should target for the borrower seeking Rs. 50 crore of credit, assuming that its cost of funds and servicing costs remain at the levels described above, and the risk premium is 0.731 as calculated above?

Desired return = 0.20 3 1000/10000 = 0.02

Therefore, the bank should target a minimum return or profit of 2 per cent on the transaction. The bank already has proposed a return of 3 per cent which is profitable for the bank.

which of the following choices best describes reasonable conclusions an analyst migh 609714

Which of the following choices best describes reasonable conclusions an analyst might make about the company’s profitability?

A. Comparing FY14 with FY10, the company’s profitability improved, as indicated by an increase in its debt-to-assets ratio from 0.14 to 0.27.

B. Comparing FY14 with FY10, the company’s profitability deteriorated, as indicated by a decrease in its net profit margin from 11.0 percent to 5.7 percent.

C. Comparing FY14 with FY10, the company’s profitability improved, as indicated by the growth in its shareholders’ equity to GBP 6,165 million.

based only on this information the most appropriate conclusion is that over the peri 609715

An analyst compiles the following data for a company:

FY13

FY14

FY15

ROE

19.8%

20.0%

22.0%

Return on total assets

8.1%

8.0%

7.9%

Total asset turnover

2.0

2.0

2.1

Based only on this information, the most appropriate conclusion is that, over the period FY13 to FY15, the company’s:

A. net profit margin and financial leverage have decreased.

B. net profit margin and financial leverage have increased.

C. net profit margin has decreased but its financial leverage has increased.

which of the following choices best describes reasonable conclusions an analyst migh 609716

A decomposition of ROE for Integra SA is as follows:

FY12

FY11

ROE

18.90%

18.90%

Tax burden

0.70

0.75

Interest burden

0.90

0.90

EBIT margin

10.00%

10.00%

Asset turnover

1.50

1.40

Leverage

2.00

2.00

Which of the following choices best describes reasonable conclusions an analyst might make based on this ROE decomposition?

A. Profitability and the liquidity position both improved in FY12.

B. The higher average tax rate in FY12 offset the improvement in profitability, leaving ROE unchanged.

C. The higher average tax rate in FY12 offset the improvement in efficiency, leaving ROE unchanged.

an analyst is most likely to conclude that 609717

A decomposition of ROE for Company A and Company B is as follows:

Company A

Company B

FY15

FY14

FY15

FYI 4

ROE

26.46%

18.90%

26.33%

18.90%

Tax burden

0.7

0.75

0.75

0.75

Interest burden

0.9

0.9

0.9

0.9

EBIT margin

7.00%

10.00%

13.00%

10.00%

Asset turnover

1.5

1.4

1.5

1.4

Leverage

4

2

2

2

An analyst is most likely to conclude that:

A. Company A’s ROE is higher than Company B’s in FY15, and one explanation consistent with the data is that Company A may have purchased new, more efficient equipment.

B. Company A’s ROE is higher than Company B’s in FY15, and one explanation consistent with the data is that Company A has made a strategic shift to a product mix with higher profit margins.

C. The difference between the two companies’ ROE in FY15 is very small and Company A’s ROE remains similar to Company B’s ROE mainly due to Company A increasing its financial leverage.

the total cost of the machine to be shown on joovi rsquo s balance sheet is closest 609753

JOOVI Inc. has recently purchased and installed a new machine for its manufacturing plant. The company incurred the following costs:

Purchase price

$12,980

Freight and insurance

$1,200

Installation

$700

Testing

$100

Maintenance staff training costs

$500

The total cost of the machine to be shown on JOOVI’s balance sheet is closest to:

A. $14,180.

B. $14,980.

C. $15,480.

which of the following is the amount of interest related to the plant construction i 609754

BAURU, S.A., a Brazilian corporation, borrows capital from a local bank to finance the construction of its manufacturing plant. The loan has the following conditions:

Borrowing date

1 January 2009

Amount borrowed

500 million Brazilian real (BRL)

Annual interest rate

14 percent

Term of the loan

3 years

Payment method

Annual payment of interest only. Principal amortization is due at the end of the loan term.

The construction of the plant takes two years, during which time BAURU earned BRL 10 million by temporarily investing the loan proceeds. Which of the following is the amount of interest related to the plant construction (in BRL million) that can be capitalized in BAURU’s balance sheet?

A. 130

B. 140

C. 210

if martinez wants to minimize tax payments in the first year of the machine rsquo s 609756

Juan Martinez, CFO of VIRMIN, S.A., is selecting the depreciation method to use for a new machine. The machine has an expected useful life of six years. Production is expected to be relatively low initially but to increase over time. The method chosen for tax reporting must be the same as the method used for financial reporting. If Martinez wants to minimize tax payments in the first year of the machine’s life, which of the following depreciation methods is Martinez most likely to use?

A. Straight-line method

B. Units-of-production method

C. Double-declining balance method

this exercise will give you practice in classifying items on financial statements 609763

Purpose: (L.O. 8) This exercise will give you practice in classifying items on financial statements

1. Cash

21. Commission revenue

2. Accounts payable

22. Insurance expense

3. Equipment

23. Rent expense

4. Utilities expense

24. Rent revenue

5. Common stock

25. Interest expense

6. Salaries and wages payable

26. Interest revenue

7. Salaries and wages expense

27. Interest income

8. Advertising expense

28. Office supplies expense

9. Advertising payable

29. Audit fees incurred

10. Office supplies

30. Service revenue

11. Note payable

31. Legal fees earned

12. Note receivable

32. Legal fees incurred

13. Dividends

33. Prepaid insurance

14. Fees earned

34. Property tax expense

15. Fees incurred

35. Mortgage payable

16. Telephone expense

36. Loan receivable

17. Cleaning supplies on hand

37. Bank loan payable

18. Property taxes payable

38. Royalty revenue

19. Cleaning expense

39. Royalty expense

20. Commission expense

40. Medical supplies

Instructions

Indicate how each of the above should be classified on a set of financial statements. Use the following abbreviations to communicate your responses.

A

Asset on the balance sheet

L

Liability on the balance sheet

SE

Stockholders’ equity balance on the balance sheet

D

Dividends on the retained earnings statement

R

Revenue on the income statement

E

Expense on the income statement

this exercise will test your understanding of the debit and credit rules 609777

This exercise will test your understanding of the debit and credit rules.

A list of accounts appears below:

   

Debit

Credit

1.

Cash

2.

Sales Revenue

3.

Commissions Expense

4.

Advertising Expense

5.

Salaries and Wages Payable

6.

Prepaid Insurance

7.

Property Taxes Payable

8.

Property Tax Expense

9.

Dividends

10.

Interest Revenue

11.

Salaries and Wages Expense

12.

Commissions Revenue

13.

Unearned Service Revenue

14.

Equipment

15.

Note Payable

16.

Building

17.

Accounts Payable

18.

Land

19.

Accounts Receivable

20.

Common Stock

Instructions

For each account, put a check mark (√) in the appropriate column to indicate if it is increased by an entry in the debit (left) side of the account or by an entry in the credit (right) side of the account. The first one is done for you.

TIP: In essence, you are being asked to identify the normal balance of each of the accounts listed. The normal balance of an account is the side where increases are recorded.

this exercise will give you practice in applying the debit and credit rules 609778

This exercise will give you practice in applying the debit and credit rules.

A list of transactions appears below:

  1. Dan Harrier invested $1,000 cash in a new business, Luxury Detailing, in exchange for common stock.
  2. Purchased equipment for $600 cash.
  3. Purchased $300 of supplies on account.
  4. Rented a vehicle for the month and paid $250.
  5. Paid $100 for an ad in a local newspaper.
  6. Purchased gas for $20 on credit.
  7. Sold services for $200 cash.
  8. Sold services for $300 on account.
  9. Paid $90 wages for an assistant”s work.
  10. Declared and paid a cash dividend of $80.
  11. Paid for use of beeper service, $30.
  12. Borrowed $2,000 from the Cash-N-Carry Bank in anticipation of expanding the business.

Instructions

Indicate how you would record each transaction. What account would you debit and what account would you credit? Use the appropriate code designation. The first transaction is coded for you.

Transaction

Code

1.

D11, C31

D—Debit

11-Cash

C—Credit

12—Accounts Receivable

2.

14—Supplies

16—Equipment

3.

21—Accounts Payable

22—Loan Payable

4.

31—Common Stock

32—Retained Earnings

5.

41—Dividends

51—Service Revenue

6.

63—Beeper Expense

64—Gas Expense

7.

65—Rent Expense

66—Advertising Expense

8.

67—Salaries and Wages Expense

9.

10.

11.

12.

 

this exercise will test your ability to identify the effects of errors that commonly 609780

This exercise will test your ability to identify the effects of errors that commonly occur in the process of recording and posting transactions. As you will see, some errors cause the accounts to be out of balance, thus quickly identifying the existence of an error. However, some errors do not cause an imbalance in the accounts and are more difficult to discover.

An inexperienced bookkeeper for Nip-N-Tuck Alteration Shop made the following errors in journalizing and posting the transactions that occurred during February 2014.

  1. The credit portion of a journal entry to record a $500 loan payment was posted to the ledger twice.
  2. A fictitious transaction was recorded in the journal for the amount of $300.
  3. A cash payment of $700 for rent was recorded in the journal by a debit of $700 to Rent Expense and a credit of $70 to Cash.
  4. A debit entry of $50 to the Accounts Receivable account was incorrectly recorded as a debit entry of $50 to the Cash account.
  5. A cash sale of $890 was incorrectly recorded in the journal as a cash sale of $980.
  6. The debit portion of a journal entry to record a $60 credit sale was posted to the ledger, but the credit portion of this entry was not posted.
  7. A $150 credit entry in the journal to the Accounts Payable account was posted as a credit to the Accounts Receivable account in the ledger.
  8. An entire entry in the journal to record the $75 payment to the City of Orlando for an annual business license fee was omitted in the posting process.
  9. A debit of $200 to the Equipment account was incorrectly posted as a $200 credit to the Equipment account.
  10. The debit portion of a journal entry to record a $80 sale on account was posted to the ledger twice.
  11. A $40 cash sale was completely omitted from the journal.
  12. A $45 cash sale was recorded in the journal twice.
  13. The balance in the Cash account was calculated incorrectly at $1,700. It should be $1,640.
  14. A payment on account of $190 was journalized and posted as a debit to Repairs Expense and a credit to cash for $190.
  15. A cash receipt of $80 from a customer on account was recorded twice in the journal.
  16. The debit portion of a journal entry to record a cash sale was correctly posted to the ledger for $120. The credit portion of the same journal entry was posted to the Sales account in the ledger for $210.

Instructions

For each error, indicate (a) whether or not the resulting trial balance will balance. If the trial balance will not balance, indicate (b) the amount of the difference, and (c) the trial balance column that will have the larger total. Consider each error separately. Use the following form, in which error (1) is given as an example.

Error

(a)
In Balance?

(b)
$ Difference

(c)
Larger Column

(1)

No

$500

Credit

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8)

(9)

(10)

(11)

(12)

(13)

(14)

(15)

(16)

 

the debit column of a trial balance amounts to 78 000 the credit column also amounts 609788

The debit column of a trial balance amounts to $78,000; the credit column also amounts to $78,000. Which error may still exist?

  1. A journal entry contains a correct debit amount and an incorrect credit amount.
  2. A debit entry to the Accounts Receivable account in the journal is incorrectly posted as a credit to the Accounts Receivable account in the ledger.
  3. The debit portion of a journal entry is posted to the ledger twice.
  4. A cash payment on account of $240 is incorrectly recorded as a cash payment of $420.

this exercise will provide you with examples of adjusting entries for the accrual of 609792

This exercise will provide you with examples of adjusting entries for the accrual of expenses and revenues.

The following information relates to the Yuppy Clothing Sales Corporation at the end of 2014. The accounting period is the calendar year. This is the company”s first year of operations.

  1. Employees are paid every Monday for the five-day work week ending on the prior Friday. Salaries amount to $2,400 per week. The accounting period ends on a Monday.
  2. On October 1, 2014, Yuppy borrowed $16,000 cash by signing a note payable due in one year at 8% interest. Interest is due when the principal is due.
  3. A note for $2,000 was received from a customer in a sales transaction on May 1, 2014. The note matures in one year and bears 12% interest per annum. Interest is due when the principal is due.
  4. A portion of Yuppy”s parking lot is used by executives of a neighboring company. A person pays $6 per day for each day”s use. The parking fees are due by the fifth business day following the month of use. The fees for December 2014 amount to $2,904.

Instructions

Prepare the necessary adjusting entries at December 31, 2014.

this exercise will provide you with examples of adjusting entries for prepaid expens 609794

This exercise will provide you with examples of adjusting entries for prepaid expenses and unearned revenues (that is, for the deferral of expenses and revenues).

The following information relates to the Brittany Spears Magazine Company at the end of 2014. The accounting period is the calendar year.

  1. An insurance premium of $8,000 was paid on April 1, 2014, and was charged to Prepaid Insurance. The premium covers a 24-month period beginning April 1, 2014.
  2. The Office Supplies On Hand account showed a balance of $3,500 at the beginning of 2014. Supplies costing $12,000 were purchased during 2014 and debited to the asset account. Supplies of $2,200 were on hand at December 31, 2014.
  3. On July 1, 2014, cash of $48,000 was received from subscribers (customers) for a 36-month subscription period beginning on that date. The receipt was recorded by a debit to Cash and a credit to Unearned Subscription Revenue.
  4. At the beginning of 2014, the Unearned Advertising Revenue account had a balance of $75,000. During 2014, collections from advertisers of $800,000 were recorded by credits to Unearned Advertising Revenue. At the end of 2014, revenues received but not earned are computed to be $51,000.

Instructions

Using the information given above, prepare the necessary adjusting entries at December 31, 2014.

this exercise will illustrate the preparation of adjusting entries from an unadjuste 609795

This exercise will illustrate the preparation of adjusting entries from an unadjusted trial balance and additional data.

Tammy Equipment Rentals, Inc. began business in 2010. The following list of accounts and their balances represents the unadjusted trial balance of Tammy”s Equipment Rentals, Inc. at December 31, 2014, the end of the annual accounting period.

 Debit

Credit

Cash

$16,500

Prepaid Insurance  

4,320

Supplies  

13,200

Land  

62,000

Building   

50,000

Equipment

130,000

 

 Accumulated Depreciation—Buildinq  

$10,000

Accumulated Depreciation—Fqiiipment

57,000

Note Payable  

50.000

Accounts Payable  

9,310

Unearned Rent Revenue  

10,200

Common Stock  

30,000

Retained Earnings  

60,660

Dividends  

31,000

Rent Revenue  

161,960

Salaries and Wages Expense  

70,600

Interest Expense  

3,500

Miscellaneous Expense  

3,010

$384,130

$384,130

Additional data:

  1. On November 1, 2014, Tammy received $10,200 rent from a lessee for a 12-month equipment lease beginning on that date and credited Unearned Rent Revenue for the entire collection.
  2. Per a physical inventory at December 31, 2014, Tammy determines that supplies costing $2,200 were on hand at the balance sheet date. The cost of supplies is debited to an asset account when purchased.
  3. Prepaid Insurance contains the premium cost of a policy that is for a 3-year term and was taken out on May 1, 2014.
  4. The cost of the building is being depreciated at a rate of 5% per year.
  5. The cost of the equipment is being depreciated at a rate of 10% per year.
  6. The note payable bears interest at 12% per year. Interest is payable each August 1. The $50,000 principal is due in full on August 1, 2017.
  7. At December 31, 2014, Tammy has some equipment in the hands of renters who have used the equipment but have not yet been billed. They will make payment of $1,400 on January 2, 2015.
  8. Employees are paid total salaries of $6,400 every other Friday for a two-week period ending on that payday. December 31, 2014 falls on a Monday. The last payday of the year is the last Friday in the year. The work week is Monday through Friday.

Instructions

(a) Prepare the year-end adjusting entries in general journal form using the information above.

(b) Prepare an adjusted trial balance at December 31, 2014.

 

this exercise will help you develop skill in recognizing circumstances involving acc 609796

This exercise will help you develop skill in recognizing circumstances involving accrual of revenue, accrual of expense, unearned revenue, and prepaid expense.

Instructions

Assume it is now Saturday, December 31, 2014. For each of the situations below, indicate whether (a) An accrued revenue, or (b) An accrued expense, or (c) An unearned revenue, or (d) A prepaid expense or (e) neither an accrual nor a prepayment is involved. You may use the designated letters (a), (b), (c), (d), and (e) to indicate your answers. The accounting period is the calendar year of 2014.

this exercise will test your ability to detect adjusting entries by comparing an adj 609797

This exercise will test your ability to detect adjusting entries by comparing an adjusted trial balance with an unadjusted trial balance.

The trial balance and the subsequent adjusted trial balance at December 31, 2014, for the Bradley Company appear below. The accounting period coincides with the calendar year.

Before Adjustment

After Adiustment

nehit

Credit

nehit

Credit

Cash

$30,000

$30,000

Accounts Receivable

8,000

8,700

Note Receivable (8%)

10,000

10,000

Interest Receivable

0

200

Prepaid Rent

8,400

1,200

Prepaid Licenses

3,200

800

Office Supplies

2,000

300

Office Equipment

12.000

12.000

Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment

$3,000

$4,000

Accounts Payable

3,400

3,400

Unearned Service Fees

5.000

1.300

Salaries and Wages Payable

0

1.800

Common Stock

20,000

20,000

Retained Earnings

42,000

42,000

Dividends

36,000

36,000

Fees Earned

82,100

86,500

Interest Earned

0

200

Salaries and Wages Expense

45.900

47.700

Rent Expense

0

7,200

Licenses Expense

0

2,400

Office Supplies Expense

0

1,700

Depreciation Expense

0

1.000

$155,500

$155,500

$159,200

$159,200

Instructions

  1. Journalize the adjusting entries recorded on December 31, 2014.
  2. Answer the following questions:
    1. How many months was the note receivable outstanding during 2014?
    2. If the rent is a constant amount each month, how many months rent is prepaid as of December 31, 2014?
    3. How much is the monthly license fee assuming the monthly amount has remained unchanged during the whole year?
    4. If the depreciation is a constant amount each year, for how many years has the office equipment been in use?
    5. Assuming the balance of Salaries and Wages Payable at January 1, 2014 was $0, how much cash was paid to employees during 2014?

 

this exercise will quiz you about terminology used in this chapter 609798

This exercise will quiz you about terminology used in this chapter.

A list of accounting terms with which you should be familiar appears below:

Accrual-basis accounting

Deferrals

Accruals

Depreciation

Accrued expenses

Expense recognition principle (matching principle)

Accrued revenues

Fiscal year

Adjusted trial balance

Interim periods

Adjusting entries

Prepaid expenses

Book value

Revenue recognition principle

Calendar year

Time period assumption

Cash-basis accounting

Unearned revenues

Contra asset account

Useful life

Instructions

For each item below, enter in the blank the term that is described.

  1. Accounting basis in which events that change sa company”s financial statements are recorded in the periods in which the events occur, rather than in the periods in which the company receives or pays cash. Thus, revenues are recognized when earned and expenses are recognized when incurred, regardless of when the related cash is received or paid.
  2. Revenue is recorded only when cash is received, and an expense is recorded only when cash is paid.
  3. An assumption that the economic life of a business can be divided into artificial time periods of equal length. Another name for this assumption is the periodicity assumption.
  4. The principle that dictates revenue be recognized in the accounting period in which the performance obligation is satisfied.
  5. The principle that dictates efforts (expenses) be matched with accomplishments (revenues).
  6. Expenses incurred but not yet paid in cash or recorded. They result in accrued liabilities.
  7. Revenues for services performed but not yet received in cash or recorded. They result in accrued receivables.
  8. Expenses paid in cash and reported as assets before the related goods and services are used up or consumed (often called deferred expenses).
  9. Revenues received in cash and reported as liabilities before the related services are performed (often called deferred revenues).
  10. Entries made at the end of an accounting period to ensure that the revenue recognition and matching principles are followed.
  11. Adjusting entries for either accrued revenues or accrued expenses.
  12. Adjusting entries for either prepaid expenses or unearned revenues.
  13. A list of accounts and their balances after all adjustments have been made.
  14. The difference between the cost of a depreciable asset and its related accumulated depreciation (often called carrying value or carrying amount).
  15. An accounting period that extends from January 1 to December 31.
  16. An account that is offset against an asset account on the balance sheet.
  17. The length of service of a productive facility (often called estimated service life).
  18. The process of allocating the cost of a plant asset to expense over its useful life in a rational and systematic manner.
  19. An accounting period that is one year in length.
  20. Monthly or quarterly accounting time periods.

this exercise will allow you to quickly check your knowledge of how items are extend 609811

This exercise will allow you to quickly check your knowledge of how items are extended on a worksheet.

A partial jumbled worksheet for the Piper Wood Investigative Services Corporation appears below. (The accounts are not listed in their usual order, the worksheet is only partially illustrated, and the Trial Balance and Adjustments columns have been omitted.)

Account

Adjusted
Trial Balance

Income
Statement

Balance
Sheet

Debit

Credit

Debit

Credit

Debit

Credit

Salaries and Wages Payable

X

X

Prepaid Insurance

Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment

Unearned Revenue

Rent Expense

Service Revenue

Prepaid Rent

Dividends

Repairs Expense

Utilities Payable

Interest Receivable

Accounts Receivable

Advertising Expense

Depreciation Expense

Land

Equipment

Salaries and Wages Expense

Mortgage Payable

Cash

Net Income

Instructions

For each account, place an “X” in the appropriate Adjusted Trial Balance column pair to indicate whether the account balance will appear in the Debit or Credit column (assume a normal balance in each account) on the worksheet. Also for each account, place an “X” in the appropriate Income Statement or Balance Sheet column to indicate the column to which the balance should be extended. The first one is done for you.

complete the worksheet for carl s video service inc for the year ended april 30 2014 609812

This exercise illustrates the function of a worksheet.

Carl”s Video Service, Inc. has a fiscal year ending on April 30. The following information is available at the end of the corporation”s first year of operations:

  1. Parts and supplies on hand at April 30, 2014, amount to $1,600.
  2. Wages incurred but not paid at April 30, 2014, amount to $320.
  3. The $540 balance in the Prepaid Insurance account represents a payment for 12 months that began on August 1, 2013.
  4. The note payable bears interest of 6% per year and was issued on December 1, 2013.
  5. The estimated amount of utilities consumed but unpaid as of year end amounts to $400.
  6. Depreciation on equipment for the year amounts to $3,000.

Instructions

Complete the worksheet for Carl”s Video Service, Inc. for the year ended April 30, 2014. The trial balance has already been put on the worksheet for you.

x ltd is faced with the problem of shutting down or of continuing to operate at a lo 609596

X Ltd is faced with the problem of shutting down or of continuing to operate at a loss. Data from records and estimates made by the company are as follows:

Normal capacity of plant

= 1,00,000 units/day

Fixed costs when the plant operates

= Rs. 2,00,000 per annum

Fixed costs when the plant is shut down

= Rs. 1,20,000 per annum

Variable costs (direct labour, direct material, variable overhead) per unit

= Rs. 40

Estimated selling price to meet competition

= Rs. 50

Estimated sales volume at a new selling price

= 10,000 units

Advise the company.

x ltd can manufacture a part p for a sub assembly q this can be done with the help o 609597

X Ltd can manufacture a part P for a sub-assembly Q. This can be done with the help of present equipment and there is the capacity to produce 1,000 units per month. Another company Y Ltd, the supplier of parts, agrees to supply that part for Rs. 23 each. Of the part that is bought, the equipment can be sold for Rs. 4,000. Evaluate whether to make or buy the part in the following year based on the following data:

Make Rs.

Buy Rs.

Direct material cost per unit

3.75

Conversion cost per unit

14

Specific fixed assets

5,000

Average capital employed

4,000

3,000

(excluding stocks)

7,000

5,000

you are required to decide which would be the best alternative apply opportunity cos 609598

Rose Ltd uses iron as a raw material for the manufacture of four finished products. At the beginning of the period, 10,000 units of iron in stock were purchased for Rs. 90 per unit. In case the company decides not to use those 10,000 kg of iron in stock, they can be sold to a scrap dealer for Rs. 50 per unit. Another scrap dealer has offered Rs. 48 per kg unit for the same. The expected future revenues and labour overheads for each unit of the product is as follows:

A Rs.

B Rs.

C Rs.

D Rs.

Sale per unit

Labour &overhead per unit:

120

40

100

30

90
20

95
50

You are required to decide which would be the best alternative? Apply opportunity-costing approach.

you are required to take a decision using opportunity costing approach 609599

Vas & Co. Ltd is engaged in trading business and uses its own building for the purpose. The data obtained from the records of the company show the estimates as follows:

Cost of goods sold per annum

70,000

Other operating expenses per annum

40,000

Building ownership costs p.a.

(Rent and rates and maintenance and

15,000

insurance charges for building are not

included above

Sales per annum

2,50,000

Another firm has offered to take the building on lease for Rs. 7,500 per month. In this case, Vas & Co. Ltd would have Rs. 7,500 per month. In this case, Vas & Co. Ltd would have to discontinue its operations and handover the building to the lessee.

You are required to take a decision using opportunity-costing approach.

what would you recommend for an expert price for these 1 500 units taking into accou 609606

A company is at present working at 90% of its capacity and producing 13,500 units per annum. The following figures are obtained from its budget:

90% Rs.

100% Rs.

Sales

7,50,000

8,00,000

Fixed expenses

1,50,250

1,50,250

Semi-fixed expenses

48,750

50,250

Variable expenses

72,500

74,750

Units produced

13,500

15,000

Labour and material cost per unit are constant under the present conditions.

  1. You are required to determine the differential cost of producing 1,500 units by increasing the capacity to 100%.
  2. What would you recommend for an expert price for these 1,500 units taking into account that the overseas prices are much lower than the domestic prices?

xyz ltd is faced with the problem of shutting down or of continuing to operate at a 609607

XYZ Ltd. is faced with the problem of shutting down or of continuing to operate at a loss. Data relating to the company are shown as follows:

Normal capacity of a plant day

1,00,000 units/day

Fixed costs when the plant is operating

Rs. 75,000 p.a.

Fixed costs when the plant is shut down

Rs. 50,000 p.a.

Variable costs per unit

Rs. 20

Estimated selling price

Rs. 23

Estimated sales volume at a new selling price: 10,000 units

Advise the firm.

a company has a capacity of producing 50 000 units of a certain product in a month t 609608

A company has a capacity of producing 50,000 units of a certain product in a month. The sales department reports that the following schedule of sales prices is possible.

Volume of Production

Selling Price Unit Rs.

60%

0.90

70%

0.80

80%

0.75

90%

0.67

100%

0.61.

The variable cost of manufacture between these levels is Re. 0.15 per unit and the fixed cost is Rs. 20,000.

  1. You are required to prepare a statement showing the incremental revenue and the differential cost at each stage. At which volume of production will the profit be the maximum?
  2. If there is a bulk order at Re. 0.50 per unit for the balance capacity over the maximum profit and the volume for export and price quoted will not affect the internal sale, state whether this offer should be accepted and why?

calculate the profit of the current production give your views supported by figures 609612

The overhead expenses of a factory producing a single article at different operating levels are as follows:

Operating-level Capacity

Works Overhead (Rs.)

80%

36,000

100%

40,000

120%

50,000

60%

33,000

The factory is currently working at 60% operating level and its annual sales amount is Rs. 1,44,000. Selling prices have the following relationship with costs at this level:

Factory cost

66.67% of sales value

Prime cost

75% of factory cost

Administration and selling expenses (of which 75% is variable)

20% of sales value

The management receives an offer for carrying out some work for another company valued at Rs. 33,000 per annum, which will take up 40% capacity. The prime cost of the work is estimated at Rs. 20,000. There will be an addition to administration expenses of Rs. 1,500 per annum.

The sales manager estimates that the sales of the company’ own product will increase to 80% capacity by the time the new order materializes.

Calculate the profit of the current production. Give your views, supported by figures, on the advisability of taking on the new work.

at which level of production and sales will the profit be the maximum 609613

A company has a capacity of producing 50,000 units of a certain product in a month. The sales department reports that the following sales prices are possible:

Volume of Sales

Selling Price / Unit Rs.

50% of production capacity

2.00

60%

1.90

70%

1.85

80%

1.80

90%

1.70

100%

1.60

The variable cost of manufacture between the above levels and the total amount of fixed cost (for 60% capacity) is Rs. 20,000 per month.

You are required to prepare a statement showing the incremental revenue and the differential cost at each of the above levels of production and sales.

At which level of production and sales will the profit be the maximum.

you are required to take a decision using opportunity costing approach 609614

Rama & Co. Ltd is engaged in trading business and uses its own building for the purpose. The following data available from the firm’s records show the estimates made by the company:

Cost of goods sold per annum

1,00,000

Other operating expenses per annum

75,000

Building ownership costs per annum

37,500

Sales per annum

3,00,000

Another firm has offered to take the building on lease for Rs. 8,000 p.m. In this case, Rama & Co. Ltd would have to discontinue its operations and hand over the building to the lessee.

You are required to take a decision using opportunity-costing approach.

how much revenue should apex report on its 2009 income statement 609679

Apex Consignment sells items over the Internet for individuals on a consignment basis. Apex receives the items from the owner, lists them for sale on the Internet, and receives a 25 percent commission for any items sold. Apex collects the full amount from the buyer and pays the net amount after commission to the owner. Unsold items are returned to the owner after 90 days. During 2009, Apex had the following information:

  • Total sales price of items sold during 2009 on consignment was €2,000,000.
  • Total commissions retained by Apex during 2009 for these items was €500,000.

How much revenue should Apex report on its 2009 income statement?

A. €500,000

B. €2,000,000

C. €1,500,000

an analyst gathered the following information from a company rsquo s 2010 financial 609695

An analyst gathered the following information from a company’s 2010 financial statements (in $ millions):

Year Ended 31 December

2009

2010

Net sales

245.8

254.6

Cost of goods sold

168.3

175.9

Accounts receivable

73.2

68.3

Inventory

39.0

47.8

Accounts payable

20.3

22.9

Based only on the information given here, the company’s 2010 statement of cash flows in the direct format would include amounts (in $ millions) for cash received from customers and cash paid to suppliers, respectively, that are closest to:

Cash Received from Customers

Cash Paid to Suppliers

A.

249.7

169.7

B.

259.5

174.5

C.

259.5

182.1

using the following information from the comparative balance sheets how much cash di 609698

Silverago Incorporated, an international metals company, reported a loss on the sale of equipment of $2 million in 2010. In addition, the company’s income statement shows depreciation expense of $8 million and the cash flow statement shows capital expenditure of $10 million, all of which was for the purchase of new equipment. Using the following information from the comparative balance sheets, how much cash did the company receive from the equipment sale?

Balance Sheet Item

12/31/2009

12/31/2010

Change

Equipment

$100 million

$105 million

$5 million

Accumulated depreciation-Equipment

$40 million

$46 million

$6 million

A. $1 million

B. $2 million

C. $3 million

the company has no outstanding debt using the following information from the compara 609699

Jaderong Plinkett Stores reported net income of $25 million. The company has no outstanding debt. Using the following information from the comparative balance sheets (in millions), what should the company report in the financing section of the statement of cash flows in 2010?

Balance Sheet Item

12/31/2009

12/31/2010

Change

Common stock

$100

$102

$2

Additional paid in capital common stock

$100

$140

$40

Retained earning

$100

$115

$15

Total stockholders” equity

$300

$357

$57

A. Issuance of common stock of $42 million; dividends paid of $10 million

B. Issuance of common stock of $38 million; dividends paid of $10 million

C. Issuance of common stock of $42 million; dividends paid of $40 million

what is this ratio what does it measure and what does it indicate 609704

An analyst has calculated a ratio using as the numerator the sum of operating cash flow, interest, and taxes and as the denominator the amount of interest. What is this ratio, what does it measure, and what does it indicate?

A. This ratio is an interest coverage ratio, measuring a company’s ability to meet its interest obligations and indicating a company’s solvency.

B. This ratio is an effective tax ratio, measuring the amount of a company’s operating cash flow used for taxes and indicating a company’s efficiency in tax management.

C. This ratio is an operating profitability ratio, measuring the operating cash flow generated accounting for taxes and interest and indicating a company’s liquidity.

based on this data what is the analyst least likely to conclude 609705

An analyst is interested in assessing both the efficiency and liquidity of Spherion PLC. The analyst has collected the following data for Spherion:

FY3

FY2

FYI

Days of inventory on hand

32

34

40

Days sales outstanding

28

25

23

Number of days of payables

40

35

35

Based on this data, what is the analyst least likely to conclude?

A. Inventory management has contributed to improved liquidity.

B. Management of payables has contributed to improved liquidity.

C. Management of receivables has contributed to improved liquidity.

which of the following would be the analyst rsquo s most likely conclusion 609706

An analyst is evaluating the solvency and liquidity of Apex Manufacturing and has collected the following data (in millions of euro):

FY5

FY4

FY3

Total debt

€2,000

€1,900

€1,750

Total equity

€4,000

€4,500

€5,000

Which of the following would be the analyst’s most likely conclusion?

A. The company is becoming increasingly less solvent, as evidenced by the increase in its debt-to-equity ratio from 0.35 to 0.50 from FY3 to FY5.

B. The company is becoming less liquid, as evidenced by the increase in its debt-to-equity ratio from 0.35 to 0.50 from FY3 to FY5.

C. The company is becoming increasingly more liquid, as evidenced by the increase in its debt-to-equity ratio from 0.35 to 0.50 from FY3 to FY5.

an analyst observes a decrease in a company rsquo s inventory turnover which of the 609708

An analyst observes a decrease in a company’s inventory turnover. Which of the following would most likely explain this trend?

A. The company installed a new inventory management system, allowing more efficient inventory management.

B. Due to problems with obsolescent inventory last year, the company wrote off a large amount of its inventory at the beginning of the period.

C. The company installed a new inventory management system but experienced some operational difficulties resulting in duplicate orders being placed with suppliers.

to achieve brown rsquo s goal of decreasing the collection period the change in the 609709

Brown Corporation had average days of sales outstanding of 19 days in the most recent fiscal year. Brown wants to improve its credit policies and collection practices and decrease its collection period in the next fiscal year to match the industry average of 15 days. Credit sales in the most recent fiscal year were $300 million, and Brown expects credit sales to increase to $390 million in the next fiscal year. To achieve Brown’s goal of decreasing the collection period, the change in the average accounts receivable balance that must occur is closest to:

A. +$0.41 million.

B. -$0.41 million.

C. -$1.22 million.

disposal of surplus mdash amount refundable to customers the following balances rela 609533

Model: Disposal of surplus—Amount refundable to customers The following balances relate to an electric company and pertain to its accounts for the year ended 31 December 2010:

Rs.

Share Capital

60,00,000

Reserve Fund (Invested) in 5% Govt. Securities at Par)

30,00,000

Contingencies Reserve (Invested in 6% Govt. Loan)

10,00,000

Loan from Stare Electricity Board……….

15,00,000

11% Debentures

5,00,000

Development Reserve

5,00,000

Fixed Assets

1,00,00,000

Depreciation Reserve on Fixed Assets

40,00,000

Consumer’s Deposits

40,00,000

Amount Contributed by Consumers Towards Cost of Fixed Assets

1,00,000

Tariffs and Dividends Control Reserve

2,50,000

Monthly Average of Current Assets

10,00,000

Intangible Assets:

2,00,000

The Company earned a profit of Rs.5,00,000. Show how the profits of the company will be dealt with under the provision of the Electricity Act, assuming that the bank rate during the year was 8%.

original cost of fixed assets rs 48 00 000 contributions by consumers for acquisitio 609534

Model: Composition of clear profit From the following details of an electric supply company, maintaining accounts under double account system, calculate the following:(a) capital base; (b) reasonable return; (c) clear profit and (d) amounts available for dividends and contribution to tariff and dividend control reserve and consumer’s rebate reserve.

Rs.

Sale of Energy

14,60,000

Meter Rents

60,000

Transfer Fees

1,500

Cost of Generation

8,80,000

Distribution and Selling Expenses

80,000

Rent, Rates & Taxes

30,000

Audit Fees

2,400

Intangibles Written Off

9,000

Management Expenses

26,000

Depreciation

96,000

Interest on Loan of State Electricity Board

5,000

Contingency Reserve Investment Income

5,000

Interest on Security Deposit

1,000

Interest from Bank

800

Contribution to Provident Fund

70,000

No tax is payable for the year.

Original cost of fixed assets: Rs.48,00,000; contributions by consumers for acquisition of such fixed assets: Rs.2,40,000; cost of intangibles: Rs.1,60,000; contingency reserve investments: Rs.1,20,000; stores: opening Rs.1,00,000 and closing Rs.1,40,000; cash and bank balances: opening Rs.1,20,000 and closing Rs.80,000.

Depreciation up to the beginning of the year: Rs.8,70,000; intangibles written off up to the beginning of the year; Rs.70,000; security deposit of customers held in cash: Rs.30,000; Tariffs and dividend control reserve at the beginning of the year: Rs.1,80,000; Development reserve as the beginning of the year: Rs.2,60,000; amount carried forward for distribution to consumers: Rs.40,000; loan from state electricity board: Rs.1,20,000. There is no addition to plant and machinery. Transfer to contingency reserve was Rs.14,000and assume RBI rate as 8%.

preparation of revenue a c net revenue a c capital a c and general balance sheet fro 609535

Model: Preparation of revenue A/c; net revenue A/c; capital A/c and general balance sheet From the following balances as on 31 December 2010, appearing in the ledger of Electric Light and Power Co. Ltd, you are required to prepare: (a) revenue account; (b) net revenue account; (c) capital account and (d) general balance sheet.

(Z in 000″s)

Equity Shares

1,09,800

Other Debtors

100

Debentures

40,000

Cash

600

Stores on Hand

1,400

Lands on 31 December 2009

30,000

Cost of Generating

6,000

Electricity

Lands Purchased in 2010

1,000

Cost of Distribution of

1,200

Electricity

Machinery on 31 December 2009

1,20,000

Rent, Rates & Taxes ….

800

Machinery Purchased During 2000

1,000

Management Expenses

2,400

Mains Including Cost of Laying on 31 December 2009

40,000

Depreciation

4,000

Spent on Mains in 2000

10200

Sale of Current

26,400

Sundry creditors

200

Rent of Meters

600

Depreciation Fund

50,000

Interest on Debentures

2,000

Sundry Debtors for

Dividends

4,000

Current Supplied

8,000

Balance of Net Revenue Account on 31 December 2009

5,700

double account system mdash water supply company rsquo s final a c from the followin 609536

Model: Double account system—Water supply company’s final A/c From the following trial balance extracted from the books of water supply company, prepare its final accounts under the double account system for the year ended 31 December 2010: 

Trial Balance of Water Supply Company as on 31 December 2010

Debit Balances

Rs.

Credit Balances

Rs.

Stores in Hand

30

Equity Shares

21,000

Cash in Hand

50

12% Preference Shares

10,000

Cash as Bank

250

10% Debentures

8,000

Investments

3,140

Water Charges

3,400

Printing & Stationary

20

Meter Chargers

500

Sundry Debtors

640

Reserve Fund

150

Salaries

1,200

Unclaimed Dividends

50

Dividend on Pref. Shares

1,200

Balance to Net Revenue

1,070

Land & Building

5,000

 

 

Plant & Machinery

10,000

 

 

Pipelines & Reservoir

20,000

 

 

Miscellaneous Expenses

40

 

 

Water Meters

500

 

 

Maintenance of:

 

 

 

(i)   Pipelines & Reservoirs

100

 

 

(ii) Filter Beds

30

 

 

(iii)             Plant & Machinery

60

 

 

General Repairs

170

 

 

Taxes & Rates

20

 

 

Overhead Expenses

280

 

 

Interest on Debentures

800

 

 

Interest Dividend on Equity Shares

40

 

 

 

44170

 

44,170

Adjustments: 

1. Outstanding Expenses:

 

Taxes & Rates

Rs.40,000

Salaries

Rs.60,000

2. Reserve Fund Should Be Raised to

Rs.2,00,000

formats for preparation of various accounts relating to electricity companies are st 609538

  1. Under double account system, the balance sheet is split into __________ and __________.
  2. Under double account system, P&L A/c is named as __________.
  3. Under double account system, P&L appropriation A/c is called ________.
  4. Public utility undertakings present financial statements by adopting _________ system.
  5. Under double account system, capital A/c is named as _________ and ________ on capital A/c.
  6. Under double account system, fixed assets are shown at _________ .
  7. Depreciation is provided by __________ .
  8. Loans and debentures are treated as _________ .
  9. Interest on loans and debentures is treated as __________.
  10. Discount and premium on issue of shares and debentures are treated as _________ .
  11. Renewals are provided for out of _________ .
  12. Balance of net revenue A/c is shown in the _________ side of the general balance sheet.
  13. The capital A/c is in the form of _________ .
  14. Revenue A/c is purely concerned with __________ activities of the concerns.
  15. Depreciation is debited to _________ and credited to __________.
  16. Preliminary expenses on formation of concerns are treated as __________.
  17. The actual repairs are debited to the __________ A/c and not to the __________ A/c.
  18. Assets continue to appear in the books as __________ and not as _________ even if they are absolute.
  19. __________ is not at all affected by cost of material reused.
  20. Formats for preparation of various accounts relating to electricity companies are statutory forms under the __________ Act, 1910.

a chart which indicates an approximate profit or loss at different levels of sales v 609552

Fill in the blanks with apt word(s)

  1. Break-even analysis is an analytical technique for studying the relations among fixed costs, variable costs and __________.
  2. Break-even point is the point at which the total __________ equals the total costs.
  3. Break-even point is the point at which an enterprise makes neither loss nor any __________.
  4. The problem of break-even will never arise if a firm” costs are all __________ costs.
  5. If a firm has some variable and some fixed costs, then such a firm must suffer __________ up to a given volume.
  6. Break-even analysis is based on the assumption that selling prices are __________.
  7. Break-even analysis is based on the assumption that the price level will be stable in the short run.
  8. Break-even analysis assumes that inventory remains constant or __________.
  9. BEP, when expressed in terms of units, is known as __________.
  10. BEP when expressed in terms of value, is known as __________.
  11. At the BEP, total __________ is equal to total fixed costs.
  12. The ratio or percentage of contribution margin to sales is known as __________ or __________.
  13. The formula for P/ V ratio is .
  14. P/ V ratio can be improved by increasing the __________ price/unit.
  15. P/ V ratio can be improved by __________ direct and variable costs.
  16. The P/ V ratio for any given product is assumed to remain constant over all __________.
  17. When sales volume is below the BEP, the net result will be __________.
  18. A high P/ V ratio will generate __________.
  19. The excess of total sales over sales at BEP is referred to as __________.
  20. The margin of safety may be improved by lowering __________.
  21. Margin of safety may be improved by __________ volume of sales.
  22. Margin of safety may be improved by increasing the __________.
  23. The angle which is formed by the intersection of __________ line and __________ line is called the angle of incidence.
  24. An increase in the variable cost per unit will __________ the P/ V ratio, whereas a decrease in the variable cost per unit will __________ the P/ V ratio.
  25. An increase in the fixed cost would __________ the BEP, whereas a decrease in the fixed cost would __________ the BEP.
  26. An increase in the selling price will __________ the BEP, whereas a decrease in the selling price will __________ the BEP.
  27. A chart which indicates an approximate profit or loss at different levels of sales volume units in a limited range is known as __________.
  28. The profit/volume graph is a simplified form of __________.

the budgeted margin between bep and the budgeted sales as a percentage of the total 609570

The budget sales of a company is extracted from its records, showing as follows:

Budgeted sales in units:

5,000

Budgeted selling price/unit, Rs:

4

Budgeted variable cost/unit, Rs:

3

Budgeted fixed expenses (total):

Rs. 3,000

Budgeted capacity:

80%

From the above, you are required to compute:

  1. The budgeted profit.
  2. The budgeted BEP.
  3. The budgeted margin between BEP and the budgeted sales as a percentage of the total capacity.
  4. The impact on profit of a ± 10% deviation in the budgeted sales.

vijendra hard chrome products manufactures and sells four types of products under br 609577

Vijendra Hard Chrome Products manufactures and sells four types of products under brand names of A, B, 1 C and D. The sales mix in the value comprises A, B, C and D, respectively. The total budgeted sales is Rs. 60,000 per month.

The operative costs of the enterprise are as follows:

Product A

60% of the sale price.

Product B

68% of the sale price.

Product C

80% of the sale price.

Product D

40% of the sale price.

Fixed costs

Rs. 14,700 per month.

The firm proposes to change the sales mix for the next month as follows, and it is estimated that the total sales would be maintained at the same level as the current month:

Product A

25%

Product B

40%

Product C

30%

Product D

5%

You are required to calculate:

  1. BEP for all the products on an overall basis for the current month.
  2. BEP for the products on an overall basis for the next month, assuming that the proposal is implemented.
  3. Explain the shift in the BEP to a new position.

two business companies abc ltd and pqr ltd produce and sell the same type of product 609579

Two business companies ABC Ltd and PQR Ltd produce and sell the same type of product in the same type of market. Their budgeted P&L A/c for the year ending 31 March 2010 are as follows:

Particulars

ABC Ltd Rs.

PQR Ltd Rs.

Sales

4,50,000

4,50,000

Less: Variable cost

Rs. 3,60,000

Rs. 3,00,000

Fixed cost

45,000

1,05,000

4,05,000

4,05,000

Net budgeted profit

45,000

45,000

You are required to compute:

  1. P/ V ratio.
  2. Break-even sales of each business.
  3. State which business is likely to earn greater profits in conditions of:
  4. heavy demand for the product and
  5. low demand for the product.

what would be the effect of the shift in the product mix suggested in b above on the 609580

A public limited company produces and sells three products. All products are manufactured in the same facilities under a common administrative control. The budgeted income statement for 2009 is as follows:

Particulars

Products

X Rs.

Y Rs.

Z Rs.

Sales

4,00,000

10,00,000

6,00,000

Variable expenses:

Cost of goods sold

1,80,000

5,40,000

3,00,000

Selling

60,000

1,80,000

90,000

Fixed expenses:

Overheads

72,000

1,80,000

1,08,000

Administrative

32,000

80,000

48,000

Income before tax

56,000

20,000

54,000

Income tax @ 40%

22,400

8,000

21,600

Net income

33,600

12,000

32,400

Fixed expenses are allocated among the products in proportion to their budgeted sales volume:

  1. Compute the budget BEP of the company as a whole.
  2. What would be effect on the budgeted income if half of the budgeted sales volume of product Y was shifted to products X and Z in equal rupee amounts, so that the total budgeted sales in rupees remain the same?
  3. What would be the effect of the shift in the product-mix suggested in (b) above on the budgeted BEP of the whole company?

assuming that there is no change in the prices and variable costs and that the fixed 609581

A multi-product company furnishes the following data relating to the year 2009:

I half of the Year Rs.

II half of the Year Rs.

Sales

1,35,000

1,50,000

Total cost

1,20,000

1,29,000

Assuming that there is no change in the prices and variable costs and that the fixed expenses are incurred equally in the two half-year periods, you are required to calculate for the year 2009, the following:

  1. the profit–volume ratio.
  2. the fixed expenses.
  3. the break-even sales.
  4. the percentage of margin of safety to total sales.

you are required to explain whether the proposal is favourable 609583

The cost reduction is to be pursued by a company which seeks to improve its competitive pricing position by an increased output from the existing plant. The current profit before tax is 15% of the sales value and 30% of the value of the capital employed. Other working ratios are: Gross margin–35%; Margin of safety–43%; and Capital turnover: 2%. The actual figures for the year are as follows:

Total sales value

30,00,000

Variable costs

19,50,000

Fixed costs

6,00,000

Capital employed

1,50,000

BEP

17,10,000

The proposal is to reduce sales price by 10% and 20% to the output. No change in fixed costs is expected. The cost reduction is expected to be Rs. 1,05,000.

You are required to explain whether the proposal is favourable?

you are required to plot on a graph the marginal income slopes for the product group 609589

The following figures relate to a manufacturing company producing a wide range of products which may be classified into three main groups:

Product Group

Annual Sales Rs.

Variable Cost Rs.

L

3,00,000

1,00,000

M

3,00,000

2,00,000

N

3,50,000

3,00,000

Fixed costs are (total) Rs. 2,50,000.

You are required to plot on a graph the marginal income slopes for the product groups in an alphabetical order to enable you to plot the average marginal income slope for the total output.

the annual market demand for such product is 20 000 units rs 10 per unit both the ma 609590

A company has the option of buying one machine, from the two machines that are available AB and CD. From the information given below, compute

  1. BEP for each.
  2. The level of sales at which both are equally profitable.
  3. The range of sales at which one is more profitable than the other.

Machine AB

Machine CD

Output (units)

20,000

20,000

Fixed costs per annum

Rs. 60,000

Rs. 32,000

Profit at full capacity (Rs.)

60,000

48,000

The annual market demand for such product is 20,000 units @ Rs. 10 per unit. (Both the machines will produce identical products.)

joy ltd manufactures and sells four types of products under brand names q r s and t 609591

Joy Ltd manufactures and sells four types of products under brand names Q, R S and T. The sales mix comprises respectively. The total budgeted sales (100%) are Rs. 2,00,000 per month. Operating costs are:

Variable costs

Product Q–60% of selling price.

Product R–68% of selling price.

Product S–80% of selling price.

Product T–40% of selling price.

Fixed cost–Rs. 58,800.

You are required to find the following:

  1. To compute the BEP for the products on an overall basis.
  2. Is planning a change in the sales mix as follows desirable?

(The total sales remain unaffected.)

compute the beps in the following independent situations if 609592

The following is the budget of ABC Ltd:

Particulars

Fixed Cost
Rs.

Variable Cost Rs.

Total Rs.

Budgeted sales:1,00,000 units @ Rs. 10 per unit

10,00,000

Budgeted costs:

Direct material

1,80,000

Direct labour

2,00,000

Factory overhead

1,40,000

60,000

Administration overhead

1,20,000

20,000

Distribution overhead

1,00,000

60,000

Total

3,60,000

5,20,000

8,80,000

Budgeted profit

1,20,000

Compute the BEPs in the following independent situations, if:

  1. a 10% increase is effected in the fixed costs.
  2. a 10% increase is effected in the variable costs.
  3. a 10% increase is effected in the sales price which will result in a reduction in units sold by 5%.
  4. a 10% increase in the fixed costs and a 5% decrease in the variable costs is effected.

what would you recommend for an export price of these 1 000 units taking into accoun 609594

A company is at present working at 90% of its capacity and producing 8,000 units per annum. It operates a flexible-budgetary control system. The following figures are obtained from its budget:

90% Capacity Rs.

100% Capacity Rs.

1. Sales

12,00,000

15,00,000

2. Fixed expenses

2,50,000

2,50,000

3. Semi-fixed expenses

75,000

1,00,000

4. Variable expenses

1,25,000

1,50,000

5. Units made

9,000

10,000

Labour and the material cost per unit are constant under present conditions. profit margin is 10%.

  1. You are required to determine the differential cost of producing 1,000 units by increasing the capacity to 100%.
  2. What would you recommend for an export price of these 1,000 units taking into account that the overseas prices are much lower than the indigenous prices.

if there is a bulk offer at re 0 60 per unit for the balance capacity over the maxim 609595

A company has a capacity of producing 1,00,000 units of a certain product in a month. The sales department reports that the following schedule of sale prices is possible:

Volume of Production

Selling Price Per Unit Re.

60%

1.00

70%

0.90

80%

0.85

90%

0.75

100%

0.69

The variable cost of manufacture between these levels is Re. 0.20 per unit and the fixed cost is Rs. 50,000.

  1. You are required to prepare a statement showing the incremental revenue and the differential cost at each stage. At which volume of production will the profit be at the maximum?
  2. If there is a bulk offer at Re. 0.60 per unit for the balance capacity over the maximum profit volume, as the export and the price quoted will not affect the internal sale, will you advise accepting this bid and why?

prepare a statement showing how cash should be distributed among the partners accord 609161

Ram, Rahim and Robert share profits and losses in the ratio of 4:2:1. They decide to dissolve the partnership and their Balance Sheet as on the date of dissolution was as follows:

Liabilities

Rs

Assets

Rs

Trade Creditors

17,100

Land and Buildings

2,87,160

Bank Overdraft

48,750

Plant and Machinery

48,900

General Reserve

28,350

Furniture

7,380

Capital:

Investments

45,000

Ram 1,20,000

Stock

1,92,450

Rahim 2,40,000

Trade Debtors

68,100

Robert 1,95,000

5,55,000

Cash in Hand

210

6,49,200

6,49,200

The partners also decide that after the creditors have all been paid and providing a sum of Rs 3,600 to meet payable expenses of realisation and dissolution, all cash realised should immediately be divided among them. The assets are realised as follows: first realisation – Rs 46,080; second realisation Rs 55,200; third realisation: 2,89,197; final realisation – Rs 1,68,900. Expenses of realisation and dissolution amount to Rs 3,396. Prepare a statement showing how cash should be distributed among the partners according to Maximum Loss Method.

state whether the following statements are true or false 609259

State whether the following statements are True or False

  1. Inflow of cash refers to all transactions that lead to increase in cash and cash equivalents.
  2. Outflow of cash refers to all transactions that lead to decrease in cash and cash equivalents.
  3. Non-cash transactions are covered in cash flow statements.
  4. Cash sales – cash outflow.
  5. Cash receipts from debtors are financing activity.
  6. Cash payment relating to a future contract is an investing activity.
  7. Cash receipts from debtors are treated as cash inflow for operating activities.
  8. Cash receipts on interest and dividend are treated as cash inflow for financing activities.
  9. Cash proceeds from issuing share are treated as cash inflow from financing activities.
  10. Cash receipts from sale of fixed assets are shown as cash inflow from financing activities.
  11. Cash payment to creditors is treated as cash outflow for investing activities.
  12. The cash flow statement is based upon accrual basis of accounting.
  13. Redemption of preference shares is an investing activity.
  14. Cash payment to income tax is operating activity.
  15. Repayment of any finance liability is financing activity.
  16. Cash proceeds from long-term borrowings are an investing activity.
  17. Cash receipts from royalties are operating activity.
  18. Cash flow statement is concerned with change in working capital position between the two different dates of balance sheet.
  19. Cash payment to creditors is a financing activity.
  20. Accounting standard (AS)–3 sets standards to the preparation of cash flow statement.
  21. Bank balance is cash equivalent in the preparation of cash flow statement.
  22. Decrease in current assets will result in increase in cash.
  23. Increase in current liabilities will result in decrease in cash.
  24. If there is net loss (negative cash from operation) then there is net outflow of cash from operating activities.
  25. Acquisition and disposal of long-term asset is termed as “Investing Activities” of a concern.
  26. A change in owners” capital and borrowing capital is revealed in cash flow from financing activities of a concern.
  27. If there is negative cash from activities, then there will be net inflow of cash.
  28. Revaluation of building affects cash flows.
  29. Sources of cash and uses of cash are to be equal.
  30. Sources of cash should always be more than uses of cash.

prepaid expenses an increase of rs 200 bills receivable a decrease of rs 3 000 bills 609274

X Ltd made a profit of Rs 1,00,000 after charging depreciation of Rs 20,000 on assets and a transfer for General Reserve of Rs 30,000. The Goodwill retain off was Rs 7,000 and the gain on sale of machineries was Rs 3,000. The other information available: (charges in the value of current assets and current liabilities). At the end of the year, debtors show an increase of Rs 6,000; creditors an increase of Rs 10,000; prepaid expenses an increase of Rs 200; bills receivable a decrease of Rs 3,000; bills payable a decrease of Rs 4,000 and outstanding expenses a decrease of Rs 2,000. Ascertain cash flow from operating activities.

the goodwill written off rs 7 000 and the gain on sale of the machineries was rs 3 0 609275

X Ltd made a profit of Rs 1,20,000 after charging of depreciation of Rs 20,000 on assets and a transfer to General Reserve of Rs 30,000. The goodwill written off Rs 7,000 and the gain on sale of the machineries was Rs 3,000. Changes in the value of current assets and current liabilities at the end of the year: Debtors showed an increase of Rs 6,000; creditors an increase of Rs 10,000; prepaid expenses an increase of Rs 200; bills receivable a decrease of Rs 3,000; bills payable a decrease of Rs 4,000 and outstanding expenses a decrease of Rs 2,000. Ascertain cash flow from operating activities.

on mar 31 2008 y ltd made a profit of rs 1 25 000 after considering the following 609276

On Mar 31, 2008, Y Ltd. made a profit of Rs 1,25,000 after considering the following.

Rs

Depreciation on Billings

25,000

Depreciation on Plant and Machinery

45,000

Amortisation or Goodwill

20,000

Gain on Sale of Machinery

10,000

Current Assets and Current Liabilities

Apr 1, 2007 Rs

Mar 31, 2008 Rs

Accounts Receivable

35,000

45,000

Stock in Hand

75,000

69,000

Cash in Hand

18,000

30,000

Accounts Payable

30,000

32,000

Expenses Payable

10,000

5,000

Bank Overdraft

60,000

35,000

Ascertain cash flow from Operating Activities.

calculate net cash flows from operating activities from the following details 609277

Calculate net cash flows from Operating Activities from the following details.

Rs

Profits earned during the year 2008

50,000

Transfer to General Reserve

10,000

Depreciation provided

20,000

Profit on Sale of Furniture

5,000

Loss on Sale of Machineries

10,000

Preliminary Expenses retain off

10,000

Particulars

2007 Rs

2009 Rs

Debtors

10,000

15,000

Bills Receivable

7,000

5,000

Stock

15,000

18,000

Prepaid Expenses

2,000

3,000

Bills Payable

15,000

25,000

Creditors

20,000

18,000

Outstanding Expenses

3,000

4,000

y ltd made a net profit of rs 15 000 for the year ending on mar 31 2009 after taking 609278

Y Ltd. made a net profit of Rs 15,000 for the year ending on Mar 31, 2009 after taking the following into consideration.

Rs

Depreciation on Plant and Machinery

15,000

Depreciation on Buildings

45,000

Amortisation of Goodwill

20,000

Loss on Sale of Machinery

5,000

Current Assets and Current Liabilities at the beginning and at the end of the year.

Particulars

Apr 1, 2008 Rs

Mar 31, 2009 Rs

Accounts Receivables

35,000

40,000

Stock in Hand

55,000

42,000

Cash in Hand

12,000

2,000

Expense Due

6,000

8,000

Accounts Payable

60,000

53,000

Calculate cash flow from Operating Activities.

from the following summarised balance sheets of a company compute cash flow from ope 609280

From the following summarised balance sheets of a company, compute cash flow from operating activities.

Dr.

Liabilities

2007
Rs

2008 Rs

Assets

2007
Rs

2008
Rs

Creditors

20,000

25,000

Cash

20,000

10,000

Bills Payable

20,000

5,000

Investments

40,000

30,000

Other Current Liabilities

40,000

45,000

Stock

30,000

45,000

6% Debentures

60,000

80,000

Debtors

30,000

40,000

P& L A/c

80,000

1,10,000

Gross Block

1,00,000

1,40,000

2,20,000

2,65,000

2,20,000

2,65,000

from the flowing summarised balance sheets of a company calculate cash flow from ope 609281

From the flowing summarised Balance Sheets of a company calculate cash flow from Operating Activities.

Dr.

Liabilities

2007
Rs

2008
Rs

Assets

2007
Rs

2008
Rs

Creditors

20,000

25,000

Cash

20,000

30,000

Bills Payable

20,000

25,000

Investments

40,000

30,000

Other Current Liabilities

40,000

45,000

Stock

30,000

45,000

6% Debentures

60,000

80,000

Debtors

30,000

40,000

P&LA/c

90,000

1,10,000

Gross Block

1,10,000

1,40,000

2,30,000

2,85,000

2,30,000

2,85,000

from the following summarised balance sheets calculate cash flow from operating acti 609283

From the following summarised Balance Sheets, calculate cash flow from Operating Activities.

Liabilities

2007
Rs

2008 Rs

Assets

2007
Rs

2008 Rs

Creditors

30,000

45,000

Cash

30,000

50,000

Rills Payable

30000

35000

Investments

50000

40000

Other Current Liabilities

50,000

55,000

Stock

40,000

65,000

Share Capital

1,00,000

1,30,000

Debtors

40,000

50,000

P& L A/c

80,000

1,00,000

Fixed Assets

1,30,000

1,60,000

2,90,000

3,65,000

2,90,000

3,65,000

patents were written of to the extent of rs 30 000 and some patents were sold at a p 609287

From the following information calculate cash flow from Investing Activities.

Mar 31, 2008 Rs

Mar 31, 2009 Rs

Machinery

5,00,000

5,50,000

Accumulated Depreciation

1,00,000

1,20,000

Patent Rights

3,00,000

1,80,000

Additional Information

  1. During the year, a machine costing Rs 50,000 with accumulated depreciation Rs 30,000 was sold for Rs 25,000.
  2. Patents were written of to the extent of Rs 30,000, and some patents were sold at a profit of Rs 25,000.

during the year 2008 ndash 2009 the company issued bonus shares in the ratio of 2 1 609290

A public limited company provides the following figures. Calculate the net cash flow from Financing Activities.

Mar 31, 2008 Rs

Mar 31, 2009 Rs

Equity Share Capital

8,00,000

12,00,000

10% Debentures

1,50,000

6% Debentures

3,00,000

Additional Information

  1. Interest paid on Debentures Rs 15,000
  2. Dividend paid Rs 40,000
  3. During the year 2008–2009, the company issued bonus shares in the ratio of 2:1 by capitalizing the reserve.

during the year 2008 ndash 2009 furniture costing rs 5 000 was sold at a profit of r 609291

Calculate cash flow from (i) Investing Activities and (ii) Financing Activities from the following information.

Mar 31, 2008 Rs

Mar 31, 2009 Rs

Furniture (at cost)

30,000

40,000

Accumulated Depreciations Furniture

7,000

10,000

Capital

1,50,000

2,25,000

Loan from Bank

40,000

25,000

During the year 2008–2009, furniture costing Rs 5,000 was sold at a profit of Rs 3,000. Depreciation charged during the year was Rs 6,000.

the company transfers annually a sum of rs 80 000 to the ldquo repairs and renewals 609525

Model: Repairs & renewals The following particulars are available from the books of Modern Electricity Company:

Rs.

Balance of Repairs and Renewals Reserve

Account as on 1 April 2009

2,10,000

Actual Repairs Incurred During the Year Ended

31 March 2010

90,000

31 March 2011

60,000

The Company transfers annually a sum of Rs.80,000 to the “repairs and renewals” reserve account Draw up the account for the years the years 2009–10 and 2010–11.

  1. Provide depreciation on: building 21/2%, machinery 71/2%, mains 5%; transformers, etc. 10%; Meters 15%
  2. A call of Rs.5 per share was payable on 30 June 2010 and arrears are subject to interest at 5% per annum

You are required to prepare (a) revenue A/c; (b) capital A/c for the year ended 31 December 2010 and (c) the balance sheet as on that date.

estimated cost of replacement adjustments an electricity company in himachal pradesh 609528

Model: Estimated cost of replacement adjustments An electricity company in Himachal Pradesh decides to replace one of its old plants with a modern one with a larger capacity. The plant was installed in 1948 at the cost to the company of Rs.90,00,000, the components of materials, labour and overhead being in the ratio of 4:3:3.

It is ascertained that the cost of materials and labour have gone up by 50% and 80%, respectively. The proportion of overheads to total costs is expected to remain the same as before.

The cost of the new plant as per improved design is Rs.2,00,00,000 and in addition, materials recovered from the old plant was of the value of Rs.10,00,000, have been used in the construction of the new plant. The old plant was scrapped and sold for Rs.20,00,000.

The accounts of the company are maintained under double account system. Indicate how much would be capitalized and the amount that would be changed to revenue. Show journal entries and prepare necessary ledger accounts.

partial replacement of asset an electricity company laid down a main at the cost of 609529

Model: Partial replacement of asset An electricity company laid down a main at the cost of Rs.30,00,000. Some years later, the company laid down an auxiliary main for one-third of the length of the old main at a cost of Rs.12,00,000. It also replaced the rest of the length of old main at a cost of Rs.36,00,000. The costs of materials and labour have gone up by 20%. Sale of old materials realized Rs.1,00,000. Old materials valued at Rs.1,00,00 were used in the renewal and old materials valued at Rs.1,50,000 were used in the auxiliary main. Give the journal entries for recording the above transactions and show the capital expenditure and revenue expenditure.

partial replacement of assets with special adjustment on estimation of present cost 609530

Model: Partial replacement of assets with special adjustment on estimation of present cost A power supply company has built a power station and the connecting lines during 2007. The following further particulars are furnished:

  1. In the year 2007, the company incurred an amount of Rs.9,00,000 towards purchase of machinery items and Rs.1,00,000 towards labour expenses. The company also used stores worth Rs.2,00,000 from its existing stock which was in the warehouse.
  2. Extension and replacement was carried out to the power station in 2010 as a cost of Rs.5,00,000 out of which material worth Rs.10,000 was used from the existing stock for replacement purposes. The extent of replacement was estimated as 20% of original cost.
  3. The cost of materials and wages in 2010 have gone up by 25%.
  4. The old materials discarded in the process of extension and replacement were of the value of Rs.50,000.
  5. Out of the above, material valued as Rs.30,000 was used for extension purposes and the balance not being used was sold for Rs.20,000.

You are required to show the journal entries in respect of the above transaction for the year 2010. Workings should form part of your answer.

preparation electric supply ltd rebuilt and re equipped one of their mains at a cash 609531

Model: Replacement A/c—Preparation Electric Supply Ltd. rebuilt and re-equipped one of their mains at a cash cost of 80,00,000. The old mains, thus, superseded cost for 30,00,000. The capacity of the new main is double that of old main. Rs.1,40,000 was realized from sale of old materials. Four old motors valued as Rs.4,00,000 salvaged from the old main were used in the reconstruction. The cost of labour and material now is, respectively, 30% and 25% higher than when the old main was built. The proportion of labour to material in the main then and now is 2:3. Show the journal entries for recording the above transactions if the accounts are mentioned under double account system.

anil sunil and vinyl are partners of a firm sharing profits and losses at 20 40 and 609134

Anil, Sunil and Vinyl are partners of a firm sharing profits and losses at 20%, 40% and 40%, respectively. Their summarized Balance Sheet on Dec 31, 2009, when they decided to dissolve the firm, was as follows:

Liabilities

Rs

Assets

Rs

Capital Accounts

2,50,000

Cash and Bank Balance

25,000

Current Accounts

25,000

Sundry Debtors

1,50,000

Provision for Depreciation:

25,000

Stock

87,500

Depreciation on Machinery

General Reserve

67,500

Machinery

2,00,000

Provision for Doubtful Debts

37,500

Goodwill

50,000

Sundry Creditors

1,32,500

DeferredRevenueExpenses

25,000

5,37,500

5,37,500

Additional Information

  1. Capital and current accounts are in proportion of profit sharing ratio.
  2. Debtors realised two-thirds of its gross value while stock and machinery realised Rs 55,000 and Rs 1,00,000, respectively.
  3. Investments written off in the past were taken over by Anil for Rs 1,15,000.
  4. Suppliers allowed discounts of Rs 7,500 in full settlement.
  5. Realisation expenses of Rs 12,500 were paid by Sunil and Vinyl in ratio of their capital account.
  6. An old machinery fully written off was sold for Rs 10,500 while an extra payment of Rs 500 is made to bank for a discounted bill being dishonoured.

You are required to prepare:

Realisation Account

Cash and Bank Account

Capital Accounts of the partners

a b and c were partners sharing profits and losses in the ratio of 3 2 1 on mar 31 2 609135

A, B and C were partners sharing profits and losses in the ratio of 3:2:1 on Mar 31, 2010 their balance sheet was as follows:

Liabilities

Rs

Assets

Rs

Sundry Creditors

30,800

Cash at Bank

7,000

Bills Payable

27,200

Stock

39,600

A”s Loan

20,000

Debtors 30,000

General Reserve

24,000

Less: Provision 2,000

28,000

Capital Accounts:

Joint Life Policy

8,000

A

40,000

Furniture

20,000

B

32,000

Machinery

87,400

C

16,000

1,90,000

1,90,000

The firm was dissolved on Apr 1, 2010. Joint Life Policy was taken over by A at 125%. Stock realised 1/11th less. Debtors realised 90% furniture fetched 26% less while machinery was sold for 105%. In addition, one bill for Rs 10,000 under discount was dishonoured and had to be taken up by the firm. Expenses of realization amounted to Rs 3,970.

You are required to provide the necessary ledger accounts to close the books of the firm.

x y and z were partners sharing profit and losses in the ratio of 2 2 1 dissolved th 609136

X, Y and Z were partners sharing profit and losses in the ratio of 2:2:1 dissolved the firm on Dec 31, 2009, whose Balance Sheet on that date was as follows:

Liabilities

Rs

Assets

Rs

Sundry Creditors

40,600

Cash at Bank

9,000

General Reserve

20,000

Stock

52,000

Joint Life Policy Reserve

16,000

Debtors 20,000

Capital Accounts:

Less: Provision 1.000

19,000

X

50,000

Joint Life Policy

22,000

Y

30,000

Furniture

20,000

Z

26,000

Premises

60,600

1,82,600

1,82,600

Note: There is a bill for Rs 10,000 under discount. The bill was received from “A.”

The assets except Cash at Bank and Joint Life Policy were sold to a company which paid Rs 1,74,000 in cash. The Joint Life Policy was surrendered @ 110%. “A” proved insolvent and a dividend of 50% was received from his estate. Sundry Creditors were paid 95% in full settlement. The realisation expenses amounted to Rs 8,030.

You are required to prepare the Realisation Account, Cash Book and Partner’s Capital accounts.

p q r and s were in partnership sharing profits at 4 3 2 1 their position on dec 31 609139

P, Q, R and S were in partnership sharing profits at 4:3:2:1. Their position on Dec 31, 2009 was as follows:

Liabilities

Rs

Assets

Rs

Capitals:

Sundry Assets

96,000

P 21,000

Loss to Date

45,000

Q 24,000

Q”s Drawings

12,000

R 12,000

S”s Drawings

3,000

S 9,000

66,000

Creditors

90,000

1,56,000

1,56,000

They decided to dissolve the firm on this date. The assets realised Rs 81,000. P and Q are both insolvent. Q’s private assets amount to Rs 24,000 and his private liabilities Rs 21,000. S’s private assets are Rs 18,000 and his private liabilities are Rs 3,000. Show the relevant accounts assuming that all the transactions are put through on Mar 31 and that Q’s estate realised only Rs 12,000 and S’s estate realised Rs 15,000.

capitals of the partners are fixed by the deed profits and losses are shared equally 609140

The following is the Balance Sheet as on Mar 31, 2010 of a firm:

Liabilities

Rs

Assets

Rs

Creditors

51,200

Bank Balance

2,750

Loans:

Debtors

48,030

P

15,000

Stock

32,000

Q

6,000

Machinery

14,300

Current Accounts

Land and Buildings

42,000

P

10,600

Current Accounts – R

4,970

Q

1,250

Capital Accounts

P

30,000

Q

20,000

R

10,000

1,44,050

1,44,050

Capitals of the partners are fixed by the deed, profits and losses are shared equally. The business is closed due to loss. The assets, except the bank balance, realised net Rs 1,15,000. R is insolvent and realization expenses amounted to Rs 1,560. Show the final realisation and division amongst the partners. Apply Garner vs. Murray rule.

a customer who owed rs 1 20 000 became insolvent and nothing could be recovered from 609141

Amar, Akbar and Antony are partners sharing profits and losses in the ratio of 2:1:1. On Mar 31, 20 –, their Balance Sheet was as follows:

Liabilities

Rs

Assets

Rs

Creditors

80,000

Cash

10,000

Capitals:

Bank

60,000

Amar

2,00,000

Debtors

1,40,000

Akbar

1,00,000

Loss: Provision for

Antony

70.000

Doubtful Debts

7,000

1,33,000

3,70,000

Stock

On ship

2,00,000

In Godown

40,000

2,40,000

Fixed Assets

7,000

4,50,000

4,50,000

On that day there were three devastating incidents:

A customer who owed Rs 1,20,000 became insolvent and nothing could be recovered from his estate. The ship was caught in a storm and it sunk with the entire cargo. The stock was not insured.

The godown caught fire. The stock that could be saved was only worth Rs 6,000. This stock was also not insured.

The partners decided to dissolve the firm. Fixed assets realised Rs 2,000; remaining debtors realized Rs 19,000; stock was sold for Rs 5,000. The creditors claiming payment totaled Rs 84,000. The partners did not have any private assets. Realisation expenses amounted to Rs 1,000.

You are required to pass journal entities to close the books of the firm. Also, show Realisation Account; Cash and Bank A/c and partner’s Capital Accounts.

sundry creditors to the extent of rs 500 were paid in full the total payment to sund 609142

Kamal, Vimal and Sunil were partners sharing profits and losses in the ratio of 5:3:2, respectively. Their Balance Sheet as on Mar 31, 2010 was as follows:

Liabilities

Rs

Assets

Rs

Sundry Creditors

1,15,000

Furnitureand Fixtures

30,000

General Reserves

50,000

Stock

1,30,000

Capital Accounts:

Debtors

2,00,000

Kamal

1,00,000

Less: Provision for Bad Debts

10.000

1,90,000

Vimal

80,000

Cash

10,000

Sunil

15,000

1,95,000

3,60,000

3,60,000

The firm was dissolved on that date. Assets realised as follows:

Furniture and Fixtures: Rs 10,000; Stock: Rs 1,00,000; Debtors: Rs 1,20,000.

Sundry creditors to the extent of Rs 500 were paid in full. The total payment to sundry creditors was Rs 1,04,500. It was found that there was a liability of Rs 30,500 for damages which had also to be paid.

Winding up expenses amounted to Rs 10,000. Sonal became insolvent and he could pay only 20 paise in a rupee.

Prepare ledger accounts to close the books of the firm following Garner vs. Murray rule.

a dividend of 50 paise in the rupee was received from the court receiver prepare rea 609144

The following was the Balance Sheet of C, D and E on Dec 31, 2009.

Liabilities

Rs

Assets

Rs

Sundry Creditors

60,000

Cash

5,000

Loan on Mortgage of Freehold Property

8,000

Debtors

44,000

C”s Capital Account

50,000

Stock in Trade

46,000

Es Capital Account

30,000

Furniture

10,200

C”s Current Account

2,000

Freehold Property

36,000

Es Current Account

1,000

D”s Current Account

9,800

1,51,000

1,51,000

The partners shared profit and losses in the ratio 3:2:3. It was decided to dissolve the partnership as on the date of the Balance Sheet. The assets realised are as follows: Freehold Property 30%; Furniture 80% less; Stock 40%; Debtors 50% less. The realisation expenses amounted to Rs 5,240. The sundry creditors agreed to take 75 paise in the rupee in full satisfaction if D is insolvent. A dividend of 50 paise in the rupee was received from the court receiver. Prepare Realisation Account, Capital and Current Accounts of partners by applying Garner vs.

j k and l were in partnership sharing profits and losses in the ratio of 2 3 5 they 609145

J, K and L were in partnership sharing profits and losses in the ratio of 2:3:5. They prepared the following Balance Sheet on Dec 31, 2009, when they decided to dissolve:

Liabilities

Rs

Assets

Rs

Loan from Bank (against the securityofPlant and Machinery)

75,000

Plant and Machinery

1,50,000

Loan from Mrs. L (with on charge on stock)

1,03,750

Debtors

50,000

Loan from L

20,000

Stock

1,00,000

Trade Creditors

1,01,250

Advance to 1

20,000

Capitals:

Cash

5,000

J

30,000

Profit and Loss Account (Dr. Balance)

75,000

K

40,000

L

30,000

4,00,000

4,00,000

Plant and Machinery, Debtors and stock realised 70%. Prepare the necessary ledger accounts (including loan from Mrs. L Account and Trade Creditors’ Account, after considering the position of partners as follows:

J

K

L

Private Estate

100000

50000

50000

Private liabilities

38,334

85,000

46,666

you ascertain that the balance in profit and loss account is prior to charging inter 609146

Ajay, Vijay and Sanjay were in partnership sharing profits and losses in the ratio of 1/5:3/10:1/2. The Balance Sheet as on Dec 31, 2009, when they decided to dissolve, was as follows:

Liabilities

Rs

Assets

Rs

Capital Accounts

Plant and Machinery

1,50,000

Ajay 90,000

Sundry Debtors

6,00,000

Vijay 1,20,000

Advance to Ajay

60,000

Sanjay 90,000

3,00,000

Cash

30,000

Loan from Bank on Book Debts and Plant

3,60,000

Profit and Loss Account

2,40,000

Loan from Sanjay (advanced on Jan 1, 2009)

60,000

Trade Creditors

3,60,000

10,80,000

10,80,000

You ascertain that the balance in Profit and Loss Account is prior to charging interest on Sanjay’s loan. Plant and Machinery and Debtors realised 80%. Ajay’s private estate which was valued at Rs 2,10,000 has a liability there on Rs 90,000. The private estate realised only Rs 1,20,000. Vijay is insolvent on his own account to partnership.

You are required to prepare Realisation Account, Cash Account and Partner’s Capital Accounts.

the loss on realisation is to be determined after considering the amount finally pai 609147

X, Y and Z had the following Balance Sheet as on Mar 31, 20 –

Liabilities

Rs

Assets

Rs

Creditors

1,60,000

Fixed Assets

1,60,000

Loan from Mrs. X (with a charge on stock)

60,000

Debtors

96,000

Loan from Mr. X

40,000

Stock

80,000

Capital Accounts:

Cash at Bank

4,000

X 80,000

Loss

1,20,000

Y 80,000

Z 40,000

2,00,000

4,60,000

4,60,000

The firm was dissolved. Stock realised Rs 40,000; Fixed assets and debtors realised Rs 1,20,000 in all. The private position of the partners was as follows:

X

Y

Rs

Rs

Private Estate

40,000

32,000

Private Liabilities

60,000

24,000

Z was able to pay 50 paise in the rupee what was payable on his own account to the partnership. The partners shared profits and losses in the ratio of 4:3:3 for X, Y and Z, respectively. The loss on realisation is to be determined after considering the amount finally paid to the creditors. You are required to close the books of the firm by preparing the necessary ledger accounts.

during the year there were unrecorded assets purchased for rs 20 000 50 of the asset 609148

A, B, C and D are partners of a firm. A gets one-fourth share in profits. The other partners shared the balance equally. The following is their Balance Sheet as on Mar 31, 20–.

Liabilities

Rs

Assets

Rs

Capital Account: Rs

Plant and Machinery

1,35,000

C 1,30,000

Furniture and Fixtures

56,000

D 70,000

2,00,000

Sundry Debtors 1,00,000

General Reserves

2,00,000

Less: Reserve for Doubtful

Debts 3L700

68,300

Sundry Creditors

80,000

Bills Receivable

25,000

Trademarks

14,000

Stock

80,000

Capital Accounts:

A 60,000

B 29.700

89,700

Cash in Hand

12,000

4,80,000

4,80,000

The partnership was dissolved on the date of Balance Sheet on the following terms:

  1. On that day it was found that a liability for purchase of goods of Rs 40,000 had been omitted to be recorded and that the goods had been included in stock.
  2. The assets realised as Plant and Machinery Rs 1,20,000; Furniture and Fixtures Rs 36,000; Debtors Rs 42,000 and Stock Rs 60,000.
  3. The creditors including the unrecorded creditors were paid in full. There was a contingent liability in respect of bills discounted for Rs 7,000.
  4. During the year there were unrecorded assets purchased for Rs 20,000. 50% of the assets were handed over to the vendor of the asset (also unrecorded) in full settlement of his claim. The remaining 50% were sold for Rs 8,000.
  5. The realisation expenses amounted to Rs 7,700.
  6. B is insolvent and can contribute only Rs 4,700.
  7. The contingent liability did not materialise.

Prepare Realisation Account, Cash Account and partner’s Capital Accounts.

land 50 building 125 stocks 93 75 machinery 20 less debtors rs 42 500 goodwill rs 30 609149

X and Y were carrying on business in partnership sharing profits and losses in the ratio of 3/5 and 2/5. On Mar 31, 20–, they transferred their business to Alpha RT Ltd. The Balance Sheet of X and Y as on Mar 31 was as follows:

Liabilities

Rs

Assets

Rs

X”s Capital

1,50,000

Land

25,000

Y”s Capital

75,000

Building

1,00,000

Sundry Creditors

40,000

Machinery

50,000

Stocks

40,000

Debtors

45,000

Cash

5,000

2,65,000

2,65,000

The company took the following assets at the following valuation:

Land 50%; Building 125%; Stocks 93.75%; Machinery 20% less; Debtors Rs 42,500; Goodwill Rs 30,000. Creditors were paid 93.75% in full and final settlement. Company paid Rs 25,000 in fully paid 25,000 equity, shares of Rs 10 each and balance in cash. Expenses of transfer amounted to Rs 2,500.

Prepare ledger accounts in the books of the firm and make opening entities in the books of a company.

stock and debtors realised rs 47 400 expenses amounted to rs 600 c and d agreed to d 609150

C and D were equal partners. On Dec 31, 20–, their Balance Sheet was as follows:

Liabilities

Rs

Assets

Rs

C”s Capital Account

1,50,000

Fixed Assets (COST) 2,80,000

D”s Capital Account

70,000

Less: Provision for

Depreciation 90.000

1,90,000

C”s Loan

20,000

Joint Life Policy

12,600

Sundry Creditors

53,600

Stocks

54,000

Debtors

30,000

Cash

7,000

2,93,600

2,93,600

On that day they dissolved the firm. Fixed Assets were sold to Beta. Co. Ltd for Rs 2,00,000 payable in the form of 20,000 shares of Rs 10 each. C took over Joint Life Policy at an agreed valuation of Rs 10,000. Stock and debtors realised Rs 47,400. Expenses amounted to Rs 600. C and D agreed to distribute shares in Beta Co. Ltd between themselves in the ratio of their final claims. Sundry Creditors were paid at book value. Prepare Realisation Account, Capital Accounts and Cash Book.

the company also agreed to pay the trade creditors which were agreed to allow a disc 609151

X, Y and Z carry on business in partnership sharing profits and losses in the proportions of ½, 3/8, and 1/8, respectively. On Mar 31, 2010, they agreed to sell their business to Victory Ltd. Their position on that date was as follows:

Liabilities

Rs

Assets

Rs

Capitals

Freehold Property

1,44,000

X 1,20,000

Machinery

1,26,000

Y 90,000

Book Debts

45,000

Z 78.000

2,88,000

Stocks

69,000

Loan on Mortgage

48,000

Cash

6,000

Trade Creditors

54,000

3,90,000

3,90,000

Victory Ltd took the following assets at the valuation as follows:

Freehold Property 30% more; Machinery 30% less; Book Debts 90%; Stock 10% less; Goodwill Rs 38,220.

The company also agreed to pay the Trade Creditors which were agreed to allow a discount of 2%. The company paid Rs 2,01,000 in fully paid shares of Rs 10 each and the balance in cash. The expenses amounted to Rs 4,500.

You are required to prepare the necessary ledger accounts in the books of the firm.

the purchase consideration is discharged as follows 20 000 equity shares of rs 10 ea 609152

Success Ltd was formed to acquire the business of R and S who share profits in the ratio of 2:1, respectively. The Balance Sheet of R and S on Dec 30, 2009 was as follows.

Liabilities

Rs

Assets

Rs

Bills Payable

34,400

Land and Buildings

80,000

Sundry Creditors

43,200

Machinery

40,000

Mrs. R”s Loan

6,400

Stock

48,000

Capitals:

Debtors

46,400

R 1,28,000

Bills Receivable

32,800

S 80,000

2,08,000

Investments

9,600

Cash at Bank

19,200

Goodwill

16,000

2,92,000

2,92,000

It was agreed by the company to take over the assets at book value with the exception of Land and Buildings and Stock which are taken over at Rs 80,000 and Rs 50,000, respectively. The investments are retained by the firm and sold by the firm for Rs 8,000. They also discharged the loan of Mrs. R. The company takes over the remaining liabilities. The value of goodwill is fixed at Rs 57,600.

The purchase consideration is discharged as follows: 20,000 equity shares of Rs 10 each and the balance in cash. Close the books of the firm.

the purchase consideration will be payable partly in shares of rs 10 each and party 609153

L, M and N were partners in a business sharing profits and losses in the ratio of 2:1:1. Their Balance Sheet as at Dec 31, 2009 was as follows:

Liabilities

Rs

Assets

Rs

Fixed Capital

Fixed Assets

150

L

100

Investments

25

M

50

Stock

50

N

50

200

Debtors

30

Current Account:

Cash and Bank

75

L

20

M

10

30

Unsecured Loans

100

330

330

On Jan 1, it is agreed among the partners that Supriya & Co, Ltd, a newly formed company with M and N having each taken up 50 shares of Rs 10 each will take over the firm as a going concern including goodwill but excluding cash and bank balances.

The following points are also agreed upon:

  1. Good will be valued at three years purchase of super profits.
  2. The actual profit for the purpose of goodwill valuation will be Rs 50,000.
  3. Normal rate of return will be 15% on fixed capital.
  4. All other assets and liabilities will be taken over at book values.
  5. The purchase consideration will be payable partly in shares of Rs 10 each and party in cash. Payment in cash being to meet the requirement to discharge L who has agreed to retire.
  6. M and N are to acquire equal interest in the new company. Prepare necessary ledger accounts.
  7. Express of liquidation amount to Rs 20,000. Prepare necessary ledger accounts.

the assets were realised in instalments and payment was made on the proportionate ca 609155

For partnership dissolved on July 31, balance sheet on the date of dissolution was as follows:

Liabilities

Rs

Assets

Rs

Capitals:

Cash

16,200

Mohan

1,14,000

Sundry Assets

2,83,800

Mohamed

72,000

Martin

54.000

2,40,000

Loan: Mohamed

15,000

Sundry Creditors

45,000

3,00,000

3,00,000

The assets were realised in instalments and payment was made on the proportionate capital basis. Creditors were paid Rs 43,500 in full settlement of their accounts. Expenses on realisation were estimated to be Rs 8,100 but actual amount spent on this was Rs 6,000. This amount was paid on Nov 2. Draw up memorandum of distribution of cash that was realised as follows:

On Aug 10, Rs 37,800

On Sep 15, Rs 90,000

On Nov 2, Rs 1,20,000

The partners shared profits and losses in the ratio of 2:2:1

the remaining stock was taken over by y at an agreed amount of rs 9 000 the trade cr 609156

X, Y and Z were in partnership sharing profits and losses in the ratio of 2:1:1, respectively. On Dec 31, they decided to dissolve the partnership where their Balance Sheet stood as follows:

Liabilities

Rs

Assets

Rs

Trade Creditors

15,000

Premises

1,20,000

Loan (with a charge on premises)

90,000

Furniture

30,000

Loan from X

45,000

Stock

2,10,000

General Reserve

30,000

Sundry Debtors

1,50,000

Capitals:

Rs

Cash

9,000

X

1,50,000

Y

1,20,000

Z

69,000

3,39,000

5,19,000

5,19,000

The assets were realised in piecemeal as follows:

Jan 27 Premises: Rs 15,000 (received after meeting in full the liability on the mortgage ban); Sundry debtors – Rs 18,000; Stock – Rs 21,000

Feb 20 Sundry Debtors – Rs 22,500; Stock – Rs 25,500

Mar 25 Sundry Debtors – Rs 60,000; Stock – Rs 69,000

Apr 27 Sundry Debtors – Rs 45,000; Stock – Rs 75,000 and furniture Rs 24,000.

The remaining stock was taken over by Y at an agreed amount of Rs 9,000. The trade creditors were settled for Rs 12,000. The partners distributed cash at the end of every month beginning on Jan 31.

You are required to show the distribution of cash in the form of a statement applying the proportionate capital basis.

the partners share profits in the ratio of 5 3 2 it was agreed to repay the amounts 609158

P, Q and R were in partnership. The following is their Balance Sheet as at Dec 31 on which date they dissolved it:

Liabilities

As

Assets

As

Capital: A

51,000

Cash

12,000

B

24,000

Debtors

54,000

C

3,000

78,000

Stock

1,20,000

General Reserve

18,000

Loan A

18,000

B

12,000

30,000

Creditors

60,000

1,86,000

1,86,000

The partners share profits in the ratio of 5:3:2. It was agreed to repay the amounts due to the partners as and when the assets were realised as Feb 1; Rs 1,20,000; Apr 1, Rs 2,92,000; June 1, Rs 1,88,000. You are required to prepare a statement showing how the distribution should be made applying Maximum Loss Method.

smuthers company manufactures and sells three products selling price and variable co 609005

Smuthers Company manufactures and sells three products. Selling price and variable cost data for the models are as follows:

Product

Yellow

Blue

Red

Unit selling price

$36

840

$44

Unit variable costs

26

30

36

Contribution margin

$10

Sales mix

1

2

3

Instructions

(a) Compute the break-even point in units, assuming the total fixed costs are $320,004.

(b) Prove the correctness of your answer.

business decisions involve a choice among alternative courses of action in making su 609008

Business decisions involve a choice among alternative courses of action. In making such decisions, management ordinarily considers both financial and nonfinancial information. The process used to identify the financial data that change under alternative courses of action is called incremental analysis.

  1. Incremental analysis involves not only identifying relevant revenues and costs, but also determining the probable effects of the decision on future earnings.
  2. Data for incremental analysis involves estimates and uncertainty.
  3. Gathering data may involve market analysts, engineers, and accountants.

what is the amount of increase decrease to net income if geis accepts the order 609013

Geis Company produces 40,000 printers per month, which is 80% of plant capacity. Variable manufacturing costs are $80 per unit, and fixed manufacturing costs are $1,200,000, or $30 per unit. The printers are normally sold directly to retailers at $150 each. Geis has an offer from a foreign wholesaler to purchase an additional 4,000 printers at $100 per unit. Acceptance of the offer would not affect normal sales of the product, and the additional units can be manufactured without increasing plant capacity. What is the amount of increase (decrease) to net income if Geis accepts the order?

  1. ($200,000)
  2. ($ 40,000)
  3. $ 40,000
  4. $ 80,000

prepare an incremental analysis to determine whether calvin should make or buy ekrob 609018

Calvin Company manufactures its own subassembly units known by the code name “ekrob.” Calvin incurs the following annual costs in producing 40,000 ekrobs:

Direct materials

$ 60,000

Direct labor

90,000

Variable overhead

50,000

Fixed overhead

80,000

Total

$280,000

Calvin can purchase the ekrobs from Hobbes Corporation for $6.00 per unit. If they purchase the ekrobs, only $30,000 of the fixed overhead will be eliminated. However, the vacant factory space can be used to increase production of another product, which would generate annual income of $22,000.

Instructions

Prepare an incremental analysis to determine whether Calvin should make or buy ekrobs.

if the new software costs 70 000 and is expected to be useful for three years should 609019

King Enterprises is a research analysis firm for television advertisements. On January 1, 2013, management is considering updating its computer system with new software that is estimated to cut labor costs by 10 percent. King”s labor costs for the current year are estimated to be $400,000 and would be expected to remain the same the following two years. In addition, the new software has a filing system that will allow for a decrease in the storage of the hardcopy of documents within the facilities by 30 percent. The space opened up from the storage of documents will be used to decrease rent expense by $1,000 per month. If the new software costs $70,000 and is expected to be useful for three years, should King Enterprises purchase it?

indicate whether each of the following is true t or false f in the space provided 609021

Indicate whether each of the following is true (T) or false (F) in the space provided.

The budget itself and the administration of the budget are entirely accounting responsibilities.

A primary benefit of budgeting is that it provides definite objectives for evaluating subsequent performance at each level of responsibility.

If a budget is effective enough, it can be a substitute for management.

Management acceptance of budgets occurs more frequently when the flow of input data is from the highest level of responsibility to the lowest level of responsibility.

Effective budgeting depends on an organizational structure in which authority and responsibility over all phases of operations are clearly defined.

The budget committee is usually made up of people outside the company in order to decrease bias.

Financial planning models and statistical and mathematical techniques may be used in forecasting sales.

Long-range planning usually emphasizes meeting annual profit objectives.

Long-range plans contain considerably less detail than short-term budgets.

The sales budget is derived from the production budget.

The production budget shows unit production data as well as cost data.

The direct materials budget is derived from the direct materials units required for production plus desired ending direct materials units less beginning direct materials units.

The direct labor budget contains only quantity data (hours) which are derived from the production budget.

The manufacturing overhead budget shows the expected manufacturing overhead costs.

The cash budget contains three sections (cash receipts, cash disbursements, and financing) and the beginning and ending cash balances.

In order to develop a budgeted balance sheet, the previous year”s balance sheet is needed.

One difference between the master budget of a merchandising company and a manufacturing company is that the purchases budget is used instead of a production budget.

In service enterprises, the critical factor in budgeting is coordinating materials and equipment with anticipated services.

Not-for-profit organizations usually budget on the basis of cash flows (expenditures and receipts) rather than on a revenue and expense basis.

For governmental units, the budget must be strictly followed and overspending is often illegal.

vendela has the following sales budget for the year ending december 31 2013 609036

Vendela has the following sales budget for the year ending December 31, 2013:

Quarter

1

2

3

4

Year

Expected unit sales

4,000

3,500

5,000

5,500

18,000

On the basis of past experiences, Vendela Company believes it can meet future sales requirements by maintaining an ending inventory equal to 10% of the next quarter”s budgeted sales volume. On January 1, 2013, Vendela has beginning finished goods of 400 units. Vendela expects sales for the first quarter of 2014 to be 6,000 units.

Instructions

Prepare a production budget for Vendela Company for the year ending December 31, 2013.

prepare a direct materials budget for brinkley company for the year ending december 609037

Brinkley Company”s production budget for 2013 by quarters is as follows: (1) 6,000, (2) 7,000, (3), 8,000, and (4) 9,000. For the first quarter of 2012, the budget is 8,000 units. The manufacture of each unit requires three pounds of direct materials and an expected cost per unit of $2. The ending inventory of direct materials is expected to be 20% of the next quarter”s production needs. At December 31, 2012, Brinkley had 3,600 pounds of direct materials.

Instructions

Prepare a direct materials budget for Brinkley Company for the year ending December 31, 2013.

compute the missing amounts using the roi formula 609039

Comparative data for the following investment centers of Thorson Company are shown below.

DeKalb

Madison

Ann Arbor

Urbana

Controllable margin

$ 48,000

(b)

$120,000

$100,000

Average operating

assets

400,000

500.000

800,000

(d)

Return on investment

(a)

41%

(C)

12%

Instructions

Compute the missing amounts using the ROI formula.

a flexible budget provides a basis for evaluating a manager s performance for 609046

A flexible budget provides a basis for evaluating a manager”s performance for:

Production

Cost

Control

Control

No

No

Yes

No

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

When production levels decline within a relevant range and a flexible budget is used, what effects would be anticipated with respect to each of the following?

Total

Total

Fixed Costs

Variable Costs

Decrease

Decrease

Decrease

No change

No change

No change

No change

Decrease

A flexible budget is appropriate for:

Direct Labor

Manufacturing

Costs

Overhead Costs

No

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

No

Yes

gaylord company has the following flexible budget for manufacturing overhead 609055

Gaylord Company has the following flexible budget for manufacturing overhead:

Activity level:

Direct labor hours

20,000

25,000

30,000

Variable costs:

Indirect materials

$10,000

$ 12,500

S 15,000

Indirect labor

40,000

50,000

60,000

Supplies

30,000

37,500

45,000

Total

80,000

100,000

120,000

Fixed costs:

Depreciation

30,000

30,000

30,000

Supervision

45,000

45,000

45,000

Total

75,000

75,000

75,000

Total costs “155,000

5175,000

$195,000

In January, 22,000 direct labor hours were expected and 24,000 were worked.

Instructions

Given the following actual costs, complete the following budget report:

the following standard and actual cost data applied to the month of april when norma 609056

Morgan Inc. is a small company that manufactures baseball caps. For the past several years, the company has used a standard cost accounting system. Cole prepares monthly income statements for management with variances reported within the statement. In April 2013, 67,500 caps were produced. There were no finished caps on hand at either April 1 or April 30. The selling price per cap was $10.00. The following standard and actual cost data applied to the month of April when normal capacity was 14,000 direct labor hours.

Cost Element

Standard (per unit)

Actual

Direct materials

1 .5 yards at $3.00 per yard

$318,600 for 108,000 yards ($2.95 yard)

Direct labor

.2 hour at $11.00 per hour

$158,760 for 14,175 hours ($11 20 per hour)

Overhead

.2 hour at $ 5.00 per hour

$49,000 fixed overhead

$20,000 variable overhead

$20,000 variable overhead

Overhead is applied on the basis of direct labor hours. At normal capacity, budgeted fixed overhead costs were $49,000 and budgeted variable costs were $21000.

Instructions

(a) Compute the total. price, and quantity variances for (1) materials, (2) labor, and (3) the total, controllable, and volume variances for manufacturing overhead (assuming no beginning or ending material balances).

(b) Journalize the entries to record the variances and the completion and sale of the caps.

indicate whether each of them is true t or false f in the space provided 609057

Indicate whether each of the following is true (T) or false (F) in the space provided.

In concept, standards and budgets are essentially the same.

Standards may be useful in setting selling prices for finished goods.

Ideal standards represent an efficient level of performance under normal operating conditions.

The materials price standard is based on the purchasing department”s best estimate of the cost of raw materials.

The direct labor quantity standard is based on current wage rates adjusted for anticipated changes such as cost of living adjustments included in many union contracts.

The standard predetermined overhead rate is based on an expected standard activity index.

An unfavorable variance suggests efficiencies in incurring costs and in using materials and labor.

The materials price variance is the difference between actual quantity of materials purchased times the standard cost and the standard quantity of materials times the standard cost.

The materials quantity variance is the difference between the standard cost times the actual quantity of materials used and the standard cost times the standard quantity used.

The materials price variance is normally caused by the production department.

Material quantity variances can be caused by inexperienced workers, faulty machinery, or carelessness.

The labor quantity variance is the difference between the actual rate times the standard hours and the standard rate times the standard hours.

The use of an inexperienced worker instead of an experienced employee can result in a favorable labor price variance but probably an unfavorable quantity variance.

An increase in the cost of indirect manufacturing costs such as fuel and maintenance may cause an overhead variance.

All variances should be reported to appropriate levels of management as soon as possible.

In using variance reports, top management normally looks carefully at every variance.

A standard cost system may be used with either job order or process costing.

Under a standard cost accounting system, a favorable labor price variance will result in a credit to Labor Price Variance.

The use of standard costs in inventory costing is prohibited in financial statements.

The overhead controllable variance is the difference between the actual overhead costs incurred and the budgeted costs for the standard hours allowed.

barbara company manufactures coats with fur lined hoods the following information pe 609071

Barbara Company manufactures coats with fur-lined hoods. The following information pertains to the standard costs of manufacturing the hood of one coat:

Direct Material

1 yard at $30 per yard

Direct Labor

2 hours at $10 per hour

Variable Overhead

1/2 hour at $2 per hour

Fixed Overhead

1/2 hour at $3 per hour

Other data:

  1. Coats produced during June—10,000.
  2. 11,000 yards were purchased and used at $29 per yard.
  3. Actual direct labor costs were $209,000 for 19,000 hours worked.
  4. Normal capacity was 5,500 direct labor hours.
  5. Actual variable overhead costs were $9,500.
  6. Actual fixed overhead costs were $16,100.

Instructions

Compute the following.

prepare the entries for d brent in the following general journal 609072

Brent uses a standard cost accounting system. The following transactions occurred during the year:

Feb. 20

Purchased raw materials on account, $8,800 when the standard cost was $9,300.

Mar. 5

Incurred direct labor costs, $15,200 when the standard labor cost was $14,900.

May 10

Incurred manufacturing overhead costs, $11,000 (credit Accounts Payable).

June 18

Issued raw materials for production, $8,200 when the standard cost was $9,000.

Aug. 3

Assigned factory labor to production, $14,900 when the standard cost was $14,500.

Sept. 10

Applied manufacturing overhead to production, $10,150.

Oct. 2

Transferred completed work to finished goods, $29,700.

Nov. 22

Sold the finished goods on account for $42,000.

Dec. 31

Recognized unfavorable overhead variances: controllable $550 and volume $300.

Instructions

Prepare the entries for D. Brent in the following general journal.

the expenses of dissolution amounted to rs 400 you are required to prepare realisati 609132

P, Q and R sharing profit in the ratio of 3:1:1 decided to dissolve their firm on Mar 31, 2010, their position was as follows:

Liabilities

Assets

Creditors

12,000

Cash in Bank

7,000

Loan

3,000

Debtors

48,400

Capitals

Less: Reserve

2,400

46,000

P

55,000

Stock

16,600

Q

22,000

Furniture

2,400

R

20,002

97,000

Sundry Assets

40,000

1,12,000

1,12,000

It is agreed that:

  1. P is to take over all the furniture at Rs 2,000 and debtors amounting to Rs 40,000 at Rs 36,000. P also agrees to pay the creditors.
  2. Q is to take over all the stock at book value and some of the sundry assets Rs 14,400 (being book value less 10%).
  3. R is to take over the remaining sundry assets at 90% of the book value and assume responsibility for the discharge of the loan.
  4. The remaining debtors were taken by a debt collecting agency at 80% of the book value.
  5. The expenses of dissolution amounted to Rs 400. You are required to prepare Realisation Account, Bank Account and Capital Accounts of the Partners.

prepare the production cost report 608948

The Muller Company reports the following physical units for its Polishing Department for the month ended July 31, 2013.

Units to be accounted for

Physical Units

Work in process, Jury 1

1,000

Transferred in

11,000

Total units

12,000

Units accounted for

Completed and transferred out

10,500

Work in process, July 31 (30% complete)

1,500

Total units

12,000

Work in process July 1 was $3,000 for direct materials and $1,920 for conversion costs. Costs incurred in July were: materials $59,400, labor $23,520, and overhead $9,600. The percentage complete refers to conversion costs. Materials and transferred in units are added at the beginning of the process.

Instructions

Prepare the production cost report

bodhi company has three cost pools and two doggie products leashes and collars the a 608955

Bodhi Company has three cost pools and two doggie products (leashes and collars). The activity cost pool of ordering has the cost driver of purchase orders. The activity cost pool of assembly has a cost driver of parts. The activity cost pool of supervising has the cost driver of labor hours. The accumulated data relative to those cost drivers is as follows:

Expected Use of

Total Expected

Estimated

Cost Drivers by Product

Cost Drivers

Cost Drivers

Overhead

Leashes

Collars

Purchase orders

130,000 orders

$260,000

70,000

60,000

Parts

800,000 pails

400,000

300,000

500,000

Labor hours

25,000 hours

300,000

15,000

10,000

$960,000

The activity-based overhead rates are:

per order

per pert

per hour

$2.40

$0.50

$6.00

$2.00

$0.50

$12.00

$1.00

$2.00

$12.00

$2.00

$0.50

$ 6.00

the costs assigned to leashes for supervising are 608956

Bodhi Company has three cost pools and two doggie products (leashes and collars). The activity cost pool of ordering has the cost driver of purchase orders. The activity cost pool of assembly has a cost driver of parts. The activity cost pool of supervising has the cost driver of labor hours. The accumulated data relative to those cost drivers is as follows:

Expected Use of

Total Expected

Estimated

Cost Drivers by Product

Cost Drivers

Cost Drivers

Overhead

Leashes

Collars

Purchase orders

130,000 orders

$260,000

70,000

60,000

Parts

800,000 pails

400,000

300,000

500,000

Labor hours

25,000 hours

300,000

15,000

10,000

$960,000

The costs assigned to leashes for supervising are:

a. $ 90,000.

b. $180,000.

c. $120,000.

d. $ 60,000.

which of the following statements about the classification of activity levels is inc 608960

Which of the following statements about the classification of activity levels is incorrect?

a. Setting up a classification of activity levels provides managers a structured way of thinking about the relationship between activities and the resources they consume.

b. The number of activities performed at the batch level goes up as the number of units within the batches changes.

c. Facility-sustaining activity costs are not dependent upon the number of products, batches, or units produced.

d. The number of activities performed at the batch level goes up as the number of batches rises.

which of the following statements about activity based costing abc in service indust 608961

Which of the following statements about activity-based costing (ABC) in service industries is incorrect?

a. The overall objective of ABC in service firms is no different than it is in a manufacturing company.

b. The classification of activities into unit-level, batch-level, product-level, and facility-level activities also applies to service industries.

c. The general approach to identifying activities, activity cost pools, and cost drivers is the same for service companies and for manufacturers.

d. ABC is usually easier to implement in a service industry because there is a smaller proportion of overhead costs that are company-wide costs.

doggi chew company uses a traditional product costing system to assign overhead cost 608965

Doggi Chew Company uses a traditional product costing system to assign overhead costs uniformly to all products. To meet government regulations and to assure dogs of safe, sanitary, and nutritious food, Doggi Chew engages in quality control. Doggi Chew assigns its quality-control overhead costs to all products at a rate of 15% of direct-labor costs. Its direct-labor cost for the month of February for its puppy food product line is $30,000. Doggi Chew is going to change its costing method to activity-based costing. Data relating to the puppy food line for the month of February is as follows:

Number of

Cost Drivers

Activity Cost Pool

Cost Driver

Overhead Rate

Used

In-house inspection

Number of pounds

$0.24 per pound

12,500 pounds

Government inspection

Number of servings

$0.05 per serving

1,000 servings

Certification

Customer orders

$0.32 per order

550 orders

Instructions

(a) Compute the quality-control overhead cost to be assigned to the puppy food product line for the month of February; (1) using the traditional product costing system (direct labor cost is the cost driver), and (2) using activity-based costing.

(b) By what amount does the traditional product costing system undercost or overcost the puppy food product line?

(c) Classify each of the activities as value-added or non-value-added.

(d) For each activity, identify the activity level as unit, batch, product or facility level.

fastchip inc manufactures two computers the fc pc which sells for 2 000 and the fc l 608966

Fastchip, Inc. manufactures two computers: the FC-PC which sells for $2,000, and the FC-laptop, which sells for $4,200. The production cost per unit for each computer in 2013 was as follows:

 

FC-PC

FC-laptop

Direct Materials

$1,260

$3,040

Direct Labor ($25 per hour)

200

300

Manufacturing overhead ($10 per DLH)

80

120

Total per unit cost

$1,540

53,460

 

 

 

In 2013, Fastchip manufactured 20,000 units of the FC-PC and 15,000 units of the FC-laptop. The overhead rate of $10 per direct labor hour was determined by dividing the total expected manufacturing overhead of $3,400,000 by the total direct labor hours (340,000) for the two computers.

The gross profit and gross profit rate on the computers were: FC-PC $460 ($2,000 − $1,540) and 23% ($460/$2,000); and FC-laptop $740 ($4,200 − $3,460) and 17.62% ($740/$4,200). Because of the lower profit margin on the FC-laptop, management is considering phasing out the FC-laptop and increasing the production of the FC-PC.

Before finalizing its decision, management asks the controller of Fastchip to prepare an analysis using activity-based costing. The controller accumulates the following information about overhead for the year ended December 31, 2013:

 

 

 

Cost

 

 

 

Total

Driver

Overhead

Activity

Cost Driver

Cost

Volume

Rate

Ordering raw materials

of orders

$ 100,000

80

$1,250

Receiving raw materials

of shipments.

$ 120,000

75

$1,600

Materials handling

weight of materials

$ 600,000

60,000 11)s

$ 10

Production scheduling

of orders

 

 

$ 2.86

Machining

machine hours

$ 100,000

35,000

$ 400

Quality control

of inspections

$ 800,000

2,000

 

inspections

of employees

 

 

 

Factory supervision

Cost Driver

$1,200,000

10,000

$ 120

Activity

of orders

$ 480,000

250

$1,920

The cost driver volume for each product was:

Cost driver

FC-PC

Fc laptop

total

of orders

60

20

80

-4 of shipments

50

25

75

weight of materials

40,000 lbs.

20,000 lbs.

60,000 lbs.

of orders

20,000

15,000

35,000

machine hours

1,100

900

2,000

of inspections

8,000

2,000

10,000

of employees

150

100

250

Instructions

(a) Assign the total 2013 manufacturing overhead costs to the two products using activity-based costing (ABC).

(b) What was the cost per unit, gross profit, and gross profit rate of each model using ABC costing?

the valley video shop has two employees 608967

The Valley Video Shop has two employees. The manager, J.J., is paid $2,200 per month. The other employee, Bob: is paid $1,200 per month. In addition, Bob is paid a commission of 20 cents per video that is rented. Other monthly costs are: store rent $1,000 plus 10 cents per rented video. depreciation on videos $1,000, utilities $400, and advertising $400. The rental fee for a video is $2.00.

Instructions

(a) Determine the variable cost per rented video and the total monthly fixed costs.

(b) Compute the break-even point in units and dollars.

(c) Determine the rentals required to earn net income of $2,000.

(d) Determine the margin of safety and margin of safety ratio, assuming 5,000 videos are rented in a month.

in the gabbana company maintenance costs are a mixed cost 608969

In the Gabbana Company, maintenance costs are a mixed cost. At the low level of activity (40 direct labor hours), maintenance costs are $600. At the high level of activity (100 direct labor hours), maintenance costs are $1,100. Using the high-low method, what is the variable maintenance cost per unit and the total fixed maintenance cost?

Variable Cost

Total

Per Unit

Fixed Cost

$8.33

$267

$8.33

$500

$11.00

$220

$15.00

$400

using the high low method compute 1 variable cost per direct labor hour and 2 the fi 608980

Galliano Company has accumulated the following information pertaining to maintenance costs for the last eight months.

Direct

Maintenance

Month

Labor Hours

of

January

2:800

15,000

February

1,000

7,000

March

2,500

13,000

April

4,000

22,000

May

3,000

18,000

June

3,500

19,000

July

1,500

8,000

August

2,000

10,000

Instructions

Using the high-low method, compute (1) variable cost per direct labor hour and (2) the fixed cost per month.

rykiel company sells radios for the year its revenues and costs were sales 550 000 1 608981

Rykiel Company sells radios. For the year its revenues and costs were: sales $550,000 (11,000 units), variable costs $330,000, and fixed costs $150,000.

Instructions

(a) Compute the contribution margin per unit.

(b) Compute the contribution margin ratio.

(c) Compute the break-even point in dollars using the contribution margin ratio.

(d) Compute the break-even point in units using the unit contribution margin.

(e) Compute the number of units that must be sold to earn net income of $100,000.

(f) Compute the margin of safety ratio.

the following are potential advantages of variable costing 608984

The following are potential advantages of variable costing:

a. Net income computed under variable costing is unaffected by changes in production levels.

b. The use of variable costing is consistent with cost-volume-profit and incremental analysis.

c. Net income computed under variable costing is closely tied to changes in sales levels giving a more realistic assessment of a company”s success or failure.

d. The presentation of fixed and variable cost components on the face of the variable costing income statement makes it easier to identify these costs and understand their effect on the business.

what is the dollar amount of each type of card that must be sold to break even 608985

Kooi Papery makes cards for special occasions. The sales mix (as a percent of total dollar sales) of its three product fines is: birthday cards 40%, thank you cards 35%, and wedding cards 25%. The contribution margin ratio of each card type is shown below:

Card Type

Contribution Margin Ratio

Birthday

20%

Thank you

30%

Wedding

25%

(a) What is the weighted average contribution margin ratio?

(b) If the company”s fixed costs are $297,000 per year: what is the dollar amount of each type of card that must be sold to break even?

what increase in units sold will carlson need to maintain the same level of income 608987

Carlson Inc. manufactures baby cribs and currently has fixed costs of $50,000 and a sales price per unit of $315. Carlson”s major raw materials supplier announced it will be increasing its prices, therefore Carlson is expecting the variable costs of its baby cribs to increase from $90 to $115. Carlson is going to hold the line on the selling price of its cribs but plans to cut fixed costs by $5,000. If Carlson currently has monthly net income of $40,000 on sales of 400 cribs, what increase in units sold will Carlson need to maintain the same level of income?

  1. 10
  2. 15
  3. 25
  4. 35

jennifer company sells both chairs and tables at the following per unit data 608989

Jennifer Company sells both chairs and tables at the following per unit data:

Unit Data

Tables

Chairs

Selling price

$200

$50

Variable costs

120

35

Contribution margin

$80

$15

Sales mix

1

4

Assuming $118,580 fixed costs, what is the total revenues in chairs Jennifer Company needs to break even?

a. $154,800

b. $169,400

c. $175,200

d. $188,600

assuming 149 952 fixed costs what is the total revenues in lamps sheltie company nee 608991

Sheltie Company sells both lamps and clocks at the following per unit data:

Unit Data

Lamps

Clocks

Selling price

$75

$45

Variable costs

48

30

Contribution margin

$27

$15

Sales mix

3

1

Assuming $149,952 fixed costs, what is the total revenues in lamps Sheltie Company needs to break even?

a. $289,800

b. $333,720

c. $351,450

d. $377,600

handy andy company has limited direct labor hours of 4 000 hours per month for its e 608994

Handy Andy Company has limited direct labor hours of 4,000 hours per month for its employees. Handy Andy manufactures a standard entertainment center and a deluxe entertainment center. The standard and deluxe units have the following information:

Deluxe

Unit Data

$220

$280

Selling price

120

160

Variable costs

1.25

1.6

The contribution margin per unit of limited resource is:

Standard

Deluxe

75

80

80

75

60

75

80

60

klotz co manufactures a dog shampoo called cleanfur relevant data for cleanfur in ja 608997

Klotz Co. manufactures a dog shampoo called Cleanfur. Relevant data for Cleanfur in January 2013, the first month of production, are as follows:

Selling price

$26 per unit

Units

Produced 20,000; sold 15,000; beginning inventory zero

Variable manufacturing unit costs

$10

Fixed costs

Manufacturing overhead $140,000 Selling and administrative expenses $30,000

The per unit costs under both absorption and variable costing are:

Absorption

$10

$7

$7

$10

$17

$7

$17

$10

in the klein company 50 000 units are produced and 40 000 units are sold 608999

In the Klein Company, 50,000 units are produced and 40,000 units are sold. Variable manufacturing costs per unit are $8 and fixed manufacturing costs are $160,000. The cost of the ending finished goods inventory under each costing approach is:

Absorption

Variable

Costing

Costing

$112,000

$ 80,000

$112,000

$100,000

$120,000

$80,000

$120,000

$100,000

schultz electronics manufactures two large screen television models the royale which 608881

Schultz Electronics manufactures two large-screen television models: the Royale which sells for $1,600, and a new model, the Majestic, which sells for $1,300. The production cost computed per unit under traditional costing for each model in 2014 was as follows.

Traditional Costing

Royale

Majestic

Direct materials

$ 700

$420

Direct labor ($20 per hour)

120

100

Manufacturing overhead ($38 per DLH)

228

190

Total per unit cost

$1,048

$710

In 2014, Schultz manufactured 25,000 units of the Royale and 10,000 units of the Majestic. The overhead rate of $38 per direct labor hour was determined by dividing total expected manufacturing overhead of $7,600,000 by the total direct labor hours (200,000) for the two models.

Under traditional costing, the gross profit on the models was Royale $552 or ($1,600 – $1,048), and Majestic $590 or ($1,300 – $710). Because of this difference, management is considering phasing out the Royale model and increasing the production of the Majestic model.

Before finalizing its decision, management asks Schultz”s controller to prepare an analysis using activity-based costing (ABC). The controller accumulates the following information about overhead for the year ended December 31, 2014.

Activities

Cost Drivers

Estimated

Overhead

Expected

Use of

Cost Drivers

Activity-

Based

Overhead

Rate

Purchasing

Number of orders

$1,200,000

40,000

$30/order

Machine setups

Number of setups

900,000

18,000

$50/setup

Machining

Machine hours

4,800,000

120,000

$40/hour

Quality control

Number of inspections

700,000

28,000

$25/inspection

The cost drivers used for each product were:

Cost Drivers

Royale

Majestic

Total

Purchase orders

17,000

23,000

40,000

Machine setups

5,000

13,000

18,000

Machine hours

75,000

45,000

120,000

Inspections

11,000

17,000

28,000

Instructions

(a)Assign the total 2014 manufacturing overhead costs to the two products using activity-based costing (ABC) and determine the overhead cost per unit.

(b)What was the cost per unit and gross profit of each model using ABC costing?

(c)Are management”s future plans for the two models sound? Explain.

wilbury company manufactures a nutrient everlife through two manufacturing processes 608882

Wilbury Company manufactures a nutrient, Everlife, through two manufacturing processes: Blending and Packaging. All materials are entered at the beginning of each process. On August 1, 2014, inventories consisted of Raw Materials $5,000, Work in Process—Blending $0, Work in Process—Packaging $3,945, and Finished Goods $7,500. The beginning inventory for Packaging consisted of 500 units, two-fifths complete as to conversion costs and fully complete as to materials. During August, 9,000 units were started into production in Blending, and the following transactions were completed.

  1. Purchased $25,000 of raw materials on account.
  2. Issued raw materials for production: Blending $18,930 and Packaging $9,140.
  3. Incurred labor costs of $25,770.
  4. Used factory labor: Blending $15,320 and Packaging $10,450.
  5. Incurred $36,500 of manufacturing overhead on account.
  6. Applied manufacturing overhead at the rate of $28 per machine hour. Machine hours were Blending 900 and Packaging 300.
  7. Transferred 8,200 units from Blending to Packaging at a cost of $44,940.
  8. Transferred 8,600 units from Packaging to Finished Goods at a cost of $67,490.
  9. Sold goods costing $62,000 for $90,000 on account.

Instructions

Journalize the August transactions.

determine the equivalent units of production for materials and conversion costs 608883

Steiner Corporation manufactures water skis through two processes: Molding and Packaging. In the Molding Department, fiberglass is heated and shaped into the form of a ski. In the Packaging Department, the skis are placed in cartons and sent to the finished goods warehouse. Materials are entered at the beginning of both processes. Labor and manufacturing overhead are incurred uniformly throughout each process. Production and cost data for the Molding Department for January 2014 are presented below.

Production Data

January

Beginning work in process units

-0-

Units started into production

50,000

Ending work in process units

2,500

Percent complete—ending inventory

40%

Cost Data January

Materials

$510,000

Labor

92,500

Overhead

150,000

Total

$752,500

Instructions

(a)Compute the physical units of production.

(b)Determine the equivalent units of production for materials and conversion costs.

(c)Compute the unit costs of production.

(d)Determine the costs to be assigned to the units transferred out and in process.

(e)Prepare a production cost report for the Molding Department for the month of January.

determine the equivalent units of production and the unit production costs for the a 608885

Luxman Company has several processing departments. Costs charged to the Assembly Department for October 2014 totaled $1,298,400 as follows.

Work in process, October 1

Materials

$29,000

Conversion costs

16,500

$45,500

Materials added

1,006,000

Labor

138,900

Overhead

108,000

Production records show that 25,000 units were in beginning work in process 40% complete as to conversion cost, 435,000 units were started into production, and 35,000 units were in ending work in process 40% complete as to conversion costs. Materials are entered at the beginning of each process.

Instructions

(a)Determine the equivalent units of production and the unit production costs for the Assembly Department.

(b)Determine the assignment of costs to goods transferred out and in process.

(c)Prepare a production cost report for the Assembly Department.

prepare a production cost report for the month of may for the bicycles 608886

Swinn Company manufactures bicycles. Materials are added at the beginning of the production process, and conversion costs are incurred uniformly. Production and cost data for the month of May are as follows.

Production Data—Bicycles

Units

Complete

Work in process units, May 1

500

80%

Units started in production

2,000

Work in process units, May 31

800

40%

Cost Data—Bicycles

Work in process, May 1

Materials

$15,000

Conversion costs

18,000

$33,000

Direct materials

50,000

Direct labor

19,020

Manufacturing overhead

33,680

Instructions

(a)Calculate the following.

(1)The equivalent units of production for materials and conversion costs.

(2)The unit costs of production for materials and conversion costs.

(3)The assignment of costs to units transferred out and in process at the end of the accounting period.

(b)Prepare a production cost report for the month of May for the bicycles.

complete a production cost report for april 2014 for the fabrication department usin 608888

Building a kayak using the composite method is a very labor-intensive process. In the fabrication department, the kayaks go through several steps as employees carefully place layers of Kevlar®in a mold and then use resin to fuse together the layers. The excess resin is removed with a vacuum process, and the upper shell and lower shell are removed from the molds and assembled. The seat, hatch, and other components are added in the finishing department.

At the beginning of April,Current Designshad 30 kayaks in process in the fabrication department. Rick Thrune, the production manager, estimated that about 80% of the material costs had been added to these boats, which were about 50% complete with respect to the conversion costs. The cost of this inventory had been calculated to be $8,400 in materials and $9,000 in conversion costs.

During April, 72 boats were started. At the end of the month, the 35 kayaks in the ending inventory had 20% of the materials and 40% of the conversion costs already added to them.

A review of the accounting records for April showed that materials with a cost of $17,500 had been requisitioned by this department and that the conversion costs for the month were $39,600.

Instructions

Complete a production cost report for April 2014 for the fabrication department using the weighted-average method.

show how joe arrived at the unit cost of 14 26 per gallon of surtan 608889

Florida Beach Company manufactures sunscreen lotion, called Surtan, in 11-ounce plastic bottles. Surtan is sold in a competitive market. As a result, management is very cost-conscious. Surtan is manufactured through two processes: mixing and filling. Materials are entered at the beginning of each process, and labor and manufacturing overhead occur uniformly throughout each process. Unit costs are based on the cost per gallon of Surtan using the weighted-average costing approach.

On June 30, 2014, Mary Ritzman, the chief accountant for the past 20 years, opted to take early retirement. Her replacement, Joe Benili, had extensive accounting experience with motels in the area but only limited contact with manufacturing accounting. During July, Joe correctly accumulated the following production quantity and cost data for the Mixing Department.

Production quantities:Work in process, July 1, 8,000 gallons 75% complete; started into production 100,000 gallons; work in process, July 31, 5,000 gallons 20% complete. Materials are added at the beginning of the process.

Production costs:Beginning work in process $88,000, comprised of $21,000 of materials costs and $67,000 of conversion costs; incurred in July: materials $573,000, conversion costs $765,000.

Joe then prepared a production cost report on the basis of physical units started into production. His report showed a production cost of $14.26 per gallon of Surtan. The management of Florida Beach was surprised at the high unit cost. The president comes to you, as Mary”s top assistant, to review Joe”s report and prepare a correct report if necessary.

Instructions

With the class divided into groups, answer the following questions.

(a)Show how Joe arrived at the unit cost of $14.26 per gallon of Surtan.

(b)What error(s) did Joe make in preparing his production cost report?

(c)Prepare a correct production cost report for July.

using the data in a above what was the per unit conversion cost of the sofas transfe 608890

Harris Furniture Company manufactures living room furniture through two departments: Framing and Upholstering. Materials are entered at the beginning of each process. For May, the following cost data are obtained from the two work in process accounts.

Framing

Upholstering

Work in process, May 1

$ -0-

$?

Materials

450,000

?

Conversion costs

261,000

330,000

Costs transferred in

-0-

600,000

Costs transferred out

600,000

?

Work in process, May 31

111,000

?

Instructions

Answer the following questions.

(a)If 3,000 sofas were started into production on May 1 and 2,500 sofas were transferred to Upholstering, what was the unit cost of materials for May in the Framing Department?

(b)Using the data in (a) above, what was the per unit conversion cost of the sofas transferred to Upholstering?

(c)Continuing the assumptions in (a) above, what is the percentage of completion of the units in process at May 31 in the Framing Department?

discuss whether a paintball manufacturer would use job order costing or process cost 608891

Paintball is now played around the world. The process of making paintballs is actually quite similar to the process used to make certain medical pills. In fact, paintballs were previously often made at the same factories that made pharmaceuticals.

Instructions

View that video at the site listed above and then answer the following questions.

(a)Describe in sequence the primary steps used to manufacture paintballs.

(b)Explain the costs incurred by the company that would fall into each of the following categories: materials, labor, and overhead. Of these categories, which do you think would be the greatest cost in making paintballs?

(c)Discuss whether a paintball manufacturer would use job order costing or process costing.

prepare a memo to diane answer her questions and include any additional information 608892

Diane Barone was a good friend of yours in high school and is from your home town. While you chose to major in accounting when you both went away to college, she majored in marketing and management. You have recently been promoted to accounting manager for the Snack Foods Division of Melton Enterprises, and your friend was promoted to regional sales manager for the same division of Melton. Diane recently telephoned you. She explained that she was familiar with job cost sheets, which had been used by the Special Projects division where she had formerly worked. She was, however, very uncomfortable with the production cost reports prepared by your division. She emailed you a list of her particular questions:

  1. Since Melton occasionally prepares snack foods for special orders in the Snack Foods Division, why don”t we track costs of the orders separately?
  2. What is an equivalent unit?
  3. Why am I getting four production cost reports? Isn”t there one Work in Process account?

Instructions

Prepare a memo to Diane. Answer her questions, and include any additional information you think would be helpful. You may write informally, but do use proper grammar and punctuation.

helena company reports the following total costs at two levels of production 608895

Helena Company reports the following total costs at two levels of production.

10,000 Units

20,000 Units

Direct materials

$20,000

$40,000

Maintenance

8,000

10,000

Direct labor

17,000

34,000

Indirect materials

1,000

2,000

Depreciation

4,000

4,000

Utilities

3,000

5,000

Rent

6,000

6,000

Classify each cost as variable, fixed, or mixed.

Recall that a variable cost varies in total directly and proportionately with each change in activity level.

Recall that a fixed cost remains the same in total with each change in activity level.

Recall that a mixed cost changes in total but not proportionately with each change in activity level.

compute fixed cost as total cost ndash variable cost per unit times units produced f 608896

Byrnes Company accumulates the following data concerning a mixed cost, using units produced as the activity level.

Units Produced

Total Cost

March

9,800

$14,740

April

8,500

13,250

May

7,000

11,100

June

7,600

12,000

July

8,100

12,460

(a)Compute the variable- and fixed-cost elements using the high-low method.

(b)Estimate the total cost if the company produces 6,000 units.

Determine the highest and lowest levels of activity.

Compute variable cost per unit as: Change in total costs ÷ (High – low activity level) = Variable cost per unit.

Compute fixed cost as: Total cost – (Variable cost per unit × Units produced) = Fixed cost.

mabo company makes calculators that sell for 20 each for the coming year management 608898

Mabo Company makes calculators that sell for $20 each. For the coming year, management expects fixed costs to total $220,000 and variable costs to be $9 per unit.

(a)Compute break-even point in units using the mathematical equation.

(b)Compute break-even point in dollars using the contribution margin (CM) ratio.

(c)Compute the margin of safety percentage assuming actual sales are $500,000.

(d)Compute the sales required in dollars to earn net income of $165,000.

Know the formulas.

Recognize that variable costs change with sales volume; fixed costs do not.

Avoid computational errors.

what is the projected operating income for 2014 at the 20 000 expected sales level 608899

B.T. Hernandez Company, maker of high-quality flashlights, has experienced steady growth over the last 6 years. However, increased competition has led Mr. Hernandez, the president, to believe that an aggressive campaign is needed next year to maintain the company”s present growth. The company”s accountant has presented Mr. Hernandez with the data on the next page for the current year, 2014, for use in preparing next year”s advertising campaign.

Cost Schedules

Variable costs

Direct labor per flashlight

$ 8.00

Direct materials

4.00

Variable overhead

3.00

Variable cost per flashlight

$15.00

Fixed costs

Manufacturing

$ 25,000

Selling

40,000

Administrative

70,000

Total fixed costs

$135,000

Selling price per flashlight

$25.00

Expected sales, 2014 (20,000 flashlights)

$500,000

Mr. Hernandez has set the sales target for the year 2015 at a level of $550,000 (22,000 flashlights).

Instructions

(a)What is the projected operating income for 2014 at the 20,000 expected sales level?

(b)What is the contribution margin per unit for 2014?

(c)What is the break-even point in units for 2014?

(d)Mr. Hernandez believes that to attain the sales target in the year 2015, the company must incur an additional selling expense of $10,000 for advertising in 2015, with all other costs remaining constant. What will be the break-even point in dollar sales for 2015 if the company spends the additional $10,000?

(e)If the company spends the additional $10,000 for advertising in 2015, what is the sales level in dollars required to equal 2014 operating income?

compute the variable fixed cost elements using the high low method 608930

Bruno Company accumulates the following data concerning a mixed cost, using miles as the activity level.

Miles driven

Total Cost

Miles driven

Total Cost

January

8,000

$14,150

March

8,500

$15,000

February

7,500

13,500

April

8,200

14,490

Compute the variable- and fixed-cost elements using the high-low method.

determine the missing amounts 608931

Determine the missing amounts.

Unit Selling

Unit Variable

Contribution

Contribution

Price

Costs

Margin per Unit

Margin Ratio

  1. $640

$352

(a)

(b)

  1. $300

(c)

$93

(d)

  1. (e)

(F)

$325

25%

compute the variable and fixed cost elements using the high low method 608933

Westerville Company accumulates the following data concerning a mixed cost, using units produced as the activity level.

Units Produced

Total Cost

March

10,000

$18,000

April

9,000

16,650

May

10,500

18,580

June

8,800

16,200

July

9,500

17,100

(a)Compute the variable- and fixed-cost elements using the high-low method.

(b)Estimate the total cost if the company produces 9,200 units.

avanti manufacturing company has two production departments molding and assembly 608946

Avanti Manufacturing Company has two production departments: Molding and Assembly. March 1 inventories are Raw Materials $3,600, Work in Process—Molding $2,200, Work in Process—Assembly $8,800 and Finished Goods $26,000. During March, the following transactions occurred:

  1. Purchased $28,400 of raw materials on account.
  2. Incurred $48,000 of factory labor. (Credit Wages Payable.)
  3. Incurred $62,000 of manufacturing overhead; $39,000 was paid and the remainder is unpaid.
  4. Requisitioned materials for Molding $12,300 and Assembly $7,200.
  5. Used factory labor for Molding $26,000 and Assembly $22,000.
  6. Applied overhead at the rate of $18 per machine hour. Machine hours were Molding 1,540 and Assembly 1,430.
  7. Transferred goods costing $62,000 from the Molding Department to the Assembly Department.
  8. Transferred goods costing $122,600 from Assembly to Finished Goods.
  9. Sold goods costing $110,000 for $185,000 on account.

Instructions

Journalize the transactions. (Omit explanations.)

compute the physical units transferred out and in process for each department 608947

Sismondi Company has a process cost accounting system. During May, the Assembly and Finishing Departments had the following data concerning physical units:

Assembly:

Work in progress, may 1

3,000

Started into9 process during the month

65,000

Work in progress, may 31

7,000

Finishing

Work in progress, may 1

6,000

Transferred In From Assembly Department During The Month

?

Work in progress, may 31

4,000

Instructions

Compute the physical units transferred out and in process for each department.

indicate whether each of the following statements is true false 608818

Indicate whether each of the following statements is true or false.

  1. Continuous process manufacturing often results in a reduction of inventory.
  2. Companies that use just-in-time processing complete and store finished goods all the time to meet rush orders from customers.
  3. A major benefit of just-in-time processing is production cost savings from the improved flow of goods through the processes.
  4. An ABC system is similar to traditional costing systems in accounting for manufacturing costs but differs in regard to period costs.
  5. The primary benefit of ABC is more accurate and meaningful costs.
  6. In recent years, the amount of direct labor used in many industries has greatly increased and total overhead costs have significantly decreased.

JIT manufacturing is dedicated to having the right amounts of materials, parts, or products just as they are needed.

ABC focuses on the activities performed in producing a product. It recognizes that to have accurate and meaningful cost data, more than one basis of allocating costs to products is needed.

indicate which of the following statements isnotcorrect 608820

Indicate which of the following statements isnotcorrect.

(a)Both a job order and a process cost system track the same three manufacturing cost elements—direct materials, direct labor, and manufacturing overhead.

(b)A job order cost system uses only one work in process account, whereas a process cost system uses multiple work in process accounts.

(c)Manufacturing costs are accumulated the same way in a job order and in a process cost system.

(d)Manufacturing costs are assigned the same way in a job order and in a process cost system.

compute equivalent units of production for materials and conversion costs assuming m 608851

Goode Company has the following production data for selected months.

Beginning

Units

Ending
Work in Process

%Complete as to

Month

Work in Process

Transferred Out

Units

Conversion Cost

January

-0-

35,000

10,000

40%

March

-0-

40,000

8,000

75

July

-0-

45,000

16,000

25

Compute equivalent units of production for materials and conversion costs, assuming materials are entered at the beginning of the process.

identify each statement as true or false if false indicate how to correct the statem 608853

Sam Snead has formulated the following list of statements about contemporary developments in managerial accounting.

  1. Just-in-time processing results in a push approach; that is, raw materials are pushed through each process.
  2. A primary objective of just-in-time processing is to eliminate all manufacturing inventories.
  3. A major disadvantage of just-in-time processing is lower product quality.
  4. A primary benefit of activity-based costing is more accurate and meaningful product costing.
  5. A major advantage of activity-based costing is that it uses a single unit-level basis, such as direct labor or machine hours, to allocate overhead.

Identify each statement as true or false. If false, indicate how to correct the statement to make it true.

kopa company manufactures ch 21 through two processes mixing and packaging in july t 608855

Kopa Company manufactures CH-21 through two processes: Mixing and Packaging. In July, the following costs were incurred.

Mixing

Packaging

Raw materials used

$10,000

$28,000

Factory labor costs

8,000

36,000

Manufacturing overhead costs

12,000

54,000

nits completed at a cost of $21,000 in the Mixing Department are transferred to the Packaging Department. Units completed at a cost of $106,000 in the Packaging Department are transferred to Finished Goods. Journalize the assignment of these costs to the two processes and the transfer of units as appropriate.

materials are entered at the beginning of the process the ending work in process uni 608856

The assembly department has the following production data for the current month.

Beginning

Units

Ending

Work in Process

Transferred Out

Work in Process

0

20,000

12,000

Materials are entered at the beginning of the process. The ending work in process units are 70% complete as to conversion costs. Compute the equivalent units of production for (a) materials and (b) conversion costs.

indicate whether each of the following statements is true or false 608858

Indicate whether each of the following statements is true or false.

  1. Just-in-time processing is also known as just-in-case processing.
  2. Companies that use just-in-time processing complete finished goods just in time to be sold.
  3. A major benefit of just-in-time processing is enhanced product quality.
  4. An ABC system is similar to conventional costing systems in accounting for period costs but differs in regard to manufacturing costs.
  5. The primary benefit of ABC is significant reduction or elimination of manufacturing inventories.
  6. In recent years, the amount of direct labor used in many industries has greatly decreased and total overhead costs have significantly increased.

identify each statement as true or false if false indicate how to correct the statem 608859

Robert Mallory has prepared the following list of statements about process cost accounting.

  1. Process cost systems are used to apply costs to similar products that are mass-produced in a continuous fashion.
  2. A process cost system is used when each finished unit is indistinguishable from another.
  3. Companies that produce soft drinks, motion pictures, and computer chips would all use process cost accounting.
  4. In a process cost system, costs are tracked by individual jobs.
  5. Job order costing and process costing track different manufacturing cost elements.
  6. Both job order costing and process costing account for direct materials, direct labor, and manufacturing overhead.
  7. Costs flow through the accounts in the same basic way for both job order costing and process costing.
  8. In a process cost system, only one work in process account is used.
  9. In a process cost system, costs are summarized in a job cost sheet.
  10. In a process cost system, the unit cost is total manufacturing costs for the period divided by the equivalent units produced during the period.

Instructions

Identify each statement as true or false. If false, indicate how to correct the statement.

harrelson company manufactures pizza sauce through two production departments cookin 608860

Harrelson Company manufactures pizza sauce through two production departments: Cooking and Canning. In each process, materials and conversion costs are incurred evenly throughout the process. For the month of April, the work in process accounts show the following debits.

Cooking

Canning

Beginning work in process

$ -0-

$ 4,000

Materials

21,000

9,000

Labor

8,500

7,000

Overhead

31,500

25,800

Costs transferred in

53,000

Instructions

Journalize the April transactions.

determine the costs to be assigned to the units transferred out and in ending work i 608866

The Blending Department of Luongo Company has the following cost and production data for the month of April.

Costs:

Work in process, April 1

Direct materials: 100% complete

$100,000

Conversion costs: 20% complete

70,000

Cost of work in process, April 1

$170,000

Costs incurred during production in April

Direct materials

$ 800,000

Conversion cats

365,000

Costs incurred in April

$1,165,000

Units transferred out totaled 17,000. Ending work in process was 1,000 units that are 100% complete as to materials and 40% complete as to conversion costs.

Instructions

(a)Compute the equivalent units of production for (1) materials and (2) conversion costs for the month of April.

(b)Compute the unit costs for the month.

(c)Determine the costs to be assigned to the units transferred out and in ending work in process.

show the assignment of costs to units transferred out and in process 608867

Kostrivas Company has gathered the following information.

Units in beginning work in process

-0-

Units started into production

40,000

Units in ending work in process

6,000

Percent complete in ending work in process:

Conversion costs

40%

Materials

100%

Costs incurred:

Direct materials

$72,000

Direct labor

$81,000

Overhead

$101,000

Instructions

(a)Compute equivalent units of production for materials and for conversion costs.

(b)Determine the unit costs of production.

(c)Show the assignment of costs to units transferred out and in process.

compute equivalent units of production for materials and for conversion costs 608868

Overton Company has gathered the following information.

Units in beginning work in process

20,000

Units started into production

164,000

Units in ending work in process

24,000

Percent complete in ending work in process:

Conversion costs

60%

Materials

100%

Costs incurred:

Direct materials

$101,200

Direct labor

$164,800

Overhead

$184,000

Instructions

(a)Compute equivalent units of production for materials and for conversion costs.

(b)Determine the unit costs of production.

(c)Show the assignment of costs to units transferred out and in process.

prepare a production cost report for the welding department for the month of februar 608871

The Welding Department of Thorpe Company has the following production and manufacturing cost data for February 2014. All materials are added at the beginning of the process.

Manufacturing Costs

Production Data

Beginning work in process

Materials $18,000

Conversion costs 14,175

Materials

Labor

Overhead

$32,175 180,00 52,30 61,45

Beginning work in process

Units transferred out Units started

Ending work in process

15,000 units
1/10 complete
49,000
45,000
11,000 units
1/5 complete

Instructions

Prepare a production cost report for the Welding Department for the month of February.

calculate the equivalent units for direct materials and conversion costs 608872

Remington Shipping, Inc. is contemplating the use of process costing to track the costs of its operations. The operation consists of three segments (departments): receiving, shipping, and delivery. Containers are received at Remington”s docks and sorted according to the ship they will be carried on. The containers are loaded onto a ship, which carries them to the appropriate port of destination. The containers are then off-loaded and delivered to the receiving company.

Remington Shipping wants to begin using process costing in the shipping department. Direct materials represent the fuel costs to run the ship, and “Containers in transit” represents work in process. Listed below is information about the shipping department”s first month”s activity.

Containers in transit, April 1

0

Containers loaded

1,200

Containers in transit, April 30

350,

40% of direct materials and 20% of conversion costs

Instructions

(a)Determine the physical flow of containers for the month.

(b)Calculate the equivalent units for direct materials and conversion costs.

determine the equivalent units of service production for materials and conversion co 608873

Royale Mortgage Company uses a process cost system to accumulate costs in its loan application department. When an application is completed, it is forwarded to the loan department for final processing. The following processing and cost data pertain to September.

Beginning WIP:

1. Applications in process on September 1, 100

Direct materials

$1,000

2. Applications started in September, 900

Conversion costs

3,960

September costs:

3. Completed applications during September, 800

Direct materials

$4,500

4. Applications still in process at September 30 were 100% complete as to materials (forms) and 60% complete as to conversion costs.

Direct labor

12,000

Overhead

9,340

Materials are the forms used in the application process, and these costs are incurred at the beginning of the process. Conversion costs are incurred uniformly during the process.

Instructions

(a)Determine the equivalent units of service (production) for materials and conversion costs.

(b)Compute the unit costs and prepare a cost reconciliation schedule.

write a memorandum to the president of major instrument explaining the benefits of a 608874

Major Instrument, Inc. manufactures two products: missile range instruments and space pressure gauges. During April, 50 range instruments and 300 pressure gauges were produced, and overhead costs of $94,500 were estimated. An analysis of estimated overhead costs reveals the following activities.

Activities

Cost Drivers

Total Cost

1. Materials handling

Number of requisitions

$40,000

2. Machine setups

Number of setups

27,500

3. Quality inspections

Number of inspections

27,000

$94,500

The cost driver volume for each product was as follows.

Cost Drivers

Instruments

Gauges

Total

Number of requisitions

400

600

1,000

Number of setups

200

300

500

Number of inspections

200

400

600

Instructions

(a)Determine the overhead rate for each activity.

(b)Assign the manufacturing overhead costs for April to the two products using activity-based costing.

(c)Write a memorandum to the president of Major Instrument explaining the benefits of activity-based costing.

compute the cost of 1 000 units of compo 24 using the current traditional costing sy 608875

Kowalski Company manufactures a number of specialized machine parts. Part Compo-24 uses $35 of direct materials and $15 of direct labor per unit. Kowalski”s estimated manufacturing overhead is as follows.

Materials handling

$150,000

Machining

180,000

Factory supervision

138,000

Total

$468,000

Overhead is applied based on direct labor costs, which were estimated at $200,000.

Kowalski is considering adopting activity-based costing. The cost drivers are estimated at:

Activity

Cost Driver

Expected Use

Materials handling

Weight of materials

50,000 pounds

Machining

Machine horns

20,000 hours

Factory supervision

Direct labor hours

12,000 hours

Instructions

(a)Compute the cost of 1,000 units of Compo-24 using the current traditional costing system.

(b)Compute the cost of 1,000 units of Compo-24 using the proposed activity-based costing system. Assume the 1,000 units use 2,500 pounds of materials, 500 machine hours, and 1,000 direct labor hours.

conwell company manufactures its product vitadrink through two manufacturing process 608876

Conwell Company manufactures its product, Vitadrink, through two manufacturing processes: Mixing and Packaging. All materials are entered at the beginning of each process. On October 1, 2014, inventories consisted of Raw Materials $26,000, Work in Process—Mixing $0, Work in Process—Packaging $250,000, and Finished Goods $289,000.The beginning inventory for Packaging consisted of 10,000 units that were 50% complete as to conversion costs and fully complete as to materials. During October, 50,000 units were started into production in the Mixing Department and the following transactions were completed.

  1. Purchased $300,000 of raw materials on account.
  2. Issued raw materials for production: Mixing $210,000 and Packaging $45,000.
  3. Incurred labor costs of $258,900.
  4. Used factory labor: Mixing $182,500 and Packaging $76,400.
  5. Incurred $810,000 of manufacturing overhead on account.
  6. Applied manufacturing overhead on the basis of $24 per machine hour. Machine hours were 28,000 in Mixing and 6,000 in Packaging.
  7. Transferred 45,000 units from Mixing to Packaging at a cost of $979,000.
  8. Transferred 53,000 units from Packaging to Finished Goods at a cost of $1,315,000.
  9. Sold goods costing $1,604,000 for $2,500,000 on account.

Instructions

Journalize the October transactions.

compute equivalent units of production for materials and for conversion costs 608878

Seagren Industries Inc. manufactures in separate processes furniture for homes. In each process, materials are entered at the beginning, and conversion costs are incurred uniformly. Production and cost data for the first process in making two products in two different manufacturing plants are as follows.

Cutting Department

Production Data—July

Plant I T12-Tables

Plant 2 CIO-Chairs

Work in process units, July 1

-0-

-0-

Units started into production

19,000

16,000

Work in process units, July 31

3,000

500

Work in process percent complete

60%

80%

Cost Data—July

$ -0-

$ -0-

Work in process, July 1

380,000

288,000

Materials Labor

234,200

110,000

Overhead

104,000

96,700

$718,200

$494,700

Instructions

(a)For each plant:

(1)Compute the physical units of production.

(2)Compute equivalent units of production for materials and for conversion costs.

(3)Determine the unit costs of production.

(4)Show the assignment of costs to units transferred out and in process.

(b)Prepare the production cost report for Plant 1 for July 2014.

prepare a production cost report for the month of july for the basketballs 608880

Morse Company manufactures basketballs. Materials are added at the beginning of the production process and conversion costs are incurred uniformly. Production and cost data for the month of July 2014 are as follows.

Production Data—Basketballs

Units

Complete

Work in process units, July 1

500

60%

Units started into production

1,250

Work in process units, July 31

600

40%

Cost Data—Basketballs

Work in process, July 1

Materials

$750

Conversion costs

600

$1,350

Direct materials

2,400

Direct labor

1,580

Manufacturing overhead

1,295

Instructions

(a)Calculate the following.

(1)The equivalent units of production for materials and conversion costs.

(2)The unit costs of production for materials and conversion costs.

(3)The assignment of costs to units transferred out and in process at the end of the accounting period.

(b)Prepare a production cost report for the month of July for the basketballs.

indicate the balance sheet presentation of the manufacturing inventories at may 31 2 608790

At May 31, 2014, the accounts of Mantle Company show the following.

  1. May 1 inventories—finished goods $12,600, work in process $14,700, and raw materials $8,200.
  2. May 31 inventories—finished goods $9,500, work in process $17,900, and raw materials $7,100.
  3. Debit postings to work in process were direct materials $62,400, direct labor $50,000, and manufacturing overhead applied $40,000.
  4. Sales revenue totaled $210,000.

Instructions

(a)Prepare a condensed cost of goods manufactured schedule.

(b)Prepare an income statement for May through gross profit.

(c)Indicate the balance sheet presentation of the manufacturing inventories at May 31, 2014.

what is the balance in work in process inventory at the end of each month 608791

Tierney Company begins operations on April 1. Information from job cost sheets shows the following.

Manufacturing Costs Assigned

Job
Number

April

May

June

Month
Completed

10

$5,200

$4,400

May

11

4,100

3,900

$2,000

June

12

1,200

April

13

4,700

4,500

June

14

5,900

3,600

Not complete

Job 12 was completed in April. Job 10 was completed in May. Jobs 11 and 13 were completed in June. Each job was sold for 25% above its cost in the month following completion.

Instructions

(a)What is the balance in Work in Process Inventory at the end of each month?

(b)What is the balance in Finished Goods Inventory at the end of each month?

(c)What is the gross profit for May, June, and July?

determine the balance of the service contracts in process account use a t account 608792

Shown below are the job cost related accounts for the law firm of Jack, Bob, and Will and their manufacturing equivalents:

Law Finn Accounts

Manufacturing Finn Accounts

Supplies

Raw Materials

Salaries and Wages Payable

Factory Wages Payable

Operating Overhead

Manufacturing Overhead

Service Contracts in Process

Work in Process

Cost of Completed Service Contracts

Cost of Goods Sold

Cost data for the month of March follow.

  1. Purchased supplies on account $1,500.
  2. Issued supplies $1,200 (60% direct and 40% indirect).
  3. Assigned labor costs based on time cards for the month which indicated labor costs of $60,000 (80% direct and 20% indirect).
  4. Operating overhead costs incurred for cash totaled $40,000.
  5. Operating overhead is applied at a rate of 90% of direct attorney cost.
  6. Work completed totaled $75,000.

Instructions

(a)Journalize the transactions for March. (Omit explanations.)

(b)Determine the balance of the Service Contracts in Process account. (Use a T-account.)

determine whether the overhead was under or overapplied and by how much 608794

Pure Decorating uses a job order cost system to collect the costs of its interior decorating business. Each client”s consultation is treated as a separate job. Overhead is applied to each job based on the number of decorator hours incurred. Listed below are data for the current year.

Estimated overhead

$920,000

Actual overhead

$942,800

Estimated decorator hours

40,000

Actual decorator hours

40,500

The company uses Operating Overhead in place of Manufacturing Overhead.

Instructions

(a)Compute the predetermined overhead rate.

(b)Prepare the entry to apply the overhead for the year.

(c)Determine whether the overhead was under- or overapplied and by how much.

determine the gross profit to be reported for 2014 608796

For the year ended December 31, 2014, the job cost sheets of Cinta Company contained the following data.

Job
Number

Explanation

Direct
Materials

Direct
Labor

Manufacturing
Overhead

Total
Costs

7640

Balance 1/1

$25,000

$24,000

$28,800

$ 77,800

Current year”s costs

30,000

36,000

43,200

109,200

7641

Balance 1/1

11,000

18,000

21,600

50,600

Current year”s costs

43,000

48,000

57,600

148,600

7642

Current year”s costs

58,000

55,000

66,000

179,000

Other data:

  1. Raw materials inventory totaled $15,000 on January 1. During the year, $140,000 of raw materials were purchased on account.
  2. Finished goods on January 1 consisted of Job No. 7638 for $87,000 and Job No. 7639 for $92,000.
  3. Job No. 7640 and Job No. 7641 were completed during the year.
  4. Job Nos. 7638, 7639, and 7641 were sold on account for $530,000.
  5. Manufacturing overhead incurred on account totaled $120,000.
  6. Other manufacturing overhead consisted of indirect materials $14,000, indirect labor $18,000, and depreciation on factory machinery $8,000.

Instructions

(a)Prove the agreement of Work in Process Inventory with job cost sheets pertaining to unfinished work. (Hint:Use a single T-account for Work in Process Inventory.) Calculate each of the following, then post each to the T-account: (1) beginning balance, (2) direct materials, (3) direct labor, (4) manufacturing overhead, and (5) completed jobs.

(b)Prepare the adjusting entry for manufacturing overhead, assuming the balance is allocated entirely to Cost of Goods Sold.

(c)Determine the gross profit to be reported for 2014.

compute the total manufacturing costs assigned to jobs in january in each department 608798

Agassi Company uses a job order cost system in each of its three manufacturing departments. Manufacturing overhead is applied to jobs on the basis of direct labor cost in Department D, direct labor hours in Department E, and machine hours in Department K.

In establishing the predetermined overhead rates for 2014, the following estimates were made for the year.

Department

A

B

C

Manufacturing verhaad

$720,000

$640,000

$900,000

Direct labor cost

$600,000

$100,000

$600,000

Direct labor hours

50,000

40,000

40,000

Machine hours

100,000

120,000

150,000

During January, the job cost sheets showed the following costs and production data.

Department

A

B

C

Manufacturing verhaad

$720,000

$640,000

$900,000

Direct labor cost

$600,000

$100,000

$600,000

Direct labor hours

50,000

40,000

40,000

Machine hours

100,000

120,000

150,000

Instructions

(a)Compute the predetermined overhead rate for each department.

(b)Compute the total manufacturing costs assigned to jobs in January in each department.

(c)Compute the under- or over applied overhead for each department at January 31.

what is the balance in the work in process inventory account at the end of the month 608799

Pedriani Company uses a job order cost system and applies overhead to production on the basis of direct labor hours. On January 1, 2014, Job No. 25 was the only job in process. The costs incurred prior to January 1 on this job were as follows: direct materials $10,000; direct labor $6,000; and manufacturing overhead $9,000. Job No. 23 had been completed at a cost of $42,000 and was part of finished goods inventory. There was a $5,000 balance in the Raw Materials Inventory account.

During the month of January, the company began production on Jobs 26 and 27, and completed Jobs 25 and 26. Jobs 23 and 25 were sold on account during the month for $63,000 and $74,000, respectively. The following additional events occurred during the month.

  1. Purchased additional raw materials of $45,000 on account.
  2. Incurred factory labor costs of $33,500. Of this amount, $7,500 related to employer payroll taxes.
  3. Incurred manufacturing overhead costs as follows: indirect materials $10,000; indirect labor $9,500; depreciation expense on equipment $12,000; and various other manufacturing overhead costs on account $11,000.
  4. Assigned direct materials and direct labor to jobs as follows.

Job No.

Direct Materials

Direct Labor

25

$ 5,000

$ 3,000

26

17,000

12,000

27

13,000

9,000

  1. The company uses direct labor hours as the activity base to assign overhead. Direct labor hours incurred on each job were as follows: Job No. 25, 200; Job No. 26, 800; and Job No. 27, 600.

Instructions

(a)Calculate the predetermined overhead rate for the year 2014, assuming Pedriani Company estimates total manufacturing overhead costs of $440,000, direct labor costs of $300,000, and direct labor hours of 20,000 for the year.

(b)Open job cost sheets for Jobs 25, 26, and 27. Enter the January 1 balances on the job cost sheet for Job No. 25.

(c)Prepare the journal entries to record the purchase of raw materials, the factory labor costs incurred, and the manufacturing overhead costs incurred during the month of January.

(d)Prepare the journal entries to record the assignment of direct materials, direct labor, and manufacturing overhead costs to production. In assigning manufacturing overhead costs, use the overhead rate calculated in (a). Post all costs to the job cost sheets as necessary.

(e)Total the job cost sheets for any job(s) completed during the month. Prepare the journal entry (or entries) to record the completion of any job(s) during the month.

(f)Prepare the journal entry (or entries) to record the sale of any job(s) during the month.

(g)What is the balance in the Work in Process Inventory account at the end of the month? What does this balance consist of?

(h)What is the amount of over- or under applied overhead?

post the entries to work in process inventory 608801

Robert Perez is a contractor specializing in custom-built jacuzzis. On May 1, 2014, his ledger contains the following data.

Raw Materials Inventory

$30,000

Work in Process Inventory

12,200

Manufacturing Overhead

2,500(dr.)

The Manufacturing Overhead account has debit totals of $12,500 and credit totals of $10,000. Subsidiary data for Work in Process Inventory on May 1 include:

Job Cost Sheets

Job

by Customer

Direct Materials

Direct Labor

Manufacturing

Overhead

Stiner

$2,500

$2,000

$1,400

Alton

2,000

1,200

840

Herman

900

800

560

$5,400

$4,000

$2,800

During May, the following costs were incurred: raw materials purchased on account $4,000, labor paid $7,000, and manufacturing overhead paid $1,400.

A summary of materials requisition slips and time tickets for the month of May reveals the following.

Job by Customer

Materials Requisition Slips

Time Tickets

Stiner

$500

$400

Alton

600

1,000

Herman

2,300

1,300

Smith

1,900

2,300

5,300

5,000

General use

1,500

2,000

$6,800

$7,000

Overhead was charged to jobs on the basis of $0.70 per dollar of direct labor cost. The jacuzzis for customers Stiner, Alton, and Herman were completed during May. The three jacuzzis were sold for a total of $36,000.

Instructions

(a)Prepare journal entries for the May transactions: (i) for purchase of raw materials, factory labor costs incurred, and manufacturing overhead costs incurred; (ii) assignment of raw materials, labor, and overhead to production; and (iii) completion of jobs and sale of goods.

(b)Post the entries to Work in Process Inventory.

(c)Reconcile the balance in Work in Process Inventory with the costs of unfinished jobs.

(d)Prepare a cost of goods manufactured schedule for May.

compute the total manufacturing costs assigned to jobs in january in each department 608802

Net Play Company uses a job order cost system in each of its three manufacturing departments. Manufacturing overhead is applied to jobs on the basis of direct labor cost in Department A, direct labor hours in Department B, and machine hours in Department C.

In establishing the predetermined overhead rates for 2014, the following estimates were made for the year.

Department

A

B

C

Manufacturing verhaad

$720,000

$640,000

$900,000

Direct labor cost

$600,000

$100,000

$600,000

Direct labor hours

50,000

40,000

40,000

Machine urs ho

100,000

120,000

150,000

During January, the job cost sheets showed the following costs and production data.

Department

A

B

C

Direct materials used

$92,000

$86,000

$64,000

Direct labor cost

$48,000

$35,000

$50,400

Manufacturing overhead incurred

$60,000

$60,000

$72,100

Direct labor hours

4,000

3,500

4,200

Machine hours

8,000

10,500

12,600

Instructions

(a)Compute the predetermined overhead rate for each department.

(b)Compute the total manufacturing costs assigned to jobs in January in each department.

(c)Compute the under- or overapplied overhead for each department at January 31.

determine the total cost of the huegel hollow order and the cost of each individual 608804

Huegel Hollow Resort has ordered 20 rotomolded kayaks fromCurrent Designs.Each kayak will be formed in the rotomolded oven, cooled, and then the excess plastic trimmed away. Then, the hatches, seat, ropes, and bungees will be attached to the kayak.

Dave Thill, the kayak plant manager, knows that manufacturing each kayak requires 54 pounds of polyethylene powder and a finishing kit (rope, seat, hardware, etc.). The polyethylene powderused in these kayaks costs $1.50 per pound, and the finishing kits cost $170 each. Each kayak will use two kinds of labor: 2 hours of more-skilled type I labor from people who run the oven and trim the plastic, and 3 hours of less-skilled type II labor from people who attach the hatches and seat and other hardware. The type I employees are paid $15 per hour, and the type II employees are paid $12 per hour. For purposes of this problem, assume that overhead is allocated to all jobs at a rate of 150% of direct labor costs.

Instructions

Determine the total cost of the Huegel Hollow order and the cost of each individual kayak in the order. Identify costs as direct materials, direct labor, or manufacturing overhead.

what is your recommended solution to the problem of fluctuating unit cost 608805

Khan Products Company uses a job order cost system. For a number of months, there has been an ongoing rift between the sales department and the production department concerning a special-order product, TC-1. TC-1 is a seasonal product that is manufactured in batches of 1,000 units. TC-1 is sold at cost plus a markup of 40% of cost.

The sales department is unhappy because fluctuating unit production costs significantly affect selling prices. Sales personnel complain that this has caused excessive customer complaints and the loss of considerable orders for TC-1.

The production department maintains that each job order must be fully costed on the basis of the costs incurred during the period in which the goods are produced. Production personnel maintain that the only real solution to the problem is for the sales department to increase sales in the slack periods.

Andrea Parley, president of the company, asks you as the company accountant to collect quarterly data for the past year on TC-1. From the cost accounting system, you accumulate the following production quantity and cost data.

Instructions

With the class divided into groups, answer the following questions.

(a)What manufacturing cost element is responsible for the fluctuating unit costs? Why?

(b)What is your recommended solution to the problem of fluctuating unit cost?

(c)Restate the quarterly data on the basis of your recommended solution.

how should joe have recorded each of the four events 608806

In the course of routine checking of all journal entries prior to preparing year-end reports, Betty Eller discovered several strange entries. She recalled that the president”s son Joe had come in to help out during an especially busy time and that he had recorded some journal entries. She was relieved that there were only a few of his entries, and even more relieved that he had included rather lengthy explanations. The entries Joe made were:

Costs

Quarter

1

2

3

4

Direct materials

$100,000

$220,000

$ 80,000

$200,000

Direct labor

60,000

132,000

48,000

120,000

Manufacturing overhead

105,000

153,000

97,000

125,000

Total

$265,000

$505,000

$225,000

$445,000

Production in batches

5

11

4

10

Unit cost (per batch)

$ 53,000

$ 45,909

$ 56,250

$ 44,500

(This is for materials put into process. I don”t find the record that we paid for these, so I”m crediting Cash because I know we”ll have to pay for them sooner or later.)

Work in Process Inventory

25,000

Cash

25,000

(This is for bonuses paid to salespeople. I know they”re part of overhead, and I can”t find an account called “Non-Factory Overhead” or “Other Overhead” so I”m putting it in Manufacturing Overhead. I have the check stubs, so I know we paid these.)

Manufacturing Overhead

12,000

Cash

12,000

(This is for the factory workers’ wages. I have a note that payroll taxes are $18,000. I still think that”s part of wages expense and that we”ll have to pay it all in cash sooner or later, so I credited Cash for the wages and the taxes.)

Wages Expense

120,000

Cash

120,000

(This is for the glue used in the factory. I know we used this to make the products, even though we didn”t use very much on any one of the products. I got it out of inventory, so I credited an inventory account.)

Instructions

(a)How should Joe have recorded each of the four events?

(b)If the entry was not corrected, which financial statements (income statement or balance sheet) would be affected? What balances would be overstated or understated?

founded in 1970 parle x corporationis a world leader in the design and manufacture o 608807

Founded in 1970,Parle x Corporationis a world leader in the design and manufacture of flexible interconnect products. Utilizing proprietary and patented technologies, Parle x produces custom flexible interconnects including flexible circuits, polymer thick film, laminated cables, and value-added assemblies for sophisticated electronics used in automotive, telecommunications, computer, diversified electronics, and aerospace applications. In addition to manufacturing sites in Methuen, Massachusetts; Salem, New Hampshire; Cranston, Rhode Island; San Jose, California; Shanghai, China; Isle of Wight, UK; and Empalme, Mexico, Parle x has logistic support centers and strategic alliances throughout North America, Asia, and Europe.

The following information was provided in the company”s annual report.

Instructions

(a)Parle x management discusses the job order cost system employed by their company. What are several advantages of using the job order approach to costing?

(b)Contrast the products produced in a job order environment, like Parle x, to those produced when process cost systems are used.

who are the stakeholders in this situation 608810

LRF Printing performs printing services for many different corporate clients. Although LRF bids most jobs, some jobs, particularly new ones, are negotiated on a “cost-plus” basis. Cost-plus means that the buyer is willing to pay the actual cost plus a return (profit) on these costs to LRF.

Alice Reiley, controller for LRF, has recently returned from a meeting where LRF”s president stated that he wanted her to find a way to charge more costs to any project that was on a cost-plus basis. The president noted that the company needed more profits to meet its stated goals this period. By charging more costs to the cost-plus projects and therefore fewer costs to the jobs that were bid, the company should be able to increase its profit for the current year.

Alice knew why the president wanted to take this action. Rumors were that he was looking for a new position and if the company reported strong profits, the president”s opportunities would be enhanced. Alice also recognized that she could probably increase the cost of certain jobs by changing the basis used to allocate manufacturing overhead.

Instructions

(a)Who are the stakeholders in this situation?

(b)What are the ethical issues in this situation?

(c)What would you do if you were Alice Reiley?

what are some of the characteristics required of a small business owner 608811

Many of you will work for a small business. Some of you will even own your own business. In order to operate a small business, you will need a good understanding of managerial accounting, as well as many other skills. Much information is available to assist people who are interested in starting a new business. A great place to start is the website provided by the Small Business Administration, which is an agency of the federal government whose purpose is to support small business.

Instructions

Small Business Planner, Plan Your Business link, review the material under “Get Ready.” Answer the following questions.

(a)What are some of the characteristics required of a small business owner?

(b)What are the top 10 reasons given for business failure?

write a response indicating your position regarding this situation provide support f 608812

After graduating, you might decide to start a small business. As discussed in this chapter, owners of any business need to know how to calculate the cost of their products. In fact, many small businesses fail because they don”t accurately calculate their product costs, so they don”t know if they are making a profit or losing money—until it”s too late.

Suppose that you decide to start a landscape business. You use an old pickup truck that you”ve fully paid for. You store the truck and other equipment in your parents’ barn, and you store trees and shrubs on their land. Your parents will not charge you for the use of these facilities for the first two years, but beginning in the third year they will charge a reasonable rent. Your mother helps you by answering phone calls and providing customers with information. She doesn”t charge you for this service, but she plans on doing it for only your first two years in business. In pricing your services, should you include charges for the truck, the barn, the land, and your mother”s services when calculating your product cost? The basic arguments for and against are as follows.

YES:If you don”t include charges for these costs, your costs are understated and your profitability is overstated.

NO:At this point, you are not actually incurring costs related to these activities; therefore, you shouldn”t record charges.

Instructions

Write a response indicating your position regarding this situation. Provide support for your view.

indicate whether each of the following statements is true or false 608813

Indicate whether each of the following statements is true or false.

  1. A law firm is likely to use process costing for major lawsuits.
  2. A manufacturer of paintballs is likely to use process costing.
  3. Both job order and process costing determine product costs at the end of a period of time, rather than when a product is completed.
  4. Process costing does not keep track of manufacturing overhead.

Use job order costing in situations where unit costs are high, unit volume is low, and products are unique.

Use process costing when there is a large volume of relatively homogeneous products.

when the costs are assigned to production debit the separate work in process account 608814

Ruth Company manufactures ZEBO through two processes: blending and bottling. In June, raw materials used were Blending $18,000 and Bottling $4,000. Factory labor costs were Blending $12,000 and Bottling $5,000. Manufacturing overhead costs were Blending $6,000 and Bottling $2,500. The company transfers units completed at a cost of $19,000 in the Blending Department to the Bottling Department. The Bottling Department transfers units completed at a cost of $11,000 to Finished Goods. Journalize the assignment of these costs to the two processes and the transfer of units as appropriate.

In process cost accounting, keep separate work in process accounts for each process.

When the costs are assigned to production, debit the separate work in process accounts.

Transfer cost of completed units to the next process or to Finished Goods.

use the appropriate formula units completed and transferred out equivalent units of 608816

The fabricating department has the following production and cost data for the current month.

Beginning

Work in Process

Units

Transferred Out

Ending

Work in Process

0

15,000

10,000

Materials are entered at the beginning of the process. The ending work in process units are 30% complete as to conversion costs. Compute the equivalent units of production for (a) materials and (b) conversion costs.

To measure the work done during the period, expressed in fully completed units, compute equivalent units of production.

Use the appropriate formula: Units completed and transferred out + Equivalent units of ending work in process = Equivalent units of production.

assign the materials cost and conversion costs based on equivalent units of producti 608817

In March, Rodayo Manufacturing had the following unit production costs: materials $6 and conversion costs $9. On March 1, it had zero work in process. During March, Rodayo transferred out 12,000 units. As of March 31, 800 units that were 25% complete as to conversion costs and 100% complete as to materials were in ending work in process. Assign the costs to the units transferred out and in process.

Assign the total manufacturing cost of $15 per unit to the 12,000 units transferred out.

Assign the materials cost and conversion costs based on equivalent units of production to units in ending work in process.

you are required to compute bep for the two factories and for the company as a whole 608758

Flora Ltd has two factories A and B producing the same cosmetic product whose selling price is Rs. 100 per unit. The following are the other factors:

A

B

Capacity (in units)

20,000

30,000

Variable cost per unit

Rs. 75

Rs. 80

Fixed expenses

Rs. 3,00,000

Rs. 2,00,000

You are required to compute BEP for the two factories and for the company as a whole under constant sales-mix approach.

a research agency suggested that the firm shall increase its production and sale by 608763

Vas Ltd. is engaged in the manufacture and sale of a consumer product. Its budget for the next year shows the following data:

Selling price/unit:

20

Variable cost/unit:

15

Fixed costs:

Rs. 50,000

A research agency suggested that the firm shall increase its production and sale by 25% by reducing its selling price by 10%. However, the firm is working in its full capacity (and producing 20,000 units). In order to increase its production and sale, it has to expand its factory. The expansion would lead to an increase in the fixed by Rs. 25,000.

You are required to advise the firm regarding the expansion.

you are required to suggest whether a diversification is advisable 608764

M/s Bhagya & Co. is currently engaged in the manufacture and sale of a product EC. Its budget for the next year reveals the following:

Selling price/unit

: Rs. 15

Variable cost/unit

: Rs. 10

Fixed cost

: Rs. 50,000

Demand

: 25,000 units

It wants to diversity into product OK in order to reduce its market risks, and following are the estimated data for the new product OK.

Selling price/unit

: Rs. 18

Variable cost/unit

: Rs. 12

Fixed cost

: Rs. 30,000

Demand

: 10,000 units.

You are required to suggest whether a diversification is advisable?

what sales volume must be obtained to get a 10 return on the investment 608765

Mrs Panel has Rs. 3,00,000 investments in her business firm. She wants a 10% return on her money. From the analysis of the recent cost figures, she finds that her variable cost of operating is 70% of sales and her fixed cost is Rs. 90,000 per annum. Show computations to answer the following questions:

  1. What sales volume must be obtained to break-even?
  2. What sales volume must be obtained to get a 10% return on the investment?
  3. Mrs Panel estimates that even if she closed the doors of her business, she would incur Rs. 30,000 as the expenses per year. At what sales would she be better off by locking her business up?

from the following data compute contribution and p v ratio and comment on the profit 608767

Model 1: Marginal costing (contribution) and P/ V ratio. (Determination of contribution and P/ V ratio and comparability of profit—Based on the results, decisions are to be taken.

From the following data, compute contribution and P/ V ratio and comment on the profitability of products:

Particulars

X Rs.

Y Rs.

Materials/unit

500

400

Wages/unit

200

300

Fixed overheads/units

700

200

Variable overheads/units

200

400

Sales per unit

2,000

2,000

Output per month

300 units

200 units

number of units that must be sold to earn a profit of rs 1 00 000 per year 608768

Model 3: Contribution, P/ V ratio, sales (volume) and profit]

From the following data, calculate:

  1. BEP (in rupees) sales value.
  2. Number of units that must be sold to earn a profit of Rs. 1,00,000 per year.
  3. Number of units that must be sold to earn a net income of 20% on sales.

Sales price

25 per unit

Variable manufacturing costs

12 per unit

Variable selling costs

5 per unit

Fixed factory overheads

6,25,000 per year

Fixed selling costs

2,75,000 per year

sales per unit if bep is brought down to 12 000 units 608769

Model 4: Determination of sale price, recovering of total cost and BEP]

Cost data:

Sale price

Rs. 250 per unit

Variable

Rs. 150 per unit

Fixed costs (expenses)

Rs. 15,00,000

You are required to ascertain:

  1. BEP
  2. Sales per unit if BEP is brought up to 20,000 units.
  3. Sales per unit if BEP is brought down to 12,000 units.

the cost data of a company are as follows 608770

Model 5: P/ V ratio, BEP, fixed cost, variable cost, margin of safety and profit

The cost data of a company are as follows:

Period

Sales Rs.

Profit Rs.

I

75,000

10,000

II

1,00,000

15,000

You are required to compute:

(a) P/ V ratio; (b) BEP; (c) fixed cost; (d) profit when sales is Rs. 80,000; (e) sales required to earn a profit of Rs. 30,000; (f) margin of safety; and (g) variable cost of Period II.

the following cost data relates to abc ltd for 2009 608771

Model 7: P/ V ratio, BEP, margin of safety determining the effect of increase/decrease in fixed costs, variable costs and selling price

The following cost data relates to ABC Ltd for 2009:

Sales Rs.

Variable costs 50,000

Fixed costs 25,000

Fixed costs 15,000

  1. You are required to compute P/ V ratio, BEP and margin of safety at this level.
  2. Further, you are required to compute the effect of:
    1. 20% increase in fixed costs.
    2. 10% decrease in fixed costs.
    3. 20% decrease in variable costs.
    4. 10% increase in selling price.
    5. 10% increase in selling price with an increase of fixed overheads by Rs. 3,000.
    6. 10% decrease in sales price accompanied by a decrease of Rs. 2,500 in variable costs.
    7. 20% decrease in sales price.

a manufacturer provides you the following data regarding his operations for the year 608772

Model 9: Determination of costs (fixed and variable)

A manufacturer provides you the following data regarding his operations for the year:

Break-even sales

5,80,000

Direct materials

90,000

Gross profit

1,50,000

Contribution margin

2,00,000

Direct labour

2,00,000

Sales

8,00,000

Variable manufacturing overhead

10,000

You are required to calculate:

  1. Fixed manufacturing overhead.
  2. Fixed selling and administrative overhead.
  3. Variable selling and administrative overhead.

calculate the number of units to be produced and sold to earn the same profit as in 608775

Model: 12 Fixation of selling price

A single product company sells its products at Rs. 50 per unit. In 2008, the company operated at a margin of safety of 60%. The fixed costs amounted to Rs. 4,00,000 and the variable cost ratio to sales was 60%. In 2009, it is estimated that the variable cost will go up by 10% and the fixed costs will increase by 5%. You are required to

  1. Compute the selling price to be fixed in 2009 to earn the same P/ V ratio as in 2008.
  2. Calculate the number of units to be produced and sold to earn the same profit as in 2008, assuming the same selling price of Rs. 50 per unit.

the market price of the product is expected to be rs 10 unit 608779

VRS Ltd has been offered a choice to buy one out of two machines—P and Q. You are required to compute:

  1. BEP for each of the two machines.
  2. The level of sales at which both machines would earn equal profit.
  3. The range of sales at which one is more profitable than the other.

The relevant data are as follows:

Machines

P

Q

Annual output in units

20,000

20,000

Fixed costs

Rs. 60,000

Rs. 40,000

Profit at above level of production

Rs. 60,000

Rs. 50,000

The market price of the product is expected to be Rs. 10/unit.

prepare a statement showing the amount of loss expected 608780

The budgeted results of ABC Ltd are as follows:

Sales of Products

Amount (in lakhs)

Variable Costs as % of Sales Value

P

4.00

50%

Q

3.00

60%

R

6.00

70%

S

2.00

55%

T

8.00

80%

Fixed costs for the period are Rs. 7,60,000.

You are required to:

  1. Prepare a statement showing the amount of loss expected.
  2. Recommend a change in the sales volume of each product which will eliminate the expected loss assuming that sale of only one product can be increased at a time.

if in the third quarter the company reduces the selling price by re 1 and increases 608781

A company which recently launched a new product reviewed the operational performance after six months. The profit statements relating to last two quarters are as follows:

Quarter I Rs.

Quarter II Rs.

No. of units sold

10,000 units

15,000 units

Selling price per units

12

12

Direct materials

25,000

40,000

Direct wages

25,000

35,000

Production overheads

35,000

40,000

Total

85,000

1,15,000

Gross profit

35,000

65,000

Selling ! administrative overheads

40,000

45,000

Net profit/loss

(5,000)

20,000

Required:

  1. Calculate the BEP in units and the sales value for a quarter.
  2. If the company supplies 5,000 units over and above the sales of the second quarter to a special customer (which sales will not affect the regular market), what selling price should be quoted to earn a profit of Rs. 3,000 after meeting the special expenses of Rs. 2,000?
  3. If the selling commission is increased by 10% on sales, what quarterly unit sales will be required to earn a return of 15% on the investment of Rs. 1,00,000 in this line of product?
  4. If in the third quarter, the company reduces the selling price by Re 1 and increases the advertisement expenses by Rs. 10,000, the sales volume will increase by 20% over that of the second quarter. Should this plan be implemented?

post the entries to work in process inventory and prove the agreement of the control 608783

Stine Company uses a job order cost system. On May 1, the company has a balance in Work in Process Inventory of $3,500 and two jobs in process: Job No. 429 $2,000, and Job No. 430 $1,500. During May, a summary of source documents reveals the following.

Job Number

Materials
Requisition Slips

Labor
Time Tickets

429

$2,500

$1,900

430

3,500

3,000

431

4,400

$10,400

7,600

$12,500

General use

800

1,200

$11,200

$13,700

Stine Company applies manufacturing overhead to jobs at an overhead rate of 60% of direct labor cost. Job No. 429 is completed during the month.

Instructions

(a)Prepare summary journal entries to record (i) the requisition slips, (ii) the time tickets, (iii) the assignment of manufacturing overhead to jobs, and (iv) the completion of Job No. 429.

(b)Post the entries to Work in Process Inventory, and prove the agreement of the control account with the job cost sheets. (Use a T-account.)

what was the balance in work in process inventory on january 1 if this was the only 608784

A job order cost sheet for Lowry Company is shown below.

Job No. 92 For 2,000 Units

Date

Direct
Materials

Direct
Labor

Manufacturing
Overhead

Beg. bal. Jan. 1

5,000

6,000

5,100

8

6,000

12

8,000

6,400

25

2,000

27

4,000

3,200

13,000

18,000

14,700

Cost of completed job:

Direct materials

$13,000

Direct labor

18,000

Manufacturing overhead

14,700

Total cost

$45,700

Unit cost ($45,700 + 2,000)

$22.85

Instructions

(a)On the basis of the foregoing data, answer the following questions.

(1)What was the balance in Work in Process Inventory on January 1 if this was the only unfinished job?

(2)If manufacturing overhead is applied on the basis of direct labor cost, what overhead rate was used in each year?

(b)Prepare summary entries at January 31 to record the current year”s transactions pertaining to Job No. 92.

indicate the missing amount for each letter assume that in all cases manufacturing o 608785

Manufacturing cost data for Orlando Company, which uses a job order cost system, are presented below.

Case A

Case B

Case C

Direct materials used

$(a)

$ 83,000

$ 63,150

Direct labor

50,000

140,000

(h)

Manufacturing overhead applied

42,500

(d)

(i)

Total manufacturing costs

145,650

(e)

213,000

Work in process 1/1/14

(b)

15,500

18,000

Total cost of work in process

201,500

(0

0)

Work in process 12/31/14

(c)

11,800

(k)

Cost of goods manufactured

192,300

(g)

222,000

Instructions

Indicate the missing amount for each letter. Assume that in all cases manufacturing overhead is applied on the basis of direct labor cost and the rate is the same.

what are the total cost and the unit cost of the completed job round unit cost to ne 608787

A job cost sheet of Sandoval Company is given below.

JOB No. ITEM

Job Cost Sheet

Quantity 2,500

469

Date

White Lion Cages

Date Requested7/2

Completed 7/31

FOR Todd Company

Date

Direct
Materials

Direct
Labor

Manufacturing
Overhead

7/10

12

15

22

24

27

31

700
900

1,600
1,500

440
380

540

550
475

675

Cost of completed job:
Direct materials

Direct labor

Manufacturing overhead

Total cost

Unit cost

Instructions

(a)Answer the following questions.

(1)What are the source documents for direct materials, direct labor, and manufacturing overhead costs assigned to this job?

(2)What is the predetermined manufacturing overhead rate?

(3)What are the total cost and the unit cost of the completed job? (Round unit cost to nearest cent.)

(b)Prepare the entry to record the completion of the job.

journalize the transactions omit explanations 608788

Torre Corporation incurred the following transactions.

  1. Purchased raw materials on account $46,300.
  2. Raw materials of $36,000 were requisitioned to the factory. An analysis of the materials requisition slips indicated that $6,800 was classified as indirect materials.
  3. Factory labor costs incurred were $55,900, of which $51,000 pertained to factory wages payable and $4,900 pertained to employer payroll taxes payable.
  4. Time tickets indicated that $50,000 was direct labor and $5,900 was indirect labor.
  5. Manufacturing overhead costs incurred on account were $80,500.
  6. Depreciation on the company”s office building was $8,100.
  7. Manufacturing overhead was applied at the rate of 150% of direct labor cost.
  8. Goods costing $88,000 were completed and transferred to finished goods.
  9. Finished goods costing $75,000 to manufacture were sold on account for $103,000.

Instructions

Journalize the transactions. (Omit explanations.)

prepare entries to record the operations summarized above prepare a schedule showing 608789

Enos Printing Corp. uses a job order cost system. The following data summarize the operations related to the first quarter”s production.

  1. Materials purchased on account $192,000, and factory wages incurred $87,300.
  2. Materials requisitioned and factory labor used by job:

Job Number

Materials

Factory Labor

A20

$ 35,240

$18,000

A21

42,920

22,000

A22

36,100

15,000

A23

39,270

25,000

General factory use

4,470

7,300

$158,000

$87,300

  1. Manufacturing overhead costs incurred on account $49,500.
  2. Depreciation on factory equipment $14,550.
  3. Depreciation on the company”s office building was $14,300.
  4. Manufacturing overhead rate is 90% of direct labor cost.
  5. Jobs completed during the quarter: A20, A21, and A23.

Instructions

Prepare entries to record the operations summarized above. (Prepare a schedule showing the individual cost elements and total cost for each job in item 7.)

assuming raw material is the key factor availability of which is 20 000 kgs and the 608741

The following particulars are extracted from the records of a company:

Product X

Product Y

Sales per unit

Rs. 200

Rs. 240

Consumption of material

2 kgs

3 kgs

Material cost

Rs. 20

Rs. 30

Direct wages cost

Rs. 30

Rs. 20

Direct expenses

Rs. 10

Rs. 12

Machine hours used

3

2

Overhead expenses:

Fixed

Rs. 10

Rs. 20

Variable

Rs. 30

Rs. 40

Direct wage per hour is Rs. 10.

  1. Comment on the profitability of each product (both use the same raw material) when
    1. Total sales potential in units is limited.
    2. Total sales potential in value is limited.
    3. Raw material is in short supply.
    4. Production capacity (in terms of machine hours) is the key factor.
  2. Assuming raw material is the key factor, availability of which is 20,000 kgs and the maximum sales potential of each product being 7,000 units, find the product mix which will yield the maximum profit.

you are given the following data relating to bought out prices and the cost of produ 608742

You are given the following data relating to bought-out prices and the cost of production of undernoted items. Prepare a suitable statement showing which items should be purchased from outside giving ranks in order of preference for buying, assuming (a) there is no constraint or key factor; (b) machine hours is a key factor; and (c) labour hours is a key factor.

Item A
Rs.

Item 8
Rs.

Item C
Rs.

Purchase price per unit

30

40

50

Variable cost per unit

18

48

34

Fixed cost per unit

6

10

14

Production per machine hour

1

2

1.50

Labour hours required per unit

2

1

4

evaluate these alternatives and state which alternative on to be profitability consi 608745

ABC Ltd manufactures and sells sole products for Rs. 50 per unit and has a variable cost per unit of Rs. 20. The accounts of the company for the year 2009 are expected to reveal a profit of Rs. 7,00,000 after charging fixed costs of Rs. 5,00,000.

Market-sensitivity tests suggest the following responses to price charges:

Alternatives

Selling price reduced by

Quantity sold increased by

A

5%

10%

B

7%

20%

C

10%

25%

Evaluate these alternatives and state which alternative, on to be profitability consideration, should be adopted for the forthcoming year, assuming the cost structure to be unchanged from 2009.

the sales manager on the other hand suggests to increase the selling price by 10 whi 608747

XYZ Ltd has drawn up the following budget for the year 2009–10:

Raw materials

40,000

Labour and other variable costs

12,000

Fixed manufacturing overheads

14,000

Packing & Variable distribution cost

8,000

Fixed overheads including selling

6,000

80,000

Sales revenue @ 10 per unit

1,00,000

Budgeted profit

20,000

  1. The General Manager suggests to reduce the selling price by 5% and expects to achieve an additional volume of 5%. A more-intensive manufacturing programme will involve additional costs of Rs. 5,000 for production planning. It will also be necessary to open an additional sales office at the cost of Rs. 10,000 per annum.
  2. The Sales Manager, on the other hand, suggests to increase the selling price by 10% which is estimated to reduce the sales volume by 10%. At the same time, saving in manufacturing overheads and general overheads of Rs. 5,000 and Rs. 10,000, per annum, respectively, is expected on this reduced volume. Which of these two proposals would you accept and why? Show the complete working.

based on the above information prepare a comparative profit and loss statement for t 608748

A company has three branches and their summarized accounting particulars for a period are given as follows:

Branches Sales

Chennal
Rs.

Cuttack
Rs.

Jaipur
Rs.

Branch expenses:

9,00,000

8,00,000

14,00,000

Salaries, commission and travelling expenses:

82,000

80,000

1,20,000

Advertisement

18,000

20,000

22,000

Other expenses

20,000

22,000

24,000

Central Office at (Mumbai) expenses:

Rs. 3,10,000 apportioned to branches on the basis of sales 25% of sales is taken as the Gross profit.

Based on the above information, prepare a comparative profit and loss statement for the different branches. Offer your views on the contemplated closure of the branch which shows a loss assuming that in the event of closure of a branch, the Central Office expenses:

  1. ill remain unaffected.
  2. Can be reduced by 30%

the export order will entail an extra expenditure in the form of special packing at 608749

ABC Ltd. has been operating at 70% capacity and the following particulars relate to the present level of activity:

Units

3,500

Direct materials

Rs. 10, 500

Direct labour

Rs. 5,250

Variable overhead

200% of direct labour

Fixed overhead

Rs. 14,000

Sales

Rs. 47,250

ABC Ltd received an export order for 1,000 units of its product at Rs. 10 per unit. The export order will entail an extra expenditure in the form of special packing at Re 0.50 per unit. Is the export order worth?

from the following figures you are required to prepare cost and profit statements fo 608750

From the following figures, you are required to prepare cost and profit statements for the months of November and December 2009 under marginal-costing and absorption-costing methods:

Normal sales:

50,000 units

Selling price:

Rs. 6.25 each

November 2009:

120% of normal capacity production; Sales 40,000 units

December 2009:

84% of normal capacity production; Sales 60,000 units.

Manufacturing cost:

Direct materials:

Re 1 per unit

Direct labour:

Re 1.50 per unit

Manufacturing overhead:

Rs. 70,000 (of which, Rs. 25,000 are variable)

Selling expenses:

Commission:

Re 0.25 per Unit

Fixed selling expenses:

Rs. 12,500

Administrative expenses:

Rs. 10,000

Research & Development expenses:

Rs. 2,000

fixed costs are likely to be around rs 35 000 per annum which price the firm should 608751

A firm is considering two alternative prices for its new product which is expected to be marketed very soon. The sales department wants the price to be Rs. 20 per unit whereas the top management wants that the price be fixed at Rs. 22 per unit. To resolve the issue, data were collected from the Market Research and the Production Department. The data are as follows:

  1. Expected sales distribution per annum if the price is Rs. 20 per unit:

Sales in Units

Probability

5000

.20

5500

.50

6000

.30

  1. Expected sales distribution per annum if the price is Rs. 22 per unit:

Sales in Units

Probability

4,500

.10

5,000

.40

5,500

.50

  1. Estimated costs for production up to 6,500 units:

Variable cost Per unit

Probability

Rs. 10

.30

Rs. 11

.70

Fixed costs are likely to be around Rs. 35,000 per annum. Which price the firm should choose? Show your workings nearly.

the maximum production possible for each of the products x and y is 100 units fixed 608752

From the following data, you are required to recommend the most profitable product mix, presuming that the direct labour hours available are only 700:

Product X

Product Y

Contribution per unit

Rs. 30

Rs. 20

Direct Labour per unit

10 hrs

5 hrs

The maximum production possible for each of the products X and Y is 100 units. Fixed overheads are Rs. 2,000.

what would be your decision if the supplier offered at rs 45 50 each 608753

The Modern Software Company, Bangalore, finds that while it costs Rs. 67.50 each to make a component of Pen-Drive, the same is available in the market at Rs. 57.50 each with the assurance of a continued supply. The break-down of cost is as follows:

Rs / Each

Materials

27.50

Labour

17.50

Other variable costs

5.00

Fixed cost

12.50

  1. Should you make or buy?
  2. What would be your decision if the supplier offered at Rs. 45.50 each?

there is severe competition and extra efforts are needed to sell suggestions have be 608708

RB Ltd manufactures and markets a single consumer product. The following information is available:

Materials

10

Conversion costs (variable)

7

Dealer’s margin

3

Selling price

30

Fixed cost

Rs. 4,00,000

Present sale

75,000 units

Capacity utilization

60%

There is severe competition and extra efforts are needed to sell. Suggestions have been made for increasing sales:

  1. By reducing sales price by 10%.
  2. By increasing dealers’ margin by 25% over the existing rate.

you are required to present comparative profit statements using 1 absorption costing 608709

The following data relate to a company which makes and sells computers and accessories:

May

June

Sales (units)

2,500

5,000

Production (units)

5,000

2,500

Selling price per unit

200 (Rs.)

200 (Rs.)

Variable production cost per unit

100

100

Fixed production overhead incurred

1,00,000

1,00,000

Fixed production overhead cost per unit, being the

20

20

predetermined overhead absorption rate

Selling, distribution and administration cost (all fixed)

50,000

50,000

You are required to present comparative profit statements using: (1) absorption costing and (2) marginal costing

you are required to compute the quantum of loss now incurred and advise the most pro 608710

A manufacturing company produces and sells products P, Q and R. It has an available inactive-hour capacity of one-lakh hours, interchangeable among the three products. Presently, the company produces and sells 20,000 units of P and 15,000 units each of Q and R. The unit-selling price of the three products are Rs. 25, Rs. 32 and Rs. 42 for P, Q and R, respectively. With this price structure and the aforesaid sales mix, the company is incurring loss. The total expenditure exclusive of fixed charges (presently, Rs. 5 per unit) is Rs. 13.75 lakhs. The unit cost ratio among the products P, Q and R is 4: 6: 7. Since the company desires to improve its profitability without changing its cost and price structures, it has been considering the following three mixes so as to be within its total available capacity.

You are required to compute the quantum of loss now incurred and advise the most profitable mix which could be considered by the company.

the directors propose that z should be given up because the contribution from the pr 608711

The cost per unit of three products X,Y and Z of a company are given as follows:

Particulars

Product X
Rs.

Product Y
Rs.

Product Z
Rs.

Direct material

10

8

9

Direct labour

6

7

6

Variable expenses

4

5

3

Fixed expenses

3

3

2

23

23

20

Profit

9

7

6

Selling price

32

30

26

Number of units

20,000

10,000

16,000

Produced

Production arrangements are such that if one product is given up, the production of the others can be raised by 50%. The directors propose that Z should be given up because the contribution from the product is the lowest. Present suitable analysis of the data indicates whether the proposal should be accepted.

if the sale price of a product is rs 10 and the variable cost is rs 7 50 then the co 608718

Fill in the blanks with apt word(s)

  1. Under marginal-costing method, cost per unit is ascertained only on the basis of _____.
  2. _____ costs are not taken into account under marginal costing.
  3. Marginal costing is known as _____.
  4. Marginal costing is a technique to study the relationship between _____ and the volume of output.
  5. Marginal costing and _____ costing are interchangeable terms.
  6. Contribution is the difference between sales and _____ cost of sales.
  7. Under marginal-costing technique, profit is determined by deducting fixed costs from the total _____.
  8. Under marginal-costing technique, costs are separated into _____ and _____ elements.
  9. Marginal costing combines the technique of cost recording and cost _____.
  10. The unit cost of a product means the average _____ of manufacturing the product.
  11. The excess of contribution over fixed costs is _____.
  12. When selling price equals the cost, contribution = _____.
  13. Under marginal costing, fixed costs will be a _____ amount.
  14. Direct materials, direct labour and direct expenses are all called as _____ costs.
  15. The straight-line equation used in segregating the semi-variable costs into their fixed and variable elements is

Y = _____ + C.

  1. Under _____ technique, both fixed and variable costs are charged to product costs.
  2. Profits shown by marginal costing and profits shown by absorption costing will not be _____ at all conditions.
  3. Basic marginal equation is: Sales – marginal costs = _____.
  4. Whereas in the above equation Contribution = _____ + Profit.
  5. If the sale price of a product is Rs. 10 and the variable cost is Rs. 7.50, then the contribution will be _____.
  6. Under absorption costing, profit is the difference between the sales and _____.
  7. Period costs are nothing but _____.
  8. Key factor is also known as _____.
  9. Selling of a new product, which is to be introduced in the market, at or below _____ is justified.
  10. Key factor is important in determining the _____ of products.

you are required to segregate the maintenance cost which is semi variable into fixed 608739

The following are the maintenance costs incurred in a machine shop for six months with corresponding machine hours:

Month

Machine Hours

Maintenance Cost Rs.

July

4,000

600

August

4,400

640

September

3,400

540

October

4,800

680

November

3,600

560

December

3,800

580

24,000

3,600

You are required to segregate the maintenance cost which is semi-variable into fixed and variable elements by using Range method.

the standard overhead rate of a product is developed as follows 608674

The standard overhead rate of a product is developed as follows:

Variable – Rs. 4 per unit

Fixed (budgeted production – 10,000 units) Rs. 6 per unit with standard time allowed for production of one unit of product is 5 hours. The following actual data are available for a month:

Production

9,600 units

Time taken

47,900 units

Overhead:

Variable

Rs. 38,500

Fixed

Rs. 60,500

Compute overhead variances.

prepare the figures to the management showing the breakup of material cost variances 608678

X Ltd is producing floor covers in rolls of standard size measuring 3 metres wide and 30 metres long, by feeding continuous raw materials to continuous process machines. The standard mixture fixed for a batch of 900 sq. meters of floor cover is as follows:

2,000 kg of Material A at Re. 1/kg.

800 kg of Material B at Rs. 1.50/kg.

20 litres of Material C at Rs. 30/litre.

During the period, 1,505 standard size rolls were produced from the material issued for 150 batches. The actual usage and the cost of material were:

3, 00,500 kg of Material A at Rs. 1.10/kg.

1, 19,600 kg of Material B at Rs. 1.65/kg.

3,100 litres of Material C at Rs. 29.50/litre.

Prepare the figures to the management showing the breakup of material-cost variances arising during the period.

compare the missing data indicated by the question marks from the following 608681

Compare the missing data indicated by the question marks from the following:

Particulars

A

B

Standard price/unit

Rs. 12

Rs. 15

Actual price/unit

Rs. 15

Rs. 20

Standard input (kgs)

50

?

Actual input (kgs)

?

70

Material-price variance

?

?

Material-usage variance

?

Rs. 300 (A)

Material-cost variance

?

?

Material-mix variance for both products together is Rs. 45 (Adverse).

compute the standard unit labour cost of the product 608683

The following was the composition of a gang of workers in a factory during a particular month, in one of the production departments. The standard composition of workers and wage rate per hour were as follows:

Skilled: Two workers at a standard rate of Rs. 20 per hour each.

Semi-skilled: Four workers at a standard rate of Rs. 12 per hour each.

Unskilled: Four workers at a standard rate of Rs. 8 per hour each.

The standard output of the gang was four units per hour of the product.

During the month in question, however, the actual composition of the gang and hourly rates paid were as follows:

Nature of Worker

No. of Workers

Wage Rate Paid Per Worker Per Hour Engaged Rs.

Skilled

2

20

Semi-skilled

3

14

Unskilled

5

10

The gang was engaged for 200 hours during the month, which included 13 hours when no production was possible, due to machine break down and about 810 units of the product were recorded as the output of the gang during the month.

You are required to:

  1. Compute the standard unit-labour cost of the product.
  2. Compute the total-variance labour cost during the month.
  3. Analyse the variance in B above into sub-variances and reconcile.

you are required to calculate the budget variance calendar variance capacity varianc 608685

(Overhead Variances)

Budgeted overhead (fixed)

Rs. 50,000

Budgeted production per day

5,000 units

Budgeted no. of days

20

Standard production per hour

50 units

Actual overhead

Rs. 60,000

Actual direct-labour hours

2,000

Actual no. of days

18

Actual production units

1,20,000 units

You are required to calculate the budget variance, calendar variance, capacity variance, Efficiency variance, volume variance and total overhead variance.

also prepare a reconciliation statement for the standard fixed expenses worked out a 608688

The following information was obtained from the records of a manufacturing unit using standard-costing system.

Standard

Actual

Working days (days)

20

21

Production (units)

4,000

3,000

Fixed overhead (Rs.)

40,000

39,000

Variable overhead (Rs.)

12,000

12,000

You are required to calculate the following overhead variances:

  1. Variable-overhead variance:
  2. Fixed-overhead variance:
    1. Expenditure variance
    2. Volume variance
    3. Efficiency variance
    4. Calendar variance
  3. Also prepare a reconciliation statement for the standard fixed expenses worked out at the standard fixed overhead rate and actual fixed overhead

compute the different variances to explain the difference between the budgeted and t 608691

Ultra Modern Cassette Ltd had budgeted the following sales for February 2010:

VCD cassette

1,100 units at Rs. 50 per unit

DVD cassette

950 units at Rs. 100 per unit

MP3

1,250 units at Rs. 80 per unit

As against this, the actual sales were:

VCD

1,300 units at Rs. 55 per unit

DVD

1,000 units at Rs. 95 per unit

MP3

1,200 units at Rs. 78 per unit

The cost per unit of CD, DVD and MP3 was Rs. 45, Rs. 85 and Rs. 70, respectively.

Compute the different variances to explain the difference between the budgeted and the actual profit.

prepare a profit and loss statement under 608692

Prepare a profit and loss statement under

(i) Absorption costing and (ii) Marginal costing from the following data:

Total units produced

5000 units

Total units sold

4000 units

Selling price per unit

Rs. 10

Total fixed overheads

Rs. 15,000

Cost structure:

(Per unit)

Direct material:

Rs. 2

Direct wages:

Rs. 2

Variable overhead:

Rs. 2

Fixed overhead:

Rs. 3.

the opening and closing stocks consist of both finished goods as well as equivalent 608693

You are required to ascertain profit and loss under (i) marginal-costing- and (ii) absorption-costing method from the following data:

Basic production data:

Normal volume of production = 20,000 units per period.

Sales price

= Rs. 5 per unit.

Variable cost

= Rs. 3 per unit.

Fixed cost

= Re 1 per unit.

Total fixed cost

= Rs. 20,000 (20,000 × Re 1).

Selling and distribution costs (not available).

The opening and closing stocks consist of both finished goods as well as equivalent units of WIP.

segregate the semi variable overheads into fixed and variable by applying the method 608694

2009

Month

Output (Units)

Semi-Variable Overheads Rs.

January

25

125

February

30

140

March

35

155

April

47

191

May

37

161

June

44

182

July

45

185

August

42

176

September

40

170

October

43

179

November

38

164

December

27

131

2010

January

30

?

Segregate the semi-variable overheads into fixed and variable by applying the methods (one by one).

a company engaged in plantation activities has 400 hectares of virgin land which can 608695

A company engaged in plantation activities has 400 hectares of virgin land which can be used for growing jointly or individually tea, coffee and cardamom. The yield per hectare of the different crops and their selling price per kg are as follows:

Yield (kgs)/Hectare

Selling Price (Rs.)

Tea

2000

40

Coffee

500

80

Cardamom

100

500

Cost data:

(a) Variable Cost by kg.

Tea (Rs)

Coffee (Rs.)

Cardamom (Rs.)

Labour Charges

I6

20

240

Packing costs

4

4

20

Other costs

8

2

40

Total cost

28

26

300

(b) Total fixed cost per annum is Rs. 62,00,000.

You are required to calculate (i) the priority of production and (ii) the most profitable product mix, if the policy of the company for maximum and minimum usage of cultivation will be:

Max. Area (Hectare)

Min. Area

Tea

320

240

Coffee

100

60

Cardamom

60

20

assuming that raw material is the key factor availability of which is 25 000 kgs and 608697

(Optimizing product mix—More than one limiting factor)

The following cost data are extracted from a company:

Product “x”

Product “y”

Sales (per unit)

Rs. 200

240

Consumption of material

4 kgs

6 kgs

Material cost

Rs. 20

Rs. 30

Direct wages cost

Rs. 30

Rs. 20

Direct expenses

Rs. 10

Rs. 15

Machine hours used

3

2

Overhead expenses:

Fixed

Rs. 10

Rs. 20

Variable

Rs. 30

Rs. 40

Direct wage per hour is Rs. 10

I:Comment on the profitability of each product if both use the same raw material when:

  1. Total sales potential in units is limited.
  2. Total sales potential in value is limited.
  3. Raw material is in short supply.
  4. Production capacity (in terms of machine hours) is the limiting factor.

II:Assuming that raw material is the key factor, availability of which is 25,000 kgs and the maximum sales potential of each product being 4,000 units, find out the product mix which will yield the maximum profit.

if another vendor from the outside would offer the component at rs 44 00 each 608698

A lap-top manufacturing company finds that it costs to the make one component, the same is available in the market at Rs. 50 each, with assurance of uninterrupted supply.

The breakdown of cost is as follows:

Materials

20.00 each

Labour

17.50 each

Variable overheads

7.50 each

45.00

Depreciation and other fixed cost

15.00 each

60.00 each

You are required to decide:

  1. Whether the company should make or buy the component.
  2. If another vendor from the outside would offer the component at Rs. 44.00 each?

the variable cost of manufacture between these levels is re 0 20 per unit and the fi 608700

A company has a capacity of producing 50,000 units of a certain product in a month. The sales department reports that the following schedule of sale prices is possible:

Volume of Production

Selling Price Per Unit

Re

60%

0.95

70%

0.90

80%

0.85

90%

0.75

100%

0.60

The variable cost of manufacture between these levels is Re 0.20 per unit and the fixed cost is Rs 15,000. At which volume of production will the profit be the maximum?

what minimum price will you recommend for acceptance to ensure an overall profit of 608702

A Gel pen (advanced technique) manufacturer makes an average profit of Rs. 2.80 per piece on a selling price of Rs. 15.10 by producing and selling 50,000 pieces or 50% of the potential capacity. His cost of sales is: (per unit)

Direct material

Rs. 3.80

Direct wages

Rs. 1.40

Works overhead

Rs. 6.40 (50% fixed)

Sales overhead

Rs. 0.90 (30% variable)

During the current year, the manufacturer anticipates that his fixed charges will increase by 10% and rates of direct material and direct labour will increase by 7% and 9%, respectively. He has no option of increasing the selling price. Under this situation, he obtains an offer of an order equal to 20% of his capacity. This customer is a special customer.

What minimum price will you recommend for acceptance to ensure an overall profit of Rs. 1,81,000?

should in your opinion as a cost accountant either or both of the premises be let ou 608703

X ltd—a public limited company—has a chain of marketing centres across the country to sell its own products. The directors of the company are confronted with the problem—whether to continue business at Kanpur and Nagpur or to close these units and letting out the premises at an annual rental of Rs. 6,000 for Kanpur and Rs. 8,000 for Nagpur, which have been offered by A Ltd and B Ltd who are engaged in the same type of business as that of X Ltd. There is no connection between A Ltd and B Ltd and the acceptance of offer of one company does not necessarily involve the acceptance of the other.

The condensed P&L A/c of the two marketing centres for the year ended 31 December 2009 is shown as follows:

Kanpur
Rs.

Nagpur
Rs.

Kanpur
Rs.

Nagpur
Rs.

Establishment charges

16,200

19,500

Administrative expenses

2,420

3,090

Gross Profit

26,500

32,700

Share of Head•office expenses

4,500

5,500

Net profit

3,380

4,610

26,500

32,700

26,500

32,700

The average stock at the cost of the two marketing centres is:

Kanpur: Rs. 30,000.

Nagpur: Rs. 50,000.

If business at either marketing unit is continued, the trading results are expected to remain the same in the year 2009. The company can invest its surplus funds to yield an interest at 5% per annum. It is unlikely that there will be any saving in the head-office-administration costs expecting a reduction in the audit fee and a saving in the travelling expenses of the head office staff at Rs. 200 per marketing unit per annum.

Should, in your opinion as a cost accountant, either or both of the premises be let out at the rents offered. Give reasons for your recommendations.

the budgeted capacity of the company is rs 20 00 000 but the key factor is sales dem 608704

The directors of Goodluck Ltd are considering the results of the profit and loss statement for the year that ended on 31 December 2009. The extract is as follows:

Sales

15,00,000

Direct materials

4,50,000

Direct wages

3,00,000

Variable overheads

1,20,000

Fixed overheads

4,40,000

13,10,000

Profit

1,90,000

16.9.7.1 Effect of Change in Selling Price

The budgeted capacity of the company is Rs. 20,00,000, but the key factor is sales demand. The sales manager is proposing that in order to utilize the existing capacity, the selling price of the only product manufactured by the company should be reduced by 5%.

You are required to prepare a forecast statement which should show the effect of the proposed reduction in the selling price and to include any changes in the costs expected during the year 2010.

The following additional information is provided:

  1. Sales forecast: Rs. 19,00,000.
  2. Direct material prices are expected to increase by 2%.
  3. Direct wages are expected to increase by 5% per unit.
  4. Variable overhead costs are expected to increase by 5% per unit.
  5. Fixed overheads will increase by Rs. 20,000.

you are required to advise the company on the minimum prices to be charged 608705

X Ltd is found to be working below the normal capacity due to recession. The directors have been approached by another company with an enquiry for a special purpose job. The costing department estimated the following in respect of that job:

Direct materials – Rs. 1,00,000.

Direct labour – 5000 hours @ Rs. 3 = 15,000.

Overhead costs: Normal recovery rates:

Variable = Re 1 per hour.

Fixed = Rs. 1.50 per hour.

You are required to advise the company on the minimum prices to be charged.

product lm can be produced by machine a or machine b machine a can produce 15 units 608707

Product LM can be produced by machine A or machine B. Machine A can produce 15 units of LM per hour and B takes 25 units per hour. The total machine hours available are 7,500 hours per annum. From the following comparative costs and selling price, you are required to determine the profitable method of manufacture:

Per Unit of Machine A Rs.

Product LM – Machine B Rs.

Direct materials

30

30

Direct labour

15

20

Overhead:

Variable

17

22

Fixed

8

8

Total costs

70

80

Selling price

75

75

from the following balances of saraswati bank ltd as on 31 december 2010 prepare the 608604

From the following balances of Saraswati Bank Ltd. as on 31 December 2010, prepare the balance sheet in the prescribed form:

(Rs. in ’000)

Paid-up Share Capital

(of 10 Each Fully Paid)

1,000

Bills Discounted

900

Reserve Fund

385

Cash Credits

1,000

Overdrafts

400

Unclaimed Dividends

5

Loans

2,300

Current Deposits

1900

Furniture

20

P & L A/c (Cr.)

110

Cash in Hand

5

Cash with Reserve Bank

650

Branch Adjustments (Dr.)

85

Investments

475

Loans (Cr.)

600

Recurring Deposits

500

Fixed Deposits

1,000

Cash Certificates

500

Contingency Reserve

85

Adjustments:

  1. Rebate on bills discounted: Rs.5,000.
  2. Provide Rs.40,000 for doubtful debts
  3. Banks acceptances on behalf of customers: Rws.3,25,000.

following are some of the balances as on 31 march 2011 of sindh bank ltd 608605

Following are some of the balances as on 31 March 2011 of Sindh Bank Ltd.:

(Rs. in ’000)

Interest on Advances

2,400

Commission, Exchange and

600

Brokerage

Cash Balance

600

Balance with Other Banks

1,200

Cash with RBI

300

Profits on Sale of Investments

60

Other Revenue Receipts

240

Share Capital

6,000

20% Investment in Govt.

900

Securities (Purchased at 60%

of Face Value)

Other Securities @ 25%

300

(Purchased at Par)

Borrowing from Other Banks

900

Printing and Stationery

105

Repairs

75

Statutory Reserves

2,700

P & L A/c (Cr.)

1,950

Bills Purchased and

750

Discounted

Cash Credit, Overdrafts &

4,275

Demand Drafts

Term Loans

3,825

Fixed Deposits

825

Savings Deposits

975

Current Deposits

375

Premises (Net)

4,125

Furniture

750

Interest (Includes Paid 135)

360

Salary

225

Bills Payable (Net)

75

Postage etc.

60

The following additional information is furnished:

  1. Advances have been classified as under with given details:

Cash Credit Overdrafts Demand Loans

Term Loans (Rs. in ’000)

Standard Assets

3,000

2,925

Sub Standard

?

?

Assets

Doubtful–Up to 1 Year

300

60

-1–3 Years

360

150

-More than 3 Years

150

240

Less Assets

90

?

  1. Standard and sub-standard assets in bills portfolio are in the ratio of 9:1.
  2. Term loans comprise loss assets, which are half of its sub-standard.
  3. No provision has been made so far against these assets.
  4. Doubtful assets are secured to the extent of 50% of the dues.
  5. Forty per cent of the total interest on investments has been accrued
  6. Bills for collection Rs.705 (in thousands)

Prepare final accounts of Sindh Bank Ltd.

following facts have been taken out from the records of akash bank ltd in respect of 608607

Following facts have been taken out from the records of Akash Bank Ltd. in respect of the year ending on 31 December 2010:

  1. On 1 January 2010 bills for collection were Rs.14,00,000. During 2010, bills received for collection amounted to Rs.1,29,00,000, bills collected were Rs.94,00,000 and bills discounted and returned were Rs.11,00,000. Prepare bills for collection (asset) A/c and bills for collection (liability) A/c.
  2. On 1 January 2010, acceptances, endorsements, etc., not satisfied, amounted to Rs.29,00,000. During the year under question, acceptances, endorsements, guarantee, etc. amounted to Rs.88,00,000. Bank honoured acceptances to the extent of Rs.50,00,000 and clients paid off Rs.20,00,000 against the guaranteed liability. Clients failed to pay 2,00,000, which the Bank had to pay. Prepare the acceptances, endorsements and other obligations A/c as it would appear in the general ledger.
  3. It is found from the books that a loan of Rs.12,00,000 was advanced on 30 June 2010 at an interest of 10% p.a. payable half-yearly; but the loan was outstanding as on 31 December 2010 without any payment recorded either towards principal or interest. The security for the loan was 20,000 fully paid shares of Rs.100 each (market value was Rs.98 as per the Stock Exchange Information as on 31 June 2010. But due to fluctuation, the price has fallen to Rs.60 per share in October 2010. On 31 December 2010, the price as per Stock Exchange rate was Rs.82 per share). State how would you classify the loan as secured/unsecured in the balance sheet of the company.
  4. The following balances are extracted from the trial balance as on 31 March 1997:

Interest & Discount

1,96,00,000

Rebate for Bills Discounted

40,000

Bills Discounted Purchased

8,00,000

It is ascertained that the proportionate discounts not yet earned for bills to mature in 1998 amount to Rs.28,000. Prepare ledger accounts.

prepare the p amp l a c of golden bank ltd for the year ended on 31 march 2010 and a 608608

The following are the figures extracted from the book of Golden Bank Ltd. as on 31 March 2010:

Interest and Discount Received

74,11,476

Interest Paid on Deposits

40,74,904

Issued & Subscribed Capital

20,00,000

Salaries & Allowances

4,00,000

Directors Fees & Allowances

60,000

Rent & Taxes Paid

1,80,000

Postage & Phone

1,20,572

Statutory Reserve Fund

16,00,000

Commission, Exchange &

3,80,000

Brokerage

Rent Received

1,30,000

Profit on Sale of Investments

4,00,000

Depreciation on Bank’s Properties

60,000

Stationery Expenses

80,000

Preliminary Expenses

50,000

Auditor’s Fees

10,000

The following further information is given:

  1. A customer to whom a sum of Rs.20 lakhs has been advanced has become insolvent and it is expected only 50% can be recovered from his estate.
  2. There were also other debts for which a provision of Rs.3,00,000 was found necessary by the auditors.
  3. Rebate on bills discounted on 31 March 2009 was Rs.24,000 and on 31 March 2010 was Rs.32,000.
  4. Provide Rs.13,00,000 for income tax.
  5. The Directors desire to declare 10% dividend.

Prepare the P & L A/c of Golden Bank Ltd. for the year ended on 31 March 2010 and also show how the P & L A/c will appear in the balance sheet of the P & L A/c. Opening balance was nil as on 31 March 2009.

the unit has to curtail its production operation to 4 days in a week instead of the 608618

From the following data, compute the fixed-overhead variances:

Budget output for the year: 30,000 units.

Budget fixed overheads for the year: Rs. 30,000.

Standard production per hour: 15 units.

Actual output for the month: 2,550 unit.

Actual overheads for the month: Rs. 3,000.

The year is budgeted to 50 working weeks on a 40-hour week basis. Two hours in every week are lost due to abnormal idle time. The month consists of four working weeks.

The unit has to curtail its production operation to 4 days in a week instead of the usual 5 days as a result of power cut.

you are required to compute material variances 608619

Razdan & Co. manufactures a new product. It had to revise its standard cost owing to temporary distortions caused to its standards by uncontrollable factors. During that month, it manufactured 1,000 kgs of the product. The following price details are available from its records for the month of March.

Materials

Standard Cost Rs.

Revised Standard Cost Rs.

Actual Cost Rs.

  1. X

700 kgs@ Rs. 10 = 7,000
300kg@Rs.20= 6,000

700 kgs @ Rs. 12 =6400 300 kg@ Rs.25 = 7,500

700 kgs@ Rs. 15 = 10,500
300 kg @Rs. 30 = 9,000

13,000

15.900

19,500

You are required to compute material variances.

you are required to calculate the following sales variances on the basis of profit 608620

The sales manager of a company that produces and sells three products A, B and C, provides you the following information for the month of August.

Budgeted sales

Product

Units Sold

Selling Price Per Unit
Rs.

Standard Margin
(Profit Per Unit Rs.)

A

1,000

15

8

B

1,000

10

5

C

1,000

8

2

Actual sales

A

800 units for Rs. 9,600.

B

1,200 units for Rs. 10,800.

C

1,500 units for Rs. 13,500.

You are required to calculate the following sales variances on the basis of profit:

  1. Sales-price variance
  2. Sales-volume variance
  3. Sales-mix variance
  4. Sales-quantity variance

abc amp co manufactures and sells two products m amp n the following data are availa 608621

ABC & Co. manufactures and sells two products M & N. The following data are available in respect of the products for the month of July. The company operates a budgetary control system.

Budgeted sales

Product

Quantity Units

Budgeted Sales
Price Rs.

Value Rs.

M

N

500

1,000

10
5

5,000
5,000

10,000

Actual sales

M

400

5

2,000

N

500

4

2,000

4,000

Budgeted cost per unit of each product:

M – Rs. 6

N – Rs. 3

You are required to calculate all the sales variances.

xyz amp co manufactures and sells three products it provides the following data for 608622

XYZ & Co. manufactures and sells three products. It provides the following data for the month of September

Budgeted sales

Product

Units Sold
(Units)

Selling Price Per
Unit (Rs.)

Standard Profit Per
Unit (Fs.)

A

1,500

15

8

8

1,500

10

5

C

1,500

8

2

Actual Sales

A

1,100 units for Rs. 14,300

B

1,900 units for Rs. 17,100

C

3,000 units for Rs. 27,000

You are required to calculate the following variances on the basis of turnover.

  1. Sales-price variance
  2. Sales-volume variance
  3. Sales-mix variance and
  4. Sales-quantity variance.

the output for the month was sold at rs 54 per kg you are required to prepare a comp 608623

In a chemical manufacturing company, production is carried on in batches. Details of standard input of materials, labour and overheads are as follows:

Standard input of materials per batch of 1,000 kg:

A:

60% of input at Rs. 15/kg

B:

20% of input at Rs. 20/kg

C:

20% of input at Rs. 25/kg

Labour:

1,200 hrs per batch @ Rs. 10 per hour.

Variable overhead:

Rs. 2 per kg.

Fixed overhead:

Rs. 50,000 per month.

Selling price:

Rs. 50 per kg.

Std. production per months:

10 batches (No process loss).

Actual details for November were as follows:

No. of batches processed:

8

Materials consumed:

X – 5,000 kgs – Rs. 76,000.

Y – 1,500 Kgs – Rs. 30,000

Z – 1,500 Kgs – Rs. 48,000

Labour engaged for 9,800 hrs and wages paid:

Rs. 95,000.

Variable overhead:

Rs. 15,000.

Fixed overhead:

Rs. 52,000.

The output for the month was sold at Rs. 54 per kg. You are required to prepare a comprehensive management report on the variance for the period.

the following information has been extracted from the records of a chemical company 608624

Model: Material-cost variance

The following information has been extracted from the records of a chemical company:

Standard price

: Raw material ‘A’ – Rs. 2 per kg.

Raw material ‘B’– Rs. 10 per kg.

Standard mix

: A – 7%; B – 25 % (By weight).

Standard yield

: 90 %.

In a period, the actual costs, usages and output were as follows:

Used :

2,200 kgs of ‘A’ costing Rs. 4,650.

800 kgs of ‘B’ costing Rs. 7,850.

Output :

2,850 kgs of products.

You are required to calculate material-cost variances.

a cost accountant of a company was given the following information regarding the ove 608626

Model: Overhead variances

A cost accountant of a company was given the following information regarding the overheads for February:

  1. Overheads cost variance = Rs. 1,400 adverse.
  2. Overheads volume variance = Rs. 1,400 adverse.
  3. Budgeted hours for February = 1,200 hours.
  4. Budgeted overheads for February = Rs. 6,000.
  5. Actual rate of recovery of overheads = Rs. 8 per hour.

You are required to assist him in computing the following for February:

  1. Overheads-expenditure variance.
  2. Actual overheads incurred.
  3. Actual hours for actual production.
  4. Overheads-capacity variance.
  5. Overheads-Efficiency variance.
  6. Standard hours for actual production.

the standard cost data of three products x y and z manufactured by a company are giv 608627

Model: Sales variances

The standard cost data of three products x, y and z manufactured by a company are given as follows, together with the budgeted sales and unit-selling prices for 2009–2010:

X

Y

z

Budgeted sales (units)

25,000

20,000

15,000

Selling price per unit (Rs.)

40

40

80

Cost per unit (Rs.)

28

48

64

In April 2009, the cost department of the company gathered the following details for 2009–2010:

x

r

z

Budgeted sales (units):

20,000

22,000

16,000

Average sales realization/unit:

42

56

81

Actual cost per unit:

30

50

63

You are required to determine:

  1. the budgeted and the actual profit for 2009 – 2010.
  2. the variance in profit analysed into:
    1. Cost variance
    2. Sales-price variance
    3. Sales-volume variance

variances that incurred during the months duly reconciling the standard profit of ac 608628

Model: All variances

A company producing a standard product is facing a declining sales and dwindling profits. It has, therefore, decided to introduce a standard-cost system to control the cost. To motivate the workers to improve productivity, the management has also decided to introduce an incentive scheme under which employees are paid 20% of the standard cost of materials saved and also 40% of the labour time saved valued at a standard labour rate.

The following are the details of the standard cost of the product:

Standard cost per unit

Direct material–10 kgs at Rs. 12

120

Direct labour–3 hrs at Rs. 10

30

Variable overheads – 3 hrs at Rs. 5

15

Fixed overheads– (based on budgeted output of 10, 000 units)

25

190

Selling price per unit = Rs. 240.

During one particular month, 9,600 units of the product were manufactured and sold incurring the following actual cost:

Direct material – 90,000 kg

12,10,000

Direct labour – 25,000 hrs

2,54,000

Variable overheads – 25,000 hrs

1,47,000

Fixed overheads

2,50,000

18,61,000

Net profit

4,19,000

Sales

22,80,000

Required:

  1. Variances that incurred during the months, duly reconciling the standard profit of actual production with actual profit.
  2. Bonus amount earned by the workers during the month under the incentive scheme.

controllable variances are transferred to a c while non controllable variances are t 608639

Fill in the blanks with apt word(s)

  1. A standard is a ______ estimate of quantities of input, namely, material, labour and other expenses.
  2. Standard costs are expressed on a ______ basis.
  3. The difference between the actual costs incurred and the standard costs is termed as ______ .
  4. The variance accounts at the end of the specified periods are ______ against the cost of the sales accounts.
  5. In a standard-costing system, the WIP inventory is ______ with standard costs of products produced.
  6. In a standard-costing system, ______ are not taken into account.
  7. A standard-costing system is suitable for industries where activities are of ______ in nature.
  8. Standards are set for a ______ period.
  9. A standard which can be attained under most favourable conditions is known as ______ .
  10. A standard established for use over a long term is known as______.
  11. The setting of a standard cost requires (i) price and (ii) ______.
  12. The volume of output or amount of work to be performed in an hour is called______.
  13. The activity ratio measures ______ of the firm.
  14. In all variance analysis, ______ variance is to be computed first.
  15. Total variance is subdivided into two component variances Price and (ii)______.
  16. Variance accounting is a technique uses in standard costing and______.
  17. Variances must be expressed in______.
  18. Variances may be adverse or______.
  19. Material-usage variance = Material______– variance + Material-yield variance.
  20. Direct material-cost variance = (______ × Actual output) – (Actual material cost of output).
  21. Material-price variance =______(Std price – Actual price).
  22. Standard output on actual input =______ × Actual total material input.
  23. The direct-labour Efficiency-variance direct labour his poduced= ______ (std Actual direct labour hours).
  24. Direct labour-rate variance = ______ (Std wage rate per hour – Actual wage rate per hour).
  25. Direct labour-cost variance = ______+ Labour-variance rate + Labour-rate—time variance.
  26. Variable-overhead variance = (Std variable-overhead rate x______) – Actual variable overhead.
  27. Fixed-overhead variance = (______ × Actual production) – Actual fixed overhead.
  28. The divergence between the original standard costs and the revised standard costs is known as
  29. Selling-price variance = ______ (Budgeted selling price – Actual selling price).
  30. Controllable variances are transferred to ______ A/c while non-controllable variances are to be adjusted against ______.

material price variance separately for x and y 608660

From the following information, calculate:

  1. Material-cost variance
  2. Material-usage variance and
  3. Material-price variance separately for X and Y

Material

Std. Qty (kg)

Price

Actual Qty
(kg)

Price

X

Y

10
15

4
5

12
18

3.75
4.50

22

30

compute i fixed overhead cost variance ii expenditure variance iii volume variance i 608672

The following information is available from the records of a factory:

Budget

Actual

Fixed overhead for June (Rs.)

10,000

12,000

Production in June (units)

2,000

2,000

Standard time per unit (hrs)

10

Actual hours worked in June

22,000

Compute: (i) Fixed overhead-cost variance; (ii) Expenditure variance; (iii) Volume variance; (iv) Capacity variance; and (v) Efficiency variance.

bad debts to be written off amounted to rs 80 000 provision for taxation may be made 608564

Model: Preparation of P & L A/c From the following information, prepare the profit and loss A/c of Merchant Bank Ltd. for the year ended on 31 March 2011 in the prescribed form:

Rs.

Interest on Loan

5,18,000

Interest on Fixed Deposits

5,50,000

Rebate on Bills Discounted Required

98,000

Commission

16,400

Establishment

1,08,000

Discount on Bills Discounted

3,90,000

Interest on Cash Credit

4,46,000

Interest on Current Account

84,000

Rent and Taxes

36,000

Interest on Overdraft

3,08,000

Director’s Fees

6,000

Auditor’s Fees

2,400

Interest on Savings Bank Deposits

1,36,000

Postage, Phone, Internet Expenses

2,800

Printing and Stationery

5,800

Sundry Charges

3,400

Bad debts to be written off amounted to Rs.80,000. Provision for taxation may be made @ 50%. Balance of profit from last year was Rs.2,40,000. The Directors have recommended a dividend of Rs. 40,000 for the shareholders.

prepare the profit and loss a c in accordance with law make necessary assumptions wh 608565

Model: Preparation of P & L A/c The following figures are extracted from the books of Lucky Bank Ltd. for the year ending on 31 March 2011:

Rs.

Interest and Discount Received

60,90,000

Interest Paid on Deposits

36,06,000

Issued and Subscribed Capital

15,00,000

Reserve under Section 17

10,50,000

Commission, Exchange and Brokerage

2,70,000

Rent Received

90,000

Profit on Sale of Investments

2,85,000

Director’s Fees and Allowances

36,000

Rent and Taxes Paid

1,62,000

Stationery and Printing

36,000

Postage and Phone

75,000

Other Expenses

36,000

Audit Fees

12,000

Depreciation on Bank Properties

37,500

Other information:

  1. A customer, to whom a sum of Rs.7,50,000 has been advanced, has become insolvent and it is expected that 40% can be recovered from his estate. Interest due at 15% on his debt has not been provided in the books.
  2. Provision for bad and doubtful debts on other debts necessary is Rs.1,50,000.
  3. Rebate on bills discounted as on 1 April 2010 is Rs.22,500
  4. Provide Rs.5,00,000 for income tax.
  5. The directors decide to declare 10% dividend.

Prepare the profit and loss A/c in accordance with law. Make necessary assumptions, wherever necessary.

model preparation of trial balance and balance sheetfrom the following particulars o 608568

Model: Preparation of trial balance and balance sheetFrom the following particulars of MN Bank Ltd., having its own premises, prepare the balance sheet in the prescribed form as on 31 December 2010.

(Rs. in ’000)

Authorized Capital

20,000

Subscribed Capital:

20,00,000 Shares of Rs.10 Each Rs.5 Paid

10,000

Investments

35,000

Bills Discounted (in India)

75,000

Profit & Loss (Cr.)

4,250

Endorsement on Bills for Collection

500

Liability of Customers for Acceptances

25,000

Money at Call and Short Notice

45,000

Cash in Hand

10,000

Cash with RBI

20,000

Reserve

15,000

Cash with State Bank

20,000

Letters of Credit Issued

2,500

Telegraphic Transfer Payable

4,000

Bonus Drafts Payable

6,000

Short Loans

200

Rebate on Bills Discounted

50

Acceptances for Customers

25,000

Loans and Advances

50,000

Cash/Credits

50,000

verdrafts

5,000

Bills Purchased (Payable Outside India)

5,000

Current and Deposit Accounts

2,80,000

Investment Fluctuation Fund

500

Bills for Collection

500

Note: Prepare a trial balance and determine the balancing figure which constitutes the value of premises.

model cash reserves and statutory reserves balance sheet from the following informat 608570

Model: Cash reserves and statutory reserves balance sheet From the following information, prepare a balance sheet with necessary schedules of the New India Bank Ltd. as on 31 March …. and ascertain cash reserves and statutory liquid reserves required:

(Rs.in Lakhs)

Share Capital: 6,00,000 Shares of 100 Each

600

Statutory Reserves

690

Net Profit Before Appropriation

450

Profit and Loss Account

1,230

Fixed Deposit Account

1,560

Saving Deposit Account

1,350

Current Accounts

90

1,560

Bills Payable

3

Cash Credit

2,439

Borrowing from Other Banks

330

Cash in Hand

480

Cash with RBI

120

Cash with Other Banks

468

Money at Call and Short Notice

630

Gold

165

Government Securities

330

Premises

468

Furniture

210

Term Loan

2373

7,773

7,773

Additional Information:

Bills for Collection

60,00,000

Acceptances and Endorsements

45,00,000

Claims Against the Bank not Acknowledged as Debits

1,80,000

Depreciation Charges:

Premises

3,00,000

Furniture

2,40,000

50% of the Term Loans Are Secured by Govt. Guarantees 10% of the Cash Credit Is Unsecured Note: Cash reserves required 3% of the total demand and time liabilities and stationary liquidity ratios require 30% of the total demand and time liabilities. Statutory reserves: 20% of the net profit.

model p amp l a c and balance sheet from the following figures taken from the books 608571

Model: P & L A/c and balance sheet. From the following figures taken from the books of Asian Bank Ltd., prepare profit and loss account and balance sheet as on 31 March 2011:

(Rs. in ’000)

5,00,000 Shares of Rs.10 Each, Rs.Paid up

2,500

Reserve Fund Investments

1,750

Fixed Deposits

4,750

Savings Bank Deposits

15,000

Current Deposits

40,000

Money at Call and Short Notice

2,250

Investments

12,500

Interest Accrued and Paid

1,000

Rent

100

Salaries (Including GM’s Salary 1,20,000)

345

Directors Fees

30

Provident Funds Contribution

25

General Expenses

50

Profit and Loss Account (1 April 2010)

1,000

Bank Drafts

1,550

Unclaimed Dividends

100

Premises (After Depreciation up to 31 March 2010 Rs.5,00,000)

6,000

Cash

750

Stock of Stationery

50

Cash with RBI

7,000

Traveller’s Cheques

2,500

Balance Writs Other Banks

8,000

Letters of Credit

1,500

Borrowed from Banks

4,000

Owing by Foreign Correspondents

500

Interest and Discounts

3,500

Commission

250

Bill Discounted

3,000

Loans

15,000

Cash Credits and Overdrafts

20,000

Bills for Collection

700

Acceptances on Behalf of Customers

1,000

Dividend for 2009–10

250

Branch Adjustments (Cr.)

50

Rebate on Bills Discounted for Unexpired Term is Rs.25,000

A provision for doubtful debts amounting to Rs.1,50,000 is required. Create provision for taxation to the extent of Rs.5,00,000. Charge 5% depreciation on premises on original cost. Travellers’ cheques paid amounted to Rs.1,00,000.

fill in the blanks with apt word s 608573

Fill in the blanks with apt word(s)

  1. In India, the business of banking is governed by the _____ Act, 1949.
  2. In addition to this 1949 Act, corporate entities carrying on the business of banking are governed by the _____ Act.
  3. The _____ controls and supervises the activities of banking companies in India.
  4. Section _____ of the Banking Regulation Act provides a detailed list of the form of business a banking company can do, in addition to banking business.
  5. The minimum paid-up capital and reserves to be complied with by a banking company, which is incorporated in India and if it has place of business in more than one state but not in Mumbai or Kolkata is _____.
  6. U/S 17 of the Banking Regulation Act, a banking company incorporated in India is required to create _____ of its net profit and transfer to statutory reserve.
  7. According to Section 13 of the Banking Regulation Act, a bank cannot pay more than _____ of the paid-up value of shares by way of commission, brokerage, etc.
  8. A sum of at least _____ of its time and demand liabilities has to be maintained as cash reserve as per Section 18.
  9. At present, the norm for statutory liquidity ratio (SLR) as per Reserve Bank of India is _____ .
  10. The balance sheet of a banking company should be prepared in Form _____ of Schedule III of the Act.
  11. The P & L A/c of a banking company has to be prepared in Form _____ of Schedule III of the Act.
  12. _____ are the basis for recording transactions in banking.
  13. At present, as per the regulations of RBI, cash reserve is _____.
  14. All appropriations of profit are to be shown in _____ part of P & L A/c.
  15. “Interest earned” is shown in Schedule _____ .
  16. Schedule 14 is related to _____ .
  17. “Interest expended” is shown in Schedule ____ .
  18. Depreciation on bank’s property is to be included under the head “ _____ ”.
  19. Income from “performing assets’ is recorded on “ _____ ”.
  20. At present, banks are required to create a provision of _____ on standard assets on global loan portfolio basis.

it is ascertained that proportionate discount not earned on the balance of bills dis 608584

The following accounts are extracted from trial balance of Konark Bank Ltd. on 31 March 2011:

Interest and

52,26,000

Discounted

Rebate on Bills

37,500

Discounted

Bills Discounted

15,36,000

and Purchased

It is ascertained that proportionate discount not earned on the balance of bills discounted, which will mature in 2011–12 amounts to Rs.68,100. Pass the necessary adjustment entries.

from the following particulars prepare the p amp l a c of noida bank ltd for the yea 608591

From the following particulars, prepare the P & L A/c of Noida Bank Ltd. for the year ending on 31 March 2011.

( in ’000)

Interest on Deposits 16,000

16,000

Commission (Cr.)

500

Interest on Loans

12,450

Sundry Charges (Cr.)

500

Rent and Taxes

1,000

Establishment

2,500

Discount on Bills Discounted

7,450

Interest on Overdrafts

8,000

Interest on Cash Credits

11,600

Auditors’ Fees

175

Directors Fees

80

Bad Debts to be Written off

1,500

prepare the profit and loss a c for the year ended on 31 december 2010 of rajasekara 608592

Prepare the profit and loss A/c for the year ended on 31 December 2010 of Rajasekaran Bank Ltd., from the following particulars:

(Rs. in ’000)

Interest on Loans

3,000

Interest on Savings Accounts

1,800

Interest on Credit Cards

1,920

Interest on Fixed Deposits

2,280

Interest on Overdraft

600

Amount Charged Against Current Accounts

240

Rebate on Bills Discounted

228

Salaries and Allowances

1,440

Discount

480

Rent, Tax, Insurance, etc.

60

Dearness Allowance

420

Commission, Brokerage and Exchange

180

Managing Director’s Salary

180

Contribution to Provident Fund

120

from the following ledger balances of overseas bank ltd prepare p amp l a c 608594

From the following ledger balances of Overseas Bank Ltd. prepare P & L A/c:

(Rs. in ’000)

Interest Paid on Deposits

16,052

Commissions Exchange & Brokerage

4,424

Interest Received

53,226

Discount on Bills Discounted

24,376

Salary & Provident Fund

4,000

Profit on Sale of Fixed Assets

3,000

Printing & Stationery

1,000

Postage & Telephones

2,000

Note: Provide for taxation: Rs.20,00,000; rebate on bills discounted: Rs.14,38,000.

form the following information prepare p amp l a c of poone bank ltd for the year en 608595

Form the following information, prepare P & L A/c of Poone Bank Ltd. for the year ended on 31 December 2010.

(Rs. in ’000)

Interest on Loans

5,180

Interest on Fixed Deposits

5,500

Relate on Bills Discounted

980

Commission

164

Establishment

1,080

Discount on Bills Discounted (Net)

2,920

Interest on Cash Credits

4,460

Interest on Current Accounts

840

Rent and Taxes

360

Interest on Overdrafts

3,080

Director’s Fees

60

Auditor’s Fees

24

Interest on Saving Bank Deposits

1,360

Postage & Phone

28

Printing & Stationery

58

Sundry Charges

34

Bad debts to be written off amounted to Rs.8,00,000. Provision for taxation may be made @ 55%.

from the following information prepare p amp l a c of mumbai bank ltd as on 31 march 608596

From the following information prepare P & L A/c of Mumbai Bank Ltd. as on 31 March 2011:

(Rs.in ’000)

Interest and Discount

6,090

Income from Investments

230

Interest on Balance with RBI

360

Commission, Exchange and Brokerage

1,640

Profit on Sale of Investments

220

Interest on Deposits

2,450

Interest Paid to RBI

322

Payment to and Provision for Employees

2,088

Rent, Taxes and Lighting

420

Printing and Stationery

360

Advertisement and Publicity

190

Depreciation

184

Director’s Fees

440

Auditor’s Fees

240

Law Charges

460

Postage & Telephone

140

Insurance

112

Repairs & Maintenance

96

Other information:

  1. Interest and discount mentioned above is after adjustment for the following:

(Rs. in ’000)

Tax Provision for the Year

400

Provision During the Year for Doubtful Debts

204

Loss on Sale of Investments

24

Rebate on Bills Discounted

116

25% of the profit is to be transferred to statutory reserves and 5% of the profit is to be transferred to revenue reserve. Profit brought forward from last year is Rs.32,000.

from the following balances of swasthik bank ltd as on 31 march 20 hellip prepare it 608598

From the following balances of Swasthik Bank Ltd., as on 31 March 20…., prepare its balance sheet in the prescribed form:

(Rs. in ’000)

Paid-up Share Capital

4,000

(Shares of Rs.50 each) Fully Paid

Bills Discounted

3,600

Reserve Fund

1,540

Cash Credits

4,000

Overdrafts

1,600

Unclaimed Dividends

20

Loans

9,200

Current Deposits

7,600

Furniture

80

P & L A/c (Cr.)

440

Stamps and Stationery

20

Cash in Hand

1,000

Cash with RBI

2600

Branch Adjustment (Dr.)

340

Investments

1,900

Loans (Cr.)

2,400

Recurring Deposits

2,000

Fixed Deposits

4,000

Cash Certificates

2,000

Contingency Reserve

340

Adjustments:

  1. Rebate on bills discounted: Rs.20,000
  2. Provide Rs.1,60,000 for doubtful debts

Bank acceptance on behalf of customers is Rs.13 lakhs

the following ledger balances of bank of triplicane ltd as on 31 december 2010 are f 608599

The following ledger balances of Bank of Triplicane Ltd. as on 31 December 2010 are furnished to you. Prepare P & L A/c and balance sheet as per requirement of law.

(Rs. in ’000)

Reserve Fund

3,600

Bad Debts Written off

384

General Expenses

546

Current Accounts

60,735

Interest Paid

480

Deposit Accounts

20,760

P & L A/c b/fd

687

Bills Receivable for Customers

4,500

Discounts

732

Endorsements and Guarantees

1,725

Commission

135

Cash

675

Interest Earned

1,650

Balance with RBI

6,090

Endorsements and Guarantees

(Constituent Liabilities)

1,725

Balance with Foreign Correspondents

3,618

Bills for Collection

4,500

Borrowings from Banks

19,446

Cash Credit and Overdrafts

46,371

Bills Discounted

18,684

Premises

6,651

Share Capital

6,000

The following information is furnished:

  1. Rebate on bills discounted to provide Rs.1,92,000

The bank has paid an interim dividend of Rs.6,00,000 during the year.

from the following balances of hope bank ltd as on 31 march 2011 prepare a profit an 608600

From the following balances of Hope Bank Ltd. as on 31 March 2011, prepare a profit and loss A/c and a balance sheet for the relevant year:

Balances as on 31 March 2011

(Rs. in ’000)

Share Capital (Equity Shares

9,900

of Rs.100 Each Fully Paid

Reserve Fund

1,920

Current Accounts

30,000

Savings Bank Accounts

15,000

Fixed Deposit Accounts

7,500

P & L A/c

2,400

Money at Call and Short Notice

1,800

Salaries (Including Rs.3,60,000 to GM)

9,600

Directors’ Fees

150

Investment (at Cost)

22,500

General Expenses

210

Audit Fees

120

Building (Net of Depreciation

6,720

up to 31 March 2010) Rs.16,80,000

Borrowing from Banks

6,300

Cash with Other Banks

5,400

Cash with RBI

9,000

Cash in Hand

750

Interest and Discount Received

30,240

Bills Payable

12,600

Bills Discounted & Purchased

9,000

Term Loans

13,500

Cash Credits

35,010

Sundry Creditors

1,500

Bills for Collection

2,940

Acceptances on Behalf of Customers

7,500

Interest Accrued and Paid

3,600

Depreciation has to be provided at 5% on the original cost of the building. A provision of Rs.7,50,000 for bad debts and Rsa.60,00,000 for taxation needs to be made.

the following particulars are extracted from the trial balance books of m s sound ba 608601

(a) The following particulars are extracted from the (trial balance) books of M/s Sound Bank Ltd. for the year ending on 31 March 2011:

Details

1. Interest and Discount

98,31,200

2. Rebate on Bills Discounted (1 April 2010)

32,520

3. Bills Discounted and Purchased

33,72,700

It is ascertained that proportionate discount not yet earned on the bills discounted, which will mature during 2011–12 amounted to 46,380. Pass the necessary journal entries adjusting the above and show in the ledger of the bank:

  1. Rebate on bills discounted account
  2. Interest and discount account.

(b) Calculate the provision required to be made in respect of advance:

Details

Amount

Term Loan

1,00,000

ECGC Cover

30%

Security

24,00,000

Period for which advance had remained doubtful is 2 years.

from the following information prepare p amp l a c of new bank of india ltd as on 31 608602

From the following information, prepare P & L A/c of New Bank of India Ltd. as on 31 March 2011:

(Rs. in ’000)

Interest and Discount

1,82,70

Income from Investments

6,90

Interest on Balances with RBI

10,80

Commission, Exchange and Brokerage

49,20

Profit on Sale of Investments

6,60

Interest on Deposits

73,50

Interest to RBI

9,66

Payment to and Provision for Employees

62,64

Rent, Taxes and Lighting

12,60

Printing and Stationery

10,80

Advertisement and Publicity

5,70

Depreciation

5,62

Directors’ Fees

13,20

Auditor’s Fees

7,20

Law Charges

13,80

Postage & Telephone

4,20

Insurance

3,36

Repairs & Maintenance

2,88

Other information:

  1. Interest and discount mentioned above is after adjustment for the following:

(Rs. in ’000)

Tax Provision for the Year

13,20

Provision During the Year

6,12

for Doubtful Debts

Loss on Sale of Investment

72

Rebate on Bills Discounted

3,48

20% of profit is transferred to statutory reserve.

5% of profit is transferred to revenue reserve.

Profit brought forward from last year is Rs.96,000.

from the following trial balance and the additional information prepare a balance sh 608603

From the following trial balance and the additional information, prepare a balance sheet of Kuber Bank Ltd. as on 31 March 2011:

Debit Balance:

Rs.(in Lakhs)

Cash Credits

1,218.15

Cash in Hand

240.23

Cash with RBI

67.82

Cash with Other Banks

132.81

Money at Call & Short Notice

315.18

Gold

82.84

Government Securities

365.25

Current Accounts

42.00

Premises

133.55

Furniture

95.18

Term Loans

1189.32

Credit Balances:

Share Capital:

(29,70,000 Equity Shares of Rs.10

Each Fully Paid up)

297.00

Statutory Reserve

346.50

Net Profit for the Year

(Before Appropriations)

225.00

P & L A/c (Opening Balance)

618.00

Fixed Deposit Accounts

775.50

Saving Deposit Accounts

675.00

Current Accounts

780.18

Bills Payable

0.15

Borrowings from Other Banks

165.00

Additional Information:

  1. Bills for collection: Rs.18,10,000
  2. Acceptances & endorsements: Rs.14,12,000
  3. Claims against the bank not acknowledged as debts: Rs.55,000.
  4. Depreciation charged on premises: Rs.1,10,000 and furniture: Rs.78,000.

included in debtors of rs ltd is a sum of rs 40 000 due from vr ltd for goods sold a 608539

The following are the balance sheets of VR Ltd. and its subsidiary RS Ltd. as at 31 March 2011:

Liabilities

V R Ltd

R S Ltd

Assets

V R Ltd

R S Ltd

Equity Share of 310 Each Fully

24,00,000

8,00,000

Machinery

15,60,000

5,40,000

Paid

General Reserve

13,60,000

3,20,000

Furniture

3,20,000

1,60,000

Profit & Loss A/c

4,00,000

2,40,000

80% Shares in RS Ltd. at Cost

13,60,000

Creditors

2,80,000

1,40,000

Stock

7,20,000

4,80,000

Debtors

2,00,000

1,20,000

Cash at Bank

2,80,000

2,00,000

44,40,000

15,00,000

44,40,000

15,00,000

The following additional information is provided to you:

  1. The P&L A/c of RS Ltd. stood at Rs.1,20,000 on 1 April 2010 whereas general reserve has remained unchanged since that date
  2. VR Ltd. acquired 80% of shares in RS Ltd. on 1 October 2010 for Rs.13,60,000. As mentioned above.
  3. Included in debtors of RS Ltd. is a sum of Rs.40,000 due from VR Ltd. for goods sold at a profit of 25% on cost price. Till 31 March 2011, only one half of the goods had been sold while the remaining goods were laying tin warehouse of VR Ltd. as on that date. Prepare the consolidated balance sheet as at 31 March 2011.

made a profit of rs 6 000 half of the goods were sold out of this an item of plant i 608540

The following are the balance sheets of B Ltd. and V Ltd. as on 31 December 2010:

Liabilities

B Ltd.
Rs.

V Ltd.
Rs.

Assets

B Ltd.
Rs.

V Ltd.
Rs.

Equity Shares of: 100 Each

15,00,000

6,00,000

Fixed Assets

10,50,000

4,50,000

Fully Paid

General Reserve

3,00,000

Stock

2,70,000

1,20,000

Profit & Loss A/c

2,40,000

Debtors

1,80,000

90,000

14% Debentures

3,00,000

14% Debentures in V Ltd. at pail

1,80,000

Creditors

2,25,000

1,35,000

Equity Shares in V Ltd.@

3,60,000

80 per Share)

Bank

2,25,000

75,000

Profit & Loss A/c

3,00,000

22,65,000

10,35,000

22,65,000

10,35,000

B Ltd. acquired these 4,500 shares on 1 May 2010. The profit & loss A/c of V Ltd. showed a debit balance of Rs.4,50,000 on 1 January 2010. During March 2010, goods costing Rs.18,000 were destroyed against which the insurance company paid only Rs.6,000 to V Ltd. Creditors of V Ltd. include Rs.60,000 for goods supplied by B Ltd. on which V Ltd. made a profit of Rs.6,000. Half of the goods were sold out of this. An item of plant (included in fixed assets) V Ltd. had book value of Rs.45,000 was to be revalued at Rs.60,000 on 1 January 2010 (ignore depreciation). Prepare the consolidated balance sheet.

s ltd also paid dividend 25 on its capital of rs 16 00 000 pre acquisition profits o 608541

Balance sheets of two companies as on 31 March 2011 are given as follows:

Liabilities

H Ltd.
Rs.

S Ltd.
Rs.

Assets

H Ltd.
Rs.

S Ltd.
Rs.

Share Capital:

4,000

2,000

Fixed Assets

1,920

1,000

Reserves

400

680

Stocks

1,680

1,600

Profit & Loss A/c

640

520

Debtors

1,200

1,400

Current Liabilities

1,760

800

Investments in Shares of 5

2,000

6,800

4,000

6,800

4,000

Other information:

  1. H Ltd. acquired 60% shares of S Ltd. on 1 July 2010
  2. Reserves and profit and loss A/c of S Ltd. on 1 April 2010 had balances of Rs.10,00,000 and Rs.4,80,000, respectively.
    S Ltd. had issued bonus shares out of its reserves in the ratio of 1:4 on 1 October 2010.
  3. No entry has been made in the books of H Ltd. for this.
  4. S Ltd. also paid dividend @ 25% on its capital of Rs.16,00,000 pre-acquisition profits on 1 October 2010 which were recorded by H Ltd. Prepare consolidated balance sheet of H Ltd. and S Ltd.

on 31 march 2011 h ltd remitted cash of rs 15 600 for loan received from s ltd inter 608543

The following are the balance sheets of H Ltd. and S Ltd. as on 31 March 2011:

.Liabilities

H Ltd.
Rs.

S Ltd.
Rs.

Assets

H Ltd
Rs.

S Ltd.
Rs.

;hare Capital2250 Each

27,00,000

9,00,000

Land & Buildings

18,54,000

5,40,000

:Lilly Paid

Reserve

17,10,000

36,000

Machinery

5,40,000

4,86,000

Profit & Loss A/c

14,40,000

6,48,000

Debtors

10,80,000

2,40,000

.Loan from 5 Ltd.

34,200

Stock

6,12,000

3,60,000

Creditors

2,37,600

2,89,000

Investment in Shares of 5

14,40,000

Bank

5,95,800

1,99,800

Loan to H Ltd.

48,000

61,21,800

18,73,800

61,21,800

18,73,800

Additional information:

  1. H Ltd. acquired 80% of Shares of S Ltd. on 1 April 2010, when the balances of Reserve and P&L A/c were Rs.36,000 and Rs.5,04,000, respectively.
  2. Land and Buildings of S Ltd. whose book value on 1 April 2010 was Rs.5,76,000 and Rs.5,04,000, respectively.
  3. Machines of S Ltd. whose book value was Rs.5,40,000 on 1 April 2010 was revalued as Rs.7,20,000 but no entry was made in this regard.
  4. S Ltd. declared an interim dividend of 16% during the year ending 31 March 2011 and a final dividend of 6% an account of the year ended 31 March 2010. H Ltd. credited the entire amount of dividends received from S Ltd. to its profits & loss A/c.
  5. Stock of H Ltd. includes goods worth Rs.54,000 supplied by S Ltd.
  6. Sundry creditors of H Ltd. include Rs.1,08,000 for purchases from S Ltd. on which H Ltd. made a profit of Rs.27,000.

On 31 March 2011, H Ltd. remitted cash of Rs.15,600 for loan received from S Ltd. Interest accrued Rs.1,800 for loan to H Ltd. has not been provided by S Ltd. Prepare consolidated balance sheet of H Ltd. and its subsidiary S Ltd. as on 31 March 2011.

h ltd acquired 96 000 equity shares of rs 10 each in s ltd on 1 october 2010 for rs 608544

H Ltd. acquired 96,000 equity shares of Rs.10 each in S Ltd. on 1 October 2010 for Rs.19,36,800. The balance sheets of two companies as on 31 March 2011 were as follows:

Liabilities:

X Ltd.Rs.

Y Ltd.Rs.

Shares Capital of 100

30,00,000

12,00,000

Each

Reserves (1 April 2010)

14,40,000

6,00,000

Profit & Loss Account

3,43,200

4,92,000

Bank Overdraft

6,00,000

Bills Payable

78,000

Sundry Creditors

4,18,800

1,20,000

58,02,000

24,90,000

Assets:

H Ltd.Rs.

S Ltd.Rs.

Land & Building

10,80,000

11,40,000

Plant & Machinery

14,40,000

8,10,000

Investments

21,60,000

Stock

6,84,000

2,52,000

Debtors

2,64,000

2,40,000

Bills Receivable

88,800

Cash

85,200

48,000

58,02,000

24,90,000

  1. The P&L A/c of S Ltd. showed a balance of Rs.1,80,000 on 1 April 2010 out of which a dividend of 10% was paid on 1 November 2010. The dividend was correctly recorded by H Ltd.

The plant & machinery of S Ltd. which stood at Rs.9,00,000 on 1 April 2011 was considered worth Rs.10,80,000 on the date of acquisition by H Ltd. Prepare consolidated balance sheet together with work sheet.

h ltd acquired 1 28 000 equity shares of rs 10 each in s ltd on 1 october 2010 for 2 608545

H Ltd. acquired 1,28,000 equity shares of Rs.10 each in S Ltd. on 1 October 2010 for 24,00,000. The balance sheets of the two companies as at 31 March 2011 were as follows:

Liabilities:

H Ltd.Rs.

S Ltd.Rs.

Equity Shares of 100

40,00,000

16,00,000

Each Fully Paid up

General Reserve

19,20,000

8,00,000

(1 April 2010)

Profit & Loss A/c

4,80,000

7,20,000

Unclaimed Dividend

8,000

Bills Payable

1,20,000

Sundry Creditors

16,00,000

3,52,000

80,00,000

36,00,000

Assets:

H Ltd.Rs.

S Ltd.Rs.

Land and Building

16,00,000

17,60,000

Plant & Machinery

24,00,000

12,00,000

Investments

32,00,000

Stock

2,00,000

1,20,000

Debtors

1,60,000

2,00,000

Bills Receivable

40,00080,000

80,000

Bank Balance

4,00,000

1,60,000

Preliminary Expenses

80,000

80,00,000

36,00,000

NOTE: Contingent liability for bills discounted Rs.80,000.

Additional information:

  1. On 1 April 2010, the P&L A/c of S Ltd. showed a credit balance of Rs.2,80,000 out of which a dividend of 10% was paid on 1 November 2010. The dividend was credited by H Ltd. to its P&L A/c. Ignore corporate dividend tax.
  2. (Creditors of S Ltd. include an amount of Rsd.1,20,000 for purchases from H Ltd. The goods are still unsold on 31 March 2011. H Ltd. sells goods at cost plus 20%.
  3. Bills payable of S Ltd. are all issued in favour of H Ltd. Of these bills, H Ltd. got discounted bills worth Rs.80,000.

Prepare consolidated balance sheet.

mili ltd took over the control of noorie ltd on 1 july 2010 by acquiring 30 000 shar 608546

Mili Ltd. took over the control of Noorie Ltd. on 1 July 2010 by acquiring 30,000 shares at a price of Rs.4,80,000.

Balance Sheet as at 31 March 2011

Liabilities

Mili Ltd.
Rs.

Noori Ltd.
Rs.

Assets

Mili Ltd.
Rs.

Noori Ltd.
Rs.

Share of 310 Each

10,00,000

4,00,000

Goodwill

80,000

60,000

General Reserve

2,00,000

1,20,000

Buildings

4,00,000

2,60,000

P&L A/c

2,80,000

1,80,000

Plant

3,20,000

1,80,000

Creditors

1,60,000

1,00,000

Stock

2,00,000

1,80,000

Bills Payable

80,000

Debtors

40,000

1,50,000

Investments: 30,000 Shares in Noorie Ltd.

4,80,000

Bank

1,20,000

50,000

16,40,000

8,80,000

16,40,000

8,80,000

The P&L A/c and general reserve of Noorie Ltd. showed a balance of Rs.1,00,000 & Rs.1,20,000, respectively, on 1 April 2010. A dividend was paid at the rate of 15% by Noorie Ltd. in the month of September 2010 for the year 2009–10. This dividend was credited to P&L A/c by Mili Ltd. The bills payable of Noorie Ltd. were all issued in favour of Mili Ltd. The receiving company got these bills discounted with the bank. Creditors of Noorie Ltd. included Rs.40,000 due to Mili Ltd. for goods supplied by the latter company. Stock of Noorie Ltd. included Rs.16,000 worth of stock purchased from Mili Ltd. at a profit of Rs.% on cost. The plant of Noorie Ltd. with book value of Rs.2,00,000 on 1 April 2010 was revalued at Rs.3,00,000 at the time of taking the control of Noorie Ltd. The new value has not been incorporated in the books. Prepare consolidated balance sheet as at 31 March 2011. Show clearly all the calculations and workings.

on 31 march 2011 the balance sheets of h ltd and s ltd stood as follows 608547

On 31 March 2011, the balance sheets of H Ltd. and S Ltd. stood as follows:

Liabilities

H Ltd.
Rs.

S Ltd.
Rs.

Assets

H Ltd.
Rs.

S Ltd.
Rs.

Authorized Capital

Plant & Machinery

7,623

7,350

Equity Share Capital: Issued

15,000

9,000

Furniture & Fittings

1,845

894

& SubscribXed:

Equity Shares of 310 Each Fully Paid

12,000

7,200

Investment in Equity shares of 5 Ltd

4,500

General Reserve

2,784

2,070

Stock

2,949

2,658

Profit & Loss A/c

3,915

2,430

Debtors

2,100

2,049

Bills Payable

372

240

Bills Receivable

360

285

Sundry Creditors

1,461

1,281

Cash & Bank Balances

1,230

306

Provision for Taxation

660

540

Sundry Advances

780

570

Other Provisions

195

51

21,387

13,812

21,387

13,812

Following additional information is available:

  1. H Ltd. purchased 270 thousands equity shares in S Ltd. on 1 April 2010 at which date the following balances stood in the books of S Ltd.:
    General reserve: Rs.4,500 thousands; P&L A/ c: Rs.1,989 thousands
  2. On 14 July 2010, S Ltd. declared a dividend of 20% out of pre-acquisition profits and paid corporate dividend tax (including surcharge) as 11%. H Ltd. credited the dividend received to P&L A/c.
  3. On 1 November 2010, S Ltd. issued three fully paid equity shares of Rs.10 each forevery five shares held as bonus shares out of pre-acquisition general reserve.
  4. On 31 March 2011, the stock of S Ltd. included goods purchased for Rs.150 thousands from H Ltd., which had made a profit of 25% on cost. Prepare a consolidated balance sheet as on 31 March 2011. [C.A. (Final). 2002 Modified]

on 31 march 2010 p ltd acquired 4 20 000 shares of q ltd for rs 48 00 000 the balanc 608548

On 31 March 2010, P Ltd acquired 4,20,000 shares of Q Ltd for Rs.48,00,000. The balance sheet of Q Ltd on that date was as follows:

Liabilities

 

Assets

 

6,00,000 Equity Shares of 310 Each Fully

60,00,000

Fixed Assets

42,00,000

Paid

 

 

 

Pre-incorporation Profits

1,20,000

Current Assets

25,80,000

Profit & Loss A/c

2,40,000

 

 

Creditors

4,20,000

 

 

 

67,80,000

 

67,80,000

On 31 March 2011, the balance sheets of two companies were as follows:

Liabilities

P Ltd

Q Ltd

Assets

P Ltd

Q Ltd

 

Rs.

Rs.

 

Rs.

Rs.

Equity Shares of ;10 Each

1,80,000

60,00,000

Fixed Assets

3,16,80,000

92,40,000

Fully    Paid     (BeforeBonus

 

 

 

 

 

Issue)

 

 

 

 

 

Securities Premium

36,00,000

4,20,000 Equity Shares in Q

48,00,000

 

 

 

Ltd at Cost

 

 

Pre-incorporation Profits

1,20,000

Current Assets

1,76,40,000

70,20,000

General Reserve

2,40,00,000

76,20,000

 

 

 

Profit & Loss A/c

63,00,000

16,80,000

 

 

 

Creditors

22,20,000

8,40,000

 

 

 

 

5,41,20,000

1,62,60,000

 

5,41,20,000

1,62,60,000

Directors of Q Ltd made bonus issue on 31 March 2011 in the ratio of one equity share of Rs.10 each fully paid for every two equity shares held on that date. Calculate as on 31 March 2011:

  1. Cost of control/capital reserve
  2. Minority interest

Prepare a consolidated balance sheet after the bonus issue. 

prepare consolidated balance sheet as at 31 march 2011 608549

Following are the balance sheets of H Ltd and S Ltd as

Liabilities

H Ltd
Rs.

S Ltd
Rs.

Assets

H Ltd
Rs.

S Ltd
Rs.

Equity Shares Capital of f. 10

18,00,000

3,00,000

Land & Building

6,00,000

3,00,000

Each Fully Paid

General Reserve

1,50,000

90,000

Machineries

8,40,000

1,50,000

Profit & Loss A/c

2,40,000

1,20,000

21,000 Shares of 5 Ltd

3,00,000

Sundry Creditors

3,00,000

1,20,000

Stock

2,10,000

1,20,000

Bills Payable

30,000

45,000

Debtors

4,50,000

60,000

Bills Receivable

30,000

Cash at Bank

90,000

45,000

25,20,000

6,75,000

25,20,000

6,75,000

Additional information:

  1. All the bills receivable of H Ltd including those discounted were accepted by S Ltd
  2. When 18,000 shares were acquired by H Ltd in S Ltd, it had Rs.60,000 general reserve and Rs.15,000 credit balance in P&L A/c
  3. At the time of acquisition of further 3,000 shares by H Ltd, S Ltd had Rs.75,000 general reserve and Rs.84,000 credit balance in P&L A/c from which 20% dividend was paid by S Ltd and dividend received by H Ltd on these shares were credited to P&L A/c
  4. Stock of S Ltd includes Rs.60,000 purchased from H Ltd which has made 25% profit on cost
  5. Both companies have proposed dividend—H Ltd 10%; S Ltd 15% but no effect has been given in the above balance sheets

Prepare consolidated balance sheet as at 31 March 2011.

you are required to prepare a consolidated balance sheet of h ltd and its subsidiary 608550

H Ltd acquired 80% of the equity shares and 50% of the preference shares of S Ltd on 1 April 2010 at cost of Rs.14,40,000 and Rs.60,000, respectively. The balance sheets of the companies as at 31 March 2011 were as follows:

Balance Sheets

Particulars

H Ltd.Rs.

S Ltd.Rs.

Land & Building at Cost

6,00,000

8,00,000

Equipment at Cost

9,15,000

3,10,000

Investment in S Ltd

15,00,000

Stock

4,00,000

3,50,000

Debtors

8,00,000

4,50,000

Bank

50,000

60,000

Current Account

95,000

Equity Shares (Rs. 10 Each)

20,00,000

7,50,000

10% Cumulative Preference Shares

1,00,000

Reserves (1 April 2010)

11,00,000

4,50,000

Retained Profit for 2010–11

1,00,000

90,000

Sundry Creditors

8,00,000

3,50,000

Proposed Dividend

1,00,000

70,000

Provision for Depreciation:

Land & Building

60,000

30,000

Equipment

2,00,000

60,000

Current Account

70,000

43,60,000

19,70,000

Other information:

  1. A remittance of Rs.10,000 from H Ltd to S Ltd in March 2011 was not received by S Ltd until April 2011.
  2. Goods with an invoice value of Rs.15,000 were dispatched by H Ltd. in March 2011 but were not received by S Ltd until April 2011. The profit element included in this transaction is Rs.2,500.
  3. Included in the stock of S Ltd at 31 March 2011 were goods purchased from H Ltd for Rs.50,000. The profit element included in this amount was Rs.4,000.
  4. Proposed dividend of S Ltd included a full year’s preference dividend. No interim dividends were paid in the year by either company.

You are required to prepare a consolidated balance sheet of H Ltd and its subsidiary S Ltd as at 31 March 2011.

consolidated to prepare a consolidated profit amp loss a c for the year ended 31 dec 608552

Consolidated to prepare a consolidated profit & loss A/c for the year ended 31 December 2010, suitable for incorporation in the published accounts of A Ltd which will not include a separate P&L A/c for the holding company.

Particulars

A Ltd.Rs.

B Ltd.Rs.

P&L A/c Balance as 1

7,20,000

3,00,000

January 2010

Trading Profit

14,20,000

8,00,000

Dividends (Gross) from B Ltd (Preference)

1,08,000

Dividends (Gross) from B Ltd (Ordinary)

1,50,000

23,98,000

11,00,000

Depreciation

2,40,000

80,000

Debentures Interest

2,00,000

Taxation

4,40,000

3,00,000

Director’s Emoluments

1,40,000

60,000

Dividends Paid:

60,000

6% Preference:

60,000

On 30

JuneOn 31 December

Ordinary Shares:

Interim on 30 June

2,40,000

1,00,000

Final on 31December

2,40,000

1,00,000

P&L A/c Balance as on 31 December 2010

8,98,000

3,40,000

23,98,000

11,00,000

Information Relating toShare Capital:

Ordinary Shares of Rs.1 Each Fully Paid

80,00,000

40,00,000

6% Preference Shares of Rs.1 Fully Paid

20,00,000

Shares in B Ltd Held by A Ltd:

Ordinary Shares

30,00,000

Acquired on 1 July 2010

Preference Shares

18,00,000

Acquired on 1 January2010

Income and expenditure are deemed to accrue evenly throughout the year. All dividends are payable out of the current year’s profits. The directors of B Ltd. resigned on 1 July 2010 and were replaced on that day by directors of A Ltd who are to receive the same remuneration as the former directors.

on 1 april 2010 balance of p amp l a c in anand ltd rsquo s ledger stood at rs 1 71 608553

The balance sheets of Ashish Ltd. and Anand Ltd. as on 31 March 2011 are as follows:

Liabilities

AshishLtd.Rs.

Anand Ltd. Rs.

Equity Share Capital:

Fully Paid Shares of 10 Each

1,20,000

30,000

General Reserve as on 1 April 2010

84,000

1,200

Profit and Loss Account

51,000

21,600

Sundry Creditors

21,000

10,5002,76,00063,300

2,76,000

63,300

Assets

Buildings

84,000

17,400

Plant & Machinery

60,0000

15,600

Furniture & Fittings

4,500

2,100

Investments

60,000

Stock

60,000

Sundry Debtors

22,500

12,600

Cash at Bank

24,000

9,600

21,000

6,000

2,76,000

63,300

Prepare a consolidated balance sheet after considering the following:

  1. Ashish Ltd. acquired 24 lakh equity shares of Anand Ltd. on 1 July 2010 at Rs.6 crore.
  2. Stock of Ashish Ltd. includes Rs.18 lakh relating to stock purchased from Anand Ltd. which sells goods at cost plus 25%.
  3. Sundry creditors of Ashish Ltd. includes Rs.30 lakh due to Anand Ltd.
  4. P&L A/c of Ashish Ltd. includes interim dividend received from Anand Ltd. on 1 August 2010.
  5. On 1 April 2010, balance of P&L A/c in Anand Ltd.’s ledger stood at Rs.1,71,30,000. Out of this balance, an interim dividend @ 10% was paid on 1 August 2010. Corporate dividend tax @ 11% was also paid on the amount of interim dividend.

Profits during the year 2010–11 have been earned by Anand Ltd. on a uniform basis throughout the year.

calculate the rebate on bills discounted as on 31 march 2010 and give necessary jour 608557

Model: Rebate on bills discounted The following information is available in the books of AZ Bank Limited as on 31 March 2010.

Rs.

Bills Discounted

1,20,11,350

Rebate on Bills Discounted (1 April 2009)

3,15,550

Discount Received

12,22,450

Details of bills discounted are as follows:

Value of Bill

Due Date

Rate of Discount(%)

15,00,000

12 June 2010

14

20,00,000

9 July 2010

12

50,00,000

29 July 2010

15

80,00,00

28 August 2010

18

Calculate the rebate on bills discounted as on 31 March 2010 and give necessary journal entries.

the unexpired discount as on 31 march 2011 is estimated to be rs 24 125 draft necess 608558

Model: Rebate on bills discounted The trial balance of BC Bank Ltd. as on 31 March 2011 shows the following balances:

Rs.

Interest and Discount

37,27,170

Rebate on Bills Discounted (1 April 2010)

7,150

Bills Discounted and Purchased

2,27,500

The unexpired discount as on 31 March 2011 is estimated to be Rs.24,125. Draft necessary adjusting entries and calculate the amount of interest and discount to be credited to P & L A/c.

model rebate on bills discounted as on 31 december 2010 the books of giant bank ltd 608559

Model: Rebate on bills discounted As on 31 December 2010, the books of Giant Bank Ltd., include among others, the following balances:

Rs.

Rebate on Bills Discounted (1 January 2010)

2,70,000

Discount Received

37,50,000

Bills Discounted and Purchased

3,65,00,000

Throughout the accounting year, the bank’s rate for discounting has been 15%. On Investigation and analysis, the average due date for the bills discounted and purchased is calculated as 14 March 2011. Show the calculation of the amount to be credited to the Bank’s P & L A/c under discount earned for the year 2010. Show also the journal entries required to adjust the above-mentioned accounts.

calculate the amount of provision to be made by the bank against the above mentioned 608560

Model: NPA—Provisions to be created On 31 March 2011, Indian Inland Bank Ltd. finds its advances classified as follows:

Standard Assets

20,60,500

Sub-standard Assets

1,10,000

Doubtful Assets : (Secured)

: Doubtful for 1 Year

40,000

: Doubtful for 1-3 Years

25,000

: Doubtful for More Than 3 Years

10,500

Doubtful Assets: (Unsecured)

22,000

Loss of Assets

15,500

Calculate the amount of provision to be made by the Bank against the above-mentioned advances.

model provisions to be created from the following information find out the amount of 608561

Model: Provisions to be created From the following information, find out the amount of provisions required to be made in the profit and loss A/c of a commercial bank for the year ended on 31 March 2011:

  1. Packing credit outstanding from food processors is Rs.80,00,000 against which the bank holds securities worth Rs.20,00,000. Forty per cent of the above advance is covered by ECGC. The above advances have remained doubtful for more than 3 years.
  2. Other Advances:

Assets Classification:

(Rs. in Lakhs)

Standard

5,000

Sub-standard

4,200

Doubtful:

For 1 Year

1,200

For 2 Years

800

For 3 Years

600

For More Than 3 Years

400

Loss Assets

800

compute the necessary provisions to be made for the year ended on 31 march 2011 608562

Model: Provision to be created Best Bank Ltd. had extended the following credit lines to a small-scale industry, which had paid any interest since March 2009:

Particulars

Term Loan

Export Credit

Balance Outstanding on 31 March 2011

Rs.90,00,000

Rs.70,00,000

DICGC/ECGC Cover

50%

40%

Securities Held

Rs.40,00,000

Rs.30,00,000

Realizable Value of Securities

Rs.30,00,000

Rs.20,00,000

Compute the necessary provisions to be made for the year ended on 31 March 2011.

you are required to calculate the income to be recognized for the year ending on 31 608563

Model: Income recognition Following are the information provided by ABZ Ltd. regarding the interest on advance along with the measure of assets.

Types of (Classification of) Assets

Interest Earned (Rs. in Lakhs)

Interest Received (Rs. in Lakhs)

(A) Performing Assets:

Term Loans

250

150

Cash Credits & Overdrafts

900

550

Bills Purchased & Discounted

400

260

(B) Non-performing Assets:

Terms Loans

150

40

Cash Credits & Overdrafts

560

55

Bills Purchased & Discounted

200

20

You are required to calculate the income to be recognized for the year ending on 31 March 2011.

model revaluation of assets the summarized balance sheets of h ltd and its subsidiar 608511

Model: Revaluation of assets The summarized balance sheets of H Ltd. and its subsidiary S Ltd. as at 31 December 2010 are as follows:

Liabilities

H Ltd. Rs.

 

Assets

S Ltd.

 

Equity Shares of Z 100

3,600

1,800

Goodwill at Cost

750

225

Each

 

 

 

 

 

Share Premium

540

Plant at Cost Less

2.160

1,350

 

 

 

Depreciation

 

 

Capital Reserve on 1

240

180

Fixtures at Cost Less

390

171

January 2010

 

 

Depreciation

 

 

General Reserve on 1

450

300

Stock at Cost

540

360

January 2010

 

 

Debtors

1,881

633

P&L A/c on 1 January

1,200

240

 

 

 

2010

 

 

 

 

 

Profit for 2010

480

150

Investment at Cost:

 

 

Creditors

1,050

330

14,40,000 Equity Shares in S Ltd.

1,620

S Ltd.

81

 

Trade Investment

75

 

 

 

Balance at Bank

300

90

 

 

 

H Ltd.

96

 

7,641

3,000

 

7,641

3,000

You are required to prepare a consolidated balance sheet of H Ltd. and its subsidiary S Ltd. as at 31 December 2010 together with working notes, after giving effect to the following relevant information:

  1. Plant of S Ltd. was to be revalued on 1 January 2010 at Rs.1,620 lakh, fixtures at Rs.150 lakh and trade investments were deemed to be valued less. There were no transactions of purchase or sales of these assets during the year 2010. The directors wish to give effect to the above revaluation in the consolidated accounts.
  2. Depreciation has been provided for the year 2010 on plant at 10% and on fixtures at 5%.
  3. The stock of S Ltd. included goods purchases of Rs.120 lakh from H Ltd. who have invoiced these goods at cost plus 25%.
  4. A cheque of Rs.15,00,000 from H Ltd. to S Ltd. was in transfer on December 2010.
  5. H Ltd. acquired the equity shares in S Ltd. on 1 January 2010.

the directors decided that the fixed assets of y ltd were overvalued and should be w 608512

Model: Bonus shares—Overvaluation of assets and contingent liability X Ltd. acquired 16,000 shares of Rs.10 each in Y Ltd. on 31 March 2011. The summarized balance sheets of the two companies as on that date were as follows:

Particulars

X Ltd.Rs.

Y Ltd.Rs.

Share Capital:

60,000 Shares of Rs.10 Each

6,00,000

20,000 Shares of Rs.10 Each

2,00,000

Capital Reserve

1,04,000

General Reserve

50,000

10,000

Profit and Loss Account

76,400

36,000

Loan from Y Ltd.

4,200

Bills Payable (Including Rs.1,000 to X Ltd.)

3,400

Creditors

35,800

10,000

Note on the Balance Sheet of X Ltd:

There is a Contingent Liability for Bills Discounted of Rs.2,000

7,66,400

3,63,400

Fixed Assets

3,00,000

2,89,400

Investments in Y Ltd. as Cost

3,40,000

Stock in Hand

80,000

40,000

Loan to X Ltd.

4,000

Bills Receivable (Including Rs.400 from Y Ltd.)

2,400

Debtors

40,000

20,000

Bank

4,000

10,000

7,66,400,

3,63,400

You are given the following information:

  1. Y Ltd. made a bonus issue on 31 March 2010 of one share for every two shares held, reducing the capital reserve equivalently, but the transaction is not shown in the above balance sheets.
  2. Interest receivable (Rs. 200) in respect of loan due by X Ltd. to Y Ltd. has not been credited in the accounts of Y Ltd.

The directors decided that the fixed assets of Y Ltd. were overvalued and should be written down by Rs.10,000. Prepare the consolidated balance sheet as at 31 March 2011, showing your workings.

model investments in different dates the balance sheets of a holding company h ltd a 608513

Model: Investments in different dates. The balance sheets of a holding company (H Ltd.) and its subsidiary (S Ltd.) at 31 December 2010 are as follows:

Particulars

X Ltd.Rs.

Y Ltd.Rs.

Equity Share of Rs.10 Each Fully Paid

12,00,000

6,00,000

Profit & Loss Account at 31 December 2008

6,00,000

3,00,000

Net Profit (Loss) 2009

3,60,000

(1,20,000)

Net Profit 2010

1,20,000

1,80,000

Creditors

3,00,000

1,20,000

25,80,000

10,80,000

Investments in S Ltd. as Cost

7,80,000

Other Assets

18,00,000

10,80,000

25,80,000

10,80,000

On 31 December 2008, H Ltd. acquired 36,000 shares in S Ltd. for Rs.6,00,000. On 31 December 2009, it acquired a further 12,000 shares for Rs.1,80,000.

No dividends have been paid or proposed by either company in relevant years. Prepare a consolidated balance sheet of the group as at 31 December 2010.

you are required to draw the consolidated balance sheet as at 31 march 2011 assuming 608515

Model: Preference shares On 1 April 2010, H Ltd. acquired 80% equity shares and 30% preference shares of S Ltd. for Rs.3,90,000 and Rs.61,000, respectively, on which date S Ltd.’s general reserve and profit and loss accounts showed balances of Rs.60,000 and Rs.8,000, respectively. On 31 March 2011, the balance sheets of two companies stood as follows:

Liabilities

H Ltd.
Rs.

S Ltd.
Rs.

Assets

H Ltd.
Rs.

S Ltd.
Rs.

Equity Share Capital

20,00,000

4,00,000

Sundry Assets

27,09,000

9,52,000

10% Preference Shares

2,00,000

80% Equity Shares in 5

3,90,000

Capital

General Reserve

6,00,000

80,000

P&L A/c

2,00,000

78,000

30% Preference Shares in S Ltd.

61,000

Creditors

3,60,000

1,94,000

31,60,000

9,52,000

31,60,000

9,52,000

You are required to draw the consolidated balance sheet as at 31 March 2011, assuming that on 1 April 2010, there were no arrears of preference dividend.

model proposed dividend received bonus shares revaluation of assets unrealized profi 608516

Model: Proposed dividend, received bonus shares, revaluation of assets, unrealized profit in stock and consolidation after some years of investment One 1 January 2008, A Ltd. acquired 16,000 shares of Rs.10 each of B Ltd. at Rs.1,80,000. The respective balance sheets as on 31 December 2010 are given as follows:

Liabilities

A Ltd.

B Ltd.

Assets

A Ltd.

B Ltd.

Share Capital (Rs. 10)

2,00,000

2,00,000

Fixed Assets

1,20,000

2,20,000

Reserve

80,000

52,000

Investments

2,00,000

30,000

Profit & Loss A/c

72,000

70,000

Debtors

50,000

40,000

Creditors

1,42,000

96,000

Stock

60,000

80,000

Bank

64,000

48,000

4,94,000

4,18,000

4,94,000

4,18,000

Additional information:

  1. At the time of acquiring shares, B Ltd. had Rs.48,000 in reserve and Rs.30,000 in profit & loss account.
  2. B Ltd. paid 10% dividends in 2008, 12% in 2009, 15% in 2010 for 2007, 2008 & 2009, respectively. All dividends received have been credited to P&L A/c of A Ltd.
  3. Proposed dividends of both the companies for 2010 is 10%.
  4. One bonus share for five fully paid shares held has been declared by B Ltd. Out of pre-acquisition reserves on 31 December 2010, no effect has been given to that in the above accounts.
  5. On 1 January 2008, Building of B Ltd. which stood in the books as Rs.1,00,000 was revalued as Rs.1,20,000. But no adjustment has been made in the books. Depreciation has been charged @ 10% p.a. or reducing balance method.
  6. In 2010, A Ltd. purchased from B Ltd. goods for Rs.20,000 on which B Ltd. made a profit of 20% on sales. 25% of such goods are lying unsold on 31 December 2010. You are required to prepare the consolidated balance sheet as 31 December 2010.

model sale of investments the summarized balance sheets of a ltd and b ltd are as fo 608517

Model: Sale of investments The summarized balance sheets of A Ltd. and B Ltd. are as follows:

Balance Sheets as at 31 December 2010

Particulars

A Ltd. Rs.

B Ltd. Rs.

Sources of Funds:

Equity Shares of 10 Each

8,00,000

2,00,000

Reserves

80,000

20,000

Profit & Loss A/c as on 1 January 2010

1,20,000

40,000

Profit for the Year

32,000

32,000

Add: Dividends from B Ltd.

16,000

Less: Dividends Paid

(20,000)

Creditors

1,20,000

80,000

11,68,000

3,52,000

Application of Funds:

Fixed Assets

8,00,000

3,20,000

Current Assets

1,28,000

32,000

Shares in B Ltd. at Cost 12,000 Shares

2,40,000

11,68,000

3,52,000

A Ltd. had acquired 16,000 shares in B Ltd. at Rs.20 each on 1 January 2010 and sold 4,000 of them at the same price as on 1 October 2010. The sale is cum dividend. An interim dividend of 10% was paid by B Ltd. on 1 July 2010. Draft the consolidated balance sheet as at 31 December 2010.

h ltd purchased 80 of shares in a ltd when the latter rsquo s p amp l a c was rs 2 4 608518

Model: More than one subsidiary companies’ cross holdings The following are the balance sheets of H Ltd., A Ltd. and B Ltd., as on 31 December 2010:

Particulars

H Ltd.

A Ltd.

B Ltd.

Liabilities:

Share Capital

30,00,000

6,00,000

3,00,000

Reserves

3,00,000

1,80,000

1,80,000

P&L A/c

12,00,000

3,60,000

1,80,000

Creditors

6,00,000

3,60,000

1,80,000

Bills Payable

90,000

51,00,000

15,90,000

8,40,000

Assets:

Sundry Assets

24,00,000

3,60,000

3,00,000

Stock

18,30,000

5,40,000

3,00,000

Debtors

3,90,000

5,10,000

2,40,000

Bills Receivable from A Ltd.

30,000

Shares in .A Ltd.

4,50,000

Shares in 3 Ltd.

1,80,000

51,00,000

15,90,000

8,40,000

H Ltd. purchased 80% of shares in A Ltd. when the latter’s P&L A/c was Rs.2,40,000 and reserve was Rs.1,20,000. A Ltd. purchased 75% of shares in B Ltd. when the latter’s P&L A/c was Rs.1,20,000 and reserve was Rs.60,000. Prepare consolidated balance sheets of H Ltd. and its subsidiaries A Ltd. and B Ltd. as on 31 December 2010 together units consolidation schedules.

h ltd acquired 15 000 equity shares in s ltd on 1 april 2010 on 31 december 2010 the 608519

H Ltd. acquired 15,000 equity shares in S Ltd. on 1 April 2010. On 31 December 2010, the balance sheet of S Ltd. was as follows:

Liabilities

Assets

Shares Capital:

Sundry Assets

32,00,000

20,000 Equity

20,00,000

Shares of 2100

Each R

General Reserve on 1 January

4,00,000

2010

P&L A/c Z.

Balance on 1

January 2010

1,00,000

Profit for 2010

5,00,000

4 00 000

Sundry Creditors

3,00,000

32,00,000

32,00,000

Ascertain capital profits and revenue profits.

consolidate the following balance sheets 608524

Consolidate the following balance sheets:

Liabilities

H Ltd.

S Ltd.

Assets

H Ltd.

S Ltd.

Capital: f. 1 Shares

7,000

5,000

4,500 Shares in 5 Ltd. at

6,000

Cost

Creditors

2,500

Sundry

1,000

9,000

Assets

P&L A/c

1,500

7,000

9,000

7,000

9,000

from the following balance sheets prepare a consolidated balance sheet of x ltd and 608525

From the following balance sheets, prepare a consolidated balance sheet of X Ltd. and its subsidiary Y Ltd. The interests of the minority shareholders of Y Ltd. are to be shown in the consolidated balance sheet.

Balance Sheet of X Ltd. and Its Subsidiary Y Ltd. as at 31 December 2010

Liabilities

X

Y

Assets

X

Y

Share Capital:

4,00,000

320

Land &

304

Shares of

Buildings

Z 80

40,000 Shares of 380 Each

32

Plant & Machinery

44.80

6.40

General

160

Shares in Y

Reserve

Ltd. 36,000

57.60

Shares of

Z 80 Each

Creditors

96

6.40

Stock

96

16

P&L A/c

32

48

Debtors

64

22.40

Cash at Bank

41.60

41.60

608

86.40

608

86.40

prepare the consolidated balance sheet as at 31 march 2010 608527

On 31 March, 2010, the balance sheets of H Ltd. and S Ltd. stood as follows:

Liabilities

H Ltd.

S Ltd.

Assets

H Ltd.

S Ltd.

Share Capital:

Sundry Assets

2,58,800

1,52,000

Shares of Rs. 10 Each Fully

2,50,000

1,00,000

60% Shares in 5 Ltd.

81,200

Paid

Acquired on 31 March 2010 at Cost

Reserves

50,000

25,000

Preliminary Expenses

3,000

Creditors

40,000

30,000

3,40,000

1,55000

3,40,000

1,55,000

Prepare the consolidated balance sheet as at 31 March 2010.

from the balance sheets and information given below prepare a consolidated balance s 608528

From the balance sheets and information given below, prepare a consolidated balance sheet.

Liabilities

H Ltd.

S Ltd.

Assets

H Ltd.

S Ltd.

Share Capital:

Sundry Assets

4,00,000

60,000

Rs.10 per Share Fully Paid

5,00,000

1,00,000

Stock in Trade

3,05,000

1,20,000

Profit & Loss A/c

2,00,000

60,000

Debtors

65,000

85,000

Reserves

50,000

30,000

Bills Receivable

5,000

Creditors

1,00,000

60,000

Shares in S Ltd.

Bills Payable

15,000

7,500 Shares at Cost

75,000

8,50,000

2,65,000

8,50,000

2,65,000

Additional information:

  1. All profits of S Ltd. have been earned since the shares were acquired by H Ltd. but the reserve of Rs.30,000 was already there at the time.
  2. Bills accepted by S Ltd. are all in favour of H Ltd., which has discounted Rs.10,000 of them.
  3. Sundry assets of S Ltd. were undervalued by Rs.10,000.
  4. The stock in trade of H Ltd. includes Rs.25,000 bought from S Ltd. at a profit of 25% on cost to the latter.

from the following details prepare a consolidated balance sheet of h ltd and its sub 608529

From the following details, prepare a consolidated balance sheet of H Ltd. and its subsidiary S Ltd. as on 31 December 2010.

Liabilities

H Ltd.
Rs.

S Ltd.
Rs.

Assets

H Ltd.
Rs.

S Ltd.
Rs.

Share Capital:

Buildings

2,90,000

1,00,000

Shares of 310 Each

4,00,000

1,20,000

Plant

1,20,000

50,000

General Reserve

1,00,000

30,000

Stock

80,000

20,000

Profit & Loss A/c

50,000

42,000

Debtors

70,000

30,000

16% Debentures

1,40,000

Bills Receivable

30,000

20,000

Creditors

30,000

20,000

Bank

20,000

10,000

Bills Payable

10,000

18,000

Investment in S Ltd. (2,000

1,20,000

Shares)

7,30,000

2,30,000

7,30,000

2,30,000

On the date of acquisition of shares by H Ltd. in S Ltd., the latter had undistributed profits of Rs.18,000 and reserve of Rs.12,000. The values of buildings and plant of S Ltd. were considered as Rs.1,30,000 and Rs.32,000, respectively. No purchase or sale of these assets after the acquisition of shares. Depreciation may be ignored. Debtors of H Ltd. include Rs.10,000 due from S Ltd. and also bills payable of H Ltd. includes a bill of Rs.6,000 accepted in favour of S Ltd.

all bills receivable of h ltd are drawn on s ltd you are required to prepare a conso 608530

The following are the summarized balance sheets as on 31 December 2010:

Liabilities

H Ltd.
Rs.

S Ltd.
Rs.

Assets

H Ltd.
Rs.

S Ltd.
Rs.

Share on. 10 Each

20,00,000

4,00,000

Fixed Assets

8,00,000

3,60,000

General Reserve

40,000

1,60,000

Stock

3,60,000

1,20,000

Creditors

80,000

1,20,000

Debtors

1,60,000

1,20,000

Bills Payable

20,000

Bills Receivable

20,000

Bank Balance

4,60,000

1,00,000

30,000 Shares in 5 Ltd. at

3,20,000

Cost

21,20,000

7,00,000

21,20,000

7,00,000

H Ltd. acquired shares in S Ltd. on 1 January 2010 when S Ltd. had 40,000 in general reserve. No dividend was declared by S Ltd. in 2010. All bills receivable of H Ltd. are drawn on S Ltd. You are required to prepare a consolidated obligation] balance sheet on 31 December 2010.

bills payable of y ltd included rs 15 000 accepted in favour of x ltd bills receivab 608531

X Ltd. acquired 10,000 shares of Rs.10 each in Y Ltd. on 1 January 2010. The summarized balance sheets of both the companies on 31 December 2010 were as follows:

Liabilities

X Ltd.

Y Ltd.

Assets

X Ltd.

Y Ltd.

Shares of 310 Each

2,50,000

1,25,000

Fixed Assets

2,25,000

2,32,500

Reserves

1,00,000

75,000

Stock

37,500

50,000

Creditors

1,50,000

1,50,000

Debtors

75,000

1,00,000

Bills Payable

25,000

20,000

Shares in Y Ltd.

1,62,500

Bank Loan

25,000

Bills Receivable

37,500

25,000

Profit & Loss A/c

25,000

20,000

Cash

12,500

7,500

5,50,000

4,15,000

5,50,000

4,15,000

On 1 January 2010, P&L A/c of Y Ltd. showed a debit balance of Rs.25,000. Y Ltd. made a transfer of Rs.15,000 to reserve on 31 December 2010.

Creditors of X Ltd include Rs.25,000 for goods supplied by Y on credit. Stock of Rs.20,000 in X Ltd represents unsold goods purchased from Y Ltd. who charged profit on sale of 20%.

Bills payable of Y Ltd. included Rs.15,000 accepted in favour of X Ltd. Bills receivable of 15. X Ltd. included Rs.12,500 received from Y Ltd. Ltd. & S Ltd. Prepare a consolidated balance sheet.

from the following balance sheet of h ltd and s ltd prepare a consolidated balance s 608532

From the following balance sheet of H Ltd and S Ltd., prepare a consolidated balance sheet of H Shares were acquired by H Ltd. in S Ltd. on 30 June 2010. S Ltd. transferred Rs.3,000 from profits to reserve on 31 December 2010.

Balance Sheets as on 31 December 2010

Liabilities

H Ltd.

S Ltd.

Assets

H Ltd.

S Ltd.

Share of Rs. 1 Each

72,000

30,000

Sundry Assets

1,20,000

48,000

Reserve

30,000

6,000

Investment in Shares of 5

39,000

Ltd. (30,000 Shares)

P&L A/c

12,000

6,000

Creditors

45,000

6,000

1,59,000

48,000

1,59,000

48,000

stock of h ltd includes rs 5 000 worth of goods bought from s ltd on which the latte 608533

The following are the balance sheets of H Ltd. and S Ltd. on 31 December 2010:

Liabilities

H Ltd.

S Ltd.

Assets

H Ltd.

S Ltd.

Share Capital:

Goodwill

15,000

10,000

Shares of 310 Each

3,00,000

1,25,000

Fixed Assets

2,90,000

1,00,000

General Reserve

80,000

47,500

Stock

80,000

40,000

Profit for the Year

1,10,000

60,000

Investments in 7,500 Shares of S Ltd.

1,00,000

Bills Payable

10,000

Bills Receivable

7,500

Sundry Creditors

50,000

17,500

Sundry Debtors

40,000

57,500

Cash in Hand

25,000

35,000

5,50,000

2,50,000

5,50,000

2,50,000

  1. H Ltd. acquired the shares of S Ltd. on 1 September 2010
  2. Bills payable of H Ltd. was wholly in favour of S Ltd.
  3. Debtors of S Ltd. include Rs.7,500 owed by H Ltd.
  4. Stock of H Ltd. includes Rs.5,000 worth of goods bought from S Ltd. on which the latter company has made a profit of 25% on cost. Prepare the consolidated balance sheet.

profit amp loss a c of a ltd included interim dividend at the rate of 16 p a from b 608534

A Ltd. acquired the whole of the shares in B Ltd. on 1 July 2010 at a total cost of 2,80,000. The balance sheets of both the companies as at 31 December 2010 were as follows:

Liabilities

A Ltd.

B Ltd.

Assets

A Ltd.

B Ltd.

Shares of Z 50 Each

3,75,000

1,25,000

Land & Buildings

2,57,500

75,000

General Reserve on

2,37,500

5,000

Plant & Machinery

75,000

67,750

1 January 2010

Profit & Loss A/c

2,00,000

90,000

Debtors

70,000

39,500

Creditors

37,500

40,250

Stock

85,000

50,500

Investments

2,80,000

Cash at Bank

82,500

27,500

8,50,000

2,60,250

8,50,000

2,60,250

  1. The balance of profit & loss A/c of B Ltd. on 1 January 2010 was Rs.70,000. Included in the purchases from B Ltd. were goods for Rs.15,000 on which B Ltd. made a profit of Rs.3,750.
  2. Stock of A Ltd. included Rs.7,500 purchased from B Ltd. (part of Rs.15,000)
  3. Profit & Loss A/c of A Ltd. included interim dividend at the rate of 16% p.a. from B Ltd Make necessary adjustments and show a consolidated balance sheet as at 31 December 2010.

h ltd acquired 15 000 equity shares of rs 10 each in s ltd on 31 march 2010 on which 608536

H Ltd. acquired 15,000 equity shares of Rs.10 each in S Ltd on 31 March 2010, on which date the balance sheets are as follows:

Liabilities

A Ltd.

B Ltd.

Assets

A Ltd.

B Ltd.

Shares of Rs. 10 Each

5,00,000

2,00,000

Machinery

2,90,000

1,50,000

Shares Premium

1,00,000

Furniture

55,000

25,000

General Reserve

2,50,000

1,85,000

15,000 Shares in 5 Ltd

3,00,000

P&L A/c

19,000

80,000

Stock

2,21,500

1,90,000

Creditors

82,500

42,500

Debtors

60,000

85,000

Proposed Dividend

75,000

Cash

1,00,000

57,500

10,26,500

5,07,500

10,26,500

5,07,500

On 31 March 2010, the directors of S Ltd. proposed a dividend of 10% on the shares capital of Rs.2,00,000 and made a bonus issue of one equity share for every four equity shares held using general reserve. Effect of bonus is to be incorporated in the above given balance sheets. Prepare a consolidated balance sheet as at 31 March 2010.

jupiter ltd purchased control of neptune ltd on 1 october 2010 following are the bal 608538

Jupiter Ltd. purchased control of Neptune Ltd. on 1 October 2010. Following are the balance sheets of two companies as at 31 March 2011:

Liabilities

Jupiter

Neptune

Assets

Jupiter

Neptune

Equity Share Capital of 310

10,80,000

5,40,000

Goodwill

18,000

72,000

Each

General Reserve

1,08,000

90,000

Land & Building

1,80,000

1,80,000

P&L A/c

1,80,000

1,80,000

Plant & Machinery

3,60,000

3,24,000

Creditors

1,80,000

1,26,000

Stock in Trade

2,11,500

1,80,000

Bills Payable to Jupiter Ltd

18,000

Debtors

90,000

1,62,000

Contingent Liability of Jupiter Ltd for Rs. 27,000

Investment in 40,500 Shares of Neptune Ltd

6,07,500

For Bills Discounted

Cash at Bank

81,000

36,000

15,48,000

9,54,000

15,48,000

9,54,000

Neptune Ltd. had on 1 April 2010 Rs.90,000 in general reserve and Rs.1,08,000 (Cr.) in P&L A/ c. 10% dividend was received by Jupiter Ltd. in November for 2009–10 and this amount was credited to P&L A/c of holding company. Plant & machinery standing in the books of Neptune Ltd. as Rs.3,60,000 on the date of purchase was revalued at Rs.4,32,000. Stock of Neptune Ltd. includes Rs.28,800 received from Jupiter Ltd. on which it made a profit of 25% on cost. Ignore corporate dividend tax. Prepare the consolidated balance sheet.

compute the probability with which the call will be exercised compute the probabilit 608396

Two stocks S and Z are traded today at prices as indicated in the following table. In one year from now, the prices of these stocks may move to three states. The risk-free rate is 5 percent per year.

Security

Time 0

Year 1

Security

Time

Year 1

$128

$125

S

$99.40

$110

Z

$101.90

$106

$75

$92

  1. Compute the risk-neutral probabilities and state prices.
  2. A portfolio manager bought a call on S at a strike price of $105 and sold a put on Z at a strike price of $107. What is his net cash flow today? Compute the probability with which the call will be exercised. Compute the probability with which the put will be exercised.

derive the expected return beta representation from the equilibrium consumption mode 608397

  1. Formulate the consumption-based model in terms of objective function and budget constraints. Derive the equilibrium asset pricing equation.
  2. Show the equivalence between pricing payoffs and returns.
  3. Derive an expression relating the risk-free rate to the stochastic discount factor. How does the stochastic discount factor influence the risk-free rate?
  4. Derive the expected return-beta representation from the equilibrium consumption model.
  5. Derive the mean-variance efficiency frontier from the equilibrium consumption model.
  6. Show how the stochastic discount factor influences the Sharpe ratio.

fill in the blanks with apt word s 1 a holding company is one which controls one or 608491

Fill in the blanks with apt word(s)
1.A holding company is one which controls one or more other companies by means of holding ____________ shares.
2.A holding company is one which controls one or more other companies by means of controlling the composition of ____________ .
3.A company is a subsidiary of another company if it is a subsidiary of any company which is that other company’s ____________ .
4.Accounting Standard AS-21 deals with “ ____________ ”.
5.“A group” represents a parent Company and all its ____________ .
6.The balance sheet depicting all items relating to a holding company and its subsidiaries is referred as ____________ .
7.Holding of the general public (after acquisition of major shares by the holding company) in the subsidiary company is known as “ ____________ ”.
8.All the accumulated profits of the subsidiary company on the date of purchase of shares by the holding company are called: “ ____________ ” or “ ____________ ”
9.Profits earned by a subsidiary company after the date of acquisition of shares by the holding company are known as “ ____________ ” or “ ____________ .
10.____________ is the excess amount paid for acquisition of shares in a subsidiary.
11.In case of appreciation on fixed assets on account of revaluation, ____________ from the date of revaluation till the date of balance sheet should be provided.
12.Minority share of the bonus has to be ____________ to minority interest.
13.Dividend paid by subsidiary out of pre-acquisition profits is termed as ____________ .
14.Holding company’s share of capital dividend which was to P&L A/c should be deducted from P&L A/c in the consolidated balance sheet.
15.Holding company’s share of revenue dividend has to be ____________ to P&L A/c.
16.Interim dividend relating to pre-acquisition period is adjusted units ____________ .
17.Cash in transit is to be shown on ____________ side of the balance sheet as a separate item.
18.Any contingent liability involving a third party has to be shown as a ____________ in the consolidated balance sheet.
19.The unrealized profit in stock should be ____________ from “stock”.
In case the holding company gets more than what it has invested in shares, the excess is treated as ____________.

model cancellation of investment mdash wholly owned subsidiary company from the foll 608492

Model: Cancellation of investment—Wholly owned subsidiary company From the following balance sheet of H Ltd. (holding) and S Ltd. (subsidiary), prepare a consolidated balance sheet of H Ltd. and its subsidiary S Ltd.:

Liabilities

H Ltd.
Rs.

S Ltd.
Rs.

Assets

H Ltd.

S Ltd.
Rs.

Share Capital:

Sundry Assets

4,00,000

2,25,000

Shares of Rs.10 Each

5,00,000

2,00,000

Investment:

Sundry Liabilities

1,00,000

25,000

20,000 Shares of Rs. 10 Each of 5 Ltd.

2,00,000

6,00,000

125,000

6,00,000

2,25,000

model cost of control from the following balance sheets of h ltd and its subsidiary 608493

Model: Cost of control From the following balance sheets of H Ltd. and its subsidiary S Ltd. as on 31 December 2010, prepare a consolidated balance sheet.

Liabilities

H Ltd.
Rs.

5 Ltd.
Rs.

Assets

H Ltd.
Rs.

S Ltd.

Share Capital:

Sundry Assets:

3,50,000

2,60,000

Shares of Z50 Each

5,00,000

2,00,000

I nvestment in the Shares of S Ltd. 4,000 Shares (At

3,00,000

Cost)

Creditors

1,00,000

20,000

Reserves

10,000

Profit & Loss A/c

50,000

30,000

6,50,000

2,60,000

6,50,000

2,60,000

H Ltd. purchases shares in S Ltd. on the balance sheet date.

model capital reserve from the following balance sheets of h ltd and its subsidiary 608494

Model: Capital reserve From the following balance sheets of H Ltd. and its subsidiary S Ltd. as on 31 December 2010, prepare a consolidated balance sheet.

Liabilities

H Ltd.
Rs.

S Ltd.
Rs.

Assets

H Ltd.
Rs.

S Ltd.

Share Capital:

(Shares of ? 100 Each)

6,00,000

4,00,000

Sundry Assets

5,00,000

4,85,000

Creditors

2,00,000

50,000

Investment in 4,000

4,10,000

Reserves

40,000

20,000

Shares of S. Ltd. (on 31

December 2010)

Profit & Loss A/c

70,000

15,000

9,10,000

4,85,000

9,10,000

4,85,000

model pre acquisition profit reserves from the following information prepare a conso 608495

Model: Pre-acquisition profit/reserves From the following information, prepare a consolidated balance sheet.

Balance Sheets as on 31 December 2010

Liabilities

H Ltd.
Rs.

S Ltd.
Rs.

Assets

H Ltd.
Rs.

S Ltd.
Rs.

Share Capital

Shares of Z10 Each

2,00,000

1,00,000

Sundry Assets

2,20,000

1,50,000

Reserves

50,000

20,000

Investments

Profit & Loss A/c

20,000

10,000

6,000 Shares of S Ltd.

80,000

Creditors

30,000

20,000

3,00,000

1,50,000

3,00,000

150 000

H Ltd. acquired its shares in S Ltd. on 1 January 2010 when reserves of S Ltd. stood at Rs.4,000 and its profit and loss account (Cr.) was Rs.5,000.

at the date of acquisition by h ltd of 3 000 shares in s ltd the latter company had 608496

Model: Pre-acquisition profit and reserves From the balance sheets given below, prepare a consolidated balance sheet of H Ltd. and its subsidiary S Ltd.

Liabilities

H Ltd.
Rs.

S Ltd.
Rs.

Assets

H Ltd.
Rs.

S Ltd.

Share Capital:

Fixed Assets:

Shares of ? 20 Each

3,60,000

90,000

Freehold Property

2,16,000

Reserves & Surplus:

Leasehold Property

75,000

General Reserve

75,000

18,000

Plant & Machinery

90,000

30,000

Profit & Loss A/c

36,000

27,000

Investments:

Current Liabilities:

7,000 Shares in S Ltd.

75,000

Creditors

45,000

15,000

Current Assets:

Stock at Cost

54,000

9,000

Debtors

66,000

21,000

Bank

15,000

15,000

5,16,000

1,50,000

5,16,000

1,50,000

At the date of acquisition by H Ltd., of 3,000 shares in S Ltd. the latter company had undistributed profits and reserves of Rs.15,000, none of which have been distributed since acquisition.

model pre acquisition loss the balance sheet of h ltd and its subsidiary s ltd as on 608497

Model: Pre-acquisition loss The balance sheet of H Ltd. and its subsidiary S Ltd. as on 31 December 2010 were as follows:

Liabilities

H Ltd.
Rs.

S Ltd.
Rs.

Assets

H Ltd.
Rs.

S Ltd.
Rs.

Share Capital:

Sundry Assets

80,000

50,000

Shares of Z10 Each

50,000

30,000

Investments:

General Reserve

20,000

2,000 Shares in S Ltd.

20,000

Profit & Loss Account

20,000

9,000

Creditors

10,000

11,000

1,00,000

50,000

1,00,000

50,000

The shares were purchased by H Ltd. and S Ltd. in 30 June 2010. On 1 January 2010, the P&L A/c of S Ltd. showed a loss of Rs.15,000 which was written off from out of the profits earned during the year. Profits are earned uninformally over the year 2010. Prepare a consolidated balance sheet of H Ltd. and S Ltd. as on 31 December 2010 giving all workings.

model common transactions bills and debtorsand creditors h ltd acquired 4 000 equity 608498

Model: Common transactions (Bills and debtorsand creditors) H Ltd. acquired 4,000 equity shares of S Ltd. on 31 March 2010. The following are the balance sheets of the two companies as at 31 March 2011:

Liabilities

H Ltd.
Rs.

S Ltd.
Rs.

Assets

H Ltd.
Rs.

S Ltd.
Rs.

Equity Shares of Rs.100

10,00,000

5,00,000

Land & Buildings

2,50,000

1,50,000

Each

General Reserves 31

2,00,000

1,00,000

Plant & Machinery

2,50,000

3,00,00

March-10

Stock

75,000

50,000

Profit & Loss A/c

50,000

30,000

Sundry Debtors

50,000

60,00

31 March, 2010

Profit for the Year

1,00,000

40,000

Investment in Shares of

5,00,000

2010-11

S Ltd

Sundry Creditors

50,000

50,000

Bills Receivable

40,000

5,000

Bills Payable

15,000

5,000

Cash & Bank

2,50,000

1,60,000

14,15,000

7,25,000

14,15,000

7,25,000

  1. Bills receivable of H Ltd include Rs.5000 accepted by S Ltd.
  2. Sundry debtors of H Ltd include Rs.25,000 due from S Ltd.

Prepare a consolidated balance sheet of H Ltd. and its subsidiary S Ltd.

model contingent liabilities and unrealized profit in stock the balance sheet of h l 608499

Model: Contingent liabilities and unrealized profit in stock The balance sheet of H Ltd. and S Ltd. on 31 March 2010 was as follows:

Liabilities

H Ltd.
Rs.

S Ltd.
Rs.

Assets

H Ltd.
Rs.

S Ltd.
Rs.

Equity Share of Z 10 Each

20,00,000

12,00,000

Land & Buildings

10,00,000

8,00,000

General Reserve on 1 April

3,60,000

2,04,000

Plant & Machinery

5,00,000

6,40,000

2009

Profit & Loss A/c

2,40,000

96,000

Stock

2,80,000

3,20,000

Balance on 1 April 2009

Debtors

4,80,000

4,20,000

Profit for 2009-10

4,40,000

3,36,000

80,000 Shares in S Ltd.

11,80,000

Bills Payable

80,000

Bills Receivable

1,20,000

Creditors

5,60,000

2,84,000

Cash

40,000

20,000

36,00,000

22,00,000

36,00,000

22,00,000

H Ltd. acquires shares in S Ltd. on 1 January 2010. S Ltd. issued all bills payable to H Ltd. Bills receivable of H Ltd. include bills of S Ltd. for Rs.48,000. Sundry debtors of S Ltd. include Rs.40,000 owing by H Ltd. Stock of H Ltd. includes goods worth Rs.60,000 purchased from S Ltd. for which the latter company has charged profit at 25% on cost. Contingent liability for bills discounted by H Ltd. is Rs.1,00,000. Prepare a consolidated balance sheet.

model preference share capital in subsidiary company the following are the balance s 608501

Model: Preference share capital in subsidiary company The following are the balance sheets of A Ltd. and B Ltd. as on 31 March 2011:

Liabilities

A Ltd.
Rs.

B Ltd.
Rs.

Assets

A Ltd.
Rs.

B Ltd.
Rs.

Share Capital:

Fixed Assets

15,00,000

7,20,000

Equity Shares of ,T. 100

12,00,000

4,50,000

Investment in 4,500 quity

6,00,000

Each Fully Paid

Shares in B Ltd. on 1 April

2010

13% Preference Shares of

3,00,000

Current Assets (Including

9,00,000

7,80,000

Rs.100 Each Fully Paid

Rs.30,000 Stock-in-Trade

Purchased from A Ltd.)

General Reserve

1,50,000

1,20,000

P&L A/c (Before

90,0000

75,000

Appropriation for

Dividends)

9% Debentures

6,00,000

Current Liabilities and

9,60,000

5,55,000

Provisions

30,00,000

15,00,000

30,00,000

15,00,000

Prepare the consolidated balance sheet as at 31 March 2011 assuming that:

  1. B Ltd.’s general reserve and P&L A/c (after appropriation for dividends) stood at Rs.75,000 and Rs.30,000, respectively, on 31 March 2010
  2. A Ltd. sells goods at a profit of 25% on cost

model debentures in subsidiary company the following are the balance sheets of c ltd 608502

Model: Debentures in subsidiary company The following are the balance sheets of C Ltd. and its subsidiary D Ltd. as at 31 March 2011:

Liabilities

A Ltd.
Rs.

B Ltd.
Rs.

Assets

A Ltd.
Rs.

B Ltd.
Rs.

Share Capital:

Fixed Assets

15,00,000

7,20,000

Equity Shares of ,T. 100

12,00,000

4,50,000

Investment in 4,500 quity

6,00,000

Each Fully Paid

Shares in B Ltd. on 1 April

2010

13% Preference Shares of

3,00,000

Current Assets (Including

9,00,000

7,80,000

Rs. 100 Each Fully Paid

Rs. 30,000 Stock-in-Trade

Purchased from A Ltd.)

General Reserve

1,50,000

1,20,000

P&L A/c (Before

90,0000

75,000

Appropriation for

Dividends)

9% Debentures

6,00,000

Current Liabilities and

9,60,000

5,55,000

Provisions

30,00,000

15,00,000

30,00,000

15,00,000

Prepare the consolidated balance sheet as at 31 March 2011 assuming that D Ltd. earned uniformly in 2010–11 and its P&L A/c showed a debit balance of Rs.60,000 on 1 April 2010. Also show the working.

model revaluation of assets ndash profits the following are the balance sheets of p 608503

Model: Revaluation of assets–profits The following are the balance sheets of P Ltd. and its subsidiary Q Ltd. as at 31 March 2011:

Liabilities

P Ltd.
Rs.

Q Ltd.
Rs.

Assets

P Ltd.
Rs.

Q Ltd.
Rs.

Equity Shares off100

16,00,000

4,00,000

Equipment

10,00,000

3,80,000

Each

Profit & Loss A/c

2,00,000

80,000

Investment:

External Liabilities

30,00,000

19,20,000

3,600 Equity Shares in Q

5,60,000

Ltd. on 1 April 2010

Other Assets

32,40,000

20,20,000

48,00,000

24,00,000

48,00,000

24,00,000

On 1 April, 2010 P&L A/c of Q Ltd. showed a credit balance of Rs.32,000 and equipment of Q Ltd. was revalued by P Ltd. 20% above its book value of Rs.4,00,000 (but no such adjustment effected in the books of Q Ltd). Prepare the consolidated balance sheet as at 31 March 2011.

model bonus issue out of capital profit pre acquisition profits r ltd acquired 3 200 608504

Model: Bonus issue out of capital profit (Pre-acquisition profits R Ltd. acquired 3,200 ordinary shares of Rs.100 each in S Ltd. on 31 December 2010. Their summarized balance sheets as on that date were as follows:

Liabilities

R Ltd.

S Ltd.
Rs.

Assets

R Ltd.
Rs.

S Ltd.
Rs.

Share Capital:

Land & Buildings

3,00,000

3,60,000

10,000 Ordinary Shares of

10,00,000

Plant & Machinery

4,80,000

2,18,800

Z100 Each

4,000 Shares of ? 100

4,00,000

Investments in S Ltd. at

6,80,000

Each

Cost

Capital Reserve

2,40,000

Stocks

2,40,000

72,000

General Reserve

4,80,000

Debtors

88,000

80,000

Profit & Loss A/c

1,14,400

72,000

Bills Receivable (Including

31,600

Z 6,000 from S Ltd.)

Bank Overdraft

1,60,000

Cash at Bank

29,000

16,000

Bills Payable (Including

16,800

Rs.8,000 to R Ltd.)

Creditors

94,200

18,000

18,48,600

7,46,800

18,48,600

7,46,800

You are supplied the following information:

  1. S Ltd. has made a bonus issue on 31 December 2010 of one ordinary share for every two shares held by its shareholders. Effect has yet to be given in the accounts for the issue.
  2. The directors are advised that land & buildings of S Ltd. are undervalued by Rs.40,000 and plant & machinery of S Ltd. are overvalued by Rs.20,000. These assets have to be adjusted accordingly.
  3. Sundry creditors of X Ltd. include Rs.24,000 due to S Ltd.

You are required to prepare the consolidated balance sheet as on 31 December 2010.

model bonus issue out of revenue profits post acquisition profits c ltd acquired 10 608506

Model: Bonus issue out of revenue profits (Post-acquisition profits) C Ltd. acquired 10,000 equity shares of Rs.10 each in D Ltd. on 31 March 2010. The summarized balance sheets of the two companies as on 31 March 2011 were as follows:

Particulars

C Ltd.
Rs.

D Ltd.
Rs.

Liabilities:

Equity Share Capital (Shares of Rs.10 Each)

4,00,000

1,25,000

Reserves

1,50,000

25,000

Profit and Loss Account

50,000

50,000

Creditors

1,00,000

25,000

7,00,000

2,25,000

Assets:

Fixed Assets

3,50,000

1,25,000

Current Assets

2,00,000

1,00,000

10,000 Shares in D Ltd. at Cost

1,50,000

7,00,000

2,25,000

D Ltd. had a credit balance of Rs.25,000 in the reserves and Rs.10,000 in the P&L A/c when C Ltd. acquired shares in D Ltd. D Ltd. issued bonus shares in the ratio of 1 share for every 5 shares held out of the profits earned during 2010–11. This is not shown in the above balance sheet of D Ltd. Prepare a consolidated balance sheet of C Ltd. and its subsidiary on 31 March 2011 giving all the necessary workings.

model dividends paid out of pre acquisition profits and goodwill of subsidiary compa 608507

Model: Dividends paid out of pre-acquisition profits and goodwill of subsidiary company. From the following balance sheets of a holding company and its subsidiary on 31 March 2011, prepare a consolidated balance sheet.

Liabilities

H Ltd.

S Ltd.
%

Assets

H Ltd.
Rs.

S Ltd.

Share Capital

15,00,000

6,00,000

Goodwill

90,000

30,000

(Shares of Rs.10 Each)

Machinery

9,00,000

4,50,000

General Reserve

2,40,000

1,80,000

Stock

2,40,000

1,50,000

P&L Account

2,70,000

2,10,000

Debtors

3,60,000

4,80,000

Sundry Creditors

1,50,000

120,000

Cash and Bank

60,000

30,000

Outstanding Expenses

60,000

30,000

Investments:

48,000 Shares in S Ltd.

5,70,000

11,40,000

22,20,000

11,40,000

When control was acquired, S Ltd. had Rs.1,20,000 in general reserve and Rs.90,000 in profit and loss account. Immediately on purchase of shares, H Ltd. received Rs.48,000 as dividend from S Ltd., which was credited to profit and loss account. Debtors of H Ltd. include Rs.60,000 due from S Ltd. whereas creditors of S Ltd. include Rs.45,000 due to H Ltd.; the difference being accounted for by a cheque-in-transfer.

model interim dividend by subsidiary company the following are the summarized balanc 608508

Model: Interim dividend by subsidiary company The following are the summarized balance sheets of H Ltd. and S Ltd. at 30 June 2010:

Liabilities

H Ltd.

S Ltd.

Assets

H Ltd.

S Ltd.

Share Capital:

Freehold Premises

7,68,000

2,70,000

Z10 Shares Each Fully

Machinery

1,80,000

2,43,900

paid

9,00,000

4,50,000

General Reserve

5,70,000

18,000

Stock

2,04,000

1,81,800

Profit & Loss Account

4,80,000

3,24,000

Sundry Debtors

1,68,000

1,42,200

Sundry Creditors

90,000

1,44,900

Cash

1,80,000

99,000

Investment in Shares of S

Ltd at Cost

5,40,000

20.40,000

9,36,900

20,40,000

9,36,900

H Ltd. acquired 36,000 shares of S Ltd on 1 July 2009 at a total cost of Rs.5,40,000. On scrutiny the balance sheet of H Ltd. as at 30 June 2010, the following details are obtained:

  1. Profit & loss A/c includes interim dividend at the rate of 10% p.a. free of tax from S Ltd.
  2. Stock includes Rs.18,000 of stock at cost purchased from S Ltd.
  3. Sundry creditors include Rs.54,000 for purchases from S Ltd. on which the latter company made a profit of Rs.13,500.

It is further stated that on 1 July 2009, the P&L A/c of S Ltd. stood at Rs.2,28,000 and the general reserve at Rs.13,500. No final dividends are yet proposed to be declared by S Ltd.

no part of the preliminary expenses was written off during the year 2010 prepare a c 608509

Model: Miscellaneous expenditure and unclaimed dividend The following are the balance sheets of H Ltd. and its subsidiary S Ltd. as on 31 December 2010:

Liabilities

H Ltd.

S Ltd.

Assets

H Ltd.

S Ltd.

Share Capital (Z10 Share)

3,00,000

1,00,000

Machinery

1,50,000

50,000

Furniture

35,000

22,500

General Reserve

75,000

35,000

70% Shares in S Ltd. at Cost

1,30,000

Profit & Loss A/c

35,000

25,000

Stock

87,500

94,500

Creditors

45,000

27,500

Debtors

27,500

15,000

Unclaimed Dividends

2,500

Bank

20,000

2,500

Preliminary Expenses

3,000

Bills Receivable

5,000

2,500

4,55,000

1,90,000

4,55,000

1,90,000

H Ltd. acquired the shares of S Ltd on 31 March 2010. On 1 January 2010, S Ltd.’s general reserve stood at Rs.30,000 and P&L A/c at Rs.10,000. No part of the preliminary expenses was written off during the year 2010. Prepare a consolidated balance sheet of H Ltd. and its subsidiary S Ltd. as at 31 December 2010.

model consolidated profit amp loss a c h ltd acquired 80 of the shares in s ltd on 1 608510

Model: Consolidated profit & loss A/c H Ltd. acquired 80% of the shares in S Ltd. on 1 January 2010. The following is the summarized P&L A/c of the companies after ascertaining net profit:

Profit & Loss Account of H Ltd. & S Ltd.
for the Year Ended 31 December 2010.

Particulars

H Ltd.
Rs.

Particulars

S Ltd.
Rs.

To Proposed Dividend

3,00,000

By Net Profit c/d

12,00,000

5,40,000

To Balance c/d

13,80,000

2,40,000

By Dividend Receivable

from S Ltd.

1,80,000

13,80,000

5,40,000

13,80,000

5,40,000

You are required to prepare a consolidated P&L A/c for the two companies.

three products x y and z are made and sold by a company the relevant information is 608299

Three products X, Y and Z are made and sold by a company. The relevant information is given as follows:

Products

X

Y

Z

Standard Costs per unit

Direct Materials (Rs.)

50

120

90

Variable Overheads (Rs.)

12

7

16

Direct Labour

Rate per hour

Hrs

Hrs

Firs

Department A

Rs. 5

14

8

15

Department 8

Rs. 6

4

3

5

Department C

Rs. 4

8

4

15

Total fixed overheads for the year are Rs. 3,00,000. The budget for the current financial year, which is prepared for a recessionary period, is based on the following sales:

Products

Sales (Units)

Selling Price per Unit (Rs.)

X

7,500

210

Y

6,000

220

Z

6,000

300

You are required to show in the form of a statement to the management, the unit Variable Cost of the three products and the total profit expected for the current year. Which of these products is the most profitable? Rank the products.

a company can produce three different products from the same raw material using same 608300

A company can produce three different products from the same raw material using same production facilities. The requisite labour is available in plenty at Rs. 8 per hour for all products. The supply of raw material, which is imported at Rs. 8 per kg, is limited to 10,400 kg for the budget period. The variable overheads are Rs. 5.60 per hour. The fixed overheads are Rs. 50,000. The selling commission is 10% on sales.

  1. From the following information, you are required to suggest the most suitable sales mix, which will maximize the company’s profit. Also determine the profit that will be earned at that level.

product

Market demand required per (unit)

Selling price per unit(rs.)

Labour Hour per unit (hrs)

Raw materials required per unit(kg)

x

8,000

30

1

0.7

Y

6,000

40

2

0.4

z

5,000

50

1.5

1.5

  1. assume, in the above situation, if an additional 4,500 kg of raw material is made available for production, should the company go in for further production, if it will result in additional fixed overheads of Rs. 20,000 and a 25% increase in the rates per hour for labour and variable overheads ?

neem agro ltd engaged in agricultural activities has 500 hectares of virgin land 608301

Neem Agro Ltd, engaged in agricultural activities, has 500 hectares of virgin land, which can be based for growing jointly or individually tea, coffee and cardamom. The yield per hectare of the different crops and selling prices per kg are as follows:

Yield (kg)

Selling Price (Rs. per kg)

Tea

2,500

25

Coffee

625

50

Cardamom

125

300

The Relevant Cost data are given as follows:

1. Variable Cost per kg:

Tea

Coffee

Cardamom

Labour Charges

10.00

12.50

150.00

Packing Materials

2.50

2.50

12.50

Other Costs

5.00

1.25

25.00

17.50

16.25

187.50

2. Fixed Cost per annum:

Cultivation and Growing Cost

16,00,000

Administrative Cost

4,50,000

Land Revenue

2,75,000

Repairs and Maintenance

5,00,000

Other Costs

6,75,000

35,00,000

The policy of the company is to produce and sell all the three kinds of products and the maximum and minimum area to be cultivated per product are as follows:

Maximum Area (Hectares)

Minimum Area (Hectares)

Tea

320

240

Coffee

100

60

Cardamom

60

20

Calculate the priority of production, the most profitable product mix and the maximum profit which can be achieved.

a company produces 30 000 units of product a and 20 000 units of a product b per ann 608303

A company produces 30,000 units of product A and 20,000 units of a product B per annum. The sales value and costs of the two products are as follows:

Sales Value

7,60,000

Direct Material

1,40,000

Direct Labour

1,90,000

Factory Overheads

1,90,000

Administrative & Selling Overheads

1,20,000

50% of factory overheads are variable and 50% of administrative and selling overheads are fixed. The selling price of A is Rs. 12 per unit and B is Rs. 20 per unit.

The direct material and labour ratio for product A is 2:3 and for B is 4:5. For both the products, the selling price is 400% of direct labour. The factory overheads are charged in the ratio of direct labour, and administrative and selling overheads are recovered at a flat rate of Rs. 2 per unit of A and Rs. 3 per unit of B.

Due to a fall in the demand of the above products, the company has a plan to diversify and make the product C using 40% capacity. It has been estimated that for C the direct material and direct labour will be Rs. 2.50 and Rs. 3 per unit, respectively. Other Variable Costs will be the same as applicable to product A. The selling price of product C is Rs. 14 per unit and the production will be 30,000 units.

Assuming that 60% capacity is used for manufacturing A and B:

  1. Calculate the present cost and profit.
  2. Calculate the costs and profit after diversification.
  3. Give your recommendation as to whether to diversify or not.

state whether the following statements are true or false 608342

State whether the following statements are true or false:

  1. A cost manager is concerned not only with cost management but also with revenue creation.
  2. Responsibility Accounting is generally classified into four classes.
  3. Responsibility Accounting is used as a control device.
  4. Whether a cost is controllable or non-controllable is directly related to whether or not the cost is fixed or variable.
  5. Responsibility Accounting is also known as profitability accounting.
  6. All controllable costs are direct costs.
  7. An Investment Centre manager is concerned with investment decisions of the company.
  8. Profit Centre is established where the responsible manager can influence both cost as well as revenue.
  9. Return on investment is a function of the income earned and the assets used in order to earn that income.
  10. Indirect costs are common to more than one segment of the organization.
  11. The performance report for a Responsibility Centre should include those costs which are of both controllable and non-controllable nature.

comment on the company s cash management policies across the three year period 608344

Cash management across time

The following information was taken from the 2008 annual report of Hewlett-Packard, a leading technology manufacturer (dollars in millions):

2008

2007

2006

Cash provided (used) by operating activities

$14,591

$ ?

$11,353

Cash provided (used) by investing activities

(13,711)

(9,123)

?

Cash provided (used) by financing activities

?

(5,590)

(6,077)

Increase (decrease) in cash

(1,140)

?

2,489

Cash balance at beginning of year

?

16,400

13,911

Cash balance at end of year

$10,153

$11,293

$ ?

REQUIRED:

a. Compute the missing dollar amounts.

b. Comment on the company”s cash management policies across the three-year period.

for each case compute the effect on the cash balance and indicate the appropriate di 608345

Deriving the cash effects of investing transactions

Webb Industries reported the following information concerning the company”s property, plant, and equipment in its 2012 financial report:

2012

2011

Buildings

$750,000

$820,000

Accumulated depreciation

100,000

180,000

Equipment

500,000

380,000

Accumulated depreciation

75,000

85,000)

Land

250,000

250,000

Depreciation expense—buildings

40,000

25,000

Depreciation expense—equipment

15,000

12,000

Listed here are four independent cases involving buildings, equipment, and land during 2012.

  1. The company purchased a building for $60,000.
  2. The company sold equipment in December 2012 that was purchased for $50,000. It recorded a gain of $5,000 on the sale.
  3. The company sold a piece of land for $300,000 at a gain of $75,000.
  4. The company acquired a building in exchange for land. The land had a book value of $150,000 and a market value of $600,000.

REQUIRED:

a. For each case, explain the change from 2011 to 2012 in the affected buildings, equipment, and land accounts. (For example, in case [1] explain the change in the building account, the related accumulated depreciation account, and the balance in the related depreciation expense account.)

b. For each case, compute the effect on the cash balance, and indicate the appropriate disclosure on the statement of cash flows.

compute the balance in the prepaid insurance account as of december 31 2011 and dece 608347

Converting cash flow numbers to accrual numbers and vice versa

Taylor Brothers began operations in 2011. The following selected information was extracted from its financial records:

2012

2011

Sales returns

$25,000

$20,000

Cost of goods sold

375,000

250,000

Inventory

110,000

130,000

Accounts receivable

150,000

95,000

Insurance expense

50,000

35,000

Cash collected on sales

500,000

350,000

Accounts payable

115,000

105,000

Cash paid for insurance

90,000

65,000

REQUIRED:

a. Compute gross sales (accrual basis) for 2011 and 2012.

b. Calculate the amount of cash paid to suppliers during 2012 for inventory.

c. Compute the balance in the prepaid insurance account as of December 31, 2011, and December 31, 2012.

prepare an income statement from the information provided 608348

Reconciling the income statement, the direct method, and the indirect method

Battery Builders, Inc. prepared statements of cash flows under both the direct and indirect methods. The operating sections of each statement under the two methods follow:

DIRECT METHOD

Collections from customers

$26,000

Payments in suppliers

(13,000)

Payments for operating expenses

(10,000)

Cash provided (used i by operating activities

$3,000

INDIRECT METHOD

Net income

$9,000

Depreciation

3,000

Gain DT mile 4d equipment

(2,000)

Increase in inventory

(3,000)

Increase in accounts receivable

(3,000)

Increase to accounts payable

1,000

Decrease in accrued payables

(2,000)

each provided fused, by operating activities

$3,000

REQUIRED:

Prepare an income statement from the information provided.

how can managers manipulate cash provided used by operations and what usually happen 608349

Manipulating dollar amounts on the statement of cash flows

Pendleton Enterprises began operations on January 1, 2010. Balance sheet and income statement information for 2010, 2011, and 2012 financial records of Price Restaurant 2012 follow:

2012

2011

2010

Cash

$6,000

$9,000

$7,000

Accounts receivable

8.0110

5,000

4,000

Accounts payable

5,000

3,000

2,000

Revenues

12,000

14,000

8,000

Expenses

14,000

9,000

6,000

REQUIRED:

a. Prepare the operating sections of the statement of cash flows for 2010, 2011, and 2012 under the direct method.

b. Assume that the $4,000 of outstanding accounts receivable on December 31, 2010, was actually collected before the end of 2010 but that the accounts receivable balances for 2011 and 2012 are unchanged. Prepare the statements of cash flows under the direct method for all three years.

c. Ignore the assumption in (b), and assume alternatively that the company deferred an additional $3,000 on the payment of accounts payable as of December 31, 2010 (i.e., accounts payable equal $5,000, and cash equals $10,000 on December 31, 2010). The accounts receivable balances for 2011 and 2012 are unchanged. Prepare the operating section of the statements of cash flows for all three periods.

d. How can managers manipulate cash provided (used) by operations, and what usually happens in the subsequent period?

preparing the statement of cash flows from two balance sheets and an income statemen 608350

Preparing the statement of cash flows from two balance sheets and an income statement

The 2011 and 2012 balance sheets and related income statement of Watson and Holmes Detective Agency follow:

2012

2011

BALANCE SHEET

ASSETS

Cash

$10,000

$ 6,000

Accounts receivable

7,000

2,000

Less: Allowance for doubtful accounts

1,000

(500)

Inventory

8,000

10,000

Long-lived assets

12,000

11,000

Less: Accumulated depreciation

4,000

(2,000)

Total assets

$32,000

$26,500

LIABILITIES AND SHAREHOLDERS” EQUITY

Accounts payable

$ 5,000

$6,000

Deferred revenues

1,000

2,000

Long-term note payable

10,000

10,000

Less: Discount on note payable

(800)

(1,000)

Common stock

12,000

6,000

Retained earnings

4,800

3,500

Total liabilities and shareholders” equity

$32,000

26,500

INCOME STATEMENT

Revenues

$42,000

Cost of goods sold

24,000

Depreciation expense

(2,000)

Interest expense

3,000

Bad debt expense

(2,000)

Other expense

(9,000)

Net income

$2,000

REQUIRED:

Prepare a statement of cash flows under both the direct and indirect methods for 2012.

assume that the company pays the outstanding accounts payable on the final day of 20 608351

Paying short-term debts: Effects on working capital, the current ratio, and the statement of cash flows

ISS Inc. began operations on January 1, 2012. It engaged in the following economic events during 2012:

  1. Issued 6,000 shares of no-par common stock for $10 per share.
  2. Purchased on account 20,000 units of inventory for $1 per unit.
  3. Paid and capitalized $7,000 for rent covering 2012 and 2013.
  4. Purchased furniture for $30,000, paying $20,000 in cash and signing a long-term note for the remaining balance.
  5. Sold on account 8,800 units of inventory for $4 per unit.
  6. Paid one-half of the outstanding accounts payable.
  7. Received $12,000 from customers on open accounts.
  8. Paid miscellaneous expenses of $10,000 for the year.
  9. Depreciation recorded on the furniture totaled $5,000.
  10. Accrued interest on the long-term note payable amounted to $1,000.
  11. Declared dividends of $3,000 at year-end to be paid in January 2013.
  12. Recorded entry for $3,000 of rent expired during 2012.

REQUIRED:

a. Prepare journal entries for these events.

b. Prepare an income statement, statement of shareholders” equity, balance sheet, and statement of cash flows (indirect method).

c. Compute working capital and the current ratio.

d. Assume that the company pays the outstanding accounts payable on the final day of 2012. Recompute working capital, the current ratio, and cash provided (used) by operating activities.

assume that you are a member of the board of directors of the lynch engineering firm 608352

Preparing the statement of cash flows and using it to set dividend policy

Lynch Engineering Firm provided the following income statement for 2012 in its annual financial report:

2012

2011

Sales

$5,967,000

$5,590,000

Salary expense

$2,025,000

$1,794,000

Advertising expense

755,000

710,000

Bad debt expense

275,000

260,000

Administrative expenses

898,000

832,000

Janitorial expense

132,000

120,000

Supplies expense

281,000

299,000

Depreciation expense

963,000

5,329,000

978,000

4,993,000

Net income

$ 638,000

$597,000

The company declared and paid a dividend of $550,000 in 2011 but did not declare any dividends in 2012.

2011:

(a) Thirty-five percent of the sales were on account.

(b) The accounts receivable balance decreased by $2,980,000 from January 1 to December 31.

(c) As of December 31, the company still owed $145,000 in wages and $67,000 on the supplies used during the year.

3. 2012:

(a) Seventy-five percent of the sales were on account.

(b) The accounts receivable balance increased by $1,671,750 from January 1 to December 31.

(c) As of December 31, the company still owed $25,000 in wages and $50,000 in advertising.

(d) On January 1, 2011, the company had a balance of $13,245 in cash.

The company had no write-offs or recoveries of accounts receivable during 2011 or 2012.

REQUIRED:

a. Prepare the operating section of the statement of cash flows for 2011 and 2012, using the direct method.

b. Assume that you are a member of the board of directors of the Lynch Engineering Firm. Several influential shareholders have called you and complained that the company generated more net income in 2012 than in 2011, yet chose not to declare a dividend in 2012. How would you explain the board”s position on dividends in 2011 versus 2012?

do you think that it is possible to identify over and undervalued stocks by identify 608354

Using the cash flow statement to spot earnings quality problems

An article in BusinessWeek described how Bob Olstein, a successful stock analyst, predicts that the prices of stocks issued by firms that “engage in aggressive accounting practices” will go down, stating that other “investors have unrealistic expectations of the earnings potential.” He cites Mattel as an example by noting that big changes in net receivables, inventories, and deferred income taxes, as well as foreign currency translation gains that produced no cash, accounted for most of Mattel”s earnings growth. The company”s debt also jumped “from $440 million to $630 million in about two years.”

REQUIRED:

a. Explain how the statement of cash flows, especially if prepared under the indirect format, can be used to identify “quality of earnings” and “earnings persistence” problems.

b. Specifically describe how the information mentioned above about Mattel was used to indicate these kinds of problems.

c. Do you think that it is possible to identify over- and undervalued stocks by identifying firms that use aggressive accounting practices?

what does the phrase ldquo net of distributions rdquo mean 608355

Equity in unconsolidated affiliates

As of January 3, 2010, The Washington Post Company held significant, but not controlling, interest in Bowater Mercy Paper Company and other companies. These investments totaled $54.7 million on the company”s 2009 balance sheet. In its 2009 annual report, The Washington Post Company included a statement of cash flows, presented in the indirect form, which covered the three-year period of 2009, 2008, and 2007. A line item was included in the operating section of that statement, titled “equity in losses of affiliates, net of distributions,” and the dollar amounts for this item for 2009, 2008, and 2007 were $30.1 million, $9.1 million, and $(3.8) million, respectively.

REQUIRED:

a. Briefly describe the accounting methods used for unconsolidated affiliates, in which a company has a “significant influence.”

b. Explain why the dollar amounts were added to net income on the statement of cash flows.

c. What does the phrase “net of distributions” mean?

d. On the same statement of cash flows, The Washington Post Company reported another line item in the operating section, titled “net loss on sale or write-down of property, plant, and equipment,” which included dollar amounts for 2009, 2008, and 2007 of $19.7 million, $4.5 million, and $3.1 million, respectively. Describe the transactions that led to these disclosures and explain why the three-dollar amounts are added to net income in the calculation of net cash flow from operating activities. Would these amounts appear on any of the other financial statements, and if so, which one?

do you believe that using cash flow measures like the ones described above are super 608357

Misunderstandings in the financial press

The financial press often uses the term cash flow to refer to a company”s “net income + depreciation.” In a well-known article in Barron”s titled “No Substitutions, Please,” Intel was criticized for relying heavily on a number the company called “cash earnings,” computed by adding amortization of intangible assets to net earnings.

REQUIRED:

Do you believe that using cash flow measures like the ones described above are superior to using net cash from operations as disclosed in the operating section of the statement of cash flows? Explain.

explain how the cash management profile relates to the company s financial condition 608358

Cash management profiles across time— A mature firm

The following information was taken from the 2008 annual report and statement of cash flows of Eli Lilly, a major pharmaceutical (dollars in millions):*

2008

2007

2006

Net income (loss)

$(2,072)

$2,953

$2,663

Net cash from operations

7,296

5,155

3,976

Net cash from investing activities

(7,269)

(4,328)

608

Net cash from financing activities

(2,346)

(845)

(4,579)

Change in cash

2,276

111

103

“Change in the cash balance does not always equal We SLIM of cash from *maims. investing. and financing due to adjustments for exchange rate changes

REQUIRED:

a. Discuss the cash management profile of Lilly across the three-year period. Where did the company get its cash, and what did it do with it?

b. Explain how the cash management profile relates to the company”s financial condition and performance over this time period.

compute the price today of security c if c is priced at 68 what kind of arbitrage ta 608388

The following table shows today’s prices of security A and B and future payoffs of security A, B, and C for each state at maturity time. Compute the price today of security C. If C is priced at $68, what kind of arbitrage takes place? If C is priced at $60, what kind of arbitrage takes place?

Asset

Price Today

Future Payoff State 1

Future Payoff State 2

A

$70

$50

$100

B

$60

$30

$120

C

$39

$111

compute the martingale probabilities risk neutral and today rsquo s state prices of 608391

a. A stock price is now at $100. It can go up next year to $120 or fall to $80. The risk-free sukuk rate is 8 percent. Compute the martingale (risk-neutral) probabilities and today’s state prices of Arrow-Debreu securities.

b. A stock price is now at $100. It can go up after 77 days to $120 or fall to $80. The risk-free sukuk rate is 8 percent. Compute the martingale probabilities (risk-neutral) and today’s state prices of Arrow-Debreu securities.

c. A call option maturing in 77 days with a strike at $106 is written on the stock. Compute its price today.

a put option with a strike of 102 and maturing at end year 2 is written compute the 608393

A stock price is described in this binomial tree.

T = 0

T = 1

T = 2

$135

$118

$107

$100

$101

$87

$79

a. The sukuk risk-free rate is 7.8 percent. Compute the martingale probabilities and today’s state prices of Arrow-Debreu securities for each of the four states in year two.

b. A call option with a strike at $97 and maturing at end-year 2 is written. Compute the payoffs of the call. Compute the price of the call.

c. A put option with a strike of $102 and maturing at end-year 2 is written. Compute the payoffs of the put. Compute the price of the put.

x ltd manufactures three products in respect of which the following information is a 608274

X Ltd manufactures three products in respect of which the following information is available:

Product

Fine
Rs.

Superfine
Rs.

Deluxe
Rs.

Cost of Materials per unit

100

16

124

Direct Skilled Labour per unit

24

18

16

Direct Unskilled Labour per unit

8

16

40

Variable Cost per unit

132

50

180

Selling Price per unit

240

140

200

Fixed overheads are budgeted at Rs. 6,00,000. Skilled labour is paid at the rate of Rs. 12 per hour and unskilled labour is paid at Rs. 6 per hour. The marketing manager has estimated the quantity of sales as follows at the current price.

Product

Sales in Quantity

Fine

20,000 units

Superfine

28,000 units

Deluxe

12,000 units

The availability of skilled labour is a constraint. Only 80,000 skilled labour hours would be available.

You are required to work out the optimum product mix and ascertain the profit/loss expected at that level of output.

from the following particulars find the most profitable product mix and prepare a st 608275

From the following particulars, find the most profitable product mix and prepare a statement of profitability of that product mix:

Product A

Product B

Product C

Units Budgeted to be Produced and Sold

1,800

3,000

1,200

Selling Price per unit (Rs.)

60

55

50

Direct Material Required per unit (kg)

5

3

4

Direct Labour per unit (hrs)

4

3

2

Variable Overheads (Rs.)

7

13

8

Fixed Overheads (Rs.)

10

10

10

Cost of Direct Material per kg (Rs.)

4

4

4

Direct Labour hour rate (Rs.)

2

2

2

Maximum Possible units of Sale

4,000

5,000

1,500

All the three products are produced from the same direct material using the same type of machines and labour. Direct labour which is the key factor is limited to 18,600 hours.

abc ltd which produces three products furnishes the following data for the year 1998 608276

ABC Ltd, which produces three products, furnishes the following data for the year 1998:

Products

Alfa

Beta

Gama

Selling Price per unit (Rs.)

100

75

50

P/v Ratio

10%

20%

40%

Maximum Sales Potential (units)

40,000

25,000

10,000

Raw Material as a % of Variable Cost

50%

50%

50%

The company uses the same raw material for all the three products. Raw material is in short supply and the company has a quota for supply of raw material of the value of Rs. 18,00,000 for the year 1998 for manufacture of its products to meet its sales. The total Fixed Cost is Rs. 6,80,000.

You are required to:

  1. Determine a sales mix which will give the maximum overall profit keeping in view the short supply of raw material.
  2. Compute the maximum profit.

you are required to recommend which products the company should manufacture and purc 608277

ABC Ltd manufactures three products A, B and C using the same machine which has an annual working capacity of 70,000 hours. The details of costs and selling price of these products are as follows:

A (Rs.)

B (Rs.)

C (Rs.)

Sales price per unit

400

308

448

Variable Cost per unit:

Direct Material

140

80

160

Direct Wages (@ Rs. 16 per machine hour)

96

64

112

Variable Overheads

72

80

84

Total Variable Cost per unit

308

224

356

Maximum Market Demand (in units)

6,000

5,000

10,000

Total Fixed Cost of the company amount to Rs. 3,50,000 per annum. The company could purchase similar products from an assembly centre at the following costs:

A

Rs. 350 per unit

B

Rs. 280 per unit

C

Rs. 400 per unit

You are required to recommend which products the company should manufacture and purchase in what quantity to maximize the company profit and also compute the overall profit of the company as per your recommended optimum production mix.

x ltd manufactures a semi conductor for which the cost and price structure is given 608278

X Ltd manufactures a semi-conductor for which the cost and price structure is given as follows:

Rs. per Unit

Selling Price

500

Direct Materials

150

Direct Labour

100

Variable Overheads

50

Fixed Cost

Rs. 2,00,000

The product is manufactured by a machine, whose spare part costing Rs. 2,000 needs a replacement after every 100 pieces of output. This is in addition to the above costs. Assume that no defectives are produced and that the spare parts are readily available in the market at all times at Rs. 2,000.

  1. Prepare the profitability statement for the production levels of 2,000 units and 3,000 units, when the Fixed Cost = Rs. 1,00,000.
  2. What is the BEP for the above data?
  3. Comment on the BEP, if the Fixed Cost can be reduced to Rs. 1,80,000 from the existing level of Rs. 2,00,000.

you are required to work out whether 60 000 units should be produced for a transfer 608279

The manager of division X of a company has given a production budget of 2,00,000 units of components, to be manufactured at a price which will provide a return of 25% on the average assets employed in the division.

Following are the relevant data in relation thereto:

Variable Cost

Re. 1 per Unit

Fixed Overheads

Rs. 4,00,000

Average Assets Employed:

Stocks

Rs. 6,00,000

Debtors

Rs. 2,00,000

Fixed Assets

Rs. 4,00,000

However, the marketing department of the company considers that the maximum units of the components the market can take at the proposed price is 1,40,000 only.

The production manager of division Y is ready to purchase 60,000 units of the component at a price of Rs. 2.25 per unit, as he feels that the component can be manufactured in his division at that price.

The manager of division X feels that rather than selling at Rs. 2.25 per unit, he would restrict the production in his division to 1,40,000 units only. By this, he feels that he could reduce Rs. 80,000 in stocks, Rs. 30,000 in debtors and Rs. 90,000 in plant and also reduce selling expenses by Rs. 40,000.

You are required to work out whether 60,000 units should be produced for a transfer to Division Y at Rs. 2.25.

advise the company whether any or all of the export orders should be accepted or not 608281

A company has an installed production capacity of 1,00,000 units and presently it is working at 70% capacity utilization. As the production capacity utilization increases, the cost per unit decreases as follows:

Capacity Utilization

Cost per Unit (Rs.)

70 %

97

80 %

92

90 %

87

100 %

82

The company has received three export orders from different sources as follows:

Source A

5,000 units at Rs. 55 per unit

Source B

10,000 units at Rs. 52 per unit

Source C

10,000 units at Rs. 51 per unit

Advise the company whether any or all of the export orders should be accepted or not.

fill in the blanks of the following statements 608283

Fill in the blanks of the following statements:

  1. Decision Making means the process of choosing of the _________ among the various alternative actions.
  2. A cost that is essentially important and relevant to a Decision Making process is called _________
  3. When there is no change in the Fixed Cost due to a change in the volume of production or sales, _________ becomes equal to the Marginal Cost.
  4. A key or limiting factor is a factor which limits or restricts the production or the sales level at a point of time due to scarcity of a _________.
  5. Both Differential Costing as well as Marginal Costing are techniques of _________.
  6. For an effective Decision Making, evaluations of relevant _________ and _________ factors are essentially required.

which of the two suggestions would you recommend if the company desires to maintain 608285

Java Ltd manufactures and markets a single product. The following information is available:

Materials per unit

Rs. 8.00

Conversion costs (variable) per unit

Rs. 6.00

Dealer’s margin per unit

Rs. 2.00

Selling Price per unit

Rs. 20.00

Fixed Cost

Rs. 2,50,000

Present sales

80,000 units

Capacity utilization

60%

There is acute competition. Extra efforts are necessary to sell. Suggestions have been made for increasing sales: (i) by reducing the sales price by 5% and (ii) by increasing the dealer’s margin by 25% over the existing rate.

Which of the two suggestions would you recommend if the company desires to maintain the present profit?

a company producing 24 000 units provides you the following information 608286

A company producing 24,000 units provides you the following information:

Direct Materials

1,20,000

Direct Wages

84,000

Variable Overheads

48,000

Semi-variable Overheads

28,000

Fixed Overheads

80,000

Total cost

3,60,000

The product is sold at Rs. 20 per unit. The management proposes to increase the production by 3,000 units for sales in the foreign market. It is estimated that the semi-variable overheads will increase by Rs. 1,000. But the product will be sold at Rs. 14 per unit in the foreign market. However, no additional capital expenditure will be incurred.

The management seeks your advice as a Cost Accountant. What will you advise them?

present a suitable analysis of the data indicating whether the proposal should be ac 608288

The cost per unit of the three products X, Y and Z are given as follows:

Particulars

X (Rs.)

Y (Rs.)

Z (Rs.)

Direct Material

20

16

18

Direct Labour

12

14

12

Variable Overheads

8

10

6

Fixed Expenses

6

6

4

46

46

40

Profit

18

14

12

Selling Price

64

60

52

No. of units Produced

10,000

5,000

8,000

Production arrangements are such that if one product is given up, the production of the others can be raised by 50%. The directors propose that Product Z should be given up because the contribution from the product is the lowest.

Present a suitable analysis of the data indicating whether the proposal should be accepted or not.

a company manufactures electric motors at a price of rs 6 900 each which is made up 608289

A company manufactures electric motors at a price of Rs. 6,900 each, which is made up as follows:

Direct Material

3,200

Direct Labour

400

Variable Overheads

1,000

Fixed Overheads

200

Depreciation

200

Variable Selling Overheads

100

Royalty

200

Profit

1,000

6,300

Central Excise Duty

600

6,900

  1. A foreign buyer has offered to buy 200 such motors at Rs. 5,000 each. As a Cost Accountant of the company, would you advise acceptance of the offer?
  2. What should the company quote for a motor to be purchased by a company under the same management if it should be at cost?

state whether the offer is acceptable or not 608291

A mechanical toy factory presents the following information for the year 2009:

Material Cost

Rs. 1,20,000

Labour Cost

Rs. 2,40,000

Fixed Overheads

Rs. 1,20,000

Variable Overheads

Rs. 60,000

Units Produced

12,000

Selling Price per unit

Rs. 50

The available capacity is a production of 20,000 units per year. The firm has an offer for the purchase of 5,000 additional units at a price of Rs. 40 per unit. It is expected that by accepting this offer there will be a saving of rupee one per unit in the material cost on all the units manufactured, the fixed overheads will increase by Rs. 35,000 and the overall efficiency will drop by 2% on all production.

State whether the offer is acceptable or not.

wanna manufacturing company sells the following three products 608292

Wanna manufacturing company sells the following three products:

X @ Rs. 8 per unit, Y @ Rs. 2 per unit and Z @ Rs. 3 per unit.

While product X contributes 20% its revenue in Fixed Cost and profit, product Y contributes 10% and product Z contributes 60%. The company earned a net profit of Rs. 50,000 last year by selling 50,000 units of X, 1,50,000 units of Y and 60,000 units of Z.

It is believed that the profit picture can be improved by eliminating product Y and concentrating the sales efforts on products X and Z. There is an opportunity to increase the sale of product X to 70,000 units, but product Z will probably be sold at the same volume next year.

As a Cost Accountant of the company, give your suggestion regarding the elimination of product Y.

king parts ltd has an annual production of 90 000 units for a motor component the co 608293

King Parts Ltd has an annual production of 90,000 units for a motor component. The component’s cost structure is as follows:

Material per unit

270

Labour per unit (25% fixed)

180

Expenses per unit:

Variable

90

Fixed

135

225

Total cost per unit

675

  1. The purchase manager has an offer from a supplier who is willing to supply the component at Rs. 540. Should the component be purchased and production stopped?
  2. Assume the resources now used for this component’s manufacture are to be used to produce another new product for which the selling price is Rs. 485.

In the latter case, the material price will be Rs. 200 per unit. 90,000 units of this product can be produced at the same cost basis as above for labour and expenses. Discuss whether it would be advisable to divert the resources to manufacture that new product, on the footing that the component presently being produced would instead of being produced, be purchased from the market.

firdous ltd operating at 75 level of activity produces and sells two products k and 608294

Firdous Ltd operating at 75% level of activity produces and sells two products K and L. The cost sheets of these two products are as follows:

Product K

Product L

Units Produced and Sold

600

400

Direct Materials

2

4

Direct Labour

4

4

Factory Overheads (40% fixed)

5

3

Selling & Administration Overheads (60% fixed)

8

5

Total Cost per unit

19

16

Selling Price per unit

23

19

Factory overheads are absorbed on the basis of machine hour which is the limiting (key) factor. The machine hour rate is Rs. 2 per hour.

The company receives an offer from Italy for the purchase of product K at a price of Rs. 17.50 per unit. Alternatively, the company has another offer from Japan for the purchase of product L at a price of Rs. 15.50 per unit. In both the cases, a special packing charge of Re. 0.50 per unit has to be borne by the company.

The company can accept either of the two export orders and in either case, the company can supply such quantities as may be possible to produce by utilizing the balance of 25% of its capacity.

You are required to prepare:

  1. a statement showing the economies of the two export proposals giving your recommendations as to which proposal should be accepted.
  2. a statement showing the overall profitability of the company after incorporating the export proposal recommended by you.

a company has a plant capacity of 19 800 machine hours 608295

A company has a plant capacity of 19,800 machine hours. The plant can either produce product M or product N or a mixture of both. Following is the relevant information given:

Product M

Product N

Selling Price per unit (Rs.)

20

30

Variable Cost per unit (Rs.)

30

18

Machine hours required per unit (hrs)

5

3

Market conditions are such that not more than 5,000 units of M and 4,000 units of N can be sold in a year. Fixed Costs are Rs. 60,000.

Compute the product mix that will maximize the net income and find that maximum income.

from the following information state which of the alternative sales mixes you would 608296

From the following information, state which of the alternative sales mixes you would recommend to the management and why:

Product R

Product S

Selling Price per unit (Rs.)

25

20

Direct Materials per unit (Rs.)

8

6

Direct Wages

24 hours @

16 hours @

25 paise per hour

25 paise per hour

Fixed overheads — Rs. 750; Variable overheads — 150% of direct wages.

Alternative sales mix:

  1. 250 units of R and 250 units of S.
  2. Nil units of R and 400 units of S.
  3. 400 units of R and 100 units of S.

a company producing two products p and q using a single production process furnishes 608297

A company producing two products P and Q using a single production process furnishes the following cost data:

Product P

Product Q

Selling Price per unit (Rs.)

20

30

Variable Cost per unit (Rs.)

11

16

Machine hours required per unit of production (hrs)

1

2

Market Limitation (units)

1,00,000

2,50,000

Total machine hours available — 4,00,000; Fixed Cost per annum — Rs. 26,00,000.

Considering the limiting factors of machine hours and market limitations, you are required to:

  1. Indicate the best combination of products to give an optimum contribution.
  2. Show the additional machinery requirement to be augmented on rental basis at an annual rent of Rs. 1,50,000 per machine to provide an additional capacity of 30,000 hours per machine.
  3. Change in number of machines to be rented if the annual rental charges reduce to Rs. 1,25,000 per machine.

xy ltd is manufacturing three household products a b and c and selling them in a com 608298

XY Ltd is manufacturing three household products A, B and C and selling them in a competitive market. Details of the current demand, selling price and cost structure are given as follows:

A

B

C

Expected Demand (units)

10,000

12,000

20,000

Selling Price per unit (Rs.)

20

16

10

Variable Cost per unit (Rs.):

Direct Materials (Rs. 10/kg)

6

4

2

Direct Labour (Rs. 15/hr.)

3

3

1.50

Variable Overheads

2

1

1

Fixed Overheads per unit (Rs.)

5

4

2

The company is frequently affected by an acute scarcity of raw material and high labour turnover. During the next period it is expected to have one of the following situations:

  1. Raw materials available will be only 12,100 kg.
  2. Direct labour hours available will be only 5,000 hrs.
  3. It may be possible to increase the sales of any one product by 25% without any additional Fixed Costs, but by spending Rs. 20,000 on advertisement. There will be no shortage of materials or labour.

Suggest the best production plan in each case and the resultant profit that the company would earn according to your suggestion.

if sales are 10 and 15 above the be then determine the net profits 608241

Selling Price per unit

Rs. 10.00

Trade Discount

5%

Direct Material Cost per unit

Rs. 3.00

Direct Labour Cost per unit

Rs. 2.00

Fixed Overheads

Rs. 10,000

Variable Overheads on Direct labour cost

100%

If sales are 10% and 15% above the BE, then determine the Net Profits.

db ltd furnished the following information 608243

DB Ltd furnished the following information:

2004–05 Rs.

2005–06 Rs.

Sales (Rs. 10/unit)

2,00,000

2,50,000

Profit

30,000

50,000

You are required to compute:

  1. P/V Ratio.
  2. BEP.
  3. Total Variable Cost for 2004–05 and 2005–06.
  4. Sales required to earn a profit of Rs. 60,000.
  5. Profit/Loss when sales are Rs. 1,00,000.
  6. MS when profit is Rs. 80,000.
  7. During 2006–07, due to an increase in cost, the Variable Cost is expected to rise to Rs. 7/unit and Fixed Cost to Rs. 55,000. If the Selling Price cannot be increased, what will be the amount of sales to maintain the profit of 2005–06?

what would be the value and volume of sales if products are sold to make a profit of 608245

Material per unit

Rs. 50

Labour per unit

Rs. 80

Variable Overhead per unit

75% of Labour cost

Selling Price per unit

Rs. 250

Total Fixed overhead

Rs. 2,40,000

Find out the following:

  1. BEPS in value and in volume.
  2. What would be the value and volume of sales, if products are sold to make a profit of Rs. 1,20,000?
  3. If the Selling Price per unit is reduced by Rs. 20, what would be the BEPS in value and in volume?

a business produces 200 units of a product by making the following expenditure 608246

A business produces 200 units of a product by making the following expenditure:

(i) Materials—Rs. 30,000; (ii) Labour—Rs. 20,000; (iii) Factory Overheads—Rs. 4,000; (iv) Administrative Overheads—Rs. 5,754; and (v) Selling and Distribution Overheads—Rs. 1,500.

The products are sold at a price of Rs. 400 per unit.

The above expenditures are classified into fixed and variable types as follows:

Expenditure

Fixed

Variable

i. Materials

Nil

100%

ii. Labour

50%

50%

iii. Factory Overheads

25%

75%

iv. Administrative Overheads

100%

Nil

v. Selling & Distribution Overheads

60%

40%

From the above information, determine the following:

  1. Total Variable Costs and Fixed Costs.
  2. Contribution.
  3. P/V Ratio.
  4. BEPS in units and in value.

zebra ltd has furnished the following data for 2 years 608252

Zebra Ltd has furnished the following data for 2 years:

2007–08

2008–09

Sales

Rs. 8,00,000

?

P/V Ratio

50%

37.5%

MS (Sales as a Percentage of Total Sales)

40%

21.875%

There has been substantial savings in the Fixed Cost in the year 2008–09 due to the restructuring process. The company could maintain its sales-quantity level of 2007–08 in the year 2008–09 by reducing the Selling Price.

You are required to calculate the following:

  1. Sales for 2008–09 in rupees.
  2. BES for 2008–09 in rupees.
  3. Fixed Cost for 2008–09.

you are required to compute the be volume for the year 2005 608253

A pharmaceutical company produces formulations having a shelf life of 1 year. The company has an opening stock of 30,000 boxes on 1 January 2005 and is expected to produce 1,30,000 boxes as was in the just-ended year of 2004. The expected sale would be 1,50,000 boxes. The costing department has worked out an escalation in the cost by 25% on the Variable Cost and 10% on the Fixed Cost. While the Fixed Cost for the year 2004 is Rs. 40 per unit, the new price announced for 2005 is Rs. 100 per box. The Variable Cost on opening stock is Rs. 40 per box.

You are required to compute the BE volume for the year 2005.

beps of the merged plant and capacity utilization for achieving beps 608254

K1 and K2 are two similar plants under the same management who want them to be merged for better operation. The details of K1 and K2 are as follows:

K1

K2

Capacity Utilization

90%

60%

Sales

Rs. 6,30,000

Rs. 3,60,000

Variable Cost

Rs. 3,60,000

Rs. 2,40,000

Fixed Cost

Rs. 1,20,000

Rs. 80,000

Find out:

  1. BEPS of the merged plant and capacity utilization for achieving BEPS.
  2. Profitability of the merged plant at 80% capacity.
  3. Sales of the merged plant to earn a profit of Rs. 1,00,000.

a company manufactures a product currently utilizing 80 capacity with a turnover of 608256

A company manufactures a product, currently utilizing 80% capacity with a turnover of Rs. 8,00,000 at Rs. 25 per unit. The cost data are as follows:

Material Cost is Rs. 7.50 per unit, Labour Cost is Rs. 6.25 per unit, Semi-Variable Cost (including the Variable Cost of Rs. 3.75 per unit) is Rs. 1,80,000. The Fixed Cost is Rs. 90,000 up to 80% level of the output; and beyond this, an additional amount of Rs. 20,000 will be incurred.

Calculate:

  1. Activity level at BEP.
  2. Number of units to be sold to earn a net income of 8% of sales.
  3. Activity level needed to earn a profit of Rs. 95,000.
  4. What should be the Selling Price per unit, if BEP is to be brought down to 40% activity level?

a company producing a single product sells it at rs 50 per unit 608257

A company producing a single product sells it at Rs. 50 per unit. The unit Variable Cost is Rs. 35 and Fixed Cost amounts to Rs. 12 lakhs per annum. With this data, you are required to calculate the following, treating each as independent of the other:

  1. P/V Ratio and BES.
  2. New BES, if the Variable Cost increases by Rs. 3 per unit, without any increase in the Selling Price.
  3. Increase in the sales required if profits are to be increased by Rs. 2.4 lakhs.
  4. Percentage increase/decrease in the sales volume units to offset:
    1. An increase of Rs. 3 in the Variable Cost per unit.
    2. A 10% increase in the Selling Price without affecting the existing profit quantum.
  5. Quantum of advertisement expenditure permissible to increase the sales by Rs. 1.2 lakhs, without affecting the existing profit quantum.

quality product ltd has drawn up the following budget for the year 1998 99 608259

Quality Product Ltd has drawn up the following budget for the year 1998–99:

Raw Material

20,00,000

Labour, Store, Power and other Variable Costs

6,00,000

Fixed Manufacturing Overheads

7,00,000

Packing and Variable Distribution Cost

4,00,000

Fixed General Overheads Including Selling

3,00,000

40,00,000

Sales Revenue @ Rs. 50 per unit

50,00,000

Budgeted Profit

10,00,000

The General Manager suggests to reduce the selling price by 5% and expects to achieve an additional volume of 5%. The more intensive manufacturing programme will involve additional costs of Rs. 50,000 for production planning. It will also be necessary to open an additional sales office at the cost of Rs. 1,00,000 per annum.

The Sales Manager, on the other hand, suggests to increase the selling price by 10% which, it is estimated, will reduce the sales volume by 10%. At the same time, a saving in the manufacturing overheads and general overheads of Rs. 50,000 and Rs. 1,00,000 per annum, respectively, is expected on this reduced volume.

Which of these two proposals would you accept and why? Show the complete working.

show the computation to answer the following questions 608260

Mr X has Rs. 2,00,000 as the investment in his business firm. He wants a 15% return on his money. From an analysis of the recent cost figures, he finds that his Variable Cost of operating is 60% of the sales, while his Fixed Costs are Rs. 80,000 per year.

Show the computation to answer the following questions:

  1. What sales volume must be obtained to reach the Break-even point (BEP)?
  2. What sales volume must be obtained to get a 15% return on the investment?
  3. Mr X estimates that even if he closed the doors of his business, he would incur Rs. 25,000 as expenses per year. At what sales would he be better off by locking his business up?

you are required to suggest a whether the plant should be shut down at this level an 608261

Alaska Paints, working at a normal capacity, manufactures 4,00,000 tins per year. The cost of manufacturing per tin is as follows:

Consumption of Materials

15.60

Direct Wages

4.20

Variable Factory Overheads

5.00

Fixed Overheads

8.00

32.80

Variable selling and administrative expenses amount to Rs. 1.25 per tin. Each tin is sold for Rs. 45.00.

During the next quarter, only 20,000 tins can be sold. The management plans to shut down the plant estimating that the manufacturing Fixed Costs can be reduced by Rs.1,48,000 for the quarter. While the plant is in operation, fixed overheads are incurred at a uniform rate.

You are required to suggest: (a) whether the plant should be shut down at this level; and (b) at what level of activity per quarter, the plant should be shut down.

you are required to suggest which product should be processed and sold 608262

Your company produces two products P and Q. The relevant data per unit of output are given as follows:

P (Rs.)

Q (Rs.)

Cost of Direct Material

28.00

13.00

Direct Labour

15.00

25.00

Variable Factory Overheads

25.00

12.50

Fixed Factory Overheads

10.00

5.00

Variable Selling Expenses

14.00

10.00

Total Cost

92.00

65.50

Selling Price

100.00

70.00

Profit

8.00

4.50

Factory overheads are applied on the basis of machine hour. The existing plant and infrastructure will allow production and sale of either P or Q. Both the products are processed through the same production centre.

You are required to suggest which product should be processed and sold.

two firms a co and b co sell the same type of product in the same market 608264

Two firms A & Co. and B & Co. sell the same type of product in the same market. Their budgeted Profit & Loss account (Profit & Loss A/c) for the year that ends on 31 March 1996 is as follows:

A &Co.

B &Co.

Sales

5,00,000

6,00,000

Less:

Variable cost

4,00,000

4,00,000

Fixed cost

30,000

70.000

4 30 000

4 70 000

Net profit

70,000

1,30,000

Required:

  1. Calculate at which sales both the firms will earn an equal profit.
  2. State which firm is likely to earn greater profit in condition of:
    1. Heavy demand for the product.
    2. Low demand for the product.

the cost per unit of the three products a b and c of a concern are as follows 608265

The cost per unit of the three products A, B and C of a concern are as follows:

Particulars

A (Rs.)

B (Rs.)

C (Rs.)

Variable Cost

20

20

18

Fixed Cost

3

3

2

Total Cost

23

23

20

Profit

9

7

6

Selling Price

32

30

26

No. of units Produced

10,000

5,000

8,000

Production arrangements are that if one product is given up, the production of the others can be raised by 50%. The directors propose that C should be given up because the contribution in that case is the lowest.

Do you agree? What other non-cost considerations should be kept in mind before taking any decision in such a situation?

diwana ltd manufactures automobile accessories and parts 608268

Diwana Ltd manufactures automobile accessories and parts. The following are the total costs and also the unit costs of processing a component, DIL-2010:

Total Cost for 1,00,000 units

Per unit Cost

Direct Material

5,00,000

5

Direct Labour

8,00,000

8

Variable Factory Overheads

6,00,000

6

Fixed Factory Overheads

5,00,000

5

24,00,000

24

Another manufacturer has offered to sell the same part to Diwana Ltd for Rs. 22 each.

The fixed overheads would continue to be incurred even when the component is bought out, although there would be a reduction to the extent to Rs. 1,50,000 following the savings in the salaries of supervisory personnel that could be avoided if the company opts to ‘buy’ rather than ‘make.’

  1. Should the part be made or bought considering that the present facility when released following a buying decision would remain idle?
  2. In case the released facility can be rented to another manufacturer for Rs. 50,000, as there is a good demand for spare facility, what would be the position?

following are the details of costs per unit at the current level of production 608270

Although Kaloo Ltd has the capacity to produce 16,000 units per month, it currently produces and sells only 10,000 units per month at Rs. 15 each. Following are the details of costs per unit at the current level of production:

Direct Material

5.00

Direct Labour

3.00

Variable Factory Overheads

0.75

Fixed Factory Overheads

1.50

Variable Selling Expenses

0.25

Fixed Administrative Expenses

1.00

11.50

  1. Should the company accept a special order of 4,000 units at Rs. 10 per unit?
  2. What is the maximum price the company should be willing to pay to the outside supplier who is interested in manufacturing this product?
  3. What would be the effect on the monthly contribution margin if the selling price is reduced to Rs. 14 each, resulting in a 10% increase in the sales volume?

the following two alternative proposals are under consideration of the company 608271

Normal capacity of a company is 2,40,000 machine hours, but at present the company utilizes 40% of its capacity. In this situation, the monthly performance of the company is as follows:

Rs. in Lakhs

Sales

30.00

Consumption of Materials

15.00

Wages (including Rs. 1 lakh for security guards)

6.00

Factory Overheads (60% fixed)

5.00

Other Overheads (10% variable)

3.50

Net Profit

0.50

The following two alternative proposals are under consideration of the company:

  1. The factory will utilize about 50% of the unutilized capacity by accepting the contract work, by charging Rs. 3.50 per machine hour.
  2. Discontinue the own production completely and lease out the entire facility on a monthly rental of Rs. 6.85 lakhs.

You are required to comment on the action that is to be taken.

the following data are available with respect to the coffee shop of a company for a 608272

The following data are available with respect to the coffee shop of a company for a week:

BEP

2,00,000 units

Profits when 2,40,000 units are sold

Rs. 80,000

Variable Cost to Sales Ratio

60%

Coffee shop remains open from 8 a.m. to 8 p.m. everyday. The manager is considering an extension of operations under two distinct proposals. Proposal I suggests operations till mid-night and this will increase the sales by Rs. 24,000 per week and involve additional costs on waiters, clerks and so on of Rs. 8,000 per week. The other alternative is to operate 24 hours a day. This will add to sales by Rs. 40,000 per week and involve additional costs on staff of Rs. 18,000 per week. Variable Costs (only on provisions) approximate about 40% of the sales price.

You are asked to evaluate whether the shop should remain open from 8 a.m. to 8 p.m. or 8 a.m. to midnight or 24 hours a day from the view point of profitability.

recommend which of the sales mixes should be adopted by the company 608273

A company produces and sells two products A and B. The company incurs Rs. 1,00,000 per annum towards fixed overheads and has provided the following further information:

Product A Rs. per Unit

Product B Rs. per Unit

Direct Materials @ Rs. 50 per kg

200

250

Direct Wages @ Rs. 10 per hour

100

150

Variable Overheads

100

150

Selling Price

520

715

Depending on the availability of raw materials and labour hours, the company considers the following two alternative sales mixes:

  1. 1,000 units of A and 600 units of B.
  2. 600 units of A and 1,000 units of B.

Recommend which of the sales mixes should be adopted by the company.

from the following particulars prepare the branch stock account and the branch profi 608213

VRS Ltd of Chennai invoices goods to its branch at Bangalore at cost plus 33 1/3%. From the following particulars, prepare the Branch Stock Account and the Branch Profit and Loss Account as they would appear in the books of H.O.:

Rs

Stock at Commencement at Branch at Invoice Price

37,500

Stock at Close at Branch at Invoice Price

30,000

Goods sent to Branch during the year at Invoice Price

2,50,000

(includes Goods invoiced at Rs 5,000 to Branch on Dec 31, 2009 but not received by the Branch before the close of the year)

Return of Goods to H.O. (at Invoice Price)

12,500

Credit Sales at Branch

2,25,000

Cash Sales at Branch

12,500

Invoice Value of Goods Preferred

2,500

Normal Loss at Branch due to Wastage and Deterioration of Stock (Invoice Price)

3,750

VRS Ltd closes its books on Dec 31, 2009

you are required to show chennai branch account in the books of h o for the year 200 608216

The following data relate to Chennai branch for the year 2009:

Jan 1, 2009 Rs

Dec 31, 2009 Rs

Stock

1,50,000

2,25,000

Debtors

2,10,000

2,85,000

Petty Cash

750

360

Goods costing Rs 16,50,000 were sold by the branch @ 25% on cost, cash sales amounted to Rs 4,50,000; and the rest-credit sales. Branch spent Rs 90,000 for salaries Rs 36,000 for rent and Rs 24,000 for petty expenses. All expenses were remitted by H.O. Branch received all goods from H.O. You are required to show Chennai Branch Account in the books of H.O. for the year 2009 and prove your answer by preparing a Branch Trading and Branch Profit and Loss Account.

the expenses relating to the branch for the year ended mar 31 2010 amounted to rs 51 608218

From the following particular of Kolkatta Branch, prepare Branch Account and Branch Trading and Profit and Loss Account in the books of the H.O. for the year ended Mar 31, 2010:

On Apr 1, 2009 stock in trade at the branch, at selling price, amounted to Rs 1,45,980 and debtors to Rs 19,320.

During the year ended Mar 31, 2010, the following transactions took place at the branch:

Rs

Goods received by Branch at Selling Price

3,65,400

Cash Sales

1,92,450

Credit Sales

1,53,840

Goods returned to H.O. at Selling Price

4,680

Reduction in Selling Price authorised by H.O.

2,910

Cash received from Debtors

1,27,980

Debtors written off as irrecoverable

1,950

Cash Discounts allowed

3,360

All purchases are made by H.O., goods for the branch delivered to it direct and charged out at selling price which is cost price plus 50%.

A consignment of goods despatched to branch in Mar 2010 at a selling price of Rs 3,600 was not received by the branch till Apr 9, 2010 and had not been included in the stock figure. The expenses relating to the branch for the year ended Mar 31, 2010 amounted to Rs 51,870. On Mar 31, 2010, physical stock at the branch, at selling price amounted to Rs 1,56,600.

goods are invoiced to the branch at cost plus 33 1 3 the sale price is cost plus 50 608222

From the following particulars, ascertain the profit earned by the branch:

Rs

Opening Stock

1,20,000

Goods sent to Branch (Invoice Price)

6,60,000

Expenses at Branch

30,000

Sales at Branch

8,10,000

Goods are invoiced to the branch at cost plus 33 1/3%; the sale price is cost plus 50%. Also ascertain the stock reserve that must be maintained in respect of the unrealised profit.

x ltd has retail branch at cochin goods are sold to customers at cost plus 100 the w 608223

X Ltd. has retail branch at Cochin. Goods are sold to customers at cost plus 100%. The wholesale price is cost plus 80%. Goods are invoiced to Cochin at wholesale price. From the following particulars calculate the profit made at H.O. and Cochin for the year 2009:

H.O. Rs

B.O Rs

Stock on Jan 1, 2009

75,000

Nil

Purchases

4,50,000

Nil

Goods sent to Branch (at Invoice Price)

1,62,000

Sales

4,59,000

1,50,000

Note: Sales at H.O. are made on wholesale basis; stock at branch is valued at invoice price.

a h o sent goods to its retail branches at 37 5 less than the catalogue price which 608225

A H.O. sent goods to its retail branches at 37.5% less than the catalogue price which is cost plus 100%. From the following particulars, prepare the necessary ledger accounts to show the profit made at H.O. and the branch assuring that goods are sold at catalogue price:

H.O. Rs

B.O Rs

Opening Stock

At Cost

1,600

At Invoice Price

1,000

Purchases

6,40,000

Goods sent to Branch (at Invoice Price)

3,96,000

Goods returned to Supplier

4,800

Sales

5,00,000

2,50,000

Goods destroyed by Fire (Retail Value)

3,200

Expenses

1,01,500

50,750

a chennai h o passes one entry at the end of each month to adjust the position arisi 608228

A Chennai H.O. passes one entry at the end of each month to adjust the position arising out of inter-branch transactions during the month. From the following inter-branch transactions in June 20, make the entries in the books of Chennai H.O. (Give details of the workings)

  1. Mumbai Branch:
    1. Received goods from Kolkatta branch Rs 18,000 and Hyderabad branch Rs 12,000.
    2. Sent goods to Hyderabad branch Rs 30,000 and Kolkatta branch Rs 24,000.
    3. Sent acceptances to Kolkatta branch Rs 12,000 and Hyderabad branch Rs 6,000.
  2. Delhi Branch: [In addition to (a) above]
    1. Received goods from Kolkatta branch Rs 30,000 and Mumbai branch Rs 12,000
    2. Cash sent to Kolkatta branch Rs 6,000 Mumbai branch Rs 12,000
  3. Kolkatta Branch: [In addition to (a) & (b)];
    1. Sent goods to Hyderabad branch Rs 18,000
    2. Received Bills receivable from Hyderabad branch Rs 180,000
    3. Received cash from Hyderabad branch Rs 10,000

on dec 31 2009 the branch had sent a cheque of rs 5 000 to the h o and not received 608230

The H.O. of a business and its branch kept their own books and prepares its own profit and loss account. The following are the balances appearing in the two sets of books as on Dec 31, 2009 after ascertainment of profit and after making all adjustments except these referred to below:

Particulars

H.O.

Branch

Dr. As

Cr. As

Dr. As

Cr. As

Capitals

5,00,000

Fixed Assets

1,80,000

80,000

Stock

1,71,000

53,700

Debtors and Creditors

39,100

19,800

24,200

9,600

Cash

53,700

7,100

Profit and Loss Account

73,300

15,300

B.O. Account

1,49,300

H.O. Account

1,40,100

5,93,100

5,93,100

1,65,000

1,65,000

Set out balance sheet of the business as on Dec 31, 2009 and the Journal entries necessary (in both the sets of books) to record the adjustments dealing with the following:

  1. On Dec 31, 2009, the branch had sent a cheque of Rs 5,000 to the H.O. and not received by H.O. not credited to branch account till Jan 5, 2010.
  2. Goods valued Rs 4,200 had been forwarded by the H.O. to branch and invoiced on Dec 29, 2009, but were not received by the branch nor dealt with in branch’s books till Jan 9, 2010.
  3. The profit shown by the branch is to be transferred to the H.O. books.
  4. Branch assets and liabilities are to be recorded in the books of the H.O.

prepare trading and profit and loss account of goa branch for the year ended dec 31 608231

The following is the Trial Balance of Goa Branch as on Dec 31, 2009.

Dr. Rs

Cr. Rs

Mumbai H.O.

6,480

Stock Jan 1, 2009

12,000

Purchases

1,95,600

Goods received from H.O.

38,000

Sales

2,76,000

Goods supplied to H.O.

12,000

Salaries

9,000

Debtors

7,400

Creditors

3,700

Rent

3,920

Office Expenses

2,940

Cash at Bank

3,560

Furniture

12,000

Depreciation on Furniture

800

2,91,700

2,91,700

Stock at Branch on Dec 31, 2009 was valued at Rs 15,400. Account of Goa Branch in the H.O. books stood at Rs 920 (Debit). On Dec 26, 2009, the H.O. forwarded goods to the value of Rs 7,400 to the branch where they were received on Jan 5, 2010.

  1. Prepare Trading and Profit and Loss Account of Goa Branch for the year ended Dec 31, 2009 and its Balance Sheet on that date.
  2. Pass journal entries in the books of H.O. to incorporate the above shown trial balance
  3. Show Goa Branch Account as it would be closed in H.O. Ledger

you are required to prepare the branch current account in the h o books after incorp 608232

Ashok Ltd. has its H.O. in Chennai and a Branch in Delhi where as separate set of books are used. The following are the trial balances extracted on Mar 31, 20.

Particulars

H.O.

Branch

Dr. Rs

Cr. Rs

Dr. Rs

Cr. Rs

Share Capital (Authorised 2,00,000

16,00,000

Equity Shares of Rs 10 each)

Issued: 1,60,000 Equity Shares

Profit and Loss Account (Apr 1, 20-)

50,620

Interim Dividend paid during the Year

60,000

General Reserve

2,00,000

Current Assets

4,44,940

Fixed Assets

10,60,000

1,90,000

Debtors and Creditors

1,01,000

43,800

38,200

20,800

Profit for the Year

1,64,400

63,400

Cash Balance

1,25,460

13,100

Current Account

2,67,420

1,00,920

2,58,020

20,58,820

20,58,820

3,42,220

3,42,220

The difference between the balances of the current account in the two sets of books is accounted for as follows:

  1. Cash remitted by the branch on Mar 31, but received by the H.O. on Apr 2, Rs 6,000.
  2. Stock stolen in transit from H.O. and charged to the branch by the H.O. but not credited to H.O. in the branch books as the branch manager declined to admit any liability (not covered by insurance) Rs 3,400.

You are required to prepare the Branch Current Account in the H.O. books after incorporating Branch Trial Balance through Journal. Also prepare the company’s Balance Sheet as on Mar 31, 2014.

you are required to prepare the trading and profit and loss account in columnar form 608233

The following are the Trial Balances of VRS Ltd Chennai, and its Delhi Branch as on Dec 2009:

Particulars

14.0. As

Branch As

Particulars

H.O. As

Branch As

Opening Stock

90,000

32,800

Creditors

40,660

10,820

Purchases

2,20,000

51,320

Goods sent to Branch

28,800

Wages

1,61,680

26,140

Sales

6,60,400

1,39,800

Manufacturing

71,720

13,660

H.O. Account

56,000

Expenses

 

 

 

 

 

Machinery:

 

 

Capital inShares

4,00,000

H.O.

2,00,000

Discount Earned

2,200

600

Branch

1,00,000

Purchases Returns

5,100

1,320

Furniture:

 

 

 

 

 

H.O.

10,000

 

 

 

Branch

4,000

 

 

 

Rent

12,000

6,600

 

 

 

Salaries

60,000

24,000

 

 

 

Debtors

76,060

16,020

 

 

 

General Expenses

40,000

6,200

 

 

 

Goods Received from H.O.

28,800

 

 

 

Cash in Hand and at Bank

20,600

3,000

 

 

 

Branch Account

72,000

 

 

 

 

 

11,37,160

2,08,540

 

1,13,160

2,08,540

Closing Stock at H.O. was Rs 77,400; and at Delhi Rs 57,400. Depreciation is to be provided @ 10% p.a. on machinery and @ 15% p.a. on furniture. Rent still payable in respect of Dec 2009 for the branch godown is Rs 600.

You are required to prepare the Trading and Profit and Loss Account in Columnar form and the Consolidated Balance Sheet. Also show the Branch Account.

fill in the blanks with suitable words 608235

Fill in the blanks with suitable words

  1. The Indian Partnership Act was enacted in the year _______.
  2. When partnership is at _______, any partner can give a notice in writing to all the other partners of his intention to dissolve the firm.
  3. A firm is compulsorily dissolved if all the partners or all the partners except one are _______.
  4. Realisation Account is a _______ Account.
  5. Loan given to a firm by a partner’s wife is a _______ to third party.
  6. Profit/loss on dissolution is to be distributed among partners in the _______ ratio.
  7. A minor partner is not entitled to bear realization _______.
  8. Unrecorded asset will _______ be transferred to Realisation Account.
  9. ________ liability will never be transferred to Realisation Account.
  10. When Goodwill account does not appear in the balance sheet, the same is ________ to Realisation Account.
  11. Liabilities +Capital – Given Assets = _______.
  12. A partner with debit balance in his capital account and unable to bring in necessary cash, he is said to be _______.
  13. Rule of Garner vs. Murray is applied if there is no specific _______ among partners.
  14. When capitals are fixed, any losses left unadjusted in the balance sheet will have to be adjusted directly on the ________.
  15. When capitals are fixed, the capitals on the date of dissolution constitute ______.
  16. When capitals are fluctuating, capital ratios will be arrived at after making _______.
  17. Solvent partners need not bring ________ to their share of loss on realisation.
  18. Loss on realisation/debit balance in profit and loss A/c are transferred to ________ when capitals are fixed and to _______ when capitals are fluctuating.
  19. The rule Garner vs. Murray may be applied only if there are at least _______ solvent partners in a firm.
  20. When all the partners are insolvent, it will result in insolvency of _______.
  21. Unless the available cash is sufficient to pay creditors in full, we have to prepare _______ Realisation Account.
  22. A minor is admitted to the _______ of the firm only.
  23. All assets and outside liabilities are to be transferred at their _______ values to Realisation Account, when sale of a firm to a company takes place.
  24. Cash and Bank represent assets. So they are ________ in the purchase consideration.
  25. Assets and liabilities not taken over by the purchasing company may be dealt through _______ Account.
  26. On piecemeal distribution, two methods are adopted, 1 _______, 2 ________ to apportion cash realised among the partners.
  27. Interview payments should not result in _______.
  28. In the end, after all realisation have been made, final deficit balances must be in _______ ratio.
  29. On gradual realisation of assets, first priority for distribution of realised cash will be for payments of ________.
  30. Under Maximum Possible Loss Method it is presumed that the unrealised assets are _______.

these controls are relevant to the retailer rsquo s internal control so cook rsquo s 618055

Payroll Data Co. (PDC) processes payroll transactions for a retailer. Cook, CPA, is engaged to express an opinion on a description of PDC’s internal controls implemented as of a specific date. These controls are relevant to the retailer’s internal control, so Cook’s report may be useful in providing the retailer’s independent auditor with information necessary to plan a financial statement audit. Cook’s report should

a. Contain a disclaimer of opinion on the operating effectiveness of PDC’s controls.

b. State whether PDC’s controls were suitably designed to achieve the retailer’s objectives.

c. Identify PDC’s controls relevant to specific financial statement assertions.

d. Disclose Cook’s assessed level of control risk for PDC.

these policies and procedures are relevant to the schools rsquo internal control so 618057

Computer Services Company (CSC) processes payroll transactions for schools. Drake, CPA, is engaged to report on CSC’s policies and procedures implemented as of a specific date. These policies and procedures are relevant to the schools’ internal control, so Drake’s report will be useful in providing the schools’ independent auditors with information necessary to plan their audits. Drake’s report expressing an opinion on CSC’s policies and procedures implemented as of a specific date should contain a(n)

a. Description of the scope and nature of Drake’s procedures.

b. Statement that CSC’s management has disclosed to Drake all design deficiencies of which it is aware.

c. Opinion on the operating effectiveness of CSC’s policies and procedures.

d. Paragraph indicating the basis for Drake’s assessment of control risk.

what is lake rsquo s responsibility concerning making reference to cope as a basis i 618058

Lake, CPA, is auditing the financial statements of Gill Co. Gill uses the EDP Service Center, Inc. to process its payroll transactions. EDP’s financial statements are audited by Cope, CPA, who recently issued a report on EDP’s internal control. Lake is considering Cope’s report on EDP’s internal control in assessing control risk on the Gill engagement. What is Lake’s responsibility concerning making reference to Cope as a basis, in part, for Lake’s own opinion?

a. Lake may refer to Cope only if Lake is satisfied as to Cope’s professional reputation and independence.

b. Lake may refer to Cope only if Lake relies on Cope’s report in restricting the extent of substantive tests.

c. Lake may refer to Cope only if Lake’s report indicates the division of responsibility.

d. Lake may not refer to Cope under the circumstances above.

x ltd issued on 1 january 2008 40 000 5 debentures of rs 100 each redeemable at the 618208

X Ltd. issued on 1 January 2008, 40,000 5% debentures of Rs.100 each redeemable at the option of the company after 3 years at Rs.105 per debenture upon giving 3 months notice to the holders.

The company purchased the following debentures in the open market:

1 April 2009 Rs.8,000 debentures at Rs.8,050 cuminterest

1 November 2009 Rs.14,000 debentures at Rs.13,830 ex-interest

These debentures were retained as investment till 31 December 2010 on which date they were cancelled. Give journal entries to record the above transactions, assuming that the interest is payable half-yearly on 30 June and 31 December every year. Ignore taxation.

the following balances are extracted from the balance sheet of cy ltd as on 1 januar 618212

The following balances are extracted from the balance sheet of CY Ltd. as on 1 January 2010:

6% Debentures

5,00,000

Debentures Redemption Fund

4,25,000

Debentures Redemption Fund Investments Rs.4,50,000 (in Rs.100 value 4% certificates) The annual investment was Rs.57,000. On 31 October 2010, the investments were realized at Rs.95 each and the debentures were redeemed. The bank balance on that date was Rs.91,500. Give ledger accounts relating to the redemption of debentures.

2 plants were seized by the vendor b when the second installment was not paid at the 608184

  1. A purchased 3 plants from B costing Rs 4,00,000 each
  2. The purchaser charged depreciation @ 20% on Diminishing Balance Method.
  3. 2 plants were seized by the vendor B when the second installment was not paid at the end of second year and vendor valued the plants at cost less 30% depreciation annually charged at Diminishing Balance Method.
  4. The vendor spent Rs 1,60,000 on overhauling the plants and sold for Rs 6,40,000.

Calculate:

  1. Value of plant taken by the vendor
  2. Value of plant left with the purchaser
  3. Profit or loss on plant taken back
  4. Profit or loss on plant repossessed when sold by vendor

on its failure to pay the second installment n ltd repossessed two machines and valu 608185

On Jan 1, 2008, N Ltd sold 3 machines for a total cash sale proceed of Rs 9,00,000 on Hire-Purchase System. The terms of agreement provided for 30% as cash down and the balance of the cash price in 3 equal installments together with interest at 10% p.a. compounded annually. The installments were payable as per the following schedule:

1st installment on Feb 31, 2009 2nd on Dec 31, 2010 and 3rd on Dec 31, 2011. M paid the 1st Installment on time but failed to pay thereafter. On its failure to pay the second installment, N Ltd repossessed two machines and valued them at 50% of the cash price. M Ltd charges 10% p.a. depreciation on straight line method. Prepare necessary ledger in the books of M Ltd for three years to 2011.

abc ltd sells goods on hire purchase basis the price being cost plus 60 from the fol 608188

ABC Ltd sells goods on hire purchase basis, the price being cost plus 60%. From the following particulars relating to 2009 ascertain the profit or loss on hire purchase transactions.

Rs

Installments due, customers paying on Jan 1, 2009

6,000

Installment not yet due

75,000

Goods sold during the year on H.P. basis, cost

1,80,000

Cash received from H.P. customers

2,70,000

Installments due on Dec 31, 2009, customer paying

9,000

from the following particulars prepare h p trading account for the year ended dec 31 608189

From the following particulars, prepare H.P. Trading Account for the year ended Dec 31, 2009 in the Books of K V Ltd which sells goods of comparatively small value on H.P. basis adding 331/3 % to the cost of goods to fix hire purchase price:

Rs

Hire Purchase Stock with customers as on Jan 1, 2009

42,100

Installments Due as on Jan 1, 2009

1,200

Goods sold on H.P. basis :

3,16,400

Hire Purchase Stock with customers as on Dec 31, 2009

38,000

Installments Due on Dec 31, 2009

1,700

from the following particulars prepare h p trading account for the year upto mar 31 608190

M.S. Ltd has a hire purchase department. Goods are sold on hire purchase at a profit of 25% on sale price. From the following particulars prepare H.P. Trading Account for the year upto Mar 31, 2009:

Apr 1, 2008 Rs

Mar 3, 2009 Rs

Stock in the shop

30,000

42,000

Installment Due

18,000

?

Stock with customers at H.P. Price

2,40,000

1,86,000

During the year goods sold on H.P. Price Rs 5,28,000, Purchase Rs 4,08,000; Cash received Rs 4,80,000

mr r m is a hire purchase trader and sells goods on h p basis at cost plus 50 from t 608191

Mr R.M. is a hire purchase trader and sells goods on H.P. basis at Cost PLUS 50%. From the following information, prepare H.P. Trading Account to ascertain profit/loss for the year ending Mar 31, 2009.

Aprl, 2008

Rs Mar 31, 2009

Rs

Stock with customers (at H.P. Price)

2,70,00 Stock at shop (excluding returned goods)

6,00,000

Stock at shop (at cost)

5,40,000 Installment due but not received

2,70,000

Installment due (good)

1,50,000 Stock with customers

9,00,000

Goods Repossessed (worth Rs 60,000)

15,000 [B.Com-Delhi-Modified]

Cash received form customers

18,00,000

the following are the particulars from the books of amar amp co who sells goods of s 608193

The following are the particulars from the Books of Amar & Co who sells goods of small value on hire purchase basis at 50% profit on cost. Prepare Hire-Purchase Trading Account for the year ending on Dec 31, 2009.

Jan 1, 2009

Rs

Dec 31, 2009

Rs

Stock with the customers

54,000

?

Stock in the shop

1,08,000

1,23,000

Installment Due

30,000

54,000

Goods repossessed (Installments Due Rs 16,000) valued at Rs 3,000 which had been included in the stock at the end at Rs 3,000. Cash received from customers Rs 3,60,000 Purchases Rs 3,60,000.

a public limited company which sells a branded product on hire purchase terms has th 608194

A public limited company which sells a branded product on hire purchase terms has the following transactions for the year ended Mar 31, 2010:

April 1,2009

March 31,2010

Stock out on hire at lure purchase price

60,000

Stock out on hire at lure purchase price

69,000

Stock on hand (in the shop)

7,500

Stock on hand (in the shop)

10,500

Installments due (customers still paying)

4,500

Cash received in Installments during the year

1,20,000

Prepare necessary Ledger Accounts under stock and Debtors System

from the following information you are required to ascertain the profit made for the 608195

Verma & Co has a hire purchase department which sells goods at Cost PLUS 50%. From the following information, you are required to ascertain the profit made for the year ended Dec 31, 2009 using stock and debtors method:

Rs

Stock on hire with customers at selling price as on Dec 31, 2008

81,000

Stock at shop (at cost) as on Dec 31, 2008

1,62,000

Installment due on Dec 31, 2008

45,000

Cash received from customers

5,40,000

Goods repossessed (Installments due Rs 18,000)

4,500

Installments due from paying customers

81,000

Closing stock at shop (including repossessed goods)

1,84,500

Purchases made in the year

5,40,000

it is informed that cash received from the customers is rs 79 200 and that the rate 608197

Fortune (India) sells goods both on Hire-Purchase System and cash retail system. He has prepared one Trading Account for both the business and has treated total goods supplied to customers on H.P. system as sales which is as under:

Apr 1, 2009

Rs

Mar 31, 2010:

Rs

Stock out on hire at hire purchase price

60,000

Stock out on hire at hire purchase price

69,000

Stock on hand (in the shop)

7,500

Stock on hand (in the shop)

10,500

Installments due (customers still paying)

4,500

Cash received in Installments during the year

1,20,000

Prepare necessary Ledger Accounts under stock and Debtors System

It is informed that cash received from the customers is Rs 79,200 and that the rate of gross profit for H.P. System is 32% on Cost and Cash Sales are made at the H.P. Price as reduced by 1/11.

He now wishes to take credit for such proportion of profit as the installments bear to the total amounts receivable under the H.P. agreements and to adopt stock method of dealing the H.P. transactions. Construct new Trading Accounts for both business separately.

prepare installment debtors account and interest suspense account as they would appe 608200

Mr. Rao sells consumer durables under Installment System under which 20% of the total dues are to be paid on delivery and the balance in eight equal quarterly installments commencing from the last date of the quarter in which goods have been delivered. 15% of the total dues are attributed towards interest for which credit to revenue is taken as:

In the year of Sale : 30% Next Year : 50% The year after Next : 20%

Total dues for goods sold and delivered during the last three years had been

Rs

2007

2,00,000

2008

2,50,000

2009

3,00,000

On Jan 1, 2009, Installment Debtors Account and Interest Suspense Account showed balance of Rs 1,67,500 (Dr.) and Rs 32,250 (Cr) respectively. The deliveries have been even throughout the year and all the installments have been collected on due date.

Prepare Installment Debtors Account and Interest Suspense Account as they would appear in 2009.

state whether the following statements are true t or false f 608201

State whether the following statements are True or False

  1. Branch accounting is concerned with recording of transactions of different branches in respect of their association with the H.O., with other branches as well with outsiders.
  2. Dependent branches are mere selling agencies and are controlled by the H.O.
  3. Goods supplied to branches for sale are always invoiced at market price only.
  4. Dependent branches perform accounting functions for themselves.
  5. A branch account is a combination of real accounts and nominal accounts.
  6. Petty expenses paid by the branch manager out of cash in hand in the branch are not shown in the branch account.
  7. Usually, dependent branches do not sell goods on credit.
  8. Entities have to be made in the branch account in respect of sales returns and discount allowed.
  9. When goods are transferred between H.O. and branches at a price above cost, it is termed as “loaded price.”
  10. Credit purchases would appear in the branch account.
  11. Credit sales would not affect the branch account directly.
  12. Under Debtors System, control over the stock can be exercised effectively.
  13. Under Stock-Debtors System, all items are entered in the branch stock account at loaded price only.
  14. When the stock appears at the loaded price, it is essential to open Stock Reserve Account.
  15. Normal loss affects both gross profit and net profit.
  16. Abnormal loss affects only gross profit.
  17. Independent branches also operate within the framework of broad policies laid down by the H.O.
  18. Goods in transit appear as an asset in the balance sheet.
  19. Cash in transit is a liability.
  20. Goods returned by customers direct to branch are recorded in branch account.

fill in the blanks with suitable word 608202

Fill in the blanks with suitable words

  1. _______ branches are situated in the same country, where H.O. is situated.
  2. _______ branches cannot procure goods from local sources.
  3. To meet incidental expenses, branch managers are supplied with petty cash on _________ system.
  4. Dependent branches keep only _______ records.
  5. _______ branches do not perform accounting functions for themselves.
  6. Generally, a branch account is a combination of real and ________ accounts.
  7. Sales returns, bad debts, discounts allowed do not appear in the _________ under Debtors system.
  8. To ascertain missing figure in respect of debtors, _________ A/c is prepared.
  9. A profit margin of 20% on sale price is equal to ________% profit on cost.
  10. Under Debtors system, H.O. can calculate only ________ profit.
  11. ________ and ________ purchases would not appear in the branch account.
  12. The important limitation of Debtors system is the absence of control over ________.
  13. Normal and abnormal losses are not adjusted with stock in the _______ Account under Debtors system.
  14. Branch Stock Account is a ______ account in nature, under Stock Debtors System.
  15. Branch Stock Account is always prepared at __________ price under Stock-Debtors System.
  16. Invoice Price = Cost + ________.
  17. Branch profit/loss is transferred to __________ Account.
  18. Normal loss is a ________ charge, affects only the gross profit.
  19. The stock reserve will be equal to the difference between the wholesale price and _________.
  20. Goods in transit and cash in transit are to be treated as _________ and hence they are shown in the balance sheet.

raj amp co had a branch at delhi goods are invoiced to the branch at cost plus 25 br 608204

Raj & Co had a branch at Delhi. Goods are invoiced to the branch at cost plus 25%. Branch is instructed to deposit cash every day in the H.O. account with the bank. All expenses are paid by cheques by the H.O. except petty cash expenses which are paid by the branch manager. From the following information prepare branch account in the books of H.O.:

Rs

Stock on Jan 1, 2009

7,500

Stock on Dec 31, 2009

9,000

Sundry Debtors on Jan 1, 2009

4,200

Sundry Debtors on Dec 31, 2009

5,400

Cash Sales for the year 2009

32,400

Credit Sales for the year 2009

21,000

Cash remitted to the H.O.

45,000

Furniture purchased by the Branch Manager

3,600

Goods invoiced from the H.O.

54,600

Expenses paid by the H.O.

4,920

Expenses paid by the Branch

360

from the following information prepare the branch account in the h o books carry out 608206

Renu Ltd. Trichy has a branch at Madurai. Goods are invoiced to the branch at selling price being cost plus 25%. The branch keeps its own sales ledger and deposits all cash received daily to the credit of the H.O. account at Madurai. All expenses are paid by cheque from Trichy.

From the following information, prepare the branch account in the H.O. books. Carry out necessary adjustments to ascertain the profit made by the branch during the year:

Rs

Rs

Opening Stock at Branch

37,500

Cash Sales for the Year

1,62,000

Closing Stock at Branch at Cost

45,000

Sundry Expenses

2,500

Sundry Debtors (opening)

21,000

Credit Sales

1,05,000

Sundry Debtors at the End

27,000

Goods returned to H.O.

2,000

Goods Invoiced from H.O.

2,75,000

Wages Paid

10,200

Rent, Rates and Taxes

12,000

Wages still Outstanding at the End

1,000

Pre-paid Sundry Expenses at the End

100

a trader has a branch at surat to which goods are invoiced at cost plus 20 prepare a 608207

A trader has a branch at Surat to which goods are invoiced at cost plus 20%. Prepare a branch account in H.O. books from the following particulars:

Rs

Rs

Opening Stock at Branch

1,20,000

Branch Expenses paid by H.O.

15,000

Cash Sales at Branch

87,500

Branch Expenses Branch

30,000

Credit Sales

2,05,000

Expenses Unpaid

7,000

Collection from Debtors

1,89,500

Closing Stock at Branch

90,000

Cash received from H.O.

1,50,000

Closing Balance of Debtors

45,800

Goods in Transit from H.O.

18,000

the stock of the goods held by the branch on dec 31 2009 amounted to rs 26 700 at in 608208

Mr. V.R. with H.O. at Delhi who carried on a retail trade opened a branch at Nagpur on Oct 1, 2009 where all sales were on credit basis. All cash collected was immediately remitted to H.O. All goods required by the branch were supplied from H.O. and were invoiced to the branch at 10% above cost. The following were the transactions:

Transaction

Oct Rs

Nov Rs

Dec Rs

Goods sent to Branch (Purchase Price)

20,000

25,000

30,000

Sales as shown by the Branch Monthly Report

19,000

21,000

27,500

Closing Debtors

9,000

4,500

14,500

Returns to H.O. (Invoice Price to Branch)

600

300

1,200

The stock of the goods held by the branch on Dec 31, 2009 amounted to Rs 26,700 at invoice price to branch. Record these transactions in the H.O. books. Show the branch gross profit for the three months ended on Dec 31, 2009.

closing stock could not be ascertained but it is known that the branch usually sells 608209

Prepare a branch account, from the following data:

Rs

Opening Stock at the Branch

75,000

Goods sent to Branch

2,25,000

Expenses:

Salaries

25,000

Rent

8,000

Other Expenses

1,880

Sales (cash)

3,00,000

Closing stock could not be ascertained but it is known that the branch usually sells goods at cost plus 20%. The branch manager is entitled to commission of 5% of profit of branch after charging such commission.

all cash received by the branch is remitted to shimla and all branch expenses are pa 608210

Shimla H.O. supplies goods to its branch at Chennai at invoice price which is cost plus 50%. All cash received by the branch is remitted to Shimla and all branch expenses are paid by H.O. From the following particulars related to Chennai branch for the year 2009, prepare (i) Branch Account, (ii) Branch Stock Account, (iii) Branch Debtors Account, (iv) Branch Adjustment Account and (v) Branch Expenses Account to ascertain Gross Profit and Net Profit made by the Branch:

Rs

Rs

Stock with Branch on Jan 1, 2009

30,000

Allowance to Customers off Selling Price(already adjusted on invoicing)

1,000

Branch Debtors on Jan 1, 2009

6,000

Petty Cash Balance on Jan 1, 2009

50

Goods received from H.O.

(at Invoice Price)

93,000

Expenses (Cash paid by H.O.)

Rent

1,200

Goods returned to N.O.

1,500

Salaries

12,000

Credit Sales Less Returns

42,000

Petty Cash

500

Cash received from Debtors

45,000

Stock with Branch on Dec31, 2009 at Invoice Price

27,000

Discount allowed to Debtors

1,200

Cash Sales

52,000

Petty Cash balance on Dec 31, 2009

5O

Note: Allowance to customers may be treated as sales promotional expense.

you are required to record the above instructions in the books of the h o on the bas 608212

Mr. X of Surat has a branch at Jaipur. Goods are sent at invoice price which is fixed at a profit of 20% on sale under the strict instructions of selling goods only at invoice price. Goods are fully insured against fire and theft. Following are the transactions in respect of Jaipur Branch:

Rs

Rs

Opening Balance of Stock

20,000

Loss by Fire (Cost Price)

15,000

Opening Balance of Debtors

6,000

Stock at End (Invoice Price)

7,000

Closing Balance of Debtors

7,000

Cash received from Debtors

89,000

Goods received from H.O.

2,50,000

Goods returned to H.O.

10,000

(at Invoice Price)

Direct Expenses paid by H.O.

6,500

Indirect Expenses paid by H.O.

14,000

Cash sales: 62.5% of Total Sales

You are required to record the above instructions in the books of the H.O. on the basis of Stock and Debtors System and calculate the net profit of the branch.

from the following particulars for the months of dec 2009 find out the cost of inven 608153

From the following particulars for the months of Dec 2009, find out the cost of inventory on Dec 31, 2009 under Perpetual Inventory System using FIFO Method of pricing issue of materials:

Date

Particulars

Quantity (Kg)

Rate per Kg (Rs)

Dec 1

Opening Inventory

600

100

Dec 3

Purchase of material

3,000

140

Dec-10

Issue of material

2,400

Dec-12

Purchase of material

1,500

160

Dec-20

Issue of material

300

Dec-22

Purchase of material

450

180

Dec-27

Issue of material

540

a trader has the following transactions in a certain product in the month of may 200 608154

A trader has the following transactions in a certain product in the month of May 2009. Calculate the Cost of Goods Sold and the Closing Inventory using FIFO, LIFO and WAP methods.

Date

Transaction

Units

Rate per Unit (Rs)

May I

Opening Stock

100

2

May 4

Purchases

400

3

May 7

Sells

450

16

May-15

Purchases

500

4-12

May-25

Sells

300

5

a trader has the following transactions in a certain product for three months from f 608155

A trader has the following transactions in a certain product for three months from Feb 2009:

Date

Transaction

Feb 3

Purchases

300 items at Rs 20 each

Feb 20

Purchases

100 items at Rs 24 each

Mar 1

Sells

100 items at Rs 30 each

Mar 20

Purchases

150 items at Rs 30 each

Mar 30

Sells

200 items at Rs 40 each

Apr 2

Purchases

150 items at Rs 40 each

Apr 15

Sells

175 items at Rs 50 each

Required

  1. Compute the Gross Profit earned during the period,
  2. Compute the value of the Closing Stock at Apr 30, 2009 using each of the following alternative bases of 2009 valuation: (a) FIFO, (b) LIFO, (c) WAP methods.

from the following data compute the cost of goods sold and closing inventory under f 608157

From the following data compute the Cost of Goods Sold and Closing Inventory under FIFO, LIFO and WAC methods of inventory valuation:

Nov 1: Stock in hand 250 units @ Rs9 each

Purchases

Nov 2

(250 units @ Rs 11 each)

Nov 9

(500 units @ Rs 12 each)

Nov 17

(300 units @ Rs 10 each)

Nov 22

(250 units @ Rs 12 each)

Nov 29

(200 units @ Rs 13 each)

Issues

Nov 4

(200 units)

Nov 7

(250 units)

Nov 15

(450 units)

Nov 20

(250 units)

Nov 30

(300 units)

find out the closing stock and cost of materials consumed under each of the above tw 608158

Green Ltd was following LIFO Method of valuation of stock. Due to promulgation of revised accounting standard they want to switch over to FIFO Method. From the following

  1. Draw up stock ledgers under FIFO and LIFO Methods of valuation of stocks,
  2. Find out the Closing Stock and cost of materials consumed under each of the above two methods.

Opening Stock 2,500 metric tonnes @ Rs 22 per MT = Rs 55,000

Purchases

1.9.2009

(500 MT @ Rs 30 per MT)

6.9.2009

(1,000 MT @ Rs 35 per MT)

10.9.2009

(750 MT @ Rs 38 per MT)

16.9.2009

(750 MT @ Rs 35 per MT)

21.9.2009

(1,000 MT @ Rs 32 per MT)

27.9.2009

(1,000 MT @ Rs 35 per MT)

30.9.2009

(750 MT @ Rs 30 per MT)

Issues

1.9 to 6.9.2009

(1,000 MT)

7.9 to 10.9.2009

(1,500 MT)

11.9 to 21.9.2009

(2,000 MT)

22.9 to 26.9.2009

(1,500 MT)

27.9 to 30.9.2009

(1,500 MT)

find out from the following data the cost of goods sold closing inventory and profit 608160

Find out from the following data, the Cost of Goods Sold, Closing Inventory and Profit under FIFO, LIFO methods of inventory valuation:

2009

June 1

Inventory 200 units at Rs 3 each

June 28

Purchases 240 units at Rs 4 each

July 31

Purchases 220 units at Rs 5 each

Aug 17

Purchases 280 units at Rs 6 each

Sales for the period: 800 units at Rs 8 each

while preparing the final accounts on mar 31 2009 bisma had 1 300 units of raw mater 608161

Bisma purchased raw materials during the month of Mar 2009 as stated below:

Mar 3

800 units @ Rs 60 per unit

Mar 7

1,200 units @ Rs 55 per unit

Mar 10

2,500 units @ Rs 57 per unit

Mar 17

3,000 units @ Rs 54 per unit

Mar 26

1,500 units @ Rs 58 per unit

Mar 30

1,000 units @ Rs 63 per unit

While preparing the final accounts on Mar 31, 2009, Bisma had 1,300 units of raw materials in his godown. You are requested to calculate the value of Closing Stock of raw materials according to FIFO and WAP methods.

calculate the value of closing inventory and cost of sale according to fifo lifo and 608163

Calculate the value of Closing Inventory and cost of sale according to FIFO, LIFO and WAP methods on Dec 31, 2009.

Dec 1

(Stock in hand)

250 units

@ Rs 16 per unit

Dec 5

Purchases

3,750 units

@ Rs 20 per unit

Dec-10

Purchases

4,250 units

@ Rs 24 per unit

Dec-15

Purchases

4,500 units

@ Rs 30 per unit

Dec-25

Purchases

6,000 units

@ Rs 22 per unit

Stock at Dec 31, 2009 – 1,750 units. Assuming that the sale price was uniform at Rs 30 per unit throughout the month, compute the gross profit.

from the records of an oil distributing company the following summarised information 608164

From the records of an oil distributing company, the following summarised information is available for the month of Mar 2010.

Rs

Sales

4,72,500

General administrative expenses

12,500

Opening Stock: 5,000 ltrs @ Rs 30 per litre = 1,50,000

5.3.2010 – Purchases: 10,000 ltrs @ Rs 28.50 per litre

17.3.2010 – Purchases: 5,000 ltrs @ Rs 30.30 per litre

Closing Stock: 6,500 ltrs

Compute

  1. Value of Inventory as on Mar 31, 2010
  2. Cost of Goods Sold during Mar 2010
  3. Profit or loss for the month of Mar 2010

using FIFO method of inventory valuation.

at the beginning of the year 2009 vel ltd had 1 500 items in stock which had cost rs 608165

At the beginning of the year 2009, Vel Ltd had 1,500 items in stock which had cost Rs 1,680. At the end of the year, 3,800 items were held.

Purchases during the year:

Date

Quantity

Total Cost

Feb 15

(2,000)

(Rs 2,280)

May 15

(2,400)

(Rs 2,784)

Oct 15

(2,700)

(Rs 3,267)

Dec 15

(2,500)

(Rs 3,075)

The Periodic Inventory Method is used. Compute the cost of the Closing Stock under: (a) FIFO; (b) LIFO and (c) WAP methods.

from the following data calculate the value of closing inventory according to fifo a 608166

From the following data, calculate the value of Closing Inventory according to FIFO and LIFO on Mar 31, 2010 using (i) Periodic Inventory System and (ii) Perpetual Inventory System.

Mar 1: Stock in hand 400 units @ Rs 7.50 each

Purchases

Mar 5

600 units @ Rs 8 each

Mar 15

500 units @ Rs 9 each

Mar 25

400 units @ Rs 8.50 each

Mar 30

300 units @ Rs 9.50 each

Issues

Mar 3

300 units

Mar 10

500 units

Mar 17

400 units

Mar 26

500 units

Mar 31

200 units

while preparing the final accounts on dec 2009 the company had 1 300 kg of raw mater 608167

A company, started on Jan 1, 2009 purchased raw material during 2009 as stated below:

Jan 2

( 800 kg @ Rs 62 per kg)

Feb 26

(1,200 kg @ Rs 57 per kg)

Apr 13

(2,500 kg @ Rs 59 per kg)

July 10

(3,000 kg @ Rs 56 per kg)

Sep 18

(1,500 kg @ Rs 60 per kg)

Nov 29

(1,000 kg @ Rs 65 per kg)

While preparing the final accounts on Dec 2009, the company had 1,300 kg of raw materials in its go down.

Required

Calculate the value of Closing Stock of raw materials according to FIFO, LIFO and WAP basis.

calculate the cost of goods sold value of closing stock and profit under lifo method 608168

Calculate the Cost of Goods Sold, value of Closing Stock and Profit under LIFO method of stock valuation from the following information:

Jan 1

(Stock)

(200 units @ Rs 6 each)

Jan 16

(Bought)

(240 units @ Rs 8 each)

Feb 3

(Bought)

(220 units @ Rs 10 each)

Feb 21

(Bought)

(280 units @ Rs 12 each)

During Mar, 800 units were sold at Rs 16 each

find out the value of stock as on 31 3 2009 if the company follows 608169

The following are the details of “X” Ltd

1.1.2009

Opening stock: “nil”

1.1.2009

Purchases

200 units @ Rs 15 per unit

15.1.2009

Issues

100 units

1.2.2009

Issues

400 units @ Rs 20 per unit

15.2.2009

Issues

200 units

20.2.2009

Issues

200 units

1.3.2009

Purchases

300 units @ Rs 25 per unit

15.3.2009

Issues

200 units

Required

Find out the value of stock as on 31.3.2009 if the company follows:

FIFO, LIFO and WAP Basis

state whether the following statements are true or false 608171

State whether the following statements are True or False

  1. Under Hire-Purchase System the title or ownership of goods is transferred immediately on signing the Hire-Purchase Agreement.
  2. The hirer has a right to terminate the agreement at any time before the property so passes.
  3. The property in goods is to pass to hirer on the payment of last installment under Hire-Purchase System.
  4. Hire Purchase Price = Cost Price + Profit Margin – Interest.
  5. The amount of cash price and interest is not the same even in between equal installments.
  6. Under Hire-Purchase System, interest is charged on the unpaid cash price.
  7. Asset is always recorded by the hire purchaser as Cash Price plus Interest.
  8. In the last year, interest represents the difference between the last installment to be paid and cash price unpaid.
  9. Interest is calculated only on outstanding installments.
  10. Interest is allowed on the down payment made.
  11. Depreciation is not written off in Hire-Purchase System.
  12. Hire-Purchase System of sale is similar to a method of financing the purchase of fixed assets.
  13. Normally, the asset on Hire-Purchase Account will not be shown in the Balance Sheet.
  14. Any balance left in Goods Repossessed Account is transferred and shown in the Balance Sheet.
  15. Under Installment System, the seller cannot repossess the goods, even if there is default in installment.

calculate the cash price of the machine also prepare for the three accounting years 608172

On Jan 1, 2009 Mr. Patel purchased from Vivek a machine on hire-purchase basis. The hire-purchase price was Rs 4,00,000 payable as to Rs 1,00,000 as down payment and three annual installments of Rs 1,00,000 each; the first annual installment being payable on Dec 31, 2009. Vivek charged interest @ 5% p.a.Patel charged depreciation on the machine @ 15% p.a. on diminishing balances of the machine. He closes his books of account every year on 31 Mar.Calculate the cash price of the machine. Also prepare for the three accounting years in Patel”s ledger the following accounts.(a) The account of Vivek – the hire vendor, (b) Machinery Account, (c) Interest Account and (d) Depreciation Account.

the machines were valued on the basis of 30 depreciation annually on w d v basis b l 608178

A Ltd purchased from B Ltd 3 machines costing Rs 50,000 each on the Hire-Purchase System on Jan 1, 2008. Payment was to be as Rs 30,00 down and remaining in 3 equal installments payable on Dec 31, 2008; Dec 31, 2009 and Dec 31, 2010 together with interest @ 9%. A Ltd writes off depreciation @ 20% on the reducing balance. X Ltd paid the installment due at the end of first year, i.e. on Dec 31, 2008 but could not pay the next, i.e. on Dec 31, 2009. B Ltd agreed to leave one machine with A Ltd on Jan 1,2010 adjusting the value of the other two machines against the amount due on Jan 1, 2010. The machines were valued on the basis of 30% depreciation annually on W.D.V. basis. B Ltd spent s 5,000 on the repairs of two repossessed machines and sold one machine for Rs 40,000 on July 1, 2010.Show: (i) Machine Account; (ii) B Ltd Account in the books of A Ltd and (iii) Machine Repossessed Account in the books of B Ltd.

a use excel to help perform the job task and to provide information to management 608181

Assignment Write a six to eight (6-8) page Word document that explains the primary ways accountants (a) Use Excel to help perform the job task and to provide information to management used in the decision-making process. (b) Can help management understand the meaning of the accounting transactions. (c) Use Sage 50 to analyze business events. – Use technology and information resources to research issues in microcomputer applications for accountants. – Write clearly and concisely about microcomputer applications for accountants using proper writing mechanics. Assignment must follow these formatting requirements: 1. Be typed, double spaced, using Times New Roman font (size 12), with one-inch margins on all sides; citations and references must follow APA or school-specific format.

Document Preview:

Assignment Write a six to eight (6-8) page Word document that explains the primary ways accountants (a) Use Excel to help perform the job task and to provide information to management used in the decision-making process. (b) Can help management understand the meaning of the accounting transactions. (c) Use Sage 50 to analyze business events. Use technology and information resources to research issues in microcomputer applications for accountants. Write clearly and concisely about microcomputer applications for accountants using proper writing mechanics. Assignment must follow these formatting requirements: 1. Be typed, double spaced, using Times New Roman font (size 12), with one-inch margins on all sides; citations and references must follow APA or school-specific format.

Attachments:

nothing more payable after third installment all the installments are duly paid by r 608183

Rado Cabs purchased an omni van on Jan 1, 2008 from Narain & Co, Delhi on hire purchase basis. It was agreed upon to make payment as under:

Rs

Jan 1, 2008

on signing the agreement –

62,100

Dec 31, 2008

at the end of first year –

1,19,790

Dec 31, 2009

at the end of second year –

1,19,790

Dec 31, 2010

at the end of third year –

1,19,790

Nothing more payable after third installment. All the installments are duly paid by Rado Cabs. Interest was reckoned @ 10% p.a. depreciation was charged @ 20% p.a. on diminishing balance. Rado Cabs closes its books on 31 Dec every year. Prepare the following accounts in the books of Rado Cabs upto Dec 31, 2010. (1) Narain & Co. Account (2) Omni Van Account and (3) Interest Account

at end of the year a company has a 1 200 debit balance in manufacturing overhead the 607916

At end of the year, a company has a $1,200 debit balance in Manufacturing Overhead. The company:

(a)makes an adjusting entry by debiting Manufacturing Overhead Applied for $1,200 and crediting Manufacturing Overhead for $1,200.

(b)makes an adjusting entry by debiting Manufacturing Overhead Expense for $1,200 and crediting Manufacturing Overhead for $1,200.

(c)makes an adjusting entry by debiting Cost of Goods Sold for $1,200 and crediting Manufacturing Overhead for $1,200.

(d)makes no adjusting entry because differences between actual overhead and the amount applied are a normal part of job order costing and will average out over the next year.

would you need further information for your decision making what why 608141

Continue with the case of Hero Honda Motors Ltd. You had prepared the CFS of the Company in Also you had carried out financial analysis of the company in and through the tools and techniques studied therein. Now extend your analysis to cover the cash flow statement to further support your analysis of the company’s financial position and performance. Towards this purpose, attempt the following requirements.

Requirements

  1. Analyse the cash flows from:
    1. Operating activities
    2. Investing activities, and
    3. Financing activities
  2. What are the financial strengths of the company emerging from the analysis of cash flow from operating activities? Discuss.
  3. Comment upon the quality of cash position of the company.
  4. Assess the ability of the company to generate positive cash flows from operations in future.
  5. What would have been the summary cash flow position from different activities if the first alternative on the treatment of dividend and interest paid were applied to this case? Which treatment will you prefer and why?
  6. Based on the cash flow analysis, would you:
    • Lend to the company?
    • Invest in the company?
    • Like to join the company as an employee?
    • Supply materials to the company?

Would you need further information for your decision-making? What? Why?

  1. Draft a crisp 3-page report.

cash flow statements of the company for the three years ended december 1999 608142

cash flow statements of the company for the three years ended December 1999. Given hereunder now are the consolidated cash flow statements of the company, taken from its Web site, for the three years ended 28th December, 2002. Extend your analysis to have a co-related analysis of the next three years. For this purpose attempt the requirements given at the end of the cash flow statements.

 Consolidated Statements of Cash Flows

Three Years Ended December 28, 2002

 

 

(In millions)

 

2002

2001

2000

Cash and cash equivalents, beginning of the year

S 7,970

S 2,976

S 3.695

Cash flows provided by (used for) operating activities:

 

 

 

Net income

3.117

1,291

10,535

Adjustments to reconcile net income to net cash provided by

 

 

 

Operating activities:

 

 

 

Depreciation

4.676

4.131

3.249

Amortization of goodwill

1.710

1.310

Amortization and impairment of intangibles and other acquisition-related costs

668

717

352

Purchased in-process research and development

20

198

109

(Gains) losses on equity investments, net

372

466

(3.759)

(Gain) loss on investment in Camera

196

(117)

Net loss on retirements and impairments of property, plant and equipment

301

119

139

Deferred taxes

110

(519)

(130)

Tax benefits from employee stock plans

270

435

887

Changes in assets and liabilities:

 

 

 

Trading assets

(444)

898

38

Accounts receivable

30

1.561

(384)

Inventories

(26)

24

(731)

Accounts payable

(226)

(673)

978

Accrued compensation and benefits

107

(524)

231

Income taxes payable

175

(270)

(362)

Other assets and liabilities

(21)

(971)

482

Total adjustments

6.012

7,498

2.292

Net cash provided by operating activities

9,129

8,789

12,827

Cash flows provided by (used for) investing activities:

Additions to property, plant and equipment

(4,703)

(7,309)

(6,674)

Acquisitions, net of cash acquired

(57)

(883)

(2,317)

Purchases of available-for-sale investments

(6,309)

(7,141)

(17,188)

Maturities and sales of available-for-sale Investments

5,634

15,398

17,124

Other investing activities

(330)

(395)

(980)

Net cash used for investing activities

(5,766)

(330)

(10,035)

Cash flows provided by (used for) financing activities:

 

 

 

Increase (decrease) in short-term debt, net

(101)

23

138

Additions to long-term debt

55

306

77

Repayment and retirement of long-term debt

(18)

(10)

(46)

Proceeds from sales of shares through employee stock plans and others

681

762

797

Repurchase and retirement of common stock

(4,014)

(4,008)

(4,007)

Payment of dividends to stockholders

(533)

(538)

(470)

Net cash used for financing activities

(3,930)

(3,465)

(3,511)

Net Increase (decrease) In cash and cash equivalents

(566)

4,994

(719)

Cash and cash equivalents, end of year

$ 7,404

S 7,970

S 2,976

Supplemental disclosures of cash flow Information:

 

 

 

Cash paid during the year for

 

 

 

Interest

$69

$ 53

$ 43

Income taxes

$ 475

$ 1,208

$ 4,209

  Requirements

  1. Analyse the cash flows from:
    • Operating activities
    • Investing activities, and
    • Financing activities
  2. There is extreme volatility in the reported net income but the net cash provided by operating activities is very steady in comparison. Why?
  3. Higher depreciation, year after year since 1997 means an expanding business which means higher net income. But this is not the case with Intel during 2002 and 2001. Why? Offer possible explanations.
  4. In 2001 and 2002 net cash provided by operating activities is very high despite low net income. But that is not the case with the year 2000. Why?
  5. There is hardly any cash outflow towards investing activities during 2001. Does it mean that the company is not pursuing growth path?
  6. Despite lower net income dividend outgo is rising. Should it? How is it possible? Stretch your imagination.
  7. Refer to the earlier analysis of the CFSs of the company up to the year 1999 carried out in this chapter. Our prediction there on the ability of the company to generate positive cash flows from operations in future does not seem to have materialized on an analysis of 2000, 2001 and 2002 CFSs of the company in the sense that it is lacking expected growth. Why?
  8. You may like to check/not find answers to some questions. Go to the Web site of the company and study the management discussion and analysis report for the purpose.
  9. What do you learn from this case?
  10. Draft a crisp 3-4-page report.

the boeing company usa is the world rsquo s leading aerospace company and the larges 608144

The Boeing Company, USA is the world’s leading aerospace company and the largest manufacturer of commercial jetliners and military aircraft, combined with capabilities in rotorcraft, electronic and defence systems, missiles, satellites, launch vehicles and advanced information and communication systems.

Given hereunder are:

  • Select Financial Information, and
  • Abridged Cash Flow Statements

of the company for the three years ended December 31, 2005 as extracted from its 2005 and 2004 annual reports.

 THE BOEING COMPANY, USA

Select Financial Information

(In S millions)

As at/For the year ended 31st December.

 

2005

2004

2003

Total sales

54,845

52,457

50.256

Net earnings

2.572

1.872

718

Property. plant and equipment

8.420

8.443

8.597

Shareholders” funds

11,059

11.286

8.139

THE BOEING COMPANY, USA

ABRIDGED STATEMENTS OF CASH FLOWS

In $ millions

Year ended 31st December

 

2005

2004

2003

Cash flow operating activey

 

 

 

Net earnings

2,572

1,872

718

Adjustments for:

 

 

 

  1. Non•cash Items:

 

 

 

¦ Goodwill impairment

3

913

¦ Depreciation

1,412

1,412

1.306

¦ Amortisation of other acquired intangibles

91

97

94

¦ Amortisation of miscellaneous expenditure

23

15

18

¦ Employee benefits and pension provisions

1,877

911

309

¦ Net loss (gain) on disposal of investments and fixed assets. etc.

(508)

(89)

2

¦ Others

415

698

495

  1. Changes In current assets/liabilities:

 

 

 

¦ Accounts receivable

(592)

(241)

357

¦ Inventories

(1,965)

535

191

¦ Creditors and other payables

1.775

2,407

188

¦ Customer advances

3.562

735

643

¦ Prepaid expenses

(1.862)

(4,355)

(1,728)

¦ Others

200

(496)

(730)

Net cash provided (used) by operating activities

7.000

3,504

2,776

 

Cash Flows – investing Activities:

Property, plant and equipment, additions

(1,4%)

(978)

(741)

Proceeds from disposition of fixed assets

1.709

194

186

Acquisition of businesses

(172)

(34)

Proceeds from disposition of discontinued operations

2

2,191

514

Proceeds from disposition of long term investments

(141)

(2,819)

101

Net cash provided (used) by Investing activities

(98)

(1,446)

60

Cash Flows – Financing Activities:

 

 

 

New borrowings

 

2,042

Debt repayments

(1,378)

(2,208)

(2,024)

Employee stock options exercised

418

121

18

Own equity shares repurchased

(2.877)

(752)

 

Dividends paid

(820)

(648)

(572)

Net cash provided (used) by financing activities

(4,657)

(3,487)

(536)

Effect of exchange rate changes on cash and cash equivalents

(37)

Net Increase (decrease) In cash and cash equivalents

2.208

(1,429)

2,300

Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of Year

3.204

4,633

2,333

Cash and cash equivalents at end of year

5,412

3,204

4,633

Analysis Required

You are required to carry out cash flow analysis for The Boeing Company. Towards this purpose attempt the following requirements:

Req. No.

Requirement

Your Choice/Answer

 

 

Boeing has been sourcing its cash primarily from…

Op/Inv/Fin activities

 

¦

This typically indicates that cash position of Boeing is…

Strong:Weak

  1.  

 

On account of non-cash adjustments Boeing had net cash inflows (In)./outflows(Out) of:

 

 

¦

2005 (In 5 millions)

In-“0ut

 

¦

2004 (In $ millions)

In”Out

 

¦

2003 (In 5 millions)

In/Out

 

¦

This typically indicates that Boeing”s earnings are…

Highly liquid/Not highly liquid

  1.  

 

Employee benefits and pension provisions have led to high liquidity of Boeing”s earnings….

Yes/No

  1.  

 

Net loss (gain) on disposal of investments. etc. has led to liquidity of Boeing”s earnings during 2005 and 2004….

Yes/No

 

 

 

 

In general Boeing has been able to negotiate with its customers and suppliers…

In its favourThot in its favour

  1.  

 

In relative terms management of prepaid expenses by Boeing during 2005 has been…

Better/Worse

  1.  

 

Which year Boeing had net cash inflows from changes in current assets/liabilities”)

200512004,2003

 

 

Does it mean that during that year Boeing”s management 01 working capital was…

Effective/Not effective

  1.  

 

Assuming that discontinued operations represented less

profitable business lines. the impact 01 disposition thereof by

Boeing during 2004 and 2003, on its cash flows, is expected to be….

Positive/Negative

  1.  

 

Which year Boeing had net Cash inflows from property. plant and equipment…

200520042003

 

¦

Does it mean that during that year Boeing had net fixed assets…

Purchased/Sold

 

¦

Boeing”s policy of acquiring running businesses is…

Aggressive/Not aggressive

 

¦

Based on the above factors it appears that Boeing”s sales growth is going to be…

Normal:Phenomenal

  1.  

 

Boeing sold more investments, than it purchased, during…

200512004/2003

  1.  

 

The impact on future cash flows of debt repayments by Boeing will be…

Positive/Negative

  1.  

 

Repurchase of own equity by Boeing indicates that it has surplus funds which are generating returns lower than its operating returns.

Agreed/Disagreed

  1.  

 

The combined effect of repurchase of own equity by Boeing together with stock options exercised by the employees is expected to enable the company pay still higher dividends in future…

Right/Wrong

  1.  

 

Boeing”s financing activities reflect a cash position that can be termed as…

Favourable/Unfavourable

  1.  

 

Boeing”s cash and cash equivalents at the end of each year seem to contain a very high amount of highly liquid investments.

Yes/No

  1.  

 

Overall Boeing”s cash flows are highly favourable and its ability to generate positive cash flows from operations and ability to meet its obligations in future is huge…

R:ght Wrong

how did torrent strategise its fight against the rough weather it faced in the past 608146

Continue with the case of Torrent Cables Ltd. Analyse the past performance, strategies and future outlook of the company. Attempt the following requirements towards this purpose.

Requirements

  1. Figure out the strengths of Torrent.
  2. How did Torrent strategise its fight against the rough weather it faced in the past? What lessons do you learn from that strategy?
  3. How are the fortunes of the company linked to the fortunes of the power sector? Positive outlook for both? Examine.
  4. Do you agree with the assessment of the future of the company charted in the report? Why or why not? If not, what should be the future valuation of the company in your opinion? Why?

does it emerge a clear winner or not explain how 608149

Reliance Industries Ltd. is the biggest private sector company in India. The following fact sheet about the company and its peer group, as extracted from Capitaline Plus database is reproduced in the next page.

You are required to carry out Inter-company analysis for Reliance Industries Ltd. Towards this purpose attempt the following.

  1. Prepare the ranking statements of these companies on the following parameters:
    1. Equity capital
    2. Gross Block
    3. Sales
    4. NP
    5. NP/Sales
    6. Dividend %
    7. Book value
    8. CPS
    9. EPS
    10. 52 W-H
    11. 52 W-L
    12. Market Capitalization
    13. P/C
    14. P/E
    15. P/BV
  2. Analyse how strong the financials of Reliance are among its peer group?
  3. Does it emerge a clear winner or not? Explain how?

calculate by fifo method of inventory valuation the cost of goods sold and value of 608152

Calculate by FIFO Method of inventory valuation, the Cost of Goods Sold and value of Ending Inventory from the following data:

Date

Transaction

Units

Price per Unit Rs.

June 1

Opening Stock

3,000

20

June-15

Purchases

1,500

25

July-10

Purchases

1,200

22

July-15

Sold

3,600

Aug 1

Sold

1,500

Aug-10

Purchases

1,200

25

Aug-31

Sold

1,500

prepare the current assets section of the balance sheet at december 31 607888

The following data were taken from the records of Moxie Company for the year ended December 31, 2014.

Raw Materials Inventory 1/1/14

$ 47,000

Raw Materials Inventory 12/31/14

44,200

Finished Goods Inventory 1/1/14

85,000

Finished Goods Inventory 12/31/14

57,800

Work in Process Inventory 1/1/14

9,500

Work in Process Inventory 12/31/14

8,000

Direct Labor

145,100

Indirect Labor

18,100

Accounts Receivable

27,000

Factory Insurance

$ 7,400

Factory Machinery Depreciation

7,700

Factory Utilities

12,900

Office Utilities Expense

8,600

Sales Revenue

465,000

Sales Discounts

2,500

Plant Manager”s Salary

60,000

Factory Property Taxes

6,100

Factory Repairs

800

Raw Materials Purchases

62,500

Cash

18,000

Instructions

(a)Prepare a cost of goods manufactured schedule. (Assume all raw materials used were direct materials.)

(b)Prepare an income statement through gross profit.

(c)Prepare the current assets section of the balance sheet at December 31.